04/14/1993 Agreement
THE
AMERICAN
INSTITUTE
o F
ARCHITECTS
.:':1\"~.^.'
~" I I, I
..' I
. '
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
~ONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
00500 - AGREE~ENT
FORM
AlA Document Al 0 I
Standard Form of Agreement Between
Owner and Contractor
u'here the basis of payment is a
STIPULATED SUiW
1987 EDITION
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION WITH
AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED lX'ITH RESPECT TO ITS COMPLETION OR MODIFICATION.
The 1987 Edition of AlA Document A2GI, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction is -adopted
in this document by reference. Do not use u'lth other general conditions unless tbis ducument is modified
This document has been approved and endorsed by The Associated General Contractors of America.
AGREEMENT 1"Y'\'"?q 0 0 J
made as of the I'IM
Nineteen Hundred and Ninety Three.
day of
~
in the year of
BETWEEN the Owner:
Monroe County, Flori da
500 Whitehead Street
Key West, Florida 33040
(Same and address)
and the Contractor:
ROMA CONSTRUCTION, INC.
3862 SHERIDAN STREET
HOLLYWOOD, FLORIDA 33021
(Same and address)
The ProjeCl is:
(Same and lueation)
Marathon Airport
New Passenger Terminal Building
Emergency Generator/Chiller Building
The Architect is:
(Same and address)
Reynolds, Smith and Hills, Inc.
4651 Salisbury Road
Jacksonville, Florida 32256
The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below,
Copyright 1915. 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958. 1961. 1963. 1967. 1974. 1977, @1987hvTheAmerican Institute of Archi-
tects, 1735 ~ew York Avenue, :-;,W., Washington, D,C 20006. Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation
of its provisions '\\rithout written permission of the AlA \'iolates the copnight laws of the l'nited States and will be subject to
legal prosecution, '
AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OWNER,CONTRACTOR AGREE!'.1ENT' T\1t'ELFTH EDITIO:-l' AlA!> . @!987
THE AMERICAN INSTITt:TE OF ARCHITECTS, 173S NEW YORK AVE:O;CE. N,W" WASHINGTON, D,C, 20006
A101.1987 1
ARTICLE 1
THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The,Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, SupplementJr\' and other Conditions).
Drawin~s, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this A~reement, other uocuments listed in this Agreement md
\lodifications issued after execution of this Agreement: these form the Contract. and are as fully a part of the Contract J5 If attached
to this Agreement or repeated herein, The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement hetween the parties hereto and
supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents,
,lther than \Ioditicltlons, appears In Article 9.
ARTICLE 2
THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT
The Contractor shall execute the entire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in
the Contract Documents to be the responsibilitv of others, <)tXiX X()4IX>~~:
ARTICLE 3
DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
3.1 The date of commencement is the date from which the Contract Time of Paragraph )1 is me:l5ured, md shall be the date of
this Agreement. J5 first written above. unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fL'ced in a notice
to proceed issued b\' the Owner.
f1llsert the dale u} CfJmmenCeme1J/. 'f i/ differs from the dale (j/ this Aj.{reeme,ll ur, If applicahle. sft.Ue thaI the dull! WIll he fixed in II tzU/ICe I(J proceed)
Date will be fixed with the Notice to Proceed.
L'nless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the
Owner in writing not less than five days before commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages, mechmic's liens
and other security interests,
3.2 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than
(Insert the cClientiar date fJr numher ()fa~'endar days aller the clare of (ommelln:m('l11. A/so insert any reclulremf!lltsffJr ('arlier Suhs/antial CnnlfJ1f?/I()n of cer.
rC""/UJrtUJIIS OJ the "Purl-. If nol srared elseu'bere In the ()mlru<:/ Uucunlen/s.)
365 calendar days following receipt of Notice to Proceed.
, subject to adjustments of this Contract Time J5 provided in the Contract Documents,
(/nserl/u'(ll'isions. If tUll'. ffJr liquidated damu).{('s relalillJ.{ to JllIlll.re to oJmple/e Oil time.)
The Contractor and its surety or sureties shall be liable for and shall pay the Owner
One Thousand Collars C.$1,000.00} for each calendar day or part of a calendar day
after the completion date that the work is not substantially completed and a
Certificate of Substantial Completicn is issued.
AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OW'NER'CONTRACTOR AGREBIENT . TW'ELFTH EDITION . ,"IA~ . @19fP
THE AMERICA:-'; INSTlTl'TE OF ARCHITECTS, I-.~S NEW' YORK A\'E:>Il'E,:-'; \1t', \1t'ASHINGTO:'-/, D.C 20006
A101.1987 2
ARTICLE 4
CONTRACT SUM
4.1 The Owner ,hJ1J p;n rhe CuntfJCror In current funds for the ContraCl"r , pert' 'r!1UnlT (lIthe C'JntrJCl th<: C, ,ntrJet 'urn or
THREE MILLION. F01JR HUHOQ.J:D THIRTY ONE THOUSAND AND NO/IOO ______n_n__nn____n_n_n_D\lliJIs
1 S 3t431 ,000 .00 _____ .... .h____________n___n____,l.,uhWct [<J JJJltl(Hb Jno JeJuclIon" .1., pro\'IIJnJ In lhe \., H1.
trJct fi >curnent.\
4.2 The Contr:Kt .'urn 1.\ h.1.,eo upon the f<JlhJ\"\ In~ JJll:rnJtes. If In\', which Jr<: Jc,cnbl'o In th<: Cl)ntrJct [)OCUlll<:ntS JOeJ H<:
t1er<:h\' Jcccptcd lw Ih<: Owner
'hill' lht' nu",t)l'''',S ",.. "O't'r ,Lit'tlll/ltUll/'" ,,' 14~ It'{'lt',I ,4.It''''',.at', if .J,',J,"'!']\ .,,/ "Ul.'" ,/Ht''''I,it,'' ,'''t';' "\- -}Ii1,/t' .... :1'," .':. 'It'" -;O',t'/{lH"Il:' 'I',' ,'\.', :,,;: ,'I ,f
[II,..; ...J.;'rl't'mt.'u attach" \ll}('du/C( 01 ,Ul,./) fJlh~'r allerno/t's ,!I/l1J HIJ< Ihe ""'''loll if,,.. eat;' ,O"J :11t' d.~:l' :4i/f/l lJ 1'1.11 ""lJJ .lm/'f,'l! I' I (lil.' ,
(AMOUNTS OF ACCEPTED ALTERNA;ES
CONTRACTCR"S BID F()R~i)
~I'\
.v
BE INSERTED
HERE,
:~ ACCORDANCE WITH AWARCE~
ALTERNATE #1 - $35,000.00
4,3 L'OH prices, If ID\', Jre as follows
Change in total length of all piling from length estimated. . . . . . .$35.00/L.F.
Change in number of load test ..........................................$6.000.00
AlA DOCUMENT A10l . ('W:\ER.CO:\TR.KTOR .U;REBIE:\T . TIX'ELFTH EDITIl):\ . 11.\' . " IWl-
THE \~H'RI( .\:\ I:\'TITI'TE Of \RCHITECT'i. 1-" 'EIX' YORK .\\E"IE. " IX IX \,HI",;TO:\ (), 2'..~,
A101-1987 3
ARTICLE 5
PROGRESS PAYMENTS
5.1 1I.1'eu UpOll ,-\ppIICJUI >11' lor I'J\ :lll:nt suhmltteJ tl l the ,-\fdllte:\"{ Il\ the \,' 'I1lfJe II 'f ,H1U \Xfllll, Jte' ;, if 1',1\ mellt I"ueu 11\ ILl'
\fdlltee't, !lle \ll\ller 'lull nuke rf' I1fe" r,l\'1l1ellh "11 Jlll'Unl (,llhe \,Idll[,;el 'W11[<, lile C"ntfJ\"{')[.1S rf<\\ldn.!llehm ,u:d
,'lsewtK're In the ConrrJ\"{ l)uCUl11er,t,
5,2 l!:l' l'en(,J ,I )\('fl'J h\ eJeh \1':'lll'JU( In t<1r 1'.1\ men I ,lull he '"le e,uelldJf 1111lHh l'ndll1l!' ,n the :.1't d.l\ ,>I :he ml ,nrh,X,): X-X
,IDII)(l~X
5.3 Pf' >lldnl ,m-\rpilLJ111 >11 tw P,;', ment IS reel'I\'l'd 11\' the ,\rehllelt nllt !Jtef thJn IlK'
dJ\' III ,1 mWl[h, Ihl' U\\ Iler ,hJJl mAl' pa\'men! II) the \,Ilntractur not btl'r [h.lJ1
I he dJ\' III Ihe fo 11 ow i n 9 111\ imn II In :\rrIICJl1OIl fllf PJ\mc:nt IS ren:I\'l'J h\ the
\rchltl'\"{ Jlter Ihe JppliCJtlon JJte ::xeJ Jl1ml', rJ\ml'nr shall he mJJl' h\' Ille U\\lll'f nllt IJter thJJ1
JJl" Jlter the Architect feCel\'eS the ,\ppliClllOIl lor PJ\'menr
5.4 Exh ,-\rplical1oll for PJ\'ment shJlI he l1aseu upun the Scheuule of \JJUl" suhmlltl'u hl' the Cuntractor III accordJJ1ce with
the: CunrfaLt Ducuml'n!s, The: Scheuuie of \'JJue, shall JJlucatl' the enme C, ,ntfJCt Sum ,11TH lOR the \ JflOUS portion, 'If the Work
Jnd he pfepJre:J III ,uch form anu supporteu hl' such data to suhstJntlJtl' Its xcuraC\' .lS the ,-\rchlteCl mal' re<.julCe, ThiS Scheuule,
unless ol1lc:cted to I1l' the ,-\rchltecL 'hJIl he u"u .lS J h.lSlS for re\lewlI1!o! the C,llltrJuor S Arplicatlun, for P:ll'men!
5.5 ,-\rrIiCJllons for PJl'ment shJ.1J Ir,JlCate the rl'fCentagl' (>1 C, lmplel1' III ,>Il'xh POrtlull 01 the \X'ork as of the enu of the pertou
llll'efeu 11\' the Applicalloll for b\ ~l'nt
5.6 ,>uhject to the pro\'ISllln, Ilf the LIJl1tfJU Documents, the al11uunt 1)1 l'Jch rrogress pJ\'ment shJ.1J he computed .lS follows:
5.6.1 Take that porllon of the Contr:Kt Sum properh JJlocahle to completed Work.1s Jetermllled b\' multiplying the percemJRe
cumpletlllO of eJch portion of the \\'"rk hl' the share "I the lotal C"ntract ~um JlIocated to that portion of the ~'ork III the
'chedule . II Values, less retamJ!.!e of ten percent
I 10, coOO "(,) Pendmg lInJJ J:te~mll1Jtllln. III C(J't III Ihe Owner I ,f c-hanl.!l" In the \X'ork, amounts not m dispute mal' he
mduJeu.1' pf()\'lueu m ,ubpJrawapn 1, ',lthe GenerJJ C'lnJltI()]l' e\en th'luf(h the C,'ntrJU ,>um h.ls not \'et l1een aJlusted h\
(:h:Ull(e ~ )run
5,6.2 \dd tllJt Pllrtl<Jll III the C"n:;J(( ,>um pm ('ler!\' JJlocJhle II) I11Jle[l,U' .ulu l'Ljulpment deil\'ern.! .lJ1U sUltJhl\ ,[< Ifed JI the
'Ill' II ,r 'llh"'Ljuem me< )rpl lfJtlOn ill I'll' (ompleteJ (' >nSlrUCll< '11 I' >r. It Jl'pr')\ ecllll JJ\":UKl' h\ the ()wner. ,unahll' ,[oreu ,)11' the
'Ite Jt J lout I< lO agreeu UPI In m wmlr,l(J. los retJlnJge 01 ten
per(ent 1 10.0000 "(,):
5,6.3 'uhtfaU the J~rl'gJte uf prl'\lous pa\men!s maul' h\' tile ()\\ner. .lJ1u
5.6.4suhtrJct Jmounts, If In\', l'lr whICh the Archneu hJS wlthhelJ .,r nullllied J Certificate for Pa\'men! .lS pro\'luc:d In PJrJ'
).(raph I) <; of the General CIJllUnlOnS
5.1 The pfogfess pJl'ment .lJ1l1lUnt lktermrneu rn J((l)rdance \lith PJfJgrJpn <; I) ,hJJl he further modified unuer the tllllo....ll1g
elrcum,unces
5.1.1-\Ju, upon Suhst:JJltlJJ (,lmpJctlon of the ~'lJfk, J ,um 'ulfi(ll'nt (0 IncreJ.se {he totJj pal'ments to ni nety- fi ve
('lercent I 05,0000. "" I of tne CIlntraU
'>um, less such amounts 15 the Archltec( shJ.1J determille l' Of ill(I,mriete WI lfK JJld unsettled d~llms, JnG
5.1,2 ,\dJ, If fillJJ c"mp!etlllll ,,1' the \X'"rk IS therl'aftef I11Jte[laJh deb\TO Ihr< .ugh no lJult of [he Contrauor, .lJ1\' aJultlonJJ
"m, )unt, ('lJ\'al1lc ill :icc"rd;lnce \\ II ~ suhpJrJf(tJpll I) III' ,,' the (Jener:i1 ( "I~clltl( 'n,
5.8 IkJuC(1I In or i1rnJtJl1on of retaillJ).(e, II ,ill\', shJJI he J.S lollows
II It " In/t'luted. 11,.",r It, \Uh'(d1llla/ (,'I1I'-!';l"//"" /,' fJIl' t'''flre U ",.". f', recllH c' ,.,- ,;//I(! :/le rt':,l.'1UH.;'t '1'\,'iI!1lll! /n"" ,';1(" /'t'rt t',l/lli.!t' 11I'('l"ft',I 11/ ....l/iJ!',;r,1
..:'CI{"h .::; 'I ;' .41ld ~ {, _' ,lhUlt' ,oul (hl\ I' /".( (',\/I/u"'nl l"I'l'/J 11l'Yt' /11 fhe ( J ,,,/till: : Jr,~ ,'IHIl'I.'I' ..';,~'rr il("-l' /""/ I,/{,/I' I,.r ,/((11 rt'tllH {fl,,, '" ,UII/half'" ,
AlA DOCUMENT A101 . (,\X~ER,CO~TIlKTOR AliREE~lE~T . TWELfTH ~,IJITI('~ . ~I.~'. !''''-
rilE ,~,\IERI\..~~ I~STITITE ()f ,~RCHITECT, 1-'" "E\X' OR" ,\\'f~t E ,,\), \)'~SIiI~I;TO" IJ I. ~'..~,
A101.1981 4
ARTICLE 6
FINAL PAYMENT
Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum. shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor v.'hen ( I)
the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct nonconformin,l;
\X'ork as provided in Subparagraph 12,2,2 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements. if any. whICh necessarily
survive final payment; and (2) a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect; such tlnal payment shall be made by
the Ov.'ner not more than ;0 days after the issuance oi the Architect's tlnal Certificate t()r P:Jyment, or as follows:
Certain other conditions and covenants respecting Final Payment are set out in the
Contract Documents. Such terms include, without limitation, Subparagraph 9.10.2
of the Genera 1 Cond it ions.
ARTICLE 7
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document. the ref-
erence refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents,
7.2 Payments due wd unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in
the absence thereof. at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located,
(INsert rale of Illterest a1l.reed upon, 'I (Un' )
(f 'sury tau's and requirements under the Ff!dt!TllI Truth /11 LtwdinR Act. similar stale and local cOllsunu'rt:reditl,4u's and other rejJ,uf,u;()U!\ al the (Ju:neT 's UIlU
Contrel-CIOT's prinCIpal places ol business. the /(u:atioll oJ the PnJJect {Ula ft[seu'here may ajfe,:t tbe r'alldlty oJ Ibis pnJl'I.'iIiJ1l Le).!,tli adz 'ice sbould he ofJtalll('U
u"ub respect to deletions or modijicalifJlls. and also Tl!RortJinR retjulremePlrs such as u:rrlten cJi.H:/usuTes or wall'ers.}
7.3 Other provisions:
ARTICLE 8
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
8.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 1-1 of the General Conditions,
8.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions,
AlA DOCUMENT A101 · OWNER,CO:"TRACTOR AGREE!'.1ENT . TWELFTH EDlTIO:-l . AlA ~ '019117
THE A.\1ERICA:-i INSTlTLTE OF ARCHITECTS, J 735 NE\1t' YORK A\'ENVE. N,W" \1t'ASHI:-IGTO:-l. D,C 2()()()6
A101.1987 5
ARTICLE 9
ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modllications issued Jfter execution of this Agreement. Jre enumerated JS follows:
9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agrec:ment Between Owner and Contractor, AlA Document AIOI, 1987
Edition,
9.1.2 The General Conditions arc the Genc:raJ Conditions uf the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A20l, 1987 Edition,
9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract Jre those contained in the Project :-'Ianual dated
, .md Jre J5 folluws:
Document
Title
Pages
Section 00800
Supplementary Conditions
all
9.1.4 The Specll1cations Jre those contained in the Project :-'lanuJJ dated as in SubpJragraph 9,1,3. and are as follows;
(Faber-li.../ the '/h'tl!IUlll(ltlS here ur refer If} all ('xblhll alllilhnJ lu thiS .~~n!t'mt!l1l.)
Section
Title
Pages
(DIVISION AND SECTION TITLES AND NUMBERS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS TO BE REFERENCED
HERE TO AN ~XHIBIT TO BE ATTACHED TO THIS OWNER/CONTRACTOR AGREErENT)
SEE ATTACHED EXHIBIT.
AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OW:'-lER'COl"TRACTOR AGREH1El"T' TWELFTH EDITION' AlA' . ~198"
THE A.\IERICAl" r:o.:STITL'TE OF ARCHITECTS, 17_~~ NEW YORK A\'E:>-'L'E, l"\1t', WASHIl"GTON, D,C 20OU6
A101.1987 6
9.1.5 The Drawings are as follov.'s. and are dated
(Either IIS1lhe Drau''"Rs bere or refer 10 an exh.bil attached 10 Ib.s AHreemenl.)
unless a different date is shown below:
Number
Title
Date
SEE ATTACHED EXHIBIT.
(Listing of drawings to be referenced here to an exhibit to be attached to this
Owner/Contractor agreement.)
9.1.6 The Addenda. if any. are as follows:
Number
Date
Pages
(TO BE INSERTED HERE FOLLOWING RECEIPT OF BIDS)
#1
8/ 7/92
14 with attachments.
#2
8/11/92
3 with attachments.
Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are
also enumerated in this Article 9.
AlA DOCUMENT A101 . O\l;'NER.CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT' T\1t'ElFTH EDITIO:-/' AlAe. @1987
THE AMERICAN INSTtTL'TE OF ARCHITECTS. 173S NE\l;' YORK AVE:-/t.:E. :-/W" \1t'r\SHINGTON, D,C, 20006
A101.1987 7
9.1.7 Other documents. if any, forming part of the Contr:lct Documents are as follows:
(LI-'I bl!1'e any addItional documenls u'bicb aremlenaed 10 form part of the Conlracl Documents, The GomeraJ Condilions prol'ide lbal bidding reqwreme1l1s sucb
as adz ',.,.meme7ll or im'lIallOn 10 bId, InslrucllOns 10 Bidders, sample forms and the Cunlraclor's b.d are nol pari of the ComrtKl Documf!7zlS unless enumeraled
m Ibis .-lgreemen/, They should be lisled here only if inlended 10 be parI of lbe Con/ract Documents)
Revise 9.1.7.1 to read:
The Bid Schedule - Section 00300, to the extent only that it provides the source for
the dollar amounts of the Base Bid, Unit Prices and accepted Alternates set
forth in Article 4 above.
9.1.7.2 (Executed Bid Submittal Forms to be included under this section.)
9.2 Exclusions and Inclusions:
The documents enumerated in Subparagraph 9.1.7 were prepared and delivered by
Contractor during the Bidding of the project. If through inadvertent damage, loss or
any other reasons the documents in Subparagraph 9.1.7 are not physically attached
hereto, reference may be made to the said documents as incorporated into Contractor's
Bid; as if attached hereto but not part of the Bid or any Bidding Requirement ~
se constitutes a Contract Document.
By_
Dat8_
(SEAL)
Attest: Danny L. K61hage, Clerk
By: ~~ c. t:J~~
Deputy Cl erk 0 &/, I L/-'3
This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above and is executed in at least three original copies of which
one is to be delivered to the Contractor, one to the Architect for use in the administr:ltion of the COntr:lct, and the remainder to the
Owner.
~ CO~T
INC.
(Sigllature)
- Mayor/Chainnan
(Primed name and lille)
OLIN HILL, PRESIDENT
(Prillted name and title)
AlA DOCUMENT A101 . OW:-iER.CO:-;TRACTOR AGREEME:-iT . TWELFTH EDITION' AlA!> . @198"
THE AMERICA!': INSTITI:TE OF ,\RCHlTECTS, J -~5 :"EW YORK A\'ENl'E. ~W, WASHI~GTON, D,C. 20006
A101.1987 8
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
a:>RROB comITY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 00510 - PROJECT FORMS
SUMMARY
The following forms or equivalent shall be used on this Project
AlA A101
AlA A201
AlA G701
AlA G702
AlA G703
AlA G706
AlA G706A
AlA G707
AlA G707A
AlA G709
AlA G710
AlA G711
AlA G714
Owner-Contractor Agreement Form, Stipulated Sum (1987 Edition) .
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (1987
Edition) .
Change Order (1987 Edition) .
Application and Certificate for Payment (1983 Edition) .
Continuation Sheet for G702.
Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims (4/70).
Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens (4/70).
Consent of Surety to Final Payment (4/70).
Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Releases of
Retainage (6/71).
Proposal Request (4/70).
Architect's Supplemental Instructions (3/79).
Architect's Field Report (10/72).
Construction change Directive (1987 Edition) .
The following forms are required by Monroe County ordinance or State of Florida
statutes and are appended to this section.
00510-1
00510-2
00510-3
00510-4
00510-5
00510-6
00510-7
00510-8
Letter of Intent to Perform as a Subcontractor (for Contractor's
Use)
Payment Bond
Performance Bond
Final Release Form
DBE Payment Certification
Substantial Completion Certification
County Insurance Certificate
EEO Requirements
END OF SBCTION 00510
PROJECT FORMS
00510-1
LETTER OF INTENT TO PERFORM AS A SUB-CONTRACTOR
(For Contractor's Use)
TO:
ROMA CONSTRUCTION, INC.
(Name of General Contractor)
Project Name:' Marathon Airport
Project No.:: .AIP 3-12-0044-09/WPI 6_8Z6631~ 6826747
The undersigned intends to perform work in connection with the
above project as:
XX an MBE
a WBE
(check one)
Individual
____ partnership
(check one)
xx
corporation
Joint Venture
The status of the undersigned is confirmed on the attached DBE
Contractor Identification Affidavit (Pages BFS-4 and BFS-6).
The undersigned is prepared to perform the following described
work in connection with the above project:
CONCRETE
(Specify in detail work items or parts thereof to be performed)
at the following price: $ 585,200.00
% of the dollar value of this sub-contract will be further
sublet and/or awarded to other than DBE firms.
The undersigned agrees to enter into a contract with you to
perform the above work if you are awarded the prime contract.
3/29/93
(Date)
(305)576-1408
(Telephone No.)
URBAN CONSTRUCTORS, INC.
(Name DBE Sub-Co tractor)
~~
4128 N. MIAMI AVENUE
(Firm Address)
MIAMI, FLORIDA 33127
(City & State)
By:
Name:
JACQUE E. THERMILUS
(Typed)
Title: PRESIDENT
END OF SECTION 00510-1
SUBCONTRACTOR L.O.I.
00510-1
AlP - 3-12-0044-09
WPI 6826631/6826747
~ONROE COUNTY
PAYMENT BOND
(100% of Contract Amount)
BOND NO. 139 23 49
Know all men by these presents: that ROMA CONSTRUCTION, INC.
as Principal, hereinafter called Con-
tractor and FIREMEN'S INSURANCE CX>MPANY OF NEWARK,NEW JERSEY Surety, here-
inafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ~ONROE COUNTY
as Obligee, hereinafter called OWNER, in the amount of
THREE MILLION, FOUR HUNDRED THIRTY ONE THOUSAND AND NO/100--------
------------------------------------------dollars ($3,431,000.00)
for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety bind themselves,
their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
Whereas, Contractor has by written agreement dated MARCH 30 ,
19~, entered into a Contract with OWNER for the improvements at
~ara thon Ai rport PASSENGER TERMINAL_BLDG. in accordance with all of the
Contract Documents listed under AlA Document .A.101 Agreement Form
prepared by ~ RS&H, , which Contract is by refer-
ence made a part hereof and is hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
Now, therefore, the condition of the above obI igation is such
that if the said Contractor shall well and faithfully perform the
things agreed by him to be done and performed according to the
terms of said Contract and shall promptly make payments to all
persons supplying labor, material and supplies used directly or
indirectly by the said Contractor, or sub-contractor(s), in the
prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, we agree-
ing and assenting that this undertaking shall be for the benefit
of any sub-contractor, material men or laborer having a just
claim, as well as for the Obligee herein, then this obligation
shall be void, otherwise, the same shall remain in full force and
effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liabil-
ity of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no
event exceed the amount of this obligation as herein stated.
All provisions of this Bond shall comply with F.S. 255.05.
The said Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifica-
tions, omissions or additions in or to the terms of said Contact
or on or to the plans and specifications therefore shall in
anywise affect the obligation of said Surety or its Bond.
The said Surety shall inform the OWNER thirty (30) days prior to
expiration of this Bond by giving notice by registered mail.
PAYMENT BOND
00510-2P.
AIP 3-12-0044-09
WPI 6826631/6826747
, 19~.
signed and sealed this 31st day of MARCH
(Principal must indicate whether
corporation, partnership, company
or individual)
THE PERSON SIGNING SHALL IN HIS OWN
HANDWRITING SIGN THE PRINCIPAL'S
NAME, HIS OWN NAME AND HIS TITLE.
WHERE A PERSON SIGNING FOR A
CORPORATION IS OTHER THAN THE
PRESIDENT OR VICE PRESIDENT, HE
MUST, BY AFFIDAVIT AS CONTAINED
HEREIN, SHOW HIS AUTHORITY TO
BIND THE CORPORATION.
(Affix surety's Corporate Seal)
(Attorney-in-Fact should both
sign and type name)
The foregoing Bond is hereby
approved
County Attorney
Attest:
ROMA CONSTRUCTION, INC.
A FLORIDA CORPORATION
pr~ncipal
By: odl!;
Title: PRESIDENT
FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY
J. NIELSON
Official of
~onroe County
NOTE: If Principal or Surety are corporations, the
respective corporate seals should be affixed and
attached.
IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the
Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570
as amended) and be authorized to transact business in
the state where the project is located.
END OF SECTION 00510-2
PAY~ENT BOND
00510-2B
,-
AlP 3-12-004.+-G9
WPl 6326631/6826747
MONROE COUNTY
PERFORMANCE BOND
(100% of Contract Amount)
BOND NO. 139 23 49
Know all men by these presents: that ROMA CONSTRUCTION, INC.
as Principal, hereinafter called Con-
tractor and FIREMEN'S INSURANCE CDMPANY OF NEWARK,NEW ~ Surety, here-
inafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto MONROE COUNTY
as Obligee, hereinafter called OWNER, in the amount of
THREE MILLION, FOUR HUNDRED THIRTY ONE THOUSAND AND NO/100-dollars
($ 3,431 ,000.00) for the payment whereof Contractor and Surety
bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, succes-
sors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
Whereas, Contractor has by written agreement dated MARCH 30 ,
1993, entered into a Contract with OWNER for the improvements at
Marathon Ai rport ,PASSENGER TERMINAL BLDG. in accordance with all of the
Contract Documents listed under AlA Document A101 Agreement Form
. which Contract is by reference made a part hereof and
is hereinafter referred to as the Contract.
Now, therefore, the condition of the above obligation is such
that if the said Contractor shall well and faithfully perform the
things agreed by him to be done and performed according to the
terms of said Contract and shall promptly make payments to all
persons supplying labor, material and supplies used directly or
indirectly by the said Contractor, or sub-contractor(s), in the
prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, we agree-
ing and assenting that this undertaking shall be for the benefit
of any sUb-contractor, material men or laborer having a just
claim, as well as for the Obligee herein, then this, oblig~tion
shall be void, otherwise, the same shall remain in full force and
effect, it being expressly understood and agreed that the liabil-
ity of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall in no
event exceed the amount of this obligation as herein stated.
The said Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no modifica-
tions, omissions or additions in or to the terms of said Contact
or on or to the plans and specifications therefore shall in
anywise affect the obligation of said Surety or its Bond.
The said Surety further stipulates and agrees that in the event
of a default or deficiency on the part of the Contractor amount-
ing to a breach of the Contract, the Owner may, by giving notice
by registered mail to Contractor and Surety, require that such
default or deficiencies be remedied within ten (10) days from the
date of such notice. Failure so to remedy or to take proper
steps to remedy such defaults or deficiencies within said period
shall be cause fQr the Owner to require that Surety take over and
PERFORMJ'.NCE BOND
00510-3A
AlP 3-12-0M4-09
WPI 6826631/6826747
prosecute the work under the Contract and to take over all obli-
gations pertaining thereto.
In the event the work under the Contract is taken over by the
Surety in a manner satisfactory to the Owner, the Owner will pay
to the Surety henceforth all amounts due and to become due under
the Contract, including amendments, less the balance of the Con-
tract price previously paid to the Contractor and less liquidated
damages, if assessed. The Owners shall not be liable for any
monies not due on the Contract and shall not be made a party to
any dispute between Contractor and Surety.
If the Surety does not take over the work in a satisfactory man-
ner within ten (10) days after the notice of default or does not
proceed with completing the work in accordance with the Contract
or, the Owner shall have full power and authority, without
impairing the obligation of the Contract or the Contract Bond, to
take over the completion of the work; to appropriate or use any
or all material and equipment that may be suitable; to enter into
agreements and provisions thereof; or to use such other methods
as may be required for completion of the Contract. The Contrac-
tor and his Surety shall be liable for all costs incurred by the
Owner in completing the work and for all liquidated damages. in
conformity with the terms of the Contract. If the sum of such
liquidated damages and the expense so incurred by the Owner is
less than the sum which would have been payable under this Con-
tract if it had been completed by the Contractor or his Surety,
the Contractor or his Surety shall be entitled to receive the
difference and if the sum of such expense and such liquidated
damages exceeds the sum which would have been payable under the
Contract, the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable and shall
pay to the Owner the amount of such excess. Notice to the Con-
tractor shall be deemed to have been served when delivered to the
man in charge of any office used by the Contractor, his represen-
tative at or near the work, or by registered mail addressed to
the Contractor at his last known place of business.
The said Surety further stipulates and agrees that this Bond is
also given and made as a guarantee ensuring the Owner against
loss resulting from costs of repairing, replacing or reconstruc-
ting any portion of the work performed or equipment furnished
under this Contract because of failure to perform as specified or
from being defective in any manner whatsoever. This Bond shall
remain in full force and effect for a period of one year after
the date of written recommendation and of acceptance by the Engi-
neer to the Owner.
The said Surety shall inform the OWNER thirty (30) days prior to
expiration of this Bond by giving notice by registered mail.
PERFCRP.ANCE BOND
00510-38
AIP 3-12-0044-09
WPI 6826631/6326747
Signed and sealed this 31st day of
(Principal must indicate whether
corporation, partnership, company
or individual)
THE PERSON SIGNING SHALL IN HIS OWN
HANDWRITING SIGN THE PRINCIPAL'S
NAME, HIS OWN NAME AND HIS TITLE.
WHERE A PERSON SIGNING FOR A
CORPORATION IS OTHER THAN THE
PRESIDENT OR VICE PRESIDENT, HE
MUST, BY AFFIDAVIT AS CONTAINED
HEREIN, SHOW HIS AUTHORITY TO
BIND THE CORPORATION.
(Affix Surety's Corporate Seal)
(Attorney-in-Fact should both
sign and type name)
The foregoing Bond is hereby
approved
County Attorney
Attest:
MARCH
, 19~.
ROMA CONSTRUCTION, INC.
A FLORIDA CORPORATION
By:h~"
&;~HILL
Title: PRESIDENT
FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY
NIELSON
Official of the
~~onroe County
NOTE: If Principal or Surety are corporations, the
respective corporate seals should be affixed and
attached.
IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the
Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570
as amended) and be authorized to transact business in
the state where the project is located.
END OF SECTION 00510-3
P[RFOR~ANCE BOND
00510- 3C :
Firemen's Insurance COlnpany of Newark, New Jersey
180 Maiden Lane, New York, New York 10038
GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY
Know all men by these Presents, That the FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY
has made, constituted and appointed, and by these presents does make, constitute and appoint '
Charles J. Nielson of r-tiami Lakes, Florida
~.~..
its true and lawful allorney, for it and in its name, place, and stead to execute on behalf of the said Company, as surety, bonds, undertakings
and contracts of suretyship to be given to
All Obligees
provided that no bond or undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed in amount the sum of
$Unlimited Dollars
This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed and sealed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolution adopted by
the Board of Directors of the FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY at a meeting duly called and held on the 20th
day of February, 1975:
"RESOL VED, lhal the Chairman o( the Board, the VICe Chairman of the Board, the President, an Executive Vice President Of a SeniOf Vice President or a Vice President o( Ihe
Company, be. and that each Of any o(them hereby~, authorized to execute Powers of Attorney Qualifying the attomey named in the given Power o( Al\orney to execute in behalf o( the
FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, bonds, undertakings and all contracts o( suretyShip; and that an Assistan. Vice President, a Secretary or an Assistant
Secrelary be, and that each Of any of them hereby ~, authorized to attest the execution o( any such Power o( ^ttorney, and to attach thereto the seal o( the Company,
FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signatures o( such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of ^ttorney Of to any certificate relating thereto by
facsimile, and any such Power of ^ttorney Of certificate bearing such (acsimile sigl'laturesOf (acsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future
with respect to any bond, undertaking Of contract of suretyShip to which it ~ attached,"
In Witness Whereof, the FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY has caused its official seal to be hereunto affixed,
and these presents to be signed by one of its Vice Presidents and attested by one of its Assistant Vice Presidents Ihis 1st day of May, 1985,
FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY
Allest:
Robert W, AdIet-, Sr" Assistant VICe President
By
174J l :3~
Michael J. Ileemaert, VICe President
STATE OF NEW YORK }
COUNTY OF NEW YORK'
So:
On this 1st day of May, 1985, before me personally came Michael J. Beernaert, to me known, who being by me duly sworn, did depose
and say that he is a Vice President of the FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, the corporation described in and
which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such
corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name thereto by like order,
~'-"':TA.;'~
l:t~........:!.,!,;:.....
! ",("o~."'10\
\~}" pUIL,ci...j
\~:::.:~~:~~::;~i
fllJ;:;:/
CERTIFICATE
ETHEL TARANTO
NOT ^RY PUBLIC, State of New York
No, 24-4663117 Qual. in Kings County
Commission Expires March 30, 1986
I, the undersigned, an Assistant Vice President of the FIREMEN'S INSURANCE COMPANY OF NEWARK, NEW JERSEY, a New Jersey
corporation, DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and attached Power of Attorney remains in full force and has not been revoked; and
furthermore that the Resolution of the Board of Directors, set forth in the said Power of Attorney, is now in force,
Signed and sealed at the City of New York, in the State of New York, Dated the 31st day of March ,1993,
!7=:.'~'M~"~?~::~
:>1 BOND 4315K Printed in U's,A,
FINAL RELEASE FORM
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that the undersigned, for and in
consideration of the payment of the sum of
DOLLARS
($ ), paid by Monroe County (hereinafter
referred to as "Owner"), receipt of which is hereby acknowledged
as total and complete compensation for performance of the below-
described Contract, does hereby f,ully and completely discharge
and release the Owner from the waives any and all debts,
accounts, promises, damages, 1 iens, encumbrances, causes of
action, suits, bonds, judgements, claims and demands whatsoever,
in law or in equity, which the undersigned ever had, now has or
might hereafter have on account of labor performed, material
furnished or services rendered, directly or indirectly, for the
contract between the parties dated , , 19.___ known as
AIP 3-12-0044-09/WPI 6826631/6826747, except for those claims~ dlsputes '
and other matters arising out of or relating to said contract
which have been raised by written demand in accordance with the
Contract Documents prior to this date and identified by the
Contractor as unsettled in the final Application for Payment and
are either in arbitration or court litigation, as the case may
be, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
The unders igned further covenants that all sub-contractors,
suppliers, materialmen and any or all other persons supplying
material, supplies, services or labor used directly or indirectly
in the prosecution of the work provided for in the Contract have
been paid in full.
The undersigned shall maintain in full force and effect the
provisions of the Contract Documents respecting the guaranty
against defective work and any other special guarantees required
by the Contract Documents, for the terms provided in the Contract
Documents, which terms shall begin to run from the date specified
in the Contract Documents.
The undersigned represents and warrants that the statements
contained in the foregoing Release are true and correct.
FINAL RELEASE FOR~
00510-4A
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand and seal this
day of , 19
WITNESSES:
CONTRACTOR
By:
Title:
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
Sworn to and subscribed before me this
19
day of
NOTARY PUBLIC
(NOTARY SEAL)
My Commission expires:
END OF SECTION 00510-4
FINAL RELEASE FOR~
00510-4B
AIP 3-12-0044-09
WPI 6826631/6826747
MONROE COUNTY
CERTIFICATION OF PAYMENT TO
DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) SUB-CONTRACTORS
The following DBE Sub-Contractors have been paid in full for all
services or labor performed, material or supplies used directly
or indirectly in the prosecution of the work provided for in the
Contract.
I. DBE Sub-Contractors
Amount
Paid
% of
Final
Contract
Amount
Name of Sub-Contractor
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand and seal this ____ day
of , 19
WITNESS:
CONTRACTOR
By:
Title:
State of
County of
Sworn to and subscribed before me this ____ day of
19
(NOTARY SEAL)
NOTARY PUBLIC
.-
My Commission expires:
END OF SECTION 00510-5
DBE PAYMENT CERTIFICATION
00510-5
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
TO:
PROJECT TITLE:
DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
PROJECT NO.:
LOCATION:
PROJEcr DESCRIPTION INCLUDES:
CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT FOR:
~1onroe County, OWNER
~arathon Airport
AlP 3-12-0044-09/WPI 6e26631/6826747
~arathon, Florida
Construct Passenger Terminal Building and Associated
Emergency Generator and Chiller Building
Airport Improvements
The work performed under this contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Owner, Contractor and
Architect/Engineer 'and the Project is hereby declared to be subst~tially completed on
the above date.
DEFINmON OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
The date of substantial completion of a project or specified area of a project is the date when the
construction is sufficiently completed in accordance with the contract documents as modified by any
Change Orders agreed to by the parties so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the project or specified
area of the project for the use for which it was intended.
A tentative list of items to be completed or corrected is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive and the failure
to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all the work in accordance with
the contract documents.
RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE:
By:
(Authorized Representative/Date)
The Contractor accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on
the tentative list within the time indicated.
CONTRAcrOR:
By:
(Authorized Representative/Date)
The Owner accepts the project or specified area of the project as substantially complete and will assume full possession
of the project or specified area of the project at (time) on (date). The
responsibility for heat, utilities, security and insurance under the contract documents shall be set forth under "Remarks"
below.
O~R: MONROE COUNTY/MARATHON Ai~PORT
By:
(Authorized Representative/Date)
Remarks:
*'
(attach additional sheet, if necessary)
END OF SECTION 00510-6
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION CERTIFICATION
00510-6
Ccrafic;lte at I.a.sur:lDCe
MONROECOUN1Y
.. ........ .,.. ....-.-..M - .. --,..... ...... III .. ........ .. -ua- ., __ 10 ~ ... ____ ....... ....~. t1IIo ----... _..... -.I ..
.,.. .. _.. oif_ "' .. pelIdeo ....... ..........,. . .... .........
NAM. AND ADDIlISS or INSUIIDl COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGES I
ROMA CONSTRUCTION, INC. WAUSAU INSURANCE COMPANIES I
3862 Sheridan Street eo.~ ~ A
t
Hollywood, FL 33021 c......,....- B WAUSAU INSURANCE COMPANIES I
JiiANUHD AnDUss or AGENCY! .... ~........ C WAUSAU INSURANCE COMPANIES I
COLLINSWORTH, ALTER, NIELSON, FOWLER & DOWLING, tINC. FLORIDA TRANSPORTATION BUILDER I
P.O. Box 9315 c......,........ D
Miami Lakes, FL 33014-9315 eo.,....,. ~ I! !
This is to certify that the insurance policies listed below have been issued to the insured and are enforced ae this time. Ie is agreed thae none of these I
policies will be cancelled or changed wiehout providing "5 days written notice of such Clncellation of change eo Monroe Councy, Florida. I
IOOLEnD! I I POI.. Err DATI: I POL ED DAn I , I
nr. or lNSVlWla POUCY NUMBO AU. UMm IIC 11IOUSo\HDS
GencnJ Ihbilicy Gener:al Aggregace S 2,000 I
142400085091 02/12/93 02/12/94
A :{] Commerci21 Gener:aJ Uabilicy Produc:cs.complOps S 2,000
0 Claims Made ia Oa:urence A~ce
0 Owner's &: Contr.lCtots Proccctive Personal &: Advertising S 1,000
Injury
KI X.C.U. Coverages F2ch Occurrence S 1,000 !
~ Bto2d Fonn Property D2m2ge Fire D2m2Re (Ant' One ....) . 50 I
j . ia Independene Contr.lCtots Medical Eltpensc . 5
"
""',.,.?i:\;;::ft:;:;::::
:f) Blanket ConU'2CtU21 (Ant' One ._) I,;,:,..:;,';::':' :
Automobile Li:ability Bodily Injury ,
:::' I
~ 42402085091 02/12/93 02/12/94
B Any Auto (Exh Person) S
0 All Owned Autos (Exh Accidene) S
0 Scheduled Autos Property DamallC .
~ Hired Autos Bodily Injury and Propeny S 1,000
D:unaRe Combined
I :':',;,';',..':",':::
}(3l Non-Owned Autos ':", "':::,:..':':::, " . ';:, ,:::;:'" " ',:
C Euess Liabilicy 42403085091 02/12/93 02/12/94 Bodily Injury and S 4,000
Gl Umbrella fonn Property Damage
0 Other than Umbrella fonn Combined
0 Claims Made
0 Occurrence
~ -
D W'orken' Compensation and 784 01/01/93 01/01/94 ''lForkers' Compensation SlaNCOry
Employas' Uabilicy . 500/1, uUlj/
, '. Employas' Uabilicy S 500
Other .
Comments: Monroe Councy, Florida, and Monroe County Board of Councy Commissioners are named as 2ddicionallnsureds with n:spccr to the
General U:abilicy, Vehlde Li:abillcy, :and Eltcess U:abilicy Policies. For operations being perfo~ed by insured on
Marathon Alrport. .
_"_oI~_ Dace Issued: 03/31/93 lluuofJ~
Monroe County AuthoriD:d Represenlalivc: David I. Alter
'100 College Road Address: P.O. Box 9315. Miami Lakes, FL 33014-9315
Key WesL, FL ~ ~0.4()..4~99 Telephone: (305 ) 822-7800
eND OF seCTION 00510-7 COUNTY INS UP'.",N CE CERTI FI CATE lJ0510-7
/".
EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY REQUIREMENTS
A.
GENERAL
~u~c include che following clauses in each subcontract - Definitions:
1.
a. "Covered area" means the geograph~cal area descr~bed ~n the sol~c~tat~on
from wh~ch th~s contract resulted;
b. "D~rector" means D~rector, Of'f~ceof Federal Contract Compl~anc'e
Programs (OFCCP), U.S. Department of Labor, or any person to whom the Dir~ctor
delegates author~ty;
c. "E:nployer ~dent~f~cat~on number" means the Federal soc~al secur~ty
number used on the Employer's Quarterly Federal TaX Return, U.S. Treasu~
Department Fo~ 941;
d. "Minori.ty" includes:
(1) Black (all persons hav~ng or~g~ns in any of the Black Afr~can
rac~al groups not of H~span~c or~g~n);
(2) H~span~c (all persons of Mexican, Puerto R~can, Cuban, Central or
South American, or other Span~sh culture or origin regardless of race);
(3) As~an and Pac~f~c Islander (all persons having or~g~ns in any of
.e original peoples of the Far East, Southeast, Asia, the Ind~an Subcont~nent, or
the Pac~f~c Islands); and '
(4) American Ind~an or Alaskan nat~ve (all persons having or~gins ~n
any of the or~ginal peoples of North Amer~ca and ma~nta~n~ng ~dent~f~able tr~bal
affil~ati.ons through membersh~p and part~c~pat~on or commun~ty ~dentification).
2. Whenever the contractor, or any subcontractor at any t~er, subcontracts a
port~on of the work ~nvolving any construct~on trade, ~t shall phys~cally include
~n each subcontract in excess of $10,000 the provis~ons of these specif~cat~ons and
the not~ce which conta~ns the appl~cable goals for,minor~ty and female par-
t~cipat~on and wh~ch ~s set forth ~n the sol~c~tat~ons from wh~ch th~s contract
resulted.
3. If the contractor ~s part~cipating (pursuant to 41 CFR 60-4.5) ~n a Hometown
Plan approved by the U.S. Department of Labor ~n the covered area e~ther indivi-
dually or through an assoc~at~on, ~ts aff~rmat~ve act~on obl~gations on all work in
the plan area (~ncluding goals and t~metables) shall be ~n accordance with that
plan for those trades which have unions part~c~pating in the plan. Contractors
must be able to demonstrate their partic~pat~on in and compliance w~th the provi-
sions of any such Hometown Plan. Each contractor or subcontractor participat~ng ~n
an approved plan ~s ~nd~vidually requ~red to comply with its obl~gations under the
EEO clause and to make a good faith effort to achieve each goal under the plan in
each trade in which it has employees. The overall good faith performance by other
~tractors or subcontractors toward a goal in an approved plan does not excuse any
2
EEO REQUIREMENTS
.- 00510-8ft,
r
cove~ed contractor's or subcontr~ctor's fa~lure to take good fa~th efforts to
ach~eve the plan goals and t~metables.
-' .
, " It. . The contractor shall ~plement the spec~f~c aff~rmat~ve act~on standards
prov~ded ~n paragraphs 7a through p of these spec~f~cat~ons. The goals set forth
~n the sol~c~tat~on f~om wh~ch th~s contract resulted are expressed as percentages
of the total hours of employment and tra~n~ng of ~nor~ty and female ut~l~zat~on
the contr~ctor should reasonably be able to ach~eve ~n each construction trade ~n
wh~ch ~t has employees in the covered area. Covered construct~on contractors per-
rorm~ng construct~on work ~n a geograph~cal areas where they do not have a Federal
or federally ass~sted construct~on contract shall apply the ~nor~ty and female
goals established for the geograph~cal area where the work ~s be~ng performed.
Goals are publ~shed period~cally ~n the Federal Register ~n not~ce form, and such
not~ces may be obtained from any Off~ce of Federal Contract Compl~ance Programs
ofr~ce or from Federal procurement contract~ng off~cers. The contractor is
expected to make substantially un~form progress in meeting ~ts goa~s ~n each craft
during the period specif~ed.
5. Ne~ther the prov~s~ons of any collect~ve bargain~ng agreement nor the
fa~lure by a un~on with whom the contractor has a collect~ve barga~n~ng agreement
to refer e~ther minor~t~es or women shall excuse the contractor's obligations under
these specificat~ons, Ex~cut~ve Order 11246, as amended, or the regulations pro-
mulgated pursuant thereto.
,
,
6. In order for the nonwork~ng tra~n~ng hours of apprent~ces and trainees to be
ccunted ~n meet~ng the goals, such apprent~ces and tra~nees must be employed by the
contractor dur~ng the tra~n~ng per~od and the contractor must have made a comm~t-
ment to employ the apprent~ces and tra~nees at the complet~on of their tra~n~ng,
subject to the ava~lab~l~ty of employment cpportun~t~es. Trainees must be tra~ned
pursuant to tra~n~ng programs approved by the U.S. Depart~ent of Labor.
7. The contractor shall take spec~f~c affirmative act~ons to ensure EEO.
evaluation of the contractor's compl~ance with these specif~cat~ons shall be
upon its effort to ach~eve maximum results from ~ts actions. The contractcr
document these efforts fully and shall implement affirmat~ve act~on steps at
as extensive as the following:
The
based
shall
least
a. Ensure and ma~ntain a working env~ronment free of harassment,
intim~dat~on, and ccercion at all s~tes, and ~n all facil~t~es at wh~ch the
contractor's employees are assigned to work. The contractor, where possible, will
ass~gn t~o or more women to each construct~on project. The contractor shall spec~.
fically ensure that all foremen, super~ntendents, and other onsite supervisory pe~
sonnel are aware of and carry out the contracto~'s obligat~on to ma~nta~n such a
working env~onment, ~th spec~f~c attention to minority or female ind~v~duals
work~ng at such sites or ~n such facil~t~es.
b. Establ~sh and ma~nta~n a current list of minority and female recruitmen
sources, prov~de wr~tten not~ficat~on to m~nority and female recruitment sources
and to community organizat~ons when the contractor or ~ts unions have employment
opportun~ties ava~lable, and ma~ntain a record of the organ~zat~ons' responses.
EEO REQUIREMENTS
00510-8B
3
c. Ma~nta~n a current f~le of the names, addresses, and telephone numbers
ach ~nor~ty and female off-the-street appl~cant and m~nor~ty or female
.erral from a un~on, a recru~tment source, or commun~ty organ~zat~on and of what
act~on was taken ~th respect to each such ~nd~v~dual. 'If such ~nd~vidual was sent
to~the -union h~r~ng hall tor reterral and was not referred back to the contractor
by the union or, ~f referred, not employed by the contractor, this shall be docu-
mented in the tile ~th the reason therefor along ~th whatever addit~onal actions
the contractor may have taken.
\
d. Prov~de ~ediate written notificat~on to the Director when the union
or un~ons ~th which the contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has not
referred to the contractor a ~nor~ty person or woman sent by the contractor~ or
when the contractor has other ~nformation that the union referral process has
~peded the contractor's efforts to meet its obligations.
e. Develop on-the-job training opportunities and/or participate in training
programs for the area which expressly include minorities and women, includ~ng
upgrading programs and apprenticeship and trainee prcgrams relevant to the
contractor's employment needs, especially those programs funded or approved by the
Department of Labor. The contractor shall prov~de notice of these programs to the
sources compiled under 7b above.
f. Disse~nate the contractor's EEO pol~cy by providing not~ce of the
policy to unions and training programs and requesting their cooperation in
assisting the contractor in meeting its EEO obligations; by including it in any
policy manual and collective bargaining agreement; by publicizing ~t in the company
laper, annual report, etc.; by specific review of the policy ~th all manage-
personnel and ~th all minority and female employeefl at least once a year; and
;ost~ng the company EEO policy on bulletin boards accessible to all employees at
each locat~on where construction work is performed.
g. Rev~ew, at least annually, the company's EEO policy and affirmative
action obligations under these specifications ~th all employees having any respon-
sibility for hir~ng, assignment, layoff, term~nation, or other employment decisions
i~cluding specif~c rev~ew of these items with ons~te supervisory personnel such as
super~ntendents, general foremen, etc., prior to the ~n~tiation of construction
work at any job site. A written record shall be made and mainta~ned ~dent~fying
the time and place of these meetings, persons attend~ng, subject matter d~scussed,
and d~spos~t~on of the subject matter.
h. Disse~nate the contractor's EEO pol~cy externally by i~clud~~g it in
any advertising in the news media, specifically ~nclud~ng m~nority a~d female news
media, and providing written notification to and d~scuss~ng the contractor's EEO
policy ~th other contractors and subcontractors with whom the contractor does or
ant~c~pates doing business.
i. Direct its recru~tment efforts, both oral and writte~, to minority,
female, and community organizations, to schools w~th m~nor~ty and female students;
and to minor~ty and female recruitment and training organizat~ons serving the
contractor's recruitment area and employment needs. Not later than one month pr~or
i,
EEO REQUIREMENTS
00510-8C
~
~~.~-
.~
to the date for the acceptance of appl~cat~ons for apprent~cesh~p or other tra~n~ng
by any recru~tment source. the contractor shall send wr~tten not~f~cat~on to
organ~zat~ons, such as the above, descr~b~ng the open~ngs, screen~ng procedures,
_' -and tests to be used in the select~on process.
j. Encourage present minor~ty and female employees to recru~t other
m~nor~ty persons and women and, where reasonable, provide after school, summer, and
vacation employment to ~inor~ty and female youth both on the site and ~n other
areas of a contractor's workforce.
k. Val~date all tests and other se1ect~on requ~rements where there ~s an
obl~gat~on to do so under 41 CFR Part 60-3.
'1. Conduct, at least annually, an inventory and evaluation, at least of all
minority and female personnel, for promotional opportunities and encourage these
employees to seek or to prepare for, through appropriate training. etc., such
opportun~ties.
m. Ensure that seniority practices, job class~f~cat~ons. work ass~gnments,
and other personnel practices do not have a discr~minatory effect by cont~nually
mon~tor~ng all personnel and employment related activ~ties to ensure that the EEO
policy and the contractor'~ obl~gations under these 'spec~fications are being
carr~ed out.
~ n. Ensure that all Cac~l~e~es and company act~v~t~es are nonsegregated
except that separate or singleuser toilet and necessary changing fac~l~ties shall
be provided to assure privacy bet~een the sexes.
o. Document and mainta~n a record of all sol~c~tations of offers for sub-
contracts from minor~ty and female construct~cn contractors and suppliers,
~nclud~ng c~rculat~on of sol~c~tations to minority and female contractor asso-
c~at~ons and other bus~ness associations.
p. Conduct a review, at least annually, of all supervisor's adherence to
and performance under the contractor's EEO policies and aff~rmative action
obligations.
8. Contractors are encouraged to participate in voluntary assoc~ations which
assist ~n fulfill~ng one or more of their affirmative action obligations (1a
through p). The efforts of a contractor association, joint contractor union,
contractor community, or other similar groups of wh~ch the contractor is a member
and participant, may be asserted as fulfilling anyone or more of ~ts obligations
under 7a through p of these specifications provided that the contractor actively
participates in the group, makes every effort to assure that the group has a posi-
tive impact on the employment of minorities and women in the industry, ensures that
the concrete benefits of the program are reflected in the contractor's minority and
female workforce part~c~pat~on, makes a good fa~th effort to meet ~ts ind~vidual
goals and timetables, and can prov~de access to documentation which demonstrates
the effectiveness of actions taken on behalf of the contractor. The obligation to
comply, however, is the contractor's and failure of such a group to fulfill an
obl~gation shall not be a defense for the contractor's noncompl~ance. .
EEO REQUIREMENTS
00510-8D
~
~
c
9. A single goal for minorities and a separate single goal for women have been
.established. The contractor, however, is required to provide EEO and to take
, " affi~ative action for all minority groups, both male and female, and all women,
, both minority and nonminority. Consequently, the contractor may be in violation of
the executive order if a particular group is employed in a substantially disparate
manner (for ~xample, even though the contractor has achieved its goals for women
gerrerally,' the contractor may be in violation of the executive order if a specific
minority group of women is underutilized).
10. The contractor shall not use the goals and timetables or affirmative action
standards to discriminate against any person because of race, color, religion, sex,
or national origin.
11. The contractor shall not enter int~ any subcontract with any person or firm
deba~red from Government contracts pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended.
12. The contractor shall carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of
these s~ecifications and of the Equal Opportunity Clause, including suspension,
termination, and cancellation of existing subcontracts as may be imposed or ordered
pursuant to Executive Order 11246, as amended, and its implementing regulations, by
the orecp. Any contractor who fails to carry out such sanctions and penalties
shall be in violation of these specifications and Executive Order 11246, as
amended.
,
.-
\
13. The contractor, in fulfilling its obligations under these specifications,
shall implement specific affirmative action steps, at least as extensive as those
standards prescribed in paragraph 7 of these specifications, so as to achieve maxi-
~~~ results from its efforts to ensure equal employment opportunity. If the '
contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the e.xecutive order, the imple-
menting regulations, or these specifications, the Director shall proceed in accor-
dance with 41 CFR 60-4.8.
14. The contractor shall designate a responsible official to monitor all
employment related activity to ensure that the company EEO policy is being carried
out, to submit reports relating to the provisions hereof as may be required by the
Government, and to keep records. Records shall at least include for each employee,
the name, address, telephone number, construction trade, union affiliation if any,
employee identification number when assigned, social security number, race, sex,
status (e.g., mechanic, apprentice, trainee, helper, or laborer), dates of changes
in status, hours worked per week in the indicated trade, rate of pay, and locations
at which the work was performed. Records shall be maintained in an easily
understandable and retrievable form; however, to the degree that existing records
satisfy this requirement, contractors shall not be required to maintain separate
records.
15. Nothing herein provided shall be construed as a limitation upon the appli-
cation of other laws which establish different standards of compliance or upon the
application of requirements for the hiring of local or other area residents (e.g.,
those under the Public Works ~~ployment Act of 1977 and the Community Development
Block Grant Program).
EEO REQUIREMENTS
00510-8E
---------
o
B.
CONTRACTOR CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS
Dur!ng ehe perfor:ance o( e~13 contract, the contractor, (or itsel(, its assignees
a~Q successcrs Ln Lnterest (hereina(ter referred t~ as the RcontractorR) agrees as
(ollows:
1. Cc=c11ance with Re~lat10ns. The contractor shall comply with the
Regulat!ons relat!ve to nond13cri=inat10n Ln (ederally ass1sted progra=s o( the
Depart~ent 0' Transportatlon (here~~after, RDO!R) ritle ~9, Code of Feeeral
RegulatLons, ?art 21, as they =a1 be amended (ro= t!=e to tice (hereinarter
referred to as ehe Regulations), which are here1n incor?orated by reference and
made a part 0' this contract.
~
2. Ncnd1scr1=inat!on. The contractor, with regard to the vork perfor:ed by
lt dur!ng the contract, shall not d13cri=lnate on the gro~~ds 0' race, color, or
national or!6~~ Ln the selectlon and retention o( subcontractors, including pro-
cure=ents 0' materials and leases o( equlpment. The contractor shall not par-
t!cipate either directly or indirectly in the discr~ination proh1b1ted by section
21.5 o( the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a
program set forth ~~ Appendix B o( the Regulations.
3. Sclicitations (or Subcontracts, Includ1n~ Proc~reoents o( Kater!als and
Ecui::ent. I~ all solic1tations e1ther by cocpetitive bidd1ni or negotiation made
by the contractor for vork to be per(or=ed under a subcontract, 1ncludL~g procure-
ments of =aeerials or leases of equ1pment, each potential subcontractor or supplier
shall be ~oti'ied b7 the contractor o( the contractor's ob11gat10ns under th1s
contract and ehe Re~~lations relat~ve to nondiscr~ination on the groundS ot race,
color, or nae10nal origin.
q. !nfor--aticn and Recorts. The contractor shall provide all intor--ation
and reports requL-ed by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto and
shall per:it access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of 1ntor:ation,
and its fac11ities as =ay be dete~red by the Sponsor or the Federal Av1at10n
Ad:inLstrat1on (FAA) to be pertinent to ascerta1n"compliance with such' Regulations,
orders, and instr~ct10ns. "bere any intor=at10n required of'a contractor is in the
exclusive possession ot another who fails or refuses to furnish this infor--ation,
t~e contractor shall so cer~ify to the sponsor or the FAA, as appropr!ate, and
shall set rort~ ~at efforts it has made to obtain the intor=at1on.
(
5. Sanctions for ~oncoQoliance. In the event ot the contractor's non-
coapl1ance ~1t~ the nond1~cric1nat1on provisions of this contrac~, the sponsor
shall icpo~e suc~ cont~act sanctions as it or t~e FAA may deter:ine to be
appropriate, 1ncluding, but not limited to:
a. Withholding of payments to the contrac~or under the contract until ~~e
contractor complies, and/or
b. Cancellation, ter=ioation, or suspension ot the contract, in whole or
in part.
6. Inc:r:orat1cn of Provision~. The contractor shall ~~clude the provisions
of paragraphs 1 thr~u;h 5 in every subcontract, i~cludiDS procure=ents of :aterials
and leases of equip=ent, unles~ exeapt by the Reo~lations or directives issued pur-
suant thereto. The contractor shall take such act~on with re~pect to any sub-
contract or pr~cure:ent as the sponsor or the FAA =ay direct as a means of
enforoing such provisions including sanctions tor noncompliance. Provided,
however,'that Ln the event a contractor becomes involved ta, or 1s threatened with,
11tigation with a s~bcontractor or supplier as .'result ot such direction, the
contractor :a1 request the Sponsor to enter into sucn litigat10n to protect the
interests of the spon~or and, in addition, the contractor may request the United
States to eneer into such l1tigation ~o protec~ the interests of the Un1ted States.
EEO REQUIRE~ENTS
00510-8F
( '.
7
C. Eaual Emolovment Oooortunitv Clause. During the performance
of this contract the contractor agrees as follows:
--' ,', 1. The contractor will not discriminate against any
employee or applicant for employment because of race, color,
religion, sex, or national origin. The contractor will take
affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and
that employees are treated during employment without regard to
their race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Such
act ion s hall in c 1 u de, but no t bel i m i t e d to the f,o 110 win g :
employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruit:nent or
recruitment advertising; layoff or termination, rates of payor
other forms of compensation; and selection for training,
including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in
conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for
employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions
of this nondiscrimination clause.
2. The contractor will, in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the
contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive
consideration for employment without regard to race, color,
religion, sex, or national origin. -
,
,
3. The contractor will send, to each labor union or
reoresentative of workers with which he has a collective
bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice
to be provided advising that said 'labor union or worker 's
representatives of the contractor's commitments under this
section and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places
available to employees and applicants for employment.
4. The contractor will comply with all provisions of
Executive Order 11246, as amended, of September 24, 1965, and of
the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of
Labo r.
S. The contractor will furnish all information and reports
required by Executive Order 11246, as amended, of September 24,
1965, and by rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of
Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books,
records, and accounts by the FAA and the Secretary of Labor for
purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such
rules, regulations and orders.
6, In the event of the contractor's noncomoliance with the
nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or W:ith any of the
said rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be
cancelled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the
contractor may be declared ineligible for further government
contracts or federally assisted construction contracts in
accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246,
EEO REQUIREMENTS
00510-8G
8
.'
".
as amended,
be imposed
11246, as
regulation,
provic3~d by
of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may
and remedies'invoked as provided in Executive Order
amended, of September 24,1965, or by rules,
or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise
law.
--'
~ The contractor will include the portion of the sentence
immediately preceding paragraph 1 and the provisions of
paragraphS 1 through 7 in every subcontract or purchase order
unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary
of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order 11246,
as amended, of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will
be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The qontractor
will take such action with respect to any,subcontract or purchase
order as the FAA may direct as a means of enforcing such
provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance; provided,
however, that in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or
is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as
a result of such direction by the ~AA, the contractor may request
the United States to enter into such litiga tion to protect the
interests of the United States.
D. Notices to be Posted. The "Equal Employment Opportunity is
the Law" poster is' to be posted by the contractor in a
conspicuous place available to employees and applicants for
employment as required by paragraphs (1) and (3) of the EEO
clause. ;.. ,-;',.
t
E. Notice of Reauirement for Affirmaeive Action to Ensure Equal
E~ployment Opportunity (Executive Order 11245, As Amended).
1. The Offerer's or Bidder's a ttention is called to the
"Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal
Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications" set
forth herein.
2. The goals and timetables for minority and female
participation, expressed in percentage terms for the contractor's
aggregate work force in each trade on all construction work in
the covered area are as follows:
Timetables
Goals for minority participation
for each trade
Goals for female
participation in
each trade
0"
C~'.
30, 4~:
Insert goals for each year
6.91
Insert goals for
each year
EEO REQUIRE~ENTS
00510-8H
9
These goals are applicab'le to all the contractor's construction
work (whether or not it is federal or federally assisted)
performed in the covered area. If the contractor performs
construction work in a geographical area located outside of the
cover'ed areas, it shall apply the goals established for such
geographical area where the work is actually performed. With
regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to the
goals for both its federally involved and nonfederally involved
construction.
The contractor's compliance with the executive order and the
regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be baseq on its
implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific
affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set
forth in 41 CFR 60-4.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals.
The hours of minority and female employment and training must be
substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and
in each trace, and the contractor shall make a good faith effort
to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects.
The transfer of minority or female employees or' trainees from
contractor to contractor or from project to project, for the sole
purpose of meeting the contractor's goals, shall be a violation
of the contract, the 'Executive Order, and the regulations in 41
CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured
against the total work hours performed.
3. The. contractor shall provide written notif ica tion to
the Director, OFCCP, within 10 wor~ing days of award of any
construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier of
construction work under the contract resulting from this
solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address,
telephone number of the subcontractor; employer identification
number of the subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the
subcontracts; estimated starting and completion dates of the
subcontract; and the geographical area in which the subcontract
is to be performed.
4. As used in this notice and in the contract resulting
from this solicitation, the "covered area" is
F. Reauired Reoorts.
1. Monthly U,tiliza'tion Reports (SF 257). Based on
paragraph (5) of the EEO clause, ~onthly Utilization R~ports (SSF
257) :nay be required to be subm~tted to the area off~ce of . the
Federal Contract Compliance Program that serves the geograph~cal
area in which this project is located. Contractors must contact
the area office to see if this report ~s required.
EEO REQUIREMENTS
00510-81
2. E m p 1 0 V e e I n for mat ion R e p 0 r t (S F - 1 0 0 ) .
Contractors/subcontractors working on federally-assisted projects
are required to file with the sponsor annually, on or before
March 31, complete and accurate reports on Standard Form 100
(Employee Information Report, EEO-l). The first such report is
required within 30 days after award unless the
contractor/subcontractor has submitted such a report within 12
months preceeding the date of award (the FAA or the Department of
Labor can designate other intervals). This form is normally
furnished, based on a mailing list, but can be obtained from the
Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) - Survey Division,
2401 E. St., NW., Washington, D.C. 20507 or by calling (703) 756-
6020. This report is required if a contractor or subcontractor
meets all of the following conditions:
a. Nonexempt. I f contractors/subcontractors are not
exempt based on 41 CFR 60-1.5;
b. Number of Employees. Has 50 or more employees;
c. Dollar Level. Has a contract, subcontract or
purchase order amounting to $50,000 or more or serves as a
depository of government funds in any amount, or is a financial
institution ~hich is an issuing-j~d paying agent for U.S. savin~s
bonds and saving notes; and
d. Contractor/Subcontractor. Is a prime ~ontra~tor or
f'-st tier contractor. Some contractors below the f1rst t1erbwho
w~~k at the site are required to file if they meet the a ove
requirements.
EEO REQUIREMENTS
00510-8J
5910861-000
mumTHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
!!K)RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 00600 - GBOTECHNICAL
DATA
A geotechnical exploration of existing conditions in the general area at the site
of this project has been performed and reports of the findings and
recommendations are bound at the end of this project manual.
"REPORT OF A GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION, MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL" by Law
Engineering is available, only as information as a convenience to the bidders,
and expressly not as a part of the contract documents.
Actual subsurface conditions which may be encountered in connection with this
project may vary widely from the report described above, and any information or
conclusions drawn from this report shall be at the bidder's risk.
Neither Owner, Architect nor any of their respective consultants, agents and
employees makes any promise, representation or guarantee as to the accuracy of
the geotechnical information made available herein.
END OF SECTION 00600
GEOTECHNICAL DATA
00600-1
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
RBW PASSBRGBR TBRllIHAL BUILDING
MJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBcrION 00700 - GBRBRAL
CONDITIONS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
The "GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION," (AlA Document A201)
Pages One through Twenty-four, inclusive, AlA Document No. A201, 1987 Edition as
published by THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, Articles 1 through 14,
inclusive, are incorporated into this agreement, are attached at the end of this
Section and are supplemented in Section 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
END OF SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
00700-1
THE
AMERICAN
INSTITUTE
o F
ARCHITECTS
AlA Document A201
General Conditions of the Contract
for Construction
THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES; CONSULTATION
WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED WITH RESPECT TO ITS MODIFICATION
1987 EDITION
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1, GENERAL PROVISIONS
8, TIME
2, OWNER
9, PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
3, CONTRACTOR
10, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
4, ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
11, INSURANCE AND BONDS
5, SUBCONTRACTORS
12, UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
6, CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY
SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
13, MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
7, CHANGES IN THE WORK
14. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
CONTRACT
This document has been approved and endorsed by the Associated General Contractors of America,
Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1%7, 1970, 1976, @1987 by The American Institute of Architects, 1735
New York Avenue, N,W" Washington. D,C, 20006, Reproduction of the material herein or substantial quotation of its provisions without written
permission of the AlA violates the copyright laws of the United States and will be subject to legal prosecutions,
~ CAUTION: You should use an original AlA document which has this caution printed in red.
~ An original assures that changes will not be obscured as may occur when documents are reproduced.
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITtON
AlA'" . @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTtTUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W" WASHINGTON, D,C, 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and Is subject to legal prosecution,
A201-1987 1
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work, 9,6,6,9,9,3,12,3
Acceptance of Work 9,6,6,9,8,2,9,9,3,9,10,1,9,10,3
Access to Work, """.""""",.""" 3,16, 6,2,1, 12, I
Accident Prevention, 4,2,3, 10
Acts and Omissions 3,2, 1,3,2,2,3,3,2.3,12,8,3,18,4,2,3,4,3,2,
43,9,8,3,1,10,1.4,10,2,5,13.4.2,13,7,14,1
Addenda 1.1 ,1, 3 11
Additional Cost, Claims for ," 4,3,6,4,3,7,4,3,9, 6,l.1, 10,3
Additional Inspections and Testing, 4,2,6,9.8.2, 12,2, I, 135
Additional Time, Claims for, , , , , , , , 4,3,6,4,3.8,4,3,9,8,3,2
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3,3,3,4, 94, 9.5
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, ' , , " 1,1,1
Aesthetic Effect, ' , , " 4,2,13,45.1
Allowances 3,8
All-risk Insurance, 11,3,1,1
Applications for Payment 4,2,5,7.3.7,9,2,9,3,9.4,95.],9,6,3,
9,8,3,9,10,1,910,3,9.104,11.1.3,14,24
2.4,3,33,3.5,3,10,2,3,124 through 3,12,8, 3,18,3,
4,2,7,9,3.2, ]1.3,1.4, 1:-'>.4,2, ]3,5
4,14,4,3.2,4,34,444,4,5,
8.3,1,10,1.2,11.3,9, 11.3,10
Architect 4.1
Architect, Definition of, ' 4,1,1
Architect, Extent of Authority, 24,3,12,6,4,2,4,3.2,4,3,6,
4.4,5,2,6,3,7,1.2,721,7,3,6,74,9,2,9,3,1,
94,9.5,9.6.3,9.8.2,9.8,3,9,10.1,9.10,3,12,1,12,2,1,
13.5.1,1:\5,2,14.22, ]4,2.4
Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility, 3,3,3,3,12,8,
3,12,11,4.1.2,4,21,4,2,2,4,2,3,426,4,2,7,4.2,10,4.2.12,
4,2,13,4.32,5,2.1,7.4,94.2,9,64,96,6
Architect's Additional Services and Expenses, 24,9,8,2,
1 1.3,l.1, 12,2,1, 12.24, 1),5.2, 13.5.3,14,24
Architect's Administration of the Contract 4.2, 4,,3,6,
43,7,44,94,9,5
Architect's Approvals 24,3.5.1,3,10,2,3,12,6,3,12,8, .3,18,.3, 4,2,7
Architect's Authority to Reject Work ' .3.51,4,2,6,12,1.2,12,2,1
Architect's Copyright 1,.3
Architect's Decisions, ' 4,2,6,4,2,7,4,2,11,4,2,12,4,2,1),
4.3,2,4.36,4.4.1,44.4,45, (1.3, 7,.3,6, 7..38, 81.3, 8,3.1,
9.2,94,9.5.1,9,8,2,9.9,1,10,1.2,1:\.5.2,142,2,14.24
Architect's Inspections, 4,2,2,4,2,9,4,3,6,9.4,2,9.8.2,
9,9,2,9,10,1,13,5
4.2,6,4,2,7,4.2,8,4,3,7,7.4.1,12,1,1.3,5,2
4,2,]],42, ]2,4,.3,7
4,2.2,4.2.5,4,36,942,
9.5.1,9101,1:\,)
Architect's Project Representative 4,2,10
Architect's Relationship with Contractor 1 1,2,.3 ,2,1, 3,2,2,
3,3,3,3.5,1, .37.3, 3.11, 3,12,8, .3.12.11, .3,16, .3,18, 4,2.3, 4.2.4,
4,2,6,4,2,]2,5,2,6,22,7,.3.4,9.8.2, 1l.:\7, 12,1, 13,)
Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors, I, 1,2,4,2,.3,4,24,
426,9,6,.3, 9,6.4, 1137
9.4.2,9),1,9101
4.2.2,4,2.5,4.2.9,4..3,6,9.4,2,9.51,
9.iU, 9,9,2, 9,10,1, 15,5
10,1
.3,18,1,9.10,2,10,14
6,1,1
Approvals ,
Arbitration
Architect's Instructions,
Architect's Interpretations,
Architect's On-Site Observations
Architect's Representations,
Architect's Site Visits,
Asbestos
Attorneys' Fees ,
A ward 0 f Separate Contracts,
Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for
Portions of the Work '
Basic Definitions , .
Bidding Requirements
Boiler and Machinery Insurance
Bonds, Lien
Bonds, Performance and Payment ,
5,2
1,1
l.1,I, l.l,7, 5.2.1,114,1
11,3,2
9,10.2
7,.3.6.4,9.10,3,11.3,9, 1[.4
INDEX
Building Permit 3,7, I
CapitalizatIon, 1.4
Certificate of Substantial Completion, 9,8,2
Certificates for Payment , , 4,2,),4,2.9.9.3.3,9.4,9,5,96,1,
9,6,6,9,7,1, 9,8.}, 9,10,1, 9,10,3.1.3,7, 14,l.1.3, 14,2.4
Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval , 3,12,11, 13.5.4
Certificates of Insurance 9,.3 ,2, 9, lO,2, ] 11.3
Change Orders , '." 1.1,1,2.4.1,3.8.24,3,11,4.28,43,.3,5.2..3,
7,1,7,2,7,3,2.8,3.1,9,3,1.1,9,10,3,11.3,1.2,
11.3.4, ] 1.,3,9, 12,1.2
Change Orders, Definition of , , 7,2,1
Changes" " " " , " , " " 7,1
CHANGES IN THE WORK 3,1 ], 4,2,8,7, 8.3.1,9.3.l.1, 10 1.3
Claim. Definition of , , ' 4,3,1
Claims and Disputes. 4,3,44,4,),6,2.5,8,3.2,
9,3,1.2,9,3,3,9,104,10,1.4
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 4.5.6
Claims for Additional Cost, 4.3.6,4,3,7,4,3.9, 6l.1, 10,,3
Claims for Additional Time, 4,3,6,4.3.8,4.3,9,8,3,2
Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions, 4,3,6
Claims for Damages, , ,3,18.4,3,9,6, l.1, 62,5, 8,.3,2, 9.5. 1.2, ] 0, 1.4
Claims Subject to Arhitration, 4,,3,2,4.4.4,4,),1
Cleaning Up 3.15,6,3
Commencement of Statutory limitation Period 13,7
Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to , 2,1,2,
2,2,1,3,2,1,3,2,2,3,7,1,3,10,1,3,12,6,43,7,5.2, I,
6,2.2,8,1.2,8,2,2,9,2, II 1.3,11..3.6, 11.4,1
Commencement of the Work, Definition of, 8,1,2
Communications Facilitating Contract
Administration 3,9, 1,4,24,5,2,1
Completion, Conditions Relating to , 3,11,3,15,4,2,2,4,2,9,
4,3,2,9.42,9,8,9.9.],910, ] 1.3,5, 12.2,2, ]3,7,]
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND . 9
Completion, Substantial, 4,2,9,4,3.5.2,8,1,1,8,] ,3, 8.2,3,
9,8,9.9.1,12,2,2,137
Compliance with Laws, 1.3,3,6,3,7,3,13,4,] I, 10,2.2, 1l.1,
]13,13.1, U.5.1, 13.5.2, 13,6, ]4,l.1, 14,2,1.3
Concealed or Unknown Conditions, ' 4,:\,6
Conditions of the Contract 1,1 ,I, I 1,7, 6,1,1
Consent. Written 13,1,3,12,8,3, ]4,2,4,1,2,
4.3.4, 4.5.5, 9.:\,2, 9,8.2, 9.9,1, 9,10.2, 9, ]0,3, 10, 1.2, 10.13,
] 1.3,1,113,14, ] 1.3,] 1,1.3,2,1,3.4.2
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE
CONTRACTORS ' . 114,6
Construction Change Directive, Definition of, 7,,'1,]
Construction Change Directives, l.1,], 4,2,8, 7,],7,3,9.:\, l.l
Construction Schedules, Contractor's ,'1,10,6,13
Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4
Continuing Contract Performance 4,3,4
Contract, Definition of ' 1 1,2
CONTRACT , TERMINATION OR
SUSPENSION OF THE 4 3,7, ).4. 1.1, 14
Contract Administration .'\,.3,.3,4,9.4,9,)
Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to .'\,7,1,
:\,10, 5,2,9,2, 11.1 ,:\, 11.36. 11.4,1
Contract Documents, The 1,1, 1. 2, 7
Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of. !,.'\, 2,2,5, ),,3
Contract Documents, Definition of 1 I, I
Contract Performance During Arbitration, 4,.'\."1, q, 53
Contract Sum . 38,43,6,4,3.7,4.4.4,5,2,3,
61.3,7,2,73,9.1,9,7,11.3.1, ]2.24, 12.3, 14.2.4
Contract Sum, Det1nition of. ' 9,1
Contract Time 4.'\,6,4,3,8, 4.4.4, ~2.1 ,:\,7,3,
8,2,1,8,3,1,9,7,12,l.1
Contract Time, Definition of , ' 8,1.1
2 A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @I987THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW, WASHINGTON, D,C, 21J1J1J6
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
CONTRACTOR , , , ' , , , , , , ' , , , , , . , , , , , , ' , , , , , , ' , , . , 3
Contractor, Definition of ' , , , , ' , , , , , ' , , , , , " 3.1,6,1.2
Contractor's Bid, , , , , , ' , , , , , ' , , , , , , , ' , , . , , , " 1,1,1
Contractor's Construction Schedules . , ' , , , , , ' , , " 3,10, 6,1,3
Contractor's Employees 3,3,2,3.4,2,3,8,1.3,9,3,18,4,2,3,
4,2,6,8,1.2,10,2,10,3,11.1.1,14,2,1.1
Contractor's Liability Insurance, ' , , , , , , , ' " 11,1
Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors
and Owner's Forces 2,2,6,3,12,5,3,14,2,4,2.4,6, 12,2,5
Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors, 1.2.4,3,3,2,
3,18,1, 3,18.2, 5,2. 5,3, 5.4, 9,6,2, 11.3,7. 11.3,8. 14,2,1.2
Contractor's Relationship with the Architect , " 1,1.2,3,2,1,3,2,2,
3,3,3,3,5,1,3,7,3.3.11,3,12,83,16,3,18,4,2,3, 4,2.4, 4,2,6.
4,2,12,5,2,6,2,2,7.3.4,9.8,2, 11.3,7,12,1,13,5
Contractor's Representations, 1,2,2,3.5.1,3,12,7.6,2.2,8,2,1,9,3,3
Contractor's Responsibility for Those
Performing the Work ' , , , , , , " 3,3,2,3,18,4,2,3, 10
Contractor's Review of Contract Documents, 1.2.2,3,2,3,7,3
Contractor's Right to Stop the Work, , , ' ' , , , , , , , " 9,7
Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 14, I
Contractor's Submittals 3,10,3,11,3,12,4,2,7,5,2,1,5,2,3,
7,3,6,9,2,9,3,1,9,8,2,9,9.1,9.10.2,
9,10.3, 10,1.2, 11.4,2, 11.43
Contractor's Superintendent, , 3,9,10,2,6
Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures, , ' 1.2.4,
3,3,3.4,4,2,3,8,2,2,8,2,3, 10
11.1.1.7,11.2,1
1.2.2.1.2.4,3,3,1,
3,10,3.12,7,6,1.3,6,2,1
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications" 1,3,2,2,5,3, II
Correction of Work ' , , , , " 2,3.2.4,4,2,1,9,8,2,
9,9,1,12,1.2,12,2,13,7,1.5
Cost, Definition of , ' ' , , , , , , , , , ' 7,3,6,14,3,5
Costs 2.4,3.2,1,3,7.4,5,8,2,3,15,2,4,3,6,4.3,7,4,3,8,1,5,25,
6,1.1,6,2,5,63, 73,3,3, 7,5,6, 7,3,7,9,7,9,8,2,9,10,2, 11,3,1,2,
11.3,1.5,11.3.4,1159,12,1,12,2,1.12,2.4,12,2,5,13,5,14
Cutting and Patching, 3.14, 6.2 ,6
Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3,14.2,
6,2.4,95,1.5,10,2,1.2,10,2,5,10,5,11.1,11.5,12,2,5
Damage to the Work , 3,14,2,9,9,1,10,2,1.2,10.2.5,10,5,11.3
Damages, Claims for, :U8, 4,5,9, 6,1.1,6,2,5,8,3,2,9.5.1.2, 10,1.4
Damages for Delay , """" 6,1.1,8,3,5,9,5,1.6,9,7
Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of, , 8,1,2
Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of. 8,1,5
Day, Definition of. ' , , , , , , , 8,1.4
Decisions of the Architect, 4,2,6, 4,2,7,4,2, 11, 4,2,12, 4,2,13,
4,5,2,4,3,6,4.4,1,44.4,4.5,6,5,7,5,6,7,3,8,8.1.3, 8,3.1, 9,2,
94,9.5.1,9,8,2,9,9,1,10,1.2.13.5.2,14.2,2,14.24
Decisions to Withhold Certification 9,5, 9,7, 14. 1 . 1:\
Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,
Rejection and Correction of """" 2,3,24,5,5,1,4,2,1,
4,26,4,5.5,9.5.2,9.8.2,9,9,1,10.2,5, 12,15715
Defective Work, Definition of 5,5, I
Definitions, 1.1,2,1.1,:\, 1,5.5.1,3,12, 1,5,12,2, :\,12,3, 4,1.1,
4,5.1,5,1,6,1.2,7,2.1,7,3,1,7,3,6,8,1,9,1,9,8,1
Delays and Extensions of Time ' 4,5,1,4,3,8,1,4,5,8.2,
6,1.1,6,2,5,7,2,1,7,3,1,734,7,35,758,
7,3,9, 8,l.l, 8,3,10,3,1,14,1.1.4
Disputes 4,1.4,4,3,44,4,5,6,2,5,6,3,7,:\,8,9,5,1.2
Documents and Samples at the Site 3, II
Drawings, Definition of ' , , , , , , , , , , , , , ' , I, 1,5
Drawings and Specifications, l.)se and Ownership of, 1,1,1, 1,3,
2,2,5,3,11.5,5
Duty to Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions, 3,2
Effective Date of Insurance, 8,2,2, 11,1,2
Contractual Liability Insurance, '
Coordination and Correlation
Emergencies, ' , , 4,3,7,10.3
Employees. Contractor's 3,3,2,3.4,2,3,8,1,3,9,3,18,1,
3,18,2,4.2,3,4,2,6,8,1.2,10.2,10,3, 11.1,1,14,2,1.1
Equipment, Labor. Materials and, ' , , , , , " 1. 1.3, 1. 1.6,3.4,3.5.1,
3,8,2,3,12,3,3,12,7,3,12.11,3,13,3,15,1,4.2,7,
6,2,1,7,3,6,9,3,2,9,3,3, 11.3,12,24,14
Execution and Progress of the Work '" 1.1.3,1.2,3,3,2,3.4.1,
3,5,1, 4,2,2, 4,2,3, 4,3.4. 4.3,8, 6,2,2, 7,1.3,
7,3,9,8,2,8,3,9,5,9,9,1,10,2,14.2,14,3
Execution, Correlation and Intent of the
Contract Documents ' 1,2, 3,7,1
Extensions of Time 4,3,1,4,3,8,7,2,1.3,8,3, 10,3, I
Failure of Payment by Contractor , "" 9,5,1.3,14,2,1.2
Failure of Payment hy Owner ""','" 4,3,7,9,7,14,1.3
Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work)
Final Completion and Final Payment 4,2, 1,4,2,9,4,3,2,
4,3,5,9,10,11.1.2,11.1.5,11.3,5,12.3,1,13,7
Financial Arrangements, Owner's, 2,2,1
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance ' , 11,3
GENERAL PROVISIONS. 1
Governing Law 13,1
Guarantees (See Warranty and Warranties)
Hazardous Materials ' ' " '" , ' 10,1,10,24
Identification of Contract Documents 1,2, I
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers, 5,2,1
Indemnification, 5,17,3,18,9,10,2,10,1.4,11.3,1.2,11.3,7
Information and Services Required of the Owner, , " 2, I ,2, 2.2,
4.34,61.3,6,1.4,6,2.6,9,3,2,961,964,9.8.3,9,9,2,
9,10,3,10,1.4,11.2,11.5,13.5.1,13.52
Injury or Damage to Person or Property, 4,3.9
Inspections, 3.3,3,3,54,3.7,1,4,2,2,
4,2,6,4,29,4,3.6,94,2,9.8,2,9,9,2.9,10.1,13,5
Instructions to Bidders, I, I , I
Instructions to the Contractor , 5.8.1,4,2,8,5,2,1,7,12,1, U.5.2
Insurance, 4,3,9,6,1.1,7,3,6.4,9,3,2,9,8,2,9,9, 1,9,10,2, 11
Insurance, Boiler and Machinery 11,3.2
Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11.1
Insurance, Effective Date of 8,2,2, 11,1,2
Insurance, Loss of Use, . , , , , , , , 11.5,5
Insurance, Owner's Liability. . 11,2
Insurance, Property, 10,2,5,11,3
Insurance, Stored Materials 9,3,2, 11,5 14
11
,.9,9,1,11311
11.3,10
1.2,3,3.12.4,
42,6,4,27,4,2,12, 42U, 74
Interest, 13,6
Interpretation, 1.2,5,1.4,1,5,4,1.1,4,3,1,5,1,6,1.2,8.14
Interpretations, Written 4,2, II, 4,2,12,4,5,7
Joinder and Consolidation of Claims Required, , , 4.5.6
Judgment on Final Award, 4.5,1,4.5.4, 1,4,5,7
Labor and Materials, Equipment, 1.1 ,3, 1.1.6,3,4, 3.5.1, 3,8,2,
3.12.2,3,12,3,5,12.7,3,12,11,31:3, :3,15,1,
4.2,7,6,2,1,7,:3,6,9.3,2,9,:3,5,1224,14
Labor Disputes, ' H,:3, I
Laws and Regulations 1.:3,3,6,3,7, :3,13, 4.l.l, 4.55, 4.5.7,
9,9,1,10.2,2, 11.1, 11.:3, 1:3,1, 1:34, 13.51, 15,5,2, 1:3,6
Liens, 2,1.2,4,:\,2,4,3.51,8,2,2.9,:3,:3,910,2
Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder 4,5,5
Limitations, Statutes of 4.54,2,12,2,6,13,7
Limitations of Authority, 3,:3, 1,4,1.2, 4,2, I,
4,2.5,4,2,7,4.2,10,5,2.2,5,2.4,7.4,113,10
INSURANCE AND BONDS
Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy
Insurance Companies, Settlement with, , ,
Intent of the Contract Documents,
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @ 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW" WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
A201.1987 3
Limitations of Liability, , 2,3,3,2, 1,3,5, 1,3,7,3,3,12,8.3,12, II,
3,17,3,18,4,2,6,4,2.7,4,2,12,6,2,2,9.4,2.9,6.4,9,10.4,
10,1.4,10,2,5, IU,2, IL2,I, 11.3,7, 13.4.2, 13.5.2
Limitations of Time. General 2,2,1.2,2.4,3,2,1,3,7,3,
3,8,2.3,10,3.12,5,3,15,1,4,2,1,4,2,7.4,2.11,4,3.2,
4,3.3,4,3.4,4.3,6,4,3,9,45.4,2,5,2,1,5,2,3,6,2.4.7.3.4,7.4.
8,2, 9,5, 9,6,2, 9,8, 99, 9,10, I U .3. 11.3.1, 11.3,2, 11.3,5,
11.3,6,12,2,1,12,2,2,13,5,13,7
Limitations of Time, Specific, 2,1.2,2,2, 1,2.4,3,10,3, II,
3,15.1,4.2.1,4,2,11,4,3.4,4,4,5.5,3,5.4,7,3,5, 7,3,9. 8,2,
9,2. 9,3, I, 933, 9.4, I, 9,6, I, 9.7, 9,8,2, 9.10,2, 11.1.3, 11.3,6,
11.3,10, 11.3.11, 12,2,2, 12,2.4, 12,2,6, 13,7, 14
Loss of Use Insurance, """"""" 11,3.3
Material Suppliers, 1.3,1, :U2,1, 4,2.4. 4,2,6,5,2,1.
9,3, I, 9.3, L2, 9,3.3, 9.4.2, 9,6,5, 9,10.4
Materials. Hazardous 10, I, 10,2.4
Materials, Labor, Equipment and, 1,1,3, I, I ,6,3,4,3.5.1,3.8.2,
3.12,2,3123,3,12,7,3,12,11,3,13,3,15.1,4.2.7,6,2.1,
7.3.6,9,:\,2,933, 12.2.4, 14
Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and
Procedures of Construction, 3,3, I, 4,2,3, 4,2,7,9.4.2
Minor Changes In the Work , I U, 4,2,8, 4,3,7, 7,1,7,4
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS. 13
Modifications, Definition of , I , I , I
Modifications to the Contract 1. 1,1,1. 1.2,3,7,3,:U I,
4.L2, 4,2.1, 52,3, 7, 8,:\,1, 9,7
Mutual Responsibility , , . , . , , . &,2
Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of , 12,3
Nonconforming Work. Rejection and Correction of , 2,3, I,
4.3.5,9.5.2,9.8,2,12,1371.3
23,2.4,3.2.1, :\2.2, 37,3, 3.7.4, 3,9,)12,8,
3.12.9,3,17,4:\,4.4.4,4.5,5,2.1,5,3,5.41 1,8,2.2,9.41,
9,5,1,9,6,1,9,7,910, 10,L2, 10,2,6, 11.1.3,11.3,12,2,2,
12.2.4,133, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14
Notice, Written 2,:\,2.4, :\,9, 3,12,8, :\,12,9,4,3,
4.4.4,4.5,5,2.1,5:\, 5.4,l.l, 8,2,2, 9.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 9,10,
10L2, 10,2,6, Il.l,:\, II..), 12.2.2, 12,2.4,13,3,13.5.2,14
Notice of Testing and Inspections, 1:\.5.1, 13,5,2
Notice to Proceed, 8.2,2
Notices, Permits, Fees and 2,2,3,3,7,3,13,7,:\,6.4, 10,2,2
Observations, Architect's On,Site 4,2,2,4,2,5,
'1,),6,9.4,2,9,5.1,9,10,1,13,5
1,2.2,3,2.2
9,6,6,9.8.1,9,9, 11..)11
4.2.2,42.9,4,:\,6,
9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9,9,2, 910,1
'1.2.2,4,25,4.3.6,
9A,2, 9,5.1, ,),10,1,13,5
2,,),3,'),4.3,7,7,8.2.2,11.3,'),12,1,
12,2,1:\5,2,14,3,1
OWNER. 2
Owner, Definition of 2.1
Owner, Information and Services Required ofthe , 2,1.2,
2,2,4,3.4,6,9,10,1.4, I L2, 11.:\,13.5.1,14,1.1.5,141..)
Owner's Authority 38,1,4,1,,),4,2,'),5,2.1. 5,2.4, 5.4,1,
7.3.1,8,2,2, '),31, '),:\,2, liA,l, 12.2.4,13,5,2,14,2,14,3,1
Owner's Financial Capability 2,2,1,14,1 1.5
Owner's Liability Insurance 11,2
Owner's Loss of Use Insurance, 11,3,3
Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors, 1,1,2,
5,2,1,5.4.1,96.4
2.4, 12,2.4. 14,2,2,2
&,3
Notice,
Ohservations, Contractor's,
Occupancy,
On,Site Inspections by the Architect
On,Site Observations by the Architect,
Orders, Written
Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work
Owner's Right to Clean Up
Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to
Award Separate Contracts ' , " , , , , , " , " , " " &,1
Owner's Right to Stop the Work, 2,3,4,3,7
Owner's Right to Suspend the Work, , , , , , , , , , , 14,3
Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14,2
Ownership and Use of Architect's Drawings, Specifications
and Other Documents , U,I.1.3, 2,2,5, 5,3
Partial Occupancy or Use , , , , , , , , 9,6,6,9,9, 11.3, II
Patching, Cutting and, 3,14, 6,26
Patents, Royalties and 3.17
Payment, Applications for 4,2,5,9,2,9,3,9.4,
9.5,1,9,8,3, 9,lO.l, '),10,:\, 9,10.4,14.24
Payment, Certificates for , 4,2,5,4,2.9.9,:\,:\,9,4, '),5,
9,6,1,9,6,6,9,7,1,9,8,3,9.10,1,9,10,3,13,7, l4U3, 14.2.4
Payment, Failure of. 4,3.7,9.5.1.3,
9.7,9,10,2, 141.1:\, 14,2,L2
'12.1,42,9,4,:\.2,4,:\,5.910, 11.l2,
11.1.3, 11..),5, 12,3,1
7,:\64,
9,10:\, 11.3,9. 11,4
4.:\.4,9,3, '),6,
98.5, 9lO.5, 13,6, 14,2,)
9, h
5.4.2, '),5,1..),
9.6.2, '),6,3, 9,6.4, 11..).8, 142,1.2
10,1
7.:\.6.4,
'), I 03, 11.,),'), 11.'1
Permits, Fees and Notices. 2,2,3,3,7, :\,13,73,6.4, IOI2
PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF . 10
Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10, I
Product Data, Definition of, 3,12,2
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings. 3,11,3,12,42,7
Progress and Completion 4,2.2,4.:\.4,8,2
Progress Payments '1,3.4, ')5,
9,&, ').8.3, ')10,,), I,'\.(>, 1'125
Project, DefInition of the, 1,1,4
Project Manual, Definition of the , 1,1,7
Project Manuals 2,2,5
Project Representatives '1,2, 10
Property Insurance 102 5.11,3
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY. 10 .
Regulations and Laws 1.:\,3,6,3,7, ,),13, 4,1, I, '15,5,
4,5,7, lO.22, Il.l, 11..),13,1, 1:\.4, 13.5.1, 1352, 1,),6, 1'1
Rejection of Work :\,5,1,4,2,6, 12,2
Re1eases of Waivers and Liens , ,),10,2
Representations, 1.2,2, 3,5 I, 5,12,-.
6.22,8,2,1, '),:\:\, ').4.2, 9.5,1, '),1'2, '), III I
2,1.l, 3,1.l, ,),'),
4.11.4,2,1,4,2,10, 5,1.l, 5l.2, 1:\21
Resolution of Claims and Disputes . 4,4, '1,5
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work, ,''--'',2,
'123, 6,1,5, 62, Ii)
Retainage, '),3,1,9,6,2,')i'U,'),'),I,') 10,2,9 103
Review of Contract Documents and Field
Conditions by Contractor ,
Review of Contractor's Submittals by
Owner and Architect
Payment, Final,
Payment Bond, Performance Bond and
Payments, Progress
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
Payments to Subcontractors ,
PCB,
Performance Bond and Payment Bond,
Representatives,
l.2,2, 3,2, :\.7.5, 5127
:\,10.1,5102, :\,11, 512,
4,2,7,42'),5,2,1,525, ')2, ').8.2
Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data
and Samples by Contractor, ,),12,5
Rights and Remedies , 1.l.2,2,3,24,3.5.1,5,15,2,
4,2,6,4,3,6,4,5,5,5,61,6,:\,7,:'>.1, iJ,,),I, ')51, ()7, lO,2,5,
10,3,12,2,2,12.24,13,4,1'1
3,17
Royalties and Patents ,
4 A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITIOl'
AIA@ . @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW" WASHINGTON, D,c. 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
4.5,2
10,2
4,2,3.4,2,7,10.1
3,12,3
3,11,3.12,4,2,7
3,11
9.2,9,3,1
3,10
1.1.4,3,14,2,4,2.4,
4.5.5,6,11.3,7,12,1.2,12,25
Shop Drawings, Definition of , , ' , , " 3,12,1
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, 3,11,3,12,4,2,7
Site, Use of, 3.13,6,1.1,6,2,1
Site Inspections , ,,1.2,2,3,3.4.4,2,2,4,2,9,4,3,6,9,8,2.9,10,1,13,5
Site Visits, Architect's, 4,2,2,4,2,5.4,2,9,4,3,6,
9.4.2,9,5.1,9.8.2.9,9,2,9.101,13,5
Special Inspections and Testing ," 4,2,6,12,2,1,13.5
Specifications, Definition of the, , ' 1,1,6
Specifications, The, 1. Ll, 1,1.6, Ll ,7,1.2.4,1.:3,3,11
Statutes of Limitations , ' 4.5.4,2,12,2,6,13,7
Stopping the Work , 2,:3,4,3,7,9,7,10,1.2,10,:3,14,1
Stored Materials, ' 6,2,1,9,3,2,10,2,1.2,11.:3,1.4,12,2.4
Subcontractor, Definition of. 5,1.1
SUBCONTRACTORS . 5
Subcontractors, Work hy, 1.2.4, :3,:3,2, :3,12,1,
4,2,:3, 5:3, 5.4
Subcontractual Relations, ""'," 5,3,5.4,9,:3, I ,2,9,6,2,
9,6,:3,9,6.4,10,2,1,11.:3,7,11.3,8, 14,Ll, 142,1.2, 14,:3,2
Suhmittals 1.3, :3,2,:3, 3,10, :3,11, :3,12,4,2,7,5,2,1,5,2,:3,
7:3,6,9.2,9,:3.1,9,8.2,9,9,1,9,10.2,9,10,:3,10.1.2,11.1.3
Subrogation, Waivers of , 6, Ll, 11.3,5,11,3,7
Substantial Completion , " 4,2,9,4.:3.5.2,8,Ll,8,1.3,
8,2,:3,9,8,9,9,1,12.2.1,12.2,2,1:3,7
Suhstantial Completion, Definition of. ' , , , , , , , 9,8, I
Suhstitution of Subcontractors 5,2,:3,5,2.4
Substitution of the Architect, 4,1,:3
Substitutions of Materials ' , , , , , , ' :3,5,1
Sub~subcontractor, Definition of 5,1,2
Subsurface Conditions, ' , , , , , , , , , ' 4,:3,6
Successors and Assigns 13,2
Superintendent 3,9, ](),2,6
Supervision and Construction Procedures 1,2.4,3,3, 3.4,
4,2,:3,4,:3.4,6,1.3,6,2.4,7,1.:3,7,3.4,8,2,8,3,1,10,12,14
4.4.1,4.4.4,5.4,1.2.9,10.2,9,10,:3,14,2.2
9,9,1,9.10.2,910,3
2,2,2, :3,18,:3
Rules and Notices for Arbitration ' ,
Safety of Persons and Property , , '
Safety Precautions and Programs
Samples, Definition of , , ' , , , '
Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Samples at the Site, Documents and ' , ,
Schedule of Values ' , '
Schedules, Construction
Separate Contracts and Contractors , ,
Surety ,
Surety, Consent of.
Surveys,
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience "" 14,3
Suspension of the Work 4,3,7,5.4,2,14,1.1.4,14,:3
Suspension or Termination of the Contract ,," 4,3,7,5.4.1.1,14
Taxes ' , " 3.6,7,3,6.4
Termination by the Contractor, , , , ' 14,1
Termination by the Owner for Cause , ' 5.4. Ll, 14.2
Termination of the Architect ,,""," 4,1.3
Termination of the Contractor, , , , ' 14,2,2
TERMINATlONORSUSPENSIONOFTHECONTRACT ,...., 14
Tests and Inspections 3,3,:3,4,2,6,4,2,9,9.4,2, 12,2,1,13.5
TIME"". 8
Time, Delays and Extensions of 4,3,8,7,2, 1,8.3
Time Limits, Specific ' ,,' 2,1.2,2,2,1,2.4, :3,10, 3,11, :3,15,1,
4,2,1, 4,2,11, 4,3, 4.4, 4.5, 5,3, 5.4, 7,:3,5, 7,:3,9, 8,2, 9,2, 9,:3.1,
9,:3,3, 9.4.1, 9,6,1, 9,7, 9,8,2, 9,10.2, 11.1.3, 11.3,6, 11.3,10,
11.3,11, 12,2,2, 12,2.4, 12,2,6, 1:3,7, 14
Time limits on Claims, ' 4,:3,2,4,3,3,4,3,6,4,3,9,4.4,4,5
Title to Work 9,32,9,3,3
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12
Uncovering of Work " 12.1
Unforeseen Conditions 4,3,6,8,3,1, ]0,1
Unit Prices, 7,1.4,7,3,3,2
Use of Documents " 1.11,1.:3,2,2,5, :3,12,7, 5,3
Use of Site 3,13,6, Ll, 6,2,1
Values, Schedule of 9.2,9,:3,1
Waiver of Claims: Final Payment, 4,3.5,4,5,1,9,10,:3
Waiver of Claims by the Architect, 1:3.4,2
Waiver of Claims by the Contractor, 9,10.4, 11.3,7, 13.4,2
Waiver of Claims by the Owner, ' 4,3,5,4.5.1,9,9,3,
9.10.3,11.3,3,11.3,5,11.3,7,13.4,2
Waiver of Liens , , ' 9,10,2
Waivers of Subrogation, ' 6,1. 1, 11.3,5, 11.:3,7
Warranty and Warranties, 3.5,4.2,9,
4,:3.5.:3,9,3.3,9.8.2,9,9,1,12,2,2,I,U1.3
Weather Delays, 4,:\,8.2
When Arbitration May Be Demanded 4,5,4
Work, Definition of , I, I ,3
Written Consent, 1.:3,1, :3,12.8. :3,14,2, 4,1.2, 4,:3.4,
4.5,5,9,3,2,9,8,2,9.9.1,9,10.2,9,10,:3,10,1.2,10.1.3,
11.:3.1,11.31.4,11.311,1:3,2,1:3.4,2
Written Interpretations, 4,2,11,4,2.12,4,:\,7
Written Notice, , , , ' 2,3,2.4,3,9,:3,12.8, :3.12.9, 4,:3, 4.4.4,
4,5,5,2.1,5,3, 5.4,Ll, 8.2.2, 9,4,1, 9.5.1, 9,7, 9,10, ]0,1.2,
10,2,6,11.1.:3,11.:\,12,2,2,12,2.4,13,3,13,5,2,14
Written Orders, 2,:3,3,9,4,:\,7,
7,8,2,2,11.:3,9,12.1,12,2,13.5.2,14:31
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @19R7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS. 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. NW" WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
A201-1987 5
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
ARTICLE 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between
Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement), Conditions
of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions),
Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of
the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and
Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modifi-
cation is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by
both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change
Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work
issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the
Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other
documents such as bidding requirements (advertisement or
invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the
Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding
requirements),
1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction,
The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement
between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,
representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Con-
tract may be amended or modified only by a Modification, The
Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contrac-
tual relationship of any kind (1) between the Architect and Con-
tractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or Sub-
subcontractor or (3) between any persons or entities other than
the Owner and Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be
entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under
the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the
Architect's duties,
1,1.3 THE WORK
The term "Work" means the construction and services
required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or
partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials.
equipment and services provided or to be provided by the
Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations, The Work
may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work per-
formed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a
part and which may include construction by the Owner or by
separate contractors,
1,1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Con-
tract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued,
showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work,
generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, sched-
ules and diagrams,
1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents
consisting of the written requirements for materials, equip-
ment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for
the Work, and performance of related services,
1.1.7 THE PROJECT MANUAL
The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the
Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample
forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications,
1.2 EXECUTION, CORRELATION AND INTENT
1.2.1 The Contract Documents shall be signed by the Owner
and Contractor as provided in the Agreement. If either the
Owner or Contractor or both do not sign all the Contract
Documents, the Architect shall identify such unsigned Docu-
ments upon request.
1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a repre-
sentation that the Contractor has visited the site. become famil-
iar with local conditions under which the Work is to be per-
formed and correlated personal observations with require-
ments of the Contract Documents,
1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all
items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the
Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are comple-
mentary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if
required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be
required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Docu-
ments and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary
to produce the intended results,
1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections
and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the
Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in
establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade,
1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,
words which have well-known technical or construction indus-
try meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accord-
ance with such recognized meanings,
1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF ARCHITECT'S
DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER
DOCUMENTS
1.3.1 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents
prepared by the Architect are instruments of the Architect's
service through which the Work to be executed by the Con-
tractor is described, The Contractor may retain one contract
record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-
subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or
claim a copyright in Ihe Drawings, Specifications and other
documents prepared by the Architect, and unless otherwise
indicated the Architect shall be deemed the author of them and
will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights,
in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the
Contractor's record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted
for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the W'ork.
The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared
by the Architect, and copies thereof furnished to the Contrac-
tor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not
to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-
subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other proj-
ects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the
6 A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TIlE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @ 19R~ THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 17:\5 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON, [),c. 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
Work without the specific written consent of the Owner and
Architect. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors
and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited
license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Draw-
ings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the
Architect appropriate to and for use in the execution of their
Work under the Contract Documents, All copies made under
this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any,
shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents
prepared by the Architect. Submittal or distribution to meet
official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in con-
nection with this Project is not to be construed as publication
in derogation of the Architect's copyright or other reserved
rights,
1.4 CAPITALIZATION
1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include
those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of num-
bered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subpara-
graphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other
documents published by the American Institute of Architects,
1.5 INTERPRETATION
1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents fre-
quently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and arti-
cles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an
article is absent from one statement and appears in another is
not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement,
ARTICLE 2
OWNER
2.1 DEFINITION
2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in
the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number. The term "Owner" means
the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative,
2.1.2 The Owner upon reasonable written request shall furnish
to the Contractor in writing information which is necessary and
relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or
enforce mechanic's lien rights, Such information shall include a
correct statement of the record legal title to the property on
which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and
the Owner's interest therein at the time of execution of the
Agreement and, within five days after any change, information
of such change in title. recorded or unrecorded,
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES
REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2,2.1 The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior
to execution of the Agreement and promptly from time to time
thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that
financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's
obligations under the Contract. [Note: Unless such reasonable
el'idence u'ere furnished on request prior to the execution of
the Agreement, the prmpectil'e contractor would not be
required to execute the Agreement or to commence the Work.}
2.2.2 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical
characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site
of the Project, and a legal description of the site,
2.2.3 Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility
of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner
shall secure and pay for necessary approvals. easements, assess-
ments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy
of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing
facilities,
2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner's control shall
be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to
avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work.
2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of
Drawings and Project Manuals as are reasonably necessary for
execution of the Work.
2.2.6 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and respon-
sibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those
in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate
Contractors), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Article
11 (Insurance and Bonds),
2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents
as required by Paragraph 12,2 or persistently fails to carry out
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner,
by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so
empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contrac-
tor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for
such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the
Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part
of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Con-
tractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent
required by Subparagraph 6,1.3,
2,4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4,1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails
within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from
the Owner to commence and continue correction of such
default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner
may after such seven-day period give the Contractor a second
written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second
seven-day period, If the Contractor within such second seven-
day period after receipt of such second notice fails to com-
mence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner
may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may
have, correct such deficiencies, In such case an appropriate
Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or
thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such defi-
ciencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional
services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect
or failure, Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to
the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Archi-
tect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not
sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACTOR
3.1 DEFINITION
3.1,1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such
in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor"
means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized
representative,
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION. FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, I ns NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006
A201-1987
7
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND
FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the
Contract Documents with each other and with information
furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2,2,2 and
shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or
omissions discovered, The Contractor shall not be liable to the
Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsis-
tencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the
Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission
and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Con-
tractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves
a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract
Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contrac-
tor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such perfor-
mance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable
costs for correction.
3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify
field conditions and shall carefully compare such field mea-
surements and conditions and other information known to the
Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing
activities, Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall
be reported to the Architect at once,
3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pur-
suant to Paragraph 3, 12,
3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,
using the Contractor's best skill and attention, The Contractor
shall be solely responsible for and have control over construc-
tion means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures
and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Con-
tract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instruc-
tions concerning these matters,
3.3.2 The Cont~actor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts
and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors
and their agents and employees, and other persons performing
portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor.
3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to per-
form t'he Work in accordance with the Contract Documents
either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's
administration of the Contract. or by tests, inspections or
approvals required or performed by persons other than the
Contractor.
3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection ofpor-
tions of Work already performed under this Contract to deter-
mine that such portions are in proper condition to receive sub-
sequent Work.
3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equip-
ment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water,
heat, utilities. transportation, and other facilities and services
necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,
whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorpo-
rated or to be incorporated in the Work.
3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good
order among the Contractor's employees and other persons
carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit
employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks
assigned to them,
3.5 WARRANTY
3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that
materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be
of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permit-
ted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free
from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted,
and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, Work not conforming to these require-
ments, including substitutions not properly approved and
authorized, may be considered defective, The Contractor's
warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by
abuse. modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper
or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal
wear and tear under normal usage, If required by the Architect,
the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind
and quality of materials and equipment,
3.6 TAXES
3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales. consumer, use and similar
taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Con-
tractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or
negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely
scheduled to go into effect.
3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES
3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit and
other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections
necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work
which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract
and which are legally required when bids are received or nego-
tiations concluded,
3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices
required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful
orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the
Work,
3.7.3 It is not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that
the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable
laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regula-
tions, However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the
Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor
shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and
necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate
Modification,
3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be con-
trary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and
regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner,
the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work
and shall bear the attributable costs,
3.8 ALLOWANCES
3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all
allowances stated in the Contract Documents, Items covered
by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such
persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor
shall not be required to employ persons or entities against
which the Contractor makes reasonable objection,
3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:
,1 materials and equipment under an allowance shall be
selected promptly by the Owner to avoid delay in the
Work;
.2 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of
materials and equipment delivered at the site and all
required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;
8 A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @t987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW,. WASHINGTON, D.C 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
.3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the
site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and
other expenses contemplated for stated allowance
amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum and
not in the allowances;
.4 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,
the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by
Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall
reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the
allowances under Clause 3,8,2,2 and (2) changes in
Contractor's costs under Clause 3,8,2,3,
3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superinten-
dent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the
Project site during performance of the Work The superinten-
dent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given
to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Con-
tractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writ-
ing, Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on
written request in each case.
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Con-
tract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's
information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work
The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the
Contract Documents, shaH be revised at appropriate intervals as
required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shaH be
related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Con-
tract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practi-
cable execution of the Work
3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare Rnd keep current, for the
Architect's approval, a schedule of submittals which is coordi-
nated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows
the Architect reasonable time to review submittals,
3.10.3 The Contractor shaH conform to the most recent
schedules,
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner
one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda,
Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and
marked currently to record changes and selections made during
construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Prod-
uct Data, Samples and similar required submittals, These shall
be available to the Architect and shaH be delivered to the Archi-
tect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work,
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and
other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or
a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or
distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work
3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, per-
formance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other
information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials
or equipment for some portion of the Work.
3,12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate
materials. equipment or workmanship and establish standards
by which the Work will be judged,
3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data. Samples and similar sub-
mittals are not Contract Documents, The purpose of their sub-
mittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for
which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes
to conform to the information given and the design concept
expressed in the Contract Documents, Review by the Architect
is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.2.7,
3.12.5 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the
Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar
submittals required by the Contract Documents with reason-
able promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in
the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate con-
tractors, Submittals made by the Contractor which are not
required by the Contract Documents may be returned without
action,
3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work
requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product
Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submit-
tal has been approved by the Architect. Such Work shall be in
accordance with approved submittals,
3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product
Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents
that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field
measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or
will do so. and has checked and coordinated the information
contained within such submittals with the requirements of the
Work and of the Contract Documents,
3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility
for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents
by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has
specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation
at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written
approval to the specific deviation, The Contractor shall not be
relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Draw-
ings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Archi-
tect's approval thereof
3,12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing
or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or
similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by
the Architect on previous submittals,
3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is
not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in
the Contract Documents,
3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria
of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract
Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the
accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifi-
cations,
3.13 USE OF SITE
3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to
areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract
Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with
materials or equipment.
3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting. fitting
or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts
fit together properly,
3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion
of the Work or fully or partiaHy completed construction of the
Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or other-
wise altering such construction, or by excavation, The Contrac-
tor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . CD 19R7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW" WASHINGTON, [),C 2000(,
A201-1987
9
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of
the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall
not be unreasonably withheld, The Contractor shall not unrea-
sonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the
Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
3.15 CLEANING UP
3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surround-
ing area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish
caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the
Work the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project
waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction
equipment, machinery and surplus materials,
3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the
Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost
thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
3,16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect
access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever
located,
3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees,
The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of
patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless
from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for
such defense or loss when a particular design, process or prod-
uct of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by
the Contract Documents, However, if the Contractor has rea-
son to believe that the required design, process or product is an
infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for
such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the
Architect.
3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor
shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Archi-
tect's consultants. and agents and employees of any of them
from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ-
ing but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting
from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, dam-
age, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness,
disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible prop-
erty (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting
therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by
negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor,
anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for
whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not
such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party
indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed
to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of
indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person
described in this Paragraph 3,18,
3,18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified
under this Paragraph 3,18 by an employee of the Contractor, a
Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them
or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnifica-
tion obligation under this Paragraph 3,18 shall not be limited by
a limitation on an10unt or type of damages, compensation or
benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor
under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability
benefit acts or other employee benefit acts,
3.18.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph
3,18 shall not extend to the liability of the Architect, the Archi-
tect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them
arising out of (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings.
opinions, reports. surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifica-
tions, or (2) the giving of or the failure to give directions or
instructions by the Architect, the Architect's consultants, and
agents and employees of any of them provided such giving or
failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage,
ARTICLE 4
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 ARCHITECT
4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully licensed to practice
architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture iden-
tified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout
the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term
"Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized
representative,
4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the
Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be
restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the
Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unrea-
sonably withheld,
4.1.3 In case of termination of employment of the Architect,
the Owner shall appoint an architect against whom the Con-
tractor makes no reasonable objection and whose status under
the Contract Documents shall be that of the former architect.
4.1.4 Disputes arising under Subparagraphs 4,1.2 and 4,1.3
shall be subject to arbitration,
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION
OF THE CONTRACT
4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract
as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the
Owner's representative (1) during construction, (2) until final
payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from
time to time during the correction period described in Para-
graph 12,2, The Architect will advise and consult with the
Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the
Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance
with other provisions of the Contract.
4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to
the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the
progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine
in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicat-
ing that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with
the Contract Documents, However, the Architect will nOl be
required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections
to check quality or quantity of the Work, On the basis of on-
site observations as an architect, the Architect will keep the
Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to
guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work,
4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and
will not be responsible for construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions
and programs in connection with the Work, since these are
solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph
3,3, The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's
failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents, The Architect will not have control over or charge
of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Con-
10
A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AlA'" . @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 17~'i NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W, WASHINGTON, D.c 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
tractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any
other persons performing portions of the Work.
4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administra-
tion. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents
or when direct communications have been specially autho-
rized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communi-
cate through the Architect, Communications by and with the
Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Commu-
nications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers
shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with
separate contractors shall be through the Owner,
4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of
the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will
review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will
issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts,
4.2.6 The Architect will have authority to reject Work which
does not conform to the Contract Documents, Whenever the
Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementa-
tion of the intent of the Contract Documents. the Architect will
have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the
Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13,5,2 and 13.5.3,
whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed,
However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision
made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such
authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Archi-
tect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment
suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons perform-
ing portions of the Work,
4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve or take other
appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the
limited purpose of checking for conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Docu-
ments, The Architect's action will be taken with such reason-
able promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the
activities of the Owner, Contractor or separate contractors,
while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional
judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals
is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy
and completeness of other details such as dimensions and
quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or
performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the
responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract
Documents, The Architect's review of the Contractor's submit-
tals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under
Paragraphs 3,3,3.5 and 3,12, The Architect's review shall not
constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise
specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, The Architect's
approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an
assembly of which the item is a component.
4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construc-
tion Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in
the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4.
4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the
date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final
completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the
Owner's review and records written warranties and related
documents required by the Contract and assembled by the
Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon
compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will pro-
vide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying
out the Architect's responsibilities at the site, The duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project
representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorpo-
rated in the Contract Documents,
4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concern-
ing performance under and requirements of the Contract
Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contrac-
tor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made
with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed
upon, If no agreement is made concerning the time within
which interpretations required of the Architect shall be fur-
nished in compliance with this Paragraph 4,2, then delay shall
not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect to fur-
nish such interpretations until 1 5 days after written request is
made for them,
4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be
consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the
Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of
drawings, When making such interpretations and decisions, the
Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both
Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and
will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so
rendered in good faith,
4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic
effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the
Contract Documents,
4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.3.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of
the parties seeking, as a matter of right. adjustment or interpre-
tation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time
or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The
term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in ques-
tion between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relat-
ing to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice,
The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the
party making the Claim.
4.3.2 Decision of Architect. Claims, including those alleging
an error or omission by the Architect, shall be referred initially
to the Architect for action as provided in Paragraph 4.4. A deci-
sion by the Architect, as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4, shall
be required as a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation
of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such
matters arising prior to the date final payment is due, regardless
of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of
the Work or (2) the extent to which the Work has been com-
pleted, The decision by the Architect in response to a Claim
shall not be a condition precedent to arbitration or litigation in
the event (1) the position of Architect is vacant, (2) the Architect
has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision
within agreed time limits, (3) the Architect has failed to take
action required under Subparagraph 4.4.4 within 30 days after
the Claim is made, (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has
been referred to the Architect or (5) the Claim relates to a
mechanic's lien,
4.3.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be
made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to
such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes
the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims
must be made by written notice, An additional Claim made
after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order
will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner.
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @19H7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W, WASHINGTON, D,C 20006
A201-1987 11
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
4.3.4 Continuing Contract Perfonnance. Pending final reso-
lution of a Claim including arbitration, unless otherwise agreed
in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with perfor-
mance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make
payments in accordance with the Contract Documents,
4.3.5 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. The making of final
payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner
except those arising from:
.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances aris-
ing out of the Contract and unsettled;
.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements
of the Contract Documents; or
.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract
Documents,
4.3.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If con-
ditions are encountered at the site which are (I) subsurface or
otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materi-
ally from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2)
unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which dif-
fer materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally
recognized as inherent in construction activities of the
character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice
by the observing party shall be given to the other party
promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later
than 2 I days after first observance of the conditions, The Archi-
tect will promptly investigate such conditions and. if they differ
materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's
cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the
Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time, or both, If the Architect determines that
the conditions at the site are not materially different from those
indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the
terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall so notify
the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons,
Claims by either party in opposition to such determination
must be made within 21 days after the Architect has given
notice of the decision, If the Owner and Contractor cannot
agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,
the adjustment shall be referred to the Architect for initial deter-
mination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph
4,4,
4.3.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to
make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice
as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute
the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an
emergency endangering life or property arising under Para-
graph 10,3, If the Contractor believes additional cost is
involved for reasons including but not limited to (I) a written
interpretation from the Architect. (2) an order by the Owner to
stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault, (3) a writ-
ten order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Archi-
tect, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the
Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner's suspension or (7) other
reasonable grounds. Claim shall be filed in accordance with the
procedure established herein,
4.3.8 Claims for Additional Time
4.3.8.1 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase
in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be
given, The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost
and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the
case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary,
4,3.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim
for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data
substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the
period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated,
and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the
scheduled construction,
4.3.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party
to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property
because of an act or omission of the other party, of any of the
other party's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts
such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or
damage, whether or not insured. shall be given to the other
party within a reasonable time not exceeding 2 I days after first
observance, The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable
the other party to investigate the matter. If a Claim for addi-
tional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall
be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4,3,7 or 4,3,8,
4.4 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
4.4.1 The Architect will review Claims and take one or more of
the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a
Claim: (I) request additional supporting data from the claimant,
(2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Archi-
tect expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in
part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of
the Claim by the other party or (5) suggest a compromise, The
Architect may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if
any, of the nature and amount of the Claim,
4.4.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Architect will prepare or
obtain appropriate documentation,
4.4.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the
Claim shall, within ten days after the Architect's preliminary
response. take one or more of the following actions: (1) submit
additional supporting data requested by the Architect, (2)
modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Architect that the initial
Claim stands,
4.4.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the
foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or
requested by the Architect. the Architect will notify the parties
in writing that the Architect's decision will be made within
seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the
parties but subject to arbitration, Upon expiration of such time
period, the Architect will render to the parties the Architect's
written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in
the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both, If there is a surety
and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor's default,
the Architect may. but is not obligated to, notify the surety and
request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy,
4.5 ARBITRATION
4.5,1 Controversies and Claims Subject to Arbitration. Any
controversy or Claim arising out of or related to the Contract,
or the breach thereof, shall be settled by arbitration in accor-
dance with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the
award reJ,ldered by the arbitrator or arbitrators may be entered
in any court having jurisdiction thereof, except controversies
or Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived as
provided for in Subparagraph 4,3,5, Such controversies or
Claims upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered
a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.4 shall be subject to
arbitration upon written demand of either party, Arbitration
may be commenced when 45 days have passed after a Claim
has been referred to the Architect as provided in Paragraph 4,:\
and no decision has been rendered,
12 A201.1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTIO:-.l . FOURTEE:-.ITH EDITtO:-.l
AIA@ . @19H7 THE AMERICAN INSTITl:n: OF ARCHtTECTS, 1"55 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHt:-.lGTO:-.l, D.l:. 2000(,
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
4.5.2 Rules and Notices for Arbitration. Claims between the
Owner and Contractor not resolved under Paragraph 4.4 shall,
if subject to arbitration under Subparagraph 4.5,1, be decided
by arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry
Arbitration Rules of the American Arbitration Association cur-
rently in effect, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise.
Notice of demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with
the other party to the Agreement between the Owner and Con-
tractor and with the American Arbitration Association, and a
copy shall be flled with the Architect.
4.5.3 Contract Perfonnance During Arbitration. During arbi-
tration proceedings, the Owner and Contractor shall comply
with Subparagraph 4,3.4,
4.5.4 When Arbitration May Be Demanded. Demand for arbi-
tration of any Claim may not be made until the earlier of (1) the
date on which the Architect has rendered a final written deci-
sion on the Claim, (2) the tenth clay after the parties have pre-
sented evidence to the Architect or have been given reasonable
opportunity to do so, if the Architect has not rendered a final
written decision by that date, or (3) any of the five events
described in Subparagraph 4,3,2,
4.5.4.1 When a written decision of the Architect states that (1)
the decision is final but subject to arbitration and (2) a demand
for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be
made within 30 days after the date on which the party making
the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to
demand arbitration within said 30 days' period shall result in
the Architect's decision becoming final and binding upon the
Owner and Contractor. If the Architect renders a decision after
arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may
be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration pro-
ceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties
concerned,
4.5.4.2 A demand for arbitration shall be made within the time
limits specified in Subparagraphs 4,5,1 and 4,5.4 and Clause
4,5.4 ,1 as applicable, and in other cases within a reasonable
time after the Claim has arisen, and in no event shall it be made
after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings
based on such Claim would be barred by the applicable statute
of limitations as determined pursuant to Paragraph 13,7,
4.5.5 Limitation on Consolidation or Joinder. No arbitration
arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents shall
include, by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,
the Architect, the Architect's employees or consultants, except
by written consent containing specific reference to the Agree-
ment and signed by the Architect, Owner, Contractor and any
other person or entity sought to be joined, No arbitration shall
include. by consolidation or joinder or in any other manner,
parties other than the Owner, Contractor, a separate contrac-
tor as described in Article 6 and other persons substantially
involved in a common question of fact or law whose presence
is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, No
person or entity other than the Owner, Contractor or a separate
contractor as described in Article 6 shall be included as an orig-
inal third party or additional third party to an arbitration whose
interest or responsibility is insubstantial. Consent to arbitration
involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute
consent to arbitration of a dispute not described therein or with
a person or entity not named or described therein, The fore-
going agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate
with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties
to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under appli-
cable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof
4.5.6 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims. A party who
files a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the
demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitra-
tion is permitted to be demanded, When a party fails to include
a Claim through oversight, inadvertence or excusable neglect,
or when a Claim has matured or been acquired subsequently,
the arbitrator or arbitrators may permit amendment.
4.5.7 Judgment on Final Award. The award rendered by the
arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be
entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court
having jurisdiction thereof
ARTICLE 5
SUBCONTRACTORS
5.1 DEFINITIONS
5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct
contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work
at the site, The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout
the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a
Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcon-
tractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate
contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a
direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a
portion of the Work at the site, The term "Sub-subcontractor"
is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular
in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized
representative of the Sub-subcontractor.
5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER
CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or
the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as prac-
ticable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to
the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or enti-
ties (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment
fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal por-
tion of the Work. The Architect will promptly reply to the Con-
tractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the
Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to
any such proposed person or entity, Failure of the Owner or
Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reason-
able objection,
5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed per-
son or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made rea-
sonable and timely objection, The Contractor shall not be
required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has
made reasonable objection,
5,2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a
person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor
shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no
reasonable objection, The Contract Sum shall be increased or
decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change
and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued, However, no
increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change
unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in
submitting names as required,
5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person
or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes
reasonable objection to such change,
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRCCTION . FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @ 1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON, D,c. 20006
A201-1987 13
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required
for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to
the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,
to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Docu-
ments, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations
and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Docu-
ments, assumes toward the Owner and Architect Each subcon-
tract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the
Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with
respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so
that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and
shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided
otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all
rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the
Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the
Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-sub-
contractors, The Contractor shall make available to each pro-
posed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract
agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the
Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the
Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and condi-
tions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at
variance with the Contract Documents, Subcontractors shall
similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents
available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors,
5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is
assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that:
.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the
Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Para-
graph 14,2 and only for those subcontract agreements
which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcon-
tractor in writing; and
.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety,
if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract
5.4.2 If the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,
the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted,
ARTICLE 6
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER
OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION
AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or
operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,
and to award separate contracts in connection with other por-
tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the
site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially
similar to these including those portions related to insurance
and waiver of subrogation, If the Contractor claims that delay
or additional cost is involved because of such action by the
Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided else-
where in the Contract Documents,
6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different por-
tions of the Project or other construction or operations on the
site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each
case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate
Owner-Contractor Agreement,
6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activi-
ties of the Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor
with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with
them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate con-
tractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction sched-
ules when directed to do so, The Contractor shall make any
revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum
deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement,
The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules
to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the
Owner until subsequently revised,
6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
when the Owner performs construction or operations related
to the Project with the Owner's own forces, the Owner shall be
deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the
same rights which apply to the Contractor under the Condi-
tions of the Contract, including, without excluding others,
those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11
and 12,
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate con-
tractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of
their materials and equipment and performance of their activi-
ties and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's con-
struction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract
Documents,
6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper
execution or results upon construction or operations by the
Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to
proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to
the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other
construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper
execution and results, Failure of the Contractor so to report
shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or sepa-
rate contractors' completed or partially completed construction
is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to
defects not then reasonably discoverable,
6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities
or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsi-
ble therefor.
6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrong-
fully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially com-
pleted construction or to property of the Owner or separate
contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10,2.5.
6.2,5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question
between the Contractor and a separate contractor shall be sub-
ject to the provisions of Paragraph 4,3 provided the separate
contractor has reciprocal obligations,
6.2.6 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the
same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described
for the Contractor in Paragraph 3,14,
6.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate con-
tractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their
respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surround-
ing area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in
Paragraph 3,15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost
among those responsible as the Architect determines to be just.
14
A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAl. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @I987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 173'; NEW YORK AVENeE, NW" WASHINGTON,]) ( ,2000(,
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
ARTICLE 7
CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 CHANGES
7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execu-
tion of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by
Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a
minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in
this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents,
7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among
the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change
Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and
mayor may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a
minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect
alone.
7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under appli-
cable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contrac-
tor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the
Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a
minor change in the Work
7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or
subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally con-
templated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Con-
struction Change Directive that application of such unit prices
to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity
to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be
equitably adjusted,
7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
7.2,1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the
Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect,
stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1 a change in the Work;
.2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if
any; and
.3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if
any,
7.2.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract
Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7,3,3,
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order pre-
pared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,
directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for
adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or
both, The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,
without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work
within the general scope of the Contract consisting of addi-
tions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Con-
tract Time being adjusted accordingly,
7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the
absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.
7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an
adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based
on one of the following methods:
.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized
and supported by sufficient substantiating data to per-
mit evaluation;
.2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or sub-
sequently agreed upon;
.3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by
the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percent-
age fee; or
.4 as provided in Subparagraph 7,3,6,
7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive. the
Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the
Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's
agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided
in the Construction Change Directive for determining the pro-
posed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,
7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contrac-
tor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, includ-
ing adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the
method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effec-
tive immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.
7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees
with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the
method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Archi-
tect on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of
those performing the Work attributable to the change, includ-
ing, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable
allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under
Clause 7,3,3,3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such
form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting
together with appropriate supporting data, Unless otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of
this Subparagraph 7,3,6 shall be limited to the following:
,1 costs of labor, including social security, old age and
unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by
agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's
compensation insurance;
.2 costs of materials, supplies and equipment, includ-
ing cost of transportation, whether incorporated or
consumed;
,3 rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of
hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or
others;
.4 costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit
fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the
Work; and
.5 additional costs of supervision and field office person-
nel directly attributable to the change,
7.3.7 Pending final determination of cost to the Owner,
amounts not in dispute may be included in Applications for
Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contrac-
tor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net
decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as con-
firmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits
covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a
change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured
on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change,
7.3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the
adjustment in Contract Time or the method for determining it,
the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect
for determination,
7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the deter-
mination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in
the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agree-
ment upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective
immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execu-
tion of an appropriate Change Order.
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AlA'" . @19R7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, NW, WASHINGTON, OC 20()o6
A201-1987 15
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes
in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or
extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the
intent of the Contract Documents, Such changes shall be
effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner
and Contractor, The Contractor shall carry out such written
orders promptly,
ARTICLE 8
TIME
8.1 DEFINITIONS
8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period
of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Con-
tract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date
established in the Agreement, The date shall not be postponed
by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities
for whom the Contractor is responsible,
8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified
by the Architect in accordance with Paragraph 9,8,
8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall
mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined,
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the
essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Con-
tractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period
for performing the Work.
8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agree-
ment or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely com-
mence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective
date of insurance required by Article II to be furnished by the
Contractor, The date of commencement of the Work shall not
be changed by the effective date of such insurance, Unless the
date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed
given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in
writing not less than five days or other agreed period before
commencing the Work to permit the timely filing of mortgages,
mechanic's liens and other security interests,
8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expcditiously with ade-
quate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within
the Contract Time,
8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any timc in progress of the
Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an
employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by
the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor
disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties
or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay
authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by other
causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then
the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such
reasonable time as the Architect may determine,
8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with
applicable provisions of Paragraph 4,3,
8.3,3 This Paragraph 8,3 does not precludc rccovery of dam-
ages for delay by either party under other provisions of the
Contract Documents,
ARTICLE 9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.1 CONTRACT SUM
9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, includ-
ing authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the
Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under
the Contract Documents,
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment. the Contractor
shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to
various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and sup-
ported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect
may require, This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect,
shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applica-
tions for Payment,
9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each
progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect
an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed
in accordance with the schedule of values, Such application
shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data
substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner
or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from
Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage
if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents,
9,3.1,1 Such applications may include requests for payment on
account of changes in the Work which have been properly
authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet
included in Change Orders,
9.3.1.2 Such applications may not include requests for pay-
ment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a
Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other
reason,
9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment
delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incor-
poration in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner,
payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment
suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing,
Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site
shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with
procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's
title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the
Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance,
storage and transportation to the site for such materials and
equipment stored off the site,
9.3,3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by
an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than
the time of payment, The Contractor further warrants that
upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for
which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued
and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the
Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and
clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in
favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or
other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having
provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work
9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
9.4,1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the
Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the
16
A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' iCJ[:Rn:ENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1755 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W., WASHINGTON, D,c:. 2000(,
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contrac-
tor, for such amount as the Architect determines,is properly
due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the
Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in
part as provided in Subparagraph 9,5, 1 ,
9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a
representation by the Architect to the Owner. based on the
Architect's observations at the site and the data comprising the
Application for Payment. that the Work has progressed to the
point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect's knowl-
edge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accor-
dance with the Contract Documents, The foregoing representa-
tions are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance
with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to
results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations
from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion
and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The
issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a
representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the
amount certified, However, the issuance of a Certificate for Pay-
ment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1)
made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3)
reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors
and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner
to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made
examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contrac-
tor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract
Sum,
9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
9.5.1 The Architect may decide not to certify payment and
may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to
the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the
Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required
by Subparagraph 9.4,2 cannot be made, If the Architect is
unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the
Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in
Subparagraph 9.4,1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot
agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a
Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect
is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Archi-
tect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of
subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations,
may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment
previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the
Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of:
.1 defective Work not remedied;
.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicat-
ing probable filing of such claims;
.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments prop-
erly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or
equipment;
.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be com.
pleted for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5 damage to the Owner or another contractor;
.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be com-
pleted within the Contract Time. and that the unpaid
balance would not be adequate to cover actual or
liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or
.7 persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance
with the Contract Documents,
9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are
removed, certification will be made for amounts previously
withheld,
9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,
the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the
time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify
the Architect.
9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor,
upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount
paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's por-
tion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is
entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments
to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion
of the Work, The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement
with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make
payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontrac-
tor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of com-
pletion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action
taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of por-
tions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation
to payor to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor
except as may otherwise be required by law,
9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner
similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9,6,2,9,6,3 and 9.6.4,
9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial
or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall
not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the
Contract Documents,
9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
9.7.1 If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,
through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after
receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the
Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the
date established in the Contract Documents the amount cer-
tified by the Architect or awarded by arbitration, then the Con-
tractor may, upon seven additional days' written notice to the
Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the
amount owing has been received, The Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be
increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of
shut-down, delay and start-up, which shall be accomplished as
provided in Article 7,
9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the
Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is suffi-
ciently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents
so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended
use,
9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a por-
tion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is
substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit
to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed
or corrected, The Contractor shall proceed promptly to com-
plete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on
such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to
complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Docu-
ments, Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will
make an inspection to determine whether the Work or desig-
AlA DOCUMENT A201 · GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AlA'" . @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. NW" WASHINGTON, D,C. 20006
A201-1987 17
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
nated portion thereof is substantially complete, If the
Architect's inspection discloses any item. whether or not
included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contrac-
tor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Com-
pletion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the
Architect, The Contractor shall then submit a request for
another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial
Completion, When the Work or designated portion thereof is
substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate
of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Sub-
stantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the
Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities,
damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time
within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list
accompanying the Certificate, Warranties required by the Con-
tract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless
otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Comple-
tion, The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be sub-
mitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written accep-
tance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate,
9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated
portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and
certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment,
reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or por-
tion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents,
9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or par-
tially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such
portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contrac-
tor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the
insurer as required under Subparagraph 11,3,11 and authorized
by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such
partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the
portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and
Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities
assigned to each of them for payments, retainage if any, secu-
rity, maintenance, heat. utilities, damage to the Work and insur-
ance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for cor-
rection of the Work and commencement of warranties
required by the Contract Documents, When the Contractor
considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall
prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under
Subparagraph 9,8,2, Consent of the Contractor to partial occu-
pancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld, The stage of
the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agree-
ment between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is
reached, by decision of the Architect.
9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the
Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area
to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to
determine and record the condition of the Work,
9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use
of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute accep-
tance of Work not complying with the requirements of the
Contract Documents,
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.10.1 Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready
for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final
Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make
soch inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work accept-
able under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully per-
formed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for
Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge.
information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's
observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in
accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Docu-
ments and that the entire balance found to be due the Contrac-
tor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The
Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further
representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9,10,2 as
precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment
have been fulftlled.
9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remammg retained
percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to
the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and
equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work
for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be
responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner)
have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidenc-
ing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to
remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will
not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days'
prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written
statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason
that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period
required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if
any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other
data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as
receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests
or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and
in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcon-
tractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the
Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the
Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien
remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor
shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be
compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs
and reasonable attorneys' fees,
9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final com-
pletion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the
Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final
completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall,
upon application by the Contractor and certification by the
Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment
of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed
and accepted, If the remaining balance for Work not fully com-
pleted or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Con-
tract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written
consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that por-
tion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submit-
ted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of
such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and
conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not
constitute a waiver of claims, The making of final payment shall
constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Sub-
paragraph 4.3.5.
9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Sub-
contractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of
claims by that payee except those previously made in writing
and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final
Application for Payment, Such waivers shall be in addition to
the waiver described in Subparagraph 4,3.5.
18
A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEEr-;TH EDITION
AIA@ . @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W, WASHINGTON, D,c. 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
ARTICLE 10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, main-
taining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in
connection with the performance of the Contract.
10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site
material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated
biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the
Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected
and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing,
The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed
except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in
fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB)
and has not been rendered harmless, The Work in the affected
area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlori-
nated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless,
by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in
accordance with final determination by the Architect on which
arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under
Article 4,
10,1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article
7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or
polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB),
10.1.4 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall
indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect, Archi-
tect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them
from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, includ-
ing but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting
from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the
material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has
not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage,
loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease
or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting
therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by
negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or
indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts
the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such
claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party
indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed
to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of
indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person
described in this Subparagraph lO,1.4,
10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for
safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent
d;unage, injury or loss to:
,1 employees on the Work and other persons who may
be affected thereby;
,2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorpo-
rated therein, whether in storage on or off the site,
under care, custody or control of the Contractor or
the Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontrac-
tors; and
.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as
trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways,
structures and utilities not designated for removal, relo-
cation or replacement in the course of construction,
10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with
applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders
of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or
their protection from damage, injury or loss,
10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by
existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reason-
able safeguards for safety and protection. including posting
danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating
safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent
sites and utilities,
10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous
materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for
execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost
care and carryon such activities under supervision of properly
qualified personneL
10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss
(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance
required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in
Clauses 10,2,1.2 and 10,2,1.3 caused in whole or in part by the
Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone
for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor
is responsible under Clauses 10,2.1.2 and 10,2.1.3, except
damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner
or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by
either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may
be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the
Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in
addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3,18,
10,2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of
the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the
prevention of accidents, This person shall be the Contractor's
superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor
in writing to the Owner and Architect.
10.2,7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the
construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety,
10.3 EMERGENCIES
10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,
the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to pre-
vent threatened damage, injury or loss, Additional compensa-
tion or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account
of ;m emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph
4,3 and Article 7,
ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a
company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in
the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as
will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which
may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations
under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally
liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a
Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by
any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable:
,1 claims under workers' or workmen's compensation,
disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts
which are applicable to the Work to be performed;
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDiTIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDiTION
AIA@ . @19H7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON, DL 2000()
A201-1987 19
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U.S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupa-
tional sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor's
employees;
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness
or disease, or death of any person other than the Con-
tractor's employees;
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury
liability coverage which are sustained (1) by a person
as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to
employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2)
by another person;
.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself,
because of injury to or destruction of tangible prop-
erty, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6 claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of
a person or property damage arising out of owner-
ship, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle; and
.7 claims involving contractual liability insurance appli-
cable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph
3,18,
11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11,1,1 shall be
written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Con-
tract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is
greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or
claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption
from date of commencement of the Work until date of final
payment and termination of any coverage required to be main-
tained after final payment.
11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall
be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work.
These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this
Paragraph I 1 , 1 shall contain a provision that coverages
afforded under the policies will not be cancelled or allowed to
expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given
to the Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are
required to remain in force after final payment and are reason-
ably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation
of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application
for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9,10,2, Information
concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the
Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the
Contractor's information and belief
11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11.2,1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining the Owner's usual liability insurance, Optionally,
the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self-
protection against claims which may arise from operations
under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible
for purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability
insurance unless specifically required by the Contract
Documents,
11,3 PROPERTY INSURANCE
11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase
and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized
to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is
located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Con-
tract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the
entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without vol-
untary deductibles, Such property insurance shall be main-
tained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents
or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who
are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been
made as provided in Paragraph 9, IO or until no person or entity
other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property
required by this Paragraph I I ,3 to be covered, whichever is
earlier. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the
Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the
Work,
11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form
and shall insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage
and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of
coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false-
work, temporary buildings and debris removal including
demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal
requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for
Architect's services and expenses required as a result of such
insured loss, Coverage for other perils shall not be required
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
11.3,1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such prop-
erty insurance required by the Contract and with all of the
coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so
inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of
the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance which will
protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-
subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order
the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contrac-
tor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to pur-
chase or maintain insurance as described above, without so
notifying the Contractor, then the Owner shall bear all reason-
able costs properly attributable thereto,
11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires minimum deducti-
bles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Docu-
ments, the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of
such deductibles, If the Owner or insurer increases the required
minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified or if the
Owner elects to purchase this insurance with voluntary deduc-
tible amounts, the Owner shall be responsible for payment of
the additional costs not covered because of such increased or
voluntary deductibles, If deductibles are not identified in the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay costs not covered
because of deductibles,
11.3.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Docu-
ments, this property insurance shall cover portions of the Work
stored off the site after written approval of the Owner at the
value established in the approval, and also portions of the Work
in transit.
11.3.2 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner shall
purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance
required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall
specifically cover such insured objects during installation and
until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include
interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-
subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor
shall be named insureds.
11.3,3 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner's
option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will
insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property
due to fire or other hazards, however caused, The Owner
waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use
of the Owner's property, including consequential losses due to
fire or other hazards however caused,
11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for
risks other than those described herein or for other special haz-
ards be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner
shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof
shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change
Order.
20 A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AlA <!J . @1987 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE. N,W, WASHINGTON, D.c. 20006
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S. copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner
insures properties, real or personal or both, adjoining or adja-
cent to the site by property insurance under policies separate
from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment prop-
erty insurance is to be provided on the completed Project
through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Proj-
ect during the constructio~ period, the Owner shall waive all
rights in accordance with the terms of Subparagraph 11.3,7 for
damages caused by fire or other perils covered by this separate
property insurance, All separate policies shall provide this
waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise,
11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall
file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes
insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.3, Each
policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions. defini-
tions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each
policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be
cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior writ-
ten notice has been given to the Contractor.
11.3.7 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor
waive all rights against (I) each other and any of their subcon-
tractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the
other, and (2) the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate
contractors described in Article 6. if any, and any of their sub-
contractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for
damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by
property insurance obtained pursuant to this Paragraph 11,3 or
other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such
rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the
Owner as fiduciary, The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate,
shall require of the Architect, Architect's consultants, separate
contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontrac-
tors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them,
by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for
validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enum-
erated herein, The policies shall provide such waivers of subro-
gation by endorsement or otherwise, A waiver of subrogation
shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that per-
son or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,
contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium
directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity
had an insurable interest in the property damaged,
11.3.8 A loss insured under Owner's property insurance shall
be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the
Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may
appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee
clause and of Subparagraph 11.3,10, The Contractor shall pay
Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received
by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written
where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors
to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar
manner.
11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner
as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give
bond for proper performance of the Owner's duties, The cost
of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as
fiduciary, The Owner shall deposit in a separate account pro-
ceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accor-
dance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach,
or in accordance with an arbitration award in which case the
procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4,5, If after such
loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of dam-
aged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order.
11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and
settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest
shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss
to the Owner's exercise of this power; if such objection be
made, arbitrators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4,5,
The Owner as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with
insurers in accordance with directions of such arbitrators, If
distribution of insurance proceeds by arbitration is required,
the arbitrators will direct such distribution,
11.3.11 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph
9,9 shall not commence until the insurance company or com-
panies providing property insurance have consented to such
partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise, The
Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain
consent of the insurance company or companies and shall,
without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to
partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or
reduction of insurance,
11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contrac-
tor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Con-
tract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipu-
lated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the
Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.
11.4.2 Cpon the request of any person or entity appearing to
be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obliga-
tions arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly
furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made,
ARTICLE 12
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12,1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
12.1,1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the
Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in
the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by the
Architect, he uncovered for the Architect's ohservation and be
replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the
Contract Time,
12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the
Architect has not specifically requested to observe prior to its
being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and
it shall be uncovered by the Contractor, If such Work is in
accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncover-
ing and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, he
charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with
the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs
unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate
contractor in which event the Owner shall he responsible for
payment of such costs,
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12,2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected
by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of
the Contract Documents, whether ohserved he fore or after
Suhstantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed
or completed, The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting
such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspec-
tions and compensation for the Architect's services and
expenses made necessary therehy,
12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substantial Comple-
tion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRl:CTION . FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @ 1987 THE AMERICAN INST1TLTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W., WASHINGTON. D,C. 20006
A201-1987 21
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
for commencement of warranties established under Sub-
paragraph 9,9,1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty
required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found
to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after
receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the
Owner has previously given the Contractor a written accep-
tance of such condition, This period of one year shall be
extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after
Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substan-
tial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This
obligation under this Subparagraph 12,2,2 shall survive accep-
tance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the
Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after dis-
covery of the condition,
12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of
the Work which art: not in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the
Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work
within a reasonable time. the Owner may correct it in accor-
dance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed
with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reason-
able time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner
may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at
the Contractor's expense, If the Contractor does not pay costs
of such removal and storage within ten days after written
notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days' written
notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private
sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting
costs and damages that should have been borne by the Con-
tractor, including compensation for the Architect's services and
expenses made necessary thereby, If such proceed~ of sale do
not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the
Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency, If payments
then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover
such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the
Owner.
12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting
destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or
partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors
caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work
which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Con-
tract Documents,
12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12,2 shall be con-
strued to establish a period of limitation with respect to other
obligations which the Contractor might have under the Con-
tract Documents, Establishment of the time period of one year
as described in Subparagraph 12,2,2 relates only to the specific
obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no
relationship to t~e time within which the obligation to comply
with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,
nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced
to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Con-
tractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.
12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,
the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and cor-
rection, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as
appropriate and equitable, Such adjustment shall be effected
whether or not final payment has been made,
ARTICLE 13
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1 GOVERNING LAW
13.1.1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place
where the Project is located,
13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind them-
selves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representa-
tives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors,
assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect
to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Con-
tract Documents, Neither party to the Contract shall assign the
Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If
either party attempts to make such an assignment without such
consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible
for all obligations under the Contract.
13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly
served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of
the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it
was intended. or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified
mail to the last business address known to the party giving
notice,
13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
13,4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Docu-
ments and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in
addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and
remedies otherwise imposed or available by law,
13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or
Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded
them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act
constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,
except as may be specifically agreed in writing,
13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
13,5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the
Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordi-
nances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having
jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time, Unless other-
wise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for
such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent test-
ing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the
appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of
tests, inspections and approvals, The Contractor shall give the
Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspec-
tions are to be made so the Architect may observe such proce-
dures, The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections or
approvals which do not become requirements until after bids
are received or negotiations concluded,
13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having
jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require addi-
tional testing, inspection or approval not included under Sub-
paragraph 13,5, I , the Architect will, upon written authorization
from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements
for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity
acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely
notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections
are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures,
22
A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TilE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEE!\iTII EDITIO!\i
AIA@ . @I9R7 THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCIlITECTS, 175'; NEW YORK AVENI'E, N.w" WASHINGTON, I),c:. 2000(,
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
~._...
The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Sub-
paragraph 13.5.3,
13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval
under Subparagraphs 13,5.1 and 13.5,2 reveal failure of the
portions of the Work to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs
made necessary by such failure including those of repeated
procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and
expenses,
13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval
shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be
secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the
Architect.
13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or
approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect
will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place
of testing,
13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Con-
tract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable
delay in the Work,
13.6 INTEREST
13.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Docu-
ments shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such
rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence
thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place
where the Project is located,
13,7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY
LIMITATION PERIOD
13,7,1 As between the Owner and Contractor:
.1 Before Substantial Completion, As to acts or failures
to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substan-
tial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations
shall commence to nul and any alleged cau~e of action
shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events
not later than such date of Substantial Completion;
.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certifi-
cate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occur-
ring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial
Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certifi-
cate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations
shall commence to run and any alleged cause of
action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all
events not later than the date of issuance of the final
Certificate for Payment; and
.3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or
failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issu-
ance of the final Certificate for Payment, any appli-
cable statute of limitations shall commence to run and
any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have
accrued in any and all events not later than the date of
any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to
any warranty provided under Paragraph 3,5, the date
of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the
Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12,2, or the
date of actual commission of any other act or failure
to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor
or Owner, whichever occurs last.
ARTICLE 14
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION
OF THE CONTRACT
14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work
is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the
Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their
agents or employees or any other persons performing portions
of the Work under contract with the Contractor, for any of the
following reasons:
.1 issuance of an order of a court or other public author-
ity having jurisdiction;
.2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national
emergency, making material unavailable;
.3 because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for
Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the
reason for withholding certification as provided in
Subparagraph 9.4,1, or because the Owner has not
made payment on a Certificate for Payment within
the time stated in the Contract Documents;
.4 if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the
Owner as described in Paragraph 14,3 constitute in
the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total num-
ber of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in
any 365-day period, whichever is less; or
.5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor
promptly, upon the Contractor's request, reasonable
evidence as required by Subparagraph 2,2,1.
14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may,
upon seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and
Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner
payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect
to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment
and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and
damages,
14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through
no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their
agents or employees or any other persons performing portions
of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the
Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations
under the Contract Documents with respect to matters impor-
tant to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon
seven additional days' written notice to the Owner and the
Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner
as provided in Subparagraph 14,1.2,
14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the
Contractor:
,1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply
enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;
,2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials
or labor in accordance with the respective agreements
between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
,3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, reg-
ulations or orders of a public authority having juris-
diction; or
.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision
of the Contract Documents,
14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon
certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to jus-
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @19H7 THE AMERICAN INSTIlTTE OF ARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON, D,C 20006
A201-1987
23
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution.
tify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or
remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the
Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, termi-
nate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any
prior rights of the surety:
.1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equip-
ment, tools, and construction equipment and machin-
ery thereon owned by the Contractor;
.2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Para-
graph 5.4; and
.3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the
Owner may deem expedient,
14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the
reasons stated in Subparagraph 14,2,1, the Contractor shall not
be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is
finished.
14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs
of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Archi-
tect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such
excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the
unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the
Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as
the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect, upon appli-
cation, and this obligation for payment shall survive termina-
tion of the Contract.
14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER
FOR CONVENIENCE
14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in
writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in
part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
14.3.2 An adjustment shall be made for increases in the cost of
performance of the Contract, including profit on the increased
cost of performance, caused by suspension. delay or interrup-
tion, No adjustment shall be made to the extent:
.1 that performance is, was or would have been so sus-
pended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for
which the Contractor is responsible; or
.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under
another provision of this Contract.
14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have
a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee,
24 A201-1987
AlA DOCUMENT A201 . GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION' FOURTEENTH EDITION
AIA@ . @1987THEAMERICANINSTITUTEOFARCHITECTS, 1735 NEW YORK AVENUE, N,W" WASHINGTON. D.C. 20006
3/87
WARNING: Unlicensed photocopying violates U,S, copyright laws and is subject to legal prosecution,
5910861-000
!mRA'l1IOR AIRPORT
REW PASSBRGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROB comrrY, FLORIDA
SBCTIOR 00800 - SUPPLBMBRTARY
CONDITIONS
GENERAL
The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction," AlA Document A201, Fourteenth Edition, 1987. Where a portion of
the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions,
the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. Where
AIA "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction" or "Supplementary
condi tions" Contained Herein Conflict wi th FAA "Standards for Specifying
Construction of Ai:rports" Part 1 "General provisions" AC1SO/S370-10A current
edition, the FAA standards shall prevail.
ARTICLE 1; GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.2 Bxecution, Correlation and Intent
Add the following to subparagraph 1.2.3.
In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents,
interpretations will be based on the FAA General Provisions (Section 50) .
In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within
either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity
of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.
Add the following subparagraph:
1.2.6 References in these Contract Documents to standards including trade
associations, federal and military specifications, technical societies,
organizations, and associations, codes and government authorities whether
specific or by implication shall refer to the latest issue or edition in effect
30 days, prior to date of receipt of Bids or date of the Agreement, if there were
no Bids. The provisions of referenced standards shall not change the duties and
responsibilities of the Owner, the Contractor, or the Architect or any of their
consultants, agents or employees.
ARTICLE 2; OWNER
Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 and substitute the following:
2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished free of charge 2 blueline copies of
Drawings and Project Manuals. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of
reproduction, postage and handling.
ARTICLE 3; CONTRACTOR
3.4 Labor and Materials
Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.3, 3.4.4, 3.4.5 and 3.4.6 to 3.4:
3.4.3 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect may
consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those
specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements
(Division 1 of the Specifications) .
3.4.4 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.3 above,
the Contractor.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-1
5910861-000
.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the
proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or
superior in all respects to that specified;
.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for
the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified;
.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all
related costs under this Contract except the Architect's design
costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the
substitute which subsequently become apparent; and
.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making
such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all
respects.
3.4.5 When a material, equipment, or system is specified by the name of one or
more manufacturers, such material, equipment, or system shall form the basis of
the Contract. If the Contractor desires to use another material, equipment, or
system in lieu thereof, he shall request approval in writing and shall submit
samples and data as required for Architects' consideration. Any reasonable
request for substitution will be considered by the Architect. If, in the opinion
of the Architect, such material, equipment, or system is equal to the material
specified and is entirely satisfactory for use in the Project, then the Architect
will approve such substitutions_ However, the Architect will be the sole judge
of the above requirements. Any use as a basis for bidding of a material,
equipment, or system other than that specified unless such material, equipment,
or system has been approved by the Architect before submission of General
Contractors' Bid to Owner, will be made at Bidders' risk. No substitution shall
be made without authority in writing from the Architect.
3.4.6 General Contractor shall disclose to the Owner and Architect the existence
and extent of financial interests, whether direct or indirect, he has in
subcontractors and material suppliers which he may propose for this Project. If
the General Contractor is a partnership, the foregoing disclosure shall be made
as to each partner. If the General Contractor is a corporation, the foregoing
disclosure shall be made as to each officer, director or principal shareholder.
3.8 Allowances
3.18 Indemnification
Add the following before the word "To" in 3.18.1, First Line: "In consideration
of Ten Dollars ($10.00) in hand paid the receipt and sufficiency of which are
hereby acknowledged, and"
Add the following after the word omissions in 3.18.1, Line 11: or the willful
misconduct
Add Subparagraph 3.18.4 as follows:
Upon the filing with the Owner of a claim for damages ar~s~ng out of incidents
for which the Contractor herein agrees to indemnify and hold the Owner harmless,
the Owner shall notify the Contractor of such claim. Any final judgment rendered
against the Owner for any claim for which the Contractor is liable hereunder
shall be conclusive against the Contractor as to liability and amount provided
the Owner notified the Contractor of the claim as provided herein.
Add the following paragraph:
3.19 No Third Party Beneficiary
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-2
5910861-000
3.19.1 It is specifically agreed between the parties executing this Contract
that it is not intended by any of the provisions of any part of the Contract to
create in the public or any member thereof the rights, powers or privileges of
a third party beneficiary hereunder, or to authorize anyone not a part of this
Contract to maintain a suit. Liability of the parties to this Contract with
respect to third parties shall remain as imposed by law, subject to the insurance
and indemnity provisions hereof which cast such burdens on the Contractor.
ARTICLE 4; ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.1 Architect
Add subparagraphs 4.1.5 and 4.1.6 as follows:
4.1.5 The Architect is Reynolds, Smith and Hills, Inc.
4 . 1 . 6 The term Archi tect - Engineer, Architect or Engineer when used in the
Contract Documents, shall mean Reynolds, Smith and Hills, Inc.
4.3 Claims and disputes
Delete Subparagraph 4.3.8.2 and substitute the following:
4.3.8.2 An extension of Contract time will not be given due to weather
conditions, unless such weather conditions for any thirty (30) -day period are on
the average for the thirty (30) days more severe than the average for the same
thirty (30)-day period for the previous ten (10) years and caused a delay. In
requesting an extension of time for weather conditions, Contractor shall present
complete records and averages referred to above, and such requests shall document
how the weather conditions delayed the progress of the Work.
Delete Paragraph 4.5, Arbitration, in its entirety.
ARTICLE 9; PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.3 Applications for Payment
9.3.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.3.1:
The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized AIA
Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported
by AlA Document G703, Continuation Sheet.
Add the following 9.3.1.3 to 9.3.1:
9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay 90 percent of the
amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments. However, at the time
the Work is 50 percent complete and thereafter, if in the sole judgment of the
Architect, the manner of completion of the work and its progress are and remain
satisfactory to the Architect, and in the absence of other good and sufficient
reasons, the Architect will, on presentation by the Contractor of Consent of
Surety and FAA for each application, authorize remaining partial payments to be
paid in full, except as modified by Section 9.8.3.
9.8 Substantial Completion
9.8.3 Add the following sentence:
The payment shall be sufficient to increase the total payments to 95 percent of
the Contract Sum, less double such amounts as the Architect shall determine for
incomplete Work and unsettled claims.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-3
5910861-000
Add the following Paragraph 9.11 to Article 9:
9.11 Liquidated Damages
9.11.1 Upon failure of the Contractor to substantially complete said Contract
within the calendar days (plus allowable extensions) after the specified date in
the "Notice to Proceed," the Contractor and/or the Contractor's surety shall pay
the Owner the sum of $1,000.00 per day beyond said calendar days (plus allowable
extensions) that is required by the Contractor to substantially complete the
Contract, not as a penalty or a forfeiture, but as liquidated damages to the
Owner because of such default by the Contractor, which damages are hereby fixed
and agreed upon between the parties recognizing the impossibility of precisely
ascertaining the amount of damages that will be sustained by the Owner in
consequence of such default and both parties desiring to obviate any question of
dispute concerning the amount of said damages and the cost and effect of such
failure of the Contractor to substantially complete said Contract within the
calendar days allowed.
Architect-Engineer's Compensation for Services Beyond Approved Project Completion
Date:
The Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursing the Owner, in addition to
liquidated damages, for all costs incurred by the ArChitect-Engineer in
administering the construction of the project beyond the substantial completion
date specified in the agreement or beyond an approved extension of time granted
to the Contractor, whichever is later. Such costs shall be deducted from the
monies due the Contractor for performance of work under this Contract.
ARTICLE 10; PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2 Safety of Persons and Property
10.2.4.1 Use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment
or unusual methods are prohibited.
ARTICLE lli INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance
Delete paragraph in its entirety and substitute the Section 11.1.1.
11.3.1.1 Add the following sentence to Clause 11.3.1.1:
The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value.
Delete Clause 11.3.1.4 and substitute the following:
11.3.1.4 Notwithstanding the provisions of the General Conditions, Owner shall
not be required and shall not be liable to maintain insurance for:
(a) Any material or equipment or other personal property the risk
of loss of which has not passed to Owner.
(b) In the case of portions of the Work which are stored off site,
to the extent that the terms of the storage agreement approved
by Owner require the bailee to insure the Work, or 'such
insurance is actually in force and available to pay for the
same. In no event will Owner's liability for Work stored off
site exceed the value of labor and materials actually
incorporated into the Work.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-4
5910861-000
(c) Owner shall not be liable for the cost of materials stored off
site unless Owner has been afforded an opportunity to inspect
the materials and determine their conformity to the Contract
prior to or contemporaneously with the request of any
Subcontractor or Contractor for permission to store the same
off site.
11.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond
Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1 and substitute the following:
11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds in accordance with Section 00350 -
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment
of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be obtained through the
Contractor's usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract
Sum. The amount of each bond shall be equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum.
11.4.1.2 The Performance Bond shall continue in effect for one (1) year after
completion and acceptance of the Work with liability equal to 100 percent of the
Contract price, or an additional bond shall be conditioned that the Contractor
will, upon notification by the Owner, correct any defective or faulty Work or
materials which appear within one (1) year after completion of the Contract.
ARTICLE 12; UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 Uncovering of Work
Add the following sentence to subparagraph 12.1.1:
The Contractor shall also be required at his own expense to uncover work which
is covered contrary to requirements of law or any insurance body which is
responsible for inspection of any portion of the work.
ARTICLE 13; MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
Delete Paragraph 13.7, Conunencement of Statutory Limitation Period, in its
entirety.
Add Paragraph 13.8 as follows:
13.8 Davis Bacon Requirements - 29 CFR Part 5 (Version 2, 4/23/90)
This section shall apply to all Contracts in excess of $2,000:
(1) Minimum Wages.
(i) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work
will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without
subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as
are permitted by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3}),
the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalent
thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained
in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and
made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be
alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics.
Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits
under section l(b} (2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics
are considered wages paid to laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of
Paragraph (1) (iv) of this section; also, ~egular contributions made or costs
incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under
plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed
to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-5
5910861-000
and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the
wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without
regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5 (a) (4). Laborers or
mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at
the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein:
Provided, That the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent
in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination
(including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under (1) (ii)
of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all
times by the Contractor and its Subcontractors at the site of the work in a
prominent and accessible place where it can easily be seen by the workers.
(ii) (A) The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or
mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be
employed under the Contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage
determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional
classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the
following criteria have been met:
(1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed
by a classification in the wage determinations; and
(2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry;
and
(3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a
reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination.
(B) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the
classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer
agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for
fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent
by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division,
Employment Standards Administration, u.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC
20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify,
or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt
and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer
within the 3D-day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the
Office of Management and Budget under OMS Control Number 1215-0140.)
(C) In the event the Contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in
the classification or their representatives and the contracting officer do not
agree on the proposed classification and the wage rate (including the amount
designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), the contracting officer shall
refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the
recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for
determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue
a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer
or will notify the contracting officer within the 3D-day period that additional
time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMS
Control Number 1215-0140.)
(D) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined
pursuant to Subparagraphs (1) (B) or (C) of this paragraph, shall be paid to all
workers performing work in the classification under this Contract from the first
day on which work is performed in the classification.
(iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the Contract for a class of
laborers or mechanics includes ,a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an
hourly rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage
determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash
equivalent thereof.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-6
5910861-000
(i v) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third
person, the Contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or
mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide
fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, that the Secretary of Labor
has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable
standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may
require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting
of obligations under the plan or program. (Approved by the Office of Management
and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.)
(2) Withholding. The Federal Aviation Administration or the Sponsor shall upon
its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the
Department of Labor, withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under
this Contract or any other federal Contract with the same prime Contractor, or
any other federally assisted Contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage
requirements, which is held by the same prime Contractor, so much of the accrued
payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and
mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the
Contractor or any Subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the
Contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any
apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of work, all or
part of the wages required by the Contract, the Federal Aviation Administration
may, after written notice to the Contractor, sponsor, applicant or Owner, take
such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment,
advance or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased.
(3) Payrolls and basic records.
(i) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the
Contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of 3 years
thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work. Such
records shall contain the name, address and social security number of each such
worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including
rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash
equivalents thereof of the types described in 1 (b) (2) (B) of the Davis-Bacon Act) ,
daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wagers paid.
Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a) (1) (iv) that the
wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably
anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section
l(b) (2) (B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which
show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan
or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been
communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected and records which
show the costs anticipated or the actual costs incurred in providing such
benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs
shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs
and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and
trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs.
(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Numbers 1215-
0140 and 1215-0017.)
(ii) (A) The Contractor shall submit weekly, for each week in which any
Contract work is performed, a copy of all payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or
owner, as the case may be, for transmission to the Federal Aviation
Administration. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely
all of the information required to be maintained under Paragraph 5.5(a) (3) (i)
above. This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-
347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent
of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government printing
Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime Contractor is responsible for the
submission of copies of payrolls by all Subcontractors. (Approved by the Office
of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0149.)
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-7
5910861-000
(B) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a "Statement of Compliance,"
signed by the Contractor or Subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or
supervises the payment of the persons employed under the Contract and shall
certify the fOllowing:
(1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required
to be maintained under Paragraph (3) (i) above and that such information is
correct and complete;
(2) That each laborer and mechanic (including each helper, apprentice and
trainee) employed on the Contract during the payroll period has been paid the
full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that
no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages
earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations 29 CFR Part
3;
(3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable
wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work
performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into
this Contract.
(C) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the
reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission
of the "Statement of Compliance" required by Paragraph (3) (ii) (B) of this
section.
(D) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the
Contractor or Subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001
of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the United States Code.
(ii) The Contractor or Subcontractor shall make the records required under
Paragraph (3) (i) of this section available for inspection, copying or
transcription by authorized representatives of the sponsor, the Federal Aviation
Administration or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives
to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the Contractor or
Subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the
federal agency may, after written notice to the Contractor, sponsor, applicant
or Owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any
further payment, advance or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit
the required records upon request or to make such records available may be
grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12.
(4) Apprentices and Trainees.
(i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the
predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant
to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered
with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau
of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized
by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of
probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who
is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the
Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where
appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The
allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft
classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor
as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on
a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed
as stated above, shall be _paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage
determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition,
any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted
under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-8
5910861-000
on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a Contractor
is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which
its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages
of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the Contractor's or Subcontractor's
registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less
than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of
progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in
the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in
accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the
apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid
the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the
applicable classification. If the administrator determines that a different
practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be
paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the
Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no
longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable
predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is
approved.
(ii) Trainees, Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees wi 11 not be permitted
to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they
are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has
received prior approval,' evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department
of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to
journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan
approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be
paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the
trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly
rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid
fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the
trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full
amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the
Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an
apprenticeship program associated wi th the corresponding journeyman wage rate on
the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for
apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not
registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and
Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on
the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In
addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio
permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable
wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the
event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training
program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less
than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable
program is approved.
(iii) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and
journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment
opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part
30.
(5) Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The Contractor shall comply
with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3, which are incorporated by reference in
this Contract.
(6) Subcontracts. The Contractor or Subcontractor shall insert in any
Subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR Part 5.5 (a) (1) through (10) and such
other clauses as the Federal Aviation Administration may by appropriate
instructions require, and also a clause requiring the Subcontractors to include
these clauses in any lower tier Subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-9
5910861~000
responsible for the compliance by any Subcontractor or lower tier Subcontractor
with all the Contract clauses in 29 CFR Part 5.5.
(7) Contract Termination: Debarment. A breach of the Contract clauses in
Paragraphs {I} through {10} of this section and Paragraphs {I} through {S} of the
next section below may be grounds for termination of the Contractor, and for the
debarment as a Contractor and a Subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12.
{8} Compliance with Davis~Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and
interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts I,
3 and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this Contract.
(9) Disputes Concerning Labor Standards. Disputes arising out of the labor
standards provisions of this Contract shall not be subject to the general
disputes clause of this Contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance
wi th the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6 and
7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the
Contractor {or any of its Subcontractors} and the contracting agency, the U.S.
Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.
(10) Certification of Eligibility.
{i} By entering into this Contract, the Contractor certifies that
neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in
the Contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded
government Contracts by virtue of Section 3{a} of the Davis~Bacon Act or
29 CFR 5.12 {a)(l} .
{ii} No part of this Contract shall be subcontracted to any person or
firm ineligible for award of a government Contract by virtue of Section
3{a} of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR S.12{a} {I}.
{iii} The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S.
Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.
Add Paragraph 13.9 as follows:
13.9 Contract Workhours and Safety Standards Act Requirements - 29 CFR Part 5
{Version I, 1/5/90}
For Contracts in excess of $2,000, the Contractor hereby agrees to the following:
{I} Overtime Requirements. No Contractor or Subcontractor contracting for any
part of the Contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers
or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic, including
watchmen and guards, in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work
to work in excess of 40 hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic
receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic
rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of 40 hours in such workweek.
{2} ViOlation; Liability for Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages. In the event
of any violation of the clause set forth in Paragraph 1 above, the Contractor or
any Subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In
addition, such Contractor and Subcontractor shall be liable to the United States
{in the case of work done under Contract for the District of Columbia or a
territory, to such District or to such territory}, for liquidated damages. Such
liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or
mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set
forth in Paragraph 1 above, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such
individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek
of 40 hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set
forth in Paragraph 1 above.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-10
5910861-000
(3) Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages. The Federal Aviation
Administration or the sponsor shall upon its own action or upon written request
of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor, withhold or cause to
be withheld, from any monies payable on account of work performed by the
Contractor or Subcontractor under any such Contract or any other federal Contract
with the same prime Contractor, or any other federally assisted Contract subject
to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same
prime Contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any
liabilities of such Contractor or Subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated
damages as provided in the clause set forth in Paragraph 2 above.
(4) Subcontracts. The Contractor or Subcontractor shall insert in any
Subcontracts the clauses set forth in Paragraphs 1 through 4 and also a clause
requiring the Subcontractor to include these clauses in any lower tier
Subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any
Subcontractor or lower tier Subcontractor with the clauses set forth in
Paragraphs 1 through 4.
(5) Working Conditions. No Contractor or Subcontractor may require any laborer
or mechanic employed in the performance of any Contract to work in surroundings
or under working conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous or dangerous to his
health or safety as determined under construction safety and health standards (29
CFR Part 1926) issued by the Department of Labor.
(6) Contracts in excess of $2,000, the following is to be included in all
Contracts for work on airport development projects involving labor:
Veteran's Preference: In the employment of labor (except in executive,
administrative and supervisory positions), preference shall be given to veterans
of the Vietnam era and disabled veterans. However, this preference shall apply
only where the individuals are available and qualified to perform the work to
which the employment relates.
Add Paragraph 13.10 as follows:
13.10 Notice to be Posted per Paragraphs (1) and (3) of the EEO Clause 41 CFR
Part 60-1.4(b) (Version 1, 1/5/90):
Bqual Employment Opportunity is the Law - Discrimination is Prohibited by the
Civil Rights Act of 1964 and by Executive Order No. 11246.
Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 - Administered by:
The Equal Employment Opportunity Coamission
Prohibits discrimination because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin
by employers with 50 or more employees, by labor organizations with a hiring hall
of 50 or more members, by employment agencies, and by joint labor-management
committees for apprenticeship or training.
Any person who believes he or she has been discriminated against should contact:
The Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs
u.s. Department of Labor
washington, DC 20210
ARTICLE 14; TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
Add the following Paragraph 14.4 to Article 14:
14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-11
5910861-000
14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contractor for the Owner's
convenience and without cause.
14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the
Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall:
.1 Cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2 Take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the
protection and preservation of the Work and protection of the public
or any persons upon the premises or Work site; and
.3 Except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date
of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing
Subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further
Subcontracts and purchase orders.
14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor
shall be entitled to receive payment from the Owner on the same basis provided
in Subparagraph 14.1.2.
END OF SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800-12
11.1.1 GENERAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
FOR ALL
CONTRACTS WITH
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract
(including the pre-staging of personnel and material), the
Contractor shall obtain, at his own expense, insurance as
specified in the attached schedules, which are made part of this
contract. The Contractor will also ensure that all
Sub-Contractors, in any tier, have obtained the insurance as
specified in the attached schedules.
The Contractor will not be permitted to commence work governed by
this contract (including pre-staging of personnel and material)
until satisfactory evidence of the required insurance has been
furnished to the County as specified below. Delays in the
commencement of work, resulting from the failure of the
Contractor to provide satisfactory evidence of the required
insurance, shall not extend deadlines specified in this contract
and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be
imposed as if the work commenced on the specified date and time,
except for the Contractor's failure to provide satisfactory
evidence.
The contractor and any SUb-Contractor(s) shall maintain the
required insurance throughout the entire term of this contract
and any extensions specified in the attached schedules. Failure
to comply with this provision may result in the immediate
suspension of all work until the required insurance has been
reinstated or replaced. Delays in the completion of work
resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the
required insurance shall not extend deadlines specified in this
contract and any penalties and failure to perform assessments
shall be imposed as if the work had not been suspended, except
for the Contractor's failure to maintain the required insurance.
The Contractor and all SUb-Contractor(s) shall provide, to the
Cou~ty, as satisfactory evidence of the required insurance,
either:
o Monroe County's Certificate of Insurance
or
o A Certified copy of the actual insurance po~cy.,
The County, at its sole option, has the right to request a
certified copy of any or all insurance policies required by this
contract. If a certificate of insurance 'is provided, the County
prepared form must be used. "ACORD FORMS" ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE.
~R
1
All insurance policies must specify that they are not subject to
cancellation, non-renewal, material change, or reduction in
coverage unless a minimum of forty-five (45) days prior
notification is given to the County by the insurer. The standard
language of "endeavor to provide notification" is insufficient.
The acceptanc~ and/or approval of the Contractor's and
Sub-Contractor's insurance shall not be construed as relieving
the Contractor or Sub-contractor from any liability or obligation
assumed under this contract or imposed by law.
Monroe County, Monroe County Board of County Commissioners, its
employees and officials will be included as "Additional Insureds"
on all policies, except for Workers' Compensation.
Any deviations from these General Insurance Requirements must be
requested in writing on the County prepared form entitled
"Request for Waiver or Modification of Insurance Requirements"
and approved by Monroe County's Risk Manager.
...,..
GIR
2
WORKERS' COMPENSATION
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
FOR
, "
CONTRACT
BETWEEN
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
AND
j
Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract, the
Contractor shall obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance with
limits sufficient to respond to the applicable state's statutes.
In addition, the Contractor shall obtain Employers' Liability
Insurance with limits of not less than:
$ 500,000 Bodily Injury by Accident
$1,000,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, each employee
$1,000,000 Bodily Injury by Disease, policy limits
.
Coverage shall be maintained throughout the entire term of the
contract.
Coverage shall be provided by a company or companies authorized
to transact business in the state of Florida and the company or
companies must maintain a minimum rating of A-VI, as assigned by
the A.M. Best Company.
If the Contractor has been approved by the Florida's Department
of Labor, as an authorized self-insurer, the County shall
recognize and honor the Contractor's status. The Contractor
shall be required to submit a Letter of Authorization issued by
the Department of Labor and a Certificate of Insurance, providing
details on the Contractor's Excess Insurance Program.
If the Contractor participates in a self-insurance fund, a
Certificate of Insurance will be required. In addition, the
Contractor will be required to submit upqated financial
statements from the fund upon request from the County.
WC3
GENERAL LIABILITY
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
FOR
~~
CONTRACT
BETWEEN
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
AND
Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract, the
Contractor shall obtain General Liability Insurance. Coverage
shall be maintained throughout the life of the contract and
include, as a minimum:
o Premises Operations
o Products and Completed Operations
o Blanket Contractual Liability
o Personal Injury Liability
o Expanded Definition of Property Damage
o Medical Pa~ents
The minimum limits acceptable shall be:
$1,000,000 Combined Single Limit (CSL)
$ 5,000 Medical Payments
If split limits are provided, the minimum limits acceptable shall
be:
$ 500,000 per Person
$ 1,000,000 per Occurrence
$ 100,000 Property Damage
$ 10,000 Medical Payments
An Occurrence Form policy is preferred. If coverage is provided
on a Claims Made policy, its provisions should include coverage
for claims filed on or after the effective date of this contract.
In addition, the period for which claims may be reported should
extend for a minimum of twelve (12) months following the
acceptance of work by the County.
Monroe County and Monroe County's Board of County Commissioners
shall be named as Additional Insureds on all pOlicies issued to
satisfy the above requirements.
GL3
GENERAL LIABILITY
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
FOR
CONTRACT
.,.,
BETWEEN
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
AND
Recognizing that the work governed by this contract involves
either underground exposures, explosive activities, or the
possibility of collapse of a structure, the Contractor's General
Liability Policy shall include coverage for the XCU (explosion,
collapse, and underground) exposures with limits of liability
equal to those of the General Liability Insurance policy.
'-
..
GLXCU
VEHICLE LIABILITY
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
FOR
.~
CONTRACT
BETWEEN
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
~D
Prior to the commencement of work governed by this corltract, the
Contractor shall obtain Vehicle Liability Insurance. Coverage
shall be maintained throughout the life of the contract and
include, as a minimum, liability coverage for:
o Owned, Non-Owned, and Hired Vehicles
o Medical Payments
The minimum limits acceptable shall be:
$1,000,000 Combined Single Limit (CSL)
$ 5,000 Medical Payments
If split limits are provided, the minimum limits acceptable shall
be:
$ 500,000 per Person
$1,000,000 per Occurrence
$ 100,000 Property Damage
$ 10,000 Medical Payments
Monroe County and Monroe County's Board of County Commissioners
shall be named as Additional Insureds on all policies issued to
satisfy the above requirements.
~
~J
BUILDER'S RISK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
FOR
CONTRACT
BETWEEN
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
AND
The Contractor shall be required to purchase and maintain,
throughout the life of the contract, and until the project is
accepted by the County, Builder's Risk Insurance on an All Risk
of Loss form. Coverage shall include:
Theft
Windstorm
Hail
Explosion
Riot
civil Commotion
Aircraft
Vehicles
Smoke
The policy limits shall be no less than the amount of the
finished project and coverage shall be provided on a completed
value basis.
Property located on the construciton premises which is intended
to become a permanent part of the building shall be included as
property covered.
The policy shall be endorsed permitting the County to occupy the
building prior to completion without effecting the coverage.
Monroe County and Monroe County's Board of County Commissioners
shall be named as Additional Insureds as their interest may
appear.
13R
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSKRGBR TBRllImu. BUILDING
B>NROB comrrY, FLORIDA
SBCTIOR 00905 - WAGB RATBS
The applicable wage rates as required by Article 13 _ 8 of the General and
Supplementary Conditions are as follows:
Basic Hourlv Rate
Frinqe Benefits
Carpenters
12.60
1.83
Cement Masons
7.00
Electricians
8.40
.20 + 14%'
Ironworkers
9.45
1.41
Laborers General
5.00
Painters
8.80
1.07
Plumbers and Pipefitters
9.50
Plasterers
8.10
Roofers
8.47
Truck Drivers
5.00
Welders receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding
is incidental.
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the
classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor
standards Contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5(a) l(ii)).
END OF SECTION 00905
WAGE RATES
00905-1
5910861-000
lmRATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDUlG
KlNROE comrrY, FLORIDA
PART I - - GENERAL PROVISIONS (FAA)
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 10
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Whenever the following terms are used in these specifications, in the contract,
in any documents or other instruments pertaining to construction where these
specifications govern, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as follows:
10-01 AASHTO. The American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials, the successor association to AASHO.
10-02 ACCESS ROAD. The right-of-way, the roadway and all improvements
constructed thereon connecting the airport to a public highway.
10-03 ADVERTISBl!1BRT. A public announcement, as required by local law, inviting
bids for work to be performed and materials to be furnished.
10-04 AIP. The Airport Improvement Program, a grant-in-aid program,
administered by the Federal Aviation Administration.
10-05 AIR OPERATIONS AREA. For the purpose of these specifications, the term
air operations area shall mean any area of the airport used or intended to be
used for the landing, takeoff, or surface maneuvering of aircraft. An air
operation area shall include such paved or unpaved areas that are used or
intended to be used for the unobstructed movement of aircraft in addition to its
associated runway, taxiway, or apron.
10-06 AIRPORT. Airport means an area of land or water which is used or intended
to be used for the landing and takeoff of aircraft, and includes its buildings
and facilities, if any.
10-07 ASTM. The American Society for Testing and Materials.
10 - 08 AWARD. The acceptance, by the owner, of the successful bidder's proposal.
10-09 BIDDER. Any individual, partnership, firm, or corporation, acting
directly or through a duly authorized representative, who submits a proposal for
the work contemplated.
10-10 BUILDING AREA. An area on the airport to be used, considered, or intended
to be used for airport buildings or other airport facilities or rights-of-way
together with all airport buildings and facilities located thereon.
10-11 CALENDAR DAY. Every day shown on the calendar.
10-12 CHANGE ORDER. A written order to the Contractor covering changes in the
plans, specifications, or proposal quantities and establishing the basis of
payment and contract time adjustment, if any, for the work affected by such
changes. The work, covered by a change order, shall be within the scope of the
contract.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
10-1
5910861-000
10-13 CONTRACT. The written agreement covering the work to be performed. The
awarded contract shall include, but is not limited to: The Advertisement; The
Contract Form; The Proposal; The Performance Bond; The Payment Bond; any required
insurance certificates; The Specifications; The Plans, and any addenda issued to
bidders.
10-14 CONTRACT ITEM (PAY ITEM). A specific unit of work for which a price is
provided in the contract.
10-15 CONTRACT TIME. The number of calendar days or working days, stated in the
proposal, allowed for completion of the contract, including authorized time
extensions. If a calendar date of completion is stated in the proposal, in lieu
of a number of calendar or working days, the contract shall be completed by that
date.
10-16
liable
of all
agents
CORTRACTOR. The individual, partnership, firm, or corporation primarily
for the acceptable performance of the work contracted and for the payment
legal debts pertaining to the work who acts directly or through lawful
or employees to complete the contract work.
10-17 DRAI~B SYSTEM. The system of pipes, ditches, and structures by which
surface or subsurface waters are collected and conducted from the airport area.
10-18 El!IGIRBBR. The individual, partnership, firm, or corporation duly
authorized by the owner (sponsor) to be responsible for engineering supervision
of the contract work and acting directly or through an authorized representative.
10-19 EQUIPMBRT. All machinery, together with the necessary supplies for upkeep
and maintenance, and also all tools and apparatus necessary for the proper
construction and acceptable completion of the work.
10-20 EXTRA WORK. An item of work not provided for in the awarded contract as
previously modified by change order or supplemental agreement, but which is found
by the Engineer to be necessary to complete the work within the intended scope
of the contract as previously modified.
10-21 FAA. The Federal Aviation Administration of the U. S. Department of
Transportation. When used to designate a person, FAA shall mean the
Administrator or his/her duly authorized representative.
10-22 FEDBRAL SPBCIFICATIONS. The Federal Specifications and Standards, and
supplements, amendments, and indices thereto are prepared and issued by the
General Services Administration of the Federal Government.
10-23 INSPECTOR. An authorized representative of the Engineer assigned to make
all necessary inspections and/or tests of the work performed or being performed,
or of the materials furnished or being furnished by the Contractor_
10-24 IRTBNTION OF TERMS. Whenever, in these specifications or on the plans,
the words "directed, " "required, " "permitted, " "ordered, " "designated, "
"prescribed," or words of the like import are used, it shall be understood that
the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation, or prescription of
the Engineer is intended; and similarly, the words "approved," "acceptable,"
"satisfactory," or words of like import, shall mean approved by, or acceptable
to, or satisfactory to the Engineer, subject in each case to the final
determination of the owner.
Any reference to a specific requirement of a numbered paragraph of the contract
specifications or a cited standard shall be interpreted to include all general
requirements of the entire section, specification item, or cited standard that
may be pertinent to such specific reference.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
10-2
5910861-000
10-25 LABORATORY. The official testing laboratories of the owner or such other
laboratories as may be designated by the Engineer.
10-26 LIGHTING. A system of fixtures providing or controlling the light sources
used on or near the airport or within the airport buildings. The field lighting
includes all luminous signals, markers, floodlights, and illuminating devices
used on or near the airport or to aid in the operation of aircraft landing at,
taking off from, or taxiing on the airport surface.
10-27 ~OR AND MINOR CONTRACT ITEMS. A major contract item shall be any item
that is listed in the proposal, the total cost of which is equal to or greater
than 20 percent of the total amount of the award contract. All other items shall
be considered minor contract items.
10-28 MATERIALS. Any substance specified for use in the construction of the
contract work.
10-29 NOTICE TO PROCEED. A written notice to the Contractor to begin the actual
contract work on a previously agreed to date. If applicable, the Notice to
Proceed shall state the date on which the contract time begins.
10-30 OWNER (SPONSOR). The term owner shall mean the party of the first part
or the contracting agency signatory to the contract. For AIP contracts, the term
sponsor shall have the same meaning as the term owner.
10-31 PAVEMENT. The combined surface course, base course, and subbase course,
if any, considered as a single unit.
10-32 PAYMENT BOND. The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor
and his/her surety as a guaranty that he will pay in full all bills and accounts
for materials and labor used in the construction of the work.
10-33 PBRFORMANCE BOND. The approved form of security furnished by the
Contractor and his/her surety as a guaranty that the Contractor will complete the
work in accordance with the terms of the contract.
10-34 PLANS. The official drawings or exact reproductions which show the
location, character, dimensions and details of the airport and the work to be
done and which are to be considered as a part of the contract, supplementary to
the specifications.
10-35 PROJECT. The agreed scope of work for accomplishing specific airport
development with respect to a particular airport.
10-36 PROPOSAL. The written offer of the bidder (when submitted on the approved
proposal form) to perform the contemplated work and furnish the necessary
materials in accordance with the provisions of the plans and specifications.
10-37 PROPOSAL GaARARTY. The security furnished with a proposal to guarantee
that the bidder will enter into a contract if his/her proposal is accepted by the
owner.
10-38 RURKAY. The area on the airport prepared for the landing and takeoff of
aircraft.
10-39 SPBCIFICATIONS. A part of the contract containing the written directions
and requirements for completing the contract work. Standards for specifying
materials or testing which are cited in the contract specifications by reference
shall have the same force and effect as if included in the contract physically.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
10-3
5910861-000
10-40 STROCTORBS. Airport facilities such as bridges; culverts; catch basins,
inlets, retaining walls, cribbing; storm and sanitary sewer lines; water lines;
underdrains; electrical ducts, manholes, handholes, lighting fixtures and bases;
transformers; flexible and rigid pavements; navigational aids; buildings; vaults;
and, other manmade features of the airport that may be encountered in the work
and not otherwise classified herein.
10-41 SUBGRADB. The soil which forms the pavement foundation.
10-42 SUPERIN"l'BNDBNT. The Contractor's executive representative who is present
on the work during progress, authorized to receive and fulfill instructions from
the Engineer, and who shall supervise and direct the construction.
10-43 SUPPLBMERTAL AGREEMENT. A written agreement between the Contractor and
the owner covering: (1) work that would increase or decrease the total amount
of the awarded contract, or any major contract item, by more than 25 percent,
such increased or decreased work being within the scope of the originally awarded
contract; or (2) work that is not within the scope of the originally awarded
contract.
10 -44 SURETY. The corporation, partnership, or individual, other than the
Contractor, executing payment or performance bonds which are furnished to the
owner by the Contractor.
10-45 TAXIWAY. For the purpose of this document, the term taxiway means the
portion of the air operations area of an airport that has been designated by
competent airport authority for movement of aircraft to and from the airport'S
runways or aircraft parking areas.
10-46 WORK. The furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
incidentals necessary or convenient to the Contractor's performance of all duties
and obligations imposed by the contract, plans, and specifications.
10-47 WORKING DAY. A working day shall be any day other than a legal holiday,
Saturday, or Sunday on which the normal working forces of the Contractor may
proceed with regular work for at least 6 hours toward completion of the
contract. Unless work is suspended for causes beyond the Contractor's control,
Saturdays, Sundays and holidays on which the Contractor's forces engage in
regular work, requiring the presence of an inspector, will be considered as
working days.
BRD OF SECTIOR 10
GENERAL PROVISIONS
10-4
5910861-000
MARA'l"HOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSBBGBR TBmIIBAL BUILDING
BlRROE COUB'l"Y, FLORIDA
SECTION 20
PROPOSAL REQUIREMBRTS AND CONDITIONS
20-01 ADVERTISEMENT
NOT USED
20-02 PREQtIALIFlCATION OF BIDDERS. NOT USED
20-03 COrrrBBTS OF PROPOSAL FORMS. The owner shall furnish bidders with proposal
forms. All papers bound with or attached to the proposal forms are necessary
parts and must not be detached.
The plans specifications, and other documents designated in the proposal form
shall be considered a part of the proposal whether attached or not.
20-04 ISSOANCB OF PROPOSAL FORMS. The owner reserves the right to refuse to
issue a proposal form to a prospective bidder should such bidder be in default
for any of the following reasons:
a. Failure to comply with any prequalification regulations of the owner,
if such regulations are cited, or otherwise included, in the proposal as a
requirement for bidding.
b. Failure to pay, or satisfactorily settle, all bills due for labor and
materials on former Contracts in force (with the owner) at the time the owner
issues the proposal to a prospective bidder.
c. Contractor default under previous Contracts with the owner.
d. Unsatisfactory work on previous Contracts with the owner.
20-05 INTERPRETATION OF ESTIMATED PROPOSAL QtmNTITIES. NOT USED
20-06 EXAHIBATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SITE. The bidder is expected
to carefully examine the site of the proposed work, the proposal, plans
specifications, and Contract forms. He shall satisfy himself as to the
character, quality, and quantities of work to be performed, materials to be
furnished, and as to the requirements of the proposed Contract. The submission
of a proposal shall be prima facie evidence that the bidder has made such
examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing
the work and as to the requirements of the proposed Contract, plans, and
specifications.
Boring logs and other records of subsurface investigations and tests are
available for inspection of bidders. It is understood and agreed that such
subsurface information, whether included in the plans, specifications, or
otherwise made available to the bidder, was obtained and is intended for the
owner's design and estimating purposes only. Such information has been made
available for the convenience of all bidders. It is further understood and
agreed that each bidder is solely responsible for all assumptions, deductions,
or conclusions which he may make or obtain from his/her examination of the boring
logs and other records of subsurface investigations and tests that are furnished
by the owner.
20-07 PREPARATION OF PROPOSAL. The bidder shall submit hiS/her proposal on the
forms furnished by the owner. All blank spaces in the proposal forms must be
correctly filled in where indicated for each and every item for which a quantity
GENERAL PROVISIONS
20-1
5910861-000
is given.
words and
proposal.
obviously
The bidder shall state the price (written in ink or typed) both in
numerals for which he proposes to do each pay item furnished in the
In case of conflict between words and numerals, the words, unless
incorrect, shall govern.
The bidder shall sign his/her proposal correctly and in ink. If the proposal is
made by an individual, his/her name and post office address must be shown. If
made by a partnership, the name and post office address of each member of the
partnership must be shown. If made by a corporation, the person signing the
proposal shall give the name of the state under the laws of which the corporation
was chartered and the name, titles, and business address of the president,
secretary, and the treasurer. Anyone signing a proposal as an agent shall file
evidence of his/her authority to do so and that the signature is binding upon the
firm or corporation.
20-08 IRREGULAR PROPOSALS. Proposals shall be considered irregular for the
following reasons:
a. If the proposal is on a form other than that furnished by the owner,
or if the owner's form is altered, or if any part of the proposal form is
detached.
b. If there are unauthorized additions, conditional or alternate pay
items, or irregularities of any kind which make the proposal incomplete,
indefinite, or otherwise ambiguous.
c. If the proposal is not accompanied by the proposal guaranty specified
by the owner.
The owner reserves the right to reject any irregular proposal and the right to
waive technicalities if such waiver is in the best interest of the owner and
conforms to local laws and ordinances pertaining to the letting of construction
Contracts.
20-09 BID GUARANTBB. Each separate proposal shall be accompanied by a certified
check or other specified acceptable collateral, in the amount specified in the
proposal form. Such check, or collateral, shall be made payable to the Owner.
20-10. DBLIVERY OF PROPOSAL. Each proposal submitted shall be placed in a
sealed envelope plainly marked with the project number, location of airport, and
name and business address of the bidder on the outside. When sent by mail,
preferably registered, the sealed proposal, marked as indicated above, should be
enclosed in an additional envelope. No proposal will be considered unless
received at the place specified in the advertisement before the time specified
for opening all bids. Proposals received after the bid opening time shall be
returned to the bidder unopened.
20-11. WITHDRAWAL OR RBVISIOlf OF PROPOSALS, A bidder may withdraw or revise (by
withdrawal of one proposal and submission of another) a proposal provided that
the bidder's request for withdrawal is received by the Owner in writing or by
telegram before the time specified for opening bids. Revised proposals must be
received at the place specified in the advertisement before the time specified
for opening all bids.
20-12. PUBLIC OPBlfING OF PROPOSALS. Proposals shall be opened, and read,
publicly at the time and place specified in the advertisement. Bidders, their
authorized agents, and other interested persons are invited to attend. Proposals
that have been withdrawn (by written or telegraphic request) or received after
the time specified for opening bids shall be returned to the bidder unopened.
20-13 DISQOALIFICATIOlf OF BIDDBRS. A bidder shall be considered disqualified
for any of the following reasons:
GENERAL PROVISIONS
20-2
5910861-000
&. Submitting more than one proposal from the same partnership, firm, or
corporation under the same or different name.
b. Evidence of collusion among bidders. Bidders participating in such
collusion shall be disqualified as bidders for any future work of the owner until
any such participating bidder has been reinstated by the owner as a qualified
bidder.
c. If the bidder is considered to be in "default" for any reason specified
in the subsection titled ISSUANCE OF PROPOSAL FORMS of this section.
ERD OF SHCTION 20
GENERAL PROVISIONS
20-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSKl!lGER TBRKIRAL BUILDING
HlNROE COUR'l"Y, FLORIDA
SECTION 30
AWARD AND EXECOTION OF CONTRACT
30-01 CONSIDERATION OF PROPOSALS. After the proposals are publicly opened and
read, they will be compared on the basis of the total base bid price shown in the
proposal. If a bidder's proposal contains a discrepancy between bid prices
written in words and bid prices written in numbers, the price written in words
shall govern.
Until the award of a Contract is made, the Owner reserves the right to reject a
bidder's proposal for any of the following reasons:
a. If the proposal is irregular as specified in the subsection titled
IRREGULAR PROPOSALS of Section 20.
b. If the bidder is disqualified for any of the reasons specified in the
subsection titled DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS of Section 20.
In addition, until the award of a Contract is made, the Owner reserves the right
to reject any or all proposals, waive technicalities, if such waiver is in the
best interest of the Owner and is in conformance with applicable state and local
laws or regulations pertaining to the letting of construction Contracts;
advertise for new proposals; or proceed with the work otherwise. All such
actions shall promote the Owner's best interests.
30-02 AWARD OF CONTRACT. The award of a Contract, if it is to be awarded, shall
be made within 120 calendar days of the date specified for publicly opening
proposals, unless otherwise specified herein.
Award of the Contract shall be made by the Owner to the lowest, qualified bidder
whose proposal conforms to the cited requirements of the Owner.
30-03 CANCELLATION OF AWARD. The owner reserves the right to cancel the award
without liability to the bidder, except return of proposal guaranty, at any time
before a Contract has been fully executed by all parties and is approved by the
owner in accordance with the subsection titled APPROVAL OF CONTRACT of this
section.
30-04 RB'l'ORB OF PROPOSAL GUARANTY. All proposal guaranties, except those of the
two lowest bidders, will be returned immediately after the Owner has made a
comparison of bids as hereinbefore specified in the subsection titled
CONSIDERATION OF PROPOSALS of this section. Proposal guaranties of the two
lowest bidders will be retained by the Owner until such time as an award is made,
at which time, the unsuccessful bidder's proposal guaranty will be returned. The
successful bidder's proposal guaranty will be returned as soon as the Owner
receives the Contracts bonds as specified in the subsection titled REQUIREMENTS
OF CONTRACT BONDS of this section.
30-05 REQUIREMBRTS OF CONTRACT BONDS. At the time of the execution of the
Contract, the successful bidder shall furnish the Owner a surety bond or bonds
which have been fully executed by the bidder and the surety guaranteeing the
performance of the work and the payment of all legal debts that may be incurred
by reason of the Contractor's performance of the work. The surety and the form
of the bond or bonds shall be acceptable to the Owner. Unless otherwise
specified in this subsection, the surety bond or bonds shall be in a sum equal
to the full amount of the Contract.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
30-1
5910861-000
30-06 BXBCOTIOR OF CONTRACT. The successful bidder shall sign (execute) the
necessary agreements for entering into the Contract and return such signed
Contract to the Owner, along with the fully executed surety bond or bonds
specified in the subsection titled REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT BONDS of this
section, within 15 calendar days from the date mailed or otherwise delivered to
the successful bidder. If the Contract is mailed, special handling is
recommended.
30-07 APPROVAL OF COlllTRACT. Upon receipt of the Contract and Contract bond or
bonds that have been executed by the successful bidder, the owner shall complete
the execution of the Contract in accordance with local laws or ordinances, and
return the fully executed Contract to the Contractor. Delivery of the fully
executed Contract to the Contractor shall constitute the owner's approval to be
bound by the successful bidder's proposal and the terms of the Contract.
30-08 FAILURE TO BXBCOTR CONTRACT. Failure of the successful bidder to execute
the Contract and furnish an acceptable surety bond or bonds within the 15
calendar day period specified in the subsection titled REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACT
BONDS of this section shall be just cause for cancellation of the award and
forfeiture of the proposal guaranty, not as a penalty, but as liquidation of
damages to the Owner.
END OF SECTION 30
GENERAL PROVISIONS
30-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
M>NROE comrrY, FLORIDA
SECTION 40
SCOPE OF WORK
40-01 INTBRT OF CONTRACT. The intent of the contract is to provide for
construction and completion, in every detail, of the work described. It is
further intended that the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
equipment, tools, transportation, and supplies required to complete the work in
accordance with the plans, specifications, and terms of the contract.
40-02 ALTERATION OF WORK AND QUANTITIES. The owner reserves and shall have the
right to make such alterations in the work as may be necessary or desirable to
complete the work originally intended in an acceptable manner. Unless otherwise
specified herein, the Engineer shall be and is hereby authorized to make such
alterations in the work as may increase or decrease the originally awarded
contract quantities. These alterations which are for work within the general
scope of the contract shall be covered by "Change Orders" issued by the
Engineer. Change orders for altered work shall include extensions o~ contract
time where, in the Engineer's opinion, such extensions are commensurate with the
amount and difficulty of added work. All Change Orders pertaining to Airport
Improvement Program items must be approved by the FAA and shall include Valid
Wage Determinations of the U.S. Secretary of Labor.
40-03 OMITTBD ITEMS. The Engineer may, in the owner's best interest, omit from
the work any contract item, except major contract items. Major contract items
may be omitted by a supplemental agreement. Such omission of contract items
shall not invalidate any other contract provision or requirement.
Should a contract item be omitted or otherwise ordered to be nonperformed, the
Contractor shall be paid for all work performed toward completion of such item
prior to the date of the order to omit such item. Payment for work performed
shall be in accordance with the subsection titled PAYMENT FOR OMITTED ITEMS of
Section 90.
40-04 EXTRA WORK. Should acceptable completion of the contract require the
Contractor to perform an item of work for which no basis of payment has been
provided in the original contract or previously issued change orders or
supplemental agreements, the same shall be called Extra Work. Extra work that
is within the general scope of the contract shall be covered by written change
order. Change orders for such extra work shall contain agreed unit prices for
performing the change order work in accordance with the requirements specified
in the order, and shall contain any adjustment to the contract time that, in the
Engineer's opinion, is necessary for completion of such extra work.
Any claim for payment of extra work that is not covered by written agreement
(change order or supplemental agreement) shall be rejected by the owner.
40-05 MAINTBNANCB OF TRAFFIC. It is the explicit intention of the contract that
the safety of aircraft, as well as the Contractor's equipment and personnel, is
the most important consideration. It is understood and agreed that the
Contractor shall provide for the free and unobstructed movement of aircraft in
the air operations areas of the airport with respect to hiS/her own operations
and the operations of all his/her subcontractors as specified in the subsection
titled LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS of Section 80. It is further understood and
agreed that the Contractor shall provide for the uninterrupted operation of
visual and electronic signals (including power supplies thereto) used in the
guidance of aircraft while operating to, from, and upon the airport as specified
GENERAL PROVISIONS
40-1
5910861-000
in the subsection titled CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR UTILITY SERVICE AND
FACILITIES OF OTHERS in Section 70.
with respect to his/her own operations and the operations of all his/her
subcontractors, the Contractor shall provide marking, lighting, and other
acceptable means of identifying: personnel; equipment; vehicles; storage areas;
and any work area or condition that may be hazardous to the operation of
aircraft, fire-rescue equipment, or maintenance vehicles at the airport.
When the contract requires the maintenance of vehicular traffic on an existing
road, street, or highway during the Contractor's performance of work that is
otherwise provided for in the contract, plans, and specifications, the Contractor
shall keep such road, street, or highway open to all traffic and shall provide
such maintenance as may be required to accommodate traffic. The Contractor shall
furnish erect, and maintain barricades, warning signs, flagmen, and other traffic
control devices in reasonable conformity with the manual of Uniform Traffic
Control Devices for Streets and Highways (published by the United States
Government Printing Office), unless otherwise specified herein. The Contractor
shall also construct and maintain in a safe condition any temporary connections
necessary for ingress to and egress from abutting property or intersecting roads,
streets or highways. Unless otherwise specified herein, the Contractor will not
be required to furnish snow removal for such existing road, street, or highway.
The Contractor shall make his/her own estimate of all labor, materials,
equipment, and incidentals necessary for providing the maintenance of aircraft
and vehicular traffic as specified in this subsection.
The cost of maintaining the aircraft and vehicular traffic specified in this
subsection shall not be measured or paid for directly, but shall be included in
the various contract items.
40-06 RBaJVAL OF EXISTING STROCTDRBS. All existing structures encountered
within the established lines, grades, or grading sections shall be removed by the
Contractor, unless such existing structures are otherwise specified to be
relocated, adjusted up or down, salvaged, abandoned in place, reused in the work
or to remain in place. The cost of removing such existing structures shall not
be measured or paid for directly, but shall be included in the various contract
items.
Should the Contractor encounter an existing structure (above or below ground) in
the work for which the disposition is not indicated on the plans, the Engineer
shall be notified prior 'to disturbing such structure. The disposition of
existing structures so encountered shall be immediately determined by the
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of the contract.
Except as provided in the subsection titled RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FOUND
IN THE WORK of this section, it is intended that all existing materials or
structures that may be encountered (within the lines, grades, or grading sections
established for completion of the work) shall be utilized in the work as
otherwise provided for in the contract and shall remain the property of the owner
when so utilized in the work.
40-07 RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FODND IN 'l1IE WORK. Should the Contractor
encounter any material such as (but not restricted to) sand, stone, gravel, slag,
or concrete slabs within the established lines, grades, or grading sections, the
use of which is intended by the terms of the contract to be either excess or
waste, he shall handle materials in compliance with Sections 02110 - SITE
CLEARING and 02220 - BUILDING EARTHWORK.
The Contractor shall not excavate, remove, or otherwise disturb any material,
structure, or part of a structure which is located outside the lines, grades, or
GENERAL PROVISIONS
40-2
5910861-000
grading sections established for the work, except where such excavation or
removal is provided for in the contract, plans, or specifications.
40-09 FINAL CLEANING UP. Upon completion of the work and before acceptance and
final payment will be made, the Contractor shall remove from the site all
machinery, equipment, surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, temporary
structures, and stumps or portions of trees. He shall cut all brush and woods
within the limits indicated and shall leave the site in a neat and presentable
condition. Material cleared from the site and deposited on adjacent property
will not be considered as having been disposed of satisfactorily, unless the
Contractor has obtained the written permission of such property owner.
END OF SECTION 40
GENERAL PROVISIONS
40-3
5910861-000
:MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGBR TBRKINAL BUILDING
!<<)NROB CCXJRTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 50
CONTROL OF WORK
50-01 ADTHORITY OF THE ENGINEBR. The Engineer shall decide any and all
questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials
furnished, work performed, and as to the manner of performance and rate of
progress of the work. He shall decide all questions which may arise as to the
interpretation of the specifications or plans relating to the work, the
fulfillment of the contract on the part of the Contractor, and the rights of
different Contractors on the project. The Engineer shall determine the amount
and quality of the several kinds of work performed and materials furnished which
are to be paid for the under contract.
50-02 CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AJ!D) SPBCIFICATIONS. All work and all materials
furnished shall be in reasonably close conformity with the lines, grades, grading
sections, cross sections, dimensions, material requirements, and testing
requirements that are specified (including specified tolerances) in the contract,
plans or specifications.
If the Engineer finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished
product not within reasonably close conformity with the plans and specifications
but that the portion of the work affected will, in his/her opinion, result in a
finished product having a level of safety, economy, durability, and workmanship
acceptable to the owner, he will advise the owner of his/her determination that
the affected work be accepted and remain in place. In this event, the Engineer
will document his/her determination and recommend to the owner a basis of
acceptance which will provide for an adjustment in the contract price for the
affected portion of the work. The Engineer's determination and recommended
contract price adjustments will be based on good engineering judgment and such
tests or retests of the affected work as are, in hiS/her opinion, needed.
Changes in the contract price shall be covered by contract modifications (change
order or supplemental agreement) as applicable.
If the Engineer finds the materials furnished, work performed, or the finished
product are not in reasonably close conformity with the plans and specifications
and have resulted in an unacceptable finished product, the affected work or
materials shall be removed and replaced or otherwise corrected by and at the
expense of the Contractor in accordance with the Engineer's written orders.
For the purpose of this subsection, the term "reasonably close conformity"
shall not be construed as waiving the Contractor's responsibility to complete the
work in accordance with the contract, plans, and specifications. The term shall
not be construed as waiving the Engineer's right to insist on strict compliance
with the requirements of the contract, plans, and specifications during the
Contractor's prosecution of the work, when, in the Engineer's opinion, such
compliance is essential to provide an acceptable finished portion of the work.
For the purpose of this subsection, the term "reasonably close conformity" is
also intended to provide the Engineer with the authority to use good engineering
judgment in his/her determinations as to acceptance of work that is not in strict
conformity but will provide a finished product equal to or better than that
intended by the requirements of the contract, plans and specifications.
50 - 03 COORDINATION OF CORTRACT, PLANS, AJ!D) SPBCIFICATIONS. The contract, plans,
specifications, and all referenced standards cited are essential parts of the
contract requirements. A requirement occurring in one is as binding as though
GENERAL PROVISIONS
50-1
5910861-000
occurring in all. They are intended to be complementary and to describe and
provide for a complete work. In case of discrepancy, calculated dimensions will
govern over scaled dimensions; contract technical specifications shall govern
over contract general provisions, plans, cited standards for materials or
testing, and cited FAA advisory circulars; contract general provisions shall
govern over plans, cited standards for materials or testing, and cited FAA
advisory circulars; plans shall govern over cited standards for materials or
testing and cited FAA advisory circulars.
The Contractor shall not take advantage of any apparent error or omission on the
plans or specifications. In the event the Contractor discovers any apparent
error or discrepancy, he shall immediately call upon the Engineer for his/her
interpretation and decision, and such decision shall be final.
50-04 COOPERATION OF CONTRACTOR. He shall have available on the work at all
times one copy each of the plans and specifications. Additional copies of plans
and specifications may be obtained by the Contractor for the cost of
reproduction.
The Contractor shall give constant attention to the work to facilitate the
progress thereof, and he shall cooperate with the Engineer and hiS/her inspectors
and with other contractors in every way possible. The Engineer shall allocate
he work and designate the sequence of construction in case of controversy between
contractors. The Contractor shall have a competent superintendent on the work
at all times who is fully authorized as his/her agent on the work. The
superintendent shall be capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the plans
and specifications and shall receive and fulfill instructions from the Engineer
or hiS/her authorized representative.
so-os COOPBRATION BB'l'WBBN CONTRACTORS. The owner reserves the right to contract
for and perform other or additional work on or near the work covered by this
contract.
When separate contracts are let wi thin the limits of anyone proj ect, each
Contractor shall conduct his/her work so as not to interfere with or hinder the
progress of completion of the work being performed by other Contractors.
Contractors working on the same project shall cooperate with each other as
directed.
Each Contractor involved shall assume all liability, financial or otherwise, in
connection with his/her contract and shall protect and save harmless the owner
from any and all damages or claims that may arise because of inconvenience,
delays, or loss experienced by him because of the presence and operations of
other Contractors working within the limits of the same project.
The Contractor shall arrange hiS/her work and shall place and dispose of the
materials being used so as not to interfere with the operations of the other
Contractors within the limits of the same project. He shall join his/her work
with that of the others in an acceptable manner and shall perform it in proper
sequence to that of the others.
50-06 CORSTRDCTION LAYOOT AND STAKES. The Engineer shall establish horizontal
and vertical control in the Contract Documents only. The Contractor must
establish all layout required for the construction of the work. Such stakes and
markings as the Engineer may set for either his/her own or the Contractor's
guidance shall be preserved by the Contractor. In case of negligence on the
part of the Contractor, or his/her employees, resulting in the destruction of
such stakes or markings, an amount equal to the cost of replacing the same may
be deducted from subsequent estimates due the Contractor at the discretion of the
Engineer.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
50-2
5910861-000
50-07 ~ICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT. Whenever batching or mixing plant
equipment is required to be operated automatically under the contract and a
breakdown or malfunction of the automatic controls occurs, the equipment may be
operated manually or by other methods for a period 48 hours following the
breakdown or malfunction, provided this method of operations will product results
which conform to all other requirements of the contract.
50-08 AUTHORITY ARC DUTIBS OF INSPBCTORS. Inspectors employed by the owner
shall be authorized to inspect all work done and all material furnished. Such
inspection may extend to all or any part of the work and to the preparation,
fabrication, or manufacture of the materials to be used. Inspectors are not
authorized to revoke, alter, or waive any provision of the contract. Inspectors
are not authorized to issue instructions contrary to the plans and specifications
or to act as foreman for the Contractor.
Inspectors employed by the owner are authorized to notify the Contractor or
hiS/her representatives of any failure of the work or materials to conform to the
requirements of the contract, plans, or specifications and to reject such
nonconforming materials in question until such issues can be referred to the
Engineer for his/her decision.
50-09 INSPBCTION OF THE WORK. All materials and each part or detail of the work
shall be subject to inspection by the Engineer. The Engineer shall be allowed
access to all parts of the work and shall be furnished with such information and
assistance by the Contractor as is required to make a complete and detailed
inspection.
If the Engineer requests it, the Contractor, at any time before acceptance of the
work, shall remove or uncover such portions of the finished work as may be
directed. After examination, the Contractor shall restore said portions of the
work to the standard required by the specifications. Should the work thus
exposed or examined prove acceptable, the uncovering, or removing, and the
replacing of the covering or making good of the parts removed will be paid for
as extra work j but should the work so exposed or examined prove unacceptable, the
uncovering, or removing, and the replacing of the covering or making good of the
parts removed will be at the Contractor's expense.
Any work done or materials used without supervision or inspection by an
authorized representative of the owner may be ordered removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense unless the owner's representative failed to inspect after
having been given reasonable notice in writing that the work was to be performed.
Should the contract work include relocation, adjustment, or any other
modification to existing facilities, not the property of the (contract) owner,
authorized representatives of the owners of such facilities shall have the right
to inspect such work. Such inspection shall in no sense make any facility owner
a party to the contract, and shall in no way interfere with the rights of the
parties to this contract.
50-10 ~ OF UNACCEPTABLE ARC URADTHORIZBD WORK. All work which does not
form to the requirements of the contract, plans, and specifications will be
considered unacceptable, unless otherwise determined acceptable by the Engineer
as provided in the subsection titled CONFORMITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS of
this section.
Unacceptable work, whether the result of poor workmanship, use of defective
materials, damage through carelessness, or any other cause found to exist prior
to the final acceptance of the work, shall be removed immediately and replaced
in an acceptable manner in accordance with the provisions of the subsection
titled CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK of Section 70.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
50-3
5910861-000
Work done contrary to the instructions of the Engineer, work done beyond the
lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein specified, or any extra
work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and will not be
paid for under the provisions of the contract. Work so done may be ordered
removed or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Upon failure on the part of the Contractor to comply forthwith with any order of
the Engineer made under the provisions of this subsection, the Engineer will have
authority to cause unacceptable work to be remedied or removed and replaced and
unauthorized work to be removed and to deduct the costs (incurred by the owner)
from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.
50-11 LOAD RESTRICTIONS. The Contractor shall comply with all legal load
restrictions in the hauling of materials on public roads beyond the limits of the
work. A special permit will not relieve the Contractor of liability for damage
which may result from the moving of material or equipment.
The operation of equipment of such weight or so loaded as to cause damage to
structures or to any other type of construction will not be permitted. Hauling
of materials over the base course or surface course under construction shall be
limited as directed. No loads will be permitted on a concrete pavement, base,
or structure before the expiration of the curing period. The Contractor shall
be responsible for all damage done by hiS/her hauling equipment and shall co~rect
such damage at his/her own expense.
50-12 MJUNTBRANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION. The Contractor shall maintain the work
during construction and until the work is accepted. This maintenance shall
constitute continuous and effective work prosecuted day by day, with adequate
equipment and forces so that the work is maintained in satisfactory condition at
all times.
In the case of a contract for the placing of a course upon a course or subgrade
previously constructed, the Contractor shall maintain the previous course or
subgrade during all construction operations.
All costs of maintenance work during construction and before the project is
accepted shall be included in the unit prices bid on the various contract items,
and the Contractor will not be paid an additional amount for such work.
50-13 FAILDRE TO MJURrAIN THE WORK. Should the Contractor at any time fail to
maintain the work as provided in the subsection titled MAINTENANCE DURING
CONSTRUCTION of this section, the Engineer shall immediately notify the
Contractor of such noncompliance. Such notification shall specify a reasonable
time within which the Contractor shall be required to remedy such unsatisfactory
maintenance condition. The time specified will give due consideration to the
exigency that exists.
Should the Contractor fail to respond to the Engineer's notification, the
Engineer may suspend any work necessary for the owner to correct such
unsatisfactory maintenance condition, depending on the exigency that exists. Any
maintenance cost incurred by the owner, shall be deducted from monies due or to
become due the Contractor.
50-14 PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE. NOT USED
50-15 FIm\L ACCEPTANCE. NOT OSED
50-16 CLAIMS FOR ADJUSTMENT AND DISPOTBS. If for any reason the Contractor
deems that additional compensation is due him for work or materials not clearly
provided for in the contract, plans, or specifications or previously authorized
as extra work, he shall notify the Engineer in writing of his/her intention to
claim such additional compensation before he begins the work on which he bases
GENERAL PROVISIONS
50-4
5910861-000
the claim. If such notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded
proper opportunity by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost
as required, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive any claim for such
additional compensation. Such notice by the Contractor and the fact that the
Engineer has kept account of the cost of the work shall not in any way be
construed as proving or substantiating the validity of the claim. When the work
on which the claim for additional compensation is based has been completed, the
Contractor shall, within 10 calendar days, submit his/her written claim to the
Engineer who will present it to the owner for consideration in accordance with
local laws or ordinances.
Nothing in this subsection shall be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's
right to dispute final payment based on differences in measurements or
computations.
50-17 COST REDUCTION INCBRTIVE. NOT USED
END OF SECTION 50
GENERAL PROVISIONS
50-5
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
RE1f PASSERGER TERKIRAL BUILDIBG
H:)JmOE COONTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 60
CONTROL OF MATERIALS
60-01 SOURCE OF SUPPLY AIm QUALITY RBQUIRBMBR'l'S. The materials used on the work
shall conform to the requirements of the contract, plans, and specifications.
Unless otherwise specified, such materials that are manufactured or processed
shall be new (as compared to used or reprocessed) .
In order to expedite the inspection and testing of materials, the Contractor
shall furnish complete statements to the Engineer as to the origin, composition,
and manufacture of all materials to be used in the work. Such statements shall
be furnished promptly after execution of the contract but, in all cases, prior
to delivery of such materials.
At the Engineer'S option, materials may be approved at the source of supply
before delivery is stated. If it is found after trial that sources of supply for
previously approved materials do not produce specified products, the Contractor
shall furnish materials from other sources.
The Contractor shall furnish airport lighting equipment that conforms to the
requirements of cited materials specifications. In addition, where an FAA
specification for airport lighting equipment is cited in the plans or
specifications, the Contractor shall furnish such equipment that is:
a. Listed in FAA Advisory Circular (AC) 150/5345-1, Approved Airport
Equipment, that is in effect on the date of advertisement; and,
b. Produced by the manufacturer qualified (by FAA) to produce such
specified and listed equipment.
The following airport lighting equipment is required for this contract and is to
be furnished by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of this
subsection:
EQUIPMENT NAME
CITED FAA SPECIFICATIONS
EFFECTIVE FAA AC OR APPROVAL LETI'ER FOR EQUIPMENT AND
MANUFACTURER
60-02 SAMPLES, TESTS, AIm CITED SPECIFICATIONS. All materials used in the work
shall be inspected, tested, and approved by the Engineer before incorporation in
the work. Any work in which untested materials are used without approval or
written permission of the Engineer shall be performed at the Contractor's risk.
Materials found to be unacceptable and unauthorized will not be paid for and, if
directed by the Engineer, shall be removed at the Contractor's expense. Unless
otherwise designated, tests in accordance with the cited standard methods of
AASHTO or ASTM which are current on the date of advertisement for bids will be
made by and at the expense of the Owner. Samples will be taken by a qualified
representative of the Owner. All materials being used are subject to inspection,
test, or rejection at any time prior to or during incorporation into the work.
Copies of all tests will be furnished to the Contractor at his/her request.
60-03 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE. The Engineer may permit the use, prior to
sampling and testing, of certain materials or assemblies when accompanied by
manufacturer's certificates of compliance stating that such materials or
assemblies fully comply with the requirements of the contract. The certificate
GENERAL PROVISIONS
60-1
5910861-000
shall be signed by the manufacturer. Each lot of such materials or assemblies
delivered to the work must be accompanied by a certificate of compliance in which
the lot is clearly identified.
Materials or assemblies used on the basis of certificates of compliance may be
sampled and tested at any time and if found not to be in conformity with contract
requirements will be subject to rejection whether in place or not.
The form and distribution of certificates of compliance shall be as approved by
the Engineer.
60-04 PLANT INSPBCTION. The Engineer or his/her authorized representative may
inspect, at its source, any specified material or assembly to be used in the
work. Manufacturing plants may be inspected from time to time for the purpose
of determining compliance with specified manufacturing methods or materials to
be used in the work and to obtain samples required for his/her acceptance of the
material or assembly.
Should the Engineer conduct plant inspections, the following conditions shall
exist:
a. The Engineer shall have the cooperation and assistance of the
Contractor and the producer with whom he has contracted for materials.
b. The Engineer shall have full entry at all reasonable times to such
parts of the plant that concern the manufacture or production of the materials
being furnished.
Co If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall arrange for adequate
office or working space that may be reasonably needed for conducting plant
inspections. Office or working space should be conveniently located with respect
to the plant.
It is understood and agreed that the owner shall have the right to retest any
material which has been tested and approved at the source of supply after it has
been delivered to the site. The Engineer shall have the right to reject only
material which, when retested, does not meet the requirements of the contract,
plans, or specifications.
60-05 BNGIRBBR'S FIBLD OFFICE AND LABORATORY. When specified and provided for
as a contract item, the Contractor shall furnish a building for the exclusive use
of the Engineer as a field office and field testing laboratory. The building
shall be furnished and maintained by the Contractor as specified herein and shall
become property of the Contractor when the contract work is completed.
60-06 STORAGB OF ~TBRIALS. Materials shall be so stored as to assure the
preservation of their quality and fitness for the work. Stored materials, even
though approved before storage, may again be inspected prior to their use in the
work. Stored materials shall be located so as to facilitate their prompt
inspection. The Contractor shall coordinate the storage of all materials with
the Engineer. Materials to be stored on airport property shall not create an
obstruction to air navigation nor shall they interfere with the free and
unobstructed movement of aircraft. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, the
storage of materials and the location of the Contractor's plant and parked
equipment or vehicles shall be as directed by the Engineer. Private property
shall not be used for storage purposes without written permission of the owner
or lessee of such property. The Contractor shall make all arrangements and bear
all expenses for the storage of materials on private property. Upon request, the
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a copy of the property owner's permission.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
60-2
5910861-000
All storage sites on private or airport property shall be restored to their
original condition by the Contractor at his/her entire expense, except as
otherwise agreed to (in writing) by the owner or lessee of the property.
60-07 URACCBPTABLB ~TERIALS. Any material or assembly that does not conform
to the requirements of the contract, plans, or specifications shall be considered
unacceptable and shall be rejected. The Contractor shall remove any rejected
material or assembly from the site of the work, unless otherwise instructed by
the Engineer.
No rejected material or assembly, the defects of which have been corrected by the
Contractor, shall not be returned to the site of the work until such time as the
Engineer has approved its used in the work.
60-08 OWRBR FURNISHED MATERIALS. The Contractor shall furnish all materials
required to complete the work, except those specified herein (if any) to be
furnished by the owner. OWner-furnished materials shall be made available to the
Contractor at the location specified herein.
All costs of handling, transportation from the specified location to the site of
work, storage, and installing owner-furnished materials shall be included in the
unit price bid for the contract item in which such owner-furnished material is
used.
After any owner-furnished material has been delivered to the location specified,
the Contractor shall be responsible for any demurrage, damage, loss, or other
deficiencies which may occur during the Contractor's handling, storage, or use
of such owner-furnished material. The owner will deduct from any monies due or
to become due the Contractor any cost incurred by the owner in making good such
loss due to the Contractor's handling, storage, or use of owner-furnished
materials.
END OF SECTION 60
GENERAL PROVISIONS
60-3
5910861-000
MARAmOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
RlNROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 70
LEGAL REGULATIONS AND RESPORSIBILITY TO PUBLIC
70--1 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED. The Contractor shall keep fully informed of all
Federal and state laws, all local laws, ordinances, and regulations and all
orders and decrees of bodies or tribunals having any jurisdiction or authority,
which in any manner affect those engaged or employed on the work, or which in any
way affect the conduct of the work. He shall at all times observe and comply
with all such laws, ordinances, regulations, orders, and decrees; and shall
protect and indemnify the owner and all his/her officers, agents, or servants
against any claim or liability arising from or based on the violation of any such
law, ordinance, regulation, order, or decree, whether by himself or hiS/her
employees.
70-02 PERMITS, LICENSES, AND TAXES. The Contractor shall procure all permits
and licenses, pay all charges, fees, and taxes, and give all notices necessary
and incidental to the due and lawful prosecution of the work.
70-03 PA:r8rf'nw DEVICES, MATERIALS, AND PROCBSSES. If the Contractor is required
or desires to use any design, device, material, or process covered by letters of
patent or copyright, he shall provide for such use by suitable legal agreement
with the patentee or owner. The Contractor and the surety shall indemnify and
save harmless the owner, any third party, or political subdivision from any and
all claims for infringement by reason of the use of any such patented design,
device, material or process, or any trademark or copyright, and shall indemnify
the owner for any costs, expenses, and damages which it may be obliged to pay by
reason of an infringement, at any time during the prosecution or after the
completion of the work.
70-04 RESTORATIOR OF SURFACES DISTORBBD BY OTHBRS. The owner reserves the right
to authorize the construction, reconstruction, or maintenance of any public or
private utility service, FAA or National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
(NOAA) facility, or a utility service of another government agency at any time
during the progress of the work. To the extent that such construction,
reconstruction, or maintenance has been coordinated with the owner, such
authorized work (by others) is indicated as follows:
Owner (Utility or Other Facility)
Location (See Plan Sheet No.)
Person to Contact (Name, Title, Address and Phone)
Except as listed above, the Contractor shall not permit any individual, firm, or
corporation to excavate or otherwise disturb such utility services or facilities
located within the limits of the work without the written permission of the
Engineer.
Should the owner of public or private utility service, FAA, or NOAA facility, or
a utility service of another government agency be authorized to construct,
reconstruct, or maintain such utility service or facility during the progress of
the work, the Contractor shall cooperate with such owners by arranging and
performing the work in this contract so as to facilitate such construction,
reconstruction or maintenance by others whether or not such work by others is
listed above. When ordered as extra work by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
make all necessary repairs to the work which are due to such authorized work by
others, unless otherwise provided for in the contract, plans, or specifications.
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall not be entitled to make any
GENERAL PROVISIONS
70-1
5910861-000
claim for damages due to such authorized work by others or for any delay to the
work resulting from such authorized work.
70-05 FEDBRAL AID PARTICIPATION. For AlP contracts, the United States
Government has agreed to reimburse the owner for some portion of the contract
costs. Such reimbursement is made from time to time upon the owner's (sponsor's)
request to the FAA. In consideration of the United Sates Government's (FAA's)
agreement with the owner, the owner has included provisions in this contract
pursuant to the requirements of the Airport Improvement Act of 1982, as amended
by the Airport and Airway Safety and Capacity Expansion Act of 1987, and the
Rules and Regulations of the FAA that pertain to the work.
As required by the Act, the contract work is subject to the inspection and
approval of duly authorized representatives of the Administrator, FAA, and is
further subject to those provisions of the rules and regulations that are cited
in the contract, plans, or specifications.
No requirement of the Act, the rules and regulations implementing the Act, or
this contract shall be construed as making the Federal Government a party to the
contract nor will any such requirement interfere, in any way, with the rights of
either party to the contract.
70-06 SANITARY, HEALTH, AND SAFETY PROVISIONS. The Contractor shall provide and
maintain in a neat, sanitary condition such accommodations for the use of his/her
employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of the state and
local Board of Health, or of other bodies or tribunals having jurisdiction.
Attention is directed to Federal, state, and local laws, rules and regulations
concerning construction safety and health standards. The Contractor shall not
require any worker to work in surroundings or under conditions are unsanitary,
hazardous, or dangerous to his/her health or safety.
70-07 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY. The Contractor shall control his/her
operations and those of his/her subcontractors and all suppliers, to assure the
least inconvenience to the traveling public. Under all circumstances, safety
shall be the most important consideration.
The Contractor shall maintain the free and unobstructed movement of aircraft and
vehicular traffic with respect to his/her own operations and those of his/her
subcontractors and all suppliers in accordance with the subsection titled
MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC of Section 40 hereinbefore specified and shall limit such
operations for the convenience and safety of the traveling public as specified
in the subsection titled LIMITATION OF OPERATIONS of Section 80 hereinafter.
70-08 BARRICADBS, 1IARNIRG SIGNS, AND HAZARD MARKIRGS. The Contractor shall
furnish, erect, and maintain all barricades, warning signs, and markings for
hazards necessary to protect the public and the work. When used during periods
of darkness, such barricades, warning signs, and hazard markings shall be
suitably illuminated.
For vehicular and pedestrian traffic, the Contractor shall furnish, erect, and
maintain barricades, warning signs, lights and other traffic control devices in
reasonable conformity with the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for
Streets and Highways (published by the United States Government Printing Office) .
When the work requires Closing an air operations area of the airport or portion
of such area, the Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain temporary
markings and associated lighting conforming to the requirements of AC 150/5340-
1, Marking of Paved Areas on Airports.
The Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain markings and associated
lighting of open trenches, excavations, temporary stock piles, and hiS/her parked
GENERAL PROVISIONS
70-2
5910861-000
construction equipment that may be hazardous to the operation of emergency fire-
rescue or maintenance vehicles on the airport in reasonable conformance to AC
150/5370-2, Operational Safety on Airports During Construction Activity.
The Contractor shall identify each motorized vehicle or piece of construction
equipment in reasonable conformance to AC 150/5370-2.
The Contractor shall furnish and erect all barricades, warning signs, and
markings for hazards prior to commencing work which requires such erection and
shall maintain the barricades, warning signs, and markings for hazards until
their dismantling is directed by the Engineer.
Open-flame type lights shall not be permitted within the air operations areas of
the airport.
70-09 USB OF EXPLOSIVES. When the use of explosives is necessary for the
prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care not to
endanger life or property, including new work. The Contractor shall be
responsible for all damage resulting from the use of explosives.
All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner in compliance with all laws and
ordinances, and all such storage places shall be clearly marked. Where no local
laws or ordinances apply, storage shall be provided satisfactory to the Engineer
and, in general, not closer than 1,000 feet (300 m) from the work or from any
building, road, or other place of human occupancy.
The Contractor shall notify each property owner and public utility company having
structures or facilities in proximity to the site of the work of hiS/her
intention to use explosives. Such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance
to enable them to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their
property from injury.
The use of electrical blasting caps shall not be permitted on or within 1,000
feet (300 m) of the airport property.
70-10 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF PROPBRTY AND LANDSCAPB. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and private property, and
shall protect carefully from disturbance or damage all land monuments and
property markers until the Engineer has witnessed or otherwise referenced their
location and shall not move them until directed.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any
character, during the prosecution of the work, resulting from any act, omission,
neglect, or misconduct in his/her manner or method of executing the work, or at
any time due to defective work or materials, and said responsibility will not be
released until the project shall have been completed and accepted.
When or where any direct or indirect damage or injury is done to public or
private property by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct
in the execution of the work, or in consequence of the nonexecution thereof by
the Contractor, he shall restore, at hiS/her own expense, such property to a
condition similar or equal to that existing before such damage or injury was
done, by repairing, or otherwise restoring as may be directed, or he shall make
good such damage or injury in an acceptable manner.
70-11 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DADGB CL.Jl.~. The Contractor shall indemnify and save
harmless the Engineer and the owner and their officers, and employees from all
suits actions, or claims of any character brought because of any injuries or
damage received or sustained by any person, persons, or property on account of
the operations of the Contractor; or on account of or in consequence of any
neglect in safeguarding the work; or through use of unacceptable materials in
constructing the work; or because of any act or omission, neglect, or misconduct
GENERAL PROVISIONS
70-3
5910861-000
of said Contractor; or because of any claims or amounts recovered from any
infringements of patent, trademark, or copyright; or from any claims or amounts
arising or recovered under the' 'Workmen's Compensation Act," or any other law,
ordinance, order, or decree. Money due the Contractor under and by virtue of
his/her contract as may be considered necessary by the owner for such purpose may
be retained for the use of the owner or, in case no money is due, his/her surety
may be held until such suit or suits, action or actions, claim or claims for
injuries or damages as aforesaid shall have been settled and suitable evidence
to that effect furnished to the owner, except that money due the Contractor will
not be withheld when the Contractor produces satisfactory evidence that he is
adequately protected by public liability and property damage insurance.
70-12 THIRD PARTY BBNBFICIARY CLAUSB. It is specifically agreed between the
parties executing the contract that it is not intended by any of the provisions
of any part of the contract to create the public or any member thereof a third
party beneficiary or to authorize anyone not a party to the contract to maintain
a suit for personal injuries or property damage pursuant to the terms or
provisions of the contract.
70-13 OPENING SBCTIONS OF THE WORK TO TRAFFIC. Should it be necessary for the
Contractor to complete portions of the contract work for the beneficial occupancy
of the owner prior to completion of the entire contract, such' 'phasing" of the
work shall be specified herein and indicated on the plans. When so specified,
the Contractor shall complete such portions of the work on or before the date
specified or as otherwise specified. The Contractor shall make hiS/her own
estimate of the difficulties involved in arranging hiS/her work to permit such
beneficial occupancy by the owner as described below:
Phase or Description
Required Date or Sequence of Owner's Beneficial Occupancy
Work Shown on Plan Sheet
No portion of the work may be opened by the Contractor for public use until
ordered by the Engineer in writing. Should it become necessary to open a portion
of the work to public traffic on a temporary or intermittent basis, such openings
shall be made when, in the opinion of the Engineer, such portion of the work is
in an acceptable condition to support the intended traffic. Temporary or
intermittent openings are considered to be inherent in the work and shall not
constitute either acceptance of the portion of the work so opened or a waiver of
any provision of the contract. Any damage to the portion of the work so opened
that is not attributable to traffic which is permitted by the owner shall be
repaired by the Contractor at hiS/her expense.
The Contractor shall make hiS/her own estimate of the inherent difficulties
involved in completing the work under the conditions herein described and shall
not claim any added compensation by reason of delay or increased cost due to
opening a portion of the contract work.
70-14 CORTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK. Until the Engineer's final written
acceptance of the entire completed work, the Contractor shall have the charge and
care thereof and shall take every precaution against injury or damage to any part
due to the action of the elements or from any other cause, whether arising from
the execution or from the nonexecution of the work. The Contractor shall
rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all injuries or damages to any portion
of the work occasioned by any of the above causes before final acceptance and
shall bear the expense thereof except damage to the work due to unforeseeable
causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the
Contractor, including but not restricted to acts of God such as earthquake, tidal
wave, tornado, hurricane or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature, or acts of
the public enemy or of government authorities.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
70-4
5910861-000
If the work is suspended for any cause whatever, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the work and shall take such precautions necessary to prevent
damage to the work. The Contractor shall provide for normal drainage and shall
erect necessary temporary structures, signs, or other facilities at his/her
expense. During such period of suspension of work, the Contractor shall properly
and continuously maintain in an acceptable growing condition all living material
in newly established planting, seedings, and soddings furnished under his/her
contract, and shall take adequate precautions to protect new tree growth and
other important vegetative growth against injury.
70-15 COIn'RACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR tlTILITY SBRVICE AND FACILITIBS OF OTHBRS.
As provided in the subsection titled RESTORATION OF SURFACES DISTURBED BY OTHERS
of this section, the Contractor shall cooperate with the owner of any public or
private utility service, FAA or NOAA, or a utility service of another government
agency that may be authorized by the owner to construct, reconstruct or maintain
such utility services or facilities during the progress of the work. In
addition, the Contractor shall control his/her operations to prevent the
unscheduled interruption of such utility services and facilities.
TO the extent that such public or private utility services, FAA, or NOAA
facilities, or utility services of another governmental agency are known to exist
within the limits of the contract work, the approximate locations have been
indicated on the plans and the owners are indicated as follows:
Utility Service or Facility
Person to Contract (Name, Title, Address, & Phone)
Owner's Emergency Contact (Phone)
It is understood and agreed that the owner does not guarantee the accuracy or the
completeness of the location information relating to existing utility services,
facilities, or structures that may be shown on the plans or encountered in the
work. Any inaccuracy or omission in such information shall not relieve the
Contractor of his/her responsibility to protect such existing features from
damage or unscheduled interruption of service.
It is further understood and agreed that the Contractor shall, upon execution of
the contract, notify the owners of all utility services or other facilities of
his/her plan of operations. Such notification shall be in writing addressed to
THE PERSON TO CONTACT as provided hereinbefore in this subsection and the
subsection titled RESTORATION OF SURFACES DISTURBED BY OTHERS of this section.
A copy of each notification shall be given to the Engineer.
In addition to the general written notification hereinbefore provided, it shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep such individual owners advised
of changes in his/her plan of operations that would affect such owners.
Prior to commencing the work in the general vicinity of an existing utility
service or facility, the Contractor shall again notify each such owner of his/her
plan of operation. If, in the Contractor's opinion, the owner's assistance is
needed to locate the utility service or facility or the presence of a
representative of the owner is desirable to observe the work, such advice should
be included in the notification. Such notification shall be given by the most
expeditious means to reach the utility owner's PERSON TO CONTACT no later than
two normal business days prior to the Contractor's commencement of operations in
such general vicinity. The Contractor shall furnish a written summary of the
notification to the Engineer.
The Contractor's failure to give the two day's notice hereinabove provided shall
be cause for the Engineer to suspend the Contractor's operations in the general
vicinity of a utility service or facility.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
70-5
5910861-000
Where the outside limits of an underground utility service have been located and
staked on the ground, the Contractor shall be required to use excavation methods
acceptable to the Engineer within 3 feet (90 cm) of such outside limits at such
points as may be required to ensure protection from damage due to the
Contractor's operations.
Should the Contractor damage or interrupt the operation of a utility service or
facility by accident or otherwise, he shall immediately notify the proper
authority and the Engineer and shall take all reasonable measures to prevent
further damage or interruption of service. The Contractor, in such events, shall
cooperate with the utility service or facility owner and the Engineer
continuously until such damage has been repaired and service restored to the
satisfaction of the utility or facility owner.
The Contractor shall bear all costs of damage and restoration of service to any
utility service or facility due to his/her operations whether or not due to
negligence or accident. The contract owner reserves the right to deduct such
costs from any monies due or which may become due the Contractor, or his/her
surety.
70-16 FURNISHING RIGHTS-OF-WAY. The owner will be responsible for furnishing
all rights-of-way upon which the work is to be constructed in advance of the
Contractor's operations.
70-17 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the
contract provisions or in exercising any power or authority granted to him by
this contract, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer, his/her authorized
representatives, or any officials of the owner either personally or as an
official of the owner. It is understood that in such matters they act solely as
agents and representatives of the owner.
70-18 NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS. Upon completion of the work, the owner will
expeditiously make final inspection and notify the Contractor of final
acceptance. Such final acceptance, however, shall not preclude or estop the
owner from correcting any measurement, estimate, or certificate made before or
after completion of the work, nor shall the owner be precluded or estopped from
recovering from the Contractor or his/her surety, or both, such overpayment as
may be sustained, or by failure on the part of the Contractor to fulfill his/her
obligations under the contract. A waiver on the part of the owner of any breach
of any part of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or
subsequent breach.
The Contractor, without prejudice to the terms of the contract, shall be liable
to the owner for latent defects, fraud, or such gross mistakes as may amount to
fraud, or as regards the owner's rights under any warranty or guaranty.
70-19 BNVIRORMBRTAL PROTECTION. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal,
state, and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment.
He shall take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes,
ponds, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful
materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous
matter.
70-20 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL FINDINGS. Unless otherwise specified in
this subsection, the Contractor is advised that the site of the work is not
within any property, district, or site, and does not contain any building,
structure, or object listed in the current National Register of Historic Places
published by the United States Department of Interior.
Should the Contractor encounter, during his/her operations, any building, part
of a building, structure, or object which is incongruous with its surroundings,
he shall immediately cease operations in that location and notify the Engineer.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
70-6
5910861-000
The Engineer will immediately investigate the Contractor's finding and will
direct the Contractor to either resume his/her operations or to suspend
operations as directed.
Should the Engineer order suspension of the Contractor's operations in order to
protect an archaeological or historical finding, or order the Contractor to
perform extra work, such shall be covered by an appropriate contract modification
(change order or supplemental agreement) as provided in the subsection titled
EXTRA WORK of Section 40 and the General and Supplemental Conditions of the
Contract. If appropriate, the contract modification shall include an extension
of contract time in accordance with General and Supplemental Conditions of the
Contract.
END OF SBCTION 70
GENERAL PROVISIONS
70-7
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSBRGBR TBRIIDIAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 80
PROSBCtlTION AND PROGRESS
80-01 SUBLETTING OF CONTRACT. The owner will not recognize any subcontractor
on the work. The Contractor shall at all times when work is in progress be
represented either in person, by a qualified superintendent, or by other
designated, qualified representative who is duly authorized to receive and
execute orders of the Engineer.
Should the Contractor elect to assign his/her contract, said assignment shall be
concurred in by the surety, shall be presented for the consideration and approval
of the owner, and shall be consummated only on the written approval of the
owner. In case of approval, the Contractor shall file copies of all subcontracts
with the Engineer.
80-02 NOTICE TO PROCEED. The notice to proceed shall state the date on which
it is expected the Contractor will begin the construction and from which date
contract time will be charged. The Contractor shall begin the work to be
performed under the contract within 10 days of the date set by the Engineer in
the written notice to proceed, but in any event, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of the time actual construction operations
will begin.
80-03 PROSBCtlTION AND PROGRESS. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor
shall submit his/her progress schedule for the Engineer's approval within 10 days
after the effective date of the notice to proceed. The Contractor's progress
schedule, when approved by the Engineer, may be used to establish major
construction operations and to check on the progress of the work. The Contractor
shall provide sufficient materials, equipment, and labor to guarantee the
completion of the project in accordance with the plans and specifications within
the time set forth in the proposal.
If the Contractor falls significantly behind the submitted schedule, the
Contractor shall, upon the Engineer's request, submit a revised schedule for
completion of the work within the contract time and modify his/her operations to
provide such additional materials, equipment, and labor necessary to meet the
revised schedule. Should the prosecution of the work be discontinued for any
reason, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of
resuming operations.
For AIP contracts, the Contractor shall not commence any actual construction
prior to the date on which the notice to proceed is issued by the owner.
80-04 LIMITATION OF OPBRATIONS. The Contractor shall control his/her operations
and the operations of his/her subcontractors and all suppliers so as to provide
for the free and unobstructed movement of aircraft in the AIR OPERATIONS AREAS
of the airport.
When the work requires the Contractor to conduct his/her operations within an AIR
OPERATIONS AREA of the airport, the work shall be coordinated with airport
management (through the Engineer) at least 48 hours prior to commencement of such
work. The Contractor shall not close an AIR OPERATIONS AREA until so authorized
by the Engineer and until the necessary temporary marking and associated lighting
is in place as provided in the subsection titled BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS, AND
HAZARD MARKINGS of Section 70.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
80-1
5910861-000
When the contract work requires the Contractor to work within an AIR OPERATIONS
AREA of the airport on an intermittent basis (intermittent opening and closing
of the AIR OPERATIONS AREA), the Contractor shall maintain constant
communications as hereinafter specified; immediately obey all instructions to
vacate the AIR OPERATIONS AREA; immediately obey all instructions to resume work
in such AIR OPERATIONS AREA. Failure to maintain the specified communications
or to obey instructions shall be cause for suspension of the Contractor's
operations in the AIR OPERATIONS AREA until the satisfactory conditions are
provided. The following AIR OPERATIONS AREA (AOA) cannot be closed to operating
aircraft to permit the Contractor's operations on a continuous basis and will
therefore be closed to aircraft operations intermittently as follows:
AOA
TIME PERIODS AOA CAN BE CLOSED
TYPE OF COMMUNICATIONS REQUIRED WHEN WORKING IN AN ADA
CONTROL AUTHORITY
80-05 CHARACTER OF WORKERS, MBTHODS, AND BQUIPMBRT. The Contractor shall, at
all times, employ sufficient labor and equipment for prosecuting the work to full
completion in the manner and time required by the contract, plans, and
specifications.
All workers shall have sufficient skill and experience to perform properly the
work assigned to them. Workers engaged in special work or skilled work shall
have sufficient experience in such work and in the operation of the equipment
required to perform the work satisfactorily.
All equipment which is proposed to be used on the work shall be of sufficient
size and in such mechanical condition as to met requirements of the work and to
produce a satisfactory quality of work. Equipment used on any portion of the
work shall be such that no injury to previously completed work, adjacent
property, or existing airport facilities will result from its use.
When the methods and equipment to be used by the Contractor in accomplishing the
work are not prescribed in the contract, the Contractor is free to use any
methods or equipment that will accomplish the work in conformity with the
requirements of the contract, plans, and specifications.
When the contract specifies the use of certain methods and equipment, such
methods and equipment shall be used unless others are authorized by the
Engineer. If the Contractor desires to use a method or type of equipment other
than specified in the contract, he may request authority from the Engineer to do
so. The request shall be in writing and shall include a full description of the
methods and equipment proposed and of the reasons for desiring to make the
change. If approval is given, it will be on the condition that the Contractor
will be fully responsible for producing work in conformity with contract
requirements. If, after trial use of the substituted methods or equipment, the
Engineer determines that the work produced does not meet contract requirements,
the Contractor shall discontinue the use of the substitute method or equipment
and shall complete the remaining work with the specified methods and equipment.
The Contractor shall remove any deficient work and replace it with work of
specified quality, or take such other corrective action as the Engineer may
direct. No change will be made in basis of payment for the contract items
involved nor in contract time as a result of authorizing a change in methods or
equipment under this subsection.
80-06 TEMPORARY SOSPBRSION OF THE WORK. The Owner shall have the authority to
suspend the work wholly, or in part, for such period or periods as he may deem
necessary, due to unsuitable weather, or such other conditions as are considered
unfavorable for the prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due
to the failure on the part of the Contractor to carry out orders given or perform
any or all provisions of the contract.
GENERAL PROVISIONS
80-2
5910861-000
In the event that the Contractor is ordered by the Owner, in writing, to suspend
work for some unforeseen cause not otherwise provided for in the contract and
over which the Contractor has no control, the Contractor may be reimbursed for
actual money expended on the work during the period of shutdown. No allowance
will be made for anticipated profits. The period of shutdown shall be computed
from the effective date of the Owner's order to suspend work to the effective
date of the Owner's order to resume the work. Claims for such compensation shall
be filed with the Engineer within the time period stated in the Owner's order to
resume work. The Contractor shall submit with his/her claim information
substantiating the amount shown on the claim. The Engineer will forward the
Contractor's claim to the owner with his recommendation for consideration in
accordance with local laws or ordinances. No provision of this article shall be
construed as entitling the Contractor to compensation for delays due to inclement
weather, for suspensions made at the request of the Contractor, or for any other
delay provided for in the contract, plans, or specifications.
If it should become necessary to suspend work for an indefinite period, the
Contractor shall store all materials in such manner that they will not become an
obstruction nor become damaged in any way. He shall take every precaution to
prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed and provide for normal
drainage of the work. The Contractor shall erect temporary structures where
necessary to provide for traffic on, to, or from the airport.
80-07 DBTBRKIRATION AND BXTBRSION OF CORTRACT TDIB. NOT USED
80-08 FAILDRB TO COMPLBTB ON TDIB. For each calendar day or working day, as
specified in the contract, that substantial completion has not been attained
after the contract time (including all extensions and adjustments) the sum
specified in the contract and proposal as liquidated damages will be deducted
from any money due or to become due the Contractor or his/her surety. Such
deducted sums shall not be deducted as a penalty but shall be considered as
liquidation of a reasonable portion of damages that will be incurred by the owner
should the Contractor fail to complete the work in the time provided in his/her
contract.
Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the work or any part of it after
the time fixed for its completion, or after the date to which the time for
completion may have been extended, will in no way operate as a wavier on the part
of the owner of any of its rights under the contract.
80-09 DBFADLT AND TBRIIIRATION OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall be considered
in default of his/her contract and such default will be considered as cause fe__
the owner to terminate the contract for any of the following reasons if the
Contractor:
a. Fails to begin the work under the contract within the time specified
in the "Notice to Proceed," or
b. Fails to perform the work or fails to provide sufficient workers,
equipment or materials to assure completion of work in accordance with the terms
of the contract, or
C. Performs the work unsui tably or neglects or refuses to remove materials
or to perform anew such work as may be rejected as unacceptable and unsuitable,
or
d. Discontinues the prosecution of the work, or
e. Fails to resume work which has been discontinued within a reasonable
time after notice to do so, or
GENERAL PROVISIONS
80-3
5910861-000
f. Becomes insolvent or is declared bankrupt, or commits any act of
bankruptcy or insolvency, or
g. Allows any final judgment to stand against him unsatisfied for a period
of 10 days, or
h. Makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors, or
i. For any other cause whatsoever, fails to carry on the work in an
acceptable manner.
Should the Engineer consider the Contractor in default of the contract for any
reason hereinbefore, he shall immediately give written notice to the Contractor
and the Contractor's surety as to the reasons for considering the Contractor in
default and the owner's intentions to terminate the contract.
If the Contractor or surety, within a period of 10 days after such notice, does
not proceed in accordance therewith, then the owner will, upon written
notification from the Engineer of the facts of such delay, neglect, or default
and the Contractor's failure to comply with such notice, have full power and
authority without violating the contract, to take the prosecution of the work out
of the hands of the Contractor. The owner may appropriate or use any or all
materials and equipment that have been mobilized for use in the work and are
acceptable and may enter into an agreement for the completion of said contract
accordin~ to the terms and provisions thereof, or use such other methods as in
the opin10n of the Engineer will be required for the completion of said contract
in an acceptable manner.
All costs and charges incurred by the owner, together with the cost of completing
the work under contract, will be deducted from any monies due or which may become
due the Contractor. If such expense exceeds the sum which would have been
payable under the contract, then the Contractor and the surety shall be liable
and shall pay to the owner the amount of such excess.
80-10 TERMINATION FOR NATIONAL BMBRGBRCIBS. The owner shall terminate the
contract or portion thereof by written notice when the Contractor is prevented
fromproceed1ng with the construction contract as a direct result of an Executive
Order of the President with respect to the prosecution of war or in the interest
of national defense.
When the contract, or any portion thereof, is terminated before completion of all
items of work in the contract, payment will be made for the actual number of
units or items of work completed at the contract price or as mutually agreed for
items of work partially completed or not started. No claims or loss of
anticipated profits shall be considered.
Reimbursement for organization of the work, and other overhead expenses, (when
not otherwise included in the contract) and moving equipment and materials to and
from the job will be considered, the intent being that an equitable settlement
will be made with the Contractor.
Acceptable materials, obtained or ordered by the Contractor for the work and that
are not incorporated in the work shall, at the option of the Contractor, be
purchased from the Contractor at actual cost as shown by receipted bills and
actual cost records at such points of delivery as may be des1gnated by the
Engineer.
Termination of the contract or a portion thereof shall neither relieve the
Contractor of his/her responsibilities for the completed work nor shall it
relieve his/her surety of its obligation for and concerning any just claim
arising out of the work performed.
END OF SBCTION 80
GENERAL PROVISIONS
80-4
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TBRIIINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 90
MBAStJREMBN"l' AND PAnmRT
90-01 MBAStJREMBN"l' OF QOARTITIBS. NOT USED
90-02 SCOPB OF PAnmRT. The Contractor shall receive and accept compensation
provided for in the contract as full payment for furnishing all materials, for
performing all work under the contract in a complete and acceptable manner, and
for all risk, loss, damage, or expense of whatever character arising out of the
nature of the work or the prosecution thereof, subject to the provisions of the
subsection titled NO WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS of Section 70.
90-03 COMPBRSATION FOR ALTERED QOARTITIBS. NOT USED
90-04 PAnmRT FOR alITTBD ITEMS. As specified in the subsection titled OMITTED
ITEMS of Section 40, the Engineer shall have the right to omit from the work
(order nonperformance) any contract item, except major contract items, in the
best interest of the owner.
Should the Engineer omit or order nonperformance of a contract item or portion
of such item from the work, the Contractor shall accept payment in full at the
contract prices for any work actually completed and acceptable prior to the
Engineer's order to omit or nonperform such contract item.
Acceptable materials ordered by the Contractor or delivered on the work prior to
the date of the Engineer's order will be paid for at the actual cost to the
Contractor and shall thereupon become the property of the owner.
In addition to the reimbursement hereinbefore provided, the Contractor shall be
reimbursed for all actual costs incurred for the purpose of performing the
omitted contract item prior to the date of the Engineer's order. Such additional
costs incurred by the Contractor must be directly related to the deleted contract
item and shall be supported by certified statements by the Contractor as to the
nature the amount of such costs.
90-05 PAnmRT FOR BXTRA AND FORCE ACCOUNT WORK. Extra work, performed in
accordance with the subsection titled EXTRA WORK of Section 40, will be paid for
at the Contract prices or agreed prices specified in the change order or
supplemental agreement authorizing the extra work. When the change order or
supplemental agreement authorizing the extra work requires that it be done by
force account, such force account shall be measured and paid for based on
expended labor, equipment, and materials plus a negotiated and agreed upon
allowance for overhead and profit.
a. Miscellaneous. No additional allowance will be made for general
superintendence, the use of small tools, or other costs for which no specific
allowance is herein provided.
b. Comparison of Record. The Contractor and the Engineer shall compare
records of the cost of force account work at the end of each day. Agreement
shall be indicated by signature of the Contractor and the Engineer or their duly
authorized representatives.
c. Statement. No payment will be made for work performed on a force
account basis until the Contractor has furnished the Engineer with duplicate
itemized statements of the cost of such force account work detailed as follows:
GENERAL PROVISIONS
90-1
5910861-000
(1) Name, classification, date, daily hours, total hours, rate and
extension for each laborer and foreman.
(2) Designation, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate, and
extension for each unit of machinery and equipment.
(3) Quantities of materials, prices, and extensions.
(4) Transportation of materials.
(5) Cost of property damage, liability and workman's compensation
insurance premiums, unemployment insurance contributions, and social security
tax.
Statements shall be accompanied and supported by a receipted invoice for all
materials used and transportation charges. However, if materials used on the
force account work are not specifically purchased for such work but are taken
from the Contractor's stock, then in lieu of the invoices the Contractor shall
furnish an affidavit certifying that such materials were taken from his/her
stock, that the quantity claimed was actually used, and that the price and
transportation claimed represent the actual cost to the Contractor.
90-06 PARTIAL PAnmRTS. Partial payments will be made at least once each month
as the work progresses. Said payments will be based upon estimates prepar~d by
the Engineer of the value of the work performed and materials complete in place
in accordance with the contract, plans, and specifications. Such partial
payments may also include the delivered actual cost of those materials stockpiled
and stored in accordance with the subsection titled PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND
of this section.
No partial payment will be made when the amount due the Contractor since the last
estimate amounts to less than five hundred dollars.
From the total of the amount determined to be payable on a partial payment, 10
percent of such total amount will be deducted and retained by the owner until the
final payment is made, except as may be provided (at the Contractor's option) in
the subsection titled PAYMENT OF WITHHELD FUNDS of this section. The balance (90
percent) of the amount payable, less all previous payments, shall be certified
for payment. Should the Contractor exercise his/her option, as provided in the
subsection titled PAYMENT OF WITHHELD FUNDS of this section, no such 10 percent
retainage shall be deducted.
When not less than 95 percent of the work has been completed the Engineer may,
at his/her discretion and with the consent of the surety, prepare an estimate
from which will be retained an amount not less than twice the contract value or
estimated cost, whichever is greater, of the work remaining to be done. The
remainder, less all previous payments and deductions, will then be certified for
payment to the Contractor.
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall not be entitled to demand
or receive partial payment based on quanti ties of work in excess of those
provided in the proposal or covered by approved change orders or supplemental
agreements, except when such excess quanti ties have been determined by the
Engineer to be a part of the final quantity for the item of work in question.
No partial payment shall bind the owner to the acceptance of any materials or
work in place as to quality or quantity. All partial payments are subject to
correction at the time of final payment as provided in the subsection titled
ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT of this section.
90-07 PAnmRT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND. Partial payments may be made to the extent
of the delivered cost of materials to be incorporated in the work, provided that
GENERAL PROVISIONS
90-2
5910861-000
such materials meet the requirements of the contract, plans, and specifications
and are delivered to acceptable sites on the airport property or at other sites
in the vicinity that are acceptable to the owner. Such delivered costs of stored
or stockpiled materials may be included in the next partial payment after the
following conditions are met:
a. The material has been stored or stockpiled in a manner acceptable to
the Engineer at or on an approved site.
b. The Contractor has furnished the Engineer with acceptable evidence of
the quantity and quality of such stored or stockpiled materials.
c. The Contractor has furnished the Engineer with satisfactory evidence
that the material and transportation costs have been paid.
d. The Contractor has furnished the owner legal title (free of liens or
encumbrances of any kind) to the material so stored or stockpiled.
e. The Contractor has furnished the owner evidence that the material so
stored or stockpiled is insured against loss by damage to or disappearance of
such materials at anytime prior to use in the work.
It is understood and agreed that the transfer of title and the owner's payment
for such stored or stockpiled materials shall in no way relieve the Contractor
of his/her responsibility for furnishing and placing such materials in accordance
with the requirements of the contract, plans, and specifications.
In no case will the amount of partial payments for materials on hand exceed the
contract price for such materials or the contract price for the contract item in
which the material is intended to be used.
No partial payment will be made for stored or stockpiled living or perishable
plant materials.
The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with the partial payment of stored
or stockpiled materials in accordance with the provisions of this subsection.
90-08 PAnmRT OF WITHHELD FUNDS. At the Contractor's option, he/she may request
that the owner accept (in lieu of the 10 percent retainage on partial payments
described in the subsection titled PARTIAL PAYMENTS of this section) the
Contractor's deposits in escrow under the following conditions.
a. The Contractor shall bear all expenses of establishing and maintaining
an escrow account and escrow agreement acceptable to the owner.
b. The Contractor shall deposit to and maintain in such escrow only those
securities or bank certificates of deposit as are acceptable to the owner and
having a value not less than the 10 percent retainage that would otherwise be
withheld from partial payment.
c. The Contractor shall enter into an escrow agreement satisfactory to the
owner.
d. The Contractor shall obtain the written consent of the surety to such
agreement.
90-09 ACCBPTARCB AND FINAL PADIBln'. NOT USED
END OF SBCTION 90
GENERAL PROVISIONS
90-3
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TBRKIRAL BUILDING
IIJRROB CUu1'lT!', FLORIDA
SBCTION 01010 - SUMMARY
OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services to construct a
new Passenger Terminal Building and Emergency Generator/Chiller
Building at Marathon Airport, Mile Marker 51, Monroe County, Florida,
as shown on Contract Documents prepared by Reynolds, Smith and Hills,
Inc.
B. The work consists of the construction of two, 2-story buildings on
site. Planters, paving and other site improvements are required as
part of the work.
1. The work includes concrete, masonry walls, structural steel,
metal roof deck, architectural woodwork, waterproofing, metal
roofing, single-ply roofing, roof accessories, sheet metal,
hollow metal doors and frames, wood doors, aluminum entrances,
aluminum windows, hardware, glazing, interior finishes and
furnishings, aluminum shutters, hydraulic elevator, baggage
conveyor, plumbing, fire protection, heating-ventilating-air
conditioning, electrical systems, lighting, and
communication-alarm-signal systems.
1 .3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. A separate Contract will be issued to perform certain construction
operations at the site. Those operations are not currently scheduled
but should be occurring during the construction operations under this
Contract. That Contract includes:
1. Paved access roads, parking and associated site construction.
2.
Landscaping.
Building. )
{Entire site including in and around Terminal
3. Aircraft apron.
4. Sewage treatment plant.
For informational purposes, the Contractor is provided as part of the
plan set sheets depicting associated site improvements.
1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
A. General: During certain phases of the construction period the
Contractor shall have restricted use of the premises for construction
operations as indicated by the construction limits in these Contract
Documents and on the phasing drawings of the Terminal Area Site
Improvements Contract. The Contractor's use of the premises is
limited only by the Owner's right to perform construction operations
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-1
5910861-000
with its own forces or to employ separate contractors on portions of
the project.
1. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated.
Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction
operations are indicated are not to be disturbed.
2 . Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and
available to the Owner and the Owner's employees at all times.
Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for
storage of materials and equipment on site.
1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and
to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building,
prior to substantial completion provided that such occupancy does not
interfere with completion of the work. Such placing of equipment and
partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) .
END OF SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-2
5910795-002
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 01020 - ALLOWANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements
governing handling and processing one allowance.
1. Selected materials and equipment, and in some cases, their
installation are shown and specified in the Contract Documents
by allowances. Allowances have been established in lieu of
additional requirements and to defer selection of actual
materials and equipment to a later date when additional
information is available for evaluation. Additional
requirements, if necessary, will be issued by Change order.
B. Allowance: Aquarium set-up and 1-year Maintenance Contract.
C. Cost Adjustment: Adjustment of actual cost of allowance item and the
amounts specified shall be made in accordance with Article 3 of the
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit itemized invoices or delivery slips to indicate actual charges
for services rendered or materials delivered in fulfillment of
allowance item.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCE
A. Allowance NO.1: Include a lump sum of $2,900 for the cost of the
aquarium set-up which shall include the following items: salt,
gravel, sea fans, large coral, rocks, 8 to 10 starter fish, labor for
set-up and a 1-year maintenance agreement.
END OF SECTION 01020
ALLOWANCE
01020-1
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TBRIIINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01026 - tJRIT
PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for
unit prices.
1. A unit price is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the
bid schedule as a price per unit of measurement for materials
or services that will be added to or deducted from the Contract
Sum by change order in the event the estimated quantities of
work required by the Contract Documents are increased or
decreased.
2. Unit prices include all necessary material, overhead, profit and
applicable taxes.
3. Refer to the bid schedule and individual specification sections
for construction activities requiring the establishment of unit
prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are
specified.
B. Schedule: A "Unit Price Schedule" is included at the end of this
section. Specification sections referenced in the schedule contain
requirements for materials and methods described under each unit
price.
1. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Contractor's
measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established
unit prices, and to have this work measured by an independent
surveyor acceptable to the Contractor at the Owner's expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNIT PRICE SCHEDULE
A. Item No. 1 - Augercast Concrete Piles:
1. Description: Change in the total length of all piling from
length estimated.
2. Unit of Measurement: Linear foot of pile.
UNIT PRICES
01026-1
B. Item NO.2 - Pile Load Tests:
1.
Description: Change in number of load tests.
includes 1 compression test pile and 2 tension
(reaction piles) .
2. Unit of Measurement: Each.
END OF SECTION 01026
UNIT PRICES
01026-2
5910861-000
Each test
test piles
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TBRIIINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB CUul'f'l'!', FLORIDA
SBCTION 01027 - APPLICATIONS
FOR PAnmRT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements
governing the Contractor's applications for payment.
B. The Contractor's construction schedule and submittal schedule are
included in Division 1, Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of
the Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other
required administrative schedules and forms, including:
a. Contractor's construction schedule.
b. Application for payment form.
c. List of Subcontractors.
d. Schedule of allowance.
e. Schedule of alternates.
2. Submit the schedule of values to the Resident Project
Representative at the earliest feasible date, but in no case
later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the
initial application for payment.
3. Subschedules: Where the work is separated into phases that
require separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing
values correlated with each phase of payment.
B. Format and Content: Use the project manual table of contents as a
guide to establish the format for the schedule of values.
1. Identification: Include the following project identification
on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.
b. Name of the Resident Project Representative.
c. Project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027-1
5910861-000
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange the schedule of values in a tabular form with separate
columns to indicate the following for each item listed:
a. Generic name.
b. Related specification section.
c. Name of Subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that have affected value.
g. Dollar value.
h. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth
percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to
facilitate continued evaluation of applications for payment and
progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into
several line items.
4. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar; the total shall
equal the Contract Sum.
5. For each part of the work where an application for payment may
include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and
stored, but not yet installed, provide separate line items on
the schedule of values for initial cost of the materials, for
each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed
value of that part of the work.
6. Unit Cost Allowances: Show line item value of unit cost
allowances as a product of unit cost times measured quantity as
estimated from the best indication in the Contract Documents.
7. Margins of Cost: Show line items for indirect costs, and
margins on actual costs, only to the extent that such items will
be listed individually in applications for payment. Each item
in the schedule of values and applications for payment shall be
complete including its total cost and proportionate share of
general overhead and profit margin.
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are
not direct cost of actual work-in-place must be shown as
separate line items in the schedule of values.
8. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values
when change orders or construction change directives result in
a change in the Contract Sum.
1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each application for payment shall be consistent with previous
applications and payments as certified by the Resident Project
Representative and paid for by the Owner.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027-2
5910861-000
1. The initial application for payment, the application for payment
at time of substantial completion, and the final application for
payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is as
indicated in the agreement. The period of construction work covered
by each application or payment is the period indicated in the
agreement.
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation
Sheets G703 as the form for application for payment unless otherwise
agreed.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including
notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal
documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be
returned without action.
1.
Entries shall match data on the
Contractor's construction schedule.
revisions have been made.
schedule of values and
Use updated schedules if
2. Include amounts of change orders and construction change
directi ves issued prior to the last day of the construction
period covered by the application.
E. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each application for
payment to the Resident proj ect Representati ve by means ensuring
receipt within 24 hours; 1 copy shall be complete, including waivers
of lien and similar attachments, when required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments,
and recording appropriate information related to the application
in a manner acceptable to the Resident Project Representative.
F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: with each application for payment, submit
waivers of mechanics lien from every entity who may lawfully be
entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of the Contract, and
related to the work covered by the payment.
1. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, and executed in
a manner, acceptable to Owner.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and
submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first
application for payment include the following:
1. List of Subcontractors.
2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.
3. Schedule of values.
4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
5. Schedule of principal products.
6. Schedule of unit prices.
7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
8. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027-3
5910861-000
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
10. Copies of building and other applicable permits as required.
11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities
for performance of the work.
12. Initial progress report.
13. Report of preconstruction meeting.
14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
15. Performance and payment bonds.
16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following
issuance of the certificate of substantial completion, submit an
application for payment; this application shall reflect any
certificates of partial substantial completion issued previously for
Owner occupancy of designated portions of the work.
I. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide
with this application include:
1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.
2. warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.
3. Test/adjust/balance records.
4. Maintenance instructions/manuals.
5. Meter readings.
6. Start-up performance reports.
7. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use,
operation and maintenance.
8. Final cleaning.
9. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety.
10. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.
11. Final progress photographs.
12. List of incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's
certificate of substantial completion.
J. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals
which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final payment
application for payment include the following:
1. Completion of project closeout requirements.
2. Completion of items specified for completion after substantial
completion.
3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027-4
5910861-000
4. Assurance that work not complete and accepted will be completed
without undue delay.
5. Transmittal of required project construction records to Owner.
6. Certified property survey.
7. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid.
8. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
9. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.
10. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01027
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
01027-5
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01030 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for
alternates.
B. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated
on the bid form for certain construction activities defined in the
bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from base bid
amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in
either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the
products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods
described in Contract Documents.
C. Coordination: Coordinate related work and modify or adjust adjacent
work as necessary to ensure that work affected by each accepted
alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project.
D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract,
prepare and distribute to each party involved, notification of the
status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been
accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date.
Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to
alternates.
E. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this
section. Specification sections referenced in the schedule contain
requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the work
described under each alternate.
1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices,
accessory objects and similar items incidental to or required
for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of
the alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate NO.1: Add the electronic filtration system (power
generator, electrode assemblies, safety door switches, wiring and
conduit) described by Division 15, Section 15885 - AIR CLEANING. The
prefilters, rigid box filters, extra stock, filter plenums and air
filter monitors as specified in this section shall be provided by the
manufacturer of the central-station, air-handling units with this
Contract.
ALTERNATES
01030-1
5910861-000
B. Alternate NO.2: Delete 3 foot, O-inch canopy extensions located
between column lines 5 and 6 and between column lines 11 and 12,
south of column line H. Provide a uniform slope from ridge to edge
of canopy along entire length. Provide structural framing in
modified areas similar to typical framing.
END OF SECTION 01030
ALTERNATES
01030-2
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COUN'~'!', FLORIDA
SBCTION 01035 - CONTRACT
SOPPLBMBNT AND
IIJDIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for
handling and processing contract supplements and modifications.
1.2 CONTRACT DOCUMENT SUPPLEMENTS
A. Clarification/supplemental instructions which provide further detail
to requirements inferred in the contract documents or authorize minor
changes in the work, not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum
or Contract Time, will be issued by the Architect-Engineer with
supplemental or revised drawings and specifications, if necessary.
A sample copy of the form to be used is included at the end of this
section.
B. Request for Information/Supplemental Instructions: Shall be
initiated by the Contractor when necessary for performance of the
work. The Architect-Engineer's reply will constitute further detail
to requirements if inferred in the contract documents or authoriza-
tion for minor changes in the work, not involving an adjustment to
the contract sum or contract time. Use forms provided by the
ArChitect-Engineer, a sample copy of which is included at the end of
this section. The Contractor shall maintain a sequentially numbered
log of all such requests.
C. Contractor Corrective Action Proposals: Shall be initiated by the
Contractor when deviations from the contract requirements have been
constructed. The Contractor shall provide a fully detailed proposal
for his corrective or remedial work. The Architect-Engineer's reply
will indicate approval of the proposed action as detailed, approval
with certain modifications, or rejection of the proposal. Use forms
provided by the Architect-Engineer, a sample copy of which is
included at the end of this section. The Contractor shall maintain
a sequentially numbered log of all such proposals.
1.3 PROPOSAL/CHANGE ORDER REQUESTS
A. Request for Proposal (RFP): Proposed changes in the work that will
require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be
issued by the Architect-Engineer, with a detailed description of the
proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and
Specifications, if necessary.
1. Proposal requests issued by the ArChitect-Engineer are for
information only. Do not consider them a directive either to
stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change.
2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 20
days of receipt of the proposal request, submit to the
Architect-Engineer for the Owner's review an estimate of cost
necessary to execute the proposed change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased
and unit costs, along with the total amount of purchases
CONTRACT SUPPLEMENT AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01035-1
5910861-000
to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
b. Itemize labor charges by time and category.
c. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment
rental, and amounts of trade discounts.
d. Indicate overhead and profit charges.
e. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed
change in the work will have on the Contract Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Requests (RCO): When latent or
other unforseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the
Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change
to the Architect-Engineer.
1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the
effect of the change on the work. Provide a complete
description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and
unit costs along with the total amount of purchases to be made.
Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental,
and amounts of trade discounts.
4. Comply with requirements in Section 01631 PRODUCT
SUBSTITUTIONS if the proposed change in the work requires the
substitution of one product or system for a product or system
specified.
C. Proposal/Change Order Request Forms: Use forms provided by the
ArChitect-Engineer for Proposal/Change Order Requests; sample copies
are included at the end of this section. The Contractor shall
maintain a sequential log of all Requests for Change Orders.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not
in total agreement on the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request,
the ArChitect-Engineer may issue a Construction Change Directive on
AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in
the work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete
description of the change in the work and designate the method
to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material
basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and
supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time
adjustments to the Contract.
CONTRACT SUPPLEMENT AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01035-2
5910861-000
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request, the
Architect-Engineer will issue a Change Order for signatures of the
Owner and Contractor on AIA Form G701, as provided in the Conditions
of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01035
CONTRACT SUPPLEMENT AND MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
01035-3
5910861-000
!mRATHOR AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01040 - PROJECT
COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section. Applicable sections of the "General
provisions--FAA Standards" shall prevail if in conflict with other
sections of the project manual.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements
necessary for project coordination including, but not necessarily
limited to:
1. Coordination with separate prime Contract for civil/landscaping
work.
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
3. General installation provisions.
4. Cleaning and protection.
B. Requirements for the Contractor's construction schedule are included
in Division 1, Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under
various sections of these specifications and with prime Contractor
for civil/landscaping work to assure efficient and orderly
installation of each part of the work. Coordinate construction
operations included under different sections of the specifications
that are dependent upon each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation.
1. Where installation of one part of the work is dependent on
installation of other components, either before or after its own
installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence
required to obtain the best results.
2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation
of different components to assure maximum accessibility for
required maintenance, service and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for
later installation.
B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party
invol ved outlining special procedures required for coordination.
Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at
meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate prime
Contractors where coordination of their work is required.
PROJECT COORDINATION
01040-1
5910861-000
C. Administrati ve Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of
required administrative procedures with other construction activities
to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the work. Such
administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Preparation of schedules.
2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.
3. Delivery and processing of submittals.
4. Progress meetings.
5. Project Close-out activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Staff Names: Within 15 days of notice to proceed, submit a list of
the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the
superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site;
identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their
addresses and telephone numbers.
1. Post copies of the list in the project meeting room, the
temporary field office, and each temporary telephone.
2. Provide name and telephone of General Contractor staff who can
be contacted 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the installer of each major
component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which
work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation
instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those
instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than
requirements contained in Contract Documents.
C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again
prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items.
D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for
securing work. Secure work true to line and level. Allow for
expansion and building movement.
E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform j oint widths in exposed work.
Arrange joints in exposed work to obtain the best visual effect.
Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision.
F.
Recheck measurements
installation.
and
dimensions,
before
starting
each
PROJECT COORDINATION
01040-2
5910861-000
G. Install each component during weather conditions and project status
that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the
completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to
prevent deterioration.
H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests,
to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for
that purpose.
I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install
individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within
the industry or required by codes for the particular application
indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the
Architect for final decision.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in
progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering
where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at
substantial completion.
B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and
lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging
effects.
C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that
no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to
harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure
during the construction period.
D. Adhere to all applicable sections of the "General provisions- -FAA
Standards" contained in the project manual.
END OF SECTION 01040
PROJECT COORDINATION
01040-3
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TBRIIINAL BUILDING
BlRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01045 - CtlTTING AND
PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for
cutting and patching.
B. Refer to other sections for specific requirements and limitations
applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the work.
1. Requirements of this section apply to mechanical and electrical
installations. Refer to Division 15 and Division 16 sections
for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching mechanical and electrical installations.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and patching proposal: Where approval of procedures for
cutting and patching is required before proceeding, submit a proposal
describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and
patching will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include
the following information, as applicable, in the proposal:
1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it
is to be performed; indicate why it cannot be avoided.
2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing
construction; include changes to structural elements and
operating components as well as changes in the building's
appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform
work.
4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed.
5. List utilities that will be disturbed or affected, including
those that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily
out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.
6. Where cutting and patching involves addition of reinforcement
to structural elements, submit details and engineering
calculations to show how reinforcement is integrated with the
original structure.
7. Approval by the Architect-Engineer to proceed with cutting and
patching does not waive the Architect-Engineer's right to later
require complete removal and replacement of a part of the work
found to be unsatisfactory.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural
elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity
or load-deflection ratio.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01045-1
5910861-000
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before
cutting and patching any structural elements including, but not
limited to, the following:
a. Foundation construction.
b. Bearing and retaining walls.
c. Structural concrete.
d. Structural steel.
e. Lintels.
f. Structural decking.
g. Stair systems.
h. Miscellaneous structural metals.
i. Exterior curtain wall construction.
j. Equipment supports.
B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating
elements or safety related components in a manner that would result
in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in
increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.
1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before
cutting and patching any operating elements or safety related
systems including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment.
b. Air or smoke barriers.
c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
d. Membranes and flashings.
e. Fire protection systems.
f. Noise and vibration control elements and systems.
g. Control systems.
h. Communication systems.
i. Conveying systems.
j. Electrical wiring systems.
C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on
the exterior or in occupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the
Architect-Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic
qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching.
Remove and replace work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory
manner.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01045-2
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical
materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces
are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to
the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use
materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of
existing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and
patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be
performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or
unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and
patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather
conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during
cutting and patching operations.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and
complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other
components or performance of other construction activities and
the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces
to their original condition.
B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to
damage elements to be retained or adjoining construction. Where
possible review proposed procedures with the original installer;
comply with the original installer's recommendations.
C.
Patching:
possible.
Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
Comply with specified tolerances.
1. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the
installation.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner
that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is
performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils,
putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01045-3
5910861-000
and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
END OF SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
01045-4
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TBRIIINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01050 - FIBLD
ENGINEBRING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. General: This section specifies administrati ve and procedural
requirements for field engineering services, including, but not
necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Land survey work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or
Professional Engineer certifying that the location and elevation of
improvements comply with the Contract Documents.
B.
Final Property Survey:
final property survey.
Submit 10 signed and sealed copies of the
C. proj ect Record Documents: Submi t a record of work performed and
record survey data as required under provisions of Section 01300 -
SUBMITTALS and Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surveyor: Engage a Registered Land Surveyor registered in the State
where the project is located, to perform land surveying services
required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the
property survey and existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout
the work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points.
Preserve permanent reference points during construction.
1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without
prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed
reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points
because of necessary changes in grades or locations.
2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed proj ect control points. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
-B. Establish and maintain a minimum of four permanent benchmarks on the
site, referenced to data established by survey control points.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data,
on Project Record Documents.
FIELD ENGINEERING
01050-1
5910861-000
C. Existing Utili ties and Equipment: The existence and location of
underground and other utilities and construction indicated as
existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of all underground utilities
and other construction.
1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation
at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer and water
service piping.
3.2 PERFORMANCE
A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey,
establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each
story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each
element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions
within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to
determine dimensions.
1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked
lines and levels provided for their use.
2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line,
level and plumb.
B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other
survey work. Make this log available for reference.
1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the
Architect-Engineer when deviations that exceed indicated or
recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings,
record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.
2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and
other work requiring field engineering services, prepare a
certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles and
elevations of construction and sitework.
C. Site Improvements: Locate and layout site improvements, including
pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility
slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means.
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and layout batter boards for
structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor
levels and control lines and levels required for mechanical and
electrical work.
E. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or
relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services or other
appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate
with local authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Final Property Survey: Before Substantial Completion, prepare a
final property survey showing significant features (real property)
for the Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by
the Surveyor, to the effect that principal metes, bounds, lines and
levels of the Project are accurately positioned as shown on the
survey.
END OF SECTION 01050
FIELD ENGINEERING
01050-2
5910861-000
!mRATHQN AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TBRKIRAL BUIlDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01095 - REFBRBRCB
STANDARDS AND DBFINITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. Indicated: The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations,
notes or schedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules
in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract
Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and
"specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference;
no limitation on location is intended.
B. Regulation: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances,
statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having
jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within
the construction industry that control performance of the work.
C. Furnish: The term "furnish" is used to mean "supply and deliver to
the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,
installation, and similar operations."
D. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at
project site including the actual "unloading, unpacking, assembly,
erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,
finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations."
E. Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete
and ready for the intended use."
F. Testing Agencies, Laboratories or Service: All terms interchangeably
refer to an independent entity engaged to perform specific
inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to
report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections
or tests.
1.2 SPECIFICATION CONTENT EXPLANATION
A. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions
in the use of language and the intended meaning of certain terms,
words, and phrases when used in particular situations or
circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:
1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other
Contract Documents is the abbreviated type. Words and meanings
shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied,
but not stated shall be interpolated as the sense required.
Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words
interpreted as singular where applicable and the context of the
Contract Documents so indicates.
2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the
Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood
are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in
the text, for clarity, subjective language is used to describe
responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the
Contractor, or by others when so noted.
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
01095-1
5910861-000
a. The words "shall be" shall be included by inference
wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
A. AppliCability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents
include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry
standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied
directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such
standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.
B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standard in effect as of the date
of the Contract Documents.
C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more
standards is specified, and the standards may establish different or
conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels.
Refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and
uncertainties to the Architect-Engineer for a decision before
proceeding.
1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality
level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or
performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the
minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these
requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum,
as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer
uncertainties to the Architect-Engineer for a decision before
proceeding.
D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the
Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable
to that entity'S construction activity. Copies of applicable
standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.
1. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a
required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain
copies directly from the publication source.
E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of
general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or
abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association,
standards generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or
other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer
to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research
Co., available in most libraries.
1.4 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES
A. The Architect-Engineer has contacted authorities having jurisdiction
where necessary to obtain information necessary for preparation of
Contract Documents. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly
for information and decisions having a bearing on the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01095
REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
01095-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COUNTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01200 - PROJECT
MEETINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification
sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements
for project meetings including but not limited to:
1. Preconstruct ion Conference.
2. Pre-Installation Conferences.
3. Coordination Meetings.
4. Progress Meetings.
B. Construction schedules are specified in another Division 1 section.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCT ION CONFERENCE
A. Schedule a preconstruct ion conference and organizational meeting at
the project site or other convenient location after execution of the
agreement and prior to commencement of construction acti vi ties.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel
assignments.
B. Attendees: The Owner, Architect and their consultants, the
Contractor and its superintendent, major Subcontractors,
manufacturers, suppliers and other concerned parties shall each be
represented at the conference by persons familiar with and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the work.
C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress
including such topics as:
1. Tentative construction schedule.
2. Critical work sequencing.
3. Designation of responsible personnel.
4. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
5. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
6. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
7. Use of the premises.
8. Office, work and storage areas.
9. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-1
5910861-000
10. Security.
11. Housekeeping.
1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. Conduct a pre-installation conference at the site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other
construction. The installer and representatives of manufacturers
and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation, and its
coordination or integration with other materials and installations
that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise
the Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
1. Review the progress of other construction acti vi ties and
preparations for the particular activity under consideration
at each pre-installation conference, including requirements
for:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related Change Orders.
d. Purchases
e. Deliveries.
f. Shop Drawings, Product Data and quality control Samples.
g. possible conflicts.
h. Compatibility problems.
i. Time schedules.
j. Weather limitations.
k. Manufacturer's recommendations.
l. Compatibility of materials.
m. Acceptability of substrates.
n. Temporary facilities.
o. Space and access limitations.
p. Governing regulations.
q. Safety.
r. Inspection and testing requirements.
s. Required performance results.
t. Recording requirements.
u. Protection.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-2
5910861-000
2. Record significant discussions and agreements and
disagreements of each conference, along with the approved
schedule. Distribute the record of the meeting to everyone
concerned, promptly, including the Owner and Architect.
3. Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve
impediments to performance of work and reconvene the
conference at the earliest feasible date.
1.5 COORDINATION MEETINGS
A. Conduct project coordination meetings at regularly scheduled times
convenient for all parties involved. Project coordination meetings
are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such
as regular pre-installation meetings.
B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently
invol ved in coordination or planning for the construction acti vi ties
involved.
C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in
attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting
from each meeting.
1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Conduct progress meetings at the project site at bi-weekly
intervals. Notify the Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting
dates. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of the payment
request and in conjunction with coordination meetings.
B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of the Owner and
Architect, each Subcontractor, supplier or other entity concerned
with current progress or involved in planning, coordination or
performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings by persons familiar with the project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to progress.
C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous
progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could
affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to
the current status of the project.
1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the
last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to
the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or
ahead or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are
required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will
be completed within the Contract Time.
2. Review the present and future needs of each entity present,
including such items as:
a. Interface requirements.
b. Time.
c. Sequences.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-3
5910861-000
d. Deliveries.
e. Off-site fabrication problems.
f. Access.
g. Site utilization.
h. Temporary facilities and services.
i. Hours of work.
j. Hazards and risks.
k. Housekeeping.
l. Quality and work standards.
m. Change Orders.
n. Documentation of information for payment requests.
D. Reporting: No later than 3 days after each progress meeting date,
distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to each party present
and to other parties who should have been present. Include a brief
summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting
and report.
1. Schedule Updating: Revise the construction schedule after
each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have
been made or recognized. Issue the revised schedule
concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-4
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for
submittals required for performance of the work, including;
1. Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Submittal schedule.
3. Daily construction reports.
4. Shop drawings.
5. Product data.
6. Samples.
B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 1 sections and
other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative
submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to:
1. Permits.
2. Applications for payment.
3. Performance and payment bonds.
4. Insurance certificates.
5. List of Subcontractors.
C. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section 01027 -
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT.
D. Inspection and test reports are included in Section 01400 - QUALITY
CONTROL SERVICES.
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals
with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal
sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction
activities to avoid delay.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing,
delivery, other submittals and related activities that require
sequential activity.
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for
related elements of the work so processing will not be delayed
by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
a. The Architect - Engineer reserves the right to withhold
action on a submittal requiring coordination with other
submittals until related submittals are received.
SUBMITTALS
01300-1
5910861-000
3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation
will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process
submittals, including time for resubmittals.
a. Allow two weeks plus time in transit for initial review.
Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to
permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The
Architect-Engineer will advise the Contractor when a
submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the
same as the initial submittal.
c. Allow two weeks plus time in transit for reprocessing each
submittal.
d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because
of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect-
Engineer sufficiently in advance of the work to permit
processing.
4. The Architect-Engineer will review up to 2 submissions (original
and one resubmission) of shop drawings and other data submitted
by the Contractor. Thereafter, additional reviews will De at
the expense of the Contractor. The Architect-Engineer will
record the time required by him or his consultants in reviewing
and approving submission in excess of the original and one 1
resubmission and notify the Contractor of the charges therefor.
The Owner shall deduct any such expenses of the Architect-
Engineer from the Contractor's monthly periodic pay requests.
B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on
each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity
that prepared each submittal on the label or title block.
1. Provide a space approximately 4 inches x 5 inches on the label
or beside the title block on shop drawings to record the
Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken.
2. Include the following information on the label for processing
and recording action taken.
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect-Engineer.
d. Name and address of Contractor.
e. Name and address of Subcontractor.
f. Name and address of supplier.
g. Name of manufacturer.
h. Number and title of appropriate specification section.
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
SUBMITTALS
01300-2
5910861-000
C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for
transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to
Architect-Engineer using the standard transmittal form, a sample copy
of which is included at the end of this section. Submittals received
from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without
action. A separate transmittal shall be used for each required
submittal and the contents shall be itemized separately thereon to
allow indication of disposition for each element of the submittal.
D. Contractor's Action: Each shop drawing sheet and the cover sheet of
bound packets of product data shall bear a stamp indicating the
Contractor's disposition following his review and checking. The
disposition shall be indicated as "approved," "approved as noted," or
similar as applicable. The stamp shall include the Contractor's
name, the signature of the reviewer and the date checked. The
notated sample shall be construed as evidence the Contractor has
performed the review, check, verification and coordination as
required by the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart
type Contractor's construction schedule. Submit within 30 days of
the date established for "Commencement of the Work."
1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction
activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the
first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units
of the work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values."
2. Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage
in 10-percent increments. As work progresses, place a
contrasting mark in each bar to indicate actual completion.
3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable
transparency, or other reproducible media, of sufficient width
to show data for the entire construction period.
4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the
work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the
schedule with other construction activities; include minor
elements invol ved in the sequence of the work. Show each
activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences
necessary for completion of related portions of the work.
5. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the
schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule,
progress reports, payment requests and other schedules.
6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for
substantial completion. Indicate substantial completion on the
schedule to allow time for the Architect-Engineer's procedures
necessary for certification of substantial completion.
B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence
of the work is affected by requirements for phased completion to
permi t work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the
Owner prior to substantial completion.
C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each
major portion of the work, including testing and installation.
SUBMITTALS
01300-3
5910861-000
D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each maj or
construction area for each major portion of the work. Indicate where
each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated with other
activities.
E. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a two item
cost correlation line, indicating "precalculated" and "actual" costs.
On the line show dollar-volume of work performed as of the dates used
for preparation of payment requests.
1. Refer to Section 01027 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT for cost
reporting and payment procedures.
F. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, print and
distribute copies to the Architect-Engineer, Owner, Subcontractors,
and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post
copies in the project meeting room and temporary field office.
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post
in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when
they have completed their assigned portion of the work and are
no longer involved in construction activities.
G. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or
activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the
updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's construction
schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the
schedule within 10 days of the date required for establishment of the
Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of Subcontracts,
schedule of values and the list of products as well as the
Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals
required during the first 90 days of construction. Provide the
following information:
a. Scheduled date for the first submittal.
b. Related section number.
c. Submittal category.
d. Name of Subcontractor.
e. Description of the part of the work covered.
f. Scheduled date for resubmittal
g. Scheduled date the Architect-Engineer's final release or
approval.
B. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and
distribute copies to the Architect-Engineer, Owner, Subcontractors,
and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated.
Post copies in the project meeting room and field office.
SUBMITTALS
01300-4
5910861-000
1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post
in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when
they have completed their assigned portion of the work and are
no longer involved in construction activities.
C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or
activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the
updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
1.5 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS
A.
Prepare a daily construction report, recording the
information concerning events at the site; and submit
copies to the Architect-Engineer at weekly intervals:
1. List of Subcontractors at the site.
following
duplicate
2. Approximate count of personnel at the site.
3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
4. Accidents and unusual events.
5. Meetings and significant decisions.
6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.
7. Orders and requests of governing authorities.
8. Change orders received, implemented.
9. Services connected, disconnected.
10. Equipment or system tests and start-ups.
11. Partial completions, occupancies.
12. Substantial completions authorized.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale.
Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the
Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy
standard information as the basis of shop drawings. Standard
information prepared without specific reference to the project is not
considered shop drawings.
B. Shop drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting
diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings.
Include the following information:
1. Dimensions.
2. Identification of products and materials included.
3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements.
5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
SUBMITTALS
01300-5
5910861-000
6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-
size drawings, submit shop drawings on sheets at least
8-1/2 inches x 11 inches but no larger than 36 inches x 48
inches.
7. Submittal Quantity and Type: Submit 1 correctable translucent
reproducible print and 1 blueline or blackline print for the
Architect-Engineer's review; the reproducible print will be
returned.
8. Do not use shop drawings without an appropriate final stamp
indicating action taken in connection with construction.
1.7 PRODUCT DATA
A. Collect product data into a single submittal for each element of
construction or system. Product data includes printed information
such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts,
standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard
wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where product data must be
specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for
use, submit as "shop drawings."
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where
printed product data includes information on several products,
some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the
applicable information. Include the following information:
a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f. Notation of coordination requirements.
2. Do not submit product data until compliance with requirements
of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.
3. Submittals: Submit 6 copies of each required submittal. The
Architect-Engineer will retain 3, and will return the other
marked with action taken and corrections or modifications
required.
4. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers,
subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and
others required for performance of construction acti vi ties.
Show distribution on transmittal forms.
a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy
of product data applicable is in the installer's
possession.
b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of product data in
connection with construction.
SUBMITTALS
01300-6
5910861-000
1.8 SAMPLES
A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated samples cured and finished as
specified and physically identical with the material or product
proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range
sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern.
1. Mount, display, or package samples in the manner specified to
facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare samples to
match the Architect-Engineer's sample. Include the following:
a. Generic description of the sample.
b. Sample source.
c. Product name or name of manufacturer.
d. Compliance with recognized standards.
e. Availability and delivery time.
2. Submit samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture,
for a final check of these characteristics with other elements,
and for a comparison of these characteristics between-the final
submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other
characteristics are inherent in the material or product
represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that
show approximate limits of the variations.
b. Refer to other specification sections for requirements for
samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication
techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation
and similar construction characteristics.
3. Preliminary submittals: Where samples are for selection of
color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range
of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the
material or product.
a. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with
the ArChitect-Engineer's mark indicating selection and
other action.
4. Submittals: Except for samples illustrating assembly details,
workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and
similar characteristics, submit 3 sets; one will be returned
marked with the action taken.
5. Maintain sets of samples, as returned, at the project site, for
quality comparisons throughout the course of construction.
a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is
observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal.
b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the
construction associated with each set.
B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to
Subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers,
SUBMITTALS
01300-7
5910861-000
and others as required for performance of the work.
distribution on transmittal forms.
Show
1. Field samples specified in individual sections are special types
of samples. Field samples are full-size examples erected on
site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and
to establish the standard by which the work will be judged.
a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent
possible. Process transmittal forms to provide a record
of activity.
1.9 ARCHITECT-ENGINEER'S ACTION
A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes,
where action and return is required or requested, the Architect-
Engineer will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken,
and return promptly.
1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's
responsibility.
B. Action Stamp: The ArChitect-Engineer will stamp each submittal with
a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be
appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken:
1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked
"Approved," that part of the work covered by the submittal may
proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract
Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance.
2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked
"Approved as Noted," that part of the work covered by the
submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or
corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract
Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance.
3. Returned or Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not
Approved" or "Returned for Correction," do not proceed with that
part of the work covered by the submittal, including purchasing,
fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a
new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without
delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark.
Do not permit submittals so marked to be used at the project
site, or elsewhere where work is in progress.
4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information
or record purposes, special processing or other activity, the
submittal will be returned, marked "Returned without Action."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) .
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
01300-8
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
H)RROB COUNTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01400 - QOALITY
CORTROL SBRVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for
quality control services.
B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related
actions including reports, performed by independent agencies,
governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not include
Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect.
C. Inspection and testing services by the Owner are required to verify
compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services
do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
Contract Document requirements. Inspections, test and related
actions by the Owner are in addition to the Contractor's quality
control procedures.
1. Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control
services required by the Architect, Owner, or authorities having
jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this section.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide quality
control services, specified in individual specification sections and
required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically
indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are provided by
another identified entity; these services include those specified to
be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor.
Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum.
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent agency to
perform inspections and tests specified as the Owner's
responsibilities.
a. Where the Owner has engaged a testing agency or other
entity for testing and inspection of a part of the work,
the Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the
Owner, unless otherwise agreed in writing with the Owner.
2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where
results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove
unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract
Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test
was the Contractor's responsibility.
a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the
Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where
required tests were performed on original construction.
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
01400-1
5910861-000
3. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with
agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar
services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested.
Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to
permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required
include but are not limited to:
a. Providing access to the work and furnishing incidental
labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections
and tests.
b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of
materials that require testing or assisting the agency in
taking samples.
c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test
samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories.
d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix
proposed for use for materials mixes that require control
by the testing agency.
e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at
the project site.
B. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged
to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and
construction specified in individual specification sections shall
cooperate with the Architect and Contractor in performance of its
duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required
inspections and tests.
1. The agency shall notify the Architect and Contractor promptly
of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the work during
performance of its services.
2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or
enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents, or approve or
accept any portion of the work.
3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.
C. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform
inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence
of acti vi ties to accommodate required services with a minimum of
delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate
activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for
inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written
report of each inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect,
in duplicate, unless the Contractor is responsible for the service.
If the Contractor is responsible for the service, submit a certified
written report of each inspection, test or similar service through
the Contractor, in duplicate.
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
01400-2
5910861-000
1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the
governing authority, when the authority so directs.
2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or
similar service shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Date of issue.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency.
d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f. Designation of the work and test method.
g. Identification of product and specification section.
h. Complete inspection or test data.
i. Test results and an interpretations of test results.
j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and
testing.
k. Comments or professional op1n10n as to whether inspected
or tested work complies with Contract Document
requirements.
1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m. Recommendations on retesting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing
service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which
are prequalified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for
Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of
Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of
inspections and tests to be performed.
1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the
project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction
to operate in the state in which the project is located.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and
similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates
and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in
visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document
requirements for "Cutting and Patching."
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
01400-3
5910861-000
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service
activities, and protect repaired construction.
C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless
of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or
similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
01400-4
5910861-000
!mRATHOR AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01450 - THRESHOLD
BUILDING INSPBCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. In compliance with Florida Statutes, the Owner will employ a Special
Inspector to observe construction of the structural components of the
project. Hereinafter, the Special Inspector will be referred to as
the inspector.
1.2 RESPONSIBILITIES
A. The inspector will be responsible to the enforcement agency and will
report his inspection results thereto.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the inspector, and keep current, a
schedule of construction so the Inspector can be present to observe
structural work. Contractor shall make all areas available and safe
for inspection. In addition, Contractor shall provide the inspector
with 1 copy of shoring and reshoring plans.
C. The acceptance of any structural component by the inspector in no way
relieves the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the
requirements of the contract documents.
1.3 INSPECTION PLAN
A. The inspector will be present and observe the initial construction of
each type structural component. Structural components subject to
inspection are all components required by the contract documents
which support, resist, or transmit any imposed load.
B. Following are representative examples of the above:
1. Pile Installation
2. Footings
3. Fill and Backfill
4. Compaction
5. Columns
6. Suspended Slabs and Beams
7. Structural Steel
8. Load Tests
C. The inspector will be present and observe the subsequent construction
of each type of structural component, as required, until he is
satisfied that the structural requirements for construction of that
type component are understood and being properly installed by the
Contractor.
THRESHOLD BUILDING INSPECTION
01450-1
5910861-000
D. The inspector will observe all structural work as necessary to
determine that requirements of the enforcement agency and the Florida
Statutes are being satisfied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01450
THRESHOLD BUILDING INSPECTION
01450-2
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01500 - TEMPORARY
FACILITIBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification
sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies requirements for temporary services and
facilities, including utilities, construction and support facilities,
security and protection.
B. Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to:
1. Water service and distribution.
2. Temporary electric power and light.
3. Telephone service.
4. Storm and sanitary sewer.
C. Temporary construction and support facilities required include but
are not limited to:
1. Temporary heat.
2. Field offices and storage sheds.
3. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water.
4. Dewatering facilities and drains.
5. Temporary enclosures.
6. Hoists and temporary elevator use.
7. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards.
8. Waste disposal services.
9. Rodent and pest control.
10. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
D. Security and protection facilities required include but are not
limited to:
1. Temporary fire protection.
2. Barricades, warning signs, lights.
3. Environmental protection.
4. Temporary enclosure fence for site.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-1
5910861-000
5. Erosion control.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter
readings and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and
regulations if authorities having jurisdiction, including but not
limited to:
1. Building code requirements.
2. Health and safety regulations.
3. Utility company regulations.
4. Police, fire department and rescue squad rules.
5. Environmental protection regulations.
B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and
Demolition Operations," ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety
Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical
Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities."
1. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job
Utilities and Services," prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for
industry recommendations.
2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and
regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in
compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70) .
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect
and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required
certifications and permits.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for
implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the
earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over
from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service.
B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and
neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take
necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or
permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous
dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or
persist on the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide new materials; if acceptable to the Architect,
undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition may be
used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-2
5910861-000
B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6, Section
06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY.
1. For job-built temporary offices, shops and sheds within the
construction area, provide UL labeled, fire treated lumber and
plywood for framing, sheathing and siding.
2. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior type, Grade B-B
High Density Concrete Form Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1,
of sizes and thickness indicated.
3. For fences and vision barriers, provide exterior type, minimum
3/8-inch thick plywood.
4. For safety barriers and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch
thick exterior plywood.
C. Paint: Comply with requirements of Division 9, Section 09900
PAINTING.
1. For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences and other
exposed lumber and plywood, provide exterior grade acrylic-latex
emulsion over exterior primer.
2. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior grade
alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer.
D. Tarpaulins: Provide waterproof, fire-resistant, UL labeled
tarpaulins with flame-spread rating of 15 or less. For temporary
enclosures provide translucent nylon reinforced laminated
polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride fire retardant tarpaulins.
E. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.
F. Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide II-gauge, galvanized 2-inch, chain link
fabric fencing 6-feet high with galvanized barbed wire top strand and
galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2-inch I.D. for line posts and
2-1/2-inch I.D. for corner posts.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide new equipment; if acceptable to the Architect,
undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be
used. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
B. Water Hoses: Provide 3/4-inch, heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant,
flexible rubber hoses 100 ft. long, with pressure rating greater than
the maximum pressure of the water distribution system; provide
adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge.
C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized
outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher
vol tage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with
ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for
connection of power tools and equipment.
D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use
"hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide
waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords,
if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities
are in progress.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-3
5910861-000
E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps
of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages
or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide
exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture.
F. Heating Uni ts: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested
and labeled by UL, FM or another recognized trade association related
to the type of fuel being consumed.
G. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar
job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows and
serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned units on
foundations adequate for normal loading.
H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained single-occupant
toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion
type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber
reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
I. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations.
J. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, class
"A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In
other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC"
dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA
recommended classes for the exposures.
1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing
agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities.
Locate facilities where they will serve the project adequately and
result in minimum interference with performance of the work.
Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay.
Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are
no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed
permanent facilities.
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install
temporary service or connect to existing service. Where the company
provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with
matching, compatible materials and equipment; comply with the
company's recommendations.
1. Arrange with the company and existing users for a time when
service can be interrupted, where necessary, to make connections
for temporary services.
2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Prior
to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services.
3. Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to the site, where
the Owner's easements cannot be used for that purpose.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-4
5910861-000
4. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are
not chargeable to the Owner or Architect, and will not be
accepted as a basis of claims for a change order.
B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of
sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water
service is in use.
1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use.
C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded
electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,
capacity, and power characteristics during construction period.
Include meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects,
automatic ground-fault interrupters and main distribution switch
gear.
1. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead, and rise
vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted,
wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, AC 20 ampere rating,
and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where
overhead and exposed for surveillance.
D. Temporary Lighting: Whenever overhead floor or roof deck has been
installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching.
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill
security and protection requirements, without operating the
entire system, and will provide adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
E. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all
personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the
construction period. Install telephone on a separate line for each
temporary office and first aid station. Where an office has more
than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant
or pair of occupants.
1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
F. Sewers and Drainage: If sewers are available, provide temporary
connections to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If
sewers are not available or cannot be used, provide drainage ditches,
dry wells, stabilization ponds and similar facilities. If neither
sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of
effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off
the site in a lawful manner.
1. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris,
chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that might clog sewers
or pollute waterways before discharge.
2. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean,
sanitary condition. Following heavy use, restore normal
conditions promptly.
G. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding
by runoff of storm water from heavy rains.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-5
5910861-000
3.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION AND SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities and other
temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.
1. Maintain temporary construction and support facilities until
near substantial completion. Remove prior to substantial
completion. Personnel remaining after substantial completion
will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions
acceptable to the Owner.
B. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction
activities, for curing or drying of completed installations or
protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low
temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not
have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being
installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the
ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy.
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander
type heating units is prohibited.
C. Field Offices: Provide insulated, weathertight temporary offices of
sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the
project site. Keep the office clean and orderly for use for small
progress meetings. Provide separate office for Owner's
representative. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1. Furnish with a desk and chairs, a 4-drawer file cabinet, plan
table and plan rack and a 6-shelf bookcase.
2. Equip with a water cooler and private toilet complete with water
closet, lavatory and mirror-medicine cabinet unit.
D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication
sheds, sized, furnished and equipped to accommodate materials and
equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may
be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or
elsewhere on the site.
E. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities and
drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes
for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures
and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the
project's needs.
1. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar
disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste
containers for used material.
F. Toilets: Install self - contained toilet units. Shield toilets to
ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted.
G. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water
at convenient locations for personnel involved in handling materials
that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose
of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each
condition.
1. Provide safety showers, eye-wash fountains and similar
facilities for convenience, safety and sanitation of personnel.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-6
5910861-000
H. Drinking Water Facilities: Provide containerized tap-dispenser
bottled-water type drinking water units, including paper supply.
1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to
maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 degrees F (7
to 13 degrees C) .
I. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: For temporary drainage and
dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with
construction activities included under individual sections, comply
wi th dewatering requirements of applicable Division 2 sections.
Where feasible, utilize the same facilities. Maintain the site,
excavations and construction free of water.
J. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosure for protection of
construction in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather,
other construction operations and similar activities.
1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not
complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other
provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with
ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid
dangerous conditions and effects.
2. Install tarpaulins securely, with incombustible wood framing and
other materials. Close openings of 25 square feet or less with
plywood or similar materials.
3. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal
surfaces with load-bearing wood-framed construction.
K. Temporary Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting
materials and employees. Truck cranes and similar devices used for
hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not
temporary facilities.
L. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 "Elevator" sections.
M. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project
identification and other signs of the size indicated; install signs
where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to
the project. Support on posts or framing of preservative treated
wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
1. Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign
painter to apply graphics. Size to be 4 X 8 feet. Design will
be provided by Architect.
2. Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional
information to construction personnel and visitors.
N. Temporary Exterior Lighting: Install exterior yard and sign lights
so that signs are visible when work is being performed.
O. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction
areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for
removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce
requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during
normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise
above 80 degrees F (27 degrees C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or
unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by
containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-7
o
I
V
o
I
~
V
5910861-000
r..- A-C MOO PLWD.
P AI NT BACKGROUND WHI TE
CONTRASTING COLOR
8'-0"
.
..
a~Rrc"'''H.I~..''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''''r ......
c=.. .;.. LETTER .~..0iiNER)..._.............. ~ ......
NDE:::CIE::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::r ::::::
~CJECI:::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::. ::::::
2'
~
.
N
~"CTO-S AlDlTECTS =
~~~~ " AND ENGINEERS r
~ NAMES::"
AACOC1886 cB0005620 LC000210
1'-0"
1'-0"
P.T. 4- X 4- POST
PAINTED
FINISH GRADE
lO
I
,
N
,PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN
SCALE : 1/2" = 1'-011
END OF SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-8
5910861-000
P. Rodent and Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been
completed, retain a local exterminator or pest control company to
recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents,
roaches and other pests. Employ this service to perform
extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the
project will be relatively free of pests and their residues at
substantial completion. Perform control operations in a lawful
manner using environmentally safe materials.
Q. Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary
stairs where ladders are not adequate. Cover finished permanent
stairs with a protective covering of plywood or similar material so
finishes will be undamaged at the time of acceptance.
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do
not change over from use of temporary security and protection
facilities to permanent facilities until substantial completion, or
longer as requested by the Architect.
B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire protection needs are supplied
by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire
protection facilities of the types needed to protect against
reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241
"Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and Demolition
Operations."
1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for
their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on
each floor at or near each usable stairwell.
2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe
locations.
3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire
hydrants, temporary fire protection facilities, stairways and
other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in
hazardous fire exposure areas.
4 . Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type
temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition.
C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each
area of the project, complete installation of the permanent fire
protection facility, including connected services, and place into
operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
D. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code
requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint
wi th appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform
personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against.
Where appropriate and needed provide lighting, including flashing red
or amber lights.
E. Enclosure Fence: When excavation begins, install an enclosure fence
with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or enclose the
entire site or the portion determined sufficient to accommodate
construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-9
5910861-000
people, dogs and other animals from easily entering the site, except
by the entrance gates.
1. Provide open-mesh, chain-link fencing with posts set in a
compacted mixture of gravel and earth.
F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary
enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide
locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft
and similar violations of security.
1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are
of value or attractive for theft, provide a secure lockup.
Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and
release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and
vandalism.
G. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary
facilities and conduct construction in ways and by methods that
comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility
that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or
that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and
equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making
tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from
persons or firms near the site.
3 .5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary
facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential
and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until
removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar
elements.
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling,
humidity control, ventilation and similar facilities on a
24-hour day basis where required to achieve indicated results
and to avoid possibility of damage.
2. Protection: Prevent water filled piping from freezing.
Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage
during excavation operations.
C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be
maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has
ended, or when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or
no later than substantial completion. Complete or, if necessary,
restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of
interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged work, clean
exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities
are property of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right
to take possession of project identification signs.
2. Where the area is intended for landscape development, remove
soil and aggregate fill that does not comply with requirements
for fill or subsoil in the area. Remove materials contaminated
with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-10
5910861-000
other substances which might impair growth of plant materials
or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs and sidewalks
at the temporary entrances, as required by the governing
authority.
3. At substantial completion, clean and renovate permanent
facilities that have been used during the construction period,
including but not limited to:
a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and
housings.
b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts that have been
subject to unusual operating conditions.
c. Replace lamps that are burned out or noticeably dimmed by
substantial hours of use.
END OF SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01500-11
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COul'l".L i: , FLORIDA
SECTION 01631 - PRODUCT
SUBSTITDTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for
handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions used in this article are not intended to change or modify
the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.
B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials,
equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents
proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered
requests for II substi tutions. II The following are not considered
substitutions:
1. Substitutions requested by bidders during the bidding period,
and accepted prior to award of Contract, are considered as
included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to
requirements specified in this section for substitutions.
2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or
Architect-Engineer.
3. Specified options of products and construction methods included
in Contract Documents.
4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing
regulations and orders issued by governing authorities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Materials, products, equipment and systems are specified in the
Contract Documents by manufacturer, trade name or distributor to
establish a standard of the required criteria, including function,
performance, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any
proposed substitution. Unless otherwise specified in SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS, application for substitutions will be considered by the
Owner and the Architect after execution of the agreement. The burden
of proof of merit of proposed substitute is upon the proposer.
Substitute items shall not be incorporated in the work without prior
written approval of the item by the Architect.
B. Where an item is specified by one or more manufacturer's model number
or specific item identification and "or approved equal" is included,
only the item{s) that is specified by manufacturer's model number or
specific identification is approved and any other item must be
submitted for approval as a substitution.
C. Where an item is specified by a referenced standard, the item must be
submitted for approval same as a substitute.
D. Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution for consideration.
Submit requests in the form and ifi accordance with procedures
required for change order proposals.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
01631-1
5910861-000
E. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be
replaced in each request. Include related specification section and
Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance
with the requirements for substitutions, and the following
information, as appropriate:
1. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products,
fabrication and installation procedures.
2. Samples, where applicable or requested.
3. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed
substitution with those of the work specified. Significant
qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability,
performance and visual effect.
4. Coordination information, including a list of changes or
modifications needed to other parts of the work and to
construction performed by the Owner and separate Contractors,
that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed
substitution.
5. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the
Contractor's construction schedule compared to the schedule
without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of
the proposed substitution on overall Contract time.
6. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any
in the Contract Sum.
7. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed
is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that
required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform
adequately in the application indicated. Include the
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time,
that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure
of the substitution to perform adequately.
F. Architect-Engineer's Action: Within 1 week of receipt of the request
for substitution, the Architect-Engineer will request additional
information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request.
Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or 1 week of receipt of the
additional information or documentation, which ever is later, the
Architect-Engineer will notify the Contractor of acceptance or
rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a
proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time
allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in
the form of a Change Order.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received
. and considered by the Architect-Engineer when one or more of the
following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect-
Engineer; otherwise requests will be returned without action except
to record noncompliance with these requirements.
1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
01631-2
5910861-000
2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of
Contract Documents.
3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.
4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or
similar language in the Contract Documents.
5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be
provided within the Contract time. The request will not be
considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a
result of failure to pursue the work promptly or coordinate
activities properly.
6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive
necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested
substitution can be approved.
7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost,
time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit,
after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be
required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may
include additional compensation to the Architect-Engineer for
redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other
construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar
considerations.
8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be
provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials,
and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will
overcome the incompatibility.
9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be
coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor
certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.
10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide
a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the
Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the
required warranty.
B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect-Engineer's acceptance of
shop drawings, product data or samples that relate to construction
activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not
constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does
it constitute approval.
C. Whether or not the Architect and Owner accept a proposed
substitution, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the
Architect's cost for the Architect and the Architect's consultants
for evaluating any proposed substitute including changes required in
the Contract Documents for the substitute.
D. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed
substitution shall be final.
E. All costs that may be incurred associated with a substitution
proposed by the Contractor shall be borne by the Contractor. This
shall apply to all interfacing components recognized prior to or
after approval of the substitution by the Architect-Engineer.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
01631-3
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01631
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
01631-4
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TBRIIINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01700 - PROJECT
CLOSBOtlT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for
project closeout, including but not limited to:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Project record document submittal.
3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal.
4. Submittal of warranties.
5. Final cleaning.
B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are
included in the appropriate sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for
certification of substantial completion, complete the following.
List exceptions in the request.
1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first
follows, the date substantial completion is claimed, show 100
percent completion for the portion of the work claimed as
substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for
completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list
of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction,
and reasons the work is not complete.
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements.
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance
agreements, final certifications and similar documents.
4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use
of the work and access to services and utilities; include
occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
6. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to
the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of change-over in
security provisions.
7. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the
Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or
change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along
with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-1
5910861-000
8. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up
painting. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred
exposed finishes.
B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the
Architect-Engineer will either proceed with inspection or advise the
Contractor of unfilled requirements. The ArChitect-Engineer will
prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following
inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.
1. The Architect-Engineer will repeat inspection when requested and
assured that the work has been substantially completed.
2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of
requirements for final acceptance.
1.3 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for
certification of final acceptance and final payment, complete the
following. List exceptions in the request.
1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include
certificates of insurance for products and completed operations
where required.
2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final
additional changes to the Contract Sum.
3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect-Engineer's final
inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating
that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the
Architect-Engineer.
4.
Submit final meter readings for utilities,
stored fuel, and similar data as of the
completion, or when the Owner took
responsibility for corresponding elements
a measured record of
date of substantial
possession of and
of the work.
5. Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect-Engineer will reinspect the
work upon receipt of notice that the work, including inspection list
items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items
whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable
to the Architect-Engineer.
1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect-Engineer will
prepare a Certificate of Final Acceptance, or advise the
Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that
have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.
2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-2
5910861-000
1.4 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS
A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes;
protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive
location; provide access to record documents for the Architect-
Engineer's reference during normal working hours.
B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black
line white-prints of Contract drawings and shop drawings. Mark the
set to show the actual installation where the installation varies
substantially from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever
drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately;
where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the
corresponding location on the Contract drawings. Gi ve particular
attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure
and record at a later date.
1. Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to
distinguish between variations in separate categories of the
work.
2 . Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not
shown on Contract drawings or shop drawings.
3. Note related change order numbers where applicable.
4. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with
durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and
other identification on the cover of each set.
5. preparation of Transparencies: In preparation for certification
of substantial completion on last major portion of the work,
review completed mark-up of record drawings with Architect-
Engineer. When authorized, proceed with preparation of a full
set of corrected transparencies for contract drawings.
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked
up on print sets by erasing and redrawing where applicable, and
by adding details and notations where applicable; refer
instances of uncertainty to Architect-Engineer for
determination. Identify and date each updated drawing.
6. One set of transparencies of original Contract drawings will be
furnished by Architect-Engineer to Contractor for use in
recording changes and additional information (RE: Section
00800, Paragraph 2.2.5). Other printing as required herein is
Contractor's responsibility.
7. Review of Transparencies: Prior to forwarding to Architect-
Engineer, submit corrected transparencies to Architect-Engineer
for review and acceptance. Architect-Engineer will review each
transparency for general scope of changes and information
recorded thereon, and of the general quality of draftsmanship
thereon (erasures and drafting). Transparencies will be
returned to Contractor for organizing into a set and for final
submittal.
8. Copies, Distribution: At the completion of the work the
Contractor shall forward 1 copy of marked-up transparencies to
Architect-Engineer for distribution to Owner. Organize
transparencies into a set matching print sets, place set in a
durable tube-type drawing container (with end caps), and mark
end cap with suitable identification.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-3
5910861-000
C. Record Specifications: Maintain 1 complete copy of the project
manual, including addenda, and 1 copy of other written construction
documents such as change orders and modifications issued in printed
form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial
variations in actual work performed in comparison with the text of
the specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to
substitutions, selection of options and similar information on
elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned
later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information
and product data.
1. Upon completion of the work, submit record specifications to the
Architect-Engineer for the Owner's records.
D. Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to the date or dates of
substantial completion, the Contractor will meet at the site with the
Architect-Engineer and the Owner's personnel to determine which of
the submitted samples that have been maintained during progress of
the work are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes.
Comply with delivery to the Owner's sample storage area.
E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other specification
sections for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and
submittals in connection with actual performance of the work.
Immediately prior to the date or dates of substantial completion,
complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly
identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference.
Submit to the Architect-Engineer for the Owner's records.
F. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into
suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in
individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with
pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate
identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the
following types of information:
1. Emergency instructions.
2. Spare parts list.
3. Copies of warranties.
4. Wiring diagrams.
5. Recommended "turn around" cycles.
6. Inspection procedures.
7. Shop drawings and product data.
8. Fixture lamping schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not AppliCable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer
of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-4
5910861-000
Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and
maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures,
provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a
detailed review of the following items:
1. Maintenance manuals.
2. Record documents.
3. Spare parts and materials.
4. Tools.
5. Lubricants.
6. Fuels.
7. Identification systems.
8. Control sequences.
9 . Hazards.
10. Cleaning.
11. Warranties and bonds.
12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the
following procedures:
1. Start-up.
2. Shutdown.
3. Emergency operations.
4. Noise and vibration adjustments.
5. Safety procedures.
6. Economy and efficiency adjustments.
7. Effective energy utilization.
3.2 FINAL CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for
final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected
in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting
inspection for certification of substantial completion.
a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass
in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other
substances that are noticeable vision-Obscuring materials.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-5
5910861-000
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged
transparent materials.
c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes
to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films and
similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces
to their original reflective condition. Leave concrete
floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.
Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean
plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light
fixtures and lamps.
e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of
rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved
areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign
deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor
planted, to a smooth even-textured surface.
B. Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final
inspection, and rid the project of rodents, insects and other pests.
C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities
installed for protection of the work during construction.
D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste
materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's
property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials
into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the si te and
dispose of in a lawful manner.
1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of
associated work have become the Owner's property, arrange for
disposition of these materials as directed.
END OF SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-6
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 01740 - WARRAl!rl'IBS
AND BONDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies general administrative and procedural
requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract
Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products
and special warranties.
1. Refer to the GENERAL CONDITIONS for terms of the Contractor's
special warranty of workmanship and materials.
2. Specific requirements for warranties for the work and products
and installations that are specified to be warranted, are
included in the individual sections of Divisions 2 through 16.
3. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for
continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
B.
Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers
limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor
the warranty on the work that incorporates the products, nor does
relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and Subcontractors required
countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
and
of
it
to
1 .2 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted work that has
failed, remove and replace other work that has been damaged as a
result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to
provide access for correction of warranted work.
B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When work covered by a warranty has
failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the
warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be
equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for
depreciation.
C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that work covered by a warranty
has failed, replace or rebuild the work to an acceptable condition
complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is
responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective work
regardless of whether the Owner has benefitted from use of the work
through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.
D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in
addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties,
obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law,
nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in
which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights,
or remedies.
1. Rej ection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to rej ect
warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties
not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-1
5910861-000
E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept work for the project
where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is
required on such work or part of the work, until evidence is
presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are
willing to do so.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect-Engineer prior to the date
certified for substantial completion. If the Architect-Engineer's
Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date
for warranties other than the date of substantial completion for the
work, or a designated portion of the work, submit written warranties
upon request of the Architect-Engineer.
1. When a designated portion of the work is completed and occupied
or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor
during the construction period, submit properly executed
warranties to the Architect-Engineer within 15 days of
completion of that designated portion of the work.
B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor,
or the Contractor and a Subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer,
prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit
a draft to the Owner through the Architect-Engineer for approval
prior to final execution.
1. Refer to individual sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for
specific content requirements, and particular requirements for
submittal of special warranties.
C. Form of Submittal: At final completion compile two copies of each
required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by
the Contractor, Subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize
the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of
contents of the project manual.
D. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable
3-ring vinyl covered loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to
accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch
paper.
1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for
each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product
or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product, and the name,
address and telephone number of the installer.
2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed
or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", the project title or
name, and the name of the Contractor.
3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for
warranted construction, provide additional copies of each
required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required
manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-2
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS
01740-3
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 02220 - BUILDING
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide building excavation, fill, backfill and compaction specified
and shown on the drawings. Included is preparation of subgrade for
footings, slabs and pavement within the general building area.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: The independent testing lab will submit copies of the
following reports to the Architect-Engineer, Owner and Contractor:
1. Report and certification of backfill and fill materials.
2. Test reports on borrow material.
3. Verification of each footing subgrade.
4. Field density test reports.
5. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil
encountered.
6. Other tests and material certificates, as required.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the prov1s10ns of the following
codes, specifications and standards except as otherwise shown or
specified:
1. Governing Local Building Code.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
B. Regulations: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable
requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Inspection Testing Laboratory: The Owner will employ an independent
geotechnical testing laboratory, acceptable to the
Architect-Engineer, to perform sampling and testing of soil materials
proposed for use in the work, field observation, and testing for
quality control during earthwork operations. All testing and
inspection shall be under the direct supervision of a registered
geotechnical engineer.
1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Information: The data on subsurface conditions shall be as
interpreted in the GENERAL CONDITIONS. Additional test borings and
other exploratory operations may be made at no cost to the Owner.
B. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in the
areas of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate
means of protecting during excavation operations.
BUILDING EARTHWORK
02220-1
5910861-000
1. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, p1p1ng or other
utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the utility
owner immediately for directions. Cooperate with the Owner, and
public and private utility companies in keeping their respective
services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities
to the satisfaction of the utility owner.
2. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied
and used by the Owner or others, except when permitted in
writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable
temporary utility services have been provided.
3. Demolish and completely remove from the site existing
underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with
local utility companies for shut-off of services if lines are
active.
C. Use of explosives is not permitted.
D. Protection: Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and
other facilities from damages caused by settlement, lateral movement,
undermining, washout and other hazards created by excavation
operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials for
backfill and fill shall be inorganic, non-plastic, granular soils
containing less than 10 percent material passing the No. 200 mesh
sieve (relatively clean sand with a Unified Soil Classification of
SP, SP-SM, SW, SW-SM, GP, GW, SP-GW or SW-GM) .
2.2 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT
A. Vibratory Rollers: The vibratory drum roller shall have the
following minimum requirements:
1. Drum Roller: 4 to 6 feet in diameter.
2. Static At - Drum Weight: 10,000 pounds.
3. Approved compactors include Galion, Dynapac and Bros.
4. Vibratory compaction shall be performed so as not to damage
existing structures. Rollers shall not be used adjacent to the
existing structures or within a distance which will have an
adverse effect. Use mechanical hand equipment or alternate
compaction equipment as needed.
B. Alternate Compaction Equipment: Steel wheeled or pneumatic- tired
non-vibratory rollers capable of meeting the compaction requirements
specified herein. Use adjacent to existing structures.
C. Mechanical Hand Equipment: Hand vibratory sleds, rollers and tampers
shall be capable of meeting the compaction requirements specified
herein. Total weight shall be on the order of 100 to 500 pounds.
BUILDING EARTHWORK
02220-2
5910861-000
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: The independent testing laboratory will perform the
following:
1. Test soil materials proposed for use in the work and promptly
submit test result reports.
2. Provide one optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type
of soil encountered in subgrade and fills under building slabs
and foundations and paved areas. Determine maximum densities
in accordance with ASTM D1557.
3. For backfill and fill materials, perform a mechanical analysis,
AASHTO T88; plasticity index, AASHTO T90; and moisture-density
curve, AASHTO T180 or ASTM D1557.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which building excavation and
fill is to be performed and do not proceed with the work prior to
correcting unsatisfactory conditions.
3.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING BUILDING AREAS
A. Clear and grub the entire building area to the grading limits
indicated on the drawings to remove stumps, roots, trees, vegetation,
organic material, surficial silt and silty sand zones, and other
obstructions to the work. Grub out or remove all roots larger than
1/4 inch in diameter, matted roots, other organic material, surficial
silt and sandy silt zones to at least 3 feet below existing surface.
B. Strip topsoil from areas within the building and slab areas and
stockpile on the site for future use in site grading.
3.3 COMPACTION OF EXPOSED SOILS
A. After clearing and grubbing, exposed soils compaction shall be
performed.
B. The entire building area to the grading limits indicated on the
drawings shall be compacted and densified using a vibratory drum
roller as specified herein. A minimum of 8 complete coverages, 4 in
each direction, shall be made with the roller. Continue compaction
until requirements specified herein are attained.
3.4 EXCAVATION
A. Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of materials
encountered when establishing the required grade elevations for the
site including footings, utilities and all other items indicated in
the drawings and specifications.
B. Earth excavation includes the removal and disposal of pavement and
other obstructions visible on the ground surface, underground
structures and utilities to be demolished and removed, material of
any classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and
other materials encountered that are not classified as unauthorized
excavation.
BUILDING EARTHWORK
02220-3
5910861-000
C. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond
indicated subgrade elevations or side dimensions without the specific
direction of the Architect-Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as
well as remedial work shall be at the Contractor's expense. Backfill
and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized
excavations of the same classification, unless otherwise directed by
the Architect.
D. Addi tional Excavation:
1. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify
the independent testing laboratory which shall make an
inspection of conditions.
2. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at the required
subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace the
excavated material.
3. Removal of unsuitable material in excess of one foot in depth
and its replacement as directed will be paid on the basis of
contract conditions relative to changes in the work.
E. Stability of Excavations:
1. Comply with local codes and ordinances and requirements of
agencies having jurisdiction. Slope sides of excavations as
necessary for stability and compliance. Shore and brace where
sloping is not possible either because of space restrictions or
stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of
excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling.
2. Shoring and Bracing: Provide shoring and bracing designed for
and adequate to resist all imposed loads.
F. Dewatering:
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from
flowing into the excavations and flooding the project site and
surrounding area.
2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water
from excavations to prevent softening of foundation bottoms,
undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to the
stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain
pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and
other dewatering system components necessary to convey the water
away from excavations.
3. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to
collecting or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary
drainage ditches and other diversions outside the excavation
limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations for
site utilities as temporary drainage ditches.
G. Material Storage:
1. Stockpile excavated materials classified as satisfactory soil
material where directed, until required for backfill or fill.
Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
2. Locate and retain fill materials away from edges of excavations.
BUILDING EARTHWORK
02220-4
5910861-000
3. Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein
specified.
H. Excavation for Structures:
1. Conform to the elevations and dimensions shown on the drawings,
within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a
sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit
placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of
services, other construction, and for inspection.
2. In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to
disturb the bottom of the excavation. Excavate by hand to final
grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim
bottoms to the required lines and grades to leave a solid base
to receive concrete.
3. For pile foundations, stop excavations at or slightly above the
elevation of the top of the pile. After pile installation has
been completed, remove loose and displaced material, and
excavate to final grade, leaving a solid base to receive
concrete pile caps.
I. Excavation for Trenches: Dig trenches to the uniform width required
for the particular item to be installed, sufficiently wide to provide
ample working room.
1. Excavate trenches to the depth indicated or required. Carry the
depth of trenches for piping to establish the indicated flow
lines and invert elevations. Beyond the building perimeter,
keep bottoms of trenches sufficiently below finish grade to
avoid freeze-ups.
2. Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe
bells to provide solid bearing for the entire body of the pipe.
3. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass
within 18 inches of column or wall footings and which are
carried below the bottom of such footings, or which pass under
wall footings. Place concrete to the level of the bottom of
adjacent footing. Concrete is specified in Division 3.
4.
Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have
made and backfilling authorized by the Architect-Engineer.
care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of
systems.
been
Use
pipe
J. Closing Abandoned Underground Utilities: Fully grout any abandoned
underground utilities not indicated to be removed.
3.5 BACKFILL AND FILL
A. General:
1. In all excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow
material that has been sampled, tested and approved by the soil
testing agency.
2. Backfill excavations as promptly as the work permits, but not
until completion of the following:
BUILDING EARTHWORK
02220-5
5910861-000
a. Completion of construction below finish grade including,
where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and
perimeter insulation.
b. Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of
underground utilities.
c. Removal of concrete formwork.
d. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids
with satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet
piling driven below bottom of structures and remove in
manner to prevent settlement of the structure or
utilities, or leave in place if required.
e. Removal of trash and debris.
f. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on
horizontally supported walls.
B. Placement and Compaction:
1. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 12
inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction
equipment and not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material
compacted by hand-operated tampers.
2. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to
provide the optimum moisture content of the soil material.
Compact each layer to the required percentage of maximum dry
density or relative dry for each area classification. Do not
place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy.
3. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures,
to the required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action
of the backfill against structures by carrying the material
uniformly around the structure to approximately the same
elevation in each lift. Do not overcompact against retaining
walls and structures. Provide temporary bracing for retaining
walls which are backfilled prior to construction of any
restraining slab or other element.
3.6 COMPACTION
A. General: Control soil compaction during construction for compliance
with the percentage of density specified.
B. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to the
following percentages of maximum dry density determined in accordance
with ASTM D1557:
1. Typical Building and Structure Areas: Compact 12 inches below
stripped existing grade, footing bottoms and all slabs and
structures and each layer of backfill or fill material to not
less than 95 percent maximum dry density determined in
accordance with ASTM D1557.
2. Against Retaining Structures: Compact each layer of backfill
in the 1H: 1 . 5V soi 1 wedge adj acent to retaining wall s and
structures to within 3 percent less than and in no case greater
than 95 percent maximum dry density.
BUILDING EARTHWORK
02220-6
5910861-000
3. Lawn and Planting Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and
each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum
dry density.
C. Moisture Control:
1. Where the subgrade or layer or soil material must be moisture
conditioned before compaction uniformly apply water to the
surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free
water appearing on the surface during or subsequent to
compaction operations.
2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that
is too wet to permit compaction to specified density.
3. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to
permit compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to
dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing, until
the moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Allow independent testing laboratory to inspect and approve subgrades
and fill layers before further construction work is perfo~ed.
B. The independent testing laboratory will perform the following:
1. Field density tests in accordance with ASTM D1556 (sand cone
method) ASTM D2167 (rubber balloon test), ASTM D2922 (nuclear
method) or ASTM D2937 (Drive-Cylinder Method) .
2. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings
will be placed, conduct, at least one density test to verify the
required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and
approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual
comparison of each subgrade with the related tested strata, when
acceptable to the Architect-Engineer.
3. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least one field
density test of the subgrade and each lift of compacted fill for
every 2,000 square feet of paved area or building slab, but in
no case less than three tests at each level.
C. If, in the opinion of the Architect - Engineer, based on testing
service reports and inspection, the subgrade or fills which have been
placed are below the specified density, provide additional compaction
and testing at no additional expense.
1. The results of density tests will be considered satisfactory
when the average of any four consecutive tests are each instance
equal to or greater than the specified density, and if not more
than 1 density test out of 5 has a value greater than 2 percent
below the required density.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protection of Graded Areas:
1. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free
of trash and debris.
BUILDING EARTHWORK
02220-7
5910861-000
2. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted
areas to the specified tolerances.
B. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are
disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather,
scarify the surface, re-shape, and compact to the required density
prior to further construction. Use hand tamping for recompaction
over underground utilities and underfloor subdrains, if any.
3.9 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove all waste materials, including
excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil material, trash
and debris, and legally dispose of it off the Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02220
BUILDING EARTHWORK
02220-8
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSBRGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 02282 - TERMITE
CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide soil treatment for termite control, as herein specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application
instructions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work, including
preparation of substrate and application.
B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance
with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil
treatment solution.
C. Use only termiticides which bear a federal registration number of the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating,
filling and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise
required in construction operations.
B. To ensure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or
excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with
handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant
manufacturer.
1.6 SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY
A. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil termiticide
treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and, that
if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty
period, Contractor will retreat soil and repair or replace damage
caused by termite infestation.
1. Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of treatment,
signed by applicator and Contractor.
TERMITE CONTROL
02282-1
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION
A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water,
specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil
will not be permitted as a diluent.
B. Solutions may be used as recommended by applicator if also acceptable
and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities.
Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to
planting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease
effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and
level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under
slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placement of
compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer.
B. Under slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are
placed.
1. Apply to soil in critical areas under slab, including entire
inside perimeter, inside of foundation walls, along both sides
of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric
conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers.
2. Apply an overall treatment under slab and attached slab areas.
3. Apply from grade to footing, along outside edge of building.
Dig a trench 6 to 8 inches wide along outside of foundation to
a depth of not less than 12 inches. Punch holes to top of
footing at not more than 12 inches o. c. and apply chemical
solution. Mix chemical solution with the soil as it is being
replaced in trench.
C. At hollow masonry foundations or grade beams, treat voids with
solution poured directly into the hollow spaces.
D. Apply solution at expansion joints, control joints, and areas where
slabs will be penetrated.
E.
Post signs in areas of application
termiticide treatment has been applied.
covered by other construction.
to warn workers that soil
Remove signs when areas are
F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent
excavation, landscape grading, or other construction activities
following application.
END OF SECTION 02282
TERMITE CONTROL
02282-2
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TERKIRAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 02353 - PILE LOAD
TESTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 OBJECTIVE
A. Determine the safe compression and tension value of the piles in the
completed work.
B. Verify the nature of the soil.
C. Determine minimum penetration.
D. Determine the approximate lengths of permanent piles required for the
work.
E. Where practicable, either loaded or unloaded test piles shall be so
located so as to be left in place, if suitable, and become a part of
the permanent structure.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Location: The test piles shall be located at the points shown on the
drawings or designated by the ArChitect-Engineer.
B. Building Code: These test loads shall be applied in accordance with
the Standard Building Code.
C. Testing Laboratory: The Owner will employ an independent
geotechnical testing laboratory acceptable to the Architect-Engineer
to monitor, record and report the test results.
D. Architect-Engineer's Representative: It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to notify the Architect-Engineer sufficiently in
advance of installing or testing any piles so that his representative
may be present. No piles shall be installed or tested unless his
representative is present or unless special permission is obtained
from the Architect-Engineer.
E. Curing: If piles are concrete, test loads shall not be applied until
test cylinders indicate the concrete has achieved its specified
strength.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing laboratory reports.
B. Detailed drawing of test set-up.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PILES
A. Shall be the same in every respect as the piles specified for the
finished work.
PILE LOAD TESTS
02353-1
5910861-000
2.2 INSTALLATION EQUIPMENT
A. Test piles shall be installed with the same equipment that is to be
used by the Contractor in installing the permanent piles shown on the
drawings.
2.3 TEST LOAD ARRANGEMENT
A. Shall be subject to the approval of the Architect-Engineer. The
arrangement of the load shall be such that readings can be taken
directly on the pile. If jacking equipment is used, the Contractor
shall furnish a recent calibration of gage readings for all stages of
loading.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Depth of Installation. The piles shall be installed to a penetration
of 14 feet into the strata described as "limestone" or "limestone
with some sand" in the Geotechnical Report.
B. Installation and Loading: This procedure shall consist of instal-ling
and loading piles, of the same cross section and type as the
permanent piles shown on the drawings. The loading shall consist of
applying a specified supporting soils. Test loads shall generally be
twice the design loading shown on the drawings. Test loads shall not
be applied to piles for at least 48 hours after driving.
C. Number of Piles: One compression test pile shall be driven and
loaded. Two tension test piles shall be driven and loaded. At the
discretion of the Architect-Engineer, the number of test loads may be
increased or decreased, or the entire item of test loads may be
omitted.
D. Pile Re-Use: Where so directed by the Architect-Engineer, test piles
shall be cut off, if necessary, and left in place as permanent piles.
When not suitable to be left in place as permanent piles, test piles
shall be pulled or cut off at an elevation of 1 foot below the ground
surface. Unless otherwise directed by the Architect-Engineer, test
piles that are pulled shall remain the property of the Contractor and
shall be disposed of by him.
3.2 COMPRESSION TEST PILES
A. Design Load: The design load for all compression piles for this
project is indicated on the drawings.
B. Prior Approval: The Contractor shall submit to the
Architect-Engineer for approval a detailed drawing of the test set-up
before any tests can be made.
C. Test Procedure: The test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM
Dl143, Quick Load Test Method.
3.3 TENSION TEST PILES
A. Design Load: The design load for all tension piles on this project
is indicated on the drawings.
PILE LOAD TESTS
02353-2
5910861-000
B. Prior Approval: The Contractor shall submit to the
Architect-Engineer for approval a detailed drawing of the test set-up
before any tests can be made.
C. Test Procedure: The test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM
D3689, Quick Load Test Method.
D. Evaluation of Test: The results of this tension testing shall be
used to establish minimum penetration criteria for the tension piles
in the project.
3 .4 PAYMENT
A. The quantity to be paid for under this section shall be the number of
linear feet of piles accepted and remaining in the completed work as
measured from tip to cut off. In addition, payment will be made for
each test at the unit bid price per test.
END OF SECTION 02353
PILE LOAD TESTS
02353-3
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGBR TBRIIINAL BUILDING
MORROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 02365 - ADGBRCAST
CONCRETE PILES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 OBJECTIVE
A. The intent of this specification is to provide a pile foundation with
each pile capable of supporting the allowable pile compression and
tension loadings indicated on the drawings. The work includes all
piles together with augering, pressure grouting, splicing, cutting
off and equipment necessary to accomplish the work. The Contractor
shall show evidence of past satisfactory performance on projects of
equal magnitude and character.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection and Testing Laboratory: The Owner will employ an
independent geotechnical testing laboratory, acceptable to the
Architect-Engineer, to perform pile installation monitoring, field
observation and testing for quality control during pile installation
operations. All testing and inspection shall be under the direct
supervision of a registered geotechnical engineer. No piles shall be
installed without the presence of the inspection and testing
laboratory's representative unless special permission is granted.
B.
Inspection and Testing Laboratory Duties:
performed:
The following will be
1. Calibrating the grout pump (in units of cubic feet per stroke).
2. Monitoring the addition of any water and/or admixtures to the
grout at the site. Performing flow cone tests, as required.
3. Making grout cylinders.
4. Observing the drilling process and noting any relevant
irregularities.
5. Approving the pile augering termination criteria and recording
the pile tip elevation prior to pumping.
6. Observing and documenting the grouting procedure, noting the
depth to the auger tip during any delays in grouting, and the
time of any delay during pumping.
7. Recording the total number of pump strokes for determination of
the actual grout volume pumped into each pile. Calculating
theoretical pile volume and grout factors.
8. Recording the grout pressure during pumping and the rate of
withdrawal of the auger.
9. Monitoring the setting process of the fresh grout based on
actual samples taken at the time of arrival on site. Grout
which has reached its initial set or exceeds 1.5 hours since the
time of batching, should not be used.
10. Observing freshly grouted piles to determine whether any
settling or grout subsidence has occurred.
AUGERCAST CONCRETE PILES
02365-1
5910861-000
11. Monitoring the installation of reinforcing steel in the piles.
C. Monitoring Records: Submit two copies of the record of each pile to
the Architect-Engineer not later than 2 days after installation.
Include the project name and number, name of Contractor, pile
location and number, computed pile capacity, pile dimensions,
elevation of point, elevation of butt before and after cutoff, ground
elevation, pump strokes, grout volume, grout pressure, subsidence,
and any unusual occurrences during pile driving.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. All piles shall conform to the Standard Building Code and shall be
reinforced, augercast concrete piles of the type wherein a hollow
stem continuous flight auger is advanced to the required tip
elevation, pumped grout is injected and the auger is withdrawn under
constant grout pressure.
2.2 STEEL CASINGS
A. Type: Steel casings shall be cylindrical or pipe.
1. Casings shall be placed from the top of pile elevation to a
minimum depth of 2 feet below top of pile.
2. Casings shall be of good quality steel suitable for the purpose.
3. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A252, Grade 3 and
shall have a minimum wall thickness of 1/8 inch.
B. Strength and Watertightness: Regardless of shape, each casing shall
be of such wall thickness and form, as to possess adequate strength
to resist without failure, all forces imposed upon it by pile
installation; and to resist without distortion, collapse, failure or
leakage, the outside collapsing forces and hydrostatic pressures
encountered during installation and thereafter until the shell is
filled with concrete.
2.3 GROUT
A. Grout used to fill pile casings shall consist of Portland cement, a
pozzolanic material when approved, fluidifier, sand and water
proportioned and mixed to provide a pumpable grout which shall
achieve a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 lb/sq. in. at 28 days
of age. The grout shall have a time of efflux of not less than 21
seconds when tested in accordance with USACE CRD-C 611. The
provisions of Division 3, Concrete shall apply unless otherwise
specified in the section.
B. pozzolan: Pozzolan shall be a fly ash or other approved pozzolanic
material conforming to ASTM C618.
C. Grout Fluidifier: Grout fluidifier shall conform to ASTM C937,
except that expansion shall not exceed 4 percent. The fluidifier
shall be a compound possessing characteristics which will increase
the flowability of the mixture, assist in the dispersal of cement
grains, and neutralize the setting shrinkage of the high-strength
cement mortar.
AUGERCAST CONCRETE PILES
02365-2
5910861-000
D. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM
C33. The sand shall consist of hard, dense, durable, uncoated rock
particles and be free from injurious amounts of silt, loam, lumps,
soft or flaky particles, shale, alkali, organic matter, mica and
other deleterious substances. If washed,a washing method shall be
used that will not remove desirable fines, and the sand shall
subsequently be permitted to drain until the residual-free moisture
is reasonably uniform and stable. The sand shall be well-graded from
fine to coarse, with fineness modulus between 1.30 and 3.40. The
fineness modulus is defined as the total divided by 100 of the
cumulative percentages retained on U.S. Standard Sieve Numbers 16,
30, 50 and 100.
E. Aggregate: Aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33, for
fine aggregate, except as to grading. The sand shall consist of
hard, dense, durable, uncoated rock fragments and shall be free from
injurious amounts of silt, lumps, loam, soft or flaky particles,
shale, alkali, organic matter, mica and other desirable fines, and
the sand shall be permitted to drain until the residual free moisture
is reasonably uniform and stable. Sand grading shall be reasonably
consistent and shall conform to the following requirements as
delivered to the grout mixer:
U.S. Standard
Sieve Number
Cumulative Percent
bv Weiqht passinq
Cumulative Percent
bv Weiqht Retained
8
16
30
50
100
200
100
95-100
55-80
30-55
10-30
0-10
o
0-5
20-45
45-70
70-90
90-100
The sand shall have a fineness modulus of not less than 1.30 nor more
than 2.10. Sand grading shown above may be modified with the
approval of the Architect-Engineer. Mortar test specimens made with
the modified sand shall exhibit compressive strength equal to or
greater than that exhibited by similar specimens made with sand
meeting grading and other requirements shown above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREDRIVING WORK
A. Site Conditions: Do not install piles until the earthwork in the
area which piles are to occupy has been completed in accordance with
Section 02220 - BUILDING EARTHWORK.
B. Test Piles: Compression test piles and tensile test piles shall be
installed in accordance with Section 02353 - PILE LOAD TESTS.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
A pressure gauge shall be installed close to the pile rig in
monitor pressure during the grouting operations. The gauge
positioned so that it can be easily observed by the
laboratory representative.
order to
shall be
testing
B. A mechanical counter shall be provided on the grout pump to record
the number of pump strokes during the installation of each pile.
AUGERCAST CONCRETE PILES
02365-3
5910861-000
C. The grout pump shall be calibrated prior to initiation of production
pile installation by pumping grout into a container of known volume.
The pump shall then be calibrated as often as deemed necessary by the
testing laboratory representative.
D. The piles shall be installed to a penetration of 14 feet into rock or
deeper if established by the test piles. Rock shall be defined as
the strata described as "limestone" or "limestone with some sand" in
the Geotechnical Report.
E. After achieving the desired depth and criteria as confirmed or
established by the test piles, a positive grout pressure shall be
observed prior to initiating withdrawal of the auger. A continuous
fluid return (first slurry, then grout) out of the top of the hole is
required to assure that the maximum possible pressure head is being
achieved.
F. The auger shall be withdrawn slowly and smoothly so that a positive
grout pressure is maintained in the hole at all times during auger
withdrawal. If the withdrawal of the auger becomes erratic, grout
pressure suddenly drops, or if the grout supply is interrupted, the
auger tip shall be reinserted at least 5 feet below the level where
the grouting operation was disrupted prior to resuming withdrawal of
the auger. The time rate of withdrawal of the auger shall be
monitored by the testing laboratory representative.
G. A grout factor equal to or greater than that of the successful test
piles shall be achieved. The grout factor is defined as the actual
volume of grout pumped into the pile divided by the theoretical
volume of the drilled hole. The Contractor shall coordinate the rate
of withdrawal of the auger so that the desired target grout factor is
achieved. Significantly higher grout factors may result due to the
presence of relatively small voids and cavities in the limestone
formations.
H. Clockwise rotation of the auger shall be performed during the
grouting process at least until grout is observed flowing out of the
top of the drilled hole. Auger rotation helps stabilize the sides of
the hole, facilitates the removal of spoil material out of the hole,
and prevents bearing formation cuttings from settling-out to the
bottom of the hole during grouting.
I. The installation of adjacent piles (located within 4 feet of each
other side to side) on the same working day is not permitted at this
site due to the potential existence of interconnected pores or
cavities in the limestone layers. Adjacent piles (located within 4
feet) shall not be installed until the initial grouted pile has set
overnight.
J. If subsidence occurs while the pile grout is in a fluid state
(generally within 2 hours of forming the pile), the pile shall be
"topped" with fresh grout to the proper cutoff elevation immediately.
Pile grout subsidence of up to 8 inches will be considered
acceptable. Conscientious monitoring of the pile grout levels is
required of the Contractor. Piles which subside more than 8 inches
overnight or after a 2-hour period will be evaluated on an individual
basis.
K. Grout shall not be pumped into the piles when it is older than 90
minutes from the time it was batched.
AUGERCAST CONCRETE PILES
02365-4
5910861-000
3.3 GROUT TESTING
A. Grout Cube Tests. Grout tests will be conducted in accordance with
ASTM C109 in a laboratory. Test specimens will be prepared by
pouring grout into 2 X 2 X 2-inch molds. Not less than 9 cubes will
be cast during each 8-hour shift. Three cubes shall be tested at 3
days; 3 at 7 days; and 3 at 28 days.
B. Grout Cylinder Tests. Grout tests will be conducted in accordance
with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. Test specimens of grout will be prepared
by pouring grout into 6 X 12-inch cylinder molds. Molds will be
provided with a top cover plate so designed as to restrain grout
expansion and to permit escape of air and water. Not less than 1 set
of cylinders will be collected during the placing of each group of 15
piles or fraction thereof. One set will consist of 4 cylinders of
which 2 cylinders will be tested in 7 days and 2 cylinders at 28
days.
3 .4 PAYMENT
A. The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of linear feet of
piles accepted and remaining under the completed structure as
measured from tip to cut-off.
B. The "Total Estimated Footage" specified herein is an approximation
only of the total amount of pile required. Should the actual amount
of pile footage installed be greater or less than the approximated
amount, the cost of such difference shall be determined in accordance
with the Contractor's single unit price per linear foot of pile,
which shall be indicated on his proposal, and such cost shall be
added to or deducted from the total contract price as applicable.
The Owner reserves the right to vary the actual footages from the
approximate footage mentioned hereinbefore by an amount up to 20
percent more or less than the approximated amount at the same unit
price. This condition may be caused by varying either the total
number of piles or length of piles. Such price and payment shall be
full compensation for all work specified in this or other sections of
these specifications and as shown on the drawings and shall include
the piles, pile driving, redriving, cutting off, splicing,
excavation, all other materials, equipment, tools, labor and
incidentals necessary to complete the work.
3.5 TOTAL ESTIMATED PILE FOOTAGE
A. The Contractor's base bid price shall include the cost of 1,325
linear feet of piles, complete and in place.
The Contractor's base bid shall also include the cost of 1 load test
of 1 compression and 2 tension (reaction) piles and a unit price per
test. The tension test piles shall be utilized as reaction piles for
the compression test. This unit price shall only include the
characteristics peculiar to the testing. The Owner reserves the
right to adjust the number of load tests to be performed. The base
bid will be adjusted accordingly. Payment for the pile and
installation will be paid for as specified herein.
END OF SECTION 02365
AUGERCAST CONCRETE PILES
02365-5
5910861-000
!mRATHON AIRPORT
BBW PASSENGER TBRIIINAL BUILDING
IIJRROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 02870 - SITE
FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1 . 2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Exterior precast benches.
2. Exterior precast waste receptacles.
3. Exterior precast ash urns.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each product used in site furnishings, including
finishing materials and methods.
B. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation, including plans,
elevations and details of components and attachments to other units
of work.
1. Include setting drawings and directions for installation of
anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as unit of
work of other sections.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's
sample material.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully
producing site furnishings similar to that indicated for this
Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required
units without causing delay in the work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of site
furnishings by a firm acceptable to the manufacturer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store components and materials in clean, dry location. Cover with
waterproof paper, tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner that
permits air circulation within covering.
B. Handle site furnishings on site to a minimum; exercise care to avoid
damaging finish.
SITE FURNISHINGS
02870-1
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR PRECAST BENCHES
A. Provide units equal to those manufactured by Wausau Tile, Inc.,
Terra-Form, "University Bench" Series #TF5030, 96 x 20 x 18 inches.
B. Finish to be surface "C" smooth concrete. Color to be cream.
2.2 EXTERIOR PRECAST WASTE RECEPTACLES
A. Provide units equal to those manufactured by Wausau Tile, Inc.,
Terra-Form, Manufacture Number TF1105, 27 inches in diameter X 36
inches/25 gallon.
B. Finish to be surface "C" smooth concrete. Color to be cream.
2.3 EXTERIOR PRECAST ASH URNS
A. Provide uni ts equal to those manufactured by Wausau Ti le , Inc.,
Terra-Form, Manufacturer Number TF2010, 18 inches in diameter X 24
inches.
B. Finish to be surface "C" smooth concrete. Color to be cream.
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form precast to required shapes and sizes, with true curves, lines
and angles. Provide components in sizes and profiles indicated, but
not less than required to comply with requirements indicated for
structural performance.
B. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp or defects which
impair strength and appearance.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth and well-defined lines.
D. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages and setting drawings, diagrams,
instructions and directions for installation of items having integral
anchors which are to be embedded in concrete. Coordinate delivery of
such items to the project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing
items in place.
B. Prepare foundation surfaces for level installation.
C. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of
damage from other work yet to be performed at the same location.
SITE FURNISHINGS
02870-2
5910861-000
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes from damage during construction period by use of
temporary protective coverings approved by fabricator. Remove
protective covering at time of substantial completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period
so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items which
cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as
required.
END OF SECTION 02870
SITE FURNISHINGS
02870-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
~B COONTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 02916 - TREB PRUNING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Trees/palms which are to remain and to be protected are indicated on
the drawings.
B. Trim and protect trees/palms which are indicated to remain that
interfere with new construction, as herein specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Certification: Submit written certification by a qualified tree
surgeon that trees/palms indicated to remain have been protected
during the course of construction in accordance with recognized
standards of the industry. Also, where damage did occur trees/palms
were promptly and properly treated. Indicate which damaged
trees/palms, if any, are incapable of retaining full growth potential
and are recommended to be replaced.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tree Surgeon: Engage a qualified tree surgeon to perform the
following work:
1. Remove branches from trees/palms which are to remain, if
required to clear new construction.
2. Recommend procedures to compensate for loss of roots and perform
initial pruning of branches and stimulation of root growth where
removed to accommodate new construction.
3. Perform tree/palm repair work for damages incurred by new
construction.
1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temporary Protections:
1. Prior to any land clearing operations, temporary barriers shall
be installed around all trees/palms and other understory
vegetation to protect trees/palms and other plants and shall
remain wi thin the limi ts of clearing or construction. Temporary
barriers shall remain until completion of the work.
2 . Protect root systems. Do not store construction materials,
debris or excavated material within the drip line (the outer
perimeter of branches). Do not permit vehicles within drip
line. Restrict foot traffic to prevent excessive compaction of
soil over root systems.
a. The temporary barrier shall be at least 3 feet high, shall
be placed at least 6 feet away from the base of any
tree/palm, and shall include at least 50 percent of the
area under the dripline of any protected tree/palm or
trees/palms.
TREE PRUNING
02916-1
5910861-000
b. The barrier shall consist of either a wood fence with
2 x 4 posts placed a maximum of 8 feet apart, with a 2 x
4 minimum top rail, or a temporary wire mesh fence, or
other similar barrier which will limit access to the
protected area, and shall comply with the guidelines in
the Tree Protection Guide for Builders and Developers by
the Florida Division of Forestry and any other reasonable
requirements deemed appropriate by the Chief, Building and
Zoning Inspection Division, to implement this part.
3. When removing branches from protected trees/palms to clear for
construction or pruning to restore the natural shape of the
entire tree/palm, the guidelines in the National Arborist
Association Pruning Standards for Shade Tree and the American
National Standards for Tree Care Operations (ANSI Z133.1) shall
be followed. Protected trees/palms shall be pruned and
fertilized as necessary to compensate for any loss of roots and
to stimulate root growth. Any damage to tree/palm crowns or
root systems shall be repaired immediately after damage occurs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Tree/Palm pruning Compound: Waterproof, antiseptic, elastic and free
of kerosene, coal tar, creosote, and other substances harmful to
plants.
B. Drainage Fill: Selected stone or gravel, graded to pass a 3-inch
sieve and retained on a 1-inch sieve.
C. Topsoil: Rich in organic matter and loamy in texture, as acceptable
to Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect tree/palm root systems from damage due to noxious materials
in solution caused by run-off or spillage during mixing and placement
of construction materials, or drainage from stored materials.
Protect root systems from flooding, erosion or excessive wetting
resulting from dewatering operations.
B. Do not allow fires under or adjacent to trees/palms or other plants
which are to remain.
C. Remove branches from trees/palms which are to remain, if required to
clear new construction.
D. Extend pruning operation to restore natural shape of entire
tree/palm.
E. Cut branches and roots, if required, with sharp pruning instruments;
do not break or chop. Paint cuts over 1/2 inch in size with
tree/palm pruning compound.
TREE PRUNING
02916-2
5910861-000
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Excavation Around Trees/Palms:
1. Excavate within drip line of trees/palms only where indicated.
2. Where trenching for utilities is required within drip line,
tunnel under or around roots by hand digging. Do not cut main
lateral roots or tap roots; cut smaller roots which interfere
with installation of new work. Cut roots with sharp pruning
instruments; do not break or chop.
3. Where excavating for new construction is required within drip
line of trees/palms, hand excavate to minimize damage to root
systems.
4. Relocate roots in backfill areas wherever possible. If large,
main lateral roots are encountered, expose beyond excavation
limits as required to bend and relocate without breaking. If
encountered immediately adj acent to location of new construction
and relocation is not practical, cut roots approximately 3
inches back from new construction.
5. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before permanent backfill
is placed; provide temporary earth cover, or pack with peat moss
and wrap wi th burlap. Water and maintain in moist condition and
temporarily support and protect from damage until permanently
relocated and covered with earth. Prune branches to balance
loss to root system caused by damage or cutting of root system.
B. Grading and Filling Around Trees/Palms:
1. Maintain existing grade within drip line of trees/palms, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Lowering Grades: Where existing grade is above new finish grade
shown around trees/palms, carefully hand excavate within drip
line to new finish grade. Cut roots exposed by excavation or
provide permanent protections as recommended by tree/palm
surgeon.
C. Raising Grades:
1. Minor Fills: Where existing grade is 6 inches or less below
elevation of finish grade shown, use a topsoil fill material.
Place in single layer and do not compact; hand grade to required
finish elevations.
2. Moderate Fills: Where existing grade is more than 6 inches, but
less than 12 inches, below finish grade elevation, place a layer
of drainage fill on existing grade prior to placing topsoil.
Carefully place against trunk of tree/palm approximately 2
inches above finish grade elevation and extend not less than 18
inches from tree/palm trunk on all sides. For balance of area
within drip line perimeter, place drainage fill to an elevation
6 inches below grade and complete fill with a layer of topsoil
to finish grade elevation. Do not compact stone or gravel or
topsoil layers; hand grade to required elevations.
TREE PRUNING
02916-3
5910861-000
D. Repair and Replacement of Trees/Palms:
1. Repair trees/palms damaged by construction operations. Make
repairs promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive
deterioration of damaged trees/palms.
2. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees/palms which are
determined by the tree/palm surgeon to be incapable of
restoration to normal growth pattern.
a. Provide new trees/palms of same size and species as those
dead or damaged, up to 6 inch caliper. For replacement of
trees/palms over 6 inch in caliper measurement, taken 12
inches above grade, provide new trees/palms of 6-inch
caliper size, and of the species selected by the
Architect. Install per acceptable horticultural
practices.
E. Disposal:
1. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning of removed trees/palms and
branches is not permitted on the site.
2. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning will be permitted only at
designated areas and times directed by the Owner. Obtain
required permits for burning from governing authorities. Attend
burning materials until fires have burned out or have been
extinguished.
3.
Removal from Owner's
displaced trees/palms,
Owner's property.
Property: Remove excess excavation,
and trimmings and dispose of off the
END OF SECTION 02916
TREE PRUNING
02916-4
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERKINAL BUILDING
MONROB COONTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 02961 - PALM
TRANSPLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work under this section shall include all services, tools,
apparatus, materials, labor or other means of construction required
for the landscaping work in accordance with drawings and these
specifications.
B. Section includes:
1. Work shall include transplanting and maintenance of transplanted
palms, palm locations and fertilizing.
2. The work shall include the preparation of the ground, finish
grading, planting, fertilizing, mulching, clipping and pruning
of plant materials.
3. The work includes sodding of areas disturbed by construction and
new planting areas created by construction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Guarantee of Fertilizer Analysis and Proof of Application: Before
delivery of fertilizer is made, the Contractor shall submit the
manufacturer's statement of analysis of the fertilizer indicating the
proportions of organic or inorganic matter and the availability of
the plant food. The fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in the
original containers, unopened and bearing a guaranteed analysis
fulfilling the required specifications. The Contractor shall retain
labels or portions of the original containers bearing the
manufacturer's guaranteed analysis and weight of fertilizer applied
to the job site. These labels shall be made available upon request
of the Contract manager.
B. Proposed planting schedule should be approved by Owner's
representative and prioritized per any Owner request and coordinated
with all other Contractors.
C.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit two copies of
instructions recommending procedures to be established
for the maintenance of landscape work for 1 full year.
to expiration of required maintenance period(s) .
typewritten
by the Owner
Submit prior
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The transplanting work shall be performed by a single firm having a
minimum of 3 years experience specializing in tree and palm
transplanting work.
B. Transplanting of existing palms shall be performed with the
appropriate equipment and methods
PALM TRANSPLANTING
02961-1
5910861-000
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Packaged Materials : Deliver packaged materials in containers showing
weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from
deterioration during delivery, and while stored at the site.
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection:
1. Examine areas for conditions under which work is to be
performed. Report in writing to Owner and Architect all
conditions contrary to those shown on the drawings or specified
herein and all other conditions that will affect satisfactory
execution of work.
2 . Verify grade elevations, examine the subgrade, investigate
internal soil drainage and surface drainage. Report to Owner
and Architect any unsatisfactory soil conditions such as
improperly constructed substrates, existing "hard pan," any
unacceptable nonstructural fills introduced on the site, any
excessi ve compaction resulting from new construction or any
other unacceptable conditions of subsoils in planting areas.
a. Investigate and correct any unsuitable soil conditions by
the following methods or any other procedures approved by
Owner and Architect.
1) Utilities: Determine location of underground
utilities and perform work in a manner which will
avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, as required,
to minimize possibility of damage to underground
utilities prior to digging with tree spade.
Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is
mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned.
2) Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant
growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, adverse
drainage conditions, or obstruction, notify
Architect before planting.
B. Acceptance: Starting work constitutes acceptance of the conditions
under which work is to be performed. After such acceptance this
Contractor shall at his expense, be responsible for correcting all
unsatisfactory and defective work resulting from such unsatisfactory
conditions.
C. Scheduling:
1. Planting Schedule: Prepare a proposed transplanting schedule.
Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide
maintenance until final completion of all work under the
contract.
2. Proceed with and complete the transplanting work as rapidly as
portions of the site become available. Work shall be
prioritized per any Owner's request and the approved
transplanting schedule and coordinated with all other
Contractors. In locales where planting seasons are limited by
climate, work shall be scheduled during normally acceptable
seasons for planting.
PALM TRANSPLANTING
02961-2
5910861-000
1 . 6 WARRANTY
A. Warrant all transplanted palms for a period of 1 year after date of
final acceptance.
B. Remove and replace transplanted palms found to be dead or in
unhealthy condition during warranty period. In areas where planting
seasons are limited by climate, make replacements during growth
season.
C. At the end of the warranty period, upon request, inspection of the
transplanted work will be made by the Architect and/or Owner's
representative. The Contractor shall remove and replace all
transplanted palms found to be dead or in unhealthy condition. Only
one replacement will be required at end of warranty period, except
for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with specified
requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil for landscape work is not available at the site and shall be
furnished as specified.
B. Provide new topsoil which is fertile, friable, natural loam, surface
soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, brush, weeds and other
litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any
dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant
growth.
1. Obtain topsoil from local sources or from areas having
compatible soil characteristics to that found at project site.
Obtain topsoil only from naturally, well-drained sites where
topsoil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches; do not
obtain from bogs or marshes.
2. The topsoil shall be delivered in a nonmuddy condition and shall
be subject to the approval of the Owner.
2.2 FERTILIZERS
A. AgriForm Tablets (Or Approved Equal): 20 gram tablets, 2 tablets per
1 inch caliper of palm.
B. Root Hormone (Or Approved Equal): Must have written approval of
specific product to be used prior to application. Use manufacturer's
recommended application rates.
2.3 PESTICIDES
A. Copper Sulfate: Copper sulfate must have written approval of
specific product to be used prior to application. Use manufacturer's
recommended application rates.
B. Lindane: Lindane must have written approval of specific product to
be used prior to application. Use manufacturer's recommended
application rates.
PALM TRANSPLANTING
02961-3
5910861-000
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Name and Variety: Provide any replacement palms true to name and
variety established by the American Joint Committee on Horticultural
Nomenclature "Standardized Plant Names."
B. Quality: Provide any replacement palms complying with Florida No. 1
Classification in "Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants," Parts 1
and 2, published by Florida Department of Agriculture, Division of
Plant Industry, Gainesville, Florida.
C. Wrapping Material: Four- inch wide bituminous impregnated tape,
corrugated or crepe paper specifically manufactured for palm wrapping
and having qualities to resist insect infestation.
D. Water: Suitable water for the irrigation of the new plantings during
the progress of construction and as specified in the maintenance
period shall be provided and paid for by the Contractor, who shall
also furnish adequate watering equipment.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS
A. Mulch: Shall be type "A" Cypress Bark Mulch, clean, bright and free
of weeds, moss, sticks, sapwood and other debris. Bark size shall be
shredded and no pieces larger than 2-1/2-inch width, 6-inch length.
B. Moisture Retention Polymers: Terra-Sorb (or approved equal): Must
have written approval of specific product to be used prior to
application. Use per manufacturer's recommended application rates.
C. Antidesiccant: Emulsion type, film-forming agent similar to Dowax by
Dow Chemical Co., or Wilt-Prof by Nursery Specialty Products, Inc.,
designed to permit transpiration but retard excessive loss of
moisture from plants. Deliver in manufacturer's fully identified
containers and mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Guy and stake palms immediately after planting.
E. Guying and Staking: All palms shall have palm guying and/or stakes
as necessary to maintain palms plumb. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to maintain all plants in a plumb, upright position
until the end of a warranty period. Staking shall be required of the
Contractor and all damaged palms resulting from the lack of proper
staking and guying and maintenance thereof shall be replaced by the
Contractor at no expense to the Owner.
1. Hose: Hose shall be suitable garden hose not less than 1/2-inch
inside diameter.
2. Stakes: Stakes for supporting palms shall be of sound wood of
uniform sizes, creosoted or pressure treated by an approved
process. Stakes shall not be less than two inches by four
inches nominal dimensions and shall not be less than 2-1/2 feet
in length for guying and not less than 9 feet for staking, and
shall be in all cases of sufficient dimensions and length to
satisfactorily and firmly guy each palm.
3. Wire: Wire shall be galvanized, pliable, zinc-coated iron not
greater than No. 12 gauge.
PALM TRANSPLANTING
02961-4
5910861-000
4. Turnbuckles: Turnbuckles for guying palms shall be galvanized
or cadmium-plated and shall be of adequate size and strength to
properly maintain tight guy wires.
5. Contractor may submit shop drawings of alternate method of
guying and/or staking of palms for review. Alternate methods
must be neat, safe and secure for purpose of securing palm in
upright, straight position.
6. At the Owner's request, during the warranty period, the
Contractor shall remove all staking and guying.
F. Water: Shall be well furnished by Owner at a single location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Layout individual palm locations. Stake locations, outline areas and
secure Architect's acceptance before starting planting work. Make
minor adjustments as necessary or as may be requested. If
underground construction, utilities or obstructions are found during
excavation of planting areas, alternate locations for the plant
material shall be selected by the Architect. Changes in locations
shall be made without additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 PALM TRANSPLANTING
A. Excavate specified palms in the locations noted on the drawings and
previously approved by the Landscape Architect with the appropriate
equipment and methods to ensure that the rootball is of sufficient
size to sustain palm survivability. Dig plants with firm, natural
balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the
fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the
plant. Ball shall be firm wrapped with burlap or similar material
and bound with twine or cord. Roots and balls of all plants shall be
adequately protected at all times from sun and drying winds. Root
prune and remove palms according to acceptable horticultural
practices. All palms shall be installed 1-1/2 inches above finished
grade. Provide 6-inch height soil basin, 6-inch outside edge of
receiving hole. Remove all vegetation (grasses and weeds) from root
ball before fertilizing or mulching.
B. Apply copper sulfate to trunk of all palms.
C. Six weeks prior to transplanting, root prune at an 18-inch radius
around Florida thatch palms and Christmas palms. Water and remove
2/3 of the fronds. Protect the bud at all times. Antidesiccant
spray may be applied on remaining fronds.
D. After transplanting and moving palms, joint between rece1v1ng hole
and root ball shall have water forced into joint with 42-inch length,
3/4-inch diameter pipe to fill all air cavities. Apply 2-inch thick
layer of specified mulch under each palm from base of palm to 6
inches outside soil basin. Apply fertilizer as per specification
rate.
E. Guy and stake palms immediately after planting as necessary to
maintain palms in a plumb, upright position until the end of the
warranty period.
PALM TRANSPLANTING
02961-5
5910861-000
F. Inspect palm trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect
infestation and take corrective measures required before wrapping.
G.
Field Repair:
filled.
All holes from relocated palms shall be promptly
H. Prior to site demolition, the Contractor shall transplant all the
palms noted on the plans.
1. The Florida thatch palms and Christmas palms shall be
transplanted to new locations on the site as directed and
approved by the Architect-Engineer.
I. The Contractor shall provide all necessary watering and maintenance
to ensure palm survivability until the end of the warranty period.
3.3 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A.
During transplanting work,
directed. Keep pavements
condition.
store materials
clean and work
and equipment where
area in an orderly
B. Protect transplanted work and materials from damage due to operations
by other contractors, trades and trespassers. Maintain protection
during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair or
replace damaged landscape work.
3.4 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. When the transplanted work is completed, including all initial
maintenance, the Architect will, upon request, make an inspection to
determine acceptability.
B. Where transplanted work does not comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents, replace rejected work and continue specified
maintenance until reinspected by the Architect and found to be
acceptable. Remove rejected plants and materials promptly from the
project site.
END OF SECTION 02961
PALM TRANSPLANTING
02961-6
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COONTY, FLORIDA
ITEM P-156 TEMPORARY AIR AND WATER POLLUTION,
SOIL EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
DESCRIPTION
156-1.1 This item shall consist of temporary control measures as shown on the
plans or as ordered by the RPR during the life of a contract to control water
pollution, soil erosion, and siltation through the use of berms, dikes, dams,
sediment basins, fiber mats, gravel, mulches, grasses, slope drains, and other
erosion control devices or methods.
The temporary erosion control measures contained herein shall be coordinated wi th
the permanent erosion control measures specified as part of this contract to the
extent practical to assure economical, effective, and continuous erosion control
throughout the construction period.
Temporary control may include work outside the construction limits such as borrow
pit operations, equipment and material storage sites, waste areas, and ~emporary
plant sites.
MATERIALS
156-2.1 GRASS. Grass which will not compete with the grasses sown later for
permanent cover shall be a quick-growing species (such as ryegrass, Italian
ryegrass, or cereal grasses) suitable to the area providing a temporary cover.
156-2.2 MDLCHBS. Mulches may be hay, straw, fiber mats, netting, bark, wood
chips, or other suitable material reasonably clean and free of noxious weeds and
deleterious materials.
156-2.3 FERTILIZER. Fertilizer shall be a standard commercial grade and shall
conform to all Federal and state regulations and to the standards of the
Association of Official Agricultural Chemists.
156-2.4 SLOPE DRAINS. Slope drains may be constructed of pipe, fiber mats,
rubble, portland cement concrete, bituminous concrete, or other materials that
will adequately control erosion.
156-2.5 OTHER. All other materials shall meet commercial grade standards and
shall be approved by the RPR before being incorporated into the project.
CONSTRUCTION REQUIRBMBRTS
156-3.1 GENERAL. In the event of conflict between these requirements and
pollution control laws, rules, or regulations of other Federal, state, or local
agencies, the more restrictive laws, rules, or regulations shall apply.
The RPR shall be responsible for assuring compliance to the extent that
construction practices, construction operations, and construction work are
involved.
156-3.2 SCHEDULE. Prior to the start of construction, the Contractor shall
submit schedules for accomplishment of temporary and permanent erosion control
work, as are applicable for clearing and grubbing; grading; construction; paving;
and structures at watercourses. The Contractor shall also submit a proposed
method of erosion and dust control on haul roads and borrow pits and a plan for
TEMPORARY AIR AND WATER POLLUTION,
SOIL EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
P-156-1
5910861-000
disposal of waste materials. Work shall not be started until the erosion control
schedules and methods of operation for the applicable construction have been
accepted by the RPR.
Several methods of controlling dust and other air pollutants include:
a. Exposing the minimum area of erodible earth.
b. Applying temporary mulch with or without seeding.
c. Using water sprinkler trucks.
d. Using covered haul trucks.
e. Using dust palliatives or penetration asphalt on haul roads.
f. Using plastic sheet coverings.
156-3.3 ADTHORITY OF RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE. The RPR has the authority
to limit the surface area of erodible earth material exposed by clearing and
grubbing, to limit the surface area of erodible earth material exposed by
excavation, borrow and fill operations, and to direct the Contractor to provide
immediate permanent or temporary pollution control measures to minimize
contamination of adjacent streams or other watercourses, lakes, ponds, or other
areas of water impoundment.
156-3.4 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS. The Contractor will be required to incorporate
all permanent erosion control features into the project at the earliest
practicable time as outlined in the accepted schedule. Except where future
construction operations will damage slopes, the Contractor shall perform the
permanent seeding and mulching and other specified slope protection work in
stages, as soon as substantial areas of exposed slopes can be made available.
Temporary erosion and pollution control measures will be used to correct
conditions that develop during construction that were not foreseen during the
design stage; that are needed prior to installation of permanent control
features; or that are needed temporarily to control erosion that develops during
normal construction practices, but are not associated with permanent control
features on the project.
Where erosion is likely to be a problem, clearing and grubbing operations should
be scheduled and performed so that grading operations and permanent erosion
control features can follow immediately thereafter if the project conditions
permit; otherwise, temporary erosion control measures may be required between
successive construction stages.
The RPR will limit the area of clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow, and
embankment operations in progress, commensurate with the Contractor's capability
and progress in keeping the finish grading, mulching, seeding, and other such
permanent control measures current in accordance with the accepted schedule.
Should seasonal limitations make such coordination unrealistic, temporary erosion
control measures shall be taken immediately to the extent feasible and justified.
In the event that temporary erosion and pollution control measures are required
due to the Contractor's negligence, carelessness, or failure to install permanent
controls as a part of the work as scheduled or are ordered by the RPR, such work
shall be performed by the Contractor at his/her own expense.
The RPR may increase or decrease the area of erodible earth material to be
exposed at one time as determined by analysis of project conditions.
TEMPORARY AIR AND WATER POLLUTION,
SOIL EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
P-156-2
5910861-000
The erosion control features installed by the Contractor shall be acceptably
maintained by the Contractor during the construction period.
Whenever construction equipment must cross watercourses at frequent intervals,
and such crossings will adversely affect the sediment levels, temporary
structures should be provided.
Pollutants such as fuels, lubricants, bitumen, raw sewage, wash water from
concrete mixing operations, and other harmful materials shall not be discharged
into or near rivers, streams, and impoundments or into natural or manmade
channels leading thereto.
MBTHOD OF MBASURBMBNT
156-4.1 Temporary erosion and pollution control work required which is not
attributed to the Contractor's negligence, carelessness, or failure to install
permanent controls will be performed as scheduled or ordered by the RPR.
Completed and accepted work will be measured as a lump sum.
156-4.2 Control work performed for protection of construction areas outside the
construction limits, such as borrow and waste areas, haul roads, equipment and
material storage sites, and temporary plant sites, will not be measured and paid
for directly but shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor
wi th costs included in the contract prices bid for the items to which they apply.
END OF ITEM P-156
TEMPORARY AIR AND WATER POLLUTION,
SOIL EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL
P-156-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COONTY, FLORIDA
ITEM D-701
PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS
DESCRIPTION
701-1.1 This item shall consist of the construction of pipe culverts and storm
drains in accordance with these specifications and in reasonably close conformity
with the lines and grades shown on the plans.
MATERIALS
701-2.1 Materials shall meet the requirements shown on the plans and specified
below.
701-2.2 PIPE.
Reinforced Concrete Pipe
ASTM C 76
701-2.3 CONCRETE. Concrete for pipe cradles shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 2000 psi (13 780 kPa) at 28 days and conform to the requirements of
ASTM C 94.
701-2.4 ROBBER GASKETS. Rubber gaskets for rigid pipe shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C 443.
701-2.5 JOINT MORTAR. Pipe joint mortar shall consist of one part portland
cement and two parts sand. The portland cement shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM C 150, Type I. The sand shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 144.
701-2.6 OAKUM. Oakum for joints in bell and spigot pipe shall be made from hemp
(Cannabis Sativa) line, or Benares Sunn fiber, or from a combination of these
fibers. The oakum shall be thoroughly corded and finished.
701-2.7 JOINT FILLERS. Poured filler for joints shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D 1190.
701-2.8 PLASTIC GASKETS. Plastic gaskets shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M 198 (Type B) .
CONSTRUCTION MBTHODS
701-3.1 BXCA~TION. The width of the pipe trench shall be sufficient to permit
satisfactory jointing of the pipe and thorough tamping of the bedding material
under and around the pipe, but it shall not be less than the external diameter
of the pipe plus 6 inches (150 mm) on each side. The trench walls shall be
approximately vertical.
Where rock, hardpan, or other unyielding material is encountered, the Contractor
shall remove it from below the foundation grade for a depth of at least 12 inches
(300 mm) or one-half inch (12 mm) for each foot of fill over the top of the pipe
(whichever is greater) but for no more than three-quarters of the nominal
diameter of the pipe. The width of the excavation shall be at least 1 foot (30
em) greater than the horizontal outside diameter of the pipe. The excavation
below grade shall be backfilled with selected fine compressible material, such
as silty clay or loam, and lightly compacted in layers not over 6 inches (150 mm)
in uncompacted depth to form a uniform but yielding foundation.
PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS
D-701-1
5910861-000
Where a firm foundation is not encountered at the grade established, due to soft,
spongy, or other unstable soil, the unstable soil shall be removed and replaced
with approved granular material for the full trench width. The RPR shall
determine the depth of removal necessary. The granular material shall be
compacted to provide adequate support for the pipe.
The excavation for pipes that are placed in embankment fill shall not be made
until the embankment has been completed to a height above the top of the pipe as
shown on the plans.
701-3.2 BEDDING. The pipe bedding shall conform to the class specified on the
plans. When no bedding class is specified or detailed on the plans, the
requirements for Class C bedding shall apply.
a. Rigid Pipe. Class A bedding shall consist of a continuous concrete
cradle conforming to the plan details.
Class B bedding shall consist of a bed of granular material having a thickness
of at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the bottom of the pipe and extending up
around the pipe for a depth of not less than 30 percent of the pipe's vertical
outside diameter. The layer of bedding material shall be shaped to fit the pipe
for at least 10 percent of the pipe's vertical diameter and shall have recesses
shaped to receive the bell of bell and spigot pipe. The bedding material shall
be sand or selected sandy soil, all of which passes a 3/8 inch (9 mm) sieve and
not more than 10 percent of which passes a No. 200 (0.075 mm) sieve.
Class C bedding shall consist of bedding the pipe in its natural foundation to
a depth of not less than 10 percent of the pipe's vertical outside diameter. The
bed shall be shaped to fit the pipe and shall have recesses shaped to receive the
bell of bell and spigot pipe.
701-3.3 LAYING PIPE. The pipe laying shall begin at the lowest point of the
trench and proceed upgrade. The lower segment of the pipe shall be in contact
with the bedding throughout its full length. Bell or groove ends of rigid pipes
shall be placed facing upgrade.
Paved or partially lined pipe shall be placed so that the longitudinal center
line of the paved segment coincides with the flow line.
701-3.4 JOINING PIPE. Joints shall be made with (1) portland cement mortar, (2)
portland cement grout, (3) rubber gaskets, (4) oakum and mortar, (5) oakum and
joint compound, or (6) plastic gaskets.
Mortar joints shall be made with an excess of mortar to form a continuous bead
around the outside of the pipe and shall be finished smooth on the inside. Molds
or runners shall be used for grouted joints in order to retain the poured grout.
Rubber ring gaskets shall be installed to form a flexible watertight seal. Where
oakum is used, the joint shall be caulked with the oakum and then sealed with
joint compound or mortar.
a. Concrete Pipe. Concrete pipe may be either bell and spigot or tongue
and groove. The method of joining pipe sections shall be such that the ends are
fully entered and the inner surfaces are reasonably flush and even. Joints shall
be thoroughly wetted before mortar or grout is applied.
701-3.5 BACKFILLING. Pipes shall be inspected before any backfill is placed;
any pipes found to be out of alignment, unduly settled, or damaged shall be
removed and relaid or replaced at the Contractor's expense.
Material for backfill shall be fine, readily compatible soil, or granular
material selected from the excavation or a source of the Contractor's choosing.
It shall not contain frozen lumps, stones that would be retained on a 2-inch
PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS
D-701-2
5910861-000
(50.0 mm) sieve, chunks of highly plastic clay, or other objectionable material.
No less than 95 percent of a granular backfill material shall pass through a 1/2
inch (12 mm) sieve, and no less than 95 percent of it shall be retained on a No.
4 (4.75 mm) sieve.
When the top of the pipe is even with or below the top of the trench, the
backfill shall be compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) on both
sides of the pipe and shall be brought up one foot (30 em) above the top of the
pipe or to natural ground level, whichever is greater. Care shall be exercised
to thoroughly compact the backfill material under the haunches of the pipe.
Material shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe.
When the top of the pipe is above the top of the trench, the backfill shall be
compacted in layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm) and shall be brought up
evenly on both sides of the pipe to 1 foot (30 em) above the top of the pipe.
The width of backfill on each side of the pipe for the portion above the top of
the trench shall be equal to twice the pipe's diameter of 12 feet (3.5 m),
whichever is less.
All backfill shall be compacted to the density required under Division 2, Section
02220 - BUILDING EARTHWORK.
MBTHOD OF MBASURBMBNT
701-4.1 The length of pipe shall be measured in linear feet (meters) of pipe in
place, completed, and approved. It shall be measured along the centerline of the
pipe from end or inside face of structure to the end or inside face of structure,
whichever is applicable. The several classes, types and size shall be measured
separately. All fittings shall be included in the footage as typical pipe
sections in the pipe being measured.
701-4.2 The volume of concrete for pipe cradles to be paid for shall be the
number of cubic yards (cubic meters) of concrete which is completed in place and
accepted.
701-4.3 The volume of rock to be paid for shall be the number of cubic yards
(cubic meters) of rock excavated. No payment shall be made for the cushion
material placed for the bed of the pipe.
ASTM C 76
ASTM C 94
ASTM C 144
ASTM C 150
ASTM C 443
ASTM C 789
ASTM C 850
ASTM D 1056
ASTM D 1190
MATERIAL REQUIRBMBRTS
Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe
Ready Mixed Concrete
Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
Portland Cement
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe,
Using Rubber Gaskets
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts,
Storm Drains, and Sewers
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts,
Storm Drains, and Sewers with Less than 2 feet of Cover
Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber
Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot Poured Elastic Type
PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS
D-701-3
AASHTO M 198
5910861-000
Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and CuI vert Pipe
Using Flexible Watertight Gaskets
END ITEM D-701
PIPE FOR STORM DRAINS AND CULVERTS
D-701-4
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
ITEM D-751 MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES
DESCRIPTION
751-1.1 This item shall consist of construction of manholes, catch basins,
inlets, and inspection holes, in accordance with these specifications, at the
specified locations and conforming to the lines, grades, and dimensions shown on
the plans or required by the RPR.
MATERIALS
751-2.1 CONCRETE. Plain and reinforced concrete used in structures, connections
of pipes with structures, and the support of structures or frames shall conform
to the requirements of Division 3, Section 03010 - CONCRETE WORK.
751-2.2 PRECAST CONCRETE PIPE MANHOLE RINGS. Precast concrete pipe manhole
rings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 478. Unless otherwise
specified, the risers and offset cone sections shall have an inside diameter of
not less than 36 inches (90 em) nor more than 48 inches (120 em) .
751-2.3 FRAMES, COVERS, AND GRATES. The castings shall conform to one of the
following requirements:
a. Gray iron castings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class
30B and 35B.
b. Malleable iron castings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 47.
c. Steel castings shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 27.
d. Structural steel for grates and frames shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A 283, Grade D.
e. Ductile iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A
536.
All castings or structural steel units shall conform to the dimensions shown on
the plans and shall be designed to support the loadings specified.
Each frame and cover or grate unit shall be provided with fastening members to
prevent it from being dislodged by traffic but which will allow easy removal for
access to the structure.
All castings shall be thoroughly cleaned and given two coats of approved
bituminous paint. After fabrication, structural steel units shall be galvanized
to meet the requirements of ASTM A 123.
CONSTRUCTION MBTHODS
751-3.1 UNCLASSIFIED BXCA~TION.
a. The Contractor shall do all excavation for structures and structure
footings to the lines and grades or elevations, shown on the plans, or as staked
by the RPR. The excavation shall be of sufficient size to permit the placing of
the full width and length of the structure or structure footings shown. The
elevations of the bottoms of footings, as shown on the plans, shall be considered
MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES
D-751-1
5910861-000
as approximately only; and the RPR may order, in writing, changes in dimensions
or elevations of footings necessary to secure a satisfactory foundation.
b. Boulders, logs, or any other objectionable material encountered in
excavation shall be removed. All rock or other hard foundation material shall
be cleaned of all loose material and cut to a firm surface either level, stepped,
or serrated, as directed by the RPR. All seams or crevices shall be cleaned out
and grouted. All loose and disintegrated rock and thin strata shall be removed.
When concrete is to rest on a surface other than rock, special care shall be
taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation, and excavation to final grade
shall not be made until just before the concrete or reinforcing is to be placed.
c. The Contractor shall do all bracing, sheathing, or shoring necessary
to implement and protect the excavation and the structure as required for safety
or conformance to governing laws. The cost of bracing, sheathing, or shoring
shall be included in the unit price bid for the structure.
d. Unless otherwise provided, bracing, sheathing, or shoring involved in
the construction of this item shall be removed by the Contractor after the
completion of the structure. Removal shall be effected in a manner which will
not disturb or mar finished masonry. The cost of removal shall be included in
the unit price bid for the structure.
e. After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall notify the RPR
to that effect; and concrete or reinforcing steel shall be placed after the RPR
has approved the depth of the excavation and the character of the foundation
material.
751-3.2 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. Concrete structures shall be built on prepared
foundations, conforming to the dimensions and form indicated on the plans. The
construction shall conform to the requirements specified in Item P-610. Any
reinforcement required shall be placed as indicated on the plans and shall be
approved by the RPR before the concrete is poured.
All invert channels shall be constructed and shaped accurately so as to be
smooth, uniform, and cause minimum resistance to flowing water. The interior
bottom shall be sloped downward toward the outlet.
751-3.3 PRECAST CONCRETE PIPE STRUCTURES. Precast concrete pipe structures
shall be constructed on prepared or previously placed slab foundations and shall
conform to the dimensions and locations shown on the plans. All precast concrete
pipe sections necessary to build a completed structure shall be furnished. The
different sections shall fit together readily, and all jointing and connections
shall be cemented with mortar. The top of the upper precast concrete pipe member
shall be suitably formed and dimensioned to receive the metal frame and cover or
grate, or other cap, as required. provision shall be made for any connections
for lateral pipe, including drops and leads that may be installed in the
structure. The flow lines shall be smooth, uniform, and cause minimum resistance
to flow. The metal steps which are embedded or built into the side walls shall
be aligned and placed at vertical intervals of 12 inches (300 mm). When a metal
ladder replaces the steps, it shall be securely fastened into position.
751-3.4 INLET AND OOTLET PIPES. Inlet and outlet pipes shall extend through the
walls of the structures for a sufficient distance beyond the outside surface to
allow for connections but shall be cut off flush with the wall on the inside
surface, unless otherwise directed. For concrete or brick structures, the mortar
shall be placed around these pipes so as to form a tight, neat connection.
751- 3 .5 PLACBMBN'l' AND TRBA'l'MBRT OF CASTINGS, FRAMES, AND FITl'INGS . All
castings, frames, and fittings shall be placed in the positions indicated on the
plans or as directed by the RPR, and shall be set true to line and to correct
elevation. If frames or fittings are to be set in concrete or cement mortar, all
MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES
D-751-2
5910861-000
anchors or bolts shall be in place and position before the concrete or mortar is
placed. The unit shall not be disturbed until the mortar or concrete has set.
When frames or fittings are to be placed upon previously constructed masonry, the
bearing surface or masonry shall be brought true to line and grade and shall
present an even bearing surface in order that the entire face or back of the unit
will come in contact with the masonry. The unit shall be set in mortar beds and
anchored to the masonry as indicated on the plans or as directed and approved by
the RPR. All units shall set firm and secure.
After the frames or fittings have been set in final position and the concrete or
mortar has been allowed to harden for 7 days, then the grates or covers shall be
placed and fastened down.
751-3.6 BACKFILLING.
a. After a structure has been completed, the area around it shall be
filled with approved material, in horizontal layers not to exceed 8 inches (200
mm) in loose depth, and compacted to the density required in Division 2, Section
02220 - BUILDING EARTHWORK. Each layer shall be deposited all around the
structure to approximately the same elevation. The top of the fill shall meet
the elevation shown on the plans or as directed by the RPR.
b. Backfilling shall not be placed against any structure until permission
is given by the RPR. In the case of concrete, such permission shall not be given
until the concrete has been in place 7 days, or until tests made by the
laboratory under supervision of the RPR establish that the concrete has attained
sufficient strength to provide a factor of safety against damage or strain in
withstanding any pressure created by the backfill or the methods used in placing
it.
C. Backfill shall not be measured for direct payment. Performance of this
work shall be considered as a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor covered
under the contract unit price for the structure involved.
751-3.7 CLEANING AND RESTORATION OF SITE. After the backfill is completed, the
Contractor shall dispose of all surplus material, dirt, and rubbish from the
site. Surplus dirt may be deposited in embankments, shoulders, or as ordered by
the RPR. The Contractor shall restore all disturbed areas to their original
condition.
After all work is completed, the Contractor shall remove all tools and equipment,
leaving the entire site free, clear, and in good condition.
MBTHOD OF MBASURBMBNT
751-4.1 Manholes, catch basins, inlets, and inspection holes shall be measured
by the unit.
MATERIAL REQUIRBMBRT
ASTM A 27
Mild to Medium-Strength Carbon-Steel Castings for
General Application
Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 47
ASTM A 48
Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 123
zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated
from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates,
Bars and Strip
MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES
D-751-3
5910861-000
ASTM A 283
Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel
Plates, Shapes, and Bars
ASTM A 536
Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM C 32
Sewer and Manhole Brick
ASTM C 150
Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
Portland Cement
ASTM C 144
AASHTO M 36
zinc Coated (Galvanized) Corrugated Iron or Steel
Culverts and Underdrains
END OF ITEM D-751
MANHOLES, CATCH BASINS, INLETS AND INSPECTION HOLES
D-751-4
,. ,>.~~"..w~""""","," "",~"""""'.'~M>i.;..;.",<-...,.''''',,., "',." .. ,
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 03010 - CORCRETB
WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All concrete work shown is governed by this section. Concrete
strength not otherwise designated shall be 4,000 psi, as determined
by the use of ASTM C31 and C39.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI Manual 315
"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent
bars, arrangement of reinforcement. Show location of planned
construction joints.
B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data,
specifications with application and installation instructions for
proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, bonding
agents, waterstops, joint systems, curing and sealing compounds,
chemical hardeners and dry shake finish materials.
C. Mix Design Test Reports: Submit proportions and testing facility
reports for each proposed mix. Tests for mixes to be placed by
pumping shall be made on samples from discharge end of similar
pumping equipment. The submittal shall demonstrate compliance with
ACI 318 Chapter 5. Chloride ion content test results in accordance
with the requirements specified herein shall be included. Concrete
placed prior to approval of the mix shall be subject to removal and
replacement as directed by the Architect-Engineer.
D. Field Test Reports: The independent testing laboratory will provide
reports as described herein.
1. Field test results will be reported in writing to the
Architect-Engineer and Contractor on the same day that tests
are made.
2. Reports of compressive strength tests will contain the project
title and AEP file number, date of concrete placement, name of
Contractor, name of concrete supplier and truck number, name
of concrete testing service, concrete mix number, location of
concrete batch in the structure, batch time, placement time,
quantity of any added water, slump, design and actual
compressive strength and type of break for both 7-day tests
and 28-day tests.
3. If core tests become necessary, the core test results will
include the project identification name and number, date, name
of Contractor, name of concrete testing service, location of
test core in structure, concrete mix number represented by
core sample, nominal maximum size aggregate, design
compressive strength, compression breaking strength and type
of break (corrected for length-diameter ratio, direction of
applied load to core with respect to horizontal plan of the
CONCRETE WORK
03010-1
5910861-000
concrete as placed and the moisture condition of the core at
time of testing.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following
codes, specifications and standards, except as otherwise shown or
specified. Where provisions of these codes and standards are in
conflict with the building code in force for this project, the
building code shall govern.
1.
ACI 301 "Specifications
Buildings."
for Structural
Concrete
for
2. ACI 302 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."
3. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."
4 .
ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring,
Transporting and Placing Concrete."
Mixing,
5. ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection."
6. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork."
7 . ACI 117 "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials."
8. AWS D1.4-79 "Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel."
9. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice."
B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of
concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements,
including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient
concrete as directed by the Architect-Engineer. Should construction
or cold joints occur in an unapproved location or cylinders and
cores indicate unacceptable concrete, load testing or removal and
replacement of the concrete may be required as directed by the
Architect-Engineer at no cost to the Owner.
C. Design Mix: The Contractor shall employ, at his own expense, or
obtain reports from a testing laboratory experienced in testing of
concrete materials and mixes to perform material evaluation tests
for the design of concrete mixes. Testing agency shall meet the
requirements of ASTM E329.
D. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Specified in PART 3.
1. The Owner will employ an independent testing laboratory
acceptable to the Architect-Engineer to perform concrete tests
during construction.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for payment at his own
expense to the independent testing laboratory for the testing
of deficient concrete placed in the completed structure and
strength tests associated with form removal.
E. Welding of reinforcing steel shall not be permitted.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-2
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete:
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct formwork for
exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal-framed plywood
faced or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide
continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in
largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to
conform to j oint system shown on drawings. Provide form
material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of
newly-placed concrete without bow or deflection.
2. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B
(Concrete Form) Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade or better,
mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible
trademark of an approved inspection agency.
B. Form for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surface which
will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal
or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least
two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating
compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely affect
concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces to be cured with water or curing compound.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bar: ASTM A615 (Sl), Grade 60.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, plain, cold-drawn, steel.
C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185, welded steel wire fabric.
D. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497.
E. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement
including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing,
supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in
place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI
recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Wood, clay brick and
other devices will not be acceptable.
1. Slabs-On-Grade: Use supports or horizontal runners where
wetted base material will not support chair legs.
2. Exposed-To-View Concrete Surfaces: Where legs of supports are
in contact with forms, provide supports with legs which are
hot-dip galvanized or plastic protected or stainless steel
protected.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, as follows:
1. Provide Type II cement.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-3
5910861-000
2 . Use only one brand of cement for each required type throughout
the project, unless otherwise accepted by the
Architect-Engineer.
B. Aggregates:
1. General: Maximum aggregate size shall not be larger than 1/5
of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, 1/3 of the
depths of slabs, nor 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between
indi vidual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars. Provide
aggregates from one source of supply to ensure uniformity in
color, size and shape.
2. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33, and as herein specified.
Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but which have
shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of
adequate strength and durability may by used when acceptable
to the Architect-Engineer.
a. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from
loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances.
b. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate
containing no clay, mud, loam, or foreign matter, as
follows:
1) Crusl;1ed stone, processed from natural rock or
stone.
2) Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of
pit or bank run gravel is not permitted.
3) Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C330.
C. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
D. Admixtures: Provide admixtures produced by established reputable
manufacturers and use in compliance with the manufacturer's printed
directions. Do not use admixtures which have not been incorporated
and tested in accepted mixes unless otherwise authorized in writing
by the Architect-Engineer.
1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.
2. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A.
3. Set-Control Admixture: ASTM C494, as follows:
a. Type D, Water-reducing and Retarding.
b. Type E, water-reducing and Accelerating.
4. Fly Ash: Not Permitted.
5. Chloride Ions: Do not use calcium chloride in concrete unless
otherwise authorized in writing by the Architect-Engineer. Do
not use admixtures containing chloride ions in excess of
amount found in municipal potable water.
6. Superplasticizer: ASTM C494, Type F, not containing more
chloride ions than potable water.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-4
5910861-000
2.4 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Waterstops: Provide flat, dumbbell type or centerbulb type
waterstops at construction joints and other joints as shown. Size
to suit joints.
1. Rubber or PVC waterstops, at Contractor's option, with rubber
units complying with Corps of Engineers CRD-C513 and PVC units
complying with CRD-C572.
B. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Fiber type conforming to ASTM
D1751 or Cork, ASTM D1752, Type II.
C. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7.
D. Moisture Barrier: See Division 7.
E. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of
magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting
agent, containing not less than 2 pounds of fluosilicates per gal.
F. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or
crushed emery, as abrasive aggregate for nonslip finish with emery
aggregate containing not less than 40 percent aluminum oxide and not
less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is
factory-graded, packaged, rust-proofed and nonglazing, and is
unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials.
G. Nonshrink Grout: As specified in Section 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL.
H. Curing Materials:
1. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,
weighing approximately 9 ounces per square yard, complying
with AASHTO M 182, Class 3.
2.
Moisture-Retaining Cover:
with ASTM Cl71.
One of the following, complying
a. Waterproof paper.
b. Polyethylene film.
c. Polyethylene-coated burlap.
3. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I. Fully
dissipating type compatible with all subsequently applied
sealers, finishes, and other materials.
I. Repair Materials: Proprietary systems recommended by the
manufacturer for the specific applications required. Examples are
as follows:
1. Bonding Compound: Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod LPL.
2. Patching Mortar: Sikatop III and 122.
3. Injection Adhesive: Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-5
5910861-000
2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
A. General:
1. All concrete shall contain a minimum of 5-1/2 sacks of cement
per cubic yard. Tremie concrete, where required, shall
contain a minimum of seven sacks of cement per cubic yard.
2. All concrete not specifically designated shall be proportioned
for a compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch at
28 days of age.
3. Water-Cement Ratio: All concrete shall have a maximum
water-cement ratio of 0.40.
4. All concrete shall have a maximum chloride content of 0.70
pounds per cubic yard.
B. Slump Limits:
Caissons
Slump in Inches
Desicm Tolerance
3-1/2 .:t1 - 1/2
2-1/2 .:t1-1/2
4 .:t1
2 .:t1
4-1/2 .:t1-1/2
1-1/2 .:t1/2
5-1/2 .:t2-1/2
9 .:t1
7 .:t1
Tvoe of Construction
Reinforced foundation walls
and footing
Plain footings and
substructure walls
Slabs, joists and beams
Heavy mass construction
Reinforced walls and columns
Pavements
Tremie
Masonry Cell fill
1. Where use of superplasticizer is permitted, the slump shall be
no greater than the design slump prior to addition of the
admixture, and no greater than the supplier's recommendations,
as indicated on the approved mix design submittal, after
addition of the admixture.
2. For pump placement of concrete the slump shall be in
accordance with the above limits at point of discharge. At
the point of entry the slump shall not exceed the design slump
plus the tolerance by more than 1 inch.
C. proportion mixes by either trial mixture or field experience
methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each
class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1 for normal
weight concrete and ACI 211.2 for structural lightweight concrete.
Mix design proportioning shall be in accordance with ACI 318 Chapter
5 including all required documentation.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-6
5910861-000
D. Admixtures:
1. Use air-entraining admixture in all concrete, unless otherwise
indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer's
prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of
placement having 4 -1/2 percent entrained air with tolerance in
either direction from this optimum of 1-1/2 percent for normal
weight concrete and 5-1/2 percent i1-1/2 percent for
lightweight concrete. Provide additional entrained air for
small aggregate concrete where required for conformance with
ACI 318 Table 4.1.1.
2. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer
for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing and
approved in the mix design for the work. Adjust quantities
and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control.
3. Where required to facilitate placement due to congestion or
low design slump requirements concrete shall contain a high
range, water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) batched,
placed, finished and cured in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions.
The Manufacturer's Representative shall be present for each
important pour to provide necessary advice and supervision.
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be
requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job
conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant;
at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the
Architect-Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix designs
and strength results shall be submitted to and accepted by the
ArChitect-Engineer before using in the work.
2 . 6 PUMP PLACEMENT EQUIPMENT
A. Minimum inside diameter of the pipe line shall be at least 3 times
the maximum coarse aggregate size.
B. Aluminum pipe shall not be used.
C. Pump shall have an actual field service demonstrated capacity of
placing not less than 25 cubic yards per hour.
D. Standby placement capability equal to that being used shall be
available on the job site at all times during pumping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMS
A. Design: Design of formwork, including shoring and reshoring, for
structural stability and sufficiency is the Contractor's
responsibility. Refer to Paragraph 3.10 - Shores and Supports
herein. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to
support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such
loads can be supported by the concrete structure.
B.
Construction:
shapes, lines
Construct forms complying with ACI 347,
and dimensions shown, and to obtain
to sizes,
accurate
CONCRETE WORK
03010-7
5910861-000
alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished
structures. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, recesses,
moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds,
bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in
work. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too
steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Use selected
materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and
provide back-up joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.
C. provisions for Removal: Fabricate forms for easy removal without
hammering or prying against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush
plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete
surfaces. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, and
recesses to prevent swelling and for easy removal.
D. Accessibility: Provide temporary openings where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before
concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace
temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of
concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at
inconspicuous locations.
E. Edges: Chamfer exposed corners and edges 3/4 inches, unless
otherwise noted, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or
snapoff metal form ties, designated to prevent from deflection, and
to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
1. Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining
within concrete after removal is at least 1-1/2 inch inside
concrete.
2. Unless otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave
holes larger than I-inch diameter in concrete surface.
G. provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork
to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of
opening, recesses and chases from trades providing such items.
Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adj acent
surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or
other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after
concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
I. Preparation of Form Surfaces:
1. Coat and contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating
compound before reinforcement is placed.
2. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type,
and in amount, and under conditions of the form-coating
compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess
form-coating material to accumulate in the forms or to come
into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh
concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with
manufacturer's instructions.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-8
5910861-000
3. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative form
oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained
formwork is not acceptable.
J. Slab on Grade: Coordinate with items installed by other trades.
Verify compliance with applicable Division 2 requirements for
subgrade preparation and maintenance prior to placement of
reinforcing and concrete.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. References: Comply with the specified codes and standards, and
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for
"Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports, and as herein specified.
B. preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,
hardened concrete paste, earth, ice, and other materials which
reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
C. Support: Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement
against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete
placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal
chair, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. Set
wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed
concrete surfaces. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 inches
beyond the last leg of continuous bar support. Do not use supports
as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar
construction loads.
D. Coverage: Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum
coverages for concrete protection.
E. Splices: Provide standard reinforcement splices by lapping ends,
placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tieing.
1. Mechanical butt splicing, using exothermic welding processes
and high-strength steel sleeves which develop the same values
of strength, may be used in lieu of lap splices, at
Contractor's option. Comply with manufacturer's directions of
preparation of bars and installation procedures.
3.3 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints, which
are not shown on the drawings, so as not to impair the strength and
appearance of the structure, as acceptable to the
Architect-Engineer.
1. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inch deep in all construction
joints in walls, slabs, beams and between walls and footings;
accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for
slabs.
2. Place construction joints perpendicular to the main
reinforcement. Continue all reinforcement across construction
joints.
B. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as shown on
the drawings. Install waterstops to form a continuous diaphragm in
each joint. Make provisions to support and protect waterstops
during the progress of the work. Fabricate field joints in
CONCRETE WORK
03010-9
5910861-000
waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
Protect waterstop material from damage where it protrudes from any
point.
C. Expansion Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Construct isolation joints in
slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground and
vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Construction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on Ground: Provide
contraction joints in slabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns as
shown. Use saw cuts or approved inserts creating a plane of 1/4
slab thickness. Saw cuts shall be made as soon as possible after
final finishing without dislodging the aggregate, but in no case
later than 12 hours after placement. Form contraction joints by
inserting an approved plastic strip into the fresh concrete using
manufacturer's standard straightedge setting tool until the top
surface of the strip is flush with the slab surface. Prior to the
concrete being floated, remove the top strip.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other
embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or
supported by, cast - in-place concrete. Use templates, setting
drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by
suppliers of the items to be attached.
B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads
and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the required
elevations and contours in the finished slab surface. Provide and
secure units sufficiently strong to support the types of screed
strips by the use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting
type screeds.
3.5 CONCRETE MIXING
A. General: Mix materials in an acceptable drum type batch machine
mixer. For mixers of one cubic yard, or smaller capacity, continue
mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after all
ingredients are in the mixer, before any part of the batch is
released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cubic yard,
increase the minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for
each additional cubic yard, or fraction thereof. Provide a batch
ticket for each batch discharged and used in the work, indicating
the project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix
time, quantity, and amount of water introduced.
B. Job-Site Mixing: This method is acceptable only for small
quantities of concrete.
C. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94 or
ASTM C685, and as herein specified.
1. During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid
setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in
ASTM C94 may be required. When the air temperature is between
85 degrees F and 90 degrees F, reduce the mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air
temperature is above 90 degrees F, reduce the mixing and
delivery time to 60 minutes.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-10
5910861-000
2. No additional water shall be added to concrete without the
approval of the Architect-Engineer. Should additional water
be required to obtain a slump as specified in this section for
the type of concrete, the Contractor shall perform slump tests
in accordance with ASTM C143 to determine the actual slump of
the concrete in the mixer. The Contractor may then add water,
but in no case shall the additional water exceed three percent
of the mix-design water content, nor shall the slump of the
mix exceed the maximum slump specified for the type concrete.
Slump tests and the addition of water to the mixer shall be
completed within 15 minutes of the arrival of the mixer at the
site. Additional water shall not be added to the mix after
the mixer has been on the site longer than 15 minutes. Where
use of a superplasticizer is permitted, redosage with a high
range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) to maintain
slump during the placing operation may be done only with prior
approval of the supplier as to method and procedure.
3. A delivery ticket showing truck number, date, and time that
mixing was started shall be given to the Contractor's
superintendent at the job site before placing the concrete
from the truck mixer. At the job site the Contractor's
superintendent shall note on the delivery ticket the time of
completion of the concrete placement from the truck and the
general area of the structure in which the concrete was
placed. A complete file of all delivery tickets shall be
maintained and kept available at the job site until completion
of the project.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. General: Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
B. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and
complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to
be embedded or cast - in. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately
before placing concrete where form coatings are not used.
Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers
with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
C. Monoli thic Placement: Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of
such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has
hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or places of
weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed
continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified.
Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to
avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Maintain
reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement
operation.
D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal
layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined
cold joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each
layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use
equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in
accordance with the recommended practices of ACI 309, to suit
the type of concrete and project conditions. Lower frequency
vibrators may be used with authorized 8 inch or greater slump
concrete.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-11
5910861-000
2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms.
Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced
locations not farther than the visible effectiveness of the
machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate the placed
layer of concrete and at least 6 inches into the preceding
layer. At each insertion limit the duration of vibration to
the time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete
embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without
causing segregation of the mix.
E. Placing Concrete Slabs:
1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous
operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the
placing of a panel or section is completed.
2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge
and strike-off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the
surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle
water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab
surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
F. Pump Placement:
1. Pump lines shall be operated on decks in a fashion that will
not damage, depress, or displace reinforcing steel already in
place. Use hangers, trestles, or brackets, where necessary,
to prevent damage or displacement of forms or reinforcing.
2. Lines from pump to the placing area shall contain a minimum
number of bends.
3. When short time delays occur because of concrete delivery,
form repairs, or other factors, pump shall be operated slowly
to and fro to keep concrete in motion.
G. Cold Weather Placing:
1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength
which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein
specified. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected
to fall below 40 degrees F, uniformly heat all water and
aggregates before mixing as required to obtain a concrete
mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F, and not
more than 80 degrees F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or
snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade
containing frozen materials.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials
containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless
otherwise accepted in mix designs.
H. Hot Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would
seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place
concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.
1. Wet forms thoroughly before placing concrete.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-12
5910861-000
2. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in
mix designs.
3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Finish of Formed Surfaces:
1. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not
exposed-to-view in the finish work or covered by other
construction, unless otherwise indicated. This 1S the
concrete surface, having the texture imparted by the form
facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas
repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding
1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
2 . Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces
exposed-to-view, or that are to be covered with a coating
material applied directly to the concrete, or a covering
material bonded to the concrete, such as waterproofing,
dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is the
as - cast concrete surface as obtained wi th selected form facing
material, arranged orderly and symmetrically wi th a minimum of
seams. Repair and patch defective areas and form tie holes
with all fins or other projections completely removed and
smoothed immediately after removal and, for form work not
supporting weight of concrete, no later than 72 hours after
placement.
3. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to
scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form
finish treatment, not later than the day after form removal.
Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or
other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced.
Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the
rubbing process.
4. Grout Cleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to
scheduled concrete surfaces which have received smooth form
finish treatment.
a. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine
sand by volume, and mix with water to the consistency of
thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white
portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so
that the final color of dry grout will closely match
adjacent surfaces using an approved bonding agent.
b. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout
immediately to coat surfaces and fill small holes.
Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean
burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours
after rubbing.
B. Finish of Unformed Surfaces:
1. Unformed Surfaces Related to Formed Surfaces. At tops of
walls, horizontal offsets and similar unformed surfaces
occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and
finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces.
Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly
across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise shown.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-13
5910861-000
2. Monolithic Slab Finishes: Water shall not be applied during
finishing operations.
a. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab
surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or
mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo,
and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring
material, and as otherwise shown on drawings. After
placing slabs, plane surface to a tolerance so that
depressions between high spots do not exceed 1/2 inch
under a 1 foot straightedge. Slope surfaces uniformly
to drains where required. After leveling, roughen
surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or
rakes.
b. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab
surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other
finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces
which are to be covered with membrane or elastic
waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sandbed
terrazzo, and as otherwise shown on drawings or in
schedules. After screeding and consolidating concrete
slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating.
Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or
when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit
operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate
surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if
area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and
level surface plane so that depressions between high
spots do not exceed 5/16 inch under a 10-foot
straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after
leaving, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular
texture.
c. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab
surfaces that are to be exposed-to-view, unless broom
finish is required or as otherwise shown, and slab
surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring,
paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. After
floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a
power driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface
produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over
surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final
hand-troweling to produce surface free of trowel marks,
uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface
plane tolerance so that depression between high spots do
not exceed 3/16 inch under a 10-foot straightedge.
Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph
through applied floor covering system.
d. NonSlip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to
exterior concrete platforms, steps, sidewalks, and
ramps, and elsewhere as shown on drawings or in
schedules. Immediately after float finishing, slightly
roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle
broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Texture
shall be approved by Architect-Engineer from sample
panels.
e.
Chemical-Hardener Finish:
finish to interior concrete
Apply chemical-hardener
floors where shown on
CONCRETE WORK
03010-14
5910861-000
drawings or in schedules. Apply liquid
chemical-hardener after complete curing and drying of
the concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with
water, and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3 strength;
second coat, 1/2 strength; third coat, 2/3 strength.
Evenly apply each coat, and allow 24 hours for drying
between coats.
1)
Apply proprietary
accordance with
instructions.
chemical-hardeners, in
manufacturer's printed
2) After final coat of chemical-hardener solution is
applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by
scrubbing and mopping with water.
f. Nonslip Aggregate Finish: When specifically indicated
on the drawings or in schedules, apply nonslip aggregate
finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps, and
elsewhere as shown or scheduled.
1) After completion of float finishing, and before
starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25
pounds of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100
square feet of surface. Tamp aggregate flush
wi th surface using a steel trowel, but do not
force the nonslip aggregate particles below
surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply
trowel finishing as herein specified.
2) After curing, lightly work the surface with a
steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water
to expose the nonslip aggregate.
3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and
excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a
relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for
hydration of cement and proper hardening.
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared
from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Continue
curing for at least 7 days for concrete containing Type 1
cement and 14 days for concrete containing Type II cement.
Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid
rapid drying at end of curing period.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing, by
moisture-retaining cover curing, by membrane curing, and by
combinations thereof, as herein specified.
1. Provide moist curing by following methods:
a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with
water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive
cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and
keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to
CONCRETE WORK
03010-15
5910861-000
provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4-
inch lap over adj acent absorptive covers. Use Material
that will not stain concrete surface.
2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover concrete
surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,
placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped
at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.
Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period
using cover material and waterproof tape.
3. Provide membrane curing as follows:
a. Apply compound uniformly in continuous operation by
power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Recoat areas which are subjected to heavy
rainfall within 3 hours after initial application.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during
curing period.
3.9 SHORES AND SUPPORTS
A. Design: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory
construction, and as herein specified. Contractor shall efigage the
services of a professional structural engineer to design shoring and
reshoring and prepare and seal drawings for shoring and reshoring.
Engineer shall be registered in the state where the project is
located.
B. Reshoring: Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid
damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate
reshoring to safely support the work without excessive stress or
deflection.
C. Duration: Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing
upper tier, and longer if required, until the concrete has attained
its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to construction
operations have been removed.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Nonsupporting: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as
sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may
be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F
for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is
sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and
provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
B. Supporting: Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam
soffits, joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be
removed in less than 14 days or until concrete has attained two
thirds design compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential
compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured
specimens representative of concrete location or members.
C. Facing Material: Form facing material may be removed 4 days after
placement, only if shores and other vertical supports have been
arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening
or disturbing shores and supports.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-16
5910861-000
3.11 REUSE OF FORMS
A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the work. Split,
frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing material will
not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to
concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork.
B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement,
thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten
forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.
Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces.
3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures
for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or
directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and
cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or
required to complete work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping
forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to
a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations
slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment
bases and foundations, as specified or shown on drawings. Set
anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct
elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of the
manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads
and landings and associated items. Cast - in safety inserts and
accessories as shown on drawings. Screed, tamp and finish concrete
surfaces as specified or scheduled.
E. Nonshrink Grout:
1. Equipment bases, and other locations noted on the structural
drawings, shall be grouted with nonshrink grout.
2. Exposed grout shall be the nonmetallic type.
F. Provide precast splash blocks as described on drawings.
3.13 CONCRETE REPAIRS
A. General:
1. Patching defective areas will be permitted only when
Architect-Engineer rules that structural adequacy of the
concrete is not endangered and the overall appearance of the
work is not materially affected.
2. A proprietary bonding agent, repair mortars, and adhesives may
be required, at no extra cost to the Owner to permit patching
in lieu of removal and replacement of the defective area.
B. Structural Repair of Defective Areas: Provide drawings of as-built
conditions and proposed repair of defective areas for determination
by the Architect-Engineer of the structural acceptability of the
CONCRETE WORK
03010-17
5910861-000
proposal. Where structural repairs are permitted, use epoxy-based
mortar or epoxy adhesive. Do not proceed with repairs prior to
written approval by the Architect-Engineer.
C. Cosmetic Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete
having defective surfaces. Surface defects include color and
texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock
pockets, fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form
tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs
secured in place with bonding agent.
1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any
dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid
concrete, but, in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch.
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface.
Before placing mortar or proprietary patching compound,
thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brushcoat the area to
be patched with patching material or bonding agent if
required.
2. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar
will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at
inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and
strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
3 . Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain
defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete.
If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the
concrete.
D. Cosmetic Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such
as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and to verify surface plane to
tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and
high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to
drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness, using a
template having required slope.
1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which
adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects
include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or which
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced
sections regardless of width, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb,
rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after
concrete has cured at least 14 days.
3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately
after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting
out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary
patching compounds may be used when acceptable to the
Architect-Engineer.
4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes
not exceeding I-inch diameter, by cutting out and replacing
wi th fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete
with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at
least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces
CONCRETE WORK
03010-18
5910861-000
in contact with patching concrete, and apply bonding compound
as recommended by manufacturer. Place patching concrete after
the bonding compound has dried. Mix patching concrete of same
materials to provide concrete of the same type or class as
original concrete. Place, compact and finish to blend with
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in the same manner as
adjacent concrete.
5 . Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch
in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and
cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt and
loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply
the bonding compound. Place dry pack after the bonding
compound has dried. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part
portland cement to 2 -1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16
mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling
and placing. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to
match adj acent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist
for not less than 72 hours.
E. Repair methods not specified above may be allowed, subject to
acceptance by the Architect-Engineer.
3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Sampling and testing
for field quality control during the placement of concrete will
include the following:
1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except as modified for
slump to comply with ASTM C94. Sampling for pumped concrete
shall be at the discharge end of the pump.
2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test for each concrete load at point of
discharge; and one for each set of compressive strength test
specimens.
3. Air Content: ASTM C173, volumetric method for lightweight
concrete; ASTM C231 pressure method for normal weight
concrete; one for every other concrete load at point of
discharge, or when the indication of change requires.
4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40
degrees F and below, and when 80 degrees F and above; and each
time a set of compression test specimens are made.
5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31; one set of 4 standard
cylinders for each compressive strength. Cast and store
cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens and field-cured
test specimens as specified in ASTM C31.
6. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39; a compressive strength
test consists of the average of 2 specimens tested at each
required age. Obtain one set for each 100 cubic yards or
fraction thereof, of each mix design placed in any 1 day or
for each 5,000 square feet of surface area placed; 2 specimens
tested at 7 days; 2 specimens tested at 28 days.
7. Chloride content will be determined in accordance with FDOT's
Florida Method of Test FM 5-516. The frequency of chloride
content determinations will be not less than 1 test every 4
weeks. The first test for each class or mix of concrete will
CONCRETE WORK
03010-19
5910861-000
be performed before the first batch is placed. When 8
consecutive chloride content determinations are below 0.35
pound of chloride per cubic yard of concrete, the frequency of
testing may be decreased at the discretion of the Architect-
Engineer. When the source of any component material for the
concrete is changed including admixtures, a chloride content
determination test will be made immediately. The chloride
content will be determined as the average of 3 tests on
samples taken from the concrete. The range of results of the
3 tests will not exceed 0.08 pound of chloride per cubic yard
of concrete for a valid determination of chloride content.
When test results are outside the 0.08 pound of chloride per
cubic yard allowable range, an additional 3 tests will be run
until the test results are within the required range. Samples
may be obtained from representative concrete cylinders or
cores tested for compressive strength. However, if the
cylinders or cores have been exposed to a salt or aggressive
environment, the outer one-inch surface shall be discarded.
Test results obtained at the frequency provided above, shall
represent the amount of chloride per cubic yard in all
concrete placed subsequent to the immediate preceding test for
determination of chloride content.
Chloride content determination will be made and the test
results of chloride determinations will be certified to the
Architect-Engineer. The certification must show all pertinent
data. Properly executed certificates showing the chloride
content within the required limits will be required for
acceptance for all concrete controlled under these
specifications.
B. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests,
as directed by the Architect-Engineer, of in-place concrete when
test results or field observations indicate the presence of
deficient concrete in the structure. The testing service may
conduct tests to determine the strength and other characteristics of
the in-place concrete by compression tests on cored cylinders
complying with ASTM C42, or by load testing specified in ACI 318, or
other acceptable nondestructive testing methods. The Contractor
shall pay for tests conducted, and any other additional testing as
may be required for deficient concrete.
1. Core Testing: The concrete testing service will take cores
drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength
determination, complying with ASTM C42 and as follows.
a. Take at least 3 representative cores from each member or
area of suspect strength, from locations directed by the
Architect-Engineer.
b. Test cores in a saturated-surface-dry condition per ACI
318 if the concrete will be wet during the use of the
completed structure.
c. Test cores in an air-dry condition per ACI 318 if the
concrete will be dry at all times during use of the
completed structure.
d. Fill core holes solid with patching mortar and finish to
match adjacent surfaces.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-20
5910861-000
2. Conduct static load test and evaluation complying with ACI 318
if core tests are not sufficient to verify the strength of the
concrete structure, if the results of the core tests are
unsatisfactory, or if core tests are impracticable to obtain,
as directed by the Architect-Engineer.
3.15 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TEST
A. Acceptance Criteria: Strength-level of an individual class of
concrete in place shall be considered satisfactory if, on
laboratory-cured cylinders, both of the following requirements are
met.
1. The average of all sets of 3 consecutive compressive strength
tests equal or exceed the specified strength.
2. No individual compressive strength test falls below specified
strength by more than 500 psi.
B. Tests of Field-Cured Cylinders: Strength test of specimens cured
under field conditions will be performed if required by the
Architect-Engineer to check the adequacy of curing and protecting of
the concrete placed. Specimens will be molded by the field quality
control laboratory at the same time and from the same samples as the
laboratory cured specimens.
1. Provide improved means and procedures for protecting concrete
when the 28-day compressive strength of field-cured cylinders
is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured
cylinders.
2. When laboratory-cured cylinders strengths ar~ appreciably
higher than the minimum required compress1ve strength,
field-cured cylinder strengths need not exceed the required
strength by more than 500 psi even though the 85 percent
criterion is not met.
C. Failure to Meet Acceptance Criteria:
1. Failure to meet A.1. above may require improved curing methods
(as indicated by tests of field cured cylinders) or adjustment
of the concrete mix to achieve compliance.
2. Failure to meet A.2. above will render the concrete
represented by such tests to be considered deficient and
subject to additional testing.
D. Formed Concrete Dimension Tolerances:
1. Formed concrete having any dimension smaller or greater than
required, and outside the specified tolerance limits, will be
considered deficient in strength and subject to additional
testing as herein specified.
2. Formed concrete having any dimension greater than required
will be rejected if the appearance or function of the
structure is adversely affected, or if the larger dimensions
interfere with other construction. Repair, or remove and
replace rejected concrete as required to meet the construction
conditions. When permitted, accomplish the removal of
excessive material in a manner to maintain the strength of the
section without affecting function and appearance.
CONCRETE WORK
03010-21
5910861-000
E. Strength of Concrete Structures: Concrete is considered deficient
and the strength of the concrete structure in-place is considered
potentially jeopardized if concrete fails to comply with any of the
requirements which control the strength of structure, including the
following conditions:
1. Failure to meet compressive strength test requirements.
2. Concrete which differs from the required dimensions or
location in such a manner to reduce strength.
3. Void free placement.
4 . Monoli thic placement between approved construction joints with
no cold joints.
5.
Concrete subjected
particularly load
vibration.
to damaging mechanical
stresses, heavy shock,
disturbances,
and excessive
6. Poor workmanship and quality control likely to result in
deficient strength.
F. Acceptance Criteria for Core Tests: Strength of concrete for each
series of cores will be considered satisfactory if their average
compressive strength is at least 85 percent and no single core is
less than 75 percent of the 28-day required compressive strength.
G. Acceptance Criteria for Chloride Ion Tests: If test results of the
required testing indicates the chloride levels are within 0.05 pound
per cubic yard of the applicable maximum, or higher than the
applicable maximum, concrete production shall be suspended until
corrective measures are implemented. When tests indicate the
applicable maximum has been exceeded, the concrete exceeding the
applicable maximum will be rejected.
H. Defecti ve Work: Concrete work which does not conform to the
specified requirements, including strength, tolerances, and
finishes, shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense, without
extension of time therefor. The Contractor shall also be
responsible for the cost of corrections to any other work affected
by or resulting from corrections of the concrete work.
END OF SECTION 03010
CONCRETE WORK
03010-22
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGER TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 03455 - GLASS FIBER
REINFORCED PRECAST CORCRETB
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1S10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies glass fiber reinforced precast concrete units
including embedded hardware, loose connection hardware, and related
services for erection and installation. Units include:
1. Interior stair facings as shown on drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Samples representative of finished exposed face showing typical range
of color and texture and of appropriate thickness.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of units
including the following:
1. Unit shapes (elevations and sections) and dimensions.
2. Finishes.
3. Joint and connection details.
4. Size, location, and details of anchors.
5. Relationship to adjacent materials.
6. Description of loose, cast-in, and field-applied hardware.
D. Mix designs when requested by Architect.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm with a demonstrated capability to
produce precast products of quality and scope required for this
project and actively involved in production for at least 5 years.
Manufacturer must have sufficient production capacity to produce,
transport, and deliver required units without causing delay in the
work.
1. Units shall be equal to those manufactured by D.C. Kerckhoff
Company, Naples, Florida.
2. Manufacturer must be producer member of Cast Stone Institute
and/or participate in its Plant Certification Program.
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE
03455-1
5910861-000
B. Erector Qualifications: Regularly engaged for at least 5 years in
erection of architectural precast concrete units similar to those
required on this project.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Handling: Handle and transport units in a position
consistent with their shape and design in order to avoid excessive
stresses or damage.
1. Lift or support units only at points indicated on erection shop
drawings.
2. Place nonstaining resilient spacers of even thickness between
units.
3. Support units during shipment on nonstaining shock-absorbing
material.
4. Protect units from dirt and damage during handling and
transport.
B. Job-Site Storage: Store units to protect from contact with soil,
staining, and physical damage.
1. Store units with nonstaining resilient supports at same
positions as when transported.
2. Store units on firm, level, and smooth surfaces.
3. Place stored units so that identification marks are readily
accessible.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE
A. General: Produce precast units consisting of the following
materials.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I, natural color or white as
required to match approved finish.
1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use same
brand, type, and source of supply throughout production.
C. Sand: Washed and dried s i I ica or other acceptable material wi th
successful use in GFRC production meeting compositional requirements
of ASTM C144; all passing through No. 16 sieve.
D. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, except maximum size not to exceed 1/2
inch; clean, hard, strong, durable, inert, and free of staining or
deleterious materials.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Admixtures: ASTM C260 for air entrainment, ASTM C494 for chemical
admixtures, or ASTM C618 for fly ash or natural pozzolan admixtures;
at manufacturer's option. Do not use admixtures that contain more
than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE
03455-2
5910861-000
G. Coloring Agent: ASTM C979; ultraviolet and alkali resistant;
high-temperature stable; harmless to concrete set or strength.
1. Match color sample on file with Architect.
H. Glass Fiber: Specifically designed for compatibility with aggressive
alkaline environment of Portland cement-based composites, complying
with PCI-MNL-128.
2.2 ANCHORS AND SUBSYSTEMS
A. Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars: ASTM C36.
B. Cold Drawn Wire: ASTM A580, Type 304, Condition A.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304, Grade as required.
D. Carbon Steel Plate: ASTM A283, Grade as required.
E. Malleable Steel Castings: ASTM A47, Grade as required.
F. Carbon Steel Castings: ASTM A27, Grade 60-30.
G. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 or ASTM A325.
H. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard.
2 . 3 MIXES
A. General: Combine Portland cement, glass fibers, sand, and selected
admixtures in proper proportions to meet design requirements.
Provide nominal glass content of not less than 5 percent, average
yield strength of 900 psi, and ultimate strength not less than 2,500
psi.
B. Coloring Agent: Not to exceed 10 percent of cement weight.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Forms: Construct of rigid materials that will result in finished
product's conforming to profiles, dimensions, and tolerances
indicated. Use form release agent compatible with architectural
finish and joint sealants.
B. Dimensional Tolerances: Comply with PCI-MNL-117 "Manual for Quality
Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete
Products."
C. Finishes: Exposed face of units to match Architect's samples. Joint
marks, or other obvious defects on panel faces are not acceptable.
Finish shall be fine-grained texture similar to natural stone (Miami
Scagiola) with no bugholes.
D. Curing: Employ initial curing method that will ensure sufficient
strength for removing units from form.
E. Unit Identification: Mark each unit to correspond to identification
mark on shop drawings for unit identification.
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE
03455-3
5910861-000
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Establish quality control program for manufacturing units
to monitor glass content, unit weight of slurry, product physical
properties, anchor pull-off and shear strengths, and curing period
and conditions.
1. Testing of materials and inspection of production techniques are
responsibility of manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Erector Responsibility: Prior to installation of units, check
jOb-site dimensions affecting erection of units. Bring to
Contractor's attention any discrepancy between design dimensions and
field dimensions that could adversely affect installation. If
discrepancies do exist, do not proceed until corrected or until
installation requirements are modified as acceptable to Architect.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Lifting and Setting: Lift units at lifting points established by
manufacturer. Set units level, plumb, and square within allowable
tolerances.
B. Supports and Bracing: Provide temporary supports and bracing as
required to maintain position, stability, and alignment as units are
being permanently connected.
C. Fastening: Fasten units in place by bolting or welding, as indicated
on erection drawings.
D. Tolerances of Erected Units: Maintain erection tolerances for
locating units. For erection tolerances not listed, comply with
requirements of PCI-MNL-117.
1. Warpage: Maximum permissible warpage of one corner out of plane
with other three; 1/16 inch per ft. distance from nearest
corner, or 1/4 inch total after installation.
2. Bowing: Not over L/360, with a maximum of 1 inch where ilL" is
panel length. Differential bowing as erected between adjacent
members of same design, not more than 1/4 inch.
3.3 PATCHING
A. General: patching will be permitted provided structural adequacy of
unit and appearance are not impaired, as acceptable to Architect and
as demonstrated on job mock-up.
B. Patching Mix: Match color and texture of unit. Blend and mix
materials so that cured patching blends with adjacent surfaces and is
not evident when viewed from a distance of 6 feet.
3.4 CLEANING
A. General: Perform cleaning procedures as recommended by unit
manufacturer.
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE
03455-4
5910861-000
1. Clean soiled surfaces with detergent and water, using soft fiber
brushes and sponges, and thoroughly rinse with clean water.
2. Use care to prevent damage to surfaces and to adjacent
materials.
END OF SECTION 03455
GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PRECAST CONCRETE
03455-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 04200 - UNIT
MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Concrete unit masonry.
B. Products installed but not furnished under this section include the
following:
1. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in
Division 8, Section 08111 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed
compressive strengths (f'm):
1. For concrete unit masonry: As follows:
a. f'm = 1,550 psi.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other
manufactured product indicated.
C. Material certificates for the following signed by manufacturer and
Contractor certifying that each material complies with requirements.
1. Each different cement product required for mortar and grout.
2. Each type and size of joint reinforcement.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 "Specifications
for Masonry Structures," except as otherwise indicated.
1. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts
2.1.2, 3.1.2, and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3,2.1.1.1,
2.1.1.2, and 2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by deleting
requirement for installing vent pipes and conduits built into
masonry.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-1
5910861-000
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
B. Store and handle masonry uni ts off the ground, under cover, and in a
dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other
causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an
air-dried condition.
C. Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover, and in dry
location.
D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can
be maintained and contamination avoided.
E. Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent corrosion
and accumulation of dirt and oil.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During erection, cover tops of walls,
projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's
work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in
progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold
cover securely in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and
concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls
or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the
face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately
any grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain- splashed mud and mortar splatter
by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar
products with painted and integral finishes from mortar
droppings.
D.
Hot-Weather Construction:
standard.
Comply with referenced unit masonry
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements
specified in this section applicable to each material indicated.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each
form of concrete masonry unit required.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-2
5910861-000
1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows:
a. For lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
b. Square-edged units for outside corners.
2. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with
requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to
specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the
applicable referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry
units.
a. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified
dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal
heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings.
3. Provide Type II, nonmoisture-controlled units.
4. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, Grade N and as
follows:
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average
net area compressive strength indicated below:
a. 2,000 psi.
2. Weight Classification: Normal weight.
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II.
B. Ready-Mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate
complying with requirements specified in this article, combined with
set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying
wi th ASTM C1l42.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144, except for joints less than 1/4
inch use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404.
F. Water: Clean and potable.
2.4 REINFORCING STEEL
A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of
referenced unit masonry standard and this article.
B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows:
1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A615.
2 . Grade 60.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-3
5910861-000
2.5 JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of
referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the
following:
1. Galvanized carbon steel wire, coating class as required by
referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated.
B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed
continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of
not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units, and
complying with requirements indicated below:
1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch (9 gauge) .
2. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1875 inch.
3. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1875 inch.
4. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single
pair of side rods:
a. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced
not more than 16 inches o.c.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering joint reinforcement that may be incorporated
in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
2 . Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
3. National Wire Products Industries.
2.6 RIGID HURRICANE ANCHORS
A. See structural drawings for custom rigid hurricane anchors.
2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
General: Do not add admixtures including coloring
air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water
agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures.
pigments,
repellent
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion
Specification, for types of mortar indicated below:
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Property
Specification for job-mixed mortar and ASTM C1142 for ready-mixed
mortar, of types indicated below:
1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement-lime.
2. For masonry below grade and in contact with earth, use Type S.
3. For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type S.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-4
591086l-000
4. For exterior, above-grade loadbearing and nonloadbearing walls
and parapet walls; for interior loadbearing walls; for interior
nonloadbearing partitions, and for other applications where
another type is not indicated, use Type S.
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with Section 03010 - CONCRETE WORK.
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type, class, and grade of
concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be tested by qualified
independent testing laboratory for strength, absorption, and moisture
content per ASTM C140.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with installer present,
requirements for installation tolerances
conditions, and other conditions affecting
masonry.
for compliance with
and other specific
performance of unit
B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations
of piping connections prior to installation.
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements
indicated applicable to each type of installation included in
project.
B. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry
construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls
to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal
thickness indicated.
C. Build chases and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items
specified in this and other sections of the Specifications. Provide
not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of
openings and between adjacent chases and recesses.
D. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of
masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match
construction immediately adjacent to the opening.
E. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp,
unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern
and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without
cutting where possible.
3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masonry
standard.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-5
5910861-000
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond
patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of
openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid the use
of less-than-half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at
other locations.
B. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances, with
courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or
bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each
course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than
nominal 4 inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back 1/2 unit
length for one-half running bond or 1/3 unit length for one-third
running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry,
and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh
masonry.
E. Built-In Work: As construction progresses, build-in items specified
under this and other sections of the specifications. Fill in solidly
with masonry around built-in items.
1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with
mortar.
2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow
masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below
and rod mortar or grout into core.
3. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses
(24 inches) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and
similar items.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows:
1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face
shells.
2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all
courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to
cells or cavities to be filled with grout.
3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted,
spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells.
B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered
by other materials.
3.6 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as
indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire
length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls,
1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-6
5910861-000
B. Cut or interrupt j oint reinforcement at control and expansion joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of
prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units
as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets,
column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3 . 7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS
A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces
structural members to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch in width between
masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep
open space free of mortar or other rigid materials.
2 . Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in
masonry joints and attached to structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated.
B. Install vents at the top of each continuous air space in masonry
veneer walls.
3.8 MOVEMENT (CONTROL AND EXPANSION) JOINTS
A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where
indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not
form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are
made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.
3.9 LINTELS
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more
than 1 foot, 0 inches for brick size units and 2 feet, 0 inches for
block size units are shown without structural steel or other
supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed- in-place masonry
lintels. Cure precast lintels before handling and installation.
Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels.
1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed
bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and
filled with coarse grout.
B. Provide minimum bearing of B inches at each jamb, unless otherwise
indicated.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
A. General: Install reinforced unit masonry to comply with requirements
of referenced unit masonry standard.
3.11 PARGING
A. Parge pre dampened masonry walls where indicated with Type S or N
mortar applied in 2 uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch.
Scarify first parging coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface
with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot. Form a wash
at top of parging and a cove at bottom.
UNIT MASONRY
04200-7
5910861-000
C. Damp cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect until cured.
3.12 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken,
stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining
units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh
mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes,
except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all
joints including corners, openings, and adjacent construction to
provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application of
sealants.
C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean
exposed masonry as follows:
1. Remove excess mortar and grout with clear water and wooden
paddles, nonmetallic scrape hoes or stiff fiber brushes.
D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a
manner acceptable to installer, that ensure unit masonry is without
damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
04200-8
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGER TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE comrrY, FLORIDA
SECTION 05120 - S'.ri<.lJ\..-.l"U1<AL
STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work includes all structural steel shown, scheduled or otherwise
required to complete the work, and all necessary connectors and
accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Steel Deck.
2. Metal Fabrications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Furnish for approval. Fabrication shall not begin
prior to approval of the shop drawings. The Contractor shall prepare
the shop drawings. Reproduction of the Architect-Engineer's drawings
is not permitted.
B. Substi tutions : Make requests for substitutions of sections and
modifications to details by obvious notations on shop drawings. Do
not proceed with the substitution until specific approval has been
granted by Architect-Engineer. No spliced members will be accepted
unless splices are clearly shown on the shop drawings and approved by
the Architect-Engineer.
C. Grout: Submit manufacturer's data and printed instructions, proposed
mix proportions and resulting consistency and strength. When
requested by the Architect-Engineer, submit independent testing lab
reports verifying all specified requirements.
D. Inspection and Testing Reports: The independent testing laboratory
will submit 2 copies directly from the laboratory, 1 to the Owner and
1 to the Architect-Engineer.
E. Independent Testing Laboratory Certification: The independent
testing laboratory will be required to provide a letter, signed and
sealed by a registered Professional Engineer stating that, to the
best of his knowledge, based on an acceptable testing program, all
fasteners and welds are installed in accordance with the drawings,
specifications and applicable codes and standards.
F. Welders' Certificates: When requested by the Architect-Engineer,
submit current AWS certificates for each welding operator for each
type of welding performed.
G. Mill Reports: When requested by the Architect-Engineer, furnish 2
copies, specifying chemical and physical properties of steel to be
used on this project.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The following codes and publications, of the latest edition, govern
this work unless indicated or specified otherwise. References in
these codes and publications to inspection by the Architect-Engineer
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-1
5910861-000
shall be deleted. The Architect-Engineer's job administration is
defined in the General Conditions of the Construction Contract.
1. "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges":
A publication of AISC.
2. "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings": A publication
of AISC.
3. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code": A publication of American
Welding Society.
4. "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490
Bolts": A publication of AISC.
5. Surface Preparation Specifications of the Steel Structures
Painting Council. References appear as the specification number
preceded by the initials SSPC.
6. American Society for Testing and Materials: ASTM.
B. Certification of Welders: Welding of all structural steel shall be
limited to welding operators whose competency has been tested and
certified in accordance with the Structural Welding Code of American
Welding Society.
C. Inspection and Testing: The Owner will employ an independent testing
laboratory to insure that all fasteners and welds are installed in
accordance with the drawings, specifications, and approved shop
drawings. The inspection and testing includes items covered in
related sections. The inspection shall be performed under the
supervision of a registered professional engineer.
D. Marking: Shop mark each piece of steel, plainly in a protected
location in accordance with reference numbers on the shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36 and ASTM AS72, Grade 50, see drawings.
B. Steel Pipes: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B, or API Standard 5L,
Grade B.
C. Cold Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM ASOO, Grade B, Fy = 46KS1.
D. Fasteners:
1. High Strength Bolt Steel: ASTM A325.
2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted.
E. Welding Electrodes:
1. Bare Steel: E70.
2.
Galvanized Steel:
surfaces.
E60 specifically applicable to galvanized
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-2
5910861-000
2.2 SHOP PRIMER
A. Surfaces Requiring Special Coating: See Section 09900 - PAINTING and
Section 09800 - SPECIAL COATINGS.
B. All Other Primed Surfaces: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard,
fast-curing, lead-free, universal-modified alkyd primer selected for
good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility
with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a
sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged
exposure complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-645.
2.3 GROUT
A. Materials: Grouting shall be performed with a material meeting the
performance requirements that follow. Cement-based grouts shall have
a minimum 5 year history of use and meet the following performance
requirements at maximum water. They shall not contain expansive
cement or metallic particles such as aluminum powder or iron filings.
1. Plastic Volume Change: The grout shall have no shrinkage (0.0
percent) and a maximum of 4.0 percent expansion from time of
placement until final set when tested according to ASTM C827.
2 . Hardened Volume Change: The grout shall have no shrinkage (0.0
percent) and a maximum of 0.2 percent expansion in the hardened
state when tested according to CRD C-621.
3. Compressive Strength: The grout shall have a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 5,000 psi when tested according to ASTM
C109, restrained.
4. Creep: The grout shall have creep characteristics equal to or
less than the concrete on which it is bearing.
5. Working Time: The grout for anchor bolt sleeves shall have a
fluid consistency with a time of efflux of less than 30 seconds
and all other grout shall have a flow consistency greater than
125 percent for a minimum of 45 minutes when tested according
to applicable consistency sections of ASTM C 827 at 15 minute
intervals.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Lambert Corporation, Orlando, Florida.
2. Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, Ohio.
3. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey.
4. U.S. Grout Corporation, Fairfield, Connecticut.
2.4 GALVANIZING
A. Conform to ASTM Standards A123, A386 and A153 as applicable.
Galvanizing Repair Compound Conform to Mil. Spec. MIL-P-21035.
Provide ZRC by ZRC Chemical Products Co. or Galvicon by Southern
Coatings, Inc.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-3
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL, FABRICATION AND ERECTION
A. General: Comply with the applicable portions of the publications
referenced in PART 1.
B. Steel Connections: One sided or other eccentric connections not
permitted unless specifically shown. No combination of fasteners
such as bolts and welds are permitted in the same face of any
connection. Furnish the type connections shown or noted; where not
shown or noted, use either high strength bolting or welding. Where
welding is used, apply heat symmetrically to minimize distortion or
misalignment.
C. Concrete Connections:
1. Bearing Plates: Following grout manufacturer's written
instructions, set in grout to elevations required or as shown
on drawings.
2. Leveling: Use steel wedges for leveling members and plates on
masonry and concrete; remove the wedges after grouting and grout
the resulting holes. Leveling nuts are not permitted.
3. Anchor Bolt Pipe Sleeves: Prior to grouting anchor bolt pipe
sleeves, remove debris and standing water from pipe sleeves.
After anchor bolts have been aligned with members and/or base
plates, and prior to erection of the member and/or plate, fill
pipe sleeves with grout of a fluid consistency per
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Temporary Bracing: Furnish as necessary until permanent bracing is
installed.
3.2 SHOP PRIME AND FIELD TOUCH-UP
A. Shop Cleaning and Priming:
1. Surfaces to be Encased in Concrete: Shop clean in accordance
with SSPC Specification NO.3 and ship to the job site bare.
2. Surfaces to Receive Welds: Where specified welding requirements
(AWS) do not allow, or recommend against, welding on or through
the required primer, provide surface preparation as required for
the component but leave the specific area to receive the weld
bare for field touch-up after welding.
3. All Other Surfaces Except Galvanized:
a. Surfaces Requiring Special Coating: Clean and apply in
accordance with SSPC Specification required in Section
09800 - SPECIAL COATINGS.
b. All Other Surfaces: Preparation for Shop Priming:
Prepare surfaces to comply with minimum requirements of
SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning":
Apply shop primer to surfaces in accordance with
requirements of SSPC-PA1 "Paint Application Specification
No. I" for shop painting. Provide a minimum 2.0 mils
DFT. "
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-4
5910861-000
B. Job Site Treatment (After Erection) :
1. Surfaces Encased in Concrete: Clean in accordance with SSPC
Specification No. 3 no sooner than 48 hours before forming.
Place concrete immediately after completion of forming.
2. Field Touch-up: Touch-up all prime coated surfaces with the
same specified surface preparation, same material to the same
specified thickness as the prime coat. Field paint all unprimed
bolts and accessories. Clean all welds and adjacent surfaces
and touch-up with primer. Clean and touch-up all rusted areas
with one coat of primer. The prime coat over which succeeding
coats are applied shall be sound and well bonded.
C. Field Painting: In accordance with Section 09900 - PAINTING and
Section 09800 - SPECIAL COATINGS.
D. Galvanizing:
1. General: Conform to ASTM Standards A123, A386 and A153 as
applicable wherever surfaces are indicated or specified to be
galvanized. Galvanize after fabrication unless otherwise
indicated or specified.
2. Repair: Repair all galvanized coatings that become damaged in
handling, transporting, welding, and bolting. Make the repairs
by application of a galvanizing repair compound. Clean all
areas that are to be repaired; remove slag from welds. Apply
repair compound to cold surfaces.
3.3 STRUCTURAL STEEL, INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Bolted and Welded Connections:
1. Procedure: A visual check will be made of all welded and bolted
connections. In addition, a minimum of 10 percent of all high
strength bolts will be checked for proper tension and a minimum
of 10 percent of all full penetration welds will be checked by
ultrasonic testing or other test methods as necessary to verify
compliance with specified requirements. Additional bolts and
welds may be tested at the option of the independent testing
laboratory. Defective bolts and welds shall be removed and
replaced without cost to the Owner.
2. Exposure for Inspection: The inspection and testing procedure
applies to both shop and field connections. No painting or
gal vanizing of the connections shall be performed prior to
acceptance by the independent testing laboratory.
3. Testing of Welds: No testing shall be started until the weld
is cool to the touch and a minimum time of 24 hours has elapsed
after completion of welding.
END OF SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERKINAL BUILDING
MONROE COORTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes steel deck units, accessories, and attachment
for floor and roof applications.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 specification sections.
B. Product data including manufacturer's specifications and installation
instructions for each type of decking and accessories with proposed
products plainly marked.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of deck units, anchorage
details, and conditions requiring closure strips, supplementary
framing, sump pans, cant strips, cut openings, special jointing, and
other accessories.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes
and standards, except as otherwise indicated:
1. AISI, "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
2 . AWS, D1. 3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
3. Steel Deck Institute (SDI), "Design Manual for Composite Decks,
Form Decks and Roof Decks."
B. Qualification of Field Welding: Use qualified welding processes and
welding operators in accordance with "Welder Qualification"
procedures of AWS.
1. Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing.
Owner will bear expense of removing and replacing portions of
decking for testing purposes if welds are found to be
satisfactory. Remove work found to be defective and replace
with new acceptable work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following or submit alternate manufacturers
for approval.
1. Bowman Metal Deck Di v., Cyclops Corp.
2. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
STEEL DECK
05310-1
5910861-000
3. Epic Metals Corp.
4. Marlyn Steel Products, Inc.
5. H. H. Robertson Co.
6. Roll Form Products, Inc.
7. Roof Deck, Inc.
8. United Steel Deck, Inc.
9. Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corp.
10. Wheeling Corrugating Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel for Metal Deck Units: ASTM A446 (galvanized), grade as
required to comply with SDI specifications.
B. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: ASTM A36.
C. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A526, commercial quality, galvanized.
D. Galvanizing: ASTM A525, G90.
E. Gal vanizing Repair: At welds and where galvanized surfaces are
damaged and not encased in structural concrete, prepare surfaces and
repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A780.
F. Flexible Closure Strips: Manufacturer's standard vulcanized,
closed-cell, synthetic rubber.
G. Screws: AISI 1019, minimum size No. 12, cadmium plated or stalgard
coated.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports, with
flush, telescoped, or nested 2-inch laps at ends and interlocking or
nested side laps, of metal thickness, section modulus and depth, as
specified.
B. Roof Deck Units: Provide deck configurations that comply with SDI
"Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck."
1. Properties: Conform to the following minimum requirements:
a. Section Modulus: .232 cubic inches per foot.
b. Depth of Ribs: 1-1/2 inch, Type B.
c. Thickness: 20 gauge.
C. Metal Closure Strips: Fabricate metal closure strips, for openings
between decking and other construction and at ridges and valleys, of
not less than 0.045-inch minimum (18 gauge) sheet metal. Form to
provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of flutes and sides of
decking.
STEEL DECK
05310-2
5910861-000
D. Roof Sump Pans: Fabricate from single piece of 0.071-inch m1n1mum
(14 gauge) galvanized sheet steel. Provide sump pans of adequate
size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3
inches wide. Recess pans not less than 1-1/2 inches below roof deck
surface unless otherwise shown or required by deck configuration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in accordance with SDI
and the manufacturer's recommendations, shop drawings, and as
specified herein.
1. Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to
final position with ends accurat.ely aligned and bearing on
supporting members before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
2. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded
metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods
used in correcting welding work. Care shall be exercised in the
selection of the electrodes and amperage to provide positive
weld and to prevent high amperage blow holes. Use welding
washers for steel deck thickness less than .028 inch and where
recommended by deck manufacturer. Welding washers shall have
a minimum thickness of 0.0568 inch (16 gauge) and have a nominal
3/8-inch diameter hole.
B. Anchorage and Attachment of Deck Units: Shall be in accordance with
the following minimums and additional shall be provided where shown
or scheduled on the drawings.
1. Steel Roof Deck: Puddle welds shall be at least 1/2 - inch
diameter or elongated welds with an equal perimeter. Fillet
welds when used, shall be at least 1 inch long. Weld metal
shall penetrate all layers of deck material at end laps and side
joints and shall have good fusion to the supporting members.
The location and number of welds to the supportive structural
members shall be a minimum of the following: All side laps plus
a sufficient number of interior ribs to limit the spacing
between adjacent points of attachment to 12 inches at all
diaphragm perimeter members, shear walls, braced frames and
rigid frames and 18 inches at all other supports. For spans
5 feet and greater, the side laps shall be fastened together
with a minimum of No. 12 screws at a maximum spacing of 3 feet.
C. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories
around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking, as
shown.
D. Reinforcement at Openings: Provide additional metal reinforcement
and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of decking,
and support of other work shown.
E. Hanger Slots or Clips: Provide UL-approved punched hanger slots
between cells or flutes of lower element where floor deck units are
to receive hangers for support of ceiling construction, air ducts,
diffusers, lighting fixtures, or other items.
STEEL DECK
05310-3
5910861-000
1. Hanger clips designed to clip over male side lap joints of floor
deck units may be used instead of hanger slots.
2. Locate slots or clips at not more"than 14 inches o.c. in both
directions, not over 9 inches from walls at ends, and not more
than 12 inches from walls at sides, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard hanger attachment devices.
F. Roof Sump Pans: Place over openings provided in roof decking and
weld to top decking surface. Space welds not more than 12 inches
o.c. with at least one weld at each corner.
G. Closure Strips: Provide metal closure strips at open uncovered ends
and edges of roof decking and in voids between decking and other
construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking
installation.
H. Touch-Up Painting: After decking installation, wire brush, clean,
and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom
surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members not encased in
structural concrete.
1. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint,
Galvicon, ZRC or approved equal, applied in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 05310
STEEL DECK
05310-4
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 05500 - METAL
FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following metal fabrications:
1 . Ladders.
2. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following:
a. Tray ceiling hangers and supports.
b. Over-counter light fixture at ticketing and car_rental.
c. Aquarium stand.
d. Baggage conveyor protection.
e. Applications where framing and supports are not specified
in other sections.
3. Miscellaneous steel trim.
4. Steel pipe railings.
5. Metal stairs.
6. Pipe bollards.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 5, Section 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL for structural
steel framing system components.
2. Division 5, Section 05720 - ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
for the following:
a. Ornamental metal handrails and railing systems.
b. Metal gates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E985 for railing-related terms apply to this
section.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the
following metal fabrications to withstand the following structural
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-1
5910861-000
loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the
materials involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each
load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of
each metal fabrication.
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the
following loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point
nonconcurrently, vertically downward, or horizontally.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear ft. applied
nonconcurrently, vertically downward or horizontally.
c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed
to act concurrently.
2. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a
horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf applied to one sq. ft.
at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails
balusters, or other elements composing the infill area.
a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with
uniform horizontal loads on top rails of railing systems
in determining stress on guard.
3. Treads of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load
of 100 lbf per sq. ft. or a concentrated load of 300 lbf on a
area of 4 sq. inches located in the center of the tread,
whichever produces the greater stress.
4. Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform
load of 100 lbf per sq. ft.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications,
including paint products and grout.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal
fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage
and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts
specified for installation under other sections.
1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with
certain design loadings, include structural computations,
material properties, and other information needed for structural
analysis that has been signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer who was responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be
requested by Architect.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing
metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this project, with
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-2
5910861-000
sufficient production capacity to produce required units without
causing delay in the work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal
fabrications specified in this section by same firm that fabricated
them.
C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice
in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the
successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this project.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other
construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field
measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delay of work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of
products without field measurements. Coordinate construction
to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:
1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support
handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural
performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon
completion of the work, provide materials selected for their surface
flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use
materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet,
variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference
standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.
C. Steel Bars for Gratings: ASTM AS69 or ASTM A36.
D. Wire Rod for Grating Cross Bars: ASTM AS10.
E. Steel Tubing: Product type (manufacturing method) and as follows:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM ASOO, grade as required for
design loading.
2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM AS01.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-3
5910861-000
a. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide
tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM AS3.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM AS3; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
1. Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where
indicated.
3.
Type F, standard weight (schedule
indicated, or another weight, type,
structural loads.
40), unless otherwise
and grade required by
G. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30.
H. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type
material and finish as supported rails,. unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Concrete Inserts: Threaded or
castings, either malleable iron,
Provide bolts, washers, and shims
ASTM A153.
wedge type; galvanized ferrous
ASTM A47, or cast steel, ASTM A27.
as required, hot-dip galvanized per
J. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS
specifications for the metal alloy to be welded.
2.2 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide
grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and
exterior applications of type specified in this section.
B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink,
nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for
mixing with water at project site to create pourable anchoring,
patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to
the following:
1. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:
a. "BonsaI Construction Grout"; W. R. BonsaI Co.
b. "Euco N-S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders.
d. "Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
e. "Sonogrout"; Sonneborn Building Products Di v., Rexnord
Chemical Products, Inc.
2. Interior Anchoring Cement:
a. "Bonsal Anchor Cement"; W. R. Bonsal Co.
b. "Por-Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-4
5910861-000
2 .3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where
built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and
class required.
2.4 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's
standard, fast-curing, lead-free, universal modified alkyd primer
selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for
compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and for capability
to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite
prolonged exposure complying with performance requirements of FS
TT-P-645.
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for
regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not
less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with
DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.
C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with
SSPC-Paint 12 except containing no asbestos fibers.
D. zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645.
2.5 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of
Division 3, Section 03010 CONCRETE WORK for normal weight,
ready-mix concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500
psi, 440 lb cement per cu. ft. minimum, and w/C ratio of 0.65
maximum, unless higher strengths indicated.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes
indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance
requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on
shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use
type of materials indicated or specified for various components of
each metal fabrication.
B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges.
C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum
change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and
installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling,
opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base
design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 degrees F (55.5 degrees C).
D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless
otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing
work.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-5
5910861-000
F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
G.
Weld corners and seams continuously
recommendations and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
to
comply with AWS
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth
and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and
contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth,
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners
of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting
structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provid~ adequate
support for intended use.
J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible
to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units
for reassembly and coordinated installation.
K. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated
to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.7 STEEL LADDERS
A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions,
spacings, details and anchorages as indicated. Comply with
requirements of ANSI A14.3.
B. Siderails: Continuous steel flat bars, 1/2 inch x 2-1/2 inches, with
eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart.
C. Bar Rungs: Round steel bars, 3/4 inch diameter, spaced 12 inches o.c.
D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on
outer rail faces.
E. Support each ladder at top and bottom. and at intermediate points
spaced not more than 5 feet, 0 inches o.c. by means of welded or
bolted steel brackets.
1. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated
and to hold centerline of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface
by not less than 7 inches.
2. Extend side rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to
wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-6
5910861-000
If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung,
gooseneck the extended rails back to the structure to provide
secure ladder access.
F. Provide nonslip surface on top of each rung, either by coating the
rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by
using a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide
grout.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications
indicated or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as
required to complete work.
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required
to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and
supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, tubes,
rods and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for
field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,
hangers, and similar items.
1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into
concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units
must be installed after concrete is placed.
a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches
o.c. and provide minimum anchor units in the form of steel
straps 1-1/4 inches wide x 1/4 inch x 8 inches long.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in exterior locations.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless
otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes,
plates, and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth
exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible.
Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required for
coordination of assembly and installation with other work.
B. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in exterior locations.
2.10 STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
A. General: Fabricate pipe railings and handrails to comply with
requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and
member sizes, including wall thickness of pipe, post spacings, and
anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural
loads.
B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding
with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting
members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld
all around.
C. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required;
maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-7
5910861-000
without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces of pipe.
D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless
otherwise indicated.
E. Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16-inch thick steel plate in
place or by use of prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of
end of pipe and adjoining wall surface is 1/4 inch or less.
F. Toe Boards: Provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the
edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and
details indicated, or if not indicated, use 4 inches high x 1/8-inch
steel plate welded to, and centered between, each railing post.
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end
closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for
interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to
other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for
connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work.
1. For railing posts set in concrete fabricate sleeves from steel
pipe not less than 6 inches long and with an inside diameter not
less than 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of post,
with steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve.
H. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size
indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where
needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to
structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses.
Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation
and overstressing of substrate.
I. For interior steel railings and handrails formed from steel pipe with
galvanized finish, galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves,
and other ferrous components.
2.11 STEEL FRAMED STAIRS
A. General: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements
indicated. Join pieces together by welding, unless otherwise
indicated. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal
framing, hangers, columns, railings, newels, balusters, struts,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary for
the support of stairs and platforms, and as required to anchor and
contain the stairs on the supporting structure.
1. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum
Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM "Metal Stair Manual"
for class of stair designated, except where more stringent
requirements are indicated:
a. Commercial class, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, or
plates, or a combination thereof, as indicated. Provide closures for
exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of structural steel
channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. Bolt
or weld headers to strings, newels, and framing members to strings
and headers; fabricate and join so that bolts, if used, do not appear
on finish surfaces.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-8
5910861-000
C. Floor Grating Treads and Platforms: Provide patterns, spacing, and
bar sizes indicated; fabricate to comply with NAAMM "Metal Bar
Grating Manual."
1. Finish: Galvanized.
D. Fabricate grating treads with steel plate nosing on one edge and with
steel angle or steel plate carrier at each end for stringer
connections. Secure treads to stringers with bolts.
E. Fabricate grating platforms, with nosing matching that on grating
treads, at all landings. Provide toe plates at open-sided edges of
grating platform. Secure grating to platform frame with welds.
F. Stair Railings and Handrails: Comply with applicable requirements
specified elsewhere in this section for steel pipe railings and
handrails, and as follows:
1. Railings may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns,
instead of using prefabricated fittings.
2. Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.12 PIPE BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 80 steel pipe. Cap bollards
with 1/4 inch minimum thickness steel base plate.
B. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe with 1/4 inch
thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve.
2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply
zinc-coating by the hot-dip process compliance with the following
requirements:
1. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron
and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged
shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare un~oated ferrous metal surfaces
to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of
installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) : SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning:
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except
those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete,
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-9
5910861-000
sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1 "Paint Application Specification
NO.1" for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams,
templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded
in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such
items to project site.
B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops -flush with finish surface
elevations; protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and
fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal
fabrications to in-place construction; include threaded fasteners for
concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts,
wood screws, and other connectors as required.
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and
fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location,
alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true,
and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are
to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction.
D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints.
Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not
weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or
screwed field connections.
E. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded
metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used
in correcting welding work, and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth
and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and
contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS
A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at
abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-10
5910861-000
indicated,
direction.
follows:
as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each
Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as
1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and
anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into
sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with
the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply
with anchoring material manufacturer's directions.
a. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement.
b. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring
material, and leave 1/8-inch build-up, sloped away from
post. For installations exposed on exterior, or to flow
of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout
manufacturer's directions.
2. Anchor posts to steel with steel oval flanges, angle type or
floor type as required by conditions, welded to posts and bolted
to steel supporting members.
3. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round
flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction
with lead expansion shields and bolts.
4. Anchor rail ends to steel with steel oval or round flanges
welded to rail ends and bolted to structural steel members,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings.
Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside
face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as
indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required to support
structural loads. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to
building construction.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS
A. Anchor bollards in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and
anchored into concrete. After bollards have been inserted into
sleeves, fill annular space between bollard and sleeve solid with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout
manufacturer's directions.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,
bol ted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint
exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touch-up of field painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 2.0 mils.
B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded
areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-11
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDIJ.IIG
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 05720 - ORRAIIBRTAL
HAlmRAILS, RAILINGS AND
GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Steel and iron ornamental handrails and railing systems.
2. Steel gates.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 5, Section 05500 - METAL' FABRICATIONS for steel pipe
handrails and railing systems.
2. Division 6, Section 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for
wood rail.
C. Products furnished but not installed under this section include
inserts and anchors preset in masonry and concrete for anchorage of
handrails and railing systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E985 for railing-related terms apply to this
section.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand
structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working
stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1. For cold-formed structural steel: AISI "Specification for
Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."
2. For stainless steel: AISI II Stainless Steel Cold- Formed
Structural Design Manual."
B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer,
fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to withstand the
following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design
working stress of the materials for handrails, railing systems,
anchors, and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum
stress in each of the respective components comprising handrails and
railing systems.
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the
following loads applied as indicated:
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GATES
05720-1
5910861-000
a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in
any direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot applied
horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf
per linear foot applied vertically downward.
c. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently
with uniform loads.
2. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a
horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf applied to one square
foot at any point in the system including panels, intermediate
rails, balusters, or other elements composing the infill area.
a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with
loads on top rails of railing systems in determining
stress on guard.
C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of
corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct
contact with incompatible materials.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the
design, fabrication, and installation of handrails and railings to
prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of
components, connections, and other detrimental effects. Base design
calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 100 degrees F ambient.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails,
railings and gates including plans, elevations, sections, details of
components, and attachments to other units of work.
1. Where installed products are indicated to comply with certain
design loadings, include structural computations, material
properties, and other information needed for structural analysis
that has been signed and sealed by a qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineering Responsibility: Engineer handrails and railing systems
by qualified professional engineer legally authorized to practice in
jurisdiction where project is located.
B. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of railings, erect
mock-ups for each form of guardrail and finish required to verify
selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build
mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for final unit of work.
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GATES
05720-2
5910861-000
1. Locate mock-ups on site. Provide mock-ups consisting of 2
posts, top rail, infill area, and anchorage system components
that are full height and not less than 2 feet, 0 inches in
length.
2. Notify Architect 1 week in advance of the dates and times when
mock-ups will be erected.
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and
workmanship.
4. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final
unit of work.
5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed
condition as a standard for judging completed unit of work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mock-ups from project
site.
1.7 STORAGE
A. Store handrails, railings and gates in clean, dry location, away from
uncured concrete and masonry, protected against damage of any kind.
Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting;
allow for air circulation inside the covering.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where handrails, railings and gates are
indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of
other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication;
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of
work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of
products without field measurements. Coordinate other
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATOR QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Firm with a demonstrated capability to produce railings and gates of
quality and scope required for this project and actively involved in
production for at least 5 years. Fabricator must have sufficient
capacity to produce, transport and deliver required units without
causing delay in the work.
2.2 METALS
A. General: Provide metal forms and types that comply with requirements
of referenced standards and that are free from surface blemishes
where exposed to view in the finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces
exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GATES
05720-3
5910861-000
B. Stainless Steel: Provide austenitic stainless steel in form
indicated complying with the following requirements:
1. Round bar, Type 316, Finish No.6.
C. Steel: Provide steel in the form indicated complying with the
following requirements:
1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM ASOO, grade as indicated below:
a. Grade A, unless otherwise indicated or required by
structural loads.
2. For exterior installations and where indicated, provide tubing
with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM AS3.
D. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.
2 .3 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C
621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications of type specified in thi~ section.
B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink,
nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for
mixing with water at proj ect site to create pourable anchoring,
patching, and grouting compound. Use for interior applications only.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products that may be incorporated in the work include but are not
limited to the following:
1. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grouts:
a. "Bonsal Construction Grout"; W. R. BonsaI Co.
b. "Euco N-S Grout"; Euclid Chemical Co.
c. "Masterflow 713"; Master Builders.
d. "Sealtight 588 Grout"; W. R. Meadows, Inc.
e. "Sonogrout"; Sonneborn Building Products Di v., Rexnord
Chemical Products, Inc.
2. Interior Anchoring Cement:
a. "BonsaI Anchor Cement"; W. R. BonsaI Co.
b. "Por-Rok"; Minwax Construction Products Division.
2.4 PAINT
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for
regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not
less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with
DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with
SSPC-Paint 12 except containing no asbestos fibers.
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GATES
05720-4
5910861-000
C. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of
filler metal and electrodes as recommended by producer of metal to be
welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility
in fabricated items.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select
fasteners of the type, grade, and class required to produce
connections that are suitable for anchoring railing to other types of
construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loadings.
B. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of
same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials
joined.
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and
railing components and for their attachment to other work,
except where otherwise indicated.
2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate handrails, railings and gates to comply with
requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and
member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post
spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support
structural loads.
B. Preassemble systems in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize
field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for
shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly
and coordinated installation.
C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:
1. By mitering at elbow bends.
D. Welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems, handrails and gates
for connection of members by welding. For connections made during
fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the
following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth
and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and
contour of welded surface match those adjacent.
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GATES
05720-5
5910861-000
E. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails
and railing systems to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage
devices capable of withstanding loadings imposed by handrails and
railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting
structure.
F.
For railing posts set in concrete provide preset
not less than 6 inches long and inside dimensions
inch greater than outside dimensions of post,
forming bottom closure.
sleeves of steel,
not less than 1/2
with steel plate
Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately.
exposed cut edges.
H. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless
otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing
work.
Remove burrs from
G.
I. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated
to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
J. For handrails and gates that are exposed to exterior or to moisture
from condensation or other sources, provide weepholes or other means
for evacuation of entrapped water in hollow sections of railing
members.
K. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water.
L. Close exposed ends of members by use of manufacturer's standard
prefabricated end fittings.
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless
otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between
end of the railing and wall is 1/4 inch or less.
N. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size
indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where
needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to
structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses.
Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation
and overstressing of substrate.
2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of
strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment.
2.9 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES
A. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.
B. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform directional textured
polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with
long dimension of each piece.
C. Satin, Directional Polish: AISI No. 6 finish.
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GATES
05720-6
.",",,""_....~,~_*_;""".IM_................,_l;oili;""~-"'...;'ii<;,."', 1,,...,_,,., """,;"~,";j;;",..~<".,,,;.,,"."-,i,.,.",,.
5910861-000
D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
2.10 GALVANIZED FINISH
A. General: Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized to
comply with applicable standard listed below:
1. ASTM A153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
2. ASTM A123 for galvanizing iron and steel products made from
rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, castings, plates,
bars, and strips.
B. For exterior steel railings and gates formed from steel tubing with
galvanized finish, galvanize fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves,
and other ferrous components.
C. For interior steel railings formed from nongalvanized steel members,
provide nongalvanized ferrous metal fittings, brackets, fasteners,
and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry
and concrete construction.
D. Factory-primed Finish: Apply air-dried primer immediately following
cleaning and pretreatment, to provide a minimum dry film thickness of
2.0 mils per applied coat, to surfaces that will be exposed after
assembly and installation and to concealed, nongalvanized surfaces.
2.11 STEEL FINISHES
A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal
surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC
surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure
conditions of installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP7 "Brush-Off Blast Cleaning."
B. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of handrails and railing
components, except those with galvanized finish or to be embedded in
concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification NO.1" for
shop painting.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard,
fast-curing, lead-free, "universal" primer, selected for
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility
with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated,
and for capability to provide a sound foundation for
field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions for installation of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GATES
05720-7
5910861-000
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline
joints.
B.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling,
fitting required for installation of handrails and railings.
handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment,
elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free
rack.
and
Set
and
from
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing
components that have been coated or finished after fabrication
and are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
3. Align rails so that variatignl'l from level for horizontal mernber~
and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping
members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure
matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval
indicated but not less than that required by structural loads.
D. Fastening to In- Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and
fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and railings to
in-place construction.
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use fabricator's standard mechanical or
adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use
wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and
fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using
plastic filler cement colored to match finish of handrails and
railing systems.
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently
connecting railing components by welding. Cope or butt components to
provide 100 percent contact or use fabricator's standard fittings
designed for this purpose.
C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated
but not further apart than required to accommodate thermal movement.
Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on
either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate
joint within 6 inches of post.
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS
A. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored
into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill
annular space between post and sleeve solid with the following
anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's directions.
1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement.
B. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material,
and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. For installations
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GATES
05720-8
5910861-000
exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to
comply with grout manufacturer's directions.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,
bol ted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed
areas with same material.
B. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in
Division 9 of these specifications.
C. For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with
ASTM A780.
D. Clean the following metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and
soap, following by rinsing with clean water.
1. Stainless steel.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes of railing systems and gates from damage during
construction period by use of temporary protective coverings approved
by railing manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of
substantial completion.
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period
so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that
cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 05720
ORNAMENTAL HANDRAILS, RAILINGS AND GP.TES
05720-9
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 06100 - ROOGH
CARPBR'l'RY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
2. Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 6, Section 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for
interior woodwork specially fabricated for this project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of
other sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Wood treatment data as follows including chemical treatment
manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installation, and
finishing of treated material:
1. For each type of preservative treated wood product include
certification by treating plant stating type of preservative
solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative
retained, and compliance with applicable standards.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect
against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air
circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings
including polyethylene and similar materials.
1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne
chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-1
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20
"American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules
of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards
Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
B. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations used
to reference them with lumber grades and species include the
following:
1. SPIB - Southern pine Inspection Bureau.
2. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
C. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with
grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading
rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
D. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions.
Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for moisture content
specified for each use.
1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content
at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. For light framing provide "Stud," "No.3," or "Standard" grade lumber
for stud framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide, 10 feet
and shorter) and "Stud" or "No.3" grade for other light framing (2
to 4 inches thick, 2 to 6 inches wide), any species.
2.3 BOARDS
A. Concealed Boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work,
provide lumber of 19 percent maximum moisture content (S-DRY or
KD-19) and of following species and grade:
1 . Southern pine "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules, or any species
graded "Construction Boards" or "No.3 Common" per WCLIB or WWPA
rules.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other
construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases,
cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping,
and similar members.
B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes
indicated and into shapes shown.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-2
5910861-000
C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified
to receive wood preservative treatment.
D. Grade: "Standard" grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or
board-size lumber as required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade
boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No.2 Boards" per SPIB rules.
2.5 CONSTRUCTION PANELS, GENERAL
A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U. S . Product
Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood
construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1
provisions, with APA PRP-108.
B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked
with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
2.6 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING
A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone
equipment, provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade
designation, APA C-D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or,
if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply
with requirements specified in this article for material and
manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a
hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless
steel.
B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272.
D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1.
E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1.
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563
hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers.
2.8 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as
preservative-treated wood or is specified herein to be treated,
comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and
C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality
Mark Requirements.
B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to
a minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment,
kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content,
respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items
and the following:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-3
5910861-000
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking,
stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,
flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar
concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade.
4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in
contact with earth.
C. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where
possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with
AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and
discard damaged or defective pieces.
2.9 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated wood is indicated, pressure
impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply
with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated;
identify "fire-retardant- treated wood" with appropriate
classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, In~., U. S.
Testing, Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough
carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating
rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb
and true to line and cut and fitted.
C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as
required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers,
blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other
construction.
D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and
fastening as indicated.
E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwis~ indicated. Use finishing
nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will
receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members.
Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS
A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and
where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to
shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work
to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-4
5910861-000
B.
Attach to substrates
Countersink bolts and
indicated. Build into
Where possible, anchor
as required to support applied loading.
nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
masonry during installation of masonry work.
to formwork before concrete placement.
3.3 WOOD FURRING
A. Install plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings.
Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finished work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install I-inch by 3-inch
furring at 2 feet o.c., horizontally and vertically. Select furring
for freedom from knots capable of producing bent-over nails and
resulting damage to paneling.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Drywall: Install I-inch by 2-inch furring
at 16 inches o.c., vertically.
D. Furring to Receive Plaster Lath: Install 1-inch by 2-inch furring at
16 inches o.c., vertically.
3.4 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with NFPA "Manual for House Framing,"
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Anchor and nail as required to comply with the following:
1. National Evaluation Report No. NER-272 for pneumatic or
mechanical driven staples, P-Nails, and allied fasteners.
2. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard
and with NFPA "National Design Specifications for Wood
Construction."
3. "Table 1705.1 - Fastening Schedule," of the Standard Building
Code.
C. Do not splice structural members between supports.
END OF SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGER TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR
ARCHITECTDRAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1 . Wood veneer base.
2. Wood veneer cabinets with stone tops.
3. Laminate clad cabinets.
4. Stone lavatory counters of luggage shelf.
5. Flush plastic laminate paneling at aquarium.
6. Wood handrail.
7. Telephone privacy panels.
8. Wood benches.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Di vision 6, Section 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY for furring,
blocking, and other carpentry work that is not exposed to view.
2. Division 8 Section 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS for doors specified
by reference to architectural woodwork standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and
elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other
components.
C. Samples for verification purposes of the following:
1. Handrail with transparent finish, 12 inches long with one-half
finished.
2. Wood veneer faced panel products, with transparent finish, 8-1/2
inches by 11 inches, with one half of exposed surface finished,
with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core.
3. Stone samples, 12 X 12 inches, showing full range of appearance
characteristics to be expected in completed work.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-1
5910861-000
4. Stainless steel sheet, 6 X 6 inches.
D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses,
names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully
producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this
project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required
units without causing delay in the work.
B. Single-Source Manufacturing and Installation Responsibility: Engage
a qualified manufacturer to assume undivided responsibility for
woodwork specified in this section, including fabrication, finishing,
and installation.
C. AWl Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of
"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWl) except as otherwise indicated.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to
prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration.
B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and
similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be
stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose
environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project
Conditions."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with woodwork
manufacturer's and installer's coordinated advice for optimum
temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage
and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions
have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or
minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of
installation through remainder of construction period.
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to
other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by
accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of
work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering high pressure decorative laminates which may
be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the
following:
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-2
5910861-000
1. Formica Corp.
2 . Laminart .
3 . Micarta Di v., Westinghouse Electric Corp.
4. Nevamar Corp.
5. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWl
woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade
indicated and, where the following products are part of woodwork,
with requirements of the referenced product standards, that apply to
product characteristics indicated:
1. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1
3. Softwood Plywood: PS 1.
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to
relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and
in installation areas.
B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Corners of cabinets and edges of solid wood (lumber) members
less than 1 inch in nominal thickness: 1/16 inch.
C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware
application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent
possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample
allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
D. Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive
hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in
diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth
edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar
exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating.
2.4 WOOD VENEER BASE FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other
wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished
work.
C. Grade: Premi um.
D. Lumber Species: Yellow birch, select white veneer, rotary cut, on
medium-density overlay. Extend veneer over exposed edge.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-3
5910861-000
2.5 WOOD CABINETS (CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWl Section 400 and its Division 400A
"Wood Cabinets."
B. Grade: Premi um.
C.
Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces:
rotary cut.
1. Grain Matching: Run and match grain horizontally.
Yellow birch, white select,
2. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.
3. Veneer Matching Within Panel Face: Center match.
D.
Wood Species for Semi exposed Surfaces:
indicated for exposed surfaces.
Match species and cut
2.6 LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS (PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK)
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWl Section 400 and its Division 400B
"Laminate Clad Cabinets."
B. Grade: Custom.
C. AWl Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
D. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products
that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces
complying with the following requirements:
a. Provide selections made by Architect from laminate
manufacturer's full range of standard colors and finishes
in the following categories:
1) Solid colors.
2. Laminate Grade for Exposed Surfaces: Provide laminate cladding
complying with the following requirements for type of surface
and grade.
Horizontal Surfaces:
thickness) .
b. Vertical Surfaces: GP-28 (0.028 inch nominal thickness) .
a.
GP-50
(0.050
inch nominal
c. Edges: GP-50 (0.050 inch nominal thickness) .
3.
Semiexposed Surfaces:
below:
Provide surface materials indicated
a. High pressure laminate, GP-28.
2.7 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated
with architectural cabinets.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-4
5910861-000
B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this section
for cabinet hardware required for architectural cabinets.
C. Hardware Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.9 "American National
Standard for Cabinet Hardware" for items indicated by reference to
BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard.
D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that
complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated.
1. Satin Chromium Plated, Brass or Bronze Base: BHMA 626.
E. For concealed hardware provide manufacturer's standard finish that
complies with product class requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.9.
2.8 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS (COUNTERTOPS)
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWl Section 400 and its Division 400C.
B. Type of Top: Stone, adhesive attached to solid plywood substrate, as
follows:
1. Standard: ASTM C503.
2. Classification: Travertine.
3. Typical Counter Finish: saw cut and lightly honed.
4. Lavatory Countertop Finish: Honed and filled.
5. Sealer: Factory sealed.
6. Source: Equal to "Saturnia" by Forms and Surfaces, Miami,
Florida.
C. Fabrication: Cut stones from maximum available lengths to minimize
joints. Provide sink cut-outs where shown. Dress joints straight
and at 90-degree angle to face. Cut to provide joints of minimum
width, uniform throughout length. Finished exposed edges to match
face.
D. Installation: Set in organic adhesive complying with ANSI A136.1,
Type 1 and as recommended by source of stone. Grout joints with
grout matching color of stone.
2.9 HIGH-PRESSURE LAMINATE PANELING
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWl Section 500 and its Division 500B.
B. Grade: premi um.
C. Laminate Cladding: See laminate clad cabinets above.
2.10 WOOD HANDRAIL AND BENCHES FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 800.
B. Grade: premi um.
C. Lumber Species: Hard white select maple.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-5
5910861-000
2 .11 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS
A. Screws: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each
use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements.
1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by
metal framing manufacturer.
B. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each
use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required by each
substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip
galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and
elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed
steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or
masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.
2.12 FACTORY FINISHING OF INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
A.
Quality Standard:
indicated.
Comply with AWl Section 1500 unless otherwise
B. General: The entire finish of interior architectural woodwork is
specified in this section, regardless of whether factory applied or
applied after installation.
1. Factory Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish
architectural woodwork at factory. Defer only final touch-up,
cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard
for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed
surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of architectural
woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
D. Transparent Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Comply with requirements
indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, effect, and
sheen, with sheen measured on 60 degree gloss meter per ASTM D523.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. AWl Finish System #3: Conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Clear stain base followed by white pigmented wash.
Match Architect's sample.
4. Effect: Closed grain.
5. Sheen: Medium-gloss rubbed effect 35-45 degrees.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas before installing.
B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built
into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-6
5910861-000
C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated
work for completion and complete work as required, including back
priming and removal of packing.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700
for same grade specified in PART 2 of this section for type of
woodwork involved.
B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no
distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a
tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet, 0 inches for plumb and level
(including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining
surfaces.
C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut
surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached
to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a
complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener
heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing,
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish
where transparent finish is indicated.
E. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of
joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of
lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in
adjacent and related members. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit
openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to
center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered
operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items
as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence matching (if any) of cabinets
with transparent finish.
G. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as
indicated.
H. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed
panel-hanger clips and by blind nailing on backup strips,
splined-connection strips, and similar associated trim and framing.
Do not face nail unless otherwise indicated.
I. Complete the finishing work specified in this section to whatever
extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork.
3 .3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate
defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair,
replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up
factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-7
5910861-000
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
acceptable to manufacturer and installer, that ensures that woodwork
is being without damage or deterioration at time of substantial
completion.
3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Cabinet Hinges: Stanley 1500 Series, self-closing, concealed for
flush overlay doors.
B. Counter Hinges: Soss No. 208 medium duty, finish 626 (no equal) .
C. Drawer Guides: Knape and Vogt No. 1305, 100 lb. loading.
D. Catches: Stanley No. SP45, magnetic.
E. Drawer Pulls: Stanley No. 4484.
F. Shelf Standards and Supports: Knape and Vogt No. 255AL standards and
No. 256R supports.
END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
06402-8
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBlIIGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
~E COUl'fTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 07110 - SHEET
MBMBRARB WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes sheet membrane waterproofing systems.
B. Types of sheet waterproofing specified in this section include the
following:
1. Rubberized asphalt sheet waterproofing for installation under
roof deck.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Provide sheet
produced and installed
continuous seals.
waterproofing products that
to establish and maintain
have been
watertight
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specifications sections.
B. Product data and general recommendations from waterproofing materials
manufacturer for types of waterproofing required.
C. Samples of sheet membrane waterproofing and auxiliary materials as
requested by Architect.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary waterproofing materials of each type
required from a single manufacturer, to greatest extent possible.
Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of
primary materials.
B. Installer: Firm with not less than 5 waterproofing projects similar
to requirements for this project with satisfactory in-service
performance.
C. preinstallation Conference: Prior to installation of waterproofing
and associated work, meet at project site with installer of each
component of associated work, inspection and testing agency
representatives (if any), and installers of work requiring
coordination with waterproofing work. Review material selections and
procedures to be followed in performing work. Notify Architect at
least 48 hours before conducting meeting.
SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07110 -1
5910861-000
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate: Proceed with work after substrate construction, openings,
and penetrating work have been completed.
B. Weather: Proceed with waterproofing and associated work only when
existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be
performed in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and
warranty requirements.
1 . 7 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by
manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace sheet membrane
waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and
not a limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the
Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1. warranty periOd is 5 years after date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RUBBERIZED ASPHALT SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Self-adhering membrane of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to
polyethylene sheeting, formed into uniform flexible sheets of not
less than 56 mils thick, complying with the following:
1. Tensile Strength: 250 psi mini ASTM 0412.
2. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent mini ASTM 0412.
3. Pliability Temperature: minus 25 degrees F (-32 degrees C)i
ASTM 0146.
4. Hydrostatic Head Resistance: 150 feet min.
5. Water Absorption: Not more than 0.5 percent weight gain after
48 hours of immersion at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) i ASTM 0570.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
1. Bituthenei W. R. Grace & Co.
2. MEL-ROLi W.R. Meadows, Inc.
3. Miradri; Mirafi, Inc.
4. polyguard 650; Polyguard Products, Inc.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Adhesi ves and Joint Tape: Provide types of adhesive compound and
tapes recommended by waterproofing sheet manufacturer for bonding to
substrate (if required), for waterproof sealing of seams in membrane,
and for waterproof sealing of joints between membrane and flashings,
adjoining surfaces, and projections through membrane.
SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07110-2
5910861-000
B. Primers: Provide type of concrete primer recommended by manufacturer
of sheet waterproofing material for applications required.
C. Flashing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide types of
flexible sheet material for flashing as recommended by waterproofing
sheet manufacturer.
D.
Drainage Mat: Provide drainage mat/protection
recommended by manufacturer to promote positive
serving as protection to membrane.
board of type
drainage while
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for surface
preparation.
B. On concrete decks, immediately before placement of waterproofing
sheet, grind or abrasive-blast surface lightly to ensure removal of
projections that might penetrate sheet or curing compounds that would
interfere with fully bonded systems. Clean deck of loose material by
brooming and vacuuming.
C. On vertical foundation walls chip off projections where necessary for
proper placement and adhesion of waterproofing sheet.
D. Apply primer to concrete and masonry surfaces at rate recommended by
manufacturer of primary waterproofing materials. Prime only area
that will be covered by WP membrane in same working day; reprime
areas not covered by WP membrane within 24 hours.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling and installation
of sheet waterproofing materials.
B. Coordinate installation of waterproofing materials and associated
work to provide complete system complying with combined
recommendations of manufacturers and installers involved in work.
Schedule installation to minimize period of exposure of sheet
waterproofing materials.
C.
Seal to proj ections through membrane and seal
vertical surfaces and also, where shown or
manufacturer, bond to horizontal surfaces.
seams. Bond to
recommended by
D. Top Edge Seal: For vertical and sloped wall membrane, finish in
reglet (where provided); otherwise finish under flashing or under
masonry in joint. Caulk exposed edges with mastic or sealant.
E.
Expansion Joints:
manufacturer, with
8-inch-wide strip
application.
Install joint filler as recommended by
protruding rounded surface. Apply continuous
of membrane on joint, followed by membrane
F. Coat exposed areas of sheet and flashing materials. Comply with
sheet manufacturer's recommendations for application and cure of
coating.
SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07110-3
5910861-000
G. Install drainage mat/protection board over completed membrane,
complying with manufacturer's recommendations for both waterproofing
sheet and protection course materials.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. In-place Testing: Before completed membranes on horizontal surfaces
are covered by protection course or other work, test for leaks with
2 - inch depth of water maintained for 24 hours. Repair any leaks
revealed by examination of substructure and repeat test until no
leakage is observed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. After completion, remove any masking materials and stains from
exposed surfaces caused by waterproofing installation.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide for protection of completed membrane during installation of
other materials or processes over membrane and throughout remainder
of construction period. Do not allow traffic of any type on
unprotected membrane.
END OF SECTION 07110
SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07110-4
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 07160 - DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Cold-applied coal tar dampproofing.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Bituminous sheet waterproofing is specified in Division 7,
Section 07110 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1, Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.
1. Product Data: Include data substantiating that materials comply
with specified requirements for each dampproofing material
specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has
completed bituminous dampproofing work similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for Project and that has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing work only after substrate
construction and penetrating work have been completed.
B. Weather: Proceed with dampproofing work only when existing and
forecast weather conditions will permit work to be performed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COLD-APPLIED COAL TAR DAMPPROOFING
A. Coal Tar Bitumen Compound: ASTM 0 450, Type II, coal tar pitch and
solvent compound, containing non-asbestos, inorganic fibrous
reinforcement and filler materials recommended for below-grade
exterior applications, compounded to penetrate substrate and build to
moisture-resistant, firm, elastic coating.
DAMPPROOFING
07160-1
5910861-000
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
coal-tar products of one of the following:
1. Celotex Corporation.
2. GAF Building Materials Corporation.
3 . Koppers Company, Inc.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Glass-Fiber Mat: Nonwoven fiberglass fabric of continuous filament
or jack-straw filament/yarn pattern of glass fiber, impregnated and
bound together with type of organic/synthetic binder that is
compatible with type of bituminous compound indicated to be
reinforced, weighing 1.0 to 1.5 pounds per 100 square feet, 36 inch
wide rolls.
B. Bituminous Grout: Comply with ASTM 0147.
C. Plastic Cement: Asphalt based, complying with ASTM 0491, except
provide coal tar base where specifically recommended by manufacturer
of bituminous dampproofing materials.
D. Protection Course, Board Type: Asphal t - impregnated and coated
organic fiberboard, 1/2 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work;
comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer.
B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as recommended by prime
materials manufacturer.
C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers (if any) as
recommended by prime materials manufacturer, with particular
attention at construction joints.
D. Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping as
recommended by prime materials manufacturer, where indicated to
precede application of dampproofing. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations. Give particular attention to requirements at
building expansion joints, if any.
E. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer.
F. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds
to enter and clog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and
migration onto other surfaces of work, by masking or otherwise
protecting adjoining work.
3.2 . INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations, except where more
stringent requirements are indicated or specified and where project
conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure
satisfactory performance of work.
DAMPPRooFING
07160-2
5910861-000
3.3 BITUMINOUS DAMPPRooFING INSTALLATION
A. General: Apply dampproofing to all exterior below-grade surfaces of
planter walls and exterior walls in contact with earth or other
backfi 11 .
B. Reinforcement: At changes in plane or where otherwise shown as
"Reinforced," install lapped course of glass-fiber mat in first coat
of dampproofing compound before it thickens.
C. Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2 X 2-inch cant strip of bituminous
grout at base of vertical dampproofing where it meets horizontal
surface.
D. Extend vertical dampproofing down walls from finished grade line to
top of footing, extend over top of footing, and turn down minimum of
6 inches over outside face of footing. Extend 12 inches onto
intersecting walls and footings but do not extend onto surfaces that
will be exposed to view when project is completed.
3.4 COLD BITUMEN ON EXTERIOR SURFACES
A. Apply coat of cold, semifibrated, semimastic asphalt dampproofing
material, by brushing or troweling at rate of 5.0 gallons per 100
square feet, to produce uniform dry film thickness of not less than
30 mils.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF DAMPPROOF PROTECTION COURSE
A. General: Install protection course of type indicated over
completed-and-cured dampproofing treatment. Comply with dampproofing
materials manufacturer's recommendations for method of support or
attachment of protection materials. Support with spot application of
plastic cement where not otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 07160
DAMPPRooFING
07160-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COul'fl"Y, FLORIDA
SECTION 07175 - WATER
RBPE:LLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of surfaces to receive water repellent is indicated on
drawings and by provisions of this section.
B. Following applications of water repellent are required.
1. Exterior cement plaster or stucco surfaces.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applic::ation:, A firm with not less than 3 years of successful
exper1ence 1n application of water repellents of types required on
substrates similar to those of this project.
B. Project Mock-Up: Apply water repellent to mock-up, either partial or
full coverage as directed, before proceeding with installation.
Comply with installation requirements of this section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, installation
instructions, and general recommendations for water repellents.
Include data substantiating that materials are recommended by
manufacturer for applications indicated and comply with requirements.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of
water repellent (except with written recommendation of manufacturer) ,
when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C);
when substrate surfaces have cured for less than a period of 2
months; when rain or temperatures below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C),
are predicted for a period of 24 hours, or earlier than 3 days after
surfaces became wet; when substrate is frozen; at surface temperature
of less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) .
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLVENT-BASED SILICONE SEALER
A. Provide a 5.0-percent concentration of polymerized silicone resins in
hydrocarbon solvents, complying with FS SS-W-I10.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
WATER REPELLENTS
07175-1
5910861-000
1. Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Co.
2. Euclid Chemical Co.
3. Nox-Chem Co.
4. Thoro System Products
5 . W. R. Meadows
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Test Application: Prior to performance of water repellent work,
including bulk purchase/delivery of products, prepare a small
application in an unobtrusive location and in a manner acceptable to
Architect, for purpose of demonstrating final effect (visual and
physical/chemical) of planned installation. Proceed with work only
after Architect's acceptance of test application, or as otherwise
directed.
1. Revision of planned installation, if any and as requested by
Architect, will be by change order where it constitutes a
departure from requirements of contract documents at time of
contracting.
B. Clean substrate of substances which might interfere wi th
penetration/adhesion of water repellents. Test for moisture content,
in accordance with repellent manufacturer's instructions, to ensure
that surface is sufficiently dry.
C. Coordination with Sealants: Where feasible, delay application of
water repellents until installation of sealants has been completed in
joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with repellent.
D. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from
spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby
surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is possibility of water
repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plant materials
with drop cloths. Clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces
immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply a heavy saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces
indicated for treatment using low pressure spray equipment. Comply
with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless
spraying procedure unless otherwise indicated.
B. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions for limitations on drying
time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between
coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if printed
recommendations are not applicable to project conditions.
END OF SECTION 07175
WATER REPELLENTS
07175-2
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGBR TBRMIRAL BUILDING
MJRRQB COUNTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 07210 - INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Concealed building insulation in board form.
2. Building insulation in batt form.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1 . Division 7 roofing section for roof insulation specified as part
of roofing construction.
2. Division 9 section for thermal insulation and sound attenuation
insulation installed as part of metal-framed wall and partition
assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation
products are designated by "r-values," they represent the reciprocal
of thermal conductivity (k-values). Thermal conductivity is the rate
of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick.
Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in
degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to
flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials
identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics
have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL
or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E84.
2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM El19.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.
INSULATION
07210 -1
5910861-000
1 . 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from
deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside
and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations
for handling, storage, and protection during installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated
in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance' with requirements, provide
insulation products of one of the following:
1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Manville: Building Insulations Di v., Manville Sales Corp.
c. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp.
2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements
and with referenced standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected
from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Unfaced Glass Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation produced by
combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply
with ASTM C612 for Class indicated; and as follows:
1. Medium Density Semi-Rigid Board: Class 1 and 2, nominal density
of 3.0 pcf, r-value of 4.3 at 75 degrees F (23.9 degrees C).
2. Provide 1-1/2-inch thick boards with R = 6.5.
C.
Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation:
produced by combining mineral fibers of type
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665
without membrane facing) i and as follows:
Thermal insulation
described below with
for Type I (blankets
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
2 . Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke
developed values of 25 and 50, respectively.
3. R-Value: Provide 6-inch batts with R = 19.
INSULATION
07210-2
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions with installer present, for
compliance with requirements of the sections in which substrates and
related work are specified and to determine if other conditions
affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed
with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor
retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor
retarders.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's. instructions applicable to
products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not
available or do not apply to project conditions, consult
manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations
before proceeding with installation of insulation.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area
to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill
voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrate, complying with manufacturer's
recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to
substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage, wires or straps
to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Cut and fit snugly between closely spaced framing members and around
piping or conduit.
C. Stuff glass fiber insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity
spaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide
temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to
abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction
immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
INSULATION
07210 - 3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 07270 - FIRBSTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide firestopping penetration sealing system which shall have a
continuous bond between substrate and penetrating item to assure a
positive and effective smoke seal. Provide sealing system for all
penetrations through floor slabs (not in protected enclosures), fire
walls and other fire rated partitions or assemblies.
B. Typical use locations shall include but not be limited to
penetrations made by the following:
1. Ducts.
2. Cables - power and telephone.
3. Conduit - steel and PVC.
4. Pipe - steel, glass, insulated and plastic.
5. Blank - penetrations.
C. Coordinate all sleeves (sizes and locations) specified in Divisions
15 and 16 of these specifications.
D. Sealing system must be installed by a licensed applicator and in
strict accordance with the latest manufacturer's instructions and
details.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of seal and
accessory to be used.
B. Submit 2 samples of each component to be used.
C. A mock-up of each type of penetration shall be done on site, and
remain so that it can be used as "acceptance criteria" for the
remainder of the job. Thi smock - up shall be approved by the
Architect.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Resistance Ratings: Provide assemblies that have been tested,
approved and listed by UL and/or Factory Mutual.
B. ASTM Standards: Firestopping materials shall conform to both
Flame (F) and Temperature(T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted
test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 firetests. The F rating and
T rating must be a minimum of 1 hour but not less than the fire
resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. The fire test
shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of
0.03 inch of water column.
C. Firestopping shall be performed by an installer trained or approved
by firestop manufacturer. Equipment used shall be in accordance with
FlRESTOPPING
07270-1
5910861-000
firestop manufacturer's written installation instructions. The
installer shall have a minimum of two years experience.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver all materials in original unopened packages fully identified
with manufacturer's name, trade name and UL label. Materials shall
be stored off the ground and protected from environmental conditions
as required by manufacturer.
1 .5 WARRANTY
A. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer of firestopping
materials and his authorized installer, agreeing to replace/repair
defective materials and workmanship as required to maintain
firestopping conditions. Warranty shall state that the firestopping
materials have been installed and used properly and for the purpose
which intended.
1. Warranty period is 2 years after date of substantial completion.
B. If products offered have a manufacturer's warranty that states that
Owner/user shall test application/determine suitability then
Contractor shall have independently monitored tests performed on
conditions identical to proposed construction, and shall submit
copies of these tests for review. Submittals made without this
testing will not be considered or approved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
Provide products from or equal to one of the
1. 3M Electrical Products Division.
2. Thermal Ceramics.
3. Dow Corning.
4. Nelson Electric.
5. Bio Fireshield Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Penetration seals shall be of the type and shape required to
continuously fill the annular space between the pipe, conduit, cable,
etc., and the wall or floor opening with or without sleeves.
B. Seal shall be constructed to provide electrical insulation between
the pipe and wall, thus reducing the chances of cathodic reaction
between these members.
C. Provide materials as required for all blank openings through floor
and walls where a fire rating is required.
D. Provide metal sleeves, collars and plates not specified in other
sections as required to meet the fire resistance ratings in which the
penetrations occur.
FlRESTOPPING
07270-2
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine all penetrations and verify that all sleeves and openings are
of the proper size. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces and substrates of dirt,
foreign materials which may affect the
the firestops in strict accordance
instructions.
oil, loose materials and other
proper bond or installation of
with manufacturer's written
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Remove any loose materials, dirt and oil from penetration surfaces.
B. Install the firestopping system in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions to achieve the necessary fire rating.
C. Where required, provide top caps and smoke seals.
D. Any material found to be defective shall be removed and replaced by
the applicator.
END OF SECTION 07270
FlRESTOPPING
07270-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 07410 - MARUP'ACTDRBD
ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes manufactured roof panels of the following type:
1. Standing seam roof panels to be machine seamed.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 5 sections for structural and light gauge framing.
2. Division 7, Section 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL for roof
and/or wall flashing and other sheet metal work.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide certified test results by a recognized testing laboratory or
agency in accordance with specified test methods for each system.
B. Air Infiltration: Provide roof panel system with no air leakage when
tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at pressure differentials up to
1. 57 psi.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data including manufacturer's product specifications,
standard details, installation instructions, and general
recommendations, as applicable to materials and finishes for each
component and for total panel system.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's
color charts or chips showing full range of colors, textures, and
patterns available for roof and wall panels with factory-applied
finishes.
D.
Samples for verification purposes of roof and wall panels.
sample panels 12 inches long by actual panel width, in the
style, color, and texture indicated. Include clips,
fasteners, closures, and other panel accessories.
Provide
profile,
battens,
E. Shop Drawings showing layouts of panels on walls and roofs, details
of edge conditions, joints, corners, panel profiles, supports,
anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and special details.
Distinguish between factory and field assembly work.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07410-1
5910861-000
F. Signed and sealed calculations from a registered engineer and/or test
data certifying the performance of roof panels including materials,
sizes, thicknesses, spacing, anchorages and attachments applicable to
the system.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Wind Uplift: Provide roof panel system including supports, anchorage
and attachment meeting requirements of UL for Class 90 wind uplift
resistance and in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7-S8 for
a 155 mph velocity with an importance factor of 1.0.
B. Field Measurements: Where possible, prior to fabrication of panels,
take field measurements of structure or substrates to receive panel
system. Allow for trimming panel units where final dimensions cannot
be established prior to fabrication.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver panels and other components so they will not be damaged or
deformed. Package wall and roof panels for protection against
transportation damage.
B. Handling: Exercise care in unloading, storing, and erecting wall and
roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or
other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall
and roof panels so that they will not accumulate water. Do not store
panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,
denting, or other surface damage.
1 . 7 WARRANTY
A. Finish Warranty: Furnish panel manufacturer's written warranty
covering failure of the factory-applied exterior finish on metal wall
and roof panels within the warranty period. This warranty shall be
in addition to and not a limitation of other rights the Owner may
have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1. Warranty period for factory-applied exterior finishes on wall
and roof panels is 20 years after the date of substantial
completion.
B.
Metal roofing shall be guaranteed against failure
loads and against leakage for a period of 20 years.
cover replacement costs, and shall be jointly
manufacturer and installer.
under specified
Guaranty shall
signed by the
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roof
and wall panels by one of the following:
1. Aluminum Roof Panels:
a. AEP-Span.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07410-2
5910861-000
b. Berridge Manufacturing Co.
c. Merchant & Evans, Inc.
d. MM Systems Corp.
e. Petersen Aluminum Corp.
f. E.G. Smith Construction Products, Inc.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 for Alclad alloy 3003 or 3004
with temper as required to suit forming operations.
1. Embossed: Provide sheet manufacturer's standard "stucco"
embossed sheet finish.
2.3 METAL FINISHES
A. General: Apply coatings either before or after forming and
fabricating panels, as required by coating process and as required
for maximum coating performance capability. Protect coating either
by application of strippable film or by packing plastic film or other
suitable material between panels in a manner to properly protect the
finish. Furnish air-drying spray finish in matching color for
touch-up.
1. Color: Match Duranar XL Seafoam Green 5ZMG95083 with 5MC95417
clear coat.
B. Fluoropolymer Coating: Manufacturer's standard two-coat,
thermocured, full-strength 70 percent "Kynar 500" coating consisting
of a primer and a minimum 0.75 mil dry film thickness with a total
minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil and 30 percent reflective gloss
when tested in accordance with ASTM 0523.
1. Durability: Provide coating that has been field tested under
normal range of weathering conditions for minimum of 20 years
without significant peel, blister, flake, chip, crack, or check
in finishi without chalking in excess of No. 8 in accordance
with ASTM 0659; and without fading in excess of 5 NBS units.
2.4 ROOF INSULATION
A. Composite Insulation: Nailable insulated sheathing 1-1/2 inches
thick with R-value of 7.2, consisting of polyisocyanurate foam core
bonded to oriented strand board and fiberglas facer.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Nailboard by NRG Barriers, Inc.
C. Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion-resistant type as recommended by
insulation manufacturer for deck type and comply with fire and
insurance uplift rating requirements. Provide system tested and
approved for I-90 wind uplift rating.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Underlayment: Provide underlayment membrane equal to Ice and Water
Shield.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07410-3
5910861-000
B. Accessories: Except as indicated as work of another specification
section, provide components required for a complete roof panel
system, including trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops, ridge
closures, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, gutters,
downspouts, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar
items. Match materials and finishes of panels.
1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, self-extinguishing, expanded
cellular rubber or cross-linked polyolefin foam flexible closure
strips. Cut or premold to match configuration of roof and wall
panels. Provide closure strips where necessary to ensure
weathertight construction.
2. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive 100% solids polyisobutylene
compound sealing tape with release paper backing. Provide
permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
3. Joint Sealant: One -part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide,
or silicone rubber sealant as recommended by the building
manufacturer.
C. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC paint 12,
compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat.
2 . 6 PANEL FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish panels and accessories at the factory
to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures
and processes, as required to fulfill indicated performance
requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with
indicated profiles and dimensional requirements and with structural
requirements.
B. Apply bituminous coating or other permanent separation materials on
concealed panel surfaces where panels would otherwise be in direct
contact with substrate materials that are noncompatible or could
result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finishes.
2.7 ROOF PANELS
A. Face Sheets: Fabricate wall and roof panel face sheets to the
profile or configuration indicated from 0.040 inch thick 3003 or 3004
Alclad alloy stucco embossed finish aluminum sheets.
B. Standing Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed
standing-seam roof panel system designed for mechanical attachment of
panels to roof purlin using a concealed clip.
2.8 FLASHING
A. Comply with the requirements of Section 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET
METAL .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations
for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting
substrates. Anchor panels and other components of the work securely
in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07410-4
5910861-000
1. Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
2. Install panels with concealed fasteners.
3. Install roof panels over solid substrate with one ply of
underlayment installed from lower edge up with at least 6-inch
side laps and 6-inch end laps.
B. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where
indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of panel
systems. Provide types of gaskets, sealants, and fillers of types
recommended by panel manufacturer.
1. Provide weatherseal under ridge cap. Flash and seal roof panels
at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to
exclude weather.
C. Standing Seam Roof Panel System: Fasten roof panels to supports with
concealed clip in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install clips at each support with self-drilling/self-tapping
fasteners.
2. At end laps of panels, install tape caulk between panels.
3. Install factory-caulked cleats at standing-seam joints. Apply
snap-on batten to the panels to provide a weathertight joint or
complete seaming of panel joints by operation of portable
power-driven equipment of type recommended by panel manufacturer
to provide a weathertight joint.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Damaged Units: Replace panels and other components of the work that
have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by
means of finish touch-up or similar minor repair procedures.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films
(if any) as soon as each panel is installed. Upon completion of
panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel
manufacturer, and maintain in a clean condition during construction.
END OF SECTION 07410
MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS
07410-5
5910S61-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 07530 - SINGLE-PLY
MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes single-ply membrane roofing systems utilizing
the following:
1. Totally adhered systems.
2. Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM)
B. Roof insulation related to flexible sheet roofing is specified in
this section.
C. Wood nailers, blocking, and other related items are specified in
Division 6.
D. Similar membranes concealed by a wearing surface are excluded by
definition and, if required, are specified elsewhere in Division 7 as
waterproofing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations
from manufacturer of single-ply membrane system for types of roofing
required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with
requirements.
C. Signed and sealed calculations from a registered engineer and/or test
data certifying the performance of single-ply membrane roofing,
including materials, sizes, thicknesses, spacing, anchorages and
attachments applicable to the system.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Obtain primary flexible sheet roofing from a single
manufacturer. Provide secondary materials as recommended by
manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Provide a roof membrane system including all auxiliary materials and
components that meets the design criteria in accordance with the
requirements of ASCE 7-S8 for a 155 mph velocity with an importance
factor of 1.0.
C. Installer: Engage an experienced installer to apply single-ply
membrane roofing who has specialized in application of roofing
systems similar to those required for this project. Installer must
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
07530-1
5910861-000
be acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer of primary roofing
material.
1. Work associated with single-ply membrane roofing, including (but
not limited to) insulation, flashing and counterflashing,
expansion joints, and joint sealers, is to be performed by
Installer of this work.
D. Preroofing Conference: Prior to installation of roofing and
associated work, meet at project site, or other mutually agreed
location, with Installer, roofing sheet manufacturer, installers of
related work, and other entities concerned with roofing performance,
including (where applicable) Owner's insurer, test agencies,
governing authorities, Architect, and Owner. Record discussions and
agreements and furnish copy to each participant. Provide at least 72
hours' advance notice to participants prior to convening preroofing
conference.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather: Proceed with roofing work when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements.
B.
Substrate Conditions:
substrates have been
satisfactory condition.
Do not begin
inspected and
roofing installation until
are determined to be in
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of single-ply membrane
manufacturer's "Limited Service Warranty" agreement including
flashing endorsement, signed by an authorized representative of
manufacturer. Provide form that was published with product
literature as of date of Contract Documents, for the following period
of time:
1. 10 years after date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Performance: Provide roofing materials recognized to be of generic
type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated
performances, or provide other similar materials certified in writing
by manufacturer to be equal to, or better than, materials specified
in every significant respect, and acceptable to Architect.
B. Compatibility: Provide products that are recommended by
manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or
provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between
incompatible materials.
2 .2 . EPDM MEMBRANE
A. General: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform,
flexible sheets, complying with ASTM 04637, Type 1.
1. Class U, Unreinforced.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
07530-2
5910S61-000
2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: Coating: EM-S Hypalon, Tan.
B. Fully Adhered EPDM Membrane: Manufacturer's standard installation.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
a. Carlisle Syntec Systems.
b. Celotex Corp.
c. Firestone Building Products Co.
d. Goodyear Tire and Rubber Co.
e. Manville Building Materials Corp.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's standard materials for sealing
lapped joints, including edge sealer to cover exposed spliced edges
as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
B.
Cant Strips, Tapered Edge Strips, and Flashing Accessories:
recommended by membrane manufacturer, including adhesive
flashing cements, and sealants.
Types
tapes,
C. Flashing Material: Manufacturer's standard system compatible with
flexible sheet membrane.
D. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer for
particular substrate and project conditions, formulated to withstand
min. 90-psf uplift force.
2.4 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide insulating materials to comply with requirements
indicated for materials and compliance with referenced standards in
sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Composite Insulation: Nailable insulated sheathing 1-1/2-inch thick
with r-value of 7.2, consisting polyisocyanurate foam core bonded to
oriented strand board and fiberglass facer.
C. Acceptable Manufacturers: Equal to Nailboard by NRG Barriers, Inc.
2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mechanical Anchors: Corrosion-resistant type as recommended by
insulation manufacturer for deck type and complying with fire and
insurance uplift rating requirements.
1. Provide system tested and approved for I-90 wind uplift rating.
2.6 EM-S HYPALON COATING
A. The installed system shall weather for a minimum of 2 weeks before
application of the Hypalon/sand coating.
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
07530-3
5910861-000
B. The surface shall be clean of contaminants and dry prior to
application.
C. Thoroughly mix the EM-8 Hypalon to remove settlement from bottom of
container. with the use of a 9-inch paint roller, nap 1/4 inch to
1/2 inch, apply EM-8 Hypalon coating in a smooth, even coat at the
rate of 150 square feet per gallon to the membrane surface.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATE
A. General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions for preparation of
substrate to receive single-ply membrane system.
1. verify that penetrations, expansion joints, and blocking are in
placed and secured and that roof drains are properly clamped
into position.
B. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to
FSR system work. Remove sharp projections.
C. Install flashings and accessory items as shown, and as recommended by
manufacturer if not shown.
D. Prime substrate where recommended by manufacturer of materials being
installed.
E. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains and conductors
and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other work.
3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Secure roof insulation to substrate with mechanical anchors of type
and spacing indicated but in no case provide less than one anchor per
4 square feet of surface area or less anchorage than required by FM
"Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28."
3 .3 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. General: Start installation only in presence of manufacturer's
technical representative.
1. Cut out and repair membrane defects at end of each day's work.
B. Fully Adhered Membrane: Install membrane by unrolling over prepared
substrate, lapping adjoining sheets as recommended by manufacturer.
Apply adhesive to surfaces to be bonded and roll into place when
adhesive has properly cured. Treat seams with special cement and
apply sealant to exposed sheet edges, tapering application as
recommended by manufacturer. Install mechanical fasteners, flashings
and counterflashings, and accessories at locations and as recommended
by manufacturer.
3.4 PROTECTION OF ROOFING
A. Upon completion of roofing (including associated work), institute
appropriate procedures for surveillance and protection of roofing
during remainder of construction period. At end of construction
period, or at a time when remaining construction will in no way
affect or endanger roofing, make a final inspection of roofing and
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
07530-4
5910861-000
prepare a written report to Owner, describing nature and extent of
deterioration or damage found.
B. Repair or replace (as required) deteriorated or defective work found
at time of final inspection to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of substantial completion and in accordance
with requirements of specified warranty.
END OF SECTION 07530
SINGLE-PLY MEMBRANE ROOFING
07530-5
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 07600 - FLASHING
AND SHEET MBTAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections: Flashing and sheet metal provided under Section
07410 - MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS, shall comply with the requirements
of this section.
B. Roof accessory units of premanufactured, set-on type are specified in
Division 7, Section 07710 - ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data, Flashing, Sheet Metal, and Accessories: Manufacturer's
technical product data, installation instructions and general
recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated
product.
C. Shop drawings showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and
anchorages details, including major counterflashings, trim/fascia
units, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, and expansion joint systems.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work
for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible
weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials
and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS
A. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209, alloy 3003, temper H14, 0.040 inch thick
except as otherwise indicated. Provide Kynar finish as required in
Section 07410 - MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS.
B. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories:
C.
Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or
corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer.
of exposed heads with material being fastened.
other non-
Match finish
D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC - Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic,
nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness
per coat.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07600-1
5910861-000
E.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;
nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
nOnhardening,
nonskinning,
F. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of
metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with
requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7, Section
07901 - JOINT SEALANTS.
G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part noncorrosive metal seam cementing
compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior
nonmoving joints including riveted joints.
H. Reglets: Metal units of type and profile indicated, compatible with
flashing indicated, noncorrosive.
I. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring
devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of
work, matching or compatible with material being installed,
noncorrosive, size and gauge required for performance.
J. Downspouts: PVC pipe and fittings; Schedule 40.
2.2 FABRICATED UNITS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent
possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements
of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized
industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant
performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient
to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work.
Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer
instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed
sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool
marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock
seams. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for
additional strength where required.
C. Expansion provisions: Where lapped or bayonet - type expansion
provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently
water /weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked
flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant
(concealed within joints) .
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are
indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to
provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance
with SMACNA standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible
metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at
locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent
separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
F. Aluminum Running Units: Fabricate aluminum running units with formed
aluminum joint covers for installation behind main members where
possible. Fabricate mitered and welded corner units.
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07600-2
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's
installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in
place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal
units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line
and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams
that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.
B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed
directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of
red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment.
C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement
where required for waterproof performance.
D. Install counterflashing in reglets, either by snap-in seal
arrangement or by welding in place for anchorage and filling reglet
with mastic or elastomeric sealant, as indicated and depending on
degree of sealant exposure.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause
corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes.
B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for
surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during
construction to ensure that work will be without damage or
deterioration other than natural weathering at time of substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION 07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07600-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 07700 - ROOF
SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent and locations of roof accessories is indicated on the drawings
and by provisions of this section.
B. Types of units specified in this section include the following:
1. Roof hatches.
C. Refer to roofing system sections of these specifications for roofing
accessories to be built into roofing system (not work of this
section) .
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data; Roof Accessories: Submit manufacturer's technical
product data, rough-in diagrams, details and general product
recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing
to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. Comply with "NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installation of units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide manufacturers' standard units, modified as necessary to
comply with requirements. Shop fabricate each unit to greatest
extent possible.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 3003, temper as required for
forming and performance; AA-C22A41 clear anodized finish.
B. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semi-rigid board of
glass fiber of thicknesses indicated.
C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-borne
preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPB LP-2; not less
than 1-1/2 inch thick.
D.
Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened,
stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as
or nonmagnetic
recommended by
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
07700-1
5910861-000
manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of
material being fastened.
E. Gaskets: Tubular or fingered design of neoprene or polyvinyl
chloride, or block design of sponge neoprene.
F. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494A or SSPC-Paint 12, solvent type
bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil
dry film thickness per coating.
G.
Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nOnhardening,
nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.
nonskinning,
H. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer,
which is compatible with joint surfaces; comply with FS TT-S-00227E,
TT-S-00230C, or TT-S-001543A.
I. Roofing Cement: ASTM 02822, asphaltic.
2.3 PREFABRICATED ROOF HATCHES
A. General: Fabricate units 2 feet, 6 inches X 3 feet, 0 inches,
single-leaf type for 40 lbs. per sq. ft. external loading and 20 Ibs.
per sq. ft. internal loading pressure. Frame with 12 inches high
integral-curb double-wall construction with 1-1/2-inch insulation,
cant strips and cap flashing (roofing counter-flashing), with welded
or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide double-wall cover (lid)
construction with 1-inch insulation core. Equip units with complete
hardware set including hold-open devices, interior padlock hasps, and
both interior and exterior latch handles. Provide gasketing.
Fabricate units of following materials:
1. Materials: Aluminum, sheets and extrusions with all stainless
steel hardware.
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
prefabricated roof hatch units by one of the following:
1. Bilco Co.; New Haven, CT
2. Milcor, Inc.; Lima, OH
3. Wasco Products, Inc.; Sanford, ME
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other
substrates to receive accessory units, and vapor barriers, roof
insulation, roofing and flaShing; as required to ensure that each
element of the work performs properly, and that combined elements are
waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting
structural substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal
stresses as well as inward and outward loading pressures.
1. Except as otherwise indicated install roof accessory items in
accordance with construction details of "NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual."
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
07700-2
5910861-000
B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in
contact with noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including
wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or
provide other permanent separation.
C. Flange Seals: Except as otherwise indicated, set flanges of
accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement, to form a seal.
D. Cap Flashing: Where cap flashing is required as component of
accessory, install to provide adequate waterproof overlap with
roofing or roof flashing (as counter-flashing). Seal with thick bead
of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicated to be left open
for ventilation.
E. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components.
Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper
operation.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings.
END OF SECTION 07700
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
07700-3
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COul'f'J: t: . FLORIDA
SECTION 07901 - JOINT
SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes joint sealants for the following locations:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal
surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
c. Joints between different materials listed above.
d. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames
of doors and windows.
e. Control and expansion joints in soffits and overhead
surfaces.
f. Other joints as indicated.
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated
below:
a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place
concrete slabs.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces as indicated below:
a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
b. Joints between tops of non-load-bearing unit masonry walls
and underside of cast-in-place concrete slabs and beams.
c. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior
unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames
of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances.
e. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
f. Other joints as indicated.
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated
below:
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-1
5910861-000
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 7, Section 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL for sealing
joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing.
2. Division 8, Section oa800 - GLASS AND GLAZING for sealants used
in glazing.
3 . Division 9, Section 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL for sealing concealed
perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound
transmission.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and
installed to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight
continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint
substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been
produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight ~ontinuous
seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration
of joint substrates.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product
required.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's
standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products
showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to
view.
D. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that
their products comply with specification requirements and are
suitable for the use indicated.
E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant
manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and
joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and
adhesion with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's
interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to
obtain adhesion.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has
completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for project that have resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-2
5910861-000
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or
bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and
designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time,
and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint
sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside
the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint
sealants where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealant
manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of
joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their
adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor
more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other
related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint
substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the
following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full
range of standard colors for products of type indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS (EXTERIOR USE AND INTERIOR CONTROL JOINTS)
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard
chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C920 and
other requirements indicated including those requirements referencing
ASTM C920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class, and Uses.
B. Multicomponent Polyurethane Sealant: Except as otherwise indicated,
provide manufacturer's standard, nonmodified, 2-or-more-part,
polyurethane - based, elastomeric sealant; comply with either ASTM
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-3
5910861-000
C920, Type M, Class 25, or FS TT-S-00227E Class A; self-leveling
grade/type where used in joints of surfaces subject to traffic,
otherwise nonsag grade/type. Where exposed to foot traffic, select
nontracking materials of sufficient strength and hardness to
withstand stilletto heels.
1. Modulus and Hardness: Where self -leveling grade/type is
required, provide sealant with cured modulus of elasticity at
100 percent elongation of not more than 150 psi (ASTM 0412 test
procedure), and Shore A hardness of not less than 55 (ASTM
02240). Where nonsag grade/type is required, provide sealant
with cured modulus of elasticity at 100 percent elongation of
not more than 75 psi and Shore A hardness of 20 to 30.
2. Tear Resistance: Not less than 50 pounds per inch (ASTM 0624).
C. Manufacturer: Subj ect to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
1. Manufacturers of Elastomeric Sealants (Liquid):
a. Mameco International, Cleveland, Ohio.
b. W.R. Meadows, Inc., Elgin, Illinois.
c. Pecora Corporation, Harleysville, Pennsylvania.
d. Sika Chemical Corporation, Lindhurst, New Jersey.
e. Sonneborn/Contech, Inc., Minneapolis, Minnesota.
f. Toch/Carboline Company, St. Louis, Missouri.
2.3 SOLVENT-RELEASE-CURING JOINT SEALANTS (INTERIOR USE ONLY)
A. Acrylic Sealant: Manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag,
solvent-release-curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with
AAMA 808.3 or FS TT-S-00230 or both, with capability when tested for
adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C719, to
withstand the following percentage change in joint width existing at
time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated
for project without failing cohesively:
1. 7-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for a
total of 15 percent.
2. 12-1/2 percent movement in both extension and compression for
a total of 25 percent.
B. Butyl Sealant: Manufacturer's standard I-part, nonsag,
solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl sealant complying with
ASTM C 1085 and formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids to be
nonstaining, paintable, and have a tack-free time of 24 hours or
less.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
solvent-release-curing joint sealants that may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acrylic Sealant:
a. "60+Unicrylic," Pecora Corp.
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-4
5910861-000
b. "PTI 738," Protective Treatments, Inc.
c. "PTI 767," Protective Treatments, Inc.
d. "Mono," Tremco, Inc.
2. Butyl Sealant:
a. "BC-158," Pecora Corp.
b. "PTI 757," Protective Treatments, Inc.
c. "Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant," Sonneborn Building
Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.
d. "Tremco Butyl Sealant," Tremco, Inc.
2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable,
nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C834 and the following
requirements:
1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission
through perimeter joints and openings in building construction
as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies per
ASTM E90.
2. Product has flame spread and smoke developed ratings of less
than 25 per ASTM E84.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard,
nondrying, nOnhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,
synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed
joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
acoustical joint sealants that may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acoustical Sealant:
a. "SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant," United States Gypsum Co.
b. "AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant," Pecora
Corp.
2 . 5 PREFORMED FOAM SEALANTS
A. Preformed Foam Sealants: Manufacturer's standard preformed,
precompressed, impregnated open-cell foam sealant manufactured from
high-density urethane foam impregnated with a nondrying, water
repellent agent; factory-produced in precompressed sizes and in roll
or stick form to fit joint widths indicated and to develop a
watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified
by manufacturer; and complying with tpe following requirements:
1. Properties: Permanently. elastic, mildew- resistant,
nonmigratory, nonstaining, and compatible with j oint substrates
and other joint sealants.
2. Impregnating Agent: Manufacturer's standard, nonasphaltic.
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-5
5910861-000
3. Density: 8 to 10 pcf.
4. Backing: Pressure-sensitive adhesive factory applied to 1 side
with protective wrapping.
5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following:
a. "Emseal Greyflex," Emseal Corp.
b. "Wil-Seal 150," Wil-Seal Construction Foams Div.,
Illbruck .
2 . 6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are
nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers
and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory
testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient,
nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam
of material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to
control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance:
1. Open-cell polyurethane foam.
2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and
gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state.
3.
Proprietary, reticulated,
nonoutgassing, with a density
of 35 psi per ASTM 01623, and
0.02 gms/cc per ASTM C1083.
closed-cell polymeric foam,
of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength
with water absorption less than
4. Any material indicated above.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as
recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from
adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint
surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where
required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as
determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and
field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily
residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any
way j oint substrates and adj acent nonporous surfaces, and formulated
to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible wi th
joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-6
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with installer
present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant
performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before
installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint
sealant manufacturer and the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could
interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints
(except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved
for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer) ,
old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water
repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic,tile, and
similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding,
blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these
methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of
developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose
particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming
or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4 . Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic
tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or
other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave
residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
B. Joint Priming: Prime j oint substrates where indicated or where
recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction
joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine
primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or
migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of
sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently
stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to
remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-7
5910S61-000
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed
installation instructions applicable to products and applications
indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with
recommendations of ASTM C962 for use of joint sealants as applicable
to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Solvent-Release-Curing Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with
requirements of ASTM CS04 for use of solvent-release-curing sealants.
D.
Latex Sealant Installation Standard:
ASTM C90 for use of latex sealants.
Comply with requirements of
E. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations
of ASTM C19 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as
applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
F. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply
with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of
sealants during application and at position required to produce
the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capabili ty.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior
to sealant application and replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are
not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints.
G. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that
result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint
substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and
depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement
capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are
installed.
H. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application
and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air
pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of
joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do
not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or
are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure SA in ASTM C62,
unless otherwise indicated.
I. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of
sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care
not to pull or stretch material, and to comply with sealant
manufacturer's directions for installation methods, materials, and
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-8
5910861-000
tools that produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections
of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where
expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply
heat to sealant in conformance with sealant manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as
work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by
manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact
with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from
construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and
remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and
installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original
work.
END OF SECTION 07901
JOINT SEALANTS
07901-9
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 08111 - STARIlARD
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following products manufactured in
accordance with SDI Recommended Standards:
1. Doors: Seamless, hollow or composite construction standard
steel doors for interior and exterior locations.
2. Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights,
mullions, interior glazed panels, and other interior and exterior
openings of following type:
a. Welded unit type.
3. Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies
as required for the following:
a. Labeled and fire rated.
4. Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted.
B. painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9, Section
09900 - PAINTING.
C. Wood doors are specified in another Division 8 section.
D. Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 section.
E. Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 section.
F. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction
is specified in Division 4.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including
details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation,
core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel
doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of
door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction,
location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and
reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111-1
5910861-000
1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference
numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings.
2. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and
glazing requirements.
D. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be
fire-rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit
manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has
been constructed to conform to design, materials and construction
equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Provide doors and frames complying
"Recommended Specifications Standard
ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified.
with Steel Door Institute
Steel Doors and Frames"
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are
identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance
characteristics have been determined per ASTM E152 and which are
labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey, or other
testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide
protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional
protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and
frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames upon deli very for damage. Minor damages may
be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to
new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace
damaged items as directed.
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on
minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic
or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard
wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide
1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
standard steel doors and frames by one of the following:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Ceco Corp.
c. Curries Company.
d. Fenestra Corp.
e. Kewanee Corp.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111-2
5910S61-000
f. Republic Builders Products.
g. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel,
pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying
with ASTM A366 and ASTM A56S.
C.
Galvanized
commercial
ASTM A642,
A60 or G60
Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of
quality, complying with ASTM A526, or drawing quality,
hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, with
coating designation, mill phosphatized.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than lS-gauge sheet
steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where
items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in
compliance withASTM A153, Class C or 0 as applicable.
F. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication.
1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or
baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying
with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for
Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames."
2.3 DOORS
A. Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as
indicated on drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, Model 3 or
4, minimum lS-gauge cold-rolled sheet steel faces.
2. Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty,
Model 4, minimum 16-gauge galvanized steel faces.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed
lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings
and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate frames of minimum lS-gauge cold-rolled steel.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered, coped, or welded corners.
2. Form exterior frames from 16-gauge galvanized steel.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to
receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2
silencers on heads of double-door frames.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26-gauge steel plaster guards or
mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other
materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior
of openings.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111-3
5910861-000
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance
and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and
assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure
proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100
requirements.
1. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb,
polyurethane, polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel
stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound
deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in
accordance with SDI standards.
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except
between non-fire-rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch.
Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and
rails of nonflush units, from only cold-rolled steel.
C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard
Steel Doors and Frames."
D. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels,
louvers and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel.
E. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet
steel in accordance with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of
exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition
of minimum 16-gauge inverted steel channels.
F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk
flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.
G. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised
and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware
Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with
applicable requirements of ANSI AIlS Series Specifications for door
and frame preparation for hardware.
H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface - applied hardware.
Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at
project site.
I. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not
indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's
Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames," published by Door and
Hardware Institute.
J. Shop painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel
door and frame units, including galvanized surfaces.
1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and
other foreign materials before application of paint.
2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide
a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
K. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20-gauge steel or .040-inch-thick aluminum.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111-4
5910S61-000
1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on
secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other
panels in doors.
2. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of
glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in
accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as
herein specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended
Erection Instructions For Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated.
1. Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry or
drywall installations, place frames prior to construction of
enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in
position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove
temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and
undamaged.
2. In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent
to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on
strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors
and masonry Tee anchors.
3. Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard
No. 80.
4. In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per
jamb at hinge and strike levels. In closed steel stud
partitions, attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames,
within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100.
1. Install fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA
Standard No. SO.
3 .2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any
rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of
compatible air-drying primer.
B. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items,
leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper
operating condition.
END OF SECTION OSlll
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
OS111-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
RBW PASSENGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 08211 - FLUSH
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on
drawings and in schedules.
B. Types of doors required include the following:
1. Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces.
2. Hollow core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces (sliding
closet doors) .
C. Factory-finishing of flush wood doors is included in this section.
D. Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for hardware
for wood doors is included in this section.
E. Louvers for flush wood doors, including furnishing and installation,
are specified under this section.
F. Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in another
Division 8 section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of
door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for
openings and louvers, and factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of
each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction,
location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements
for factory finishing and other pertinent data.
1. For factory-premachined doors, indicate dimensions and locations
of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and
louver openings.
C. Samples: Submit samples, 1 foot, 0 inch square or as indicated, for
the following:
1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging
representing typical range of color and grain for each species
of veneer and solid lumber required, finished as specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-1
5910861-000
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I. S.l "Industry Standard for Wood Flush
Doors," of National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA).
2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards"; including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors, "
of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWl) for grade of door,
core construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those
of NWWDA quality standard.
B. NWWMA Quali ty Marking: Mark each wood door wi th NWWDA Wood Flush
Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable
requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1 Series.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in
materials and construction to units tested in door and frame
assemblies per ASTM E152 and which are labeled and listed for ratings
indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey or other testing and inspection
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Oversize Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding
sizes of tested assemblies, provide manufacturer's certificate
stating that doors conform to all standard construction
requirements of tested and labeled fire door assemblies except
as to size.
D. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
1 .5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced
standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store,
Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors," as well as with
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate
with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and
hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for
temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be
maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of
construction period to comply with the following requirements
applicable to project's geographical location:
1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3
"Moisture Content."
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation
of, other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents.
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door
manufacturer's standard form signed by manufacturer, installer and
Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have
warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core
construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance
limitations of referenced quality standards.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211- 2
5910861-000
1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required
due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was
not apparent prior to hanging.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time
after date of substantial completion.
3. Solid Core Interior Doors:
a. Life of installation.
4. Hollow Core Interior Doors:
a. Two years.
C.
Contractor's Responsibilities:
Contractor's work contributed
manufacturer's warranty.
Replace or refinish doors where
to rejection or to voiding of
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces:
a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
b. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division.
c. Weyerhauser Company.
2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following
requirements:
1. Faces: Natural birch, select white, rotary cut.
2. AWl Grade: Premium.
3. Construction: PC-5 or PC-7 (Particleboard core, 5- or 7-ply)
or SLC-5 (Glued block core, 5-ply).
B. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements.
C.
Faces and AWl Grade:
doors.
Provide faces and grade to match nonrated
1. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as
required to provide fire-resistance rating indicated.
D. Hollow Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following
requirements:
1. Faces: Natural birch, rotary cut, select white.
2. AWI Grade: Custom.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-3
5910861-000
3. Construction: SHC (Standard hollow core).
2.3 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid wood louvers,
unless otherwise indicated, and of size indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following
requirements:
1. Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes
indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels:
a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting.
Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop
drawings and with hardware templates.
b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal
frames to verify dimensions and alignment before
proceeding with factory premachining.
B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with
applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors
required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and
profile indicated.
2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced AWl quality standard including
Section 1500 "Factory Finishing."
B. Prefinish wood doors at factory.
C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade,
finish system, staining effect and sheen.
1. AWI Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI System #3 alkyd-urea conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Clear base followed by white pigmented wash. Match
Architect's sample.
4. Effect: Closed grain finish.
5. Sheen: Satin-medium rubbed effect, 28 to 36 degrees.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-4
5910861-000
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type,
size, location, and swing characteristics and have been
installed with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware:
HARDWARE .
For installation see Division 8, Section 08710 - DOOR
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with
manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as
indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in
accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80.
C. Job-Fit Doors: Perform final fitting and alignment of doors as
required. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and
bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of
limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Seal
cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch at
jambs and heads; 1/16 inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs
of doors; and 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative
floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or
scheduled, provide 1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top
of threshold.
2. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA
80.
3. Bevel non-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge
edges.
4. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim
stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if
fitting or machining is required at the job site.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A.
Operation:
freely.
Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate
B.
Finished Doors:
installation.
Refinish or replace doors damaged during
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood
doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 08305 - ACCESS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes access doors for installation in the following
types of construction:
1 . Gypsum drywall.
2. Cementitious board soffit.
B. Roof hatches are specified in Division 7.
C. Access panels in suspended ceilings are specified in Division 9.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
1. Product data in form of manufacturer's technical data and
installation instructions for each type of access door assembly,
including setting drawings, templates, instructions, and
directions for installation of anchorage, devices.
a. Include complete schedule, including types, general
locations, sizes, wall and ceiling construction details,
finishes, latching or locking provisions, and other data
pertinent to installation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire project
from one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Size variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's
standard size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.
C. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be
built into other work for installation of access doors. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verification: Obtain specific locations and sizes for required
access doors from trades requiring access to concealed equipment, and
indicate on submittal schedule.
ACCESS DOORS
08305-1
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
access doors by one of the following:
l. Bar-Co. , Inc.
2. Cesco Products
3. J.L. Industries
4. Karp Associates, Inc.
5. Milcor, Inc.
6. Nystrom, Inc.
7. The Williams Brothers Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an
integral unit, complete with all parts, and ready for installation.
B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded
steel construction unless otherwise indicated. Grind welds smooth
and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and
fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of
support shown.
C. Frames: Fabricate from 16-gauge steel.
1. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal I-inch wide around
perimeter of frame.
2. For gypsum drywall or gypsum veneer plaster or cementitious
board, furnish perforated frames with drywall bead.
3. For installation in masonry construction, furnish frames with
adjustable metal masonry anchors.
D.
Flush Panel Doors: Fabricate from
steel, with concealed spring hinges
hinge set to open 175 degrees.
factory-applied prime paint.
not less than 14 - gauge sheet
or concealed continuous piano
Finish with manufacturer's
E. Locking Devices: Furnish flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks of
number required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.
1. Provide one cylinder lock per access door. Furnish 2 keys per
lock. Key all locks alike, unless otherwise scheduled.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access
doors.
ACCESS DOORS
08305-2
5910861-000
B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades.
C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports
with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish
surfaces.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.
B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or
otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08305
ACCESS DOORS
08305-3
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 08330 - OVERHEAD
COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of overhead coiling doors is shown on drawings.
B. Types of overhead coiling doors include the following:
1. Overhead fire doors.
2. Motorized operated doors.
C. Provide complete operating door assemblies including door.curtains,
guides, counterbalance mechanism, hardware, operators, and
installation accessories.
D. Field painting is specified in Division 9.
E. Electrical connections for powered operators and accessories are
specified in Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing-in
diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of
overhead coiling door. Provide operating instructions and
maintenance information, and complete information describing fire
release system including electrical rough-in instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submi t shop drawings for special components and
installations which are not fully dimensioned or detailed on
manufacturers data sheets.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit produced by one
manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and
installation components.
B. Unless otherwise acceptable to Architect, furnish overhead coiling
door units by one manufacturer for entire project.
C. Insert and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which
must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of
units. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and
directions for installation of anchorage devices. Coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
D. See concrete and masonry sections of these specifications for
installation of inserts and anchorage devices.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08330-1
5910861-000
E. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce exterior overhead coiling doors
to withstand a 115 mph wind loading pressure unless otherwise
indicated.
F. Fire Door Assemblies: Furnish fire door assemblies which comply with
NFPA No. 80 and have been fire tested, rated and labeled in
accordance with ASTM E152. Furnish each door with a metal UL label
as evidence of rating, with label indicating rating in hours of
duration of exposure to fire and letter designation of location for
which assembly is designed.
G. Automatic Closing: Provide automatic closing device and governor,
operating when activated by temperature rise and melting of 160
degrees F (71 degrees C) fusible link. Construct governor unit to be
inoperative during normal door operations. Design release mechanism
for easy resetting.
H. Fabricate unit to permit manual lifting of curtain for emergency exit
after automatic closing, with curtain returning to closed position
when released.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cornell Iron Works Inc.
2 . Kinnear Di v ., Harsco Corp.
3. Overhead Door Corp.
2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of
interlocking slats designed to withstand required wind loading, of
continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide slats of material gage recommended by
door manufacturer for size and type of door required, and as follows:
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural quality, cold- rolled
galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A446, Grade A, with
G90 zinc coating, complying with ASTM A525, and phosphate
treated before fabrication.
2. Stainless Steel Curtain Slats: Furnish with exterior units.
a. Furnish manufacturer's standard "flat-face" slats.
B. Endlocks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication,
secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets. Provide locks on
alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against
lateral movement.
C. Bottom Bar: Consisting of 2 angles, each not less than 1 x 1 x 1/8
inch thick, either galvanized or stainless steel or aluminum
extrusions to suit type of curtain slats.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08330-2
5910861-000
D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel angles,
or channels and angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain
curtain loading. Build-up units with minimum 3/16-inch thick steel
sections, galvanized after fabrication. Slot bolt holes for track
adjustment.
E. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing by 3/8 inch minimum
bolts at not more than 30 inches o.c., unless closer spacing
recommended by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles above door
opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise indicated.
Place anchor bolts on exterior wall guides so they are concealed when
door is in closed position. Provide removable stops on guides to
prevent over-travel of curtain, and continuous bar for holding
windlocks.
F. Weather Seals: Provide vinyl or neoprene weatherstripping for
exterior exposed doors, except where otherwise indicated. At door
heads, use 1/8 - inch thick continuous sheet secured to inside of
curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use 1/8-inch thick continuous
strip secured to exterior side of jamb guide.
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion
spring, mounted around a steel shaft and mounted in a spring barrel
and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use
grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for
rotating members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot - formed
structural quality carbon steel, welded or seamless pipe, of
sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support roll-up of curtain
without distortion of slats and limit barrel deflection to not more
than 0.03 inch per ft. of span under full load.
C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated
steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight
of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel.
Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel
and shaft.
D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of case-hardened
steel, of required size to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional
load.
E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard
design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell mouth
guide groove for curtain.
F. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating
mechanism at opening head, and act as weather seal. Contour to suit
end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and
bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted
hoods, and any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond
wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to
prevent sag.
1. Fabricate steel hoods for doors of not less than 24 gage hot-dip
galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating, complying with
ASTM A525. Phosphate treat before fabrication.
2. Fabricate stainless steel hoods for exterior doors.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08330-3
5910861-000
3. Furnish automatic drop baffle to guard against passage of smoke
or flame for fire-rated doors.
2.4 PAINTING
A. Shop clean and prime ferrous metal and galvanized surfaces, exposed
and unexposed, except faying and lubricated surfaces, with door
manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer.
2.5 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Furnish electric door operator assembly of size and
capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer; complete with
electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, gear reduction
uni t, solenoid operated brake, remote control stations, control
devices, conduit and wiring from controls to motor and central
stations, and accessories required for proper operation.
B. Provide hand-operated disconnect or a mechanism for automatically
engaging a sprocket and chain operator and releasing brake for
emergency manual operation. Mount disconnect and operator so they
are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to
automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is
engaged.
C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing
limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary
operator.
D. Door Operator Type: Provide wall or bracket-mounted door operator
units consisting of electric motor, worm gear drive from motor to
reduction gear box, chain or worm gear drive from reduction box to
gear wheel mounted on counterbalance shaft, and a disconnect-release
for manual operation. Provide motor and drive assembly of horsepower
and design as determined by door manufacturer for size of door
required.
E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, constant
duty, Class A insulated electric motors with overload protection,
sized to move door in either direction, from any position, at not
less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second.
1. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of
motors with building electrical system.
2. Furnish open-drip-proof type motor and controller with NEMA Type
1 enclosure.
3. Furnish totally enclosed, nonventilated type motors, fitted with
plugged drain, and controller with NEMA Type 4 enclosure, for
exterior applications and where indicated.
F. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, 3-button control
station with push button controls labeled "open", "close" and "stop."
1.
Provide exterior
surface-mounted,
key-operated.
units, full-guarded
weatherproof, NEMA
type,
Type
standard duty,
4 enclosure,
G. Automatic Reversing Control: Furnish each door with automatic safety
switch, extending full width of door bottom, and located within
neoprene or rubber astragal mounted to bottom door rail. Contact
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08330-4
5910861-000
with switch before fully closing will immediately stop downward
travel and reverse direction to fully opened position. Connect to
control circuit through retracting safety cord and reel, or
self-coiling cable.
1. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary
hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and
equipment supports in accordance with final shop drawings,
manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein.
1. Install fire-rated doors to comply with NFPA 80.
B. Upon completion of installation including work by other trades,
lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp,
twist or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION 08330
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
08330-5
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 08340 - OVERHEAD
COILING GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of overhead coiling grilles is shown on drawings.
B. Provide complete operating grille assemblies including curtains,
guides, counterbalance mechanisms, hardware, operators and
installation accessories, as indicated.
C. Electrical connections are specified in Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing-in
diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of
overhead coiling grille. Include operating instructions and
maintenance data.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and
installations which are not fully dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturers product data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide each overhead coiling grille as a complete unit produced by
one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and
installation components.
B. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which
must be set in concrete or built into masonry for installation of
overhead coiling grille units. Provide setting drawings, templates,
instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage devices.
Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
C. See concrete and masonry sections of these specifications for
installation of inserts and anchorage devices.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
2 . Kinnear Di v ., Harsco Corp.
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
08340-1
5910861-000
3. North American Rolling Door, Inc.
4. Overhead Door Corp.
2.2 GRILLE CURTAIN
A. General: Fabricate grille curtain consisting of a network of 5/16-
inch minimum diameter horizontal rods spaced approximately 2 inches
o.c. Interconnect rods by vertical links approximately 5/8 inch wide,
spaced approximately 9 inches apart and rotating on the rods.
1. Stainless Steel Grilles: AISI Type 302/304 with No.4 finish.
B. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard extruded shape or 2 angles,
finished to match grille.
C. End Locks: Continuous end links or other devices at ends of rods,
locking and retaining grille curtain in guides against excessive
pressures, maintaining curtain alignment and preventing lateral
movement.
D. Guides: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum shape having
curtain groove with return lips or bars to retain curtain. Furnish
pile strips, rigid vinyl liner, or other nonmetallic inserts to
prevent metal-to-metal contact and minimize noise of travel. Furnish
removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.
2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. Counterbalance grille by means of steel helical torsion spring,
mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel,
connected to curtain. Use grease-sealed ball bearings or
self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B. Counterbalance: Hot-formed structural quality carbon steel, welded
or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to
support the roll-up curtain without distortion and limit barrel
deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full
load.
C. Furnish spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated
steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight
of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel.
Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel
and shaft.
D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of case-hardened
steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or
cold-rolled steel plate.
1. Furnish removable metal soffit when hood is mounted above
ceiling, of same material and finish of curtain unless otherwise
indicated.
2.4 ELECTRIC GRILLE OPERATORS
A. General: Furnish electric operator assembly of size and capacity
recommended and provided by gri lIe manufacturer; complete wi th
electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, gear reduction
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
08340-2
5910861-000
unit, solenoid operated brake, remote control stations, and control
devices.
B. Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically
engaging a sprocket and chain operator and releasing brake for
emergency manual operation. Mount disconnect and operator so they
are accessible from floor level. Include an interlock device to
automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is
engaged.
C. Design operator so that motor may be removed without disturbing
limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary
operator.
D. Operator Type: Furnish wall or bracket-mounted operator units
consisting of electric motor, worm gear drive from motor to reduction
gear box, chain or worm gear drive from reduction box to a gear wheel
mounted on counterbalance shaft, and disconnect-release for manual
operation. Provide motor and drive assembly of horsepower and design
as determined by manufacturer for size of unit required.
E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, constant
duty, Class A insulated electric motors with overload protection,
sized to move grille in either direction, from any position, at not
less than 2/3 foot nor more than 1 foot per second.
1. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of
motors with building electrical system.
2. Provide open-drip-proof type motor, and controller with NEMA
Type I enclosure.
F. Remote Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, 3-button control
station with push button controls labeled "open," "close" and "stop."
1. Provide interior units, full-guarded type, surface-mounted,
heavy-duty, with general purpose NEMA Type 1 enclosure.
G. Automatic Reverse Control: Provide each grille with automatic safety
switch, extending full width of bottom, and located within neoprene
or rubber astragal mounted to bottom rail. Contact with switch
before fully closing will immediately stop downward travel and
reverse direction to fully opened position. Connect to control
circuit through retracting safety cord and reel or self-coiling
cable.
1. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install grill~s and operating equipment complete with necessary
hardware, in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's
instructions, and as specified herein.
B. Upon completion of installation including work by other trades,
lubricate, test and adjust grilles to operate easily, free from warp,
twist or distortion.
END OF SECTION 08340
OVERHEAD COILING GRILLES
08340-3
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 08410 - ALtlKIl!IUM
BRTRARCBS ARD
STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and
storefront work:
1. Exterior entrance doors.
2 . Sidelights.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Automatic entrance doors are included in Division 8, Section
08460 - AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS.
2. Glazing requirements for aluminum entrances and storefront are
included in Division 8, Section 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING.
3. Lock cylinders are included in Division 8, Section 08710 - DOOR
HARDWARE .
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that
comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by
testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according
to test methods indicated.
B. Thermal Movement: Design the aluminum entrance and storefront
framing systems to provide for expansion and contraction of the
component materials. Entrance doors shall function normally over the
specified temperature range.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface
temperature range of 180 degrees F (100 degrees C) without
buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural
elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance,
stress on glass, or other detrimental effects.
C. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront
systems that comply with structural performance, air infiltration,
and water penetration requirements indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront
assemblies, anchorages and attachments in accordance with the
requirements of ASCE 7-88 for a 155 mph velocity with an
importance factor of 1.0 except as noted below.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-1
5910861-000
2. All first-floor aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies
shall be attached to the structural frame as follows:
a. Wave action against the first floor walls shall cause the
yielding of the connection of the components attached to
the structural concrete frame without inducing forces
which exceed the capacity of the frame.
b. All attachments and anchorages connected to the structural
concrete frame below elevation 19 feet NGVO shall be
designed and installed to withstand a pressure of z55 psf:
c. The design shall include the applicable safety factors for
the items used but the sizes and spacings shall not
provide safety factors in excess of those required by
code.
D. Structural Performance: Conduct tests for structural performance in
accordance with ASTM E330. At the conclusion of the tests there
shall be no glass breakage or permanent damage to fasteners, anchors,
hardware or actuating mechanism. Framing members shall have no
permanent deformation in excess of 0.2 percent of their clear span.
1. Deflection Normal to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressure
required to measure deflection of framing members normal to the
plane of the wall shall be equivalent to the wind load specified
above. Deflection shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span,
when subjected to uniform load deflection test.
2. Deflection Parallel to the Plane of the Wall: Test pressures
required to measure deflection parallel to the plane of the wall
shall be equal to 1.5 times the wind pressures specified above.
Deflection of any member carrying its full dead load shall not
exceed an amount that will reduce glass bite below 75 percent
of the design dimension and shall not reduce the edge clearance
between the member and the fixed panel, glass or other fixed
member above to less than 1/8 inch. The clearance between the
member and an operable door or window shall be at least 1/16
inch.
E. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled
water penetration (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the
test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at an inward
test pressure differential of 6.24 Ibf per sq. ft.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
1. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system
required, including:
a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.
b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
c. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior
surfaces.
2. Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system
required, including:
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-2
5910861-000
a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to
adjacent work.
b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale.
c. Detail sections of typical composite members.
d. Anchors and reinforcement.
e. Hardware mounting heights.
f. Glazing details.
3. Signed and sealed calculations from a registered engineer and/or
test data certifying the performance of aluminum entrances and
storefronts, including materials, sizes, thicknesses, spacing,
anchorages and attachments applicable to the system.
Thicknesses and attachments applicable to the specified
performance of the systems.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has
completed installations of aluminum storefront and entrances similar
in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrances and
storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing
systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that
have a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and
dimensional requirements of aluminum entrance and storefront work
required and are based on the specific types and models indicated.
Aluminum entrance and storefront by other manufacturers may be
considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor
and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The
burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aluminum entrance and storefront components in the
manufacturer's original protective packaging.
B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured
masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper,
tarpaulin or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation
of air.
1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending
and avoid significant or permanent damage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement
before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delay of the work.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-3
5910861-000
1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field
measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure
proper fit.
1 . 8 WARRANTY
A.
Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by
agree1ng to repair or replace units that fail
workmanship within the specified warranty period.
but are not necessarily limited to:
the manufacturer,
in materials or
Failures include,
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive
leakage or air infiltration.
2. Faulty operation.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials
beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty Period: 3 years after the date of substantial completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies
the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents,
and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
entrance and storefront systems equal to one of the following:
1. Amarlite Architectural Products.
2. Kawneer Company, Inc.
3. PPG Industries.
4. United States Aluminum Corp.
5. Vistawall Architectural Products.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer
for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required
finish; comply with ASTM B221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B209 for
aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B211 for aluminum bars, rods and
wire.
B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply
with ASTM A36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A611 for
cold-rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A570 for hot-rolled sheet and
strip.
C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of Division 8,
Section 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING section of these specifications.
D.
Fasteners: Provide fasteners
steel, zinc-plated steel, or
of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless
other material warranted by the
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-4
5910861-000
manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum
components, hardware, anchors and other components.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw- anchor into aluminum
members less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior
with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw
threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined
grommet nuts.
2 . Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for
application of hardware. For application of hardware, use
Phillips flat-head machine screws that match the finish of
member or hardware being fastened.
E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gauge) minimum dead-soft
stainless steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of
alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other
components.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high- strength aluminum brackets
and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide
nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying
with ASTM A123.
G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or
hot-dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A123.
H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable
compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying
with ASTM 02000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM 02287.
I. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable
weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with
nylon fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2.
2 .3 HARDWARE
A. General: Refer to Division 8, Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE for
requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be
provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer.
B. Provide heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or
required for operation of each door, including the following items of
sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service
required; finish to match door.
1. Offset Pivot Sets: Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Provide
exposed parts of cast aluminum alloy. Provide an intermediate
pivot for doors over 7 feet 6 inches high.
2. Single-Acting, Independently Hung, Concealed Overhead Closers:
Comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 2. Provide concealed arm and
track. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer
size, depending on door size, exposure to weather and
anticipated frequency of use. Include the following:
a. Non-hold-open.
3. Door-Mounted Holder: Flip-up type holder with rubber shoe, for
mounting on lower rail; comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 1.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-5
5910861-000
4. Cylinders are supplied under another Division 8 section for
keying into the building system.
5. Deadlocks: Mortised maximum security deadlock, with minimum
1-inch-long pivoted bolt and stainless steel strike box; comply
with ANSI A156.5, Grade 1.
6.
Pull Handles:
bent bar.
Aluminum pull handles to be 3/4-inch diameter
7. Push Bars: Aluminum push bars to be 3/4-inch diameter bent bar.
8. Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design
indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips,
coordinated with pivots and floor-concealed closers.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing
systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile
indicated. Include subframes and other reinforcing members of the
type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the
exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop-fabricate and
preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront
frame sections without exposed seams.
1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing
face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and
horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain
moisture accumulation to the exterior.
B. Entrance Door Frames: Provide tubular and channel frame entrance
door frame assemblies, as indicated, with welded or mechanical joints
in accordance with manufacturer's standards. Reinforce as necessary
to support required loads.
C. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members,
fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing
plates and concealed tie-rods or j-bolts.
1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or
panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide
snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops
anchored for nonremoval.
2. Design: Provide 1-3/4-inch-thick doors of design indicated.
a. Narrow stile (2 - inch nominal width) with custom width
rails.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront components to
designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated
standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the
drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and
minimum dimensions required, to achieve design requirements and
coordination with other work.
B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware
application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-6
5910861-000
shipment to the project site. Disassemble components only as
necessary for shipment and installation.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting,
forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage
to exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for
hardware prior to application of finishes.
2. Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until
time of installation at project site.
C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds
smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical
fini sh .
1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a
manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the
finished surface.
D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as
necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint,
or a sui table sealant, or a nonabsorpti ve plastic or elastomeric
tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings
containing lead.
F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with
hairline fit of contacting members.
G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression
weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide
sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into
door edge.
1. Provide EPDM or vinyl-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom
door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold.
2.6 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for
recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum
finishes.
C. High-Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical
conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment;
Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluorocarbon 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard
2 - coat thermo- cured system, composed of specially formulated
inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not
less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
comply with AAMA 605.2.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-7
5910861-000
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for
compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and
other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances and
storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding
with the installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for
installation.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp o~ rack of
framing members, doors, or panels. Install components 1n proper
alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated.
Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance and storefront to
comply with the following tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of
length or 1/4 inch in any total length.
2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment
between 2 identical members abutting end to end in line shall
not exceed 1/16 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal
measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing
at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other
materials.
1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed
fasteners after fabrication.
2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over
aluminum.
3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or
other masonry with alkali resistant coating.
4. Paint wood and similar absorptive material in contact with
aluminum and exposed to the elements or otherwise subject to
wetting, with two coats of aluminum house paint. Seal joints
between the materials with sealant.
E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware
items. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template
requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-8
5910861-000
F. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or
with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight
construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants,
fillers, and gaskets.
G. Refer to Division 8, Section 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING for
installation of glass and other panels indicated to be glazed into
doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer.
3 .3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation
without binding, and for weathertight closure.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after
installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements
contained in the Division 8, Section 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING for
cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of
the construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and
storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than
normal weathering, at time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08410-9
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRM!RAL BUILDING
KlRROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 08460 - AD'l"OMATIC
BNTRANCB DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1S10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1 . 2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of automatic and manual
sliding entrance doors.
1. Single sliding, with fixed sidelights, automatic and manual
units.
2. Biparting sliding, with fixed sidelights, automatic and manual
units.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Glazing requirements for entrance doors are included in
Division 8, Section 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING.
2. Lock cylinders are included in Division 8, Section 08710 - DOOR
HARDWARE .
C. Electrical connections are specified in Division 16.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Automatic entrance doors consist of the manufacturer's assembled
automatic entrance door units including entrance doors and frames,
door operator controls, powered door operators, and accessories.
Manual sliding door units shall be provided by the same manufacturer
and shall match appearance, construction and finish of automatic
units.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide entrance door assemblies that comply with
performance characteristics specified as demonstrated by testing the
manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to test
methods indicated.
B. Thermal Movement: Design the entrance door systems to provide for
expansion and contraction of the component materials. Doors shall
function normally over the specified temperature range.
1. The system shall be capable of withstanding a metal surface
temperature range of 180 degrees F (100 degrees C) without
buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural
elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance,
stress on glass, or other detrimental effects.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-1
5910861-000
C. Design Requirements: Provide automatic entrance door systems that
comply with performance requirements indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies,
anchorage and attachments in accordance with the requirements
of ASCE 7-88 for a 155 mph velocity with an importance factor
of 1.0 except as noted below.
2. All first-floor automatic entrances shall be attached to the
structural frame as follows:
a. Wave action against the first floor walls shall cause the
yielding of the connection of the components attached to
the structural concrete frame wi thout inducing forces
which exceed the capacity of the frame.
b. All attachments and anchorages connected to the structural
concrete frame below elevation 19 feet NGVO shall be
designed and installed to withstand a pressure of %55 psf.
c. The design shall include the applicable safety factors for
the items used but the sizes and spacings shall not
provide safety factors in excess of those required by
code.
D. Transmission Characteristics: Provide entrance doors with jamb and
head frames that limit air leakage to a rate not to exceed 1.25 cfm
per square foot of door area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283
at an inward pressure differential of 1.567 psf.
E. Operator: Provide operators that will open and close doors and
maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to a 20-mph
wind velocity or the equivalent inward differential pressure.
I
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each entrance required, including the manufacturer's
standard details and fabrication methods and the following:
1. Signed and sealed calculations from a registered engineer and/or
test data certifying the performance of automatic entrance
doors, including materials, sizes, thicknesses, spacing,
anchorages and attachments applicable to the system.
2. Data on operators, hardware, and accessories.
3. Roughing-in diagrams.
4. Parts lists.
5. Data on finishes and recommendations for maintenance and
cleaning of exterior surfaces.
C. Shop drawings for each entrance required, including:
1. Layout and installation details, including relationship to
adjacent work.
2. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-2
5910861-000
3. Detail sections of typical composite members.
4. Anchors and reinforcement.
5. Hardware mounting heights.
6. provisions for expansion and contraction.
7. Glazing details.
D. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power operator, signal, and
control systems differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
E. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule for entrance
doors organized into sets based on hardware specified. Coordinate
hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for
entrance doors with hardware required for the rest of the project.
Include name of the item and the manufacturer and complete
designations of every item required for each entrance.
F. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of each
specified color and finish on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or
formed shapes. Where normal color variations are anticipated,
include two or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme
limits of color variations.
G. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and service data
for door operators and control system including the name, address and
telephone number of the nearest authorized service representative.
H. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified
independent testing laboratory showing that automatic entrance door
systems have been tested in accordance with specified test procedures
and comply with performance characteristics indicated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: For installation of the automatic entrance
doors, engage an experienced installer who is an authorized
representati ve of the manufacturer for both the installation and
maintenance of the type of units required for this project.
1. Maintenance Proximity: The installer shall maintain offices and
repair or service facilities not more than 2 hours normal travel
time from the project site.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide automatic entrance doors
produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are
similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of
successful in-service performance.
C. BHMA Standard: Provide automatic entrance door units that comply
with applicable requirements of ANSI A156.10 (BHMA 1601), Power
Operated Pedestrian Door Standard.
D. UL Standard: Provide powered door operators that comply with UL 325.
E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile and
dimensional requirements of automatic entrance doors required and are
based on the specific types and models indicated. Automatic entrance
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-3
5910861-000
doors by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in
dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design
concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality
is on the proposer.
F. Emergency Exit Doors: Automatic entrance doors serving as a required
means of egress shall comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. All exterior sliding doors shall be equipped with
panic devices and have emergency breakaway swing feature.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement
before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings.
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid
delay of the work.
1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field
measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure
proper fit.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer,
agreeing to repair or replace components of the automatic entrance
door system that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily
limited to:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive
leakage or air infiltration.
2. Faulty operation of operators and hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials
beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty period: 3 years after the date of substantial completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies
that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and is in addition to, and runs concurrent with, other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
automatic entrance doors from one of the following:
1. Electro-Mechanical-Operated Sliding Units and Manual Sliding
Units:
a. Dor-O-Matic, Division of Republic Industries, Inc.
b. Horton Automatics, Division of Overhead Door Corp.
c. Stanley Magic-Door, Division of the Stanley Works.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-4
5910861-000
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer
for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required
finish. Comply with ASTM B221 for aluminum extrusions; ASTM B209 for
aluminum sheet or plate; and ASTM B211 for aluminum bars, rods, and
wire.
1. Provide main extrusions of not less than 0.125 - inch wall
thickness.
2. Provide extruded glazing stops and other applied trim extrusions
with minimum wall thickness of 0.062 inch.
B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other
noncorrosi ve metal fasteners compatible with aluminum components,
hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum
members less than 0.125-inch thick, reinforce the interior with
aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw
threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed-in, splined
grommet nuts.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for
application of hardware. For application of hardware, use
Phillips flat-head machine screws that match the finish of
member or hardware being fastened.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets
and reinforcements. Where use of aluminum is not feasible, provide
nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying
with ASTM A123.
D. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable
weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene or nylon woven pile with
nylon fabric and aluminum strip backing. Sliding weatherstripping
includes stripping at jamb rails, head rails, and meeting rails,
wherever there is no stop or lap to receive compression
weatherstripping.
E. Sealants and Gaskets: Use sealants and gaskets in fabrication,
assembly and installation of the work that are recommended and
guaranteed by manufacturer to remain permanently elastic,
nonshrinking, and nonmigrating.
1. Refer to Division 7 sections for sealants and gaskets required
for installation of door units at the project site.
F. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of Division 8,
Section 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING of these specifications for gaskets
and sealants required for glass installation at the project site.
2 .3 HARDWARE
A. General: Refer to Division 8, Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE for
requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be
provided by the automatic entrance door manufacturer.
B. Install hardware, except surface-mounted hardware, at the fabrication
plant. Remove only as required for final finishing operation, and
delivery and installation at the project site.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-5
5910861-000
2.4 DOOR OPERATORS
A. Capacity: Provide operators of the size recommended by the
manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of
exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal
traffic load for the type of occupancy indicated.
B. Housing: Provide extruded or formed aluminum housing for operators
of 0.062-inch minimum thickness with fasteners concealed when door is
in the closed position. Provide access for maintenance.
C. Adjustment Features: Operators shall be fully adjustable without
removal of the doors. Provide adjustment for opening, closing, and
checking speeds, as well as length of time the door remains open.
D. Electro-Mechanical Operators for Sliding Doors: Provide
self-contained, concealed, overhead electro-mechanical drive unit
with power opening and either power or spring closing, and checking
for both opening and closing cycles. Include connections for power
and control wiring. Provide safety release clutch for obstructed
closing. Provide for easy manual sliding when power is off. Provide
operator action as indicated.
1. Provide emergency breakaway swing feature.
2 .5 DOOR CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Microwave Scanner Motion-Detecting Control System: Provide a
self-contained, motion-detecting control system composed of a
microwave scanner sensing device to activate door operator and
horizontal photo-cell beam across door opening to prevent door from
closing until door is clear of traffic. Sensing device shall be
adjustable to provide detection patterns and sensitivity equivalent
to those required for mats. Provide housing for sensing device
finished to match finish of doors and frames.
1. Install scanners on both interior and exterior of each automatic
sliding entrance door.
2. Doors in departure lounge shall have solenoid locks for coded
remote operation.
B. Photo-Cell Control System: Provide the manufacturer's standard
horizontal beam photo-cell control system, arranged as indicated.
C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with
self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to
prevent operation of the unit when operation of the door is prevented
by lock and latch or door bolts.
D. Sliding Door Opening Width Control Switch: Provide a two-position
switch which, in the normal position, allows sliding doors to travel
to full opening width and, in the alternate position, reduces the
opening to a selected partial opening width.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Sill Configuration at Sliding Entrance Doors: Provide sill members
and bottom guide system of configuration indicated.
1. Provide recessed pin guide track system at sidelights and no
threshold across the door opening.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-6
5910861-000
2.7 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate entrance door system components to designs, sizes
and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.
B. Prefabrication: Provide entrance doors as prefabricated packaged
units complete with doors, frames, sidelights, transoms where
indicated, door operators and related components, hardware, and
accessories. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware
applications and other work before shipment to project site.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting,
forming, drilling and grinding of metal work in manner which
preven t s damage to exposed f ini sh surf ace s . For hardware,
perform these operations prior to application of finishes.
C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds
smooth to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical
finish.
D. Reinforce the work as necessary for performance requirements and for
support to the structure. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints
with nonmetallic separators to prevent "freeze-up" of joints.
E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint,
a suitable sealant, nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a
gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead.
F. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and
angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints,
with hairline fit of contacting members.
G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression
weatherstripping against fixed stops. For exterior doors without
fixed stops, provide sliding weatherstripping retained in an
adjustable strip mortised into the edge of the door.
I. Aluminum Door, Sidelight and Transom Framing: Fabricate tubular and
channel frame assemblies in configuration indicated with welded or
mechanical joints in accordance with manufacturer's standards.
Provide concealed fasteners. Reinforce internally with steel shapes
as indicated, or as necessary, to support the required loads.
1. Provide glazing systems for frames to receive lights and for
replacement of glass.
a. Provide sloped profile glazing system to receive glazing
materials indicated.
2. Fabricate frame assemblies for exterior walls with flashing and
weeps to drain penetrating moisture to the exterior. Provide
anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of
assembly from the building structure. Allow for thermal
expansion of exterior units.
2.8 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for
recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-7
5910861-000
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum
finishes.
C. High Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical
conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride- phosphate pretreatment;
Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluorocarbon 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard
2 -coat thermo-cured system, composed of specially formulated
inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not
less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
comply with AAMA 605.2.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Templates and Diagrams: Furnish templates, diagrams, and other data
to fabricators and installers of related work, as necessary, for
coordination of the automatic entrance door installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line without warp or rack of
frames or doors. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and
other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
C. Set sill members in a bed of sealant or with joint fillers or gaskets
as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with
requirements of Division 7 sections for sealants, fillers, and
gaskets, to be installed during installation of doors and frames.
1. Refer to Division 7 sections for compounds, joint fillers, and
gaskets to be installed after installation of frame assemblies.
D.
Install complete door operator system in
manufacturer's instructions, including piping,
wiring, and remote power units.
accordance with
controls, control
E. Set tracks, header assemblies, operating brackets, rails and guides
level and true to location with adequate anchorage for permanent
support.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. After repeated operation of completed installation, equivalent to 3
days use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles), readjust door
operators and controls for optimum operating condition and safety and
for a weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment,
and other moving parts.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-8
5910861-000
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean glass and aluminum surfaces promptly after installation.
Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other
substances. Exercise care to avoid damage to coatings.
1. Comply with requirements contained in Division 8, Section
08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING for cleaning and maintenance of glass.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of
the construction period to ensure that automatic entrance doors will
be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at
the time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION 08460
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS
08460-9
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE COud"rY, FLORIDA
SECTION 08525 - ALUXIRmI
ARCHITECTURAL WIRDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1S10ns of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes aluminum architectural window units fabricated
from standard extruded sections and components with some degree of
modification by the manufacturer. Window types required include:
1. Fixed windows.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum architectural window units tbat comply
with performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing
corresponding systems according to test methods indicated. Where
manufacturer's standard units have been tested, provide certification
showing compliance.
B. Test Procedures: Each type and size of required window unit shall be
tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory accredited by
AAMA.
1. Test units shall be glazed, completely assembled, and
constructed in accordance with requirements indicated.
2. Materials and workmanship in test units shall be identical to
those proposed for the proj ect . Use of nonrepresentative
measures or techniques is prohibited.
3. wind Loads: Design aluminum architectural windows, anchorage
and attachments in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7-88
for a 155 mph velocity with an importance factor of 1.0 except
as noted below. Heights of window units above grade at the
window centerline are indicated or can be determined from the
drawings. Consult with the Architect for clarification needed
to confirm required loading and test pressures. Reinforcement
of units to meet required wind loading shall be provided as part
of this section.
a. All first-floor aluminum windows shall be attached to the
structural frame as follows:
1) Wave action against the first floor walls shall
cause the yielding of the connection of the
components attached to the structural concrete frame
without inducing forces which exceed the capacity of
the frame.
2) All attachments and anchorages connected to the
structural concrete frame below elevation 19 feet
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS
08525-1
5910861-000
NGVO shall be designed and installed to withstand a
pressure of t55 psf.
3) The design shall include the applicable safety
factors for the items used but the sizes and
spacings shall not provide safety factors in excess
of those required by code.
4. Air infiltration rate of fixed architectural windows shall not
be more than 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. of window area for an inward
test pressure of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft., when tested in accordance
with ASTM E283.
5. Water Penetration: There shall be no water penetration, as
defined in ASTM E331, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331
at an inward test pressure of 8.00 lbf per sq. ft.
6.
Structural Performance:
ASTM E330 window units
requirements:
When tested
shall comply
in accordance with
with the following
a. Uniform Load Deflection: No window member shall deflect
more than 1/175 of its span at the specified design load
when tested in accordance with ASTM E330.
b. There shall be no evidence of permanent deformation or
glass breakage when tested at 1.5 times the uniform load
deflection test, with pressure applied first on one side,
then the other.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
1. Product data for each type of window required, including:
a. Construction details and fabrication methods.
b. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior
surfaces.
2.
Shop drawings for each type of
information not fully detailed
product data and the following:
a. Layout and installation details, including anchors.
window required.
in manufacturer's
Include
standard
b. Elevations of continuous work at 1/4-inch scale and
typical window unit elevations at 3/4-inch scale.
c. Full-size section details of typical composite members,
including reinforcement.
d. Glazing details.
3. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit samples of each
specified finish on 12 - inch-long sections of window members.
Where finishes involve normal color variations, include sample
sets showing the full range of variations expected.
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS
08525-2
5910861-000
B. Laboratory Test Reports: Provide test reports from a recognized
independent testing laboratory certifying performance of
architectural window units.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has
completed installation of aluminum windows similar in design and
extent to those required for the project and which has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Design Concept: The drawings indicate the size, profiles, and
dimensional requirements of the aluminum window types required and
are based on the specific type and model indicated. Aluminum windows
by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in
dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design
concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality
is on the proposer.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field
measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule wi th construction
progress to avoid delay of work.
1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field
measurements and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure
proper fit of window units.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Aluminum Architectural Window Warranty: Submit a written warranty,
executed by the window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace
window units that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. Failures include but are not necessarily
limited to:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive
leakage, or air infiltration.
2. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials
beyond normal weathering.
B. Warranty period: 3 years after the date of substantial completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies
that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other
warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
1 . Kawneer Company, Inc.
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS
08525-3
5910861-000
2. United States Aluminum Corporation.
3. Vistawell Architectural Products.
4. Wausau Metals Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the
window manufacturer for the strength, corrosion resistance, and
application of required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate
tensile strength.
B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy
adhesi ve, or other materials warranted by the manufacturer to be
noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware,
anchors, and other components of window units.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less
than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or
nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide
standard noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
C. Anchors, Clips, and Structural Reinforcement: Depending on strength
and corrosion-inhibiting requirements, fabricate anchors, clips, and
reinforcement of aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel. Anchors,
clips, and reinforcement fabricated of zinc-coated steel complying
with ASTM B633 may be used for concealed work.
D. Sealant: For sealants required wi thin fabricated window units,
provide type recommended by the window manufacturer for joint size
and movement. Sealant shall remain permanently elastic,
nonshrinking, and nonmigrating. Unless otherwise indicated, comply
with Division 7, Section 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS for selection and
installation of sealants.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated
standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and
anchorage of window units.
1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling.
2. Prepare window units for glazing.
B. Weepholes: Provide weepholes and internal passages to conduct
infiltrating water to the exterior.
2.4 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for
recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. High-Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical
conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment;
Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturer's instructions.
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS
08525-4
5910861-000
1. Fluorocarbon 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard
2-coat thermocured system, composed of specially formulated
inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not
less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
comply with AAMA 605.2.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. Verify that rough or
masonry opening is correct and the sill plate is level.
1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar,
sand and other construction debris.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for
installation of window units.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of
frames. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other
materials by complying with the requirements specified under
paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to AAMA 101.
C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint
fillers or gaskets, as shown, to provide weathertight construction.
Refer to Division 7, Section 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS for compounds,
fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units.
Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of
the work.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows.
Exercise care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes.
Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other
substances.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required
through the remainder of the construction period to ensure that,
except for normal weathering, window units will be free of damage or
deterioration at the time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 08525
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS
08525-5
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERMIRAL BUILDING
KlRROE comrrY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 08710 - DOOR
HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1S10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes items known commercially as finish or door
hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors,
except special types of unique hardware specified in the same
sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. This section includes the following:
1. Finish hardware.
2. Aluminum door hardware.
3. Thresholds.
4. Weatherstripping.
5. Electromechanical devices.
C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 6, Section 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK for
cabinet hardware.
2. Division 8, Section 08111 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES for
silencers integral with hollow metal frames.
3. Division 8, Section 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS for factory
prefitting and factory premachining of doors for door hardware.
4. Division 8, Section 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
for aluminum entrance door hardware, except cylinders.
5.
Division 8, Section 08460
automatic door openers.
AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS for
D. Products furnished but not installed under this section include:
1. Cylinders for locks on entrance doors.
2. Final replacement cores and keys to be installed by Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-1
5910861-000
B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each
item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of
operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show
compliance with requirements.
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related
work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of
door hardware.
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated,
organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete
designations of every item required for each door or opening.
Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware
item.
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to
indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door
and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes
contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible
date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must
precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the
project construction schedule. Include with schedule the
product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by
door hardware, and other information essential to the
coordinated review of schedule.
3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating
clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks
has been fulfilled.
D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings
of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for
locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch
and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware
supplier, with warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity, that
has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door
hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for
this project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware
consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-2
5910861-000
Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the work, for
consultation.
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying
requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.
C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings
that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware
that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock
Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of
doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door
and door frame labels.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to
final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions
with each item or package.
B. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place
of installation (shop or project site).
C. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the project,
but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware
items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the
work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after
installation.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of
specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's
continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of
door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following (asterisk (*) denotes scheduled
manufacturer) :
1. Butts and Hinges:
a. Hager Hinge Co.*
b. Lawrence Brothers, Inc.
c. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.
2. pi vots:
a. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.*
3 . Key Control System:
a. Key Control Systems, Inc.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-3
5910861-000
b. Telkee Inc.
4. Cylinders and Locks:
a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Di v. Black &
Decker Corp.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
c. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.*
d. Yale Security Inc.
5. Bolts:
a. Glynn-Johnson Corp.
b. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.*
c. Quality Hardware Mfg. Co., Inc.; Div. Newman Tonks, Inc.
6. Exit/Panic Devices:
a. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.*
7. Push/Pull Units:
a. Brookline Industries, Div. Yale Security Inc.
b. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Di v. Black &
Decker Corp.
c. Hager Hinge Co.
d. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.*
8. Overhead Closers:
a. Corbin & Russwin Architectural Hardware, Di v. Black &
Decker Corp.
b. LCN, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group.*
c. Yale Security Inc.
9. Door Control Devices:
a. Glynn-Johnson Corp.
b. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.*
10. Kick, Mop, and Armor Plates:
a. Construction Special ties, Inc., for Acrovyn armor plates. *
b. Hager Hinge Co.
c. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.*
d. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-4
5910861-000
11. Sliding Door Hardware Sets:
a. Grant Hardware Co.
b. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.*
12. Door Stripping and Seals:
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.*
13. Thresholds:
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.*
14. Automatic Drop Seals:
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.*
15. Sound Stripping:
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc.*
2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated
in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this section. Products are
identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation
and name of 1 manufacturer are listed for each hardware type
required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.
Provide either the product designated or, where more than one
manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in
PART 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of
the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.
2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this section or in
schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or
function are derived from the following standards. Provide
products complying with these standards and requirements
specified elsewhere in this section.
a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
b.
Bored and Preas sembled
ANSI/BHMA A156.2.
Locks
and
Latches:
c. Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3.
d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4.
e.
Auxiliary Locks
ANSI/BHMA A156.5.
and
Associated
Products:
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-5
5910861-000
f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6.
g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7.
h. Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8.
i. Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.12.
j. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13.
k. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
l. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15.
m. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16.
n. Self-Closing Hinges and pivots: ANSI/BHMA A156.17.
o. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18.
2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturer's Name Plate:
have manufacturer's name
location (omit removable
required fire-rated labels
Do not use manufacturers' products that
or trade name displayed in a visible
nameplates) except in conjunction with
and as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock
cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming
method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy,
composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable
hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each
type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish
designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or
forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published
templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not
provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal
screws, except as specifically indicated.
D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide
Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish
exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish
or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this
other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint"
surfaces to receive painted finish.
E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when
door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type
specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use
thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face
is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of
reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely.
Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide
sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-6
5910861-000
2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely
(both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only
template-produced units.
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the
following requirements:
1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled
and tapped holes.
2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch,
threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws.
4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
C.
Hinge pins:
follows:
Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as
1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins.
2. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins.
3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less
than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and
one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for
doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional
hinges.
2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required
(master, grandmaster or great-grandmaster), either new or integrated
with Owner's existing system.
B. Equip locks with cylinders for interchangeable - core pin tumbler
inserts. Furnish only temporary inserts for the construction period,
and remove these when directed.
1. Furnish final cores and keys for installation by Owner.
C. Equip locks with high-security cylinders that comply with performance
requirements for Grade 1 cylinders as listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.5 and
that have been tested for pick and drill resistance requirements of
UL 437 and are UL listed.
D. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze,
stainless steel, or nickel silver.
E. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as
otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that
is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-7
5910861-000
1. Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that
identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol, and notation, "DO
NOT DUPLICATE."
F. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
G. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for
each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster
system.
1. Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
2.
Deliver keys to Owner.
registered mail.
Deliver change and master keys via
2.6 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with
self -locking key clips, receipt forms, 3 -way visible card index,
temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all
as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent
of the number of locks required for the project.
1. Provide complete cross index system set up by key control
manufacturer, and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet
as determined by the final key schedule.
2. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
3. Provide a removable core cabinet for removable cores.
2.7 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each
latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame,
finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Lock Throw: Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch
bolts on rated fire openings.
1. Provide 1/2 - inch minimum throw of latch for other bored and
preassembled types of locks and 3/4-inch minimum throw of latch
for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead
bolts.
C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass,
bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up
to 7 feet, 0 inches in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for
doors exceeding 7 feet, 0 inches in height.
2.8 PUSH/PULL UNITS
A.
Exposed Fasteners:
for installation,
units.
Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners
thru-bolted for matched pairs but not for single
2.9 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply
with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit
depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated
frequency of use.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-8
5910861-000
1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer
unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard
arms.
2. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as
otherwise indicated.
B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for
doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped,
provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for
door opening force and delayed action closing.
C. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Provide units designed to hold
door in open position under normal usage and to release and close
door automatically under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral
electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire
detectors, provided with normally closed switching contacts.
2.10 DOOR TRIM UNITS
A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for
door trim units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping
screws.
B. Fabricate edge trim of stainless steel to fit door thickness in
standard lengths or to match height of protection plates.
C. Fabricate protection plates not more than 1-1/2 inches less than door
width on hinge side and not more than 1/2 inch less than door width
on pull side by height indicated.
1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gauge).
2. Metal Plates: Brass or bronze, 0.062 inch (U.S. 16 gauge).
3. Plastic Plates: Plastic laminate or high-impact polyethylene,
1/8-inch thick, in color selected.
2.11 HARDWARE FOR INTERIOR SLIDING DOORS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware for interior
sliding doors when not furnished as part of complete door package.
B. Operating Hardware for Bipassing Doors: Provide manufacturer's
complete set consisting of extruded aluminum overhead track,
adjustable hangers (carriages), bumpers, and floor guides designed to
accommodate the number, size, thickness, and weight of door leaves
indicated. Provide flush pulls for each door leaf.
2.12 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: Provide continuous weatherstripping on exterior doors and
smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or
scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications
and elsewhere as indicated.
2 . 13 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal
threshold unit of type, size, and profile as shown or scheduled.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-9
5910861-000
2.14 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish
for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock
sets) .
B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA or, if none
established, match the Architect's sample.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating
(if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with
manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by
referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware
finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156 .18, "Materials and
Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes
shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
1. Rust-Resistant Finish: For iron and steel base metal required
for exterior work and in areas shown as "High Humidity" areas
(and also when designed with the suffix -RR), provide
o . 2 -mil- thick copper coating on base metal before applying
brass, bronze, nickel, or chromium plated finishes.
2.15 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
A. The access control system shall be Von Duprin Series 7181 or approved
equal. System shall be furnished as described in hardware sets
complete with manufacturer's wiring diagram, necessary Belden 9842
and 8442 cable. System shall also include one 7206 printer, three
1800 W horns, 100 #7401 access cards and three MPB 840 power
supplies. Area manufacturer's representative shall program the
system and train staff on its operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable
publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply
with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by
Architect.
1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel
Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute.
2. NWWDA Industry Standard I. S.l .7, "Hardware Locations for Wood
Flush Doors."
B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is
required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to
be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage,
and reinstallation or application of surface protection with
finishing work specified in the Division 9 sections. Do not install
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the
substrates involved.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-10
5910861-000
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location.
reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary
installation and operation.
D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for
anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with
industry standards.
C.
Adjust and
for proper
E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl- rubber or
polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified
in Division 7, Section 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS.
F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions
and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not
otherwise indicated.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units
that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended
for the application made.
1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the
installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy
and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in
such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to
restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation
of heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance
of door hardware and hardware finishes.
D. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately 6 months after the date of
substantial completion, the installer, accompanied by representatives
of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control
devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall return to the
project to perform the following work:
1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to
restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified
requirements.
2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended
additions to the maintenance procedures.
3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to
faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units.
4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of
substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements
of Division 8, Section 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE, hardware set numbers
indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware
sets.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-11
5910861-000
1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product
designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable.
2. Lockset Designs: Provide one of the lockset designs designated
below [or, if by another manufacturer, one that matches those
designated] :
a. Mortise Locks: Schlage L9000 Series 02A Design.
Pair Doors 100A Exterior Maintenance
3-0 X 7-0 X 1-3/4 HM X HM
HW-1
3 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
2 Closers
2 Flush Bolts
2 Kick Plates
1 Threshold
1 Weatherstrip Set
2 Door Bottoms
1 Rain Drip
BB1199 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 NRP
L9080R 02A
4l10N-H-CUSH
458B26D
8400 8 X 34 inches
271A
303AS
216AV
346C
630
626
ALUM
626
630
Single Door 100B
3-0 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 WD X HM
2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Stop
HW-2
BBl199 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 NRP
L9080R 02A
4010-N
8400 8 X 34 inches
444B26D
630
626
ALUM
630
626
Single Door 101, 102, 106, 107 Office
3-0 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 WD X HW
2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Stop
HW-3
BB1279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2
L9050R-02A
441B26D
626
626
626
Single Door 110A Exterior Entrance
3-0 X 7-0 X 1-3/4 HM X HM
1-1/2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Stop
1 Threshold
1 Weatherstrip Set
1 Door Bottom
1 Rain Drip
HW-4
BBl199 4-1/2 X 4-1/2
L9060R 02A
4110 N-CUSH
8 X 34 inches
444B26D
271A
303AS
216AV
346C
630
626
ALUM
630
626
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-12
1 Electric Strike
1 Card Reader
1 Card Reader
1 Mount Box
1 Mount Box
2 Lock Interface
1 Magnetic Switch
6212
7181 (Interior)
7183K (Exterior)
7803 (Interior)
7804 (Exterior)
7000
MS764
Single Door 111A Interior Mechanical
3-0 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 WD X HM
HW-5
2 Pair Butts BB1279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2
1 Lockset L9080R 02A
1 Closer 4101-N
1 Kick Plate 8400 8 X 34 inches
1 Stop 444B26D
1 Threshold 151A
1 Automatic Door Button #361
Single Door 113, 114, 116, 119 Maintenance Office/Vestibule
3-6 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 WD X HM
2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Threshold
HW-6
BBl168 5 X 4-1/2 inches
L9080R 02A
4110N-CUSH
8400 8 X 40 inches
151A
Single Door 115A Electric Closet
3-6 X 7' 0" X 1-3/4 HM X HM "B" Label
2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Stop
HW-7
BBl168 5 X 4-1/2 inches
L9080R 02A
4110N-CUSH
8400 8 X 40 inches
444B26D
Single Door 118, 124
3-0 X 7-0 X 1-3/4 HM X HM "B" Label
1-1/2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Stop
HW-9
BB1279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2
L9080R 02A
4110-N
8400 8 X 34 inches
444B26D
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-13
5910861-000
630
626
626
ALUM
630
626
626
626
ALUM
630
626
626
ALUM
630
626
626
626
ALUM
630
626
5910861-000
Single Doors 120A, 120B, 120C, 121 Restroom
2-0 X 5-0 X 1-3/8 - 2-8 X 5-0 X 1-3/8 WD X HM
1 Spring Hinge
1 Pair Butts
1 Privacy Latch
HW-10
1250 4 X 4
BB1279 4 X 4
D40S Rhodes
626
626
626
Pair Doors 1100, 128A, 125 & 127
ALXAL
HW-ll
2 Cylinders 26-098
All other hardware by door supplier.
Single Doors 128B, 128C, 1280 Ticket Counter
3-10 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 WD X HM
HW-12
2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Electric Strike
2 Card Reader
2 Mount Box
2 Lock Interface
1 Magnetic Switch
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Stop
BBl168 5 X 5 inches
L9060R 02A
6212
7183K
7804
7000
MS764
4110N-CUSH-DEL
8400 10 X 44 inches
444B26D
626
626
630
ALUM
630
626
Single Doors 129A, 129B, 129C
3-10 X 7-0 X 1-3/4 HM X HM
1-1/2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Stop
1 Threshold
1 Weatherstrip Set
1 Door Bottom
1 Rain Drip
HW-13
BBl168 5 X 4-1/2 inches
L9080R 02A
4110N-CUSH
8400 12 X 44 inches
444B26D
271AV
303AS
216AV
346C
630
626
ALUM
630
626
Horizontal Sliding Doors 131A, 1310 Exterior
4-0 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 AL X AL
HW-14
1 Cylinder
1 Magnetic Lock
2 Card Readers
2 Mount Boxes
2 Lock Interface
26-098
SL725 X STR-5
7183K
7804
7000
626
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-14
5910861-000
1 Panic Device 3347EO
1 Magnetic Switch MS766
All Other Hardware by Door Supplier
626
Single Doors 200A, 200B
3-0 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 WD X HM
2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Stop
HW-15
1279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2
L9050R 02A
441B26D
626
626
Single Doors 202A and 202B
3-0 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 WD X HM
2 Pair Butts
1 Lockset
1 Closer
1 Kick Plate
1 Stop
HW-16
BB1279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2
L9050R 02A
4110-N
8400 8 X 34 inches
441B26D
626
626
630
626
Single Doors 204, 205 Restroom
3-0 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 WD X HM
2 Pair Butts
1 Privacy Latch
1 Stop
HW-17
BB1279 4-1/2 X 4-1/2
L9040 02A
441B26D
626
626
626
Slide Doors 207
2-6 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 (4 panel) WD X HM
HW-18
2 Set Slide Track
4 Pulls
40-3760
222B26D
626
Single Doors 210A, 210B, 203, 211, 201
3-0 X 8'-9-1/2" X 1-3/4 AL X AL
HW-19
1 Set Pivots
1 Pivot
1 Set Pulls
1 Set Pulls
1 Closer
2 Cylinders
1 Stop
1 Threshold
All Other Hardware
147
M19
4L-BTB
#130S LAR
411 0 - N - COSH
26-098
444B26D
171A
by Door Supplier
630
630
ALUM
626
626
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-15
5910861-000
Gate
HW-20
2 Each Hinges
1 Pair
1 Lockset
1 Magnetic Lock
All Other Hardware by
1250
HB953
D80RD RHO
SL725 -VEHM-7
Gate Supplier
630
626
At Upstairs Gate:
2 Card Readers
2 Mount Boxes
2 Lock Interface
1 Magnetic Switch
7183K
7804
7000
764
Coiling Doors and Coiling Grille
HW-21
1 Cylinder
26-098
626
Horizontal Sliding Doors
131B, 131C AL X AL
HW-22
1 Cylinder
1 Magnetic Lock
2 Card Readers
2 Mount Boxes
2 Lock Interface
1 Magnetic Switch
All Other Hardware
26-098
SL725 X STR5
7183K
7804
7000
MS764
by Door Supplier
626
END OF SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-16
5910861-000
DRATBOR AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 08800 - GLASS
AND GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1 . 2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of glass and glazing work is indicated on drawings and
schedules.
B. Types of work in this section include glass and glazing for:
1. Window units.
2. Storefront construction.
3. Entrances and other doors.
4. Unframed mirrors.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated and
installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading and
impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or
breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials
and other defects in the work.
1. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from an
ambient temperature range of 120 degrees F (67 degrees C) and
from a consequent temperature range wi thin glass and glass
framing members of 180 degrees F (100 degrees C) .
2. Wind Loading: Provide glass system in accordance with the
requirements of ASCE 7-88 for a 155 mph velocity with an
importance factor of 1.0.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each glazing
material and fabricated glass product required, including
installation and maintenance instructions.
B. Samples: Submit, for verification purposes, 12-inch square samples
of each type of glass indicated except for clear single pane units,
and 12-inch long samples of each color required (except black) for
each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or
gasket sample between 2 strips of material representative of
adjoining framing system in color.
C. Certificate: Submi t certificates from respective manufacturers
attesting that glass and glazing materials furnished for project
comply with requirements.
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800-1
5910861-000
1. Separate certification will not be required for glazing
materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating
type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality
control program involving a recognized certification agency or
independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: Submit statement from
sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have
been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and
interpreting test results relative to material performance, including
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to
obtain adhesion.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass
Marketing Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual"
except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to
those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not
otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and
handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to
prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing
materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of
temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other
causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient
and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted
by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due
to rain, frost, condensation or other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
1. Manufacturers of Clear and Tinted Float Glass:
a. Ford Glass Division.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.
c. LOF Glass, Inc.
d. PPG Industries, Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Heat-Treated Glass:
a. Ford Glass Division.
b. Guardian Industries Corp.
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800-2
5910861-000
c. LOF Glass, Inc.
d. PPG Industries, Inc.
2 .2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with
ASTM C1036 requirements, including those indicated by reference to
type, class, quality, and, if applicable, form, finish, mesh and
pattern.
B. Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass which
complies with ASTM C1048 requirements, including those indicated by
reference to kind, condition, type, quality, class, and, if
applicable, form, finish, and pattern.
C. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings
indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with
recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated
or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer
for application indicated.
2.3 PRIMARY GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1
(clear), Quality q3 (glazing select) .
B.
Tinted Float Glass: Type I (transparent glass, flat),
(tinted heat absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3
select), and as follows:
Class 2
{glazing
1. Blue-Green or Green: Manufacturer's standard tint, with visible
light transmittance of 74-76 percent and shading coefficient of
0.69-0.71 for 1/4-inch thick glass.
C. Mirrors: Clear float glass, 1/4 inch, with silver coating, copper
protective coating, and 2 mil thick paint coating; F.S. DD-G-411.
2.4 HEAT-TREATED GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturing Process: Manufacture heat-treated glass as follows:
1. By horizontal (roller hearth) process with roll wave distortion
parallel with bottom edge of glass as installed, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Uncoated Tinted Heat-Treated Float Glass: Condition A (uncoated
surfaces), Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 2 (tinted heat
absorbing and light reducing), Quality q3 (glazing select), with tint
color and performance characteristics for 1/4-inch thick glass
matching those indicated for non-heat-treated tinted float glass;
kind as indicated below:
1. Kind FT (fully tempered) at all window types except W9 and W10.
2.5 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES
A. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the
following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven
compatibility with other materials with which they will come
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800-3
5910861-000
into contact, including glass products, and glazing channel
substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as
demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass
manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants and tapes which
have performance characteristics suitable for applications
indicated and conditions at time of installation.
3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard
chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated
which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those for
Type, Grade, Class and Uses.
4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
B. One-Part Non-Acid-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS,
Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to uses indicated, 0; and
complying with the following requirements for modulus and additional
joint movement capability.
1. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more
than 75 psi at 100 percent elongation when tested per ASTM D412
after 14 days at 77 degrees F (20 degrees C) and 50 percent
relative humidity.
C. Preformed Butyl- Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Provide manufacturer's
standard solvent-free butyl-polyisobutylene formulation with a solids
content of 100 percent; complying with AAMAA 804.1; in extruded tape
form; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous
surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on one side; with or
wi thout continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape
and glass for application indicated.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
1. One-Part Non-Acid Curing Medium-Modulus Silicone Glazing
Sealant:
a. "Dow Corning 795"; Dow Corning Corp.
b. "Silpruf"; General Electric Corp.
c. "Gesil"; General Electric Corp.
d. "Spectrum 2"; Tremco, Inc.
2. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape Without Spacer Rod:
a. "Chem-Tape 40"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
b. "Extru-Seal"; Pecora Corp.
c. "PTI 303" Glazing Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc.
d. "Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc.
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800-4
5910861-000
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility
with surfaces contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for
compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer
hardness.
Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone
extrusions, as required for compatibility
size, shape and hardness recommended
manufacturers for application indicated.
E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for
compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to
limit lateral movement (side-walking) of glass.
D.
blocks, or continuous
with glazing sealant, of
by glass and sealant
F. Compressible Filler Rods: Closed-cell or waterproof-jacketed rod
stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, flexible and ;esilient,
with 5-10 psi compression strength for 25 percent deflection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Require glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for
compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including
those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and
functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or
edge clearances i and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain
glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to
performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass,
immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly
bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where
elastomeric sealants are indicated for use.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers,
of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials,
except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including
those of referenced glazing standards.
B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to
provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face
clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of
installation.
C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use
a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass
corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800-5
5910861-000
to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass
with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one
horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so
that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and
dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of
kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and
appearance.
D. Apply primers to j oint surfaces where required for adhesion of
sealants, as determined by proconstruction sealant - substrate testing.
3.4 GLAZING
A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one
quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner
not closer than 6 inches from corner, unless otherwise required. Set
blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead
use.
B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to
preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50
united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing
tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8-
inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to
sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less
than final compressed thickness of tape.
C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced
glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit
manufacturer.
D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern, draw,
bow and similar characteristics.
E. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as
recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers, to prevent sealant
from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from adhering to
joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for
optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure
complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
G. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash"
away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude
slightly out of channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture
pockets.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation by
use of crossed streamers attached to framing and held away from
glass. Do not apply markers to surfaces of glass. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting
from construction operations. If, despite such protection,
contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove
immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and
other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800-6
5910861-000
not less often than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali
deposits or staining. When examination reveals presence of these
forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded
or damaged in other ways during construction period, including
natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
E. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled
for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion
in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
GLASS AND GLAZING
08800-7
0
0
0
~
CO
CO (/)
0 ~ CD ....
~ a: 0 0)
en < ('I) >
::! I ;j
LO w <C 0
a: - ...J
a. 0) :t:
0) 0
W ..c::
(/) ~
<( 0) c::
0) Cll
(j) CD
<< <<
~ ..... I
J: ..... C\I ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) .qo ..... It) CD CD
~ ~
..J en en
..J .qo <C <C <C <C <C .qo 0
en ..... CD CD CD CD CD ..... C\I C\I .....
(/)
..J ~
< CD
w Iii ::! en
< ('I) ('I)
W :E c -, ..... CD CD CD CD CD ..... ('I) ('I) 0) CD CD
-oJ ~
:J u. c ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
0 ~ ('I) Ci) (j) (/) Ci) ('I) (j) en
w J: ..... CD CD CD CD CD ..... ..... ..... 0) CD CD
J: w
a. <<
0 ~ 0 (/) (/) (/) (j) (j) (/) (j) (/) (j) (j) (j)
en !;( ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ...J ...J ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~ ~ ;j
::! ...J
W :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: (/) (/) < :I: :I: :I:
~ ..J
~ - W
<( CD I I I I I I I I I I I I I
<
c: 0 ..J
LL 0-
a: ->
< ::> I I 0 0 0 0 I I I I 0 0 0
0 0 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3:
Z Z ..J
<( 0 (/)
(/) ~
:I: < I I I I I I I I I Z I I I
c: i ..J
C.!' i=
0 !;( ::!
0 < ~ 0 0 0 0 0 ~ ...J ...J ::> 0 0 0
:E ::! 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: ~ ~ ..J 3: 3: 3:
a: :I: :I: (/) (j) <
0 ~ w (/)
a. D. <<
~ u.. ...J ...J ...J ...J 0 0 <C ...J ...J ...J
0 u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. () () 0 u.. u.. u..
~ " " " " " " " " " " "
() .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo I I .qo .qo .qo .qo
:I: M - - - M - - - - - -
('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I)
l- I I I I I I I I I I I
..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....
I- " " " " " " " " "
C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I
J: - - - - - - - - -
W C.!' " ... ... ... ... ... " " " ... ... ... ...
0 I I I I I 0 0 0 I I I I
N jjj I m m m m m I I I m m m m
J: en I I I 8 8 8 I I 8 8 I I 9- I I
J: ;.... Co Co Co Co Co ;.... .qo ~ Co Co Co Co
cd 9 (j) (j) (/) (j) (j) (j)
J: ::> ::> ::> ::> ::> ::>
b .., " " .. ~ .. .. .. " .. " .. ..
en 0 0 0 ~ ~ 0 0 ~ ~ 0 0 0 << 0 ~ CD 0
. I I I 0 0 0 I I 0 0 I I I I 0 I I
c: ~ ;f (w) c., c., z z z c., ('I) z z ('I) .qo ~ (w) z c., (w)
..J
a: 0
0 CD
0 ::! <( a:l <( a:l U 0 <(
c ~ 0 0 ~ C\J (W) ~ Ll) <0 " ex) 0') 0 0 0 0 ~ C\J (W) (W)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
.......
~I
WC"I
CJ~
<(00
0..0
0
0
0
~
CO
CO (/)
0 ~ CD CD CD
a: ....
~ < 0 0) 0 0
en ::! ('I) > ('I) ('I) ....
LO I ;j I I 0)
w <C 0 <C <C
a: ...J (/)
- - - 0
a. 0) :t: 0) 0) C3
W 0) 0 0) 0)
..c:: ..c:: ..c:: "C
<( (/) ~ (/) (j) 0)
0) c: 0) 0) >-
0) Cll 0) 0) Cll
(j) CD (j) (j) Q5
<< << << << 0
;:
C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C\I
J: .....
CD ,.... CD 0) CD ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... 0) ..... It) ..... ..... .....
~
..J Ci) I
..J
en <C 0 0
,.... ,.... ,.... ,.... ,.... CD ..... .....
(/)
..J ~
~ CD ~ ~
W ::! (/) Ci) (/)
<
W :E c -, CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD CD 0) 0) CD
-oJ ~
:J c ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
u. < I I I I I
0 W en (/) en Ci) en Ci) en
W J: CD CD CD CD CD CD 0) 0) CD
J: w
a.
0 ~ (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (/) (j) (j) (/) (/) (j) << (j) << (/)
en I- ~ ~
< ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ::l ~ ::l ~
W ::! :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: :I: ...J :I: ...J :I:
< <
~ I- ..J Z Z
- w
<( a: CD I ~ I ~ I I I I I I
<
c: 0 ..J 0 0
C\I C\I
LL 0-
a: ->
0 :;: ::> 0 I I I 0 I I I I I I I 0 I 0
0 3: 3: 3: 3:
Z Z ..J
<( 0 (/)
:I: (/) ~ ~
< I I I I I I I I I I I I I
c: i ..J Z Z
C.!' i= i=
0 !;( ::! ::!
0 < 0 ~ ~ ~ 0 0 0 0 0 0 ~ ::> 0 ::> 0
:E ::! 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: ..J 3: ..J 3:
a: :I: :I: :I: :I: < <
0 ~ w (j) (j)
a. <<
~ ...J ...J ...J ...J ...J ...J ...J ...J (/) ...J 0 <C ~
u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. ~ u.. ~ 0 u..
~ " " " " " " " " " " " " " " "
() .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo co co co co co .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo
:I: - - M - - - - - - M - M M - -
('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I)
l- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....
I- " " " " " .. " ..
~ C\I C\I C\I ~ ~ C\I C\I
J: - - - - -
W C.!' ... " ... " ... .. .. .. " " " ... ... .- .- ...
t::! I 0 I 0 I 0 0 0 0 0 0 I I I I I
jjj m I m I m I I I I I I m m m m m
J: I I I I I I I I
(j) J: Co ;.... Co 8 ;.... Co in It) It) It) in 8 8 ;.... Co Co Co Co Co
cd (/) (j) (j)
J: ::> ::> ::> "
b " " " " " " " " " " " " 0
en CD CD 0 ~ 0 0 co 0 0 0 co ~ ~ 0 << 0 << << .....
~ I I I 0 I I I I I I I 0 0 I I I
a: ('I) ('I) (w) z ('I) ('I) C\I N N N C\I z z ('I) ('I) (w)
..J
a: 0
0 CD
0 ::! <( <( a:l U <( aJ <( <( aJ
c ~ ~ Ll) <0 " ex) 0') 0 0 0 ~ ~ C\J (W) ~ Ll) <0 " ex) ex)
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
C\J('.J
WI
CJ~
<(0'1
o..~
0
0
0
~
CO Q5 Q5 Q5
CO (/) c:: c:: c::
0 Cll Cll Cll
~ D. D. D. CD CD CD CD CD
~ a: 0 0 0 0 0
en < E E E ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I)
::! .... .... I I I I I
LO 0) 0) 0 0 0
w (/) (/) U) (/) (/) <C <C <C <C <C
a: 0 0 c: c:: c: - - - - -
a. 0 U Cll Cll Cll 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
.... .... .... 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
W "C "C ~ ~ ~ ..c:: ..c:: ..c:: ..c:: ..c::
<( 0) 0) N N N (/) (j) (j) (/) (/)
>- >- 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
~ Cll ..c:: ..c:: ..c:: 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
Q5 - - -
0) ~ ~ ~ (j) (/) (/) (/) (/)
0 0 << << << << <<
~ C\I C\I ('I) ('I) ('I) ..... .qo .qo .qo .qo It) It) CD CD 0) ,.... ,....
J: ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... C\I ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....
~ ~ ~
..J I I Ci) (/) Ci) I
..J
en .qo .qo .qo 0 0 0 0 C\I C\I
..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....
(/) ~ ~
..J ~ ~ ~ ~
~ CD en Ci)
w ::! en Ci) Ci)
< ('I) ('I) ('I) ,.... (j) ..... .....
W :E c -, CD CD ..... ..... ..... ..... 0) 0) 0) 0) CD CD ..... CD CD ..... CD CD
-oJ ~
:J u. c ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
0 ~ en Ci) ('I) ('I) ('I) CD en en ..... en en ..... en Ci)
w J: CD CD ..... ..... ..... ..... 0) 0) 0) 0) CD CD ..... CD CD ..... CD CD
J: w
a. D. D. D. I << << << <<
0 ~ (j) (j) (j) (j) (j) (j) (j) (j) (j) (/) (j) (j)
en !;( ~ ~ ~ ...J ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~ ::l ::l ::l ::l ~ ::l ::l
W ::! ...J ...J ...J ...J ...J ...J
:I: :I: :I: :I: :I: (j) < < < < :I: -:l < :I: :I: < :I: :I:
~ ~ ..J
- W
<( CD I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
c: 0 ~
LL 0-
a: ->
0 :;: ::> 0 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I
0 3: 3: 0 0
Z Z ..J 3: 3:
<( 0 (/)
:I: (/) ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
< I I I I I I I I I
c: i ..J Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
C.!' i= i= i= i= i= i= i= i=
0 !;( ::! ::! ::! ::! ::! ::!
0 < 0 0 ~ ~ ~ (j) ::> ::> ::> ::> 0 0 ::> 0 0 ::> 0 0
:E ::! 3: 3: ..J ..J ..J ..J 3: 3: ..J 3: 3: ..J 3: 3:
a: :I: :I: :I: (j) < < < < < <
0 ~ w (/) (/) (j) (j)
a. > > >
~ ~ ~ D. D. D. ~ ~ ~ ~ ...J
u.. u.. u.. u.. u.. (!) 0 0 0 0 u.. u.. (!) u.. u.. (!) u.. u..
~ " " " " " " " .. .. " .. " " .. .. .. " ..
() .qo ~ .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo ~ .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo .qo
:I: - - - M - - - - - - - M - - - -
('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I)
l- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .....
l- I: I: I: I: I: " I: " I: I: I: I: I: I: I:
C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I C\I
J: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
W C.!' ... ... .. .. .. ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .- ... ... ... ... ...
I I 0 0 0 I I I I I I I I I I I I I
t::! jjj m m I I I m m m m m m m m m m m m m
J: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
(j) J: Co Co ;.... ;.... ;.... Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co Co 8
cd (/)
J: .. .. .. .. .. ::>
en b 0 0 0 0 0 << .. .. .. .. .. .. ~
..... ..... ..... ..... ..... << << << 0 0 << 0 0 0 0
~ I I I I I I I I I I I 0
a: ('I) c., ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) ('I) (w) ('I) ('I) c., Z
..J
a: 0
0 CD
0 ::! U 0 <( aJ U <( <( aJ U 0 <( aJ <( aJ
c ~ ex) ex) 0') 0') 0') 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ 0 0 ~ C\J C\J (W) ~ Ll) <0
C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J (W) (W) (W) (W) (W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J
('I) (V)
wJ-
CJO"I
<(0"1
o..~
0
0
0
~
CO
CO (/)
0 ~ CD CD .qo .qo
~ a: CD 0 0 0 0
en < 0 ('I) ('I) CD CD
::! ('I) I I I I
LO w I <C <C <C <C
. . a: <C - - - -
a. - 0) 0) 0) 0)
0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
W 0) ..c:: ..c:: ..c:: ..c::
<( ..c:: (j) (j) (j) (/)
(/) 0) 0) 0) 0)
0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
0) (j) (/) (/) (/)
(j) << << << <<
~ CO 0) ..... 0) 0
J: ..... ..... C\I ..... C\I .....
..J I <<
..J C\I C\I
en ..... .....
(/) ~ ~
..J ~
< CD (/) (j) <<
w Iii ::! Ci)
W :E < ..... ..... It) ('I)
c -, CD ..... .qo ..... ..... .....
-oJ ~ ~
:J c ~
U. < I en <<
0 w Ci) ..... ..... ('I)
W J: CD ..... .qo ..... .....
J: w
a. I I
0 ~ (/) (/) 0
en I- ~ ...J ~
< ~ ~ ::l ~ ::l I ~ I
W ::! ...J ...J
:I: :I: < (/) < :I:
~ I- ..J Z Z
f-- W
<( a: CD I ~ I ~ I I I I
<
c: 0 ..J 0 0
C\I C\I
LL 0-
a: ->
0 :;: ::> 0 I I I I I I I
0
Z Z ..J 3:
<( 0 (/)
:I: (/) ~ ~
< I I Z I Z I I I
a: I- ..J
~ C.!' i= i=
0 !;( ::! ::!
0 < 0 0 ::> ...J ::> ...J ~ ...J
:E ::! 3: 3: ..J ~ ..J ~ ~
a: < (/) < (/) :I: (/)
0 ~ w w w
a. !;( ...J !;(
~ ...J 0 u..
(/) u.. (!) U (!) C.!' 0 C.!'
~ " " "
() co .qo I I I .qo I
:I: M - -
('I) ('I)
l- I I I
..... ..... .....
I- .. " " C\I ..
C\I C\I C\I - C\I
J: - - - ... -
W .- ... ... I ... " " "
C.!' I I I 0 I 0) 0 .qo
N iIi m m m ... m I I I
J: en I 8 I I I I f?
J: Co Co Co Co Co Co ;.... CD
cd (/) q (j) . .
J: ::> a: ::> 'i' U)
I
b " .. " << ~ .., ..,
en CD ~ 0 << 0 ..
... .
~ I 0 I I I 0 '0; '0;
c: C\I Z (w) ;.... M Z l1. l1.
..J
a: 0
0 CD
0 ::! <( a:l
c > " ex) 0') 0 0 ~ C\J 0 0 ~
(/) 0 0 0 ~ ~ ~ ~ 0 0 0
C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J C\J ('I) ~ ~
~.q-
w'
CJ~
<(0'1
o..~
5910861-000
DRATHOJ!I AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TERIIIRAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 09200 - LATH
AND PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Metal lath and furring.
2. Portland cement plastering (stucco).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data consisting of manufacturer's product specifications and
installation instructions for each product, including data showing
compliance with the requirements.
C. Samples for verification purposes in units at least 12 inches square
of each type of finish indicated, in sets for each color, texture,
and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in
these characteristics.
D. Material Certificates: Submit producer's certificate for each kind
of plaster aggregate indicated evidencing that materials comply with
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of
suspension system components for suspended soffits with other work
supported by or penetrating through soffit.
B. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of plaster work,
fabricate panels for each type of finish and application required to
verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
aesthetic effects of application as well as qualities of materials
and erection. Build mock-ups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of work.
1. Erect 4-foot-by-4-foot mock-up of wall using materials indicated
for final work. Include horizontal and vertical reveal joint,
centered, with tinted stucco below and white stucco above.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects including
color, texture, and workmanship to be expected in completed
work.
3. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of
plaster work.
LATH AND PLASTER
09200-1
5910861-000
4. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed
condition as a standard for judging completed plaster work.
a. When directed, demolish and remove mock-ups from project
site.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles
bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer.
B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry,
protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other
causes. Neatly stack gypsum lath flat to prevent deformation.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of
referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of
plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and
after application of plaster.
B.
Protect contiguous work from
deterioration and other harmful
plastering.
soiling, spattering, moisture
effects that might result from
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
1. Expanded Metal Lath:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO)
b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
c. United States Gypsum Co.
2. Accessories:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
c. Keene Corp.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL STUDS AND RUNNERS (TRACKS)
A. Non-Load {Axial} Bearing Studs and Runners: ASTM C645 and
complying with following requirements for minimum thickness of base
metal (uncoated) and other characteristics. Provide galvanized units
for exterior meeting ASTM A525.
1. Stud Thickness: 20 gauge.
LATH AND PLASTER
09200-2
5910861-000
2. Stud Depth: 6 inches.
2.3 LATH
A. Expanded Metal Lath: Fabricate expanded metal lath from zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet to produce lath complying with ASTM C847 for
type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below.
1. Diamond Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements:
a. Configuration: Self-furring.
1) Weight: 2.5 lbs. per sq. yd.
b. Paper Backing: Provide asphalt - impregnated paper
factory-bonded to back and complying with FS UU-B-790, for
Type I, Grade D (vapor permeable), Style 2, except where
solid backing exists.
2. Rib Lath: Comply with the following requirements:
a. Configuration: Rib depth of 3/8 inch.
1) Weight: 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd.
B. Lath Attachment Devices: Devices of material and type required by
referenced standards and recommended by lath manufacturer for secure
attachment of lath to framing members and of lath to lath.
2.4 PLASTER ACCESSORIES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C1063; coordinate
depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of coats required.
B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded large-mesh diamond mesh lath
fabricated from zinc-alloy or welded wire mesh fabricated from
0.0475-inch-diameter zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially
formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on
exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement.
C. Metal Corner Beads: Small nose corner beads fabricated from zinc
alloy, with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond lath to allow full
encasement by plaster.
D. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges and
removable protective tape, of the following material:
1. Material: Zinc alloy.
E. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below:
1. Material: Zinc alloy.
2 . One - piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in
M-shaped configuration, with expanded flanges.
2.5 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Base Coat Cements: Type as indicated below:
1. Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I or II.
LATH AND PLASTER
09200-3
5910861-000
B. Finish Coat Cement: Type as indicated below:
C. Factory-Prepared Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard product
requiring addition of water only.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco manufactured by United States
Gypsum Co.
2. Color: Provide white color from 2 feet, 0 inches above finish
floor to top of wall. Provide tinted color below 2 foot, O-inch
joint. Tinted color to match Architect's sample cream.
D. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C206, Type
S, or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C207, Type S.
E. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C897.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Drinkable and free of
substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster,
lath, or accessories.
B. Bonding Agent for Portland Cement Plaster: ASTM C932.
2.7 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C926 for portland cement plaster base and
finish coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials, and
other requirements indicated.
B. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion
materials for respective base coats in parts by volume for
cementitious materials and in parts by volume per sum of cementitious
materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements
for each method of application and plaster base indicated. Adjust
mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability.
1. Three-Coat Work Over Metal Lath: Base coats as indicated below:
a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts
lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand.
b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts
lime, 3 to 5 parts sand.
2.
Two-Coat Work Over Concrete Unit Masonry:
indicated below:
Base coats as
a. Base Coats: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts
lime, 3 to 4 parts sand.
C. Factory- Prepared Portland Cement Finish Coats: Add water only;
,comply with finish coat manufacturer's directions.
2.8 MIXING
A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to
comply with applicable referenced application standard and with
recommendations of plaster manufacturer.
LATH AND PLASTER
09200-4
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 INSTALLATION OF LATHING AND FURRING, GENERAL
A. Portland Cement Plaster Lathing and Furring Installation Standard:
Install lathing and furring materials indicated for portland cement
plaster to comply with ASTM C1063.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations
in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable published
recommendations of gypsum plaster manufacturer or, if not available,
of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" publiShed by United States Gypsum
Co.
C. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building
structure horizontally and where partition/wall work abuts overhead
structure, isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to
prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building
structure. Install slip- or cushion-type joints to absorb
deflections but maintain lateral support.
1. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently,
and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or
accessories.
3 .2 INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL METAL FURRING
A. Metal Furring to Receive Metal Lath: Comply with requirements of
ML/SFA "Specification for Metal Lathing and Furring" applicable to
each installation condition indicated.
3 .3 METAL LATHING
A. Install expanded metal lath for the following applications where
plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type,
configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials
indicated that comply with referenced lathing installation standards.
1. Suspended and furred ceilings using 3.4 Ibs. per sq. yd. minimum
weight diamond mesh lath.
2. Vertical metal framing and furring.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation
standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type
indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight
joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster
bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering.
B. Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster: Provide the following types
to comply with requirements indicated for location:
1. Corner Bead: Install at external corners.
2. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work unless
otherwise indicated.
LATH AND PLASTER
09200-5
5910861-000
3. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated
or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following
criteria and approved by Architect.
a. Where an expansion or control joint occurs in surface of
construction directly behind plaster membrane.
b. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend
joints full width or height of plaster membrane.
c. For Portland Cement Plaster: Where, in surfaces of
soffits and walls, distances between and areas within
control joints exceed, respectively, the following
measurements:
1) 10 feet in either direction and 100 sq. ft.
3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats and use bonding
compound or agent to comply with requirements of referenced plaster
application standards for conditioning of monolithic surfaces.
B. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 0 inches
from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10
foot, O-inch straightedge placed at any location on surface.
C. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of
other work so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the
other.
D. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or
accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated.
Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut base
coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at
the junctures with metal.
E. Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as
required by referenced standards.
3.6 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATION
A. Portland Cement Plaster Application Standard: Apply portland cement
plaster materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C926.
B. Number of Coats: Apply portland cement plaster, of composition
indicated, to comply with the following requirements:
1. Use 3-coat work over the following plaster bases:
a. Metal lath.
2. Use 2-coat work over the following plaster bases:
a. Concrete unit masonry.
b. Concrete, cast-in-place or precast when surface complies
with ASTM C926 for plaster bonded direct to solid base.
Where surface does not comply, provide metal lath.
3. Finish Coat: Floated finish unless otherwise indicated; match
Architect's sample for texture and color.
LATH AND PLASTER
09200-6
5910861-000
C. Moist-cure portland cement plaster base and finish coats to comply
with ASTM C926, including recommendations for time between coats and
curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations."
3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, point up, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate
other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair
or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and
check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar
defects and where bond to the substrate has failed.
B. Sand smooth-troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and
arrises.
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly
remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are
not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces that
have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering
work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials,
containers, and equipment and clean floors of plaster debris.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
suitable to Installer that ensure plaster work's being without damage
or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 09200
LATH AND PLASTER
09200-7
5910861-000
DRATHON AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 09250 - GYPSUM
DRYWALL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is
indicated on drawings.
B. This section includes the following types of gypsum board
construction:
1. Steel framing members to receive gypsum board.
2. Gypsum board screw-attached to steel framing and furring
members.
3. Glass mesh mortar units for application of tile.
4. Cementitous board for exterior soffit application.
C. Gypsum board shaft walls are specified in Division 9, Section
09270 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C11 and GAS05
for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise
defined in this section or other referenced standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and
construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire
resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E119 by a testing and
inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those
indicated by reference to GA File No's. in GA-600 "Fire
Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire
Resistance Directory" or in listing of other testing and
agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and
related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 -1
5910861-000
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing
brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected
against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack
gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.
Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain
environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board
to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum
board to framing, maintain not less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) .
For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board maintain not
less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for 48 hours prior to
application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.
C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying
joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to
prevent materials form drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
a. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
b. Incor, Inc.
c. United States Gypsum Co.
2. Gypsum Boards and Related Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
c. United States Gypsum Co.
3. Exterior Cementitous Board:
a. United States Gypsum Co.
b. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
c. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-2
5910861-000
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Provide components which comply with ASTM C754 for
materials and sizes, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete Inserts: Inserts designed for attachment to concrete forms
and for embedment in concrete, fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials, with holes or loops for attachment of hanger wires and
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 3 times that
imposed by ceiling construction, as determined from testing per ASTM
E488, conducted by an independent testing laboratory.
C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
D.
Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with
rust-inhibitive paint.
Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with
rust-inhibitive paint.
E.
F. Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8-inch wide,
formed from 0.0635-inch thick galvanized steel sheet complying with
ASTM A446, Coating Designation G90, with bolted connections and 5/16-
inch diameter bolts.
G. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0598-inch minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal and 7/16-inch wide flanges, protected with
rust-inhibitive paint.
1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 Ibs per 1000 ft.
2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lbs per 1,000 ft.
3. Provide galvanized channels for exterior application.
H. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C645, with flange edges bent
back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch minimum lip
(return), minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum
depth as follows:
1. Thickness: 25 gauge.
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8
inch, and minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Thickness: 25 gauge.
J. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, cast-in-place concrete inserts or
other devices appropriate for anchorage to the form of structural
framing indicated and whose suitability for use interrod has been
proven through standard construction practices or certified test
data.
1. Size devices to develop full strength of hanger but not less
than 3 times calculated angle loading.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-3
5910861-000
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645, with flange edges of studs bent
back 90 degrees and doubled over to form 3/16-inch minimum lip
(return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness: 25 gauge.
2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645, hat - shaped, depth and
minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal as follows:
1. Depth: 7/8 inch.
2. Thickness: 25 gauge.
C. Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, adjustable, fabricated from
corrosion-resistant steel sheet complying with ASTM C645, minimum
thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw
attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for
furring.
D. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product
designed to reduce sound transmission, complying with ASTM C645 for
base metal, finish and widths of face and fastening flange,
fabricated to form 1/2 inch deep channel of the following
configuration:
1. Single-Leg Configuration: Asymmetric-shaped channel with face
connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web).
2. Double-Leg Configuration: Hat-shaped channel, with 1-1/2-inch
wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded
metal legs (webs).
3. Configuration: Either one indicated above.
E. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard zee-shaped furring
members with slotted or nonslotted web, fabricated from hot-dip
galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A525, Coating Designation
G60; with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch,
face flange of 1-1/4 inch, wall-attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and of
depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
F. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion
resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten
steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved;
complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers
for applications indicated.
2.4 INSTALLATION OF SOFFIT SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Preparation and Coordination: Coordinate installation of soffit
suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems to
ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have
been installed to receive hangers in a manner that will develop their
full strength and at spacings required to support soffit.
B. Hanger Installation: Attach hangers to structure above ceiling to
comply with referenced standards.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 -4
5910861-000
C. Install ~uspension system components of sizes and spacings indicated
but not ~n smaller sizes or greater spacings than those required by
referenced and furring installation standards.
1. Hanger Rods: Space hangers not over 4 feet, 0 inches o. c.
parallel with and not over 3 feet, 0 inches perpendicular to
direction of carrying channels, unless otherwise indicated, and
within 6 inches of carrying channel ends.
2. Carrying Channels: Space carrying channels not over 3 feet, 0
inches o.c. with 4 feet, 0 inches o.c. hanger spacing.
3. Furring Channels to Receive Cementitious Board: Space furring
channels not over 16 inches o.c.
4. Provide cross-bracing as required to resist wind uplift.
2.5 GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths
available to minimize end-to-end joints.
1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indi~ated, or
if not otherwise indicated, in either 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch
thicknesses to comply with ASTM C840 for application system and
support spacing indicated.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, and as follows:
1. Type: Regular, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Type X for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.
3. Edges: Tapered.
4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following products where Type X gypsum wallboard is
indicated:
a. "Gyprock Fireguard 'c' Gypsum Board"; Domtar Gypsum Co.
b. "Fire-Shield G"; Gold Bond Building Products Div.,
National Gypsum Co.
c. "SHEETROCK Brand FIRECODE 'c' Gypsum Panels II ; United
States Gypsum Co.
C. Gypsum Backing Board for Multilayer Applications: ASTM C442 or,
where backing board is not available from manufacturer, gypsum
wallboard, ASTM C36.
D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C630.
2 . 6 GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS
A. Proprietary backing units with glass mesh fiber mesh reinforcing and
water resistant coating on both faces, complying with the following
requirements:
1. Coated Gypsum Panels: Gypsum core with glass fiber mesh surface
mats and manufacturer's proprietary water and vapor retarding
coating on both faces, fabricated in panels 1/2 inch thick by
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-5
5910861-000
48 inches wide by 96 inches long, and weighing 2.0 Ibs per sq.
ft.
2. Cement-Coated Portland Cement Panels: High density portland
cement surface coating on both faces and lightweight concrete
core composed of portland cement and expanded ceramic aggregate;
fabricated in panels 7/16 inch thick by 36 inches wide by 36,
48, or 60, 64, or 72 inches long; and weighing 3.2 - 3.8 Ibs per
sq. ft.
3. Vinyl-Coated Portland Cement Panels: Core formed in a
continuous process from aggregated portland cement slurry and
reinforced with vinyl-coated woven glass fiber mesh embedded in
both surfaces, with one face smooth and other textured;
fabricated in panels 1/2 inch thick and by 36 inches wide by 48,
60, and 72 inches long; and weighing 3 Ibs per sq. ft.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following products:
1. "Dens-Shield"; Georgia Pacific Corp.
2. "Wonder-Board"; Modulars Inc.
3. "Durock Tile Backer Board"; Durabond Div., USG Industries, Inc.
2.7 EXTERIOR CEMENTITOUS BOARD
A. Aggregated portland cement board with polymer-coated glass fiber mesh
embedded in back and front surfaces, fabricated in panels 1/2 inch
thick by 48 inches wide and 96 inches long, weighing 3 Ibs. per sq.
ft.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Durock
Exterior Cement Board" with Durock exterior base coat and Durock
exterior finish or equal. Provide Durock "Fine Finish" with color to
match building stucco.
2.8 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner
beads, edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C1047 and
requirements indicated below:
1. Material: Formed metal, plastic or metal combined with paper,
with metal complying with the following requirement:
a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process.
2. Edge trim shapes indicated below by reference to designations
of Fig. 1 in ASTM C1047:
a. "L" Bead where indicated.
,3. One-piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig.
1 in ASTM C1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip.
B. Reveal Trim: Equal to Fry Reglet Drywall Reveal Molding Type DRM-SO-
SO or DRMF-SO-SO, 1/2-inch width, paintable.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-6
5910861-000
C. Soffit Vent Trim: Equal to Vinyl Corp. C5J50-300VF located only at
control joints. Provide connector clip and splice.
2.9 GYPSUM BOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials complying with ASTM C475, ASTM C840, and
recommendations of manufacturer of both gypsum board and joint
treatment materials for the application indicated.
B. Joint Tape: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use pressure sensitive or staple-attached open-weave glass fiber
reinforcing tape with compatible j oint compound where
recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment
materials for application indicated.
C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-prepackaged vinyl-based
products complying with the following requirements for formulation
and intended use.
1. Ready-Mix Formulation: Factory-premixed product.
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction
which comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the
manufacturer of the gypsum board.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended
for laminating gypsum boards.
C. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound of type
recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames.
D. Fastening Adhesive for Wood: ASTM C557.
E. Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C1002.
F. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant complying with requirement
specified in Division 7, Section 07901 - JOINT SEALERS.
G. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation
produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C665 for Type I (blankets
without membrane facing); and as follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
H. Thermal Insulation: Material indicated below, of thickness and width
to fill voids formed by Z-furring members:
1. Unfaced Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation: Unfaced mineral fiber
blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM
C665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as
follows:
a.
Mineral Fiber Type:
slag.
Fibers manufactured from glass or
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-7
5910861-000
1. Glass Mesh Mortar Unit Finishing Materials: Tape and joint compounds
as recommended by glass mesh mortar unit manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts,
preset hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing,
with installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension
system with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure
that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been
installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop
their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated, to other
trades for installation well in advance of time needed for
coordination with other construction.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply
with ASTM C754 and with ASTM C840 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations
in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar
construction to comply with details indicated and with
recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available,
with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum
Co.
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of
loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below
to comply with details shown on drawings:
1. Where edges of suspended ceilings abut building structure
horizontally at ceiling perimeters or penetration of structural
elements.
2. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure.
a. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral
support and avoid axial loading.
D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel
framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of joints
with framing or furring members or as indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to
structure where possible, otherwise connect to cast-in concrete
inserts or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-8
5910861-000
B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit.
C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits.
D. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings
indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing
installation standard.
1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620-inch diameter (8 gauge), 4 ft. on center.
2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1-1/2 inch, 4 ft. on center.
3. Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches on center.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for
suspended ceilings so that cross furring members or grid suspension
members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 ft. as measured both
lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.
G. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other
structural supports as indicated.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings and structural walls and
columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls,
install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring
member so that fastening surface do not vary more than 1/8 inch from
plane of faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or
substrates above suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames
for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions
above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.
D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated
but not less than that required by referenced steel framing
installation standard.
1. For single layer construction: 16 inches on center.
2. For double layer construction: 24 inches on center.
E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and
gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of
the flange.
F. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219 and
with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either
directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb
studs.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-9
5910861-000
G. Install thermal insulation as follows:
1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring
members spaced 24 inches on center.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of
furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws
designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 24 inches on center.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to
wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall
surface, screw attach short flange of furring channel to web of
attached channel. Start from this furring channel with standard
width insulation panel and continue in regular manner. At
interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches
from corner and cut insulation to fit.
4. Until gypsum board is installed hold insulation in place with
10-inch staples fabricated from 0.0625-inch (16 gauge) diameter
tie wire and inserted through slot in web of member.
3.6 APPLICATION AND FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish
gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated, prior to gypsum
board unless readily installed after board has been installed.
C. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and
ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in
alternate courses of board.
D. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes
the number of end-butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the
central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches.
E. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of
end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At
stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with
end joints staggered over studs.
F. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install
imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light
contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space
between boards. Do not force into place.
G. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal
applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board
back-blocking is provided behind end joints. position boards so that
like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or
field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place
tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints
over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
H. Attach gypsum board to steel studs so that leading edge or end of
each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange
first.
I. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided
for additional support at openings and cutouts.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-10
5910861-000
J. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow
metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each
jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame.
K. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with
space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.
L. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum board in
concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls which
are braced internally.
1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for
sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished
with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. area, and may be limited
to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.
2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
M. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing drywall partitions at
structural abutments. Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim
edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.
N. Where sound-rated drywall construction is indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, control and expansion joints, openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant
including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C919
and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim, and
close off sound-flanking paths around or through construction,
including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings.
1. For double -layer partition systems, construction above
acoustical ceilings may be installed with base layer only.
O. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced gypsum
board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.7 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION
A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows:
1. On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board
application to the greatest extent possible.
2. On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to
framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths
which will minimize end joints.
3. On Z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to
framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring
members.
B. Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin-set ceramic tile and
similar rigid applied wall finishes, install gypsum backing board.
1. In "dry" areas install gypsum backing board or wallboard with
tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface.
C. Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base
layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer.
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250 -11
5910861-000
1. On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically
(parallel to framing) with joints of base layer over supports
and face layer joints offset at least 10 inches with base layer
joints.
2. On Z-furring members apply base layer vertically (parallel to
framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing)
or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints
offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base
layer over furring members.
D. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as
follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
E. Double - Layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layer of gypsum board and
face layer to base layer as follows:
1. Fasten base layers with screws and face layer with adhesive and
supplementary fasteners.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim
accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports.
Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Install corner beads at external corners.
C. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise
be exposed or semi-exposed, and except where plastic trim is
indicated. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound.
D. Install control joints at locations indicated, or if not indicated,
at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board
application and finish standard.
E. Install reveal joints in gypsum drywall construction where indicated.
3.9 FINISHING OF DRYWALL
A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both
directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints;
penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere as
required to prepare work for decoration.
B. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using
setting-type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim
accessories are indicated.
D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying joint compounds in 3
coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between
coats and after last coat.
E. Water-Resistant Backing Board Base for Ceramic Tile: Finish joints
between water-resistant backing board with tape and setting-type
joint compound to comply with gypsum board manufacturer's
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-12
5910861-000
recommendations and installation standards referenced in Division 9,
Section 09300 - TILE.
F. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall
construction which is indicated for drywall finishing or which
requires finishing to achieve fire-resistance rating, sound rating or
to act as air or smoke barrier.
3.10 PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions,
suitable to installer, which ensures gypsum drywall
being without damage or deterioration at time of
completion.
in a manner
construction
substantial
END OF SECTION 09250
GYPSUM DRYWALL
09250-13
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TERMINAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 09270 - GYPStlM BOARD
SHAPT WALL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following applications for gypsum board
shaft wall systems:
1. Elevator shaft enclosures.
B. Gypsum drywall construction for applications other than shaft walls
is specified in Division 9, Section 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL.
C. Application and finishing of gypsum wallboard is spe.cified by
reference to Division 9, Section 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum board shaft wall systems are pretested assemblies of gypsum
boards and metal components designed for erection from room-side of
shaft.
B. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C11 and GAS05
for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise
defined in this section or other referenced standards.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements, General: Provide gypsum board shaft wall
systems complying with performance requirements specified, as
demonstrated by pretesting manufacturer's corresponding stock
systems.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and
construction which are identical to those of assemblies, including
those incorporating elevator door and other framing, whose fire
resistance has been determined per ASTM El19 by a testing and
inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1. Provide fire-resistance rated assemblies identical to those
indicated by reference to GA File No.' s in GA 600 "Fire
Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire
Resistance Directory" or in listings of other testing and
inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of gypsum board shaft
wall system specified.
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS
09270-1
5910861-000
B. Product test reports indicating and interpreting test results
relative to compliance of gypsum board shaft wall systems with fire
resistance, structural performance and acoustical performance
requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain products for gypsum board shaft
wall systems from a single manufacturer for each type of system
indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing
brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected
against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack
gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces.
Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads, trim, track, and
studs.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with requirements for environmental conditions, room
temperatures and ventilation specified in Division 9, Section
09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1 . Domtar Gypsum Co.
2. Georgia Pacific Corporation.
3. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co.
4. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 BASIC SYSTEM MATERIALS
A. General: Provide standard materials and components listed in
manufacturer's published product literature for gypsum board shaft
wall systems of type and application indicated.
1. Provide gypsum boards in maximum lengths available to eliminate
or minimize end-to-end butt joints and in thickness required to
produce assemblies complying with structural and other
performance requirements.
B. Steel Framing: ASTM C64S, of profile, size, and base metal thickness
required to produce assemblies complying with structural performance
requirements, with sectional properties computed to conform with AISI
"Specification for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 11
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS
09270-2
5910861-000
C. Gypsum Shaftwall Board: ASTM C442, Type X liner panel or coreboard
designed for shaft wall construction, with moisture-resistant paper
facings.
D. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36, Type X, and as follows:
1. Edges: Tapered.
E. Trim Accessories: Provide cornerbeads, edge trim and control joints
of material and, for edge trim, shapes specified in Division 9,
Section 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL and complying with ASTM C1047 and
gypsum board shaft wall manufacturer's recommendation for application
indicated.
F. Gypsum Wallboard Joint Treatment Materials: Provide materials
complying with ASTM C475, ASTM C840, recommendations of gypsum board
shaft wall manufacturer for the application indicated, and as
specified in Division 9, Section 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL.
G. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum
board shaft wall systems of the type and grade recommended by the
manufacturer of the system and as follows:
1. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesi ve or j oint compound
recommended for laminating gypsum boards of type indicated.
2 . Gypsum Board Screws: ASTM C1002.
3. Runner Fasteners: Low-velocity tool-driven fasteners of type,
size and material required to withstand loading conditions
imposed on shaft wall system without exceeding allowable design
stress of runner, fastener or structural substrate in which
anchor is embedded.
4. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening,
nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable synthetic rubber sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7, Section
07901 - JOINT SEALERS.
5. Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound of type
recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames.
6. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket
insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type
described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM
C665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as
follows:
a.
Mineral Fiber Type:
slag.
Fibers manufactured from glass or
2.3 BASIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Characteristics of selected components are described below
for purposes of indicating discrete gypsum board shaft wall systems
which are manufacturers' standard assemblies. Provide complete shaft
wall systems which comply with requirements indicated.
B. Cavity Shaft Wall Systems: Provide assemblies consisting of gypsum
shaft wall boards inserted between U- or J-shaped metal floor and
ceiling tracks; with specially shaped studs engaged in tracks and
fitted between shaftwall boards; and gypsum boards on finished side
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS
09270-3
5910861-000
or sides applied to studs in number of layers, thicknesses and
arrangement indicated.
1. Shaftwall Board Thickness: Not less than 1 inch.
2. Stud Shape: C-H or I.
3. Stud Depth: As indicated.
4. Room-Side Finish: As indicated.
s. Cavity Insulation: Provide sound attenuation blankets in cavity
formed by studs between shaftwall board and room-side finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates which gypsum board shaft wall construction
attaches to or abuts including preset hollow metal frames, elevator
hoistway door frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with
installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of shaft wall
construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS
A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall systems to comply with
performance and other requirements indicated as well as with
manufacturer's installation instructions and the following:
1. ASTM C7S4 for installation of steel framing.
2. Division 9, Section 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL for application and
finishing of gypsum wallboard.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing to support
gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy
trim, furnishings and similar work which cannot be adequately
supported directly by regular framing of gypsum board shaft wall
system.
1. Support elevator hoistway door frames independently of shaft
wall framing system, or reinforce system in accordance with
system manufacturer's instructions.
C. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire resistance rating of
entire shaft wall assembly by installing supplementary fire
protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call
buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.
D. Isolate shaft wall system from transfer of structural loading to
system, both horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned
type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading.
Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Seal gypsum board shaft walls at perimeter of each section which
abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each section.
Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air pressure
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS
09270-4
5910861-000
differential between shaft and external spaces; comply with
manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C919.
F. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft wall system cannot be
positioned within 2 inches of shaft face of structural beams, floor
edges and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2-inch or
5/8-inch thick gypsum board cants covering tops of projections as
follows:
1. Slope cant panels not more than 15 degrees from vertical. Set
base-edge of panels in gypsum board adhesive and secure top
edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws fastened to
shaft wall framing.
2. Where cants exceed 2 inches, support gypsum board with steel
studs spaced 24 inches o. c.; extend studs from top of proj ection
to shaft wall framing behind cant.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner
acceptable to installer, which ensures gypsum board shaft wall system
construction being without damage or deterioration at time of
substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 09270
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL SYSTEMS
09270 -5
5910861-000
MARATBOR AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB c."UUrrJ:i:, FLORIDA
SBCTION 09300 - TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Glazed quarry tile.
2. Unglazed paver tile.
3. Stone thresholds.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1.
Division 7
expansion,
surfaces.
Section 07901 JOINT SEALERS for sealing of
contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile
2. Division 9 Section 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL for cementitious
backer units installed as part of gypsum wallboard systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared
on samples of size and construction indicated, products involve color
and texture variations, in sets showing full range of variations
expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture
required, at least 12 inches square, mounted on plywood or
hardboard backing and grouted.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each
color required.
3. Stone thresholds in 6 inch lengths.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has
successfully completed tile installations similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for project.
B. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Before installing tile, erect mock-ups
for tile paving to verify selections made under sample submittals and
TILE
09300-1
5910861-000
to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials
and execution. Build mock-ups to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for final unit of work.
1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and size indicated or, if
not indicated, directed by Architect.
2. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and
workmanship.
3. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final
unit of work.
4. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed
condition as a standard for judging completed unit of work.
a. Accepted mock-ups in undisturbed condition at time of
substantial completion may become part of completed unit
of work.
C. preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to
comply with requirements of Division 1 Section 01200 PROJECT
MEETINGS.
1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with
seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with
requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing,
foreign matter, and other causes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after
installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's
printed recommendations.
B. Maintain temperatures at 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or more in tiled
areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless
higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard
or manufacturer's instructions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match
products installed as described below, packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing
contents.
1. Tile Units: Furnish quantity of full- size units equal to 3
percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color,
pattern, and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
TILE
09300-2
5910861-000
1. Glazed Quarry Tile:
a. Dal-Tile Corp, Quarry Tile Company, Natural Hues I (Jade)
and Natural Hues II (Almond).
2. Unglazed Paver Tile:
a.
Form and Surfaces,
Natura) .
Inc., Cottoimpruneta {Originale
3 . Organic Adhesives, Type I:
a. American Olean Tile Co. , Inc.
b. Custom Building Products
c. C-Cure Chemical Co.
d. Laticrete International Inc.
e. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
4. Commercial Portland Cement Grouts:
a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc.
b. Custom Building Products
c. C-Cure Chemical Co.
d. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American
National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types,
compositions, and grades of tile indicated.
1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless
otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI
standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting
and grouting.
C. Tile Council of America Recommendations: Comply with TCA Handbook
for Ceramic Tile Installation.
D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard
products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring
selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance
characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying
with the following requirements:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full
range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products
of type indicated.
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish
of adjoining flat tile.
TILE
09300-3
5910861-000
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Glazed Quarry Tile: Provide square-edged flat tile complying with
the following requirements:
1. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive.
2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 6 inches by 6 inches.
3. Nominal Thickness: 3/8 inch.
4. Face: Plain.
B. Unglazed Paver Tile: Provide flat tile complying with the following
requirements:
1. Composition: Natural clay.
2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 12 inches by 12 inches.
3. Nominal Thickness: 1/2 inch.
4. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges.
C. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of
adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of
adjoining flat tile where applicable.
2.
Shapes:
shapes:
As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard
a. Base for Thinset Mortar Installations: Flat bullnose.
b.
Wainscot Cap for Thinset Mortar Installations:
bullnose.
Surface
c.
External Corners for Thinset Installations:
bullnose.
Surface
d. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.
2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS
A.
General:
fabricated
transition
surfaces.
Provide stone that is uniform in color and finish,
to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide
between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor
B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM
C503 requirements for exterior use and for abrasion resistance where
exposed to foot traffic, a minimum hardness of 10 per ASTM C241.
1. Provide white, honed marble complying with MIA Group "A"
requirements for soundness.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials
complying with ANSI A108.1 and as specified below.
TILE
09300-4
5910861-000
1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric,
2 inches by 2 inches - WO.3 by WO.3 (16 ASW gauge or 0.0625 inch
diameter); comply with ASTM Ala5 and ASTM A82 except for minimum
wire size.
B. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I.
2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI Al18.6, color as indicated.
2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced
standards and manufacturers including those for accurate
proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of
mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers,
mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and
grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics
for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with
installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed
tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean,
and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds.
2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames,
electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items
located in or behind tile has been completed before installing
tile.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges
selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended
in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one
package show the same range in colors as those taken from other
packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either
return to manufacturer or blend tiles at project site before
installing.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108
series of tile installation standards included under "American
National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic
Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and
methods indicated.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and
fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as
TILE
09300-5
5910861-000
otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and
drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind
cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets,
piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or
covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern.
Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are
same size. Layout tile work and center tile fields in both
directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize
tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.
F. Layout tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled
joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where
indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and
tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete
substrates.
H. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following
installation standards:
1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement, dry-set,
commercial portland cement, and latex-portland cement grouts),
comply with ANSI A108.10.
3.4 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Paver Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below
for setting-bed method, TCA installation method related to types of
subfloor construction, and grout types:
1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1.
a. Bond Coat: Portland cement paste or dust coat on plastic
bed or the following thin-set mortar on cured bed, ANSI
A108.5, at Contractor's option:
1) Latex-portland cement mortar.
b. Concrete Subfloor, Exterior: TCA F101 (bonded).
c. Roof Deck, Membrane: TCA F103.
d. Concrete Subfloor, Interior: TCA Fl12 (bonded).
e. Grout: Commercial portland cement.
B. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated;
'set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless
otherwise indicated.
TILE
09300-6
5910861-000
3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with
requirements indicated below for setting-bed methods, TCA
installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout
types:
1. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A108.4.
a. Solid Backing, Interior: TCA W223.
2. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
a. Grout: Commercial portland cement.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all
ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as
possible.
2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when
permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions,
but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects
of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and
after cleaning.
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of
cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile
work.
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner
acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is
without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat
of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and
floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other
heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining,
damage, and wear.
2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least
7 days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse
neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09300
TILE
09300-7
5910861-000
DRATBOR AIRPORT
RB1f PASSBRGBR TERllIRAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL
PARBL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes acoustical panel ceilings installed with
exposed suspension systems.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 9, Section 09520 - LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM for
perforated and unperforated snap-in metal pan units.
2. Di vision 15, Section 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION for sprinkler heads
in acoustical ceilings.
3. Division 15, Section 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS for grilles,
registers, and diffusers in acoustical ceilings.
4. Division 16, Section 16515 - INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES for
lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
1. Product data for each type of product specified.
2. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish
required, prepared on samples of size indicated below and of
same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work.
Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations,
include sample sets showing full range of variations expected.
a. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type,
pattern, and color.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has
successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material,
design, and extent to those indicated for Project.
B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of
acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system
components (if any), and partition system (if any).
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-1
5910861-000
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original,
unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight,
surface contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room
temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or
damaging units in any way.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until
space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed
and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient
conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously
maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described
below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labe~s.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units
equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
2 . Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each
exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide units equal
to the following:
1. Mineral Base Panels - Water Felted, with Painted Finish and
Perforated and Fissured Pattern, Nonfire-Resistance Rated:
a. "Beveled Tegular Cirrus, II Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
B. Suspension System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Nonfire-Resistance-Rated Narrow-Face Double-Web Steel Suspension
Systems:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
c. National Rolling Mills, Inc.
d. USG Interiors, Inc.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-2
5910861-000
2. Edge Moldings:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
c. Fry Reglet Corp.
d. National Rolling Mills, Inc.
e. USG Interiors, Inc.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers'
standard units of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E1264
classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns,
acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.3 MINERAL-BASE PANELS - WATER FELTED
A. Type, Form, and Finish: Provide type III, Form 2 units per ASTM
E1264 with painted finish that comply with pattern and other
requirements indicated.
B. Lightly Textured Pattern: Units matching pattern indicated by
reference to manufacturers' standard pattern designations, with other
characteristics as follows:
1. Color/Light Reflectance Coefficient: White/LR 0.75.
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: NRC 0.55.
3. Ceiling Sound Transmission Class: CSTC 35.
4.
Edge Detail:
members.
Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed grid
5. Size: 24 inches by 24 inches by 3/4 inch.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's
standard metal suspension systems of types, structural
classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C635 requirements.
B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied
finish for type of system indicated.
C. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM
C635, Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.
D. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
1. Gauge: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger
design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, Direct-Hung), will be less than
yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 - inch
diameter (12 gauge).
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-3
5910861-000
E. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and
profiles indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard
moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and
suspension system indicated.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge
molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed
between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.
2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings
fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.
3. For narrow faced suspension systems, provide suspension system
manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and
configuration of exposed runners.
2.5 NONFIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Narrow-Face Uncapped Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and
cross runners roll-formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc-
coated cold-rolled steel sheet to produce structural members with
prefinished 9/16-inch-wide faces; other characteristics as follows:
1. Face Design: Box-shaped flanges forming slotted reveal,
designed to fit edge reveals in panels so that faces of flanges
recess flush with exposed faces of panels.
2. Structural Classification: Intermediate-Duty System.
3. Finish: Painted; white face and reveal.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant complying wi th requirement
specified in Division 7, Section 07901 - JOINT SEALERS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system
attaches or abuts, with installer present, for compliance with
requirements specified in this and other sections that affect
installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other
ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for
installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of
other work.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to
balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use
of less-than-half-width units at borders, and comply with reflected
ceiling plans.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-4
5910861-000
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical ceiling systems
installation standard referenced below, per
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
to comply with
manufacturer's
1. Standard for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply
with ASTM C636.
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as
follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or
other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of
supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay
hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset
resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or
other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling
plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location
of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and
hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size
supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly
to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that
are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that
will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
4. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
5. Space hangers not more than 4 feet, 0 inches o.c. along each
member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown,
and provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each
member.
C. Install edge moldings of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical
ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical
units.
1. Screw-attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16
inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with
ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet,
o inches. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
D. Install acoustical panels in. coordination with suspension system,
with edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and
cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-5
5910861-000
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge
moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's
instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove
and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
09511-6
5910861.000
DRATBOR AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR 'l"BJlIlURlU. BUILDIRG
M>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTIOR 09520 - LIRBAR
MBTAL CBILIRG SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide metal ceiling system as shown on drawings, in schedules and
specified herein.
B. System shall include provisions for integrating the following related
work:
1 . HVAC System
2 . Lighting System
C. The following types of metal ceiling systems are specified herein.
1. Linear, acoustically padded metal panels with perforated joint
filler strips for interior use.
2. Linear, closed joint metal panels with provision for carrier
up-lift resistance at exterior locations of 115 mph winds.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products of Alcan Building Products are specified to establish a
basis of quality and design required. Approved equal products of the
following manufacturers will be acceptable:
1. Hunter-Douglas, Inc.
2. Chicago Metallic.
3. U.S.G. Interiors, Inc.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include system suspension, openings, electrical,
mechanical details and ceiling layout.
B. Product Data: On each system component.
C. Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions: On each system component.
D. Samples. Two samples of each component, include panel, carrier,
adjustment clips, panel splice and all other accessories used in the
ceiling system. Provide samples for verification of selected colors.
1.5 MAINTENANCE STOCK
A. At completion of project, deliver to Owner full length matching
ceiling panel units, packaged for storage and identified with
LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM
09520-1
5910861-000
appropriate labels. Quantity shall be 5.0 percent of the amount of
each type installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Ceiling Panels, Interior: Manufacturer's standard panels formed from
0.025 aluminum, 3-3/8 inch wide face, 0.90 inch deep, Alcan Planar
Macro. Perforated joint filler strips to match panels.
B. Ceiling Panels, Exterior. Manufacturer's standard length panels
formed from 0.032 inch thick aluminum, 3-3/8 inch wide face, 0.090
inch deep with integrally formed joint closure; Alcan Planar Macro.
C.
Panel and Filler Finish:
colors.
Matte white, chosen from manufacturer's
D. Carriers: Manufacturer's carrier grid shall be designed to be
supported from structural system and engage ceiling panels securely
without deforming face panels or using separate fasteners.
Structural characteristics shall be designed by the manufacturer to
support the designated up-lift forces and loads imposed by the
ceiling system including attendant electrical and HVAC components.
E. End Plugs: 0.024 aluminum, where shown on the drawings and at all
panel terminations at reveals and material transitions.
F. Wall Moldings: 0.024 aluminum, recessed as detailed on the drawings.
G. Acoustical Blankets: Fiber glass 1 pound density, 1 inch thick with
black PVC face. Size to fit flat against back face of ceiling
panels.
H.
Miscellaneous components,
panel splices and the
accessories.
including hanger clips, carrier splices,
like, shall be manufacturer's standard
I. Access Panels: Hinged section of panels and carrier; match adjacent
spacing with minimal visible joints.
2.2 AIR HANDLING COMPONENTS
A. For system components see drawings and Division 15, Mechanical
Sections.
2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. As specified in Division 16 and shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION AND COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation with other trades to achieve proper
integration of this work.
B. Examine structural work to insure proper application of hangers.
C. Provide all continuous length panels without splices.
LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM
09520-2
5910861-000
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Space carriers as recommended by manufacturer and secure from hangers
overhead or directly to structural supports. Use expansion carriers
to compensate for ceiling areas out-of-square, out-of-parallel or
where ceiling size does not conform to the standard 4-inch increment.
Install carrier splices at abutting ends of carriers for rigidity,
and align holes of splices with carriers. Where carriers support
lighting fixtures and air handling components provide supplementary
hangers to support fixtures or closer carriers.
B. Insert perforated filler strip in carriers where required.
C. Snap ceiling panels over protruding ears of carriers. Stagger joints
in panels between adjoining carriers, using an interior splice of
color similar to ceiling panel to stiffen the joint. Where panel
ends are visible, install end plugs on panels. At angular walls and
turns, trim panels to the correct angle and join ends along top
inconspicuously with a stock angle for rigidity.
D. Install acoustical blankets at all interior locations uniformly
covering all open joints.
E. Do not install ceiling until all electrical and mechanical work is
completed and inspected.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Adjust ceiling as required to provide parallel lines, level and
uniform appearance.
B. Clean ceiling panels, replace all damaged panels prior to Owner
acceptance.
END OF SECTION 09520
LINEAR METAL CEILING SYSTEM
09520-3
5910861-000
DRATHOR AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TBRKIRAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 09650 - RESILIBRT
FLOORIRG
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of resilient flooring and accessories is shown on drawings and
in schedules.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring and
accessories as produced by a single manufacturer, including
recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of
resilient flooring and accessory.
B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's
standard color charts in form of actual sections of resilient
flooring, including accessories, showing full range of colors and
patterns available, for each type of resilient flooring required.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's
recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring
and accessory required.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F (18 degrees C) in spaces
to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to
installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours
after installation. Store resilient flooring materials in spaces
where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning
installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55
degrees F (13 degrees C) in areas where work is completed.
B. Install resilient flooring and accessories after other finishing
operations, including painting, have been completed. Do not install
resilient flooring over concrete slabs until the latter have been
cured and are sufficiently dry to achieve bond with adhesive as
determined by resilient flooring manufacturer's recommended bond and
moisture test.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650-1
5910861-000
1. Manufacturers of Vinyl Composition Tile:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc.
c. Kentile Floors, Inc.
d. Tarkett Inc.
2. Manufacturers of Vinyl Wall Base:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Azrock Floor Products Div., Azrock Industries, Inc.
c. Flexco Div., Textile Rubber Co.
d. Kentile Floors, Inc.
2.2 RESILIENT FLOORING COLORS AND PATTERNS
A. Provide colors and patterns as indicated, or if not otherwise
indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards.
2.3 TILE FLOORING
A. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12 inches x 12 inches
unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:
1. Composition 1 - asbestos-free.
2. Gauge: 1/8 inch.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Vinyl Wall Base: Provide vinyl base complying with FS SS-W-40, Type
II, with matching end stops and preformed or molded corner units, and
as follows:
l. Height: 2-1/2 inches.
2. Thickness: 1/8 inch gauge.
3. Style: Standard top-set cove at hard flooring.
4. Style: Straight base without cove at carpet.
5. Finish: Matte.
B. Resilient Edge Strips: 1/8-inch thick, homogeneous vinyl or rubber
composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as
selected by Architect from standard colors available; not less than
1 inch wide.
C. Adhesives (Cements): Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by
flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions.
D. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650-2
5910861-000
E.
Leveling and Patching Compounds:
flooring manufacturer.
Latex type as recommended by
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Require installer to inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they
are satisfactory. A satisfactory subfloor surface is defined as one
that is smooth and free from cracks, holes, ridges, coatings
preventing adhesive bond, and other defects impairing performance or
appearance.
B. Perform bond and moisture tests on concrete subfloors to determine if
surfaces are sufficiently cured and dry as well as to ascertain
presence of curing compounds.
C. Do not allow resilient flooring work to proceed until subfloor
surfaces are satisfactory.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare subfloor surfaces as follows:
1. Use leveling and patching compounds as recommended by resilient
flooring manufacturer for filling small cracks, holes and
depressions in subfloors.
2 . Remove coatings from subfloor surfaces that would prevent
adhesive bond, including curing compounds incompatible with
resilient flooring adhesives, paint, oils, waxes and sealers.
B. Broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered, and inspect subfloor.
C. Ap~ly concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer,
pr~or to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with
manufacturer's directions.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install resilient flooring using method indicated in strict
compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Extend
resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets
and similar openings.
B.
Scribe, cut, and fit resilient
built-in furniture and cabinets,
columns, walls and partitions.
flooring to permanent
pipes, outlets and
fixtures,
permanent
C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or
plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as
marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
D. Install resilient flooring on covers for telephone and electrical
ducts, and other such items occurring within finished floor areas.
Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of
flooring installed in these covers. Tightly cement edges to
perimeter of floor around covers and to covers.
E. Tightly cement resilient flooring to subbase without open cracks,
voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650-3
5910861-000
spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. Hand roll resilient
flooring at perimeter of each covered area to assure adhesion.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF TILE FLOORS
A. Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of room are
of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less
than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay tile square to room axis,
unless otherwise shown.
B. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same
sequence as manufactured and packaged if so numbered. Cut tile
neatly around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed
tile are not acceptable.
1. Lay tile with grain running in one direction.
C. Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive
applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and other
permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install
base in lengths as long as practicable, with preformed corner units,
or fabricated from base materials with mitered or coped inside
corners. Tightly bond base to substrate throughout length of each
piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.
1. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill
voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive filler material.
B. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure
wi th adhesive. Install edging strips at edges of flooring which
would otherwise be exposed.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform following operations immediately upon completion of resilient
flooring:
1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
2. Do not wash floor until time period recommended by resilient
flooring manufacturer has elapsed to allow resilient flooring
to become well-sealed in adhesive.
3. Damp-mop floor being careful to remove black marks and excessive
soil.
4. Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using
appropriate cleaner recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturers.
B. Protect flooring against damage during construction period to comply
with resilient flooring manufacturer's directions.
1. Apply protective floor polish to resilient flooring surfaces
free from soil, excess adhesive or surface blemishes. Use
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650-4
5910861-000
commercially available metal cross-linked acrylic product
acceptable to resilient flooring manufacturer.
2. Cover resilient flooring with undyed, untreated building paper
until inspection for substantial completion.
3.7 EXTRA STOCK
A. Deliver stock of maintenance materials to Owner. Furnish maintenance
materials from same manufactured lot as materials installed and
enclosed in protective packaging with appropriate identifying labels.
1. Tile Flooring: Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes
or fraction thereof, for each type, color, pattern and size
installed.
END OF SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
09650-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TERMINAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB CUUJ.'f'.l'i', FLORIDA
SBCTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes carpet and installation, where scheduled and in
passenger elevator.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation
accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics,
durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance
characteristics.
C. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size,
showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations
expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the
work. Submit the following:
1. 12-inch-square samples of each type of carpet material required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to
that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per
test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting
organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting organization.
1. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70.
2. Rating: Pass.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and
containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name,
and lot number.
B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside
well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage,
extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground.
Maintain minimum temperature of 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) at least
three days prior to and during installation in area where materials
are stored.
CARPET
09680-1
5910861-000
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on underside
of 4 foot by 4 foot polyethylene sheet, fully taped at perimeter to
substrate.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching
products installed as described below, packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full
width for each type of material equal to 5 percent of amount
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to those scheduled in data sheets at end of this
section.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber of
size and profile indicated; minimum 2-inch wide anchorage flange;
manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product
recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut
edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at
seams.
C. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by
carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for
installed carpet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete
surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to prevent dusting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and
direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay
of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do
not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic
through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with
continuous carpet.
B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into
alcoves and closets of each space.
C. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not
concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
CARPET
09680-2
5910861-000
D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor
guards to substrate.
E. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges
and butt cuts with seaming cement.
F. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without
gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure
uniform bond.
G. Provide additional positive attachment at stairs as required, using
tackless stripping or concealed edge guard with gripper teeth.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended
cleaning agent.
B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with
commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace
carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn.
C. Vacuum carpet.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not
damaged or deteriorated at time of substantial completion.
3.5 CARPET SCHEDULE
A. Provide carpet as scheduled on the following "Data Sheets."
CARPET
09680-3
5910861-000
WOVEN CARPET DATA SHEET
CARPET: Mohawk Commercial Carpet, "Barathea."
Manufacturer's Contact: John McClean, (800) 622-6228.
Construction: Woven interlock.
Desiqn: As indicated.
Texture: Staggered loop.
Face Fiber: 50 percent Antron Lumena Solution Dyed Nylon, 50 percent
Antron Nylon with static control.
pitch: 165 P.O.B.
Rows: 8.5 per inch.
Pile Heiqht/Woven: 0.218 inch.
Yarn Weiqht/Woven: 34 oz./sq. yd.
Backinq: 100 percent synthetic.
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET
09680-4
5910861-000
DRATHON AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COOBTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 09800 - SPECIAL
COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes application of special coating systems
including surface preparation, prime coats and topcoats.
1. General painting is specified in another Division 9 section.
B. Types of special coating systems required for the project include:
1. Special Coatings for Exterior Use:
a. 2-component pigmented aliphatic polyurethane coating for
all exterior ferrous metal.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including
basic materials analysis and application instructions for each
coating material specified.
1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and
finish system and application. Identify each material by the
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
B. Samples: Prior to beginning work, the Architect will furnish color
chips for surfaces to be coated. Use representative colors when
preparing samples for review. Submit samples for review of color and
texture only. Provide a list of material and application for each
coat of each finish sample.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat material
produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only
thinners recommended by the manufacturer, and only within recommended
limits.
B. Coordination of Work: Review sections in which other coatings are
provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various
substrates. Upon request, furnish information on characteristics of
specified finish materials, to ensure that compatible prime coats are
used.
1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the coatings
systems specified.
C.
Material Quality: Provide the best quality grade of the
coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable
various
coating
SPECIAL COATINGS
09800-1
5910861-000
manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's
identification as a best-grade product will not be acceptable.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original,
new, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and
label and the following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Federal specification number, if applicable.
3. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a
minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) in a well
ventilated area. Maintain containers used in storage of coatings in
a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly.
Remove oily rags and waste daily. ,Take necessary precautionary
measures to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately
protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from
handling, mixing and application of coatings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and
surrounding air temperatures are above 45 degrees F (7 degrees C),
unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Do not apply coatings in rain, fog or mist, or when the relative
humidity exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees
F (3 degrees C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces
unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's printed instructions.
Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and
conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing the coating
operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
1. The Glidden Company. (Glidden).
2. PPG Industries, pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh).
SPECIAL COATINGS
09800-2
5910861-000
3. Tnemec Company, Inc. (Tnemec).
2.2 EXTERIOR COATING MATERIALS
A. Preparation: Shop clean in accordance with Steel Structures Painting
Council (SSPC) Specification SP-10, Near White Blast.
B. Undercoats: Provide the manufacturer's recommended undercoat
material compatible with the substrate, primers or base coat, and
finish coat material indicated.
1. Undercoat:
a. Glidden 5462/5452 Glid-Guard Epoxy Double Build Primer,
5.0 mils DFT.
C. Finish Coats: Provide factory-formulated, finish coat material
compatible with the substrate and prime, base or intermediate coat
material indicated.
1. Converted Acrylic Aliphatic Polyurethane Finish Coat on Ferrous
Metal:
a. Glidden 6200/6252 Glid-Thane II Enamel, 2.0 mils DFT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which coating will be
performed for compliance with requirements for application of
coatings. do not proceed with application until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
1. Start of coating work will be construed as the Applicator's
acceptance of surfaces within particular area.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware, hardware accessories, plates, machined
surfaces, light fixtures, and similar items which are not to be
coated, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface
preparation and coating. Remove these items if necessary for
complete coating of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following
completion of coating operations in each space or area, reinstall
items removed, using workmen skilled in the trades involved.
1. Clean surfaces before applying coatings or surface treatments.
Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other
contaminates will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
B. Surface Preparation: Perform surface preparation and cleaning in
compliance with the manufacturer's instructions for the particular
substrate conditions, and as specified.
1. Notify the Architect in writing of anticipated problems using
coatings specified with substrates primed or furnished by
others.
2. Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Clean nongalvanized, ferrous metal
surfaces, that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease,
SPECIAL COATINGS
09800-3
5910861-000
dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances. Use
solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the
recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council.
a. Touch-up shop applied prime coats which have been damaged,
and bare areas. Wire-brush, solvent clean, and touch-up
with the same primer as the shop coat.
C. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials in
compliance with the coating manufacturer's directions.
1. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of
uniform density, and as required during application. Do not
stir film, which may form on surfaces, into the material.
Remove film and, if necessary, strain the coating material
before using.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply special coatings by brush, roller, spray, squeegee, or other
applicators in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use
brushes best suited for the material being applied. Use rollers of
carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the
manufacturer for the material and texture required.
1. Coating colors, surfaces treatments and finishes are indicated
in the "Schedules" of the contract documents.
2. Provide finish coats compatible with the primers used.
3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same
regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding
coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is
required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions.
B. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material at not thinner than
the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry
film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the
manufacturer.
C. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat,
as recommended by the manufacturer, to material required to be coated
or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others.
1. Recoat primed and sealed substrates where there is evidence of
suction spots or unsealed areas in the first coat, to assure a
finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
D. Brush Application: Brush-out and work brush coats into surfaces in
an even film. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly
draw glass lines and color breaks.
1. Apply primers and first coats by brush unless the manufacturer's
instructions permit use of mechanical applicators.
E. Mechanical Applications: Use mechanical methods for coating
application when permitted by the manufacturer's recommendations,
governing ordinances, and trade union regulations.
SPECIAL COATINGS
09800-4
5910861-000
1. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide
the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not
double-back with spray equipment building-up film thickness of
2 coats in one pass, unless recommended by the manufacturer.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure
at any time, and as often as the Owner deems necessary, during the
period when coating operations are being conducted.
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing
laboratory to sample the coating being used. Samples of
material delivered to project site will be taken, identified and
sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
2. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the
following characteristics as required by the Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Absorption.
c. Accelerated weathering.
d. Accelerated yellowness.
e. Color retention.
f. Alkali and mildew resistance:
g. Abrasion resistance.
h. Apparent reflectivity.
i. Washability.
j. Dry Opacity.
k. Recoating.
1 . Skinning.
3. If results show materials being used do not comply with
requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop work, and
remove noncomplying materials, pay for testing, recoat surfaces
coated with rejected materials, or remove rejected materials
from previously coated surfaces if, upon recoating with
specified materials, the two coatings are not compatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean-Up: At the end of each work day, remove rubbish, empty cans,
rags and other discarded materials from the site.
1. Upon completion of work, clean glass and spattered surfaces.
Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping or other proper
methods, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
SPECIAL COATINGS
09800-5
5910861-000
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not, against
damage from coating. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing,
replacing, and recoating as acceptable to the Architect. Leave in an
undamaged condition.
B. Provide "Wet paintll signs to protect newly-coated finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of
their work, after completion of coating operations.
1. At completion of construction acti vi ties of other trades,
touch-up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.
END OF SECTION 09800
SPECIAL COATINGS
09800-6
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TERJIIRAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 09900 - PAIRTIRG
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of
exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this
section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment
specified under other sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in
"Schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically
indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item
or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar
adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not
designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or
finishes available.
C. painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal
surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
D. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 5, Section 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL for shop priming
structural steel.
2. Division 5, Section 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS for shop priming
ferrous metal.
3. Division 8, Section 08111 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES for
shop priming steel doors and frames.
4.
Division 9, Section 09800
ferrous metal.
SPECIAL COATINGS for exterior
5. Divisions 15 and 16: Paint mechanical and electrical work not
specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively to be factory
painted.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions,
enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials
whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information, label analysis,
and application instructions for each material proposed for use.
PAINTING
09900-1
5910861-000
1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and
finish system and application. Identify each material by the
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
B. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's
color charts.
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips
for surfaces to be coated.
C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and
material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions,
on representative samples of the actual substrate. Define each
separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use
representati ve colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit
until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are
provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various
substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of
finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials
specified.
B. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior
components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-
coat finish samples on at least 100 square feet of surface until
required sheen, color and texture are obtained; simulate finished
lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.
C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale
paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint
material containers not displaying manufacturer's product
identification will not be acceptable.
1. Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not
intended to imply that products named are required or to exclude
equal products of other manufacturers.
1 . 6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original,
unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and
label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Federal Specification number, if applicable.
4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
PAINTING
09900-2
5910861-000
7. Application instructions.
S. Color name and number.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a
well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees
F (7 degrees C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly.
Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to
ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and
health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be
painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F (10
degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) .
B. Apply sol vent - thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to
be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F
(7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C) .
C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity
exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees
C) above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.
1. painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and
areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature
limits specified by the manufacturer during application and
drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
2. The Glidden Company (Glidden).
3 . Benj amin Moore and Co. (Moore).
4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh).
S. Pratt and Lambert (P & L).
6. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
2.2 PRIMERS
A. Latex-Based Interior White Primer: Latex-based primer coating used
on interior gypsum drywall under a flat latex paint or an alkyd
semigloss enamel.
1.
Devoe:
50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer.
2.
Glidden:
5019 PVA Primer.
PAINTING
09900-3
3.
Moore:
4.
Pittsburgh:
5.
P & L:
6.
S-W:
5910861-000
Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal #201.
6-2 Quick-Dry Latex Primer Sealer.
Latex Wall Primer Z30001.
Pro-Mar 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200.
B. Synthetic, Rust-Inhibiting Primer: Quick-drying, rust-inhibiting
primer for priming ferrous metal on the interior under flat latex
paint or odorless alkyd semigloss or alkyd gloss enamels:
14920 Bar-Ox Quick Dry Metal Primer, Red.
5210 Glid-Guard Universal Fast-Dry Metal
Primer.
l. Devoe:
2. Glidden:
3. Moore:
4. Pittsburgh:
5. P & L:
6. S-W:
Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint #163.
6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer.
Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer.
Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1.
C. Galvanized Metal Primer: Primer used to prime interior and exterior
zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces:
1.
Devoe:
2.
Glidden:
3.
Moore:
4.
Pittsburgh:
s.
S-W:
2.3 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS
13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer.
Ironclad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer #155.
6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer.
Galvite BSOW3.
A. Interior Enamel Undercoat: Ready-mixed enamel for use as an
undercoat over a primer on ferrous or zinc-coated metal under an
interior alkyd semigloss enamel or a full-gloss alkyd enamel:
l. Devoe:
2. Glidden:
3. Moore:
4. Pittsburgh:
S. P & L:
6. S-W:
8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
4200 Spred Ultra Semi-Gloss Enamel.
Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater.
Interior Trim Primer.
2.4 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200.
A. Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Low- odor, semigloss, alkyd
enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on concrete, masonry
(including concrete masonry block), plaster, wood, and hardboard and
PAINTING
09900-4
5910861-000
both ferrous and zinc-coated (galvanized) metal surfaces and over a
primer on gypsum drywall:
1.
Devoe:
26XX Velour Alkyd Semigloss Enamel.
4200 Spred Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
2.
Glidden:
3.
Moore:
Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
5.
P & L:
27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel.
Classic 99 Semigloss Enamel A40 Series.
4.
Pittsburgh:
6.
S-W:
B. Alkyd gloss enamel for use over a primer and undercoat on interior
ferrous and zinc-coated metal surfaces:
1.
Devoe:
70XX Mirrolac Interior/Exterior Alkyd Gloss
Enamel.
2. Glidden:
3. Moore:
4. Pittsburgh:
S. P & L:
6. S-W:
4500 Glid-Guard Industrial Enamel.
Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133.
54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel.
Effecto Enamel.
Industrial Enamel B-54 Series.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be
performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint.
Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's
acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories,
plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items in
place that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied
protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these
items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent
surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space
or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades
involved.
1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments.
Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and
painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
PAINTING
09900-5
5910861-000
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular
substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and
reprime. Notify Architect in writing of problems anticipated
with using the specified finish-coat material with substrates
primed by others.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete and concrete masonry
block surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk,
dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as
required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been
used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface
preparation.
3. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongal vanized ferrous-metal surfaces that
have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill
scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical
cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel
Structures Painting Council.
a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have
been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recollln!ended
by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same
primer as the shop coat.
4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with
nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil
and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in
accordance with manufacturer's directions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in
a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform
density; stir as required during application. Do not stir
surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary,
strain material before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only
within recommended limits.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of
material being applied.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint
film.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in
"schedules."
2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
PAINTING
09900-6
5910861-000
3. All undercoats to be white color, regardless of color of finish
coat.
4. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same
regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding
coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is
required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions.
5. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other
conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is
of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special
attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners,
crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
6. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when
permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, and similar components
are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to
maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
7. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as
similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently
fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final
installation of equipment.
8. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through
registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint.
9 . Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers
to match exposed surfaces.
10. Paint all exposed piping. Color to comply with ANSI A13.1.
11. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as
exterior faces.
12. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
13. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and
touch up painted.
C.
Scheduling Painting:
cleaned, pretreated,
practicable after
deterioration.
Apply first coat to surfaces that have been
or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as
preparation and before subsequent surface
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper
drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels
firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not
cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a
rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.
PAINTING
09900-7
5910861-000
F. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat
of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is
required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by
others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction
spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish
coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient
sealing.
G. pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque,
smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags,
ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and
coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with
specified requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure
at any time and as often as the OWner deems necessary during the
period when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing
laboratory to sample the paint material being used. Samples of
material delivered to the project will be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor.
2. The testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for the
following characteristics as required by the OWner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Abrasion resistance.
c. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
i. Accelerated yellowness.
j . Recoating.
k. Skinning.
1. Color retention.
m. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3. If test results show material being used does not comply with
specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop
painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint
surfaces coated with rej~cted paint, and remove rejected paint
PAINTING
09900-8
5910861-000
from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with
specified paint, the two coatings are noncompatible.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags,
rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site.
B. Upon completion of painting, clean glass and paint-spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care
not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against
damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or
replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of
their work after completion of painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch
up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Painting of exterior ferrous metal is specified in Division 9,
Section 09800 - SPECIAL COATINGS.
3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various
substrates, as indicated.
B. Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1. Odorless Semigloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry
film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Interior Latex-Based White Primer (FS TT-P-650) .
b. First Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS
TT-E-509) .
c. Second Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS
TT-E-509) .
C. Ferrous Metal:
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry
film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibiting Primer (FS TT-P-664) .
b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543) .
c. Finish Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS
TT-E-S09) .
PAINTING
09900-9
5910861-000
D. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. Semigloss Finish: 2 coats over primer, with total dry film
thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer (FS TT-P-641) .
b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-S43) .
c. Finish Coat: Interior Semigloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel (FS
TT-E-S09) .
END OF SECTION 09900
PAINTING
09900-10
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
RB1f PASSEBGBR TERMINAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 09950 - WALL
COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
2. Textile wall covering.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include data on
physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame
resistance characteristics.
C. Samples for verification purposes of each type, color, texture, and
pattern of wall covering.
1. Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches long, of each wall
covering specified. Show complete pattern repeat.
D. Product certificates signed by wall covering manufacturer certifying
materials furnished comply with specified requirements.
E. Certified test reports showing compliance with requirements for fire
performance characteristics and physical properties.
F. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual"
specified in Division 1. Include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining wall covering.
2. Precautions for use of cleaning materials and methods that could
be detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the
following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E84 by UL or other testing and inspecting
organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Identify wall coverings with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting organization.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less}
WALL COVERINGS
09950-1
5910861-000
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a constant temperature not less than 60 degrees F (16
degrees C) in installation areas for at least 10 days before and 10
days after installation.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials from same production runs as wall covering
installed. Package materials with protective covering and identify
with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Rolls: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 10 percent
of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL COVERING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Wall Covering Data Sheets at the end of this section. Data
sheets specify manufacturer, style, color, pattern, size, and related
requirements for wall covering materials.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
equal in quality and appearance to those specified in each Wall
Covering Data Sheet.
2.2 ADHESIVES
A. General: Manufacturer's standard for use with specific wall covering
and substrate application.
B. Characteristics: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, and strippable.
2.3 PRIMER
A. Prime walls with materials recommended by wall covering manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging
in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.
B. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for surface preparation.
1. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free
of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
3. Prime new gypsum board with a recommended primer.
C. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss,
and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
WALL COVERINGS
09950-2
5910861-000
B. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps.
C. Match pattern 6 feet above finish floor.
D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside
corners and 3 inches from inside corners. No horizontal seams.
E. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.
F. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at
seams and edges. Butt seams.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and
adjacent surfaces.
B. Use cleaning methods recommended by the wall covering manufacturer.
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.
3.4 WALL COVERING SCHEDULE
A. Wall covering materials are scheduled on the following "Data Sheets."
WALL COVERINGS
09950-3
5910861-000
VINYL WALL COVERING DATA SHEET
Wall Coverinq Tvoe: VI.
Manufacturer: Genon.
Style Name: Stoneham Type II.
Item Number: Dover 2-94-DV.
Vinyl Wall Coverinq Standard: FS CCC-W-408A and CFFA-W-101-A, Type II, medium
duty.
TEXTILE WALL COVERING DATA SHEET
Wall Coverinq Tvoe: F2.
Source: Joe Sherry Associates, Inc.
Style Name: Chablis.
Item Number: #48.
Color: 100 percent Natural Sisal.
Aoolied Backinq Material: Latex.
Width: 10 feet, 0 inches.
Performance Coatinq: "Scotchguard" by 3M Co.
END OF SECTION 09950
WALL COVERINGS
09950-4
~
4
~
~
Q)
U
.0
P.
t./"l
-0
Q)
s::-
Ift
.....
C
.....
4-
C
:::>
-0
Q)
.-
.0
Q)
t./"l
-lC
<-'
~
~
ro
(,)
~
~
-'
'4
2
.
o cO
u-l~
~
4
~
~
W
~
~
~
.......
,
0-
-' cO cO
~~~
-' ~
~ ~
~
~
4
W
..J cO
~~
~ ~
4 ~
~
~
S
o
II)
5
:>
ta
ts
(I)
~
~
--
u-
~
i
~ ~
4 ~
~
~
~
o
o
o
~~
oOJ
~O
.............
c::C.0"l
~
~
g.
.....~
~
~~
$c::C.
cO .-J .-J .-J cO cO ...J
~~~~~~~
Q)
U
.0
P.
t./"l
-0
Q)
s::-
Ift
.....
C
.....
4-
C
:::>
('0
,
0-
('0
o
~
-
(..)
Q)
Q)
t./"l
('0
,
0-
.......
,
0-
co
~
.......
,
0-
..J
'4
2
cO cO
~~
.......
,
0-
-'
'4
2
w w
c.1 c.
III -e:.
a:
g
~
w u
c. c
-e:.~8
~~
i~
('0
o
~
-
o
Q)
Q)
t./"l
Q)
U
.0
P.
t./"l
-0
Q)
s::-
Ift
.....
C
.....
4-
C
:::>
('0
o
~
-
o
Q)
Q)
t./"l
....... .......
, '
0- 0-
C'.!
-
.......
I
0.-
cO cO cO
~~~
.......
,
0-
cO cO
~~
cO
~
.......
,
0-
Q)
U
.0
P.
t./"l
-0
Q)
s::-
Ift
.....
C
.....
4-
C
:::>
('0
,
0-
~~
, '
~
c-l
-
.......
,
0-
r-:'.
c:.:
.......
, -
0- .......
~.
('0
,
0-
~
<..-?
('0
o
~
-
o
Q)
Q)
t./"l
('0
o
('0
""
-
o
..
cO
..
""
Q)
Q)
t./"l
-0
Q)
.-
.0
Q)
t./"l
-lC
('0
o
~
-
c::C.
Q)
Q)
t./"l
('0
o
~
-
(..)
Q)
Q)
t./"l
-0
Q)
.-
.0
Q)
t./"l
-lC
('0
,
0-
-
,
('0
,
0-
.
(..)
u-l
cO
...J~
~~
C'.!
.......-.......
, ....... '
0- ' 0-
0-
o cO
u-l~
C'.!
-.......
....... '
,0-
0-
~
:J3
co cO
t'5~
cO cO cO
~~~
.......
,
0-
.......
,
0-
C'.!
-.......
....... '
10-
0-
C'.!
-.......
....... '
, 0-
0-
".~
cO cO cO cO cO cO
~~~~~~
.~
C'.!
-
.......
,
0-
....... ....... .......
, I '
0- 0- 0-
cO cO
~~
co cO cO cO
~~~~
.......
,
0-
"'t'J
,
....
,
0-
.......
,
0-
C'.!
-
....
,
0"
cO :::>
~O
cO cO
~~
cO cO cO cO cO cO cO cO
~~~~~~~~
.-
>i
C
-0 ..... -0
> '7 >
r-
>i
C
.....
'7
u
c
o
o
u
c ('0
o '
(..) r-
~
.0
S-
O
-+>
t/'l
- Q)
+> (,)
c .....
..... 4-
.0 4-
$ 0
~.
i~
o
o
.......
.......
o
.......
-0 -0 -0
> > >
Q) ......
(,) .0
..... +>
4- c
4- Q)
o ct:
C'.!
o
.......
-0 -0
> >
.
U
('0 C ('0
,~,O '
r-",0 r-
('0
,
r-
('0
,
r-
.
(,)
c
o
o
.
g ('0 ('0
o ' '
o r- r-
S-
.0
o
.0
Q)
S-
c::C.
~
.- C
.0 .,-
+> +>
c .0
Q) Q)
ct: t./"l
S-
.0
(..)
S-
.0
o
.- ~
~ ~
~ ~
ct: cO
S-
.0
o
Q) Q)
(,) (,)
-r-' ...-
4- 4-
4- 4-
o 0
.-
.0
+>
c
Q)
ct:
('0 od"
o 0
....... .......
~
o
.......
<..0
o
.......
r- OJ
o 0
....... ....
O"l
o
.......
C'.!C'.!
00
od"od"
c::C.""
.......
~O
Ood"
('04
c::C.
-
o ~
.. .c
cOt./"l
Q) Q)
Q) Q)
t./"lt/'l
-0
Q)
.-
.0
Q)
t/'l
~
-0
Q)
.-
.0
Q)
t/'l
-lC
-0
Q)
.-
.0
Q)
t/'l
-lC
. .
+->-+>
s::-S::-
t./"lt/'l
Q) Q)
Q) Q)
t/'lt./"l
('0
,
0-
('0 ('0
, , "
p... 0-
o
1ft 1ft
~ 5~l?E
...J
~
N
-
.......
,
0-
...J
~
N
-
....
,
0-
. . .
o (..) (..) cO
u-lu-lu-l~
o
u-l
.......
,
0-
....
,
0-
N
.......-.......
, ....... '
0- ' 0-
0-
.......
,
0-
....... .......
, '
'7 r-
cO cOcO
~~~
cOcO
~~
cO cO cOcO cO
~~~~~
....... ....... .......
, ' '
0- r- '7
C'.!C'.!
--
..............
, '
0- 0-
.......
,
0-
.......
,
0-
N
.......-.......
, .... '
0- ' 0-
0-
cO cOcO
~~~
.... ....
.... _' r--'
,
0-' I
r-~
c-I C'.!
--
...........
, '
0-0-
~c:O
iS~
cO cO cO cO cO
~~~~~
....... .......
I I
0- 0-
C'.!
......._.......
, ....... '
0- ' 0-
0-
cO cO cO cO
~~ ~ ~
cO cO cO cO cO
~~~~~
cO
~
.......
I
0-
.......
I
0-
.... .......
I I
0- 0-
.......
,
0-
....... ....... .......lC'.l' C'.!
, r--' -' r-- -
0- ......c:==- k-C'" .... .......
I I I '
r::: r::: 0- 0-
cO cO cO cO cO
~~~~~
cO
~
cO cO cO
~~~
cO
~
r-
>i
C
.,-
'7
r; C'.!
C -
..... .......
'7 L'
C'.!
-
....... -0-0
~ > >
r-
>i
C
.....
'7
';';";
c c c
..... ..... ..... -0
'7'7'7>
('0
,
r-
('0('0
, I
r-r-
u (,) u u
'-- c c r- (..) c c ('0
r 00100'
~l-I<8rl<0 '7 r-\4t0-lCcJ r-
.
8.
~
o
~ 0
.,- ct:
.0
......
o
c
Q)
$
Q)
1ft ';>,
S- .0
~ "3
o So
(,) .r
C<
o ~
0l
1ft
S- Q)
Q) (,)
~ .....
U 4-
o 4-
.-J 0
U
.....
......
.0
~
0-
.
s::-
~ (,)
o .0
g~$
. ...... c
+> .,-
(,) .-0
Q) .- C
.- Q) Q)
u-l r- '7
~
o
o
ct:
Q)
.-
~
.0
. .....
::> -+>
Q) 1ft
,..... Q)
u-l '7
Q)
.-
~
..0
+> .,-
C +>
..... 1ft
.0 Q)
$ '7
.-
.0
U
.....
C
.0
s::-
(,)
~
c
%
>
....... C'.!
N C'.!
....... .......
O"l
.......
.......
o
N
.......
~<..Or-r:;I:)
....... ....... ....... .......
.........................
o
....
.......
....
.......
.......
N ('0
....... .......
....... .......
od"
.......
.......
o
o
o
I- .......
e::: ~
o ex)
a.. 0
e:::
....... .......
..:::( 0"1
L{)
z:
o
:c 0
I- z:
<:(
e::: a..
..:::(W
:::: <C
C'"" N
0 0
M M
OJ OJ OJ ..:::( OJ ..:::( OJ OJ
U) U U U - U - U u
::.:: <0 <0 <0 CO <0 Cl ~ ~
a: c.. c.. c.. " c.. " N N .......
< V'l V'l {..') c::( V'l U 0 0 0 ....... V'l V'l
::E ." ... .0:::1" o:::t o:::t 0
W "0 "0 "0 ....... "0 L{) ....... ..:::( .~ ..:::( o:::t "0 "0
a: OJ OJ OJ 0 OJ 0 0 ..:::( ev OJ
-'= -'= -'= M -'= M M -'= -'=
V1 V1 "0 VI ..:::( Vl 0-::( ..:::( +.l +.l +.l +.l V1 V1
.... .... ev .... - .... - - -'= -'= -'= -'= .... ....
e: e: .- ~ <( C ..:::( ::0 V'l (/') (/') (/') C C
.... .... r::l .... .... '... ....
4- 4- 'U 4- OJ 4- QJ CJ OJ OJ OJ OJ 4- 4-
e: .... V'l C CJ e: QJ ClJ OJ OJ OJ OJ C c
:::> :::> .:.: :::> V'l :::> (/') V'l V'l V) V'l V'l :::> :::>
<' M
I -r
z r-......a.. a..
Cl u: I I I I I I - I I I I I M M M M
Z I I I I I I I I I I
~ a.. 0.. a.. a..
W .... . . . ~ ~ V1 V1 V1 V1 V1
0 I- U U U U --l U :::::l ;j ;j ;j ;j
< . . I I-- 0 0 0 0 CO CC! CO c:c 0 --l U u
::E L.LJ W L.LJ W ::E :E- wJ U U U u 3: 3: 3: 3: u l- .
..:::( ..:::( ..:::( ..:::( C,!) C,!) ~ ~ ..:::( ::E L.LJ L.LJ
..J N N N
Z ....... - - -
..J u: I I I I ....... I ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
< ....... ....i
~ a.. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
a.. a.. a.. c.... a.. 0.. 0.. a.. ::> ::> 0.. a..
I-
U) ..J
W I- c:c CO c:c c:c CO c:c c:c c:c CQ
~ < 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: c:c CO c:c c:c CO c:c c:c c:c c:c CO
::E t..!:i C,!) r.,!;l C,!) C,!) C,!) ~ - . 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3:
C,!) U I I 3: 3:
C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) t..!:i C,!) t..!:i C,!)
C'J N N
.... Z - - -
....... ....... ....... ....... .......
.... u: I I I I I I I I I ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
< a.. a.. 0.. 0.. 0, I I I I I I I I I I I I
~ a.. a.. a.. a.. ::> ::> a.. a..
I-
U) ....
< I- CO CO CO CO CO c:c CO c:c CO c:c c:c CO CO CO CO CO CO c::l c:c
W < 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: I I 3: 3: 3: 3:
::E C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) t..!:i c::5 ~ C,!) C,!) t..!:i C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) t..!:i C,!)
N N
.... Z - -
.... I I ....... I ....... I I ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .......
< u: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
~ 0.. a.. 0.. 0.. 0.. 0.. a.. c.... I-- ::> a.. a.. 0..
i= ..J
::I
0 I- c:c CC c:c CO co CO c:l c:c c:c CO c:c CO CO c:c c:c c:c CO CO CO
<
U) ::E 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: I 3: -~ 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: I 3: 3:
W t..!:i t..!:i C,!) C,!) C,!) t..!:i C,!) '-Cl C,!) t..!:i C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) t..!:i C,!) C,!) C,!)
N N
..J ..J Z ....... - -
.... I I I I ....... I I ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... .~ .......
< u: 0.. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
::) ~ 0.. 0.. O. 0.. a.. a.. 0.. ::> I-- a.. a.. a..
0 i= .... CO c:c
a: I- c:c CO ::0 CO co CO CO CQ CO c:c CO CO CO co CC CO c:c
0 < 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: I 3: ::,: 3: 3: 3: 3: 3: :3 3: 3: I 3: 3: 3:
W Z ::E t..!:i C,!) C,!) C,!) ~ ~ t..!:i c..!) C,!) t..!:i C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!) C,!)
:J: ~ .- >. .- .- .- .- .- .- .- .-
W W >, >, >, >, >1 ....... ....... >, >, >, >,
0 U) Q. I C I I C C e: e: e: - - e: c e: e: I I
< r; .... .... "0 "0 "0 '... .... .... .... .... N N ..... ..... ..... .....
CD ::> ::> :3 3: 3: ::> ::> ::> ::> ::> I I ::> ::> ::> ::>
en I-- I--
a: W u U OJ OJ OJ .... ....
8 M M C M M C M M f-- I-- C'J N a; OJ OJ OJ U U
Q. I I 0 I I 0 U c.. c.. c.. U I I c.. c.. c.. c.. e: e:
r; I I ~ ~ ~
:J: .... I-- I-- U I-- I-- U I-- I-- ::> I-- I-- ~ ~ ~ ~ 0 ~
::> ,~ L~ ~
Ia. iC iC .~ ,~ ,~ <0 iC(...)
en OJ <0
+.l OJ U OJ
- OJ C'l .... ~
Z >,..>.t. C 4- <::( V1
..0 U ;j 4- 4- a;
..0 ..... 0 0 4- OJ .- .
- ::EW 0 I-- --l 0 >, u .... a; ~ c..
LL 0:& --l > ~ ~ C I..L. .- <0 ev
~ OJ OJ +.l . ~ <0 OJ - ;j >, C'l co ~
0< :::::l +.l .;: ~ ..... +.l .... a.; +.l ~ OJ ..0 <0 C a..
a:z
:E <0 e: . OJ ~ ~ ~ C'l OJ OJ OJ C ..... V1 ~ ..... ..>.t.
~ OJ -'= +.l ..>.t. ...--.,: :::::l C't:l :::::l <0 ~ 4- 4- OJ +.l a.: .- "0 U "0
0 > U 4- U .~~ U c.. u c u c 4- E c V1 .- .- C <0 0
0 +.l a; OJ 'r- ..... OJ ClJ OJ <0 a; 0 0 0 OJ OJ ..... <0 <0 C 0
V'l e::: ::!E C,!) I-- ..:::(C: (/') Cl C.."l :E (/') U U 3: ::E ::> I..L. ~ -l V'l I..L.
0 ::E H N M o:::t L{) 1.0 r--. ex)
a: 8~ o:::t L{) 1.0 r--. ex) 0"1 0 ....... ..:::( 0 0"1 0 .......
N N C'.J N C'.J N M M (V) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ....... .......
....... ....... ....... ....-l ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... N N N N N N N N N N N ('.J
a: .......
N
I
0"1
0"1
0"1
0"1
o
0. 0.
I/l I/l
-d -d
CI) CI)
s::. s::.
</I In
..... .....
e e
..... .....
~ ~
e --
? :5
... ...
-0 -0
CI) CI)
.- .-
~ ~
CI) Q.l
I/l I/l
-ll -ll
I I
.
0 0
.
u.l u.l
0.
I/l
-0
Q.l
s::.
III </I
.....
~ e
4 .....
!. ~
e
u: ?
...
-0
<:.J
.-
~
CI)
I/l
-ll
; ,
<' ~
~
~
~ ..J 0
'4. .
2 u.l
;1 ; \
4- ~
~
~ ..J CO
'4. ~
~ 2
-:. Z \
4 u:
~
~ ..J CO
4 '4. ~
U.I 2
-:. ; I
4 ~
~
~ ..J CO
i '4. ts
2
~ ~ ; \
4 ~
::> ~
~
~ u: ..J CO
i '4. ~
2
~ U.I U.I
~ c- ..
IS) ~
(/) u: U.I <..)
S e
c- O
.~ ,.. 0
~ "'" -ll
Cl m
0 ~
0
~ ..-. g~
,0 U-
0 ~
0.. 0 ~ u:Z <..)
0:: '....
.-' ..-. ~
'.<!'. =' ~
cD ..::t:
'.Z
?
~ 0 ~
I- z:
.=s:. 2. 0
::;:;:: e>- go 0
~ ',..c.l
..:::. u:Z C"'l
.. ..
::;:l ::;:l
~ $
0 0
I ..
~ ?
0 t:3
.. ..
? ~
0
I ..
~ ?
~
0 0
.. ,
<..) <..)
e e
0 0
i:' I;'
s.-
O
~
~ <t>
0 s.-
O CI)
0:: e
~
s.- r.:;,
~
..- .
..- s.-
..... W.
W 0
0 .......
0 0
c::T c::T
-0 -0 -0
~ ~ CI)
<..) <..) <..)
CI) ~ CI)
.- ..- ..-
CI) ~ ~
I/l tfl I/l
Q) Q) Q.l
CO CO CO
0 0 0
l- I- l-
I I ..
~ CI) Q)
s.- s.- s.-
O 0 0
0 0 0 =:
-..., -.. e
\ I
e e e Q.l 0
..... ..... ..... -0 6
6 6 E. ~ ..-
r;) ~ r;) '"? d-
e e e =: =:
Q.l Q) CI)
0' CO CO co
s.- s.-
e s.- ~ ~ 0 c
Q) ..- ..- ..- ..- ..- c 0
</I C 0 0 0 (..)
~ .- Q) .....
e '.... ..... e c.; (..) (..) (..) ~'
0 E. \- ~ (..) . .. n: (';":
..
..... ~ .~ -v "U' ..... ..... .....
-c:; -'0 ::>- ~ ~ r6 </I </I '.... ,,- \11 >-
s.- o 0 0 0 l- I- s.- Q)
~ ~ ~ ..... ..- ~ ':>
+-' tfl ..- ..- ,-
0 >- e ..... '" ~ t..::i ';> >-> ::>- 0
cO +-' 0 .,- .- >- ~ re (..)
</I </I .,- .- \ I I
</I 0 ~ ~ ..... ..... ..... >- >- 0-
.- e r6 +-' 6 6 EO. r6 ~ .-
..- 0 ~ ~ (..) & ~ Q) ..-
Q) ~ Q) Q)
~~~ ~ 0 ~ tfl tfl VI c;t ..- ro
~ C,) 0 <..) ..... ~
-0 ...., U .,- .. -0 -0 I-
~ s.- .. ..
EO. Q) ~ \11 r6 ~ ~ ~ ~ Go' .-
~ </I s.- .- .... e e N N >-> >->
I- U ~ g <..) -0 :::-, ~ Q) - re re r-:l e
.... 0 e 0 e ..... ..... .....
.- .....
e::!. e is 0 ,,... <..) ..... ,'0 r-:l r6 .- .-
:E: 0 ~ t..::i '" 0 :;:>'
'" u.l 0 ~ :;:>' e::!. ...J 0- 0- 0..
_0
....I
~I\<..) ~ ~ C"'l ....... N (:'") ..-.
~ I- 0 ...J ..-.
$ e CO u , \ \ I ..
-0 v v '$ I \
~\\8 ~\~ .":- d: 0.. 0.. 0.. l- I- I- ;:::>"
0 '> ;:::>"
:,;:
if,
......
\..l.-
::;:;::
?
u-
tfl
z:
o
......
tfl
;:::>"
......
o
.n
3
-
'd.
w
......
u-
......
o
uJ
0..
VI
uJ
uJ
tfl
u.l
I-
9
-
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
K>RROB COORTY. FLORIDA
SBCTION 10200 - LOUVERS
AND VBl!lTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Fixed metal wall louvers.
2. Blank-off panels for wall louvers.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section.
1. Division 7, Section 07901 - JOINT SEALERS for sealants installed
in perimeter joints between louver frames and adjoining
construction.
2. Division 15, Section 15891 METAL DUCTWORK for ductwork
connected to metal wall louvers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Louver Terminology: Refer to AMCA publication 501-85 for definitions
of terms for metal louvers not otherwise defined in this section or
referenced standards.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install
exterior metal wall louvers to withstand the effects of loads and
stresses from wind and normal thermal movement, without evidencing
permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames,
and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or
flutter; and permanent damage to fasteners and anchors:
1. Wind Load: Provide louvers, vents, anchorage and attachment in
accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7-88 for a 155 mph
velocity with an importance factor of 1.0.
2. All first-floor louvers and vents shall be attached to the
structural frame as follows:
a. Wave action against the first floor walls shall cause the
yielding of the connection of the components attached to
the structural concrete frame without inducing forces
which exceed the capacity of the frame.
b. All attachments and anchorages connected to the structural
concrete frame below elevation 19 feet NGVD shall be
designed and installed to withstand a pressure of ~S5 psf.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-1
5910861-000
c. The design shall include the applicable safety factors for
the items used but the sizes and spacings shall not
provide safety factors in excess of those required by
code.
3. Normal thermal movement is defined as that resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature. Base
design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due
to both solar heat gain and night time sky heat loss.
a. Temperature Change (Range): 100 degrees F (55.5 degrees
C) .
B. Air Performance, Water Penetration, and Air Leakage Ratings: Provide
louvers complying with performance requirements indicated as
demonstrated by testing manufacturers stock units, of height and
width indicated, according to Air Movement and Control Association
(AMCA) Standard 500.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each product indicated.
B. Signed and sealed calculations from a registered engineer and/or test
data certifying the performance of louvers and vents, including
materials, sizes, thicknesses, spacing, anchorages and attachments
applicable to the system.
C. Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, spacing
of louver blades; unit dimensions related to wall openings and
construction; free areas for each size indicated; and profiles of
frames at jambs, heads and sills.
1. Where installed products are indicated to comply with certain
structural design loadings, include structural computations,
material properties, and other information needed for structural
analysis which has been prepared by, or under the supervision
of, a qualified professional engineer.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's
color charts showing full range of colors available for those units
with factory-applied color finishes.
E. Samples for verification purposes of each type of metal finish
required, prepared on 6-inch square metal samples of same thickness
and alloy indicated for final unit of work. Where finishes involve
normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full
range of variations expected.
F. Product certificates signed by louver manufacturers certifying that
their products which comply with project requirements are licensed to
bear AMCA seal based on tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard
500 and complying with AMCA Certified Ratings Program.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with
D1.2 "Structural Welding Code Aluminum" and D1.3 "Structural
Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-2
5910861-000
B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual" recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and
installation procedures.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field
measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delay of the work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the
work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication
of louvers and vents without field measurements. Coordinate
wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions
correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
1 . Louvers:
a. Airline Products Co. Div., Danzer Metal Works Co.
b. Airolite Co.
c. Airstream Products Div., Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.
d. Construction Specialties, Inc.
e. Industrial Louvers, Inc.
f. Reliable Metal Products.
g. Ruskin Mfg. Div., Phillips Industries, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as
required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer
to produce required finish.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52.
C. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive or
incompatible with materials joined.
1. Use types, gauges, and lengths to suit unit installation
conditions.
2. Use Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type
of loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or
hot-dip galvanized anchors and inser<ts for exterior installations and
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-3
5910861-000
elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
E. Bituminous Paint: SSPC-Paint 12 (cold-applied asphalt mastic) .
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Fabricate louvers and vents to comply with requirements
indicated for design, dimensions, materials, joinery, and
performance.
B. Preassemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between
blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance.
D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of
size indicated with allowances made for fabrication and installation
tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and perimeter sealant
joints.
E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete
assembly.
F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not
further apart than recommended by manufacturer.
G. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as
louvers, where indicated, or required for drainage to exterior and to
prevent water penetrating to interior.
H. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as
follows, unless otherwise indicated, or size of louver assembly makes
bolted connections between frame members necessary:
1. with fillet welds, concealed from view; or mechanical fasteners;
or a combination of these methods; as standard with louver
manufacturer.
2.4 FIXED EXTRUDED ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS
A. Horizontal Drainable Fixed Blade Louvers: Extruded aluminum frames
and louver blades; designed to collect and drain water to exterior at
sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades and of channels in
jambs and mullions; complying with the following requirements.
1. Louver Depth: 6 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Frame Thickness: 0.125 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Louver Blade Thickness: 0.125 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Louver Blade Angle: 37-1/2 degrees, unless otherwise indicated.
s. Performance Requirements: As follows, determined by testing
units 48 inches wide by 48 inches high per AMCA Standard 500:
a. Louver Free Area: Not less than 7.34 sq. ft.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-4
5910861-000
b. Static Pressure Loss: Not more than 0.15 inch water gage
at an airflow of 1000 fpm free area intake velocity.
c. Water Penetration: Not more than 0.02 oz. per sq. ft. of
free area at an airflow of 1450 fpm free area velocity
when tested for 15 minutes.
6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.5 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying
with the following requirements:
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Insect screening.
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless steel machine screws,
spaced at each corner and at 12 inches o.c. between.
C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners
to louver sizes indicated and to comply with the following
requirements:
1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver
frames to which screens are attached.
a. Reinforce extruded aluminum screen frames at corners with
clips.
2 . Type: Rewireable frames with a driven spline or insert for
securing screen mesh.
D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: Fit aluminum louver screen
frames with screening covering louver openings and complying with the
following requirements:
1. Insect Screening: 18 x 16 mesh formed with 0.012-inch diameter
aluminum wire.
2.6 BLANK-OFF PANELS
A. General: Fabricate blank-off panels from materials and to sizes
indicated and to comply with the following requirements:
1. Finish: Match finish applied to louver with respect to coating
type, except for color which shall be as follows:
a. Black.
2. Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with clips.
3. Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with stainless
steel sheet metal screws.
B.
Noninsulated Blank-Off Panels:
following requirements:
Metal sheet complying with the
1. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, thickness as follows:
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-5
5910861-000
a. 0.051 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with
louver manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum channel frames
0.081-inch thick, with corners mitered and with same finish as
panels.
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish louvers after assembly.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum
finishes.
B. High Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical
conversion coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment;
Organic Coating: as specified below) Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluorocarbon 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard
2 - coat thermocured system, composed of specially formulated
inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing not
less than 70 percent polyvinyldene resin by weight; complying
with AAMA 605.2.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard choices for color and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and
directions for installation of anchorages which are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items
to project site.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and in proper alignment
with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead
washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and
to make a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately
located and secured.
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants
and joint fillers, as indicated.
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-6
5910861-000
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding
operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so
there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot
be refinished in field to shop, make required al terations and
refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
F. Protect galvanized and nonferrous metal surfaces from corrosion or
galvanic action by application of a heavy coating of bituminous paint
on surfaces which will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or
dissimilar metals.
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation,
as louver installation progresses where required to make louver
joints weathertight. Comply with Division 7, Section 07901 - JOINT
SEALERS for sealants applied during installation of louver.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect louvers and vents from damage of any kind during construction
period including use of temporary protective coverings where needed
and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at
time of substantial completion.
B. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and
construction period, so that no evidence remains of correction work.
If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Architect,
remove damaged units and replace with new units.
1. Clean and touch-up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried
coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with,
factory-applied finish coating.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents, which are
not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil
during construction period; do not let soil accumulate until final
cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and with
a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse thoroughly
and dry surface.
END OF SECTION 10200
LOUVERS AND VENTS
10200-7
5910861-000
MARA'nION AIRPORT
RB1f PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDIRG
K>RROB COUNTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 10350 - FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov~s~ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes:
1. Shoe-Base, Fixed, Cone Tapered Flagpoles:
a. Aluminum.
2. Reinforced concrete flagpole foundation and pedestal.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data and installation instructions for each type of flagpole
required.
C. Shop drawings of flagpoles and bases, showing general layout,
jointing, grounding method, and anchoring and supporting systems, not
covered in product data.
D. Signed and sealed calculations from a registered engineer indicating
the pole, anchorages, attachments and foundation are in accordance
with the performance criteria specified herein.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit
produced by a single manufacturer, including fittings, accessories,
bases, and anchorage devices.
B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpoles and installations constructed to
withstand a 155-mph wind velocity. Use heavy pipe sizes if required
for flagpole type and height shown.
C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if
poss~b~e. If more than one piece is necessary, provide snug-fitting,
prec~s~on joints with self-aligning, internal splicing sleeve
arrangement for weather-tight, hairline field joints.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy Kraft paper or other
weathertight wrapping and prepare for shipment in hard fiber tube or
other protective container.
FLAGPOLES
10350-1
5910861-000
B.
Deliver flagpoles and
installation procedure.
or soiling.
accessories completely identified for
Handle and store flagpoles to prevent damage
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Aabec Pole Div., Morgan-Francis Co.
2. American Flagpole Div. of Kearney-National, Inc.
3. Baartol Co., Inc.
4. Concord Industries, Inc.
S. EMC Div., Eder Manufacturing Corp.
6. Eder Flag Manufacturing Co., Inc.
7. John Ewing and Co., Inc.
8. Pole-Tech, Inc.
2.2 FLAGPOLE TYPES
A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Fabricate from seamless extruded tubing
complying with ASTM B241, alloy 6063-T6, having a minimum wall
thickness of 3/16 inch (0.1875 inch), tensile strength not less than
30,000 psi, and a yield point of 25,000 psi. Heat-treat and
age-harden after fabrication.
1. Provide cone-tapered aluminum flagpoles.
2.3 FLAGPOLE MOUNTING
A. Provide manufacturer's standard base system for the type of flagpole
installation required.
B. Base Plate: For anchor-bolt mounting, furnish manufacturer's
standard cast metal shoe base of same material as flagpole. Furnish
and install anchor bolts and lightning ground spike as required.
2.4 SHAFT FINISH
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for
recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Aluminum: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the
Aluminum Association system for designating aluminum finishes.
Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32), finished as
follows:
1. Natural clear anodized finish complying withAA-C22A41, Class I
( 0 . 7 mil) .
FLAGPOLES
10350-2
5910861-000
2.5 FITTINGS
A. Finial Ball: Manufacturer's standard flush-seam ball, size as
indicated or, if not indicated, to match pole butt diameter.
1. Spun stainless steel finished to match pole shaft.
B. Truck: Ball-bearing, nonfouling, revolving, double-track assembly of
cast metal finished to match pole shaft.
C. Cleats: Two 9-inch cast metal cleats with fasteners, finished to
match pole shaft.
D.
Halyards:
follows:
Provide 2 continuous halyards for each flagpole, as
1. Nylon, braided, with metal core.
2. Size: 5/16 inch (No. 10).
3. Size: 3/8 inch (No. 12).
E. Halyard Flag Snaps: Provide 2 swivel snaps per halyard, as follows:
1. Chromium-plated bronze.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION
A. Provide anchor bolts and templates in a timely manner to avoid delay
of the work, for installation by others.
B. Prepare and install flagpoles where shown and in compliance with
accepted shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
1.
Provide positive
installation.
lightning
ground
for
each
flagpole
END OF SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
10350-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
RB1f PASSBRGBR TBRIIINAL BUILDING
K>RROB COUNTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 10425 - SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of signs:
1. Panel signs.
2. Dimensional letters and numbers.
3. Cast metal plaques.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 1 for temporary project identification signs.
2. Division 15 for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical
equipment.
3. Division 16 for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical
equipment.
4. Division 16 for illuminated exit signs.
S. Electrical service and connections for illuminated letters are
specified in Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative
to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and
finishes for each type of sign required.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of
signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of
typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds,
reinforcement, accessories, layout, and installation details.
1. Provide message list for each sign required, including
large-scale details of wording and layout of lettering.
2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction,
provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed
as a unit of work in other sections.
SIGNS
10425-1
5910861-000
3. Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted
dimensional letters and numbers.
4. Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques.
D. Wiring diagrams from the manufacturer for illuminated sign units.
E. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected, and
compliance with requirements indicated:
1. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Provide a sample panel
not less than 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches for each material
indicated. Include a panel for each color, texture, and pattern
required. On each panel include a representative sample of the
graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and
colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic
devices.
2. Cast Aluminum Plaques: Submit sample of raised and background
finishes specified.
3. Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples
of each dimensional letter type required, showing letter style,
color, and material finish and method of attachment.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide lighting fixtures and electrical
components for illuminated signs that are labeled and listed by UL
and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign
required, obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate size, profiles, and
dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific type
and model indicated. Signs by other manufacturers may be considered
provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do
not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden
of proof of equality is on the proposer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of manufacturer specified below or one of equal quality.
1. Manufacturer of Panel Signs and Prespaced Copy:
a. System 2/90.
2. Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters:
a. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
3. Manufacturers of Cast Plaques:
a. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company, Inc.
SIGNS
10425-2
5910861-000
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: Provide aluminum sheet of alloy and temper
recommended by the aluminum producer or finisher for the type of use
and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability properties specified in ASTM B209 for 5005-H15.
B. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide aluminum extrusions of alloy and temper
recommended by the aluminum producer or finisher for the type of use
and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability properties specified in ASTM B221 for 6063-T5.
C. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper
recommended by the aluminum producer and finisher for the casting
process used and for the use and finish indicated.
D. ABS Plastic: Provide high-impact thermoplastic composed of
copolymers of acrylonitrile, butadiene, and styrene.
E. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are
not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface.
F. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized
anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as
required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead
expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish
inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
2.3 PANEL SIGNS
A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials,
thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of
construction.
1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to
remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of
plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.
B. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and
smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements:
1. Edge Condition: Square cut.
2. Material: Extruded aluminum; satin finish.
3. Copy: Silk screened; color - CWG white, style - AGM.
4. See Sign Schedule: Type 10.
C. Framed Panel Signs: Fabricate frames to profile indicated; comply
with the following requirements for materials and corner conditions:
1. Material: Aluminum, extruded.
2. See Sign Schedule - Types 6A, 6B, 8, 9, 12, 15, 16 and 17.
3. Corner Condition: Square corners.
D. Brackets: Fabricate brackets and fittings for bracket-mounted signs
from extruded aluminum to suit sign panel construction and mounting
conditions indicated. Factory-paint brackets in a color matching the
background color of the sign panel.
SIGNS
10425-3
5910861-000
E. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the
sign schedule provided. devices.
F. Raised Copy: Modified acrylic pressure bonded to aluminum panel.
Braille to be Grade 2 embossed vinyl.
1. Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
G. Applied Copy: Die-cut characters from vinyl film with pressure-
sensitive adhesive backing. Apply copy to the exposed face of the
sign panel.
1. See Sign Schedule: Sign Type 18.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL LETTERS AND NUMBERS
A. Cast Letters and Numbers: Form individual letters and numbers by
casting. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners,
and precisely formed lines and profiles, free from pits, scale, sand
holes, or other defects. Cast lugs into the back of characters and
tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply with requirements
indicated for finish, style, and size.
1. Metal: Aluminum.
2. See Sign Schedule: Type 1 through 4 for size and location.
3. Letter Style: Roffe No. 515.
B. Cutout Letters and Numbers: Cut letters and numbers from solid plate
material of thickness indicated. Produce precisely cut characters
with square cut, smooth edges. Comply with requirements indicated
for finish, style, and size.
1. Metal: Aluminum.
2. See Sign Schedule: Type 7A and 7B for size and location.
3. Illuminated Units: Illuminate dimensional letters and numbers
in the manner indicated using manufacturer's standard lighting
components including neon tubes, transformers, insulators, and
other components. Make provisions for servicing and concealed
connection to the building system. Coordinate electrical
characteristics with those of the power supply provided.
a. Backlighted Units: Provide concealed white neon tubes of
the number indicated or required by size of the
characters. Include manufacturer's hardware for
projection mounting of the characters at the distance from
the wall surface indicated.
b. Facelighted Units: Fabricate letter faces from
translucent plastic sheet of thickness indicated. Attach
letters to sheet metal back channels. Provide neon tubes
of the number and spacing required to illuminate letter
faces evenly.
2 .5 CAST METAL PLAQUES
A. Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or
other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border
style, background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for
SIGNS
10425-4
5910861-000
thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff borders and
raised copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished
finish. Refer to "Finish" article for other finish requirements.
1. Metal: Aluminum.
2. See Sign Schedule: Type 11 and 5 for location and size.
3. Border Style: #504 for sign type #11 only.
4. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard matt texture for
sign type #11 only.
5. Finish: Sign type #11 - AL-100.
6. Finish: Sign type #5 - painted to match sample colors provided
by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using
mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with
sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in
appearance.
B. Wall Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using
the methods indicated below:
1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive
recommended by the sign manufacturer to attach sign units to
irregular, porous, or vinyl- covered surfaces. Use double - sided
vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold
the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured.
C. Dimensional Letters and Numbers: Mount letters and numbers using
standard fastening methods (Type FM-4) recommended by the
manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction,
and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to
establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
1. Flush Mounting: Mount letters with backs in contact with the
wall surface.
D.
Cast Metal
recommended
indicated.
Plaques:
by the
Mount plaques
manufacturer for
using the
the type
standard method
of wall surface
1. Concealed Mounting: Mount the plaques by inserting threaded
studs into tapped lugs on the back of the plaque. Set in
predrilled holes filled with quick-setting cement. Method No.
4.
SIGNS
10425-5
5910861-000
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from
damage until acceptance by the Owner.
Type 1 -
3.3 SIGN SCHEDULE
Co.
Type 2 -
Type 3 -
Type 4 -
Type 5 -
Manufacturer:
A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing
1321 S. Walker Street
Oklahoma City, OH 73109
letters, style-roffe No. 515
Mount FM-4
Cast aluminum
Finish - F-1,
Manufacturer: A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Co.
Cast aluminum letters, style 515, 3 inches high
Finish - F-1, Mount FM-4
Manufacturer: A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Co.
Cast aluminum letters, style 515, 3 inches high
Finish - F-1, Mount FM-4
Manufacturer: A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Co.
Cast aluminum letters, style 515, 3 inches high
Finish - F-1, Mount FM-4
Manufacturer: A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Co.
Cast aluminum plaque, 48 inches diameter projection mount PM-2
painted to match samples provided by Architect
Type 6a - Manufacturer: System 2/90
and 6b P.O. Box 888289
Grand Rapids, MI 49588-8289
Manufacture No.: 4 X 10 SC with 1- and 3-inch insert with
tactile and braille copy
Finish - S-AN natural aluminum
Copy - Style-AGM, Color - C-WG White
Quantity: 1 each.
Types 7A and 7B - Manufacturer: A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Co.
Quantity - 2 each
Cut out aluminum international symbol for men and women, F-1 finish,
10 inches high X 1/2-inch TH.
FM-4 mount
Type 8 -
Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacturer No: 6 X 10 ASC with 5- and 1-inch inserts with
tactile and braille copy
Finish - S-AN natural aluminum
Copy - Style-AGM, Color - C-WG
Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacturer No: 6 X 10 ASC with 5- and 1-inch inserts with
tactile and braille copy
Finish - S-AN natural aluminum
Copy - Style-AGM, Color - C-WG
Type 10 - Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacture No.: 1 X 6Y plaque modified to 1 X 3 inches.
Finish - S-AN
Copy - Style-UN5, Color - C-WG
Quantity - 8 each
Type 9 -
SIGNS
10425-6
5910861-000
Copy to Spell Mech. Storage
111 100
Maint. Elec.
113 115
Tel. Elev.
116 118
Mech. Storage
126 124
Type 11 - Manufacturer: A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Co.
Cast aluminum plaques, border-504
Background - AL-100 light with matt texture, letter style - Roffe 515
Type 12 - Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacture No.: 2 X 10 AS CW/freestanding "G" mount for desk bar
Finish - S-AN
Copy - Style-AGM, Color - C-WG White
Type 13 - Manufacturer: Scott Sign Sy~tems, Inc.
7524 Commerce Place
Sarasota, FL 34243
Manufacture No.: Series A recessed light box 36 X 60 inches,
satin brushed aluminum finish,
Quantity - 9 each
Type 14 -
Manufacturer: Scott Sign Systems Inc.
Manufacture No.: Recessed Scott-Lite
inches X 7 feet,
divisions
Bri te View, 1
o inches with
foot, 6
6 panel
Quantity - 1 each
Type 15 - Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacture No.: 10 X 10S with 9- and 1-inch insert with tactile
and braille copy
Finish - S-AN
Copy - Style-AGM, Color - C-WG
Type 16 - Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacture No.: 8 X 8 SC with international TDD symbol
Finish - S-AN
Copy - Style-AGM, Color - C-WG
Type 17 - Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacture No.: 8 X 8 SC with international assist. listening symbol
Finish - S-AN
Copy - Style-AGM, Color - C-WG
Type 18 - Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacture No.: PL-38
Copy Color - C-WG White, Style
Quantity - 7 each
This item is prespaced vinyl copy on clear sticky film for
surface application.
Type 19 - Not used.
Type 20 - Manufacturer:
SIGNS
10425-7
5910861-000
Type 21 - Manufacturer: System 2/90
Manufacture No.: 6 X 10 ASC with 5- and 1-inch inserts with
tactile and braille copy
Finish - S-AN
Copy - Style-AGM, Color C-WG
END OF SECTION 10425
SIGNS
10425-8
5910861-000
DRATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRHIRAL BUILDING
MONROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTIOR 10522 - FIRE
EXTINGUISHERS, CABIRBTS AND
ACCESSORIBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s1ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
3. Mounting brackets.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 15, Section 15300 - AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM for fire
protection systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. For fire
extinguisher cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing
mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding
construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style,
door construction, panel style, and materials.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets
from one source from a single manufacturer.
B. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers UL-listed and bear UL
"Listing Mark" for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. J.L. Industries.
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
3 . Modern Metal Products by Muckle.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
10522-1
5910861-000
4. Potter-Roemer, Inc.
5. Watrous Inc.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
General: Provide fire extinguishers for each
and other locations indicated, in colors and
Architect from manufacturer's standard,
requirements of governing authorities.
extinguisher cabinet
finishes selected by
which comply with
1. Abbreviations indicated below identify extinguisher types
related to UL classification and rating system and not
necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material
contained in extinguisher.
B. Halon Types: UL-rated 1A-10BC, 9-1b nominal capacity, in enameled
steel container with pressure-indicating gauge.
C. Dry Chemical: All purpose 10# ABC.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Provide brackets designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of
extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher
indicated in plated finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
2.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of
suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities
indicated.
B. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim,
frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door
style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld
perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated, of the
following types:
1. Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of
sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.
D. Trim Style: Fal5ricate trim in one piece with corners mitered,
welded, and ground smooth.
1. Trimless with hidden flange of same metal and finish as box
(tub) that overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed
from view by an overlapping door, with concealed hinge and
handle.
E. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door
construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types
and trim styles selected.
1. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel
door construction with tubular stiles and rails.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
10522-2
5910861-000
2. Door Glazing: Clear float glass complying with ASTM C1036,
Type I, Class 1, Quality q3.
F. Door Style: Flush overlay style with concealed hinge and handle.
1. Duo-Panel: Float glass, 1/8 inch thick.
G. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with red letter decals
spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to wall surface. Letter size,
style, and location as selected by Architect.
H. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating
hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door
material and style indicated. Provide door pull, concealed, and
friction latch. Provide concealed hinge permitting door to open 180
degrees.
2.5 FINISHES FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual 11 for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
application of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to
shipment.
2.6 STEEL FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FINISHES
A. Surface preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces in compliance with
SSPS-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that
could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present,
from uncoated steel in compliance with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast
Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling).
B.
Factory-Priming
specified below
pretreatment.
for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer
immediately following surface preparation and
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's standard,
fast-curing, lead-free, "universal" primer, selected for
resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility
with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated,
and for capability to provide a sound foundation for
field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2. Interior of cabinet: Manufacturer's standard finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting
heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with
applicable regulations of governing authorities.
1. Prepare recesses and furring in walls for fire extinguisher
cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of
trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure
that front and back of cabinets are set flush with walls and do
not protrude.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
10522-3
5910861-000
2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets
to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's
instructions.
3. Where exact location of surface-mounted cabinets and bracket-
mounted fire extinguishers is not indicated, locate as directed
by Architect.
END OF SECTION 10522
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
10522-4
5910861-000
DRATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRHIRAL BUILDING
MONROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 10701 - ALmIINOM
SHOTTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s1ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide aluminum shutters specified and shown on drawings.
B. Aluminum shutter work shall include trim components, anchors,
telescopic arms and accessories required for a complete installation.
C. The type of panels required are roll-formed and extruded aluminum
components with factory-applied finish.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: willard Shutter Company, Inc., Miami, Florida, is
specified as a basis of design and quality required. Shutters
manufactured by another manufacturer may be provided if approved by
the Architect and if proven equal in strength and quality.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind Load: Provide aluminum shutters, anchorages and attachments in
accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7-88 for a 155 mph velocity
with an importance factor of 1.0.
1. All first-floor aluminum shutters shall be attached to the
structure frame as follows:
a. Wave action against the first floor walls shall cause the
yielding of the connection of the components attached to
the structural concrete frame without inducing forces
which exceed the capacity of the frame.
b. All attachments and anchorages connected to the structural
concrete frame below elevation 19 feet NGVD shall be
designed and installed to withstand a pressure of ~55 psf.
c. The design shall include the applicable safety factors for
the items used but the sizes and spacings shall not
provide safety factors in excess of those required by
code.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications,
construction detail drawings, profile of panels and installation
instructions. Include manufacturer's certification or other data
substantiating that the materials and finishes comply with the
requirements.
ALUMINUM SHUTTERS
10701-1
5910861-000
B. Signed and sealed calculations from a registered engineer and/or test
data certifying the performance of aluminum shutters, including
materials, sizes, thicknesses, spacing, anchorages and attachments
applicable to the system.
C. Submit manufacturer's warranty on factory-applied finish.
D. Samples: Submit two, 2-foot long by full width samples of each type
of shutter, complete with factory-applied finish.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protect panels from damage during handling, storage and erection.
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and instruction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALUMINUM SHUTTERS
A. Construction: Panels shall consist of a series of 1-3/4-inch wide
fixed louvers inserted into interlocking box-beam frames, 1-5/8 inch
thick and 2-1/2-inch wide. Each box-beam shall be packed with
styrofoam to firmly receive the louvers and add structural soundness
to the frame. Heavy-duty extruded aluminum I-beams shall be inserted
into box-beams for additional reinforcement as required in compliance
with South Florida Building Code specifications. Louvers shall be
roll-formed into a converse beveled-edge design and spaced in 1-3/4-
inch height increments. Louvers may span a maximum of 26 inches at
which point an additional vertical box-beam shall be required as an
interior frame support (mull).
B. Materials: Box-beam and louvers shall be 3005-H26 roll-formed
aluminum, 0 . 025 inch thick. Styrofoam shall be Dyplast expanded
polystyrene insulation to meet federal specifications HH-1-524A, I-
beam inserts shall be 6063-T6 extruded aluminum, 0.062 inch typical
wall thickness. All fasteners shall be self-tapping stainless steel
machine screws or pop-rivets, aluminum alloy 2024-T4. All component
accessories and installation hardware shall be high quality,
noncorrosive material as described on engineer's drawings. Headers,
tracks and other metal extrusions shall be anodized aluminum alloy
6063-T5.
C. Finish: Box-beam frame and louvers shall be roller- coated baked
enamel in low gloss as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
I -beams shall be mill finish. All other aluminum extrusions shall be
anodized R1-201.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine existing conditions of construction prior to installation of
shutters and do not proceed until existing conditions are acceptable
for proper installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND ERECTION
A. Install shutters, fasteners, trim and related items in conformance
with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.
ALUMINUM SHUTTERS
10701-2
5910861-000
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed surfaces of shutters promptly after completion of
installation. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Protection: Provide protection of shutters and accessories to ensure
that the work will be without damage or deterioration at the
completion of all work.
END OF SECTION 10701
ALUMINUM SHUTTERS
10701-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGBR TBRHIRAL BUILDING
MONROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 10800 - TOILET AND
BATH ACCESSORIBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s1ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following toilet accessory items:
1. Paper towel dispenser.
2. Combination towel dispenser/waste receptacle unit.
3 . Mul tipurpose uni t .
4. Grab bar.
5. Soap dispenser.
6 . Mop and broom holder.
7 . Robe hook.
8. Adjustable tilt mirror units.
B. Mirror glass for frameless applications is specified in Division 8,
Section 08800 -GLASS AND GLAZING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specifications sections.
B. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified, including
details of construction relative to materials, dimensions, gauges,
profiles, method of mounting, specified options, and finishes.
C. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide
templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for
preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that
must be set in concrete or built into masonry; coordinate delivery
with other work to avoid delay.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer
for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same
areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800-1
5910861-000
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and
sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper
installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of
toilet accessory items.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
toilet accessories equal to one of the following:
1. American Specialties, Inc.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Bradley Corporation.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish,
22 gauge (0.034 inch) minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B19; rods, shapes,
forgings, and flat products with finished edges, ASTM B16, Castings,
ASTM B30.
C. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A366, 20 gauge
(0.040 inch) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface
preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A527, G60.
E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electrodeposited on base
metal, ASTM B456, Type SC 2.
F. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick, conforming to ASTM
C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electroplated
copper coating, and protective organic coating.
G.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices:
after fabrication.
ASTM A153, hot-dip galvanized
H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as
accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed.
I. Keys: Unless otherwise indicated, provide universal keys for access
to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing,
resupply, etc. Provide minimum of 6 keys to Owner's representative
and obtain receipt.
2.3 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS
A. Recessed Towel Dispensers: Fabricate of stainless steel for nominal
4 inch wall depth, sized to dispense not less than 400 C-fold or 700
multifold paper towels without use of special adapters, door equipped
with tumbler lockset.
1. Bobrick No. B-36203.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800-2
5910861-000
2.4 COMBINATION TOWEL DISPENSER/WASTE RECEPTACLE UNITS
A. Recessed Unit: Stainless steel combination unit fabricated for
nominal 8-inch wall depth and with continuous seamless wall flange.
Towel compartment in upper portion of unit designed to dispense not
less than 400 C-fold or 700 multifold paper towels. Waste receptacle
in lower portion of unit provided with reusable heavy duty vinyl
liner, minimum 12-gallon capacity. Provide flush doors with piano
hinges and tumbler locks on upper and lower compartments.
1. Bobrick No. B-39003.
2.5 MULTIPURPOSE UNITS
A. Multipurpose Units: Provide accessory combination unit fabricated of
stainless steel with seamless 1 inch wide wall flange, continuous
piano hinge, tumbler lock for servicing, and the following features:
1. Bobrick No. B-3574: Toilet seat cover dispenser, roll toilet
tissue dispenser and napkin disposal.
2. Bobrick No. B-3474: Toilet seat cover dispenser and roll toilet
tissue dispenser.
2.6 GRAB BARS
A. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not less
than 18 gauge (0.050 inch) and as follows:
1. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and
anchorages.
2. Clearance: 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall surface and
inside face of bar.
3. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish.
4. Heavy-Duty Size: OUtside diameter of 1-1/2 inches.
5. Bobrick No. B-6206 X 30 inches.
2.7 SOAP DISPENSERS
A. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Deck-Mounted: Deck-mounted piston and
spout-type unit with minimum 16-fluid-ounce capacity polyethylene
reservoir concealed below deck. piston and 6 - inch long spout of
stainless steel with bright polished finish with chrome-plated deck
escutcheon.
1. Provide unit designed for mounting on vanity deck.
2. Equip unit with valve for dispensing soap in liquid form.
3. Bobrick No. B-82216.
B. Liquid soap dispenser, surface-mounted, push-up type, polyethylene
container (24 ounces) with Chrome-plated brackets.
1. Equip unit with push type valve for dispensing soap in liquid
form.
2. Bobrick No~ B155.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800-3
5910861-000
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Mop and Broom Holder/Utility Shelf: Combination unit with 18 gauge
(0.050 inch) Type 304 stainless steel shelf with 1/2-inch returns,
16 gauge (0.062 inch) support brackets for wall mounting; provide
16 gauge stainless steel hooks for wiping rags on front of shelf,
together with spring-loaded rubber cam-type mop/broom holders;
1/4 inch diameter stainless steel drying rod suspended beneath shelf.
Provide unit 36 inches long and complete with 4 mop/broom holders and
3 hooks.
1. Bobrick No. B-239; mount in maintenance area.
B. Coat Hooks: Satin stainless steel.
1. Ironmonger No. 1.413.
2. Ironmonger No. 1.412.
2.9 MIRROR UNITS
A. Adjustable Tilting Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Units: Fabricate
frame with angle or channel shapes of not less than 20 gauge (0.040
inch), with square corners carefully mitered to hairline joints,
welded and ground smooth. Furnish continuous stainless steel piano
hinge at bottom of unit and adjustable elbow hinge at each side to
permit pivot ranging from vertical to not less than 6 inches outward
at top.
1. Bobrick No. B-294.1630.
2.10 FABRICATION
A. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet
and bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to
view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory
item by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate
indicating manufacturer's name and product model number.
B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise
indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges
rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel
piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise
indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without
mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length
stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully
concealed when unit is closed.
D. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror
units to accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge
protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that
will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent
accumulation of moisture, as follows:
1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 22 gauge
(0.034 inch) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler
material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler
material.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800-4
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions, uS1ng fasteners appropriate to substrate and
recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level,
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special
hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square
at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions for type of substrate involved.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that
mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and
protective coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10800-5
5910861-000
DRATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRHIRAL BUILDING
MONROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTIOR 11458 - FOLDING
STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s1ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes folding aluminum stairway with integral frame
and access door.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data and installation instructions with fit-up and template
drawings. Include operating and maintenance instructions with each
unit.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective
containers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to the following:
1. precision Stair Corporation, Morristown, TN, "Super Simplex"
model.
2 .2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Stairway shall be pianO-hinged in a steel frame for a 30 X 54-inch
rough opening and shall have nonskid serrated treads with 9-1/2 inch
riser height.
B. Unit shall be mounted in 1/8-inch steel box frame with built-in steps
and handrail for use with dropped ceilings.
C. Unit shall be custom fabricated for floor to floor height and floor
to dropped ceiling height as indicated on drawings and shall have
provisions for pole operation.
D. Hardware shall be fabricated from heavy~duty galvanized steel.
FOLDING STAIRS
11458-1
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install unit in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Securely anchor to adjacent construction with concealed
devices.
B. Coordinate with other trades as necessary.
3 .2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. General: Check that operating parts work freely and fit neatly.
Adjust hardware and moving parts as necessary.
B. Repair or replace damaged parts, dents, buckles, abrasions, and other
defects affecting appearance or serviceability so that unit is in
acceptable condition at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 11458
FOLDING STAIRS
11458-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGBR TBRHIRAL BUILDING
MONROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 11459 - .AQmUUmI
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s1ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1 . 2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes furnishing and installation of aquarium unit as
shown on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Plastic laminate paneling is specified in Division 6, Architectural
Woodwork.
C. Plumbing and electrical requirements are specified in Divisions 15
and 16.
D. Metal stand is specified in Division 5, Metal Fabrications.
E. Salt, decor, fish and maintenance are not included in this section.
See Section 01020 - ALLOWANCES.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data, installation instructions and shop drawings. Include
operating and maintenance instructions.
C. Samples of finishes and colors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certification Labels: Provide equipment that bears appropriate UL
labels for electrical components.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aquarium to project site in manufacturer's undamaged
protective containers.
B. Delay delivery until spaces to receive them have been fully enclosed
and utility rough-ins are completed.
1.6 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's standard 5-year written warranty against
structural failure. Leaks shall be considered evidence of structural
failure.
AQUARIUM
11459-1
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to the following:
1.
Reef Aquarium
(904) 760-0738.
Designs,
Inc. ,
Port
Orange,
Florida,
2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. The rectangular shaped aquarium will be 84 inches long, 20 inches
wide and have an overall height of 42 inches.
B. The system will be constructed of 1-inch marine plywood with sides
and back, laminated to a thickness of 1-3/4 inches. Bottom to be
laminated to a thickness of 2 inches.
C. Glass viewing panels of 76 inch width. and 30 inch height will be
located along the front of the aquarium. Glass panel thickness will
be 3/4 inch.
D. Provide around the vertical sides of the glass viewing panels 4
inches of wood framing. Provide 6 inches of wood framing along the
top and bottom of the glass panel. Viewing area shall be not less
than 76 inches long X 30 inches high.
E. The total water column height will be 34 inches.
F. All interior wood surfaces will be waterproofed. The back and side
interior walls will be laminated with a fiberglass background of a
rough texture and grey/black coloration.
G. The 2-inch thick aquarium bottom will be recessed up 1 inch from the
bottom edge of the wood framing to allow all fittings through the
bottom to be installed prior to shipping. Pumps, canisters and
piping shall be preas sembled for ease in on-site plumbing.
H. The unfinished exterior wooden surfaces will be prepared for on-site
completion by others. Finish-ready configuration shall permit
application of plastic laminate paneling.
I. Filtration shall be derived by the use of an undergravel filter plate
with water passing through it to 2 Ocean Clear canister filters each
powered an Iwaki 40RLT magnetic drive pump. These components shall
be plumbed in through the lower cabinet section to a mechanical room.
J. Lighting shall consist of two, 5-foot VHO Actinic White fluorescent
bulbs, output to equal 280 watts. These shall be powered by an
electronic ballast for low-heat emission. An Axial fan will
facilitate heat removal from the bulbs. This system will be mounted
and encased in acrylic on the underside of a hinged access lid. A
timer shall be supplied for automated lighting control. The lighting
shall be concealed in the upper 6 inches of wood framing on the
aquarium.
AQUARIUM
11459-2
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install unit in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Securely anchor to steel frame with concealed devices.
B. Coordinate with other trades as necessary for proper mechanical and
electrical service connections.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. General: Check that operating parts work freely and fit neatly.
Adjust hardware and moving parts as necessary.
B. Repair or replace damaged parts, dents, buckles, abrasions, and other
defects affecting appearance or serviceability so that aquarium is in
acceptable condition at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 11459
AQUARIUM
11459-3
5910861-000
DRATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRHIRAL BUILDING
~B Cuu1'f'l'Y, FLORIDA
SBCTION 12600 - FURNITURE
AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1S1ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of furnishings and
accessories:
1. Multiple seating units.
2. Bench seating units.
3. Lounge seating.
4 . Tables.
5. Waste receptacles.
6. Wall murals.
7. Office furniture.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each type of seating.
B. Samples for verification purposes of each exposed material from which
seating units and accessories are composed, in each color, finish,
pattern, and texture indicated. Include samples of the following:
1. Fabric.
2. Plastic laminate.
3. Baked enamel finishes for metal components.
4. Wood and plywood materials and finishes.
5 . Stone.
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of seating certifying
that their products comply with specified requirements.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver seating in manufacturers unopened cartons clearly labeled
with manufacturers name and contents.
B. Store seating in dry location protected from damage and soiling under
environmental conditions acceptable to manufacturer.
C. Handle seating in a manner to prevent damage.
FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12600-1
5910861-000
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install seating until space is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is complete and
nominally dry, installation of finishes including painting is
complete, other units of Work above ceiling are complete; and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions will be continuously maintained
at values near those indicated for final occupancy.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described
below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Upholstery fabric in size and quantity required to reupholster
2 percent of each size of installed seats and backs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MULTIPLE SEATING SPECIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: ALAR Furniture, Inc., 158 Oakdale Road, Downsview,
Ontario, Canada M3N 2S5.
1. Seating Product No.: 904APS Airport Seating Units.
B. Quantity:
1. 4 Seater: Quantity 8 each.
2. 4 Seater and 1 Table: Quantity 4 each.
3. 5 Seater: Quantity 2 each.
4. 6 Seater and 2 Tables: Quantity 3 each.
C. Seat: Consists of 58-inch thick molded plywood seat shell, with fire
retardant dual density foam on seat which has a dense inner layer
covered by a less dense outer layer. Both sides of back covered by
foam. Foam on outside portion of back minimizes cutting of fabric
from impact. All layers of foam are bonded to each other and to seat
shell. Foam does not contain fillers to increase density. Seat
fastened by liT 11 nuts and machine screws to 1/4 -inch thick steel
brackets which are bolted to stretcher. Upholstery cover has hidden
seam.
1. Densities:
a. Seat: 4 Ib/cu ft and 1-1/2 Ib/cu ft.
b. Back: 1-1/2 Ib/cu ft.
c. Foam passing CAL.133 has density of 3-1/2 Ib/cu ft.
2. Flammability:
a. Passes CAL 117 A&D.
b. MOSS 302.
FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12600-2
5910861-000
c. CAN 2-4.2-M77.
3. Upholstery Cover:
a.
Architex "Circa 1932," Color
International, 625 W. Jackson Blvd.,
60606.
Mirror,
Chicago,
Architex
Illinois
D. Arms: 1-1/4 X 5/8 inch, 14 gauge oval tube, bolted to stretcher and
locked to prevent arm rotation, satin chrome plated, with brushed
chrome finish.
E. Stretcher: 3 X 3 X 3/16-inch wall structural tube, baked powder
epoxy coating, welded steel end caps. Epoxy color to be black.
F. Legs: 2 X 3 X 3/16-inch wall structural tube welded to stretcher and
bolted to foot with 2-1/2 inch diameter bolts, satin chrome plate
coating, color to be grey.
G. Feet: Formed with 1/4-inch steel plate, end caps welded on, chrome
plated with brushed chrome finish, adjustable glides concealed in
foot.
H. Dimensions (Inches):
1. Height 29-1/2, depth 25-1/2, seat height 18.
2. Space between arms 20 (no arm caps).
3. Space between adjacent seats 4-1/2.
4. Arm height 24-3/4.
5. Overall width of seat with arms 22-1/2.
6. Wall saver space 1-1/4.
7. Seat width 20.
I. Tabletops: Finished thickness of 1.1 inch, core is A grade 45 Ib
cu/ft density particle board with a nominal 1/16 inch plastic
laminate face and a backing sheet both rigidly bonded to core. Tops
are fastened by #14 screws to steel brackets which are bolted to the
3 X 3-inch beam.
1. Finish to be: Nevamar #S-3-46T Deep Purple.
2. Edges: PVC edges with serrated fin projecting from center of
back is wedged into a slot route red into the edge of particle
board core. Edge color to be black.
2.2 BENCH SEATING
A. Manufacturer: ALAR Furniture, Inc., 158 Oakdale Road, Downsview,
Ontario, Canada M3N 2S5.
1. Product No. 560-4.
B. Quantity: 3.
C. Frame: 3/4 X 1/9 inch X 14 gauge oval tube, chrome quality steel
that is mandred bent to form smooth radius bonds. Tabs supporting
FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12600-3
5910861-000
seat are 3/16-inch thick are welded to stretcher of 1-1/2 inch and 14
gauge chrome quality steel tube. Open ends of tube are seated by
caps that are welded to tube stretcher and polished smooth.
Stretchers mechanically connect to "U" pieces. Finish to be brushed
chrome.
D. Seat: 5/8-inch fir plywood panel with 3-inch medium density foam
bonded to panel. Panels connect to tube frame by #14 screws passing
through steel tables and panels. Upholstery cover is tip stitched
for reinforcement.
1. Upholstery Cover: Match multiple seating upholstery cover.
2.3 LOUNGE SEATING
A.
Manufacturer:
45227-1479.
Ficks Reed, 4900 Charlemar Drive, Cincinnati, Ohio
1 . Product No.:
a. 1700CU Lounge Chair: Quantity 4 each.
b. 1701SU Sofa: Quantity 1 each.
B. Chairs and Sofa: Frames from natural rattan. Loose seat cushion
made from foam density of 1.8 lbs/sq ft. Dimensions for chair are
36-inch depth, 32-inch height, 35-inch width, 19-inch seat depth and
17-inch seat height. Sofa dimensions are 32-inch length, 83-inch
width, 19-inch seat depth, 17-inch seat height and 36-inch depth.
1. Upholstery Cover: Match multiple seating upholstery cover.
2.4 EXECUTIVE OFFICE DESK
A.
Manufacturer:
The Gunlocke Company
One Gunlocke Drive
Wayland, NY 14572
B. Description: U-shaped executive desk consisting of 1, MED5D3672--
LTRK single pedestal desk with box, box, file pedestal; 1,
MED1B2448--TRK executive desk bridge 24 inches by 48 inches long by
29 inches high; 1, MED1C2072D--TRK credenza 20 inches by 72 inches
long with 2 file drawer pedestal and kneehole. Finish: #K91-199 SPL
on Medley Oak (pickled finish) .
C. Quantity: 1.
2.5 CREDENZA WITH VERTICAL STORAGE UNIT
A. Manufacturer: The Gunlocke Company
B. Description: Credenza with vertical storage unit consisting of 1,
MED1C2072DRRD--TRK credenza 20 inches by 72 inches with 2 double file
drawer units and center bookcase and 1, MED1V1572HD--TRK vertical
storage unit 15 inches wide by 69-7/8 inches long by 45 inches high
. with printer stand slot in center bottom of back for wire access.
Finish: #K91-199 SPL on Medley Oak (pickled finiSh) .
C. Quantity: 1.
FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12600-4
5910861-000
2 . 6 CREDENZA
A. Manufacturer: The Gunlocke Company
B. Description: MED1C2072LRRD--TRK credenza 20 inches by 72 inches with
box, box file pedestal, 2 file pedestal and center bookcase. Finish:
#K91-199 SPL on Medley Oak (pickled finish) .
C. Quantity: 1.
2.7 CONFERENCE TABLE
A. Manufacturer: Redco Manufacturing Company
1601 Madison S.E.
Grand Rapids, MI 44501
B. Description: Conference table 48 inches wide by 120 inches long,
Racetrack Top Series 505 with bullnose picture frame, oak edge in
pickled finish to match Gunlocke K91-199SPL laminate inset top to
match Architect's sample. Bases 2 each, CYL18 cylinder bases with 2-
inch high recess base. Finish:
C. Quantity: 1.
2.8 EXECUTIVE DESK CHAIR
A.
Manufacturer:
The Gunlocke Company
1. Product No.: 7832, The Carlton.
2. Upholstery Cover: Polynit 3776, Color: Purple Gray.
3. Base Finish: Painted wood base.
B. Description: Executi ve desk chair with swi vel tilt and arms,
pneumatic lift and upholstered arms and shell. Provide painted wood
base with castors.
C. Quantity: 1.
2.9 GUEST CHAIR
A. Manufacturer: Herman Miller
1. Product No.: EQ400SHFHFHF.
2. Upholstery Cover: Crepe 9217, Color: Caribbean.
3. Base, Shell and Arm: Innertone light.
B. Description: Upholstered guest chair.
C. Quantity: 4.
2 . 10 SECRETARIAL CHAIR
A. Manufacturer: Herman Miller.
1. Product No.: ER360HFBCHFBU.
2. Upholstery Cover: Polynit 3776, Purple Gray.
FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12600-5
5910861-000
3. Base and Shell: Innertone light.
B. Description: Task chair with arms and pneumatic lift.
C. Quantity: 1.
2.11 CONFERENCE CHAIR
A. Manufacturer: Herman Miller.
1. Product No.: EQ220FHFBCTWPT.
2.
Upholstery Cover:
Polynit 3776, Purple Gray.
3. Base: Innertone Light.
B. Description: Swivel tilt chair with arms, upholstered shell and arms
and 2-inch wheel casters.
C. Quantity: 9.
2.12 SECRETARIAL DESK
A.
Manufacturer:
G.F. Office Furniture Ltd.
6655 Seville Drive
Canfield, OH 44406
1.
Product No.:
Desk Unit: WV6630/EO-CD (30 by 60 inches).
Return: MRR 6524/0E (24 by 66 inches) with
boxlfile pedestal at right) .
2. Finish: Base: Q3R Chinchilla; Top: R35-Gray Estate;
Linear Pulls: Q3Q Charcoal.
B. Description: Single pedestal desk with boxlfile pedestal on left;
center drawer and wire grommet.
C. Quantity: 1.
2.13 FILES
A. Manufacturer: G.F. Office Furniture Ltd.
1. Product No.: 362 LFLHF (36 inches long by 18 inches deep by 26
inches high) .
2. Finish: Q3R Chinchilla.
B.
Two Drawer Lateral File:
hanging folder rods.
File with lock, letter position with
C. Quantity: 1.
2.14 CONFERENCE BOARD
A.
Manufacturer:
NEV Industries
14125 21st Ave. N.
Minneapolis, MN 55447
1. Product No.: VIS/LC/4848
FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12600-6
5910861-000
2.
Finish:
Fabric:
Plastic laminate--Wilsonart Grey Millstone, #4590-15.
Beige.
B. Description: 48 by 48 inches, with porcelain writing surface in
center, fabric tackboards on each inside door, flip chart, pens and
eraser.
C. Quantity: 1.
2.15 CYLINDER TABLE
A. Manufacturer: Redco Manufacturing.
B. Description: 18-inch diameter table, 24 inches high with a 3-inch
recessed base.
1. Finish: Nevamar S-2-68T, Heather Gray.
C. Quantity: 1.
2.16 DRUM TABLES
A. Manufacturer: Custom (see attached drawing) .
B. Table: Drum table; 32-inch diameter X 20 inches high. Base to be
ash veneer glued to bending wood subsurface with grain running
vertically. Bottom to be closed. Ash to have white washed finish.
Top to be 3/4 inches high. Natural unfilled saturnia stone cut to
fit hole base and permanently attached.
C. Quantity: 2 each.
2.17 WASTE RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturer: Wausau Tile, Inc., P.O. Box 659, Lake Hamilton,
Florida 33851-0659, (800) 282-5127.
1. Product No.: Terra-Form TF1105.
B. Description: 27 - inch diameter by 36 inches high weathers tone
cylinder, medium rose color, with plastic top, rose smooth color.
C. Quantity: 10 each.
2 . 18 WALL MORALS
A. Source: Art Sources, Inc., 1253 Southshore Drive, Orange Park,
Florida 32073, (904) 269-2014.
B. Murals: Furnish complete, including preliminary detailed color
illustration submitted for approval by the Architect, revised
preliminary detailed color illustration and final full-scale color
art in permanent medium, mounted. Include all fees, transportation
costs, materials and installation costs.
C. Size and Location: Murals shall be 6 feet, 10 inches high by 16
feet, 3 inches wide, located where shown on drawings. Wall
construction is gypsum wall board on metal studs or metal furring.
FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12600-7
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for construction tolerances, material
properties as they affect anchors and fasteners. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with seating manufacturer's printed installation
instructions applicable to products and application indicated.
B. Locate seating in locations indicated with required clearances free
from rock or instability.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Touch-up minor abrasions and imperfections in painted finishes with
coating which matches factory-applied finish.
B. Replace any upholstery which has been damaged in installation.
END OF SECTION 12600
FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12600-8
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRHIRAL BUILDING
K>NROB CUUl'f'J:!i, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 12690 - FLOOR
MATS AND FRAMBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes:
1. Frames to be set in concrete floors to receive recessed floor
mats.
2. Recessed Floor Mats:
a. One Piece Cocoa Mats
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1 . Division 3 sections for concrete work, including forming,
placing, and finishing concrete floor slabs and grouting frames
into recess.
C. Products furnished b\lt not installed under this section include
frames for floor mats to be set in concrete floor slabs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified,
including manufacturer's specifications and installation
instructions, details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Samples for verification purposes in form of 12-inch-square section
of floor mat.
D. Maintenance data in form of manufacturer's printed instructions for
cleaning and maintaining floor mats.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual blocked-out openings in floors by
accurate field measurements before fabrication of frames and mats;
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of
work.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fioor mats and frames from one
source from a single manufacturer.
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
12690-1
5910861-000
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Provide oversized recesses in concrete work to receive frames. Defer
frame installations until building enclosure is completed and related
interior finish work is in progress.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products equal to one of the following:
1. Cactus Mat Mfg. Co.
2. Durable Mat Co.
3. R.C. Musson Rubber Co.
4. Pawling Corp., Standard Products Div.
5. Uscoa International Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Recessed Mat Frames: Provide manufacturer's standard design, of size
and style to fit floor mat type and match approved sample for
permanent recessed installation in floor, complete with corner pins
or reinforcing and installation anchorages.
1. Provide frames of extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5.
Coat surface of frame that will contact cementitious material
with zinc chromate paint or manufacturer's standard protective
coating.
2 . Provide frame members in single lengths or, where frame
dimensions exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum
number of pieces possible, with hairline joints equally spaced
and with pieces spliced together by means of straight connecting
pins.
B. One-piece Cocoa Mats: Provide manufacturer's standard, constructed
from cocoa fiber yarn permanently bonded to polyvinyl chloride
backing for dimensional stability and resistance to shedding.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch to 3/4 inch overall; 1.5 pounds per square
foot.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate units of floor mat work to greatest extent possible in
sizes as indicated. Where not otherwise indicated, provide single
unit for each mat installation, but do not exceed manufacturer's
maximum size recommendation for units intended for removal and
cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically
and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing
elements with hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units
without joints. Where possible, verify sizes by field measurement
before shop fabrication.
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
12690-2
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed frames and mats to comply with manufacturer's
instructions, at locations indicated and with top of frames and mats
in proper relationship to one another and to adjoining finished
flooring. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for
most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with
doors that swing across mats to provide underdoor clearance.
1. Where frame is embedded in grout, provide necessary shims,
spacers, and anchorages for proper location and secure
attachment.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Upon completion of frame installations and concrete work, provide
temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses, and cover
frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until
construction traffic has ended and project is near time of
substantial completion.
B. Defer installation of floor mats until near time of substantial
completion for project.
END OF SECTION 12690
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
12690-3
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRHIRAL BUILDING
MONROB COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 14240 - HYDRADLIC
ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following hydraulic elevators:
1. Passenger elevators.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Setting of sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete
is specified in a Division 3 section.
2. Ventilation of machine room is specified in Division 15.
3. Electrical service to each elevator, including fused disconnect
switch, is specified in Division 16 sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Hydraulic elevators are hereby defined to include systems in which
cars are hoisted either directly or' indirectly by action of a
hydraulic plunger and cylinder (jack); with other components of the
work including fluid storage tank, pump, piping, valves, car
enclosures, hoistway entrances, control systems, signal equipment,
guide rails, electrical wiring, roping, buffers, and devices for
operating, dispatching, safety, security, leveling, alarm,
maintenance, and similar required performances and capabilities.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Elevator schedules indicate required performances, controls,
capacities, features, and finishes for each elevator or group of
elevators and are included at end of this section.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specifications sections.
B. Product Data for each principal component or product of each
elevator, including certified test reports on required testing.
Indicate capacities, sizes, performance and operating
characteristics, features of control system, finishes, and similar
information. Indicate any variations from specified requirements.
C. Shop drawings including dimensioned drawings showing plans,
elevations, sections and large-scale details indicating service at
each landing, coordination with building structure and relationships
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-1
5910861-000
with other construction, and details of car enclosures and hoistway
entrances.
D. Wiring diagram detailing wiring for power, signal and control systems
differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and
field-installed wiring. Indicate maximum and average power demands.
E. Maintenance Manuals: Bound manual for each elevator or group of
elevators, with operating and maintenance instructions, parts
listing, recommended parts inventory listing, purchase source listing
for major and critical components, emergency instructions, and
similar information.
F. Certificates and Permits: Provide Owner with copies of all
inspectionlacceptance certificates and operating permits as required
by governing authori ties to allow normal, unrestricted use of
elevators.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an
installer approved by the elevator manufacturer and who has completed
elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to
that indicated for project which have resulted in installations with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations,
comply with applicable requirements of ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code
for Elevators and Escalators (hereafter referred to as the "Code").
C. Federal Law: Comply with applicable requirements of the Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA).
1 . 7 WARRANTY
A. Special Project Warranty: Provide special project warranty, signed
by Contractor, installer, and manufacturer, agreeing to replace,
repair, or restore defective materials and workmanship of elevator
work during warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to,
and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the
Contractor under the Contract Documents.
1. "Defective" is hereby defined to include, but not by way of
limitation, operation or control system failures, performances
below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration
or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need
for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and
similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
2. Warranty period is 12 months starting on date of substantial
completion.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance service by
skilled, competent employees of the elevator installer for period of
12 months following date of substantial completion. Include monthly
preventive maintenance performed during normal working hours.
Include repair or replacement of worn or defective parts or
components and lubricating, cleaning, and adjusting as required for
proper elevator operation in conformance with specified requirements.
Include 24-hours-per-day, 7-days-per-week emergency callback service.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-2
5910861-000
Exclude only repair or replacement due to misuse, abuse, accidents,
or neglect caused by persons other than installer's personnel.
B. Continuing Maintenance Service: Installer shall provide a continuing
maintenance proposal to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or
other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date construction
contract maintenance requirements are concluded. State services,
obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for
future renewal options.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
1. Dover Elevator Corp.
2. Montgomery Elevator Co.
3. Otis Elevator Co.
4. Schindler Elevator Corp.
5. U.S. ElevatorlCubic Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General Requirement: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-engineered
elevator systems that will comply with or fulfill the requirements of
elevator schedule sheets at end of this section or, at manufacturer's
option, provide custom-manufactured elevator systems that will
fulfill requirements. Where components are not otherwise indicated,
provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in
standard pre-engineered elevator syst~ms and as required for a
complete system.
B. Hydraulic Machines and Elevator Equipment: Provide manufacturer's
standard single-acting under-the-car hydraulic plunger-cylinder unit
for each elevator, with electric pump-tank-control system equipment
in machine room as indicated.
C. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by
manufacturer, and provide isolation couplings to prevent soundl
vibration transmissions from power unit.
D. Inserts: Furnish required concrete inserts and similar anchorage
devices for the installation of guide rails, machinery, and other
components of elevator work where installation of devices is
indicated as work of another specification section.
E. Car Frame and Platform: Manufacturer's standard welded steel units.
2.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard control system as required
to provide automatic operation of the type indicated and defined in
the Code as "Operations."
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-3
5910861-000
B. Single Elevator Control - Passenger: Provide solid-state "Selective
Collective Automatic Operation," as defined in ASME/ANSI A17.1.
C. Auxiliary Operations/Controls: In addition to primary control system
features, provide the following controls or operational features for
passenger elevators, except where otherwise indicated:
1. Emergency power operation.
2.4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide signal equipment to comply with requirements
indicated below.
1. Provide illuminated hall-call and car-call buttons that light
up when activated and remain lighted until call or other
function has been fulfilled; fabricate of acrylic or other
permanent translucent plastic.
2. Except for buttons and illuminated signal elements, fabricate
signal equipment with exposed surfaces of stainless steel with
manufacturer's standard directional polish or satin finish.
3. Car Control Stations: Provide car control station in each car
with flush-mounted metal faceplates containing call button for
each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls
required for specified car operation and control. Mount as
shown or scheduled at height complying with ADA and
ASME/ANSI A117.1. If not otherwise indicated, mount in return
panel adjacent to car door. Provide operating device sYmbols
as required by code. Mark other buttons and switches with
manufacturer's standard identification for required use or
function.
4. Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars, provide
either illuminated-signal type or digital-display type, located
near top of each car or in car control station.
a. In addition to visual indicator, provide audible signal to
indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or
passing each of the floors served.
5. Hall Push-Button Station: Provide hall push-button station at
each landing. Provide 1-button stations.
6. Provide an audible signal to indicate that a car is arr1v1ng in
response to a hall call and to indicate direction of car travel.
Signal shall sound once for up direction of travel and twice for
down direction.
1) At manufact.urer's option, audible signal may be
placed on each car.
7. Telephone: Provide rough-in for telephone hand set in each car,
contained in flush-mounted c~inet and complete with
identification and instructions for use. Provide a fireman's
telephone cabinet or fireman's telephone jack in main elevator
lobby.
8. Alarm System: Provide emergency alarm bell properly located
within building and audible outside hoistways, equipped to sound
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-4
5910861-000
automatically in response to emergency stops and in response to
11 Al arm II button on each car control station.
2.5 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's pre-engineered car enclosures of the
selections indicated. Include ventilation, lighting, ceiling finish,
wall finish, access doors, doors, power door operators, sill
(threshold), trim and accessories. Provide horizontal sliding doors
of manufacturer's standard flush panel type, with operation and
number of panels as indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard
protective edge trim system for door and wall panels, except as
otherwise indicated.
1. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections as indicated for
each car enclosure surface.
a.
Stainless Steel:
finish.
AISI Type 302/304 with No. 4 satin
b. Aluminum Sills: Cast or extruded aluminum, with grooved
surface, 1/4 inch thickness, mill finish.
c. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA
LD3, Type GP-50 (0.050 inch nominal thickness); color,
texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from
standard products available in the industry.
d. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of
car.
e. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal
equipment.
f. Ceiling: Brushed stainless steel panels with recessed
downlights.
g. protecti ve Pads: Provide set of protective pads and
buttons; manufacturer's standard.
2.6 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Handrails: Provide 1-1/2-inch diameter satin stainless steel
handrails on back wall.
B. Door Edge Protective Device: Provide retractable edge shoe on
leading edges of elevator entrance doors that causes doors to stop
and reopen upon contacting an obstruction in entrance.
C. Photo-Eye Detection Device: Provide electronic photo-eye device with
timed cutout, projecting dual light beams across car entrance at
5 inch and 29 inch heights, that when interrupted will cause closing
doors to stop and reopen. Provide keyed switch in car operating
panel or toggle switch in service cabinet for disconnecting photo-eye
protective device.
2.7 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's flush transom, pre-engineered,
hollow metal type, sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances
complete with track systems, hardware, safeties, sills, and
accessories. Match car enclosure doors for size, number of door
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-5
5910861-000
panels, and door panel movement. Provide frame-section size and
profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction as indicated.
1.
Where gypsum-board wall construction is indicated,
frames with reinforced head sections; provide
strength without support from wall lintels.
fabricate
sufficient
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated that comply
with manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1 . Stainless Steel Frames: Formed stainless steel sheet, AISI Type
302/304 with No. 4 satin finish.
2. Stainless Steel Door Panels: Flush stainless steel
construction, AISI Type 302/304 with manufacturer's standard
directional polish or satin finish.
3. Aluminum Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface,
1/4 inch thickness, mill finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to commencing elevator installation, examine hoistways,
hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify
all critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and all
other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.
Notify Contractor in writing of any dimensional discrepancies or
other conditions detrimental to the proper installation or
performance of elevator work. Do not proceed wi th elevator
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in
a manner acceptable to the installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELEVATOR SYSTEM
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
for work required during installation.
B. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation in each elevator pit to
accommodate installation of plunger-cylinder unit; comply with
applicable requirements of Division 2 "Excavation" sections.
1. Install casings with waterproof seals at pit floor and with
waterproof, high-pressure seal at bottom of casings.
C. Install plunger-cylinder units plumb and accurately centered for
elevator car position and travel; anchor securely in place.
D. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installation of
elevator work where bolted connections are not required for
subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection,
maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS
standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding
operators.
E. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for
proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use
benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by Contractor to ensure
dimensional coordination of the work.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240 - 6
5910861-000
F. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and
components on vibration-absorption mounts, designed to effectively
prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby to
eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system.
G. Cover underground piping with permanent protective wrapping before
backfilling.
H.
Lubricate operating
manufacturers.
parts
of
systems,
as
recommended
by
I. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with
installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of
entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and
frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum,
safe, workable dimension at each landing.
J. Leveling Tolerance: 1/2 inch, up or down, regardless of load and
direction of travel.
K. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landings. Coordinate
with other trades to facilitate and ensure proper grouting of sills.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each elevator
installation, and before permitting use of elevator (either temporary
or permanent), perform acceptance tests' as required and recommended
by code and by governing regulations or agencies.
B. Advise Contractor, Owner, Architect, and inspection department of
governing agencies in advance of dates and times tests are to be
performed on elevators.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. At time of substantial completion of elevator work (or portion
thereof), provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices,
signs, or such other methods or procedures to protect elevator work
from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures
throughout remainder of construction period.
B. Provide similar protective measures for elevator units that will be
placed in temporary service, including inspection and maintenance
service during period of temporary service.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily
maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including
emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in
operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in
normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of
operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on
requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program.
B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel
present and just prior to date of Substantial Completion. Determine
that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-7
5910861-000
PASSENGER ELEVATORS SCHEDULE
Caoacitv: 2,000 pounds.
Soeed: 125 feet per minute.
Travel: 12 feet, 0 inches.
Landinqs: First and second.
OOeninqs: In line.
OOeration: Two-stop automatic.
Platform Size: 5 feet, 8 inches X 4 feet, 3 inches clear inside.
Hoistwav Entrances:
Size: 3 feet, 0 inch X 7 feet, 0 inch door with 1 foot, 8-1/2 inches
flush transom.
Type: Single slide.
Sianals: Illuminated car and hall push buttons, telephone compartment and
wire. Emergency light, battery and alarm bell. Gong all floors.
Additional Features:
1. Fireman's emergency operation.
2. Emergency power operation.
3. Lobby smoke sensing devices.
END OF SECTION 14240
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
14240-8
5910861-000
DRATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
~E COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 14540 - BAGGAGB
CLADl CONVEYORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s1ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section covers the providing of baggage claim conveyors
complete.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Grind smooth all projections, welds, surfaces and transfer
points to eliminate potential bag damage. Fasteners used in areas
which are contacted by baggage andlor belting, shall be countersunk
so as to present a smooth surface.
B. Performance Test:
1. After installation of the complete system, its operating
capability shall be demonstrated. All "debugging" shall be
completed prior to the start of the system's testing. Provide
personnel, baggage, totes, boxes', etc., for testing. The
performance test shall be conducted in the presence of the
OWner's representative for a minimum of 8 hours. The
performance test shall include:
a. Checkout of the operational and safety devices of the
system using bags, totes, or boxes.
b. Demonstrate the capability to handle the required sizes
and weights of baggage through the system without jamming
or excessive toppling of baggage.
c. Demonstrate the capability of all conveyors being able to
start under full load.
d. Measure all conveyor speeds using a standard device.
These measurements shall be taken with the system in a
"no-load" condition, Le., all conveyors running, but
without product. Any component not operating within 5
percent of design speed shall be reworked to bring it to
proper speed.
2. During the test periOd, any deficiencies or variations in the
design, fabrication, or operation causing unsatisfactory
performance shall be corrected to provide satisfactory
performance. Manufacturer shall have appropriate service
personnel on site during the test.period to service or adjust
the system's equipment as required.
3. A test program for compliance with the above demonstration
requirements shall be submitted to the Owner's representative
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-1
5910861-000
for review and approval prior to operations start-up date for
the system.
4. A failure during any test period shall be defined as any design
characteristic or malfunction of the furnished equipment or
materials that damage baggage or reduce any operating rate below
those specified. Conditions resulting from improper loading of
baggage or loading baggage of sizes not included in the
specifications requirements shall not be considered as failures.
C. All equipment and installation shall comply with the current edition
of the National Electric Codes, NEMA standards, and local building
codes currently in force for the installation site.
D. Safety:
1. All equipment and installation shall conform with the current
standards and interpretations of the Williams-Steiger
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Public Law 91-596,
and ANSI Standards #B20-1-1976.
2. In addition, all motors shall be provided with safety disconnect
switches to permit shutting off the motor power circuits.
Switches shall be equipped with a "locking out" feature in the
off position.
3. The following additional safety features shall be incorporated
into the system:
a. All control methods, circuitry, mechanical equipment and
operating procedures shall consider the safety of the
public in addition to that of operation and maintenance
personnel. System design shall also minimize possible
damage to equipment and baggage being handled. If a
conflict should arise between safety to people or
equipment, safety to people shall take precedence.
b. Whenever an unsafe condition could develop from an
equipment failure or a procedural error, fail-safe
techniques shall be used to prevent the occurrence of the
unsafe conditions.
c. Public unattended control stations shall be protected to
prevent operation by unauthorized persons.
d. Equipment shall be free of sharp edges and mechanisms
which could catch limbs andlor clothing.
e. Operating personnel systems operations controls shall be
convenient, clearly identified, simple, and safe to use.
Possible errors shall be minimized. Emergency stops shall
be provided.
f. Protection shall be provided for moving mechanisms which
could catch limbs, andlor clothing of personnel performing
maintenance duties, i.e., chain and belt guards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Complete shop drawings and technical specifications shall be
submitted. These drawings and specifications shall include at a
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-2
5910861-000
minimum mechanical layouts, including plan views, elevation and cross
sections of the baggage handling equipment in relationship to the
building, electrical control cabinet, and wiring diagrams.
B. Engraved plastic plate designations of switches, controls, panels,
etc., shall be shown on the drawings for review by the Architect.
C. A recommended spare parts list shall be provided based on the final
design of the system, and is included in the O&M manual.
1 .5 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall guarantee the system(s) andlor equipment to be
free of failures or deficiencies in design, materials and workmanship
for a period of one year following the date of written acceptance of
the system(s) andlor equipment.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. The required number of O&M Manuals shall be provided. Drafts of the
manuals shall be submitted to the Architect not less than 45 days
prior to the start-up of the system, depending on lead time.
B. Manuals shall be presented to the Owner on the date of the start of
the pre-acceptance testing period.
C. The manual shall be updated by supplement to reflect any field
changes, equipment changes due to warranty, etc., that are made
during the warranty period of the system so that the manuals shall
reflect "as-built" information.
D. In addition to the above, the operations section of the manuals shall
include the following:
1. Complete listing of electrical graphic sYmbols and reference
designations per ANSI/IEEE standards for all electrical
equipment components contained in the system.
2. Pushbutton, photoeye, limit switch, etc., summary, location,
units controlled, and function.
3. Normal system start-up and shut-down procedures of the conveyor
system.
4 . Detailed description of operation and trOubleshooting of the
conveyor system.
E. The O&M Manuals shall fully cover appropriate safety measures,
precautions, and instructions to be followed before, during, and
after making repairs, adjustments, clearing jams, or performing
routine maintenance, which shall conform to all established federal,
state and local safety laws and regulations.
F. Operation and Maintenance Training:
1. It is understood that the times and durations of the classes may
involve irregular hours in order to provide training of
operation and maintenance personnel on different shifts.
2. The training classes shall be pro~ided prior to the operations
start-up of the system.
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-3
5910861-000
3.
Operations training sessions shall cover
functions of the system and all related
operations manual.
the operational
sections of the
4.
Maintenance training sessions shall include
"hands - on" type programs. "Hands - on" type
include actual troubleshooting adjustments
component removal, etc.
11 classroom" and
training shall
of equipment,
5. The duration of the above training sessions may vary with the
proficiency of the personnel being trained, but shall not be
less than 8 hours per group. Follow-up training, if required,
shall not exceed 4 hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The specification and drawings have been based on baggage conveyors
and dispensers manufactured by Custom Conveyor Company. Other
acceptable manufacturers include:
1. BAE Automated Systems, Inc.
2. Stearns Airport Equipment Co., Inc.
3. Glidepoth - USA.
B. Minor deviations in specifications which, in the sole judgment of the
Architect, do not affect quality, will be acceptable.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. The system is designed to handle baggage sizes as follows:
1. Normal: Items which can be processed by the equipment without
special handling.
2. Oversize: Items such as animal cages, map cases, golf bags,
duffel bags, etc. which cannot be handled by the equipment and
must be manually transported. (Skis, golf bags and duffel bags
with maximum dimensions of 54 inches length x 18 inches height
and 70 Ibs. can also be handled as normal baggage.)
3. FragilelOdd Size: Items such as garment bags, hat boxes,
bowling balls, shopping bags, etc., which when in tote trays can
be processed as normal baggage.
4. The following defines the physical characteristics of normal
baggage to be used in the design of the new system:
Maximum
Minimum
Length
Width
Height
weight (pounds)
36"
24"
30"
100
12"
3"
3"
5
Note: For the purposes of rate testing, the average bag length
shall be considered to be 30 inches.
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-4
5910861-000
B. Live Load: All load conveyors shall be designed to support and move
a minimum live load of 40 pounds per lineal foot, with a maximum load
of 100 pounds per bag. All conveyors shall be capable of starting
under full load conditions. Speeds shall be adjusted on transport
conveyors to provide load singulation.
C. Clearances: Wherever possible, a minimum of 32 inches clearance from
the conveying surface to the underside of any building members or
utilities shall be maintained. The Contractor shall conduct a field
survey of all conveyor paths prior to the submission of shop
drawings.
D. Friction Co-Efficient: A minimum of 25 percent friction co-efficient
between the belt and slider bed shall be used in calculating
horsepower.
E. Service: All equipment provided under this Contract shall be
heavy-duty and proven capable of operating 18 hours per day, 365 days
per year continuous service.
F. Vibration Limits: All equipment provided under this Contract shall
not produce or induce any vibrations into the building that will be
injurious to the system or structure.
G. Noise Limits: The equipment's design shall not generate noise which
would be annoying or harmful to passengers andlor employees, both in
the public areas and the baggage make-up areas.
1. The requirements defined within this section are based upon
measurements indicating an ambient noise level of 50 dB in
public areas, and 60 dB in nonpublic areas.
2. The baggage handling system equipment shall not increase the
ambient noise level more than 15 dB.
3. In no case will total noise levels exceed 70 dB above the
frequency of 4000 CPS or below 100 CPS.
4. Testing shall be done as follows:
a. The baggage handling system equipment shall be turned off.
b. All other equipment (i.e., ~ir conditioning and heating
equipment) shall be on and outside noise sources shall be
normal (aircraft and mobile ground equipment operating) .
c. Noise level readings shall be taken throughout a zone five
feet above the floor using a standard ASA sound level
meter set to the "A" weighted network.
5. After the ambient noise level has been determined by A, B, and
C, the baggage handling system equipment shall be turned on and
the total noise level shall be measured at the same points
throughout the zone that the ambient levels were measured.
H. Compatibility and Versatility: The following items shall be taken
into consideration in the equipment design.
1.
Drive packages,
standardized as
as well as other
much as possible
components, shall be
to provide maximum
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-5
5910861-000
interchangeability of components, and to reduce the number of
spares that must be carried by the station.
2. The design, construction and installation of the equipment shall
provide maximum accessibility and convenience for all
maintenance and operating requirements.
3. The equipment shall provide maximum accessibility for the repair
or replacement of parts, or assemblies in lieu of parts, or
other removable and replaceable equipment items without having
to move, remove, or dismantle associated equipment, other
equipment, or structural items in the area.
4. Lubrication fittings, lubrication manifolds and electrical
controls shall be located wherever possible with maximum access
as a prime objective.
5. Guards, covers, etc., shall be equipped with quick removal
fasteners such as Dzus or Camloc, andlor hinges in areas where
jams may occur or maintenance access is limited.
6. Flexible Door Strips: provide flexible door strips of clear
PVC; strips shall be 8 inches wide partial overlap.
Manufacturer: Frommelt Industries or equal.
2.3 MECHANICAL
A. Claim Device: Shall be a closed loop conveyor system developed for
use in baggage claim and make-up areas. It shall consist of a series
of crescent shaped steel pallets or treads linked together in a
manner resulting in a flat smooth continuous moving surface, capable
of turning corners without a break.
Overall Width
Standard Height
Tread Width
Useable Tread width
Tread Thickness
Tread Surface
Load Capacity
Velocity
Horse Power
Inside Turn Radius,Min.
39"
12"
36"
33"
Approx. 0.350"
Polyurethane
200 IbslLineal foot
90 ft./min.
varies
24"
B. Tread: The treads shall be crescent shaped, minimum 1/4-inch steel
plate conveying platforms. The exposed surface on all treads are
covered with a vulcanized and molded black polyurethane rubber
covering to provide an attractive appearance and to avoid abrasive
damage to the customer's luggage. Steel tread thickness shall be
0.250 inch, while the polyurethane covering shall be a minimum 0.09
inch thick, with a hardness of approximately 75 durometer as measured
on shore scale A.
C. Link Assembly: The treads shall be connected with self-aligning
chain links and guide rollers.
D. Tread Support System: The treads are supported on the underside by
a multiplicity of anti-friction rollers. The 2 lines of rollers
(four lines of rollers are used on the oversized) with ball bearings,
are polyurethane and mounted in removable grommets, for sound
deadening and ease of maintenance. The grommets are located on
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-6
5910861-000
slotted mounting angles on centers as required to accommodate the
static and live loads required. The standard load capacity shall be
200 Ibs. per lineal foot, with higher load capacity available.
E. Frame and Trim: Side rails shall be 6 x 5/16-inch, hot rolled steel
plate. A 4 -inch toe space shall be provided at the base of the loop.
Side trim in public view shall be type 304 stainless steel with No.
4 brush finish. Top trim shall be a minimum of 8 gauge. Standard
height shall be 12 inches as measured from the floor to the top of
the tread surface. Interior steel deck trim shall be 12 -gauge
stainless steel formed angle. Provide matching closure trim between
conveyor and coiling door as shown on drawings.
F. Flexible Door Strips: Provide flexible strips of clear PVC. Studs
shall be 8 inches wide with partial overlap suspended outside
overhead door mount. Manufacturer Frommelt Industries or equal.
G. Drive: The drive shall consist of 2 strands of precision roller
chain with hardened pushers designed to engage a center hardened cam
roller that is guided continuously along the centerline of the unit
on the underside of each tread. Driving power is transmitted to the
treads, only in the drive station, by means of these pair of parallel
roller chains equipped with a series of driving lugs secured between
the chains. These lugs subsequently engage the cam rollers described
above. During operation, no fewer than 2 cams shall be engaged by
the drive chain at all times resulting in a direct, positive,
mechanical link to the drive motor. The transmission equipment will
be sized for the load and operation. Motors will be sized for the
load and operation. Motors will conform to AIEE and NEMA standards
and have a minimum of 5 or 7-1/2 hp. The drive unit shall be
provided with a grease lubrication system for the cam rolls.
Lubrication shall be accomplished through a manifold system located
at one location on the drive frame.
H . Drive and Idles Shaft Bearings: All bearings shall be precision
greasable, self-aligning, antifriction, prelubricated, sealed with
synthetic lip seals, and provided with locking collars. Alemite
lubrication fittings shall be provided. Bearings will have a minimum
B-10 life of 50,000 hours based on manufacturer's data showing the
load rating and calculation to be submitted showing service and
loading of conveyors. Drive and idler shaft bearings shall be
manufactured by Sealmaster. A screw-type take-up is provided, with
the idler shaft bearing mounts, to compensate for the initial chain
break in and normal chain wear. The driving chains are supported and
guided in the driving portion of their travel, by upper and lower
wear bars.
1. Unit Mounting: The complete unit shall be mounted above the floor at
a standard height of 12 inches, with adjustable legs to compensate
for variations in the floor level. The unit shall rest on the
leveling pads with the rubber floor contact surface. No anchor bolts
shall be required.
J. Unit Operation: Normal operation speed shall be 90 feetlminute with
counter-clockwise or clockwise direction of travel.
K. Side Guards/Shrouding:
1. Vertical side guards for conveyors not in public view shall be
formed channel 21 inches high X #14-gauge galvanized steel with
upright bracing (1-1/4 X 1-114 X 3/16-inch vertical angle
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-7
5910861-000
stiffeners) on a maximum of 2 feet, 6 inch centers on the
loading belts. Unless otherwise noted, guards will be required
on both sides except where baggage is being loaded or unloaded
at which point only 1 guard will be required. Joints in
nonpublic areas are to be epoxied after installation as required
for smooth, snag-free surface.
2. Distance between side guards will be 3 inches greater than the
belt width. Side guard joints will be bolted, with butt
couplings. Welded joints andlor strap couplings will not be
acceptable. All joints, except at powered turn vertical guards,
shall be epoxied after installation for a smooth, snag-free
surface. (This includes the joints between the side guards and
the bed sections as well, if required.)
3. Guards adjacent to power turns shall be in alignment with the
effective inside side guard of the turn to prevent interference
wi th baggage movement. The side guards of power turns shall not
be welded to adjacent straight conveyor side guards. No
mechanical or electrical equipment will be mounted on the
outside radius side guard of power turns. Side guards will
provide a continuous uninterrupted surface the entire length and
height of the joints.
4. Shrouding shall be provided for conveyor equipment located in
public areas. The shrouding shall be formed stainless steel
sheet (#12 gauge) type 304 with horizontal #4 brushed finish.
All connections shall be smooth and flush without openings or
projections on which bag tags, straps, etc. may catch. HRS
shrouding andlor bearing caps shall be provided on unload
conveyors to meet OSHA requirements.
5. The bed sections on stainless steel trimmed conveyors shall be
furnished with a filler plate to eliminate belt scuffing caused
by the elevation difference between the horizontal portions of
the stainless steel under the belting and the slider bed.
2.4 ELECTRICAL
A. Related Standards and Codes: All components and materials shall
conform to applicable NEMA and Joint Industrial Council (JIC)
standards. The requirements of the NBC, NFPA-70 and the ANSI Safety
Code B20.1 shall be met as well as those of any other governmental or
local authorities having jurisdiction. All components shall be
designed for continuous duty service.
B. Power Supply: 208 volt, 3-phase, 60 Hz power supply.
C. Radio Interference: The equipment provided shall not cause
interference with communications within the airport or between the
airport and aircraft or ground vehicles.
1. All electrical and electronic equipment, including
interconnecting wires and cables shall be designed to operate
without malfunction in the presence of normal electromagnetic
emission generated by other equipment including the aircraft
communication bands and high-power radar systems.
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-8
5910861-000
D. Controls:
1. Controls shall operate on a maximum of 120 volts. Control
components shall not be subjected to operation under loads
exceeding the manufacturer's recommended rating.
E. Enclosures: All electrical enclosures shall be NEMA type 12, except
those which may be exposed to the elements, which shall be NEMA type
3 or 4 weatherproof.
F. Motor Starters: Magnetic motor starters with manual reset thermal
overloads shall be used; minimum starter size shall be NEMA size "0."
G. Pushbutton Stations: Pushbutton stations shall be equivalent to
Allen Bradley 800T. All pushbutton stations in the public view shall
be flush mounted with a stainless steel cover plate. Emergency stop
pushbuttons shall be of the maintained contact, push to stop, pull to
reset, illuminated mushroom head type, equivalent to Allen Bradley
800T.
H. Selector Switches: Selector switches shall be equivalent to Allen
Bradley 800T.
1. pilot Lights: pilot lights shall be equivalent to Allen Bradley
800T, push-to-test, transformer type. Lens color as required for the
application.
J. Photo Electric Controls: The sensors shall be mounted on structural
members attached to the machinery structure so that a minimum of
vibration is transmitted to these units. No more than one
penetration per sensor, a maximum of 1-1/2 inches in diameter, shall
be permitted in metal parts (conveyor guards). Sensors for tall bag
detection shall be mounted 32 inches above the conveyor surface. All
other sensors shall be mounted to detect an object 1-1/2 inches above
the conveyor surface. Photo controls shall be LED type, PhotoSwitch
42MRU, series 5000.
K. Relays: All relays shall be rated for the application and shall be
equivalent to Allen Bradley 700, type N.
L. Timers: All time delay relays shall be equivalent to Allen Bradley
700, Type PT. synchronous motor driven time delay relays shall be
Eagle Type BR or equal.
2.5 PANELS AND CONTROL STATIONS
A. Control Panel:
1. The main control panel shall be designed to provide the
following described functions at a minimum:
System Start
Emergency Stop
Hold in Circuit
Jam Detection
2. System Status Panel: A system status panel shall be furnished
and installed in the control panel door when required by system
complexity. A graphic representation of the system shall be
portrayed on the face of the panel. Indicator lights shall be
appropriately located on the map to identify sensing devices and
emergency stop devices. Emergency stop indicator lights shall
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-9
5910861-000
be red; jam indicator lights shall be amber; a green run light
shall be provided for each individual subsystem.
a. An audible alarm shall be mounted on the panel along with
a silence button. This audible alarm shall operate
whenever a jam or emergency stop condition exists.
2.6 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
A. System Start: The conveyor system start button, when pressed, shall
activate a start-up warning beacon and horn (separate from emergency
stop/jam/motor failure alarm) in final baggage claim area. After a
predetermined time delay, the warning beacon and horn will shut off,
and the respective system shall start.
B. Emergency Stop: The system may be stopped at any time during normal
operation by depressing anyone of the emergency stop buttons.
Depressing the emergency stop pushbutton shall cause the button to be
illuminated, as well as illuminating all associated emergency stop
buttons and the appropriate emergency stop indicator lamp on the
control panel door, and sound an alarm at the control panel. After
clearing an emergency, the entire system may be restarted by
resetting the emergency top pushbutton and depressing the system
start button.
C. Automatic System Stop: Automatic stopping of the system shall be
accomplished through a photoelectric sensor located at coiling doors.
Each time the system is started and an interruption of the
photoelectric sensor beam occurs, a timing device is reset. After a
time interval 1 to 15 minutes, adjustable, suitable to insure that
the last bag of the load has been removed. The timing device will
time out and the conveyors will stop and coiling doors will close.
1. The timing devices shall stop timing if any portion of the
baggage claim equipment is not running due to a jam, motor
overload, or emergency stop.
D. Overheight Bag Detection: Photoelectric overheight bag sensors shall
be positioned at entrance to each door. Interruption of the
photoelectric beam shall stop the associated load conveyors and a
white indicator light shall illuminate in the related pushbutton
control station(s). Each sensor shall be installed to detect the
passage of items higher than 2 inches below the lowest obstruction in
each system.
1. Once the overheight item has been removed, depressing the
respective system start pushbutton shall restart the stopped
conveyors and turn the white indicator lamp off. The white
indicator lamp shall be installed in all pushbutton control
stations.
2. The system start pushbutton that restarts the stopped conveyors
shall be installed in the pushbutton control station located
nearest to the overheight bag sensor.
E. Security Door Controls:
1. The system shall be interlocked with an automatic security door,
expiration of the start -up warning shall cause the door to
raise. After the door has reached the full open position, the
conveyors shall automatically start.
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-10
5910861-000
2. Each security door shall be equipped with alarm contacts to
indicate door is fully closed. Contacts arrangement shall be
compatible with security system.
3 . Normal System Stop (Automatic): When the system stops
automatically, the associated doors shall then close. If the
safety edge switch located on the bottom of the door encounters
an obstruction, the door shall automatically return to the open
position and illuminate a red indicator lamp. After the
obstruction is removed, an obstruction reset pushbutton must be
depressed to lower the door. The red indicator lamp and reset
pushbutton shall be located near the security door. The
conveyors shall remain inoperative when a door obstruction
occurs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A.
Installation shall be in accordance
recommendations and instructions.
with
manufacturer's
3.2 FIELD WIRING
A. Controls: Controls shall be located where shown on the drawings and
as herein specified.
B. Disconnects: The Contractor shall furnish and install a nonfusible,
manual disconnect switch, with provision for pad locking, in the
circuit of each motor in the conveyor subsystems in compliance with
ANSI B20.1, Paragraph 5.15.2.2.
C. Circuit Wiring: All connections shall be made with wire of current
carrying capacity consistent with the load and duty cycle. Wires
shall run continuously from one piece of apparatus to another without
splices in conduit. Power wiring may be spliced in junction boxes as
required. Control connections shall be made on terminals with
compression-type splices which shall be enclosed in junction boxes.
D. Conduit:
1. Unless otherwise specified, all electric w1r1ng shall be
enclosed in EMT conduit. Except in public areas, conduit shall
be installed exposed on walls, ceilings, beams, columns, and on
the conveyor structure. Locations of exposed conduit shall be
selected in order to minimize or prevent damage to conduit from
vehicles or equipment. In public areas, conduit runs shall be
concealed from public view.
2. Flexible conduit may be used for final connections to motors and
all other devices requiring adjustments. All fittings for
flexible condui t shall be of the liquid- tight type.
Installation shall be in accordance with Article 351 of NEC-78.
3. OUtlet, junction and pull boxes, and cover plates shall be
suitable for use with EM'!' conduit and shall conform to the
National Electric Code for minimum wiring space requirements and
material thickness. All boxes shall have screw- fastened covers.
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-11
5910861-000
E. Wireways: Wireways may be used where protection is adequate in
accordance with Article 362 of NEC-78. Any wireways used shall have
hinge type covers.
F. Wire and Cable Conductors: All power conductors shall be a minimum
of #12 AWG, 600 volt, type THWN/THHN or THHN insulated stranded
copper wire. All external control wire shall be a minimum of #14
AWG, type THWN/THHN or THHN stranded copper conductor, rated at 600
volts. All wires inside the control panel shall be sized for current
carrying capacity. Control wires to be a minimum of #16 AWG, MTW,
rated at 600 volts.
G. Marking of Equipment: In addition to all prime manufacturer's
nameplates, all electrical and mechanical control items mounted in or
on a panel or pushbutton station shall be further identified in the
system by permanently attached corrosion-resisting, etched, engraved,
or stamped identification plates. Embossing tape shall not be
acceptable.
END OF SECTION 14540
BAGGAGE CLAIM CONVEYORS
14540-12
5910861-000
!mRATHOl!l AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRHIRAL BUILDING
~B COUl'f'J."X, FLORIDA
SBCTIOR 15010 - BASIC
MECHANICAL REQUIRBMBRTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s1ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Condi tions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this and the other sections of Division 15.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes general administrative and procedural
requirements for mechanical installations. The following
administrative and procedural requirements are included in this
section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1:
1. Submittals.
2. Record documents.
3. Maintenance manuals.
4. Delivery, storage and handling.
5. Warranty and service.
6. Rough-ins.
7. Mechanical installations.
8. Cutting and patching.
1.3 PERMITS, FEES, CODES, ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS
A. Obtain and pay for all permits, inspections and connection fees
required by governing bodies in connection with the work. Deliver
Certificates of Inspection to the ArChitect-Engineer.
B. All work shall comply with governing codes, ordinances and
regulations of City, County and State having jurisdiction.
C. Other than the signed and sealed Contract Documents, the Contractor
is responsible for any Professional Engineer'S signature and seal
required by authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Applicable codes include but are not limited to the following:
1. SBCCI Standard Building Code - 1991.
2. SBCCI Standard Mechanical Code - 1991.
3. SBCCI Standard Plumbing Code - 1991.
4. State of Florida Energy Efficiency Code for Building
Construction - 1991.
5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-1
5910861-000
6. National Electrical Code (NEC).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1, Section
01300 - SUBMITTALS.
1.5 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Prepare record documents in
Division 1, Section 01700 -
requirements specified in
installed conditions:
accordance with the requirements in
PROJECT CLOSEOUT. In addition to the
Division 1, indicate the following
1. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both
exterior and interior; locations of dampers and other control
devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units requiring periodic
maintenance or repair.
2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control
devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with
items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers,
expansion compensators, tanks, etc:). Valve location diagrams,
complete with valve tag chart. Refer to Division 15, Section
15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION. Indicate actual inverts and
horizontal locations of underground piping.
3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from
prominent building lines.
4. Approved substitutions, Contract modifications, and actual
equipment and materials installed.
5.
Contract modifications,
installed.
actual
equipment
and materials
B. Engage the services of a Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer
registered in Florida to record the locations and invert elevations
of underground installations.
C. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Provide the following in accordance
with Division 1, Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT:
1. Two copies of final approved Test and Balance Report.
2. Two copies of control manufacturer's certification that controls
have been checked for operation and calibration and that system
is operating as intended.
3. Two copies of potable water SteriIization Report.
1 . 6 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1, Section
01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT. In addition to the requirements specified
in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:
1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and
limi tations, performance curves, engineering data and tests, and
complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement
parts.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-2
1 . '.IoIiII~,~,~""""'~;I".....,._i,>.j,:.";,""."..",r"'.,,,,_,.4.';,~',,",,,_.,;""".;v~,c""..,.."",,~
5910861-000
2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up,
break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions;
regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency
instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.
3 . Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and
troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning
and adjusting instructions.
4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.
B. Maintenance manuals shall be on site for use during the final
inspection.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model
numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information
needed for identification.
B. Protect materials, apparatus and equipment from damage, moisture,
dirt, debris and work of other trades.
C. Use of paper, cardboard or other flimsy material for protection will
not be permitted. Replace damaged protective materials immediately.
Do not install damaged materials, apparatus and equipment; remove
from site.
1.8 WARRANTY AND SERVICE
A. Refer to GENERAL CONDITIONS and Division 1, Section 01740
WARRANTIES AND BONDS.
B. Where extended warranties are called for herein, furnish 3 copies to
be inserted in Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
C. All preventative maintenance and normal service will be performed by
the Owner's maintenance personnel after final acceptance of the work.
This shall not alter the Contractor's warranty of the work in any
way.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 GENERAL
A. All materials and equipment shall be new. Systems shall be provided
complete, and each system as a whole, and in all its parts, shall
function correctly up to the specified capacity. Should a system, or
any part thereof fail to meet performance requirements, necessary
replacements, alterations or repairs, as required by the Architect-
Engineer, shall be made to bring performance up to specified
requirements and all building construction and finishes damaged or
marred by such replacements, alterations or repairs shall be restored
to prior condition, at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Where multiple items of equipment or materials are required they
shall be the product of a single manufacturer.
C. Before ordering any equipment, the size of all equipment shall be
checked to easily fit spaces allotted on the drawings.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-3
5910861-000
D. Inserts, pipe sleeves, supports and anchorage of equipment shall be
provided as specified herein. Where such items are to be set or
embedded in concrete, masonry or similar work, the items shall be
furnished and layout made at the prop'er time for the setting or
embedment thereof so as to cause no delay in the work.
E. The drawings are diagrammatic. All appurtenances required for the
proper operation of all equipment shall be provided.
2 .2 MANUFACTURERS' NAMES AND CATALOG NUMBERS
A. Specific references have been made to one or more manufacturers'
names and model or catalog numbers. This does not indicate that the
material and equipment specified is necessarily an "off the shelf"
item; requirements for specific finishes, materials or other
modifications may introduce variances from manufacturers' standards.
Contractor shall ascertain that such modifications are fully
considered.
2.3 DIAGRAMS, NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplate: For each piece of power operated mechanical equipment,
provide a permanent operational data nameplate indicating
manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity,
operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances and
similar essential data. Nameplates shall be securely mounted in an
accessible location. The nameplate of a distributing agent will not
be accepted.
B. In all areas having equipment, valves and control devices, provide
single line diagrams framed under glass and mounted on equipment room
wall. Diagrams shall be black lines on white vellum. The diagrams
shall give name, number designation, and location of each piece of
equipment, valve, and control device.
C. All pieces of equipment, valves, starters, disconnects, and all
pneumatic and electrical control instruments and apparatus shall be
identified with 1/16-inch thick black laminated plastic nameplates
with 3/16-inch high white laminated letters. Similar like equipment
shall be designated with numerical suffix (example: THERMOSTAT,
T-1) . The nameplate identification shall coincide with items
appearing on diagrams.
D. Provide a label for the mechanical system stating "INSTALLATION BY"
(Name, Address and Phone Number of Contractor)
Letters shall be 1/4-inch high and located in a conspicuous place in
the main equipment room.
E. All labels shall be securely affixed.
F. Equipment exposed in occupied spaces shall have labels mounted inside
an access door or panel so as to be easily read when door or panel is
open.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-4
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ROUGH-IN
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with
the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for
rough-in requirements.
3.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of
mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the
following requirements:
1.
Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment,
installation with other building components.
and materials
2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
3.
Arrange for chases, slots,
components during progress
mechanical installations.
and openings in other building
of construction, to allow for
4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and
sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other
structural components, as they are constructed.
5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical
materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give
particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing in the building.
6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install
systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum
headroom possible.
7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior
underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with
requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
compan1es, and controlling agencies. Provide required
connection for each service.
8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with
approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to
greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by
the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the work
are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination
requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer
conflict to the Architect-Engineer prior to installation.
9.
Install systems, materials,
parallel and perpendicular
components. Piping shall be
sections.
and equipment level and plumb,
to other building systems and
sloped as specified in individual
10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing,
maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components.
As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of
disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-5
5910861-000
installations.
location.
Extend grease fittings to an accessible
11. Install access panel or doors where access is required behind
finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Division 8, Section 08305 - ACCESS DOORS.
12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way
priority to systems required to be installed at a specified
slope.
3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1,
Section 01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING. In addition to the
requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements
apply:
1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching
operations, protect adjacent installations.
B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and
materials required to:
1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
2. Remove and replace defective work.
3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the
Contract Documents.
4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
6. Upon written instructions from the Architect-Engineer, uncover
and restore work to provide for Architect-Engineer observation
of concealed work.
C. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials
not to be removed.
D. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate
to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
1. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new
materials specified for the original installation with
experienced installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the
materials and methods required for the surface and building
components being patched.
3.4 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S OPERATING PERSONNEL
A. The Contractor shall include the cost of the services of qualified
instructor (s) to instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the
operation, adjustment, care and maintenance of all equipment and
systems.
B. Instruction shall be performed at a time approved by the Owner after
all equipment and systems are installed, completed, adjusted and
operating to specified requirements. ~ontractor shall notify the
Architect-Engineer when instructions will be given.
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-6
5910861-000
C. Qualification of instructor(s) shall be subject to approval of the
Owner and equipment manufacturer.
D. Additional requirements concerning operation and maintenance of
mechanical equipment and systems may be specified in other sections.
E. Two copies of acknowledgement of all required instructions to Owner's
operating personnel, signed by the Owner or his authorized
representative, shall be submitted to the Architect-Engineer prior to
submitting application for final payment. An additional copy of this
acknowledgement is required in each copy of Operation and Maintenance
Manuals required in Division 1, Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT.
END OF SECTION 15010
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15010-7
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERHINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY FLORIDA
SBCTION 15050 - BASIC MBCHANICAL
MATERIALS AND ME'nlODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
Requirements specified in Division 15, Section 15010
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
B.
BASIC
A. This section includes materials and methods for application with
mechanical installations as follows:
1. Excavation and backfill for Underground Utilities and Services,
Including Underground Piping (Under the Building and From
Building to Utility Connection), Tanks, Basins, and Equipment:
In accordance with Division 2, Section 02220 BUILDING
EARTHWORK .
2 . Concrete for Support of Mechanical Materials and Equipment: In
accordance with Division 3, Section 03010 - CONCRETE WORK.
3. Miscellaneous Metals for Support of Mechanical Materials and
Equipment: In accordance with Division 5, Section 05500 - METAL
FABRICATIONS.
4. Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking, Fasteners, and Anchorage for
Support of Mechanical Materials and Equipment: In accordance
with Division 6, Section 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY.
5. Joint Sealers for Sealing Around Mechanical Materials and
Equipment; and for Sealing Penetrations in Fire and Smoke
Barriers, Floors, and Foundation Walls: In accordance with
Division 7, Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING.
6. Access Panels and Doors in Walls, Ceilings, and Floors for
Access to Mechanical Materials and Equipment: In accordance
with Division 8, Section 08305 - ACCESS DOORS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND' METHODS
15050-1
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRHINAL BUILDIRG
MONROB comrTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15055 - BASIC PIPING
MATERIALS AND MBTHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies p1p1ng materials and installation methods
common to more than one section of Division 15 and includes joining
materials, piping specialties, and basic piping installation
instructions.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
applies to the work in this section.
2. Piping materials and installation methods peculiar to individual
systems are specified within their respective system
specification sections of Divisions 2 and 15.
3. Valves are specified in Division 15", Section 15100 - VALVES, and
in individual piping system sections of Division 15.
4. Supports and anchors are specified in Division 15, Section
15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS.
5. Mechanical identification is specified in Division 15, Section
15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION.
6. Fire barrier penetration seals are specified in Division 7,
Section 07270 - FIRESTOPPING.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 1, Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS and Division 15,
Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS for administrative and
procedural requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit product data on the following items:
1. Escutcheons.
2. Dielectric unions and waterway fittings.
3. Mechanical sleeve seals.
4 . Strainers.
5. welding outlet fittings.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055-1
5910861-000
1. Submit welders' certificates specified in QUALITY ASSURANCE
below.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welders' Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in
accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX,
Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
B. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ASME Code for
Pressure Piping, B31.9 Building Services Piping, and AWS, Welding
Handbook.
C. Soldering and brazing procedures and testing shall comply with ASME
Code for Pressure Piping, B31.9 Building Services Piping.
1 . 5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory-applied plastic end caps on each length of pipe and
tube, except for concrete, corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, clay
pipe. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling to
prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with
durable, waterproof wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed
structural capacity of the floor.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by
inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable,
waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTORERS
A. Manufacturer Uniformity: Conform with the requirements specified in
Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering piping materials and specialties which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Pipe Escutcheons:
a. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.
b. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.
c. Grinnell .
2. Dielectric Waterway Fittings:
a. Victaulic Company of America.
3. Dielectric Unions:
a. Epco Sales, Inc.
b. Watts Regulator Co.
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055-2
5910861-000
4 . Strainers:
a. Armstrong Machine Works.
b. Mueller Steam Specialty.
c. Spirax Sarco.
d. Victaulic Co. of America.
5. Mechanical Sleeve Seals:
a. Thunderline Corp.
6. Welding Outlet Fittings:
a. Bonney Forge.
2.2 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to the individual p1p1ng system specification sections in
Division 15 for specifications on piping and fittings relative to
that particular system.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall
thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.
B. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials appropriate
for the materials being joined.
C. Soldering Materials: Refer to individual piping system
specifications for solder appropriate for each respective system.
D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for
cast-iron flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select
materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed
and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20,
or B16. 21) . Provide materials that will not be detrimentally
affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being
carried. Gaskets containing asbestos will not be accepted.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring
escutcheon, with set screw. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe
outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is
insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in
floors, walls, or ceilings.
B. Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable-iron, Class 150 hexagonal stock, with
ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces;
female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.
C. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end
connections for the pipe materials in which installed (screwed,
soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals,
prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055-3
5910861-000
D. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Electroplated steel or brass nipple,
with an inert and non-corrosive thermoplastic lining.
E. Y-Type Strainers: Provide strainers full line size of connecting
piping with ends matching piping system materials. Screens shall be
Type 304 stainless steel or Monel.
1. Free or open area of the screen shall be a minimum of four times
the cross-sectional area of the entering pipe.
2. Provide strainers with 125 psi working pressure rating.
3. Threaded Ends, 2 Inches and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed
screen retainer with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug.
4. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted
screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug.
5. Grooved Ends, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Tee pattern, ductile-
iron or malleable-iron body and access end cap, access coupling
with EPDM gasket.
6. Screens to be wire mesh or perforated metal with perforation
sizes as follows:
a. 20 mesh for 2 inches and smaller.
b. 1/16 inch perforations for 2-1/2 inch through 4 inches.
c. 1/8 inch perforations for 5 inches and larger.
7. Provide back-up screens where necessary for support of screens.
F. Sleeves:
1. Steel Sleeves: Standard weight galvanized, welded steel pipe,
ASTM AS3, Grade A.
G. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of
interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill
annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and
pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when
tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.
H. Welding Outlet Fittings: Standard weight, forged carbon steel with
butt-welding, socket welding or threaded end for attachment of branch
pipe to run pipe.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of
steel pipe.
B. Remove oil, scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside
of piping and fittings before assembly.
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055-4
5910861-000
3.2 INSTALLATIONS
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and
diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping
systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into
consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing,
and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping
as indicated. Refer to individual system specifications for
requirements for coordination drawing submittals.
B. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces,
above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated otherwise.
C. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between
piping to permit proper insulation applications.
D. Install all piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated on the
drawings.
E. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with minimum 1-inch
clearance outside the insulation. Piping shall not interfere with
clearances required for access to serviceable items.
F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit
applying full insulation and servicing of valves.
G. Install drains at low points and vents at high points of mains,
risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 1/2-inch ball
valve, and short 1/2-inch threaded nipple and cap.
H. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior
walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals.
I. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire-rated
walls, partitions, ceilings, or floors, the fire-rated integrity
shall be maintained. Refer to Division 7, Section 07270
FIRESTOPPING for joint sealers.
J. Install sleeves at pipe penetrations through all floors, roofs and
load-bearing walls and fire-rated walls.
K. Pipe penetrations through walls which are neither load bearing nor
fire rated shall be sealed with joint sealer.
L. Install piping to avoid all contact with dissimilar metals.
3.3 FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES
A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.
Notching of copper tubing or plastic 'piping for connections and
bending of piping will not be accepted.
B. Branch connections in steel pipe may be made with welding outlet
fittings.
C. Remake leaking joints using new materials.
D. Install a 3/4-inch valved blowdown on strainers 3 inches and larger.
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055-5
5910861-000
E. Install unions at the final connection to each piece of equipment and
plumbing fixture having 2 inch and smaller connections, and elsewhere
as indicated.
F. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, adjacent to each
valve, at the final connection to each piece of equipment, and
elsewhere as indicated.
G. Install dielectric unions to connect p~p1ng materials of dissimilar
metals in dry piping systems (gas, compressed air, vacuum).
H. Install dielectric waterway fittings with separate unions to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems (water,
steam) .
I. Install escutcheons for all piping through walls, floors and ceilings
where piping is exposed to view in finished areas.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Steel Pipe Joints:
1. Pipe 2 Inches and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe
threads in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Cut threads full and
clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and
restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or
sealant suitable for the service for which the pipe is intended
on the male threads at each j oint and tighten j oint to leave not
more than three threads exposed.
2. Pipe Larger than 2 Inches:
a. Weld pipe joints (except for exterior water service pipe)
in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.
b. Weld pipe joints of exterior water service pipe in
accordance with AWWA C206.
c. Install flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment.
Weld pipe flanges to pipe ends in accordance with ASME
Code for Pressure Piping B31. Clean flange faces and
install gaskets. Tighten bolts to torque specified by
manufacturer of flange and flange bolts, to provide
uniform compression of gaskets.
B. Nonferrous Pipe Joints:
1. Brazed and Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints,
braze joints in accordance with ASMB Code for Pressure Piping,
B31.9 Building Services Piping.
2. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of
the fittings, using very fine emory cloth, prior to making
soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and
apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for
cleaning tube and fitting surfaces.
C. Joints for other piping materials are specified within the respective
piping system sections.
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055-6
5910861-000
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections.
END OF SECTION 15055
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
15055-7
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRHINAL BUILDING
MONROE COORTY. FLORIDA
SECTIOR 15100 - VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
B. Requirements of the following oi vision 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes general-duty valves common to most mechanical
piping systems.
1. Special purpose valves are specified in individual piping
system specifications.
B. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15, Section 15190 -
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating
materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required
clearances, and installation instructions.
C. Maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of val ve.
Include this data in O&M manual.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves of the same type and similar service shall be provided by the
same manufacturer.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliance: Comply
with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and ASME B31.1 for
power piping.
C. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Val ve and Fittings
Industry (MSS) Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard
Practices referenced.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Preparation For Transport: Prepar~ valves for shipping as follows:
VALVES
15100-1
5910861-000
1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust
and corrosion.
2. Protect valve ends against damage.
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set globe and gate
valves closed to prevent rattling; set ball and plug valves
open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces; set
butterfly valves closed or slightly open; and block swing
check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for
inspection; then reinstall for storage.
2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain
valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves
off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.
C. Handling: Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling
by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed valve
parts. Do not use handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging
points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products from one of the manufacturers listed in valve schedule.
2 . 2 VALVE FEATURES, GENERAL
A. Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems.
B.
Pressure and Temperature Ratings:
pressures and temperatures.
C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
AS required to suit system
D. Operators: Provide the following spec~al operator features:
1. Malleable Iron Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves
other than quarter turn.
2. Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 2 inches and smaller,
except for plug valves. Provide plug valves with square
heads; provide one wrench for every ten plug valves.
3. Chain-wheel operators, for valves 2-1/2 inches and larger,
install 72 inches or higher above finished floor elevation.
Extend chains to an elevation of 5 feet, 0 inches above
finished floor elevation.
4. Gear drive operators, on quarter-turn valves 2-1/2 inches and
larger.
E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide
extended stems arranged to receive insulation.
VALVES
15100-2
5910861-000
F. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications.
1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B1.20.1.
2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for
steel, and ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves.
3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.
a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use
solder having a melting point below 840 degrees F for
gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 degrees F for
ball valves.
G. Materials: Valves in condenser water system shall be constructed of
materials selected for use with salt water.
2 .3 GATE VALVES
A. Domestic Water Service.
1. Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body
and union bonnet of ASTM B62 cast bronze; with threaded or
solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass
packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable
iron handwheel.
2. Gate Valves, 4 Inches and Larger: Class 125, OS&Y, rising
stem, bolted bonnet and flanged ends.
B. HVAC Chilled Water Service.
1. Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body
and union bonnet of ASTM B62 cast bronze; with threaded ends,
solid disc, copper-silicon alloy, rising stem, alloy stem.
brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and
malleable iron handwheel.
2 .4 BALL VALVES
A. Domestic Water, HVAC Chilled and Condenser Water Service.
1. Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: Rated for 600 psi WOG
pressure; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming
to ASTM B62, full port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable
"Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and
vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide threaded ends for HVAC
chilled and condenser water service, and threaded or solder
ends for domestic water service as required.
2.5 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. HVAC Chilled and Condenser Water Service.
1. Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-67; rated
at 200 psi bidirectional dead-end shut-off; cast-iron body
conforming to ASTM A126, Class B. Provide valves with field
replaceable EPDM sleeve, aluminum bronze disc, stainless steel
stem, and EPDM O-ring stem seals. Provide gear operators with
position indicator. Provide lug type as indicated.
VALVES
15100-3
5910861-000
2.6 GLOBE VALVES
A. Domestic Water Service.
1. Globe Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 150;
body and union bonnet of ASTM B62 cast bronze; with threaded
or solder ends, "Teflon" disc, copper-silicon alloy stem,
brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and
malleable iron handwheel.
2. Globe Valves, 4 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class 125 iron
bOdy and bolted bonnet conforming to ASTM A126, Class B; with
outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged ends, and
"Teflon" impregnated packing, and two-piece backing gland
assembly.
2.7 CHECK VALVES
A. Domestic Water, HVAC Chilled and Condenser Water Service.
1. Swing Check Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class
125, cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B62; with
horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having
threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being
reground while the valve remains in the line.
2. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 to 4 Inches: MSS SP-71; Class 125
(Class 175 FM approved for fire protection piping systems),
cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class
B; horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with
bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. Provide valves capable of
being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
3. Wafer Check Valves, 6 Inches and Larger: Class 125, cast-iron
body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non-slam design lapped
and balanced twin bronze flappers or single-disc flapper and
stainless steel trim and torsion spring. Provide valves
designed to open and close at approximately 1- foot
differential pressure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness,
freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing
materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during
shipping and handling.
B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine
functionally significant features, such as guides and seats made
accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the
valve closure member to the shipping position.
C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form
(i.e., out-of-round or local indentation) and cleanliness.
D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage.
Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket
material for proper size, material composition suitable for service,
and freedom from defects and damage.
VALVES
15100-4
5910861-000
E. Prior to valve installation, examine the p1p1ng for cleanliness,
freedom from foreign materials, and proper alignment.
F. Replace defective valves with new valves.
3.2 VALVE ENDS SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipeltube
connections:
1. Copper Tube Size: Solder ends, except provide flanged ends on
4-inch valves and larger with di-electric unions.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2 Inches and Smaller: threaded end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: flanged.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where
necessary.
B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment
arranged to allow equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions
are not required on flanged devices.
C. Install a three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve
using throttling-type valves in the bypass.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center
of the pipe.
E. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.
F. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow
as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between
flanges.
G. Valves installed in grooved-end piping systems shall be flanged.
3.4 SOLDER CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand
cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket
in same manner.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve
socket and outside of tube.
D. Open gate and globe valves to full open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having
composition discs.
VALVES
15100-5
5910861-000
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the
shoulder inside valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even
distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will
melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint
around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder
starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth
or brush.
H. No lead solder shall be permitted.
3.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of
valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be
threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe
threads (except where dry seal threading is specified).
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve
end into which the pipe is being threaded.
3.6 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial
contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible.
Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually
and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream
and downstream for proper shutoff and retention.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service,
but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks.
Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak
persists.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from
exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or
insulation.
3.9 VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Gate Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller; Domestic Water Service.
THREADED SOLDER
MANUFACTURER RS RS
Grinnell 3080 3090
Nibco T-124 S-134
Stockham B-105 B-124
VALVES
15100-6
;" ,...._..~"'"'''''''..~...J..oik~_iilt~.'..jjjji''''''''''''''',."''''".,,,:;.,,;,.~,,~"'''''':,." ;"",_,.'C"_"""",A'";~,""",,:~,",,,
5910861-000
MANUFACTURER
OS&Y RS
B. Gate Valves, 4 Inches and Larger; Domestic Water Service.
Grinnell
Nibco
Stockham
6020 A
F617-0
G-623
C. Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller; HVAC Chilled Water Service.
MANUFACTURER
THREADED
RS
Grinnell
Nibco
Stockham
3080
T-124
B-105
D. Ball Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller; Domestic Water, HVAC Chilled and
Condenser Water Service.
MANUFACTURER
THREADED ENDS
Conbraco (Apollo)
Grinnell
Nibco
Stockham
70-100
3700
T-585-70
S-216-BR-R-T
SOLDER ENDS
70-200
3700SJ
S-585-70
S-216-BR-R-S
E. Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2 Inches and Larger; HVAC Chilled and Condenser
Water Service.
MANUFACTURER
GEAR
Center Line
Keystone
Nibco
Stockham
Watts
Series LT
129
LD-20005
LG-722 -BS3E
BF-03-121-12
F. Globe Valves, 3 Inches and Smaller; Domestic Water Service
MANUFACTURER
CLASS
150
THREADED
Grinnell
Nibco
Stockham
3240
T-235-Y
B-22-T
CLASS
150
SOLDER
3240 SJ
S-235-Y
B-24-T
STRAIGHT BODY
G. Globe Valves, 4 Inches and Larger; Domestic Water Service
MANUFACTURER
Grinnell
Nibco
Stockham
6200A
F-718-B
G-512
VALVES
15100-7
H. Swing Check Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller:
CLASS CLASS
125 125
THREADED SOLDER
MANUFACTURER ENDS ENDS
Grinnell 3300 3300SJ
Nibco T-413-BY S-413-B
Stockham B-319 B-309
1. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 to 4 Inches:
MANUFACTURER
CLASS 125
Grinnell
Nibco
Stockham
6300A
F-918-B
G-931
J. Wafer Check Valves:
MANUFACTURER
CLASS 125
Centerline
Keystone
Stockham
CLC
810
WG970
END OF SECTION 15100
VALVES
15100-8
5910861-000
,..,;"~".",~,.,,"~,~__t~~Ih>IiIiiiol..,;.mH',""""''''''''d'",Hl;il#,~'',_~,,I;"."".".o.,_""..,,;l.";,,~;,c~,' ,,,,,,'.,,~,';/l'.",,,, "0,-'.-
5910861-000
DRATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERKINAL BUILDING
MONROE comrrY. FLORIDA
SBCTION 15135 - METBRS
AND GADGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of meters and gauges:
1. Temperature gauges and fittings.
2. Pressure gauges and fittings.
B. Meters and gauges furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment
are specified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 15
sections.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
1. Product data for each type of meter and gauge. Include scale
range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified
where indicated. Submit meter and gauge schedule showing
manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and
accessories for each meter and gauge.
2. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of meters and
gauges certifying accuracies under specified operating
condi tions and products' compliance wi th specified requirements.
3 . Maintenance data for each type of meter and gauge for inclusion
in Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Division 1 and
Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to
meters and gauges.
B. ASME and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ASME and
Instrument Society of America (ISA) standards pertaining to
construction and installation of meters and gauges.
METERS AND GAUGES
15135-1
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work
include but are not limited to the following:
1. Direct-Mount Filled-System Dial Thermometers:
a. Ashcroft Dresser Industries Instrument Div.
b. Marsh Instrument Co., Unit of General Signal.
c. Trerice (H.O.) Co.
d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
e. Weksler Instruments Corp.
2. Thermometer Wells: Same as for thermometers.
3. Pressure Gauges:
a. Ametek, U.S. Gauge Div.
b. Ashcroft Dresser Industries Instrument Div.
c. Marsh Instrument Co., Unit of General Signal.
d. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.
e. Trerice (H.O.) Co.
f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.
g. Weksler Instruments Corp.
h. WIKA Instruments Corp.
4. Pressure Gauge Accessories: Same as for pressure gauges.
5. Test Plugs:
a. MG piping Products Co.
b. Peterson Equipment Co. , Inc.
c. Sisco, A Spedco, Inc. Co.
d. Trerice (H.O. ) Co.
e. Watts Regulator Co.
2.2 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL
A. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus 1
scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.
B. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:
METERS AND GAUGES
15135-2
5910861-000
1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 degrees F with 2-degree scale
divisions.
2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 degrees F with 2-degree scale
divisions.
3.
Condenser Water:
divisions.
o to 160 degrees with 2-degree scale
4.
Chilled Water:
divisions.
o to 100 degrees F with 2-degree scale
2.3 DIRECT-MOUNT FILLED-SYSTEM DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Type: Vapor actuated, universal angle.
B. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, glass lens, 4-1/2-inch diameter.
C. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180-degree adjustment in
vertical plane, 360-degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with
locking device.
D. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor bronze bourdon pressure tube.
E. Movement: Brass, precision geared.
F. Scale: progressi ve, satin faced, nonreflective aluminum, permanently
etched markings.
G. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass, for separable socket,
length to suit installation.
2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS
A. Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match
piping system design pressure; with 2-inch extension for insulated
piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently fastened to well
and cap.
2.5 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Type: General use, ASME B40. 1 , Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon-
tube type, bottom connection.
B. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2-inches diameter.
C. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch NPS.
D. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.
E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.
F. Range: Conform to the following:
1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg to 15 psi.
2. All fluids: Two times operating pressure.
METERS AND GAUGES
15135-3
5910861-000
2.6 PRESSURE GAUGE ACCESSORIES
A. Snubber: 1/4-inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous
metal disc. Disc material shall be suitable for fluid served and
rated pressure.
2.7 TEST PLUGS
A. Test plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS
fitting and two self-sealing valve-type core inserts, suitable for
inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from a dial-type thermometer
or pressure gauge. Test plug shall have gasketed and threaded cap
with retention chain and body of length to extend beyond insulation.
Pressure rating shall be 500 psig.
B. Core Material: Conform to the following for fluid and temperature
range:
1. Air and Water, minus 30 degrees to 275 degrees F (minus 35 to
136 degrees C): EPDM.
C. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of one pressure gauge, gauge
adapter with probe, two bimetal dial thermometers, and carrying case.
D. Ranges of pressure gauge and thermometers shall be approximately two
times systems operating conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 THERMOMETERS INSTALLATION
A. Install thermometers in vertical and tilted positions to allow
reading by observer standing on floor.
B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At inlet and outlet of chiller.
2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.
C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are
indicated, in vertical position. Fill well with oil or graphite and
secure cap.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Install pressure gauges in p1p1ng tee with pressure gauge valve,
located on pipe at most readable position.
B. Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:
1. At suction and discharge of each pump.
2. At discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.
3. At building water service entrance.
4. At chilled water and condenser water inlets and outlets of
chiller.
5. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil.
METERS AND GAUGES
15135-4
5910861-000
C. Pressure Gauge Needle Valves: Install in piping tee with snubber.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe
at most readable position. Secure cap.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for
best visibility.
B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory-finished
surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched
and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of
Division 15. The drawings indicate the general arrangement of
piping, fittings, and specialties.
END OF SECTION 15135
METERS AND GAUGES
15135-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRHINAL BUILDING
MONROB COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawing and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following:
1. Horizontal-piping hangers and supports.
2. Vertical-piping clamps.
3. Hanger-rod attachments.
4. Building attachments.
S. Saddles and shields.
6. Spring hangers and supports.
7. Miscellaneous materials.
8. Pipe alignment guides.
9 . Anchors.
10. Equipment supports.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 5, Section 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS for materials for
anchoring piping systems to building structure.
2. Division 9, Section 09900 - PAINTING for field-applied painting
requirements.
3. Division 15, Section 15241 VIBRATION CONTROL for
vibration-isolation hangers and supports.
4. Division 15, Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION for pipe
insulation.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
15140-1
5910861-000
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
1. Product data, including installation instructions for each type
of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule
showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and
features for each required pipe hanger and support.
2. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and
supports certifying that their products meet the specified
requirements.
3. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders
comply with requirements specified under QUALITY ASSURANCE
article.
4 . Assembly- type shop drawings for each type of support and anchor,
indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods
of assembly of components.
5. Maintenance data for supports and anchors for inclusion in
Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and
Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with
AWS D1.1 "Structural welding Code - Steel."
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS
qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if
pertinent, has undergone recertification.
B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with
ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and
Brazing Qualifications."
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes
pertaining to product materials and installation of supports and
anchors.
D. NFPA Compliance: Hangers and supports shall comply with NFPA
standard No. 13 when used as a component of a fire protection system.
E. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be
listed and labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping
systems.
F. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL):
Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL where used for fire protection piping systems. The term "NRTL"
shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
15140-2
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of
materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.
1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for
piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.
2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic
protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper
tubing.
B. Thermal Hanger Shield Inserts: 100 -psi average compressive strength,
waterproofed calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal shield.
Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of the pipe and
shall be of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and
thickness of insulation.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and
clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C404, Size No.2). Mix
ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with
minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.
C. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semi-steel or
heavy fabricated steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer
cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly
to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to
allow indicated travel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which supports and anchors
are to be installed. Do not proceed with installing until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to
support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS
SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal
piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze
hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings
complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is supported
together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified
above for individual pipe hangers.
B. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel.
Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS
SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads,
including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and
at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before
concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
15140-3
5910861-000
compressi ve strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install
reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts,
rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.
D. Field-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel
shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS
D-l.l.
E. Support fire protection systems piping independently from other
piping systems.
F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to
facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion
bends and similar units.
G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live
and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted
to connected equipment.
H. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe
slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9
Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.
1.
Insulated Piping:
requirements.
Comply with the following installation
1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping
with galvanized clamps projecting through insulation; do not
exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.
2. Shields: Install galvanized protective shields MSS Type 40 on
cold and chilled water piping that has vapor barrier. Shields
shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in
inches not less than the following:
NPS LENGTH THICKNESS
1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048
4 12 0.060
5 & 6 18 0.060
8 THROUGH 14 24 0.075
16 THROUGH 24 24 0.105
3. Pipes 8 inches and larger shall have wood inserts.
4. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective
shield.
.5.
Thermal Hanger Shields:
thickness as piping.
Install with insulation of same
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from
exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of
loading and stresses to connected equipment.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
15140-4
5910861-000
B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and
bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31. 9 and with AWS
Standards D1.1.
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in
accordance with expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to
control movement to compensators.
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at
ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs
between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for preset of
anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of
piping.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES
A. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins expansion joints
and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Anchor to building substrate.
3.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure
above or support equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.
3 . 6 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors
and equipment supports. Install and align fabricated anchors in
indicated locations.
B. Fi t exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld
connections that cannot be shop welde"d because of shipping size
limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual
shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made,
methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows
after finishing, and so that contours welded surfaces to match
adjacent contours.
3.7 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on
attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
B. Touch-Up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on
miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9, Section 09900 -
PAINTING of these specifications.
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
15140-5
5910861-000
C. For galvanized surfaces clean welds bolted connections and abraded
areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION 15140
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
15140-6
5910861-000
MARATROR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGBR TERHINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 15190 - MECHANICAL
IDKN'l'IFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B. This section is Division 15, Section 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL
MATERIALS AND METHODS, and is part of each Division 15 section making
reference to identification devices specified herein.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is
indicated on drawings andlor specified in other Division 15 sections.
B. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the
following:
1. Painted identification materials.
2. Plastic pipe markers.
3. Plastic tape.
4. Plastic duct markers.
5 . Val ve tags.
6. Valve schedule frames.
7. Engraved plastic-laminate signs.
8. Plastic equipment markers.
9. Plasticized tags.
C. Mechanical identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated
equipment, is specified as part of equipment assembly in other
Division 15 sections.
D. Refer to other Division 15 sections for identification requirements
at central-station mechanical control center.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in
manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size,
length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices. '
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15190-1
5910861-000
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and
installation instructions for each identification material and device
required.
B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten
and reproduced on 8-1/2 x 11 inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number,
piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of
valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any).
Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar
special uses, by special "flags," in margin of schedule. In addition
to mounted copies, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals as
specified in Division 1.
C. Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in maintenance
manuals; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering mechanical identification materials which may
be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1 . Allen Systems, Inc.
2. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div.
3. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.
4. Seton Name. Plate Corp.
2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and
types required for each application as referenced in other Division
15 sections. Where more than single type is specified for
application, selection is installer's option, but provide single
selection for each product category.
2.3 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required
applications with letter sizes generally complying with
recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications,
but not less than 1-1/4-inch high letters for ductwork and not less
than 3/4-inch high letters for operational instructions.
B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black,
except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized
spray-can form and grade.
C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors
indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply
with ANSI A13.1 for colors.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15190-2
5910861-000
2.4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A.
Snap -On Type:
semi-rigid snap-on,
A13.1
Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed,
color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI
B. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-
printed, permanent adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl
pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1
C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 inches (including
insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360
degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the
following methods:
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe
marker.
2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.
3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or
insulation) .
4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive
tape, not less than 3/4-inch wide;, full circle at both ends of
pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 inches.
D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6 inches and larger
(including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type
pipe markers, but not narrower than three times letter height (and of
required length), fastened by one of the following methods:
1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or
insulation) .
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive
tape, not less than 1-1/2 inches wide; full circle at both ends
of pipe marker, tape lapped 3 inches.
3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type,
with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands.
E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted nomenclature which
best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by
Architect-Engineer in cases of variance with names as shown or
specified.
2.5 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color
coded duct markers. Conform to the following color code:
1. Green: Cold air.
2. Yellow: Hot air.
3. Yellow/Green: Supply air.
4. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
5. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by
ANSI A13.1.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15190-3
5910861-000
B. Nomenclature: Include the following:
1. Direction of air flow.
2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.).
3. Duct origin (from).
4. Duct destination (to).
5. Design cfm.
2.6 PLASTIC TAPE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded
pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils
thick.
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2-inch wide tape markers on pipes with outside
diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6 inches,
2-1/2-inch wide tape for larger pipes.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection
is indicated.
2 . 7 VALVE TAGS
A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-9auge polished brass valve tags with
stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4-inch high letters
and sequenced valve numbers 1/2-inch high, and with 5/32-inch hole
for fastener.
1. Provide 1-1/2-inch diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Fill tag engraving with black enamel.
B. Val ve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass
chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes
required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured
specifically for that purpose.
C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16 - inch
thick engraved plastic laminate access panel markers, with
abbreviations and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Include
1/8-inch center hole to allow attachmen~.
2.8 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES
A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display
frame, with screws for removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide
frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum, with SSB-grade
sheet glass.
2.9 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate,
complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated,
engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and
wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as
otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where
adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15190-4
5910861-000
B. Thickness: 1/16 inch for units up to 20 square inches or 8-inch
length; 1/8 inch for larger units.
C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type
permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the
substrate.
2.10 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color
coded equipment markers. Conform to the following color code:
1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.
2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.
3.
Yellow/Green:
components.
Combination cooling and heating equipment and
4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.
5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the
above criteria.
6. For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by
ANSI A13.1.
B. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on
schedules as closely as possible:
1 . Name and plan number.
2 . Equipment service.
3. Design capacity.
4. Other design parameters such as t:>ressure drop, entering and
leaving conditions, rpm, etc.
C. Size: Provide approximate 2-1/2 x 4 inch markers for control
devices, dampers, and valves; and 4-1/2 x 6 inches for equipment.
2.11 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used
in mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations
shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and
wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended
by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and
operationlmaintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name
are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates
individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler
No.3, Air Supply No. 1H, Standpipe F12) .
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15190-5
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces
which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish,
including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install
identification after completion of covering and painting. Install
identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and
similar removable concealment.
3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief
ductwork with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows,
showing ductwork service and direction of flow, in black or white
(whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color) .
B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only
by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork
originates or continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground
or similar concealment), and at 50-foot spacings along exposed runs.
C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access
door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what
equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and
appropriate safety and procedural info~tion.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each
system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to
show normal direction of flow.
1. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or
rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend
color band or rectangle 2 inches beyond ends of lettering.
2. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under
MATERIALS in this section. Install on pipe insulation segment
where required for hot noninsulated pipes.
3. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever
continuous color-coded painting of piping is provided.
B.
Locate pipe markers and color
exposed to view in occupied
maintenance spaces (shafts,
non-concealed locations.
bands as follows wherever piping is
spaces, machine rooms, accessible
tunnels, plenums) and exterior
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and
terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be
question of flow pattern.
3 . Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floorsl
ceilings, or enter nonaccessible enclosures.
4 . At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permi t
view of concealed piping.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15190-6
5910861-000
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and
termination.
6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50 feet along each
piping run, except reduce spacing to 25 feet in congested areas
of piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit
intermediately spaced markers.
3.4 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device
in each p1p1ng system; exclude check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets,
convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at
plumbing fixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in
connections of end-use fixtures and unitj;. List each tagged valve in
valve schedule for each piping system.
B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms.
3.5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment
marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each
operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified
for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general
categories of equipment and operational devices:
1. Main control and operating valves, inClUding safety devices and
hazardous units such as gas outlets.
2. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units.
3. Water heaters.
4. Pumps, compressors, chillers and similar motor-driven units.
5. Coils and similar equipment.
6. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes.
7. packaged HVAC central-station or zone-type units.
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.
9. Strainers, filters, water treatment systems and similar
equipment.
B. Optional Sign Types: Where lettering larger than 1- inch height is
needed for proper identification, because of distance from normal
location of required identification, stenciled signs may be provided
in lieu of engraved plastic, at installer's option.
C. Lettering Size: Minimum l/4-inch high lettering for name of unit
where viewing distance is less than 2 feet, 0 inches, l/2-inch high
for distances up to 6 feet, 0 inches, and proportionately larger
lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of 2/3
to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15190-7
5910861-000
D. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide
lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of
operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions,
and warn of hazards and improper operations.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has
become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions.
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of
valve charts.
END OF SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
15190-8
5910861-000
MAR.ATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERKINAL BUILDING
MONROE comrrY, FLORIDA
SBCTIOR 15241 - v:rBRATIOR CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1S10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Unless otherwise noted on the individual equipment schedules all
mechanical equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators to
prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted
sound to the building structure.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Data for all isolation equipment
shall be submitted at the same time in one submittal. Piecemeal
submittals will be returned without action. Shop drawings and
product data shall clearly indicate individual selections and shall
include for each isolator:
1. Isolator type.
2. Isolator size including spring diameter.
3. Isolator load.
4. Isolator deflection including compressed spring height.
5. Isolator solid spring height.
6. Isolator location including a placement sketch.
7. Installation instructions for each type isolator.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to the following:
1. Mason Industries, Inc.
VIBRATION CONTROL
15241-1
5910861-000
2. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.
3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc.
B. Isolation equipment shall be the products of single manufacturer.
C. Part numbers specified herein are Mason Industries.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Spring vibration isolation mountings generally shall be
free-standing, unhoused, type with 1/4-inch neoprene acoustical pads
bonded to the baseplate. Mountings shall utilize laterally stable
steel springs having a horizontal stiffness equal to or greater than
the rated vertical spring stiffness. Spring diameters shall be not
less than eight-tenths of the compressed height of the spring at rate
load.
1. Springs shall be selected to provide the minimum static
deflection specified and shall provide a 50-percent overload
capacity before reaching a solid state.
2. Mountings shall have leveling bolts that can be rigidly bolted
to the equipment.
3. Mountings shall be type "SLF."
B. Spring vibration isolation mountings for equipment with operating
weight significantly different from the installed weight or subject
to wind loadings shall utilize springs as specified above. In
addition, these mountings shall incorporate spring housings which
include vertical limit stops and serve as blocking during erection.
1. A minimum clearance of 1/2 inch shall be maintained around
restraining bolts and between the housing and spring so as not
to degrade the vibration isolation characteristics.
2. Mountings shall have identical installed and operating heights.
3. Mountings shall be type "SLR" outdoors and "SLRS" indoors.
C. Inertia bases shall include steel structural beam or channel form and
concrete. Bases for all pumps shall include space for support of
suction piping. Bases for horizontal split case pumps shall include
space for support of discharge piping. Base thickness shall be one-
twelfth the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6 inches
and not greater than 12 inches. Forms shall include minimum concrete
reinforcement consisting of l/2-inch bars or angles welded on 6-inch
centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2 inches above the bottom.
Forms shall include steel members to hold anchor bolt sleeves.
Height-saving brackets shall be used at all mounting locations to
maintain a 1- inch clearance between the base and the housekeeping
pad.
1. Concrete shall be as specified in Division 3.
2. Spring isolators shall be as specified above.
3. Bases shall be type "K."
D. Spring vibration isolation hangers shall contain a steel spring and
a neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded
VIBRATION CONTROL
15241-2
5910861-000
with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger frame.
The spring rest in a neoprene cup molded with a rod isolation bushing
that passes through the hanger frame while allowing a 30 degree arc
of rod movement.
1. Springs shall be selected to provide the m1n1mum static
deflection specified and shall provide a 50-percent overload
capacity before reaching a solid state.
2 . Hangers shall be precompressed to the rated deflection and shall
incorporate a means of release to free the spring after
installation is complete.
3. Hangers shall be furnished with a graduated scale which shall
clearly indicate deflection.
4. Hangers shall be "PC30N."
E. All isolators used outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.
F. All isolator springs and all mountings used indoors shall be finished
in polyvinyl chloride and color coded for easy identification of
spring ranges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install isolators of the type and deflection specified herein.
1. Reciprocating Compressors and Chillers or Heat Pumps: Type SL
and SLR respectively, Deflection: 3/4 inch.
2. Pumps 60 Horsepower and Under: Type K, Deflection: 3/4 inch.
3. Air Handling Units, Factory Package Type, Above Five Horsepower
Floor Mounted: Type SLF; Deflection: 3/4 inch.
4. Air Compressors. Type SLF; Deflection: 3/4 inch.
5.
Centrifugal
Deflection:
and Axial
3/4 inch.
Blowers,
Suspended:
Type
PC30N;
6. piping: All hangers in mechanical rooms shall be isolated by
type PC30N isolators. Deflection shall be 3/4 inches except for
the first three hangers room any piece of equipment which shall
have a deflection equal to that specified for the isolators for
the connected equipment. All riser clamps and pipe anchors
shall be isolated from the structure using type "ADA" isolators.
B. Install all isolators for floor-mounted equipment using height-saving
brackets to reduce installed height.
C. Install all isolation equipment in strict accordance with the
manufacturers printed installation instructions.
D. Adjust all isolator deflections to the specified values while
maintaining the equipment level. Deflections called for in this
specification are certifiable minimums--not nominal deflections.
VIBRATION CONTROL
15241-3
5910861-000
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect isolators from damage during construction. Keep isolators
clean and free of construction dirt and debris.
END OF SECTION 15241
VIBRATION CONTROL
15241-4
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERHIRAL BUILDING
MONROB COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTIOR 15250 - MECHANICAL
INSULATIOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the
following:
1. Piping Systems Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Cellular glass.
c. Flexible unicellular.
2. Ductwork System Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
3. Equipment Insulation:
a. Fiberglass.
b. Calcium silicate.
c. Cellular glass.
B. Refer to Division 15, Section 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS for
protection saddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields.
C. Refer to Di vision 15, Section 15891 - METAL DUCTWORK for duct
linings.
D. Refer to Division 15, Section 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION for
installation of identification devices for piping, ductwork, and
equipment.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Labeling: Insulation shall be labeled by the manufacturer. The
label shall include the insulating value, flame spread and smoke
developed rating.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-1
5910861-000
B. FlamelSmoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation
(insulation, jackets, coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives)
with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of
50 or less, as tested by ASTM E84 (NFPA 255) method.
C. Hot Surface Performance: Insulation coverings, jackets and linings
shall not flame, glow, smolder or smoke when tested at their rated
temperatures in accordance with ASTM C411. Test temperature shall
be 250 degrees F or greater.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and
installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation.
Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value,
thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system
requiring insulation.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material
lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data and
product data in maintenance manual.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to
site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed
showing fire hazard indexes of products.
B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical
damage. Do not install damaged or wet insulation; remove from
project site.
C. Remove and replace any damaged or wet insulation with new materials.
Remove from project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Rubatex Corp.
3. Certainteed Corp.
4. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH.
5. Manville Products Corp.
6. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.
7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp.
8. Foster Products Corp.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-2
5910861-000
2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C547, Class 1 unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C552, Type II, Class 2.
C. Flexible Unicellular Piping Insulation: ASTM C534, Type I.
D. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C921, Type I for piping with
temperatures below 100 degrees F, Type II for piping with
temperatures above 100 degrees F. Type I may be used for all piping
at installer's option.
1. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC
fitting covers, fastened' as per manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. Encase exterior piping insulation with aluminum jacket with
weather-proof construction.
E. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation
manufacturer for applications indicated. Do not use staples in Type
I jackets.
F. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by
insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C612, Class 1.
B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C553, Type I, Class
B-4.
C. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C921, Type I flameproof kraft
faced with UL approved reinforced aluminum foil vapor seal with 0.02
maximum permeability rating.
D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires,
tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended
by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated. Do not use
staples in Type I jackets. .
E. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements , adhesives, coatings,
sealers, protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by
insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
F. Ductwork Tape: Provide aluminum foil type tape that meets UL 181A-P
requirements.
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C612, Class 2.
B. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C553, Type I, Class
B-4.
C. Calcium Silicate Equipment Insulation: ASTM C533, Type I, Block.
D. Cellular Glass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C552, Type I or Type III.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-3
5910861-000
E. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre - sized glass
cloth jacketing material, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard,
or metal jacket at installer's option, except as otherwise
indicated.
F. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements,
sealers, mastics and protective finishes as recommended by
insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
G. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire,
wire netting, tape, corner angles, anchors and stud pins as
recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to
be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.
Do not insulate pipes and ductwork until they have been pressure and
leak tested and approved by ArChitect-Engineer.
3.2 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION
A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping
(except for handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers,
check valves, balance cocks, flow regulators, drainage piping
located in crawl spaces or tunnels, buried piping, fire protection
piping, and pre insulated equipment.
B. Cold Piping:
1.
Application Requirements:
plumbing piping systems:
a. Potable cold water piping.
Insulate the following cold
b. Potable chilled water piping.
c. Interior aboveground horizontal storm water piping and
fittings from horizontal to vertical, vertical to
horizontal and roof drain bodies.
d. Sanitary lines that carry air conditioning condensate
until diluted by other fixtures.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following
type and thickness of insulation:
a. Flexible Unicellular: 1/2-inch thickness.
3.3 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION
A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation
enclosures or unit cabinets; on cold piping within unit cabinets
provided piping is located over drain pan; on heating piping beyond
control valve, located within heated space.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-4
5910861-000
B. Exterior and buried piping and piping within mechanical rooms shall
have insulation thicknesses one thickness greater than that
specified in the following paragraphs.
C. Cold Piping (40 degrees F to 75 degrees F):
1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC
piping systems:
a. HVAC chilled water supply and return piping.
b. HVAC make-up water piping.
c. Air conditioner condensate drain piping and sanitary
line to the point of dilution from other fixtures.
2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the
following types and thicknesses of insulation:
a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2-inch thick for pipe sizes up to
and including 4 inches, 2 inches thick for pipe sizes
over 4 inches.
b. Flexible Unicellular: 1/2-inch thick for pipe sizes up
to 1-1/2 inches (largest size permitted) .
3. Buried piping shall be jacketed with self-sealing, nonmetallic
sheet equal to PITTWRAP CWo
D. Hot Piping (Above 75 degrees F):
1.
Application Requirements:
piping systems:
a. HVAC condenser water piping to heating coils above grade
inside the terminal building.
Insulate the following hot HVAC
2 . Insulate each piping system specified above with the following
type and thickness of insulation:
a. Fiberglass: 1-inch thick for pipe sizes up to and
including 1 inch, 1-1/2-inch thick for pipe sizes 1-1/2
through 4 inches, 2 inches thick for pipe over 5 inches.
3.4 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION
A. Application Requirements: Insulate all ductwork terminal unit
collars, duct-mounted coils, diffuser and register backs and plenums
with the following exceptions:
1. Internally lined return air ductwork.
2. Exhaust ducts within return air ceiling plenums or in
conditioned spaces.
B. Mechanical Rooms: Ductwork within mechanical rooms shall be rigid
fiberglass with 3-pound density in lieu of the 2-pound density as
specified in the following paragraphs. The entire insulation
surface shall be covered with UL approved white, fire-resistant
mastic, into which is embedded a layer of glass fabric, with a white
finish coat of subject mastic not less than 6 mils dry-film
thickness.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-5
5910861-000
C. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the
following types and thicknesses of insulation:
Rigid Fiberglass:
rectangular duct} .
2. Flexible Fiberglass: 1-1/2-inch thick, 3/4-pound density
application limited to ductwork above ceilings (round duct
only) .
1-1/2 - inch thick, 2 -pound density (all
1.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Cold Equipment (Below 75 degrees F) :
1. Application Requirements: Insulate all cold equipment
including, but not limited to the following:
a. Cold and chilled water pumps.
b. Expansion/compression tank.
c. Air separators.
2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of
the following types and thicknesses of insulation:
a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick.
B. Generator Exhaust:
1. Application Requirements: Insulate all indoor exhaust piping
and muffler.
2. Insulation shall be calcium silicate of an adequate thickness
to maintain a maximum surface temperature of 150 degrees F.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION
A.
General: Install insulation products
manufacturer's written instructions, and
recognized industry practices to ensure that
intended purpose.
in accordance wi th
in accordance with
insulation serves its
B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of
heat tracing, painting, testing, and acceptance of tests.
C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate
each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation,
with a single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or
scraps abutting each other.
D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation
joints firmly together to ensure a complete and tight fit over
surfaces to be covered.
E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and
protect to prevent puncture or other damage.
F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with
equivalent thickness and composition of insulation as applied to
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-6
"",,""..._'''"i'.....~~...~~''";,,;,li,~'''''~;'".:,..,;j j .'".,..;".'I<k.'...'....."
5910861-000
adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job
fabricated units (at installer's option).
G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors
and similar piping penetrations, except where fire-rated joint
sealer is required.
H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For
hot pipes, apply 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape or band over the
butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap
cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3-inch wide vapor barrier
tape or band.
I. The insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with
the functioning of flexible connections or expansion joints.
J. Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather
by installation of weather-barrier mastic protective finish and
aluminum jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
General: Install insulation products
manufacturer's written instructions, and
recognized industry practices to ensure that
indented purpose.
in accordance wi th
in accordance with
insulation serves its
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.
C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints
firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be
covered.
D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jacket on ductwork insulation,
and protect it to prevent puncture and other damage. Seal all
tears, punctures and other penetration in insulation jacket.
E. Rigid Fiberglass Insulation: Install using mechanical fasteners
(weld pins or stick clips) located not less than 3 inches from edge
or corner of insulation board. Pin spacing along duct shall be no
greater than 12 inches on centers. Duct insulation board shall be
impaled over pins and fasteners with self -locking washers. All
joints shall be tight, with insulation lengths tightly butted
against each other. Where lengths are cut, they shall be smooth and
square without breakage of end surfaces. Where insulation
terminates, the ends shall be neatly tapered and effectively sealed
and finished. Longitudinal seams of exposed insulation shall be
directed away from normal view. Apply a matching pressure - sensi ti ve
vapor seal patch over each pin and washer. All insulation edges and
butt joints are to be sealed with pressure sensitive joint sealing
tape to match the jacket. Tape shall comply with UL 181A-P
requirements. Use 3-inch wide tape on flat surfaces or where edges
are shiplapped and stapled. Five-inch wide tape can be used in lieu
of shiplapping. Contours on exposed work shall be smooth and
continuous. Cemented laps, flaps, bands and tapes shall be smoothly
and securely pasted down.
F. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls,
floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where fire dampers
are installed.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-7
5910861-000
G. Flexible Fiberglass: Install insulation over a 50-percent coverage
coat, of UL approved adhesive, applied to duct in 6 - inch brush
strokes, on 12-inch centers. Ducts 24 inches and larger in width or
height shall have insulation additionally secured with mechanical
fasteners (weld pins or stick clips) spaced on 18 - inch centers
(maximum) to prevent sagging of insulation. Insulation jacket shall
be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches at all joints and seams then
stapled 6 inches on center with outward clinching staples. All
joints, seams and breaks in the vapor barrier shall be sealed with
UL approved mastic and 4-inch wide glass fabric.
H. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on
ductwork where internal insulation or sound absorbing linings have
been installed.
I. Corner Angles: Install corner angles on external corners of
insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering
with jacketing.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A.
General:
accordance
compliance
insulation
Install equipment thermal insulation products
with manufacturer's written instructions, and
with recognized industry practices to ensure
serves intended purpose.
in
in
that
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on
clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use
mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints and excessive
voids resulting from poor workmanship.
C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and
protect it to prevent puncture and other damage.
D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, breechings, or stacks while
hot.
E. Apply insulation using the staggered joint method for both single
and double layer construction, where feasible. Apply each layer of
insulation separately.
F. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, troweled in
workmanlike manner, leaving a smooth continuous surface. Fill in
scored block, seams, chipped edges and depressions, and cover over
wire netting and joints with. cement of sufficient thickness to
remove surface irregularities.
G. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted
and firmly secured. Lap seams at least 2 inches. Apply over vapor
barrier where applicable.
H. Do not insulate ASME stamp, and manufacturer's nameplate. Provide
neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.
I. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment
which must be opened periodically for maintenance; include metal
insulation covers, fasteners, flanges, frames and accessories.
J. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from
weather by installation of weather-barrier mastic protective finish
and jacketing, as recommended by the manufacturer.
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-8
5910861-000
K. The insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with
the functioning of flexible fittings.
3.9 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT
A. Replace damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily,
including units with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated
units.
B. Protection: Insulation installer shall advise Contractor of
required protection for insulation work during remainder of
construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.
END OF SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
15250-9
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
.,NROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15300 - ADTOIIATIC
SPRIRKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 . 1 SUMMARY
A. The work includes the installing of approved automatic wet pipe
sprinkler systems to afford complete fire protection coverage
throughout the building as specified and indicated on the drawings.
B. The design, equipment, materials, installation and workmanship shall
be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of
NFPA 13, except as specified otherwise herein. Each system shall
include all materials, accessories and equipment inside and outside
the building necessary to provide each system complete and ready for
use. Each system shall be installed to give full consideration to
built-in spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork and all other
construction and equipment to afford complete coverage and be free
from operating and maintenance difficulties, all in accordance with
specifications and drawings.
C. Devices and equipment shall be of a make and type listed by the UL,
or approved by the Factory Mutual Laboratories. In each of the NFPA
Standards referred to herein, the advisory provisions shall be
considered to be mandatory, as though the work "shall" had been
substituted for "should."
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
As soon as
fabrication
follows:
practical after
submit drawings
award of Contract, and prior
and specifications for approval
to
as
B. Shop Drawings: Submit complete sets of working drawings of each
sprinkler system and full descriptive data for pipe, fittings, gauge
valves, check valves, sprinkler heads, hanger, devices, materials,
and associated equipment for approval. Partial submissions will not
be acceptable. Descripti ve data shall be annotated to show the
specific model, type and size of each item the Contractor proposes to
furnish. The drawings shall be in accordance with the requirements
of "working plans" as specified in NFPA 13 and shall include all
applicable data specified therein. No work shall begin until the
design of the system and various components have been approved.
C. Instruction and Maintenance Manuals: Furnish 3 sets of manuals,
containing complete instructions for the specific make and model of
each system alarm check valve furnished. One copy of each
instruction and maintenance manual shall be placed in a flexible oil
resistant, protective binder and mounted in an accessible location in
the vicinity of the alarm check valve. Two additional copies of the
manual shall be furnished to Owner.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Prior to installation submit data for approval showing successfully
installed sprinkler systems of the same type and design as specified
herein. The data shall include the names and locations of at least
two installations where similar systems have been installed. Systems
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-1
5910861-000
shall have been satisfactorily completed in the manner intended
within a period of not less than 5 years prior to this Contract.
1 .4 GUARANTEE
A. Where extended guarantees are required, furnish 3 copies to be
inserted in Instructions and Maintenance Manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN OF SPRINKLER SYSTEM
A. Design of uniform distribution wet pipe sprinkler systems shall
conform to NFPA 13 and to the requirements as specified hereinafter.
2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Heads shall have nominal 1/2-inch orifice. Release element of each
head shall be of the temperature rating indicated on drawings.
B. Sprinkler heads in the unfinished areas without ceiling shall be
brass upright type Gem Model F950. Recessed pendent heads shall be
Gem Model F985, pendent heads shall be Gem Model Issue "D" or
approved equal. Extended coverage heads shall be GEM Model F994.
Finish shall be polished chrome.
C. Cabinet: Sprinkler heads and sprinkler head wrench shall be provided
in a cabinet at an accessible location adjacent to each valve. The
number and types of extra sprinkler heads shall be as specified in
NFPA 13.
2.3 PIPING
A. Piping shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe conforming to ASTM AS3 with
150 lb. screwed fittings up to 2.5 inches. For piping larger than
2.5 inches, fittings shall be cast iron flanged or victraulic
fittings as per NFPA No. 13. Approved light wall piping will be
acceptable.
2 .4 VALVES
A. All valves in fire protection system shall be FM approved. Provide
supervisory switch in the OS&Y valve where indicated.
B. Alarm valves shall be variable pressure type with retard chamber and
all accessories and appurtenances necessary for the proper operation
of each system and to prevent false alarms due to surge or other
conditions in the supply system. Alarm valve shall be Gem Model F200
or approved equal.
C. All other valves shall be as required in Section 15909 - PLUMBING
VALVES.
2.5 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
A. Fire department connection shall be flush-mounted, chrome-plated
brass construction with 2-1/2 inch inlets and shall be Potter-Roemer
Model No. 5023 or approved equal. Provide lettering on the face
plate to read "Auto. Sprk." Threads shall conform to local fire
department threads.
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-2
5910861-000
2.6 SWITCHES
A. Flow switch shall be vane type with adjusting screws. Switch shall
be rated for 175 psi service and shall be UL listed and FM approved.
Flow switch shall be as manufactured by Gem Model No. VSR-D or
approved equal.
B. Supervisory switch shall be single-pole double-throw switch with
spring loaded plunger. Switch shall be as manufactured by Gem, Model
No. OSYSU-A2 or approved equal. Switch shall be UL listed and FM
approved.
C. Coordinate voltage requirement with Division 16 - ELECTRICAL.
2.7 BALL DRIP
A.
Install an automatic ball drip on the check valve of the
department connection. Size shall be as indicated on drawings.
drip shall drain to exterior of building. Install Gem Model No.
or approved equal.
fire
Ball
F789
2 . 8 ALARMS
A.
Water motor alarms shall be of the
type, to sound locally upon the
system to which it is connected.
outside of the outer walls of
indicated.
approved weatherproof and guarded
flow of water in each sprinkler
Alarms shall be mounted on the
the building, at the location
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Standard wet pipe system shall be installed for areas listed on
drawings and specified herein, unless specifically indicated
otherwise. Each system shall be installed to give full consideration
to built-in spaces, piping, electrical equipment, duct work and all
other construction and equipment to afford complete coverage and be
free from coordinated with all trades.
B. The occupancy classification shall be generally light hazard.
C. Drain valves, test valves and control valves shall be provided as
shown and fitted with approved enamel signs conforming to NFPA
Standard No. 13.
D. Sprinkler piping shall be so arranged that the system can be
thoroughly drained. Where practicable, all piping shall be arranged
to drain to the main valve. On wet pipe system, piping may be
installed level with trapped piping installed in compliance with NFPA
No. 13.
E. Size of sprinkler system drains shall comply with NFPA No. 13.
F. All drain lines shall discharge outside the building where possible
and shall be visible from drain valve, where practicable.
G. Where drains do not discharge outside, they shall be piped indirectly
to a drain fixture or open hub.
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-3
5910861-000
H. All sprinkler systems shall be provided with inspectors' test valve
supplied from the highest and most remote part of the system in
relation to the riser assembly, and shall discharge outside of the
building. Test valve shall be conveniently accessible within 7 feet
of the floor.
I. Gauges shall be 3-1/2-inch dial type.
J. Pipe supports, sway braces, hangers, clamps and accessories shall be
of an approved pattern and placed to conform to the requirements of
NFPA No. 13.
K. Piping passing through floors, walls, and ceiling shall be provided
with painted cast-iron plates, except in toilet rooms and plates
shall be chromium plated steel or nickel-plated cast iron.
L. Sprinkler risers and piping shall be located in area as shown on
drawings.
M. Immediately after sprinkler heads are installed in place, heads shall
be covered with plastic bags which shall be removed after painting.
Removal of bags shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
N. Corrosion resistant sprinkler heads shall be used in areas where
chlorine, sulfur dioxide, zinc, ammonia, hydrochloric, sulfuric and
acetic acids are present and where exposed to weather or moisture.
Heads installed subject to mechanical injury shall be protected with
approved guards. Pendant heads shall be installed as shown in NFPA
Standard No. 13.
3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Do all necessary cutting and patching.
present a finished appearance.
B. Cutting of any structural member shall not be permitted without prior
written approval.
The completed work shall
3.3 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. All pipe openings during the construction period shall be temporarily
closed with caps, flanges or other approved means until final
connections are made.
B. Protect equipment, specialties and controls from damage, moisture,
dirt, debris and work of other trades. Equipment, specialties and
controls having damaged finishes shall be replaced or repaired as
directed.
3.4 ELECTRICAL WORK
A. In accordance with Division 16 - ELECTRICAL
3.5 TESTING
A. After completion of work, the system shall be hydrostatically tested
and flushed as specified in NFPA No. 13. Materials and equipment
required for all tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no
additional cost to Owner.
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-4
_'0"""-;'_""""",,;_;;...1. iiliUlttt 1. ,"'_""""'"""Io~."~....""",-~;."..-;.<>~~"...-""~"",,,..,,^.,,...~,,,,,,,,.~~..o.
5910861-000
B. Any defects due to materials or workmanship occurring during these
tests shall be immediately and properly corrected at no additional
cost to Owner.
3.6 CLEANING
A. The interior sprinkler systems shall be flushed clean before placing
systems into service.
END OF SECTION 15300
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
15300-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRKIRAL BUILDIBG
K>NROE COuNh:, FLORIDA
SECTION 15404 - PImmIBG
PIPIBG
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work consists of furnishing and installing plumbing piping where
shown on drawings and as specified herein. The following list is for
standards only and all items may not nec~ssarily be used on this job.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Cast Iron Hubless Sanitary Pipe and Fittings: CISPI Std. 301.
B. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings, Service Weight: ASTM A74.
C. Steel Pipe: Standard Weight, Galvanized: ASTM AS3.
D. Copper Water Tube: ASTM B88.
E. Copper Drainage Tube DWV: ASTM B306.
F.
Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings:
B16.22.
ANSI
G. Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Drainage
Fittings: ANSI B16.29.
H. Caulking Lead: Fed. Spec. QQ-C-40 (2).
I. Sheet Lead: Fed. Spec. QQ-L-201.
J. Sheet Copper: ASTM B 152.
K. No-Hub Stainless Steel Coupling and Gaskets: CISPI Std. S-301.
L. PVC DWV Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D2665.
M. PVC Solvent Cements: ASTM D2564.
PLUMBING PIPING
15404-1
5910861-000
2.2 JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Cast Iron, Hub and Spigot: Packed with oakum and finished with lead
not less than 1 inch deep; well caulked or elastomeric compression
type joints, double seal conforming to ASTM C564. Gasket weight
shall be for class of pipe joined.
B.
Cast Iron, No-Hub:
ring.
Neoprene gasket and stainless steel retaining
C. Between Lead and Brass: Ferrules or soldering nipples with wiped
joints 3/8 inch thick and 3/4 inch each side of joint.
D. Screwed Joints: American National Standard with pipe free from
cutting and burrs. Three threads exposed maximum.
E. Soldered Joints: 95-5 tin-antimony solder.
F. Slip Joints: Use for plumbing trap seals on inlet side only.
G. Between Copper and Ferrous Material: Insulating dielectric union.
H.
Flanged Joints:
rubber gasket.
Furnish with companion flange and cloth inserted
I. Flanged Bolts: ASTM A 354, minimum grade BD, alloy steel with hex
nuts in compliance with ANSI B18. 22 and standard rolled steel
washers.
J. Assembly for Hubless Piping: As recommended by the manufacturer.
K. Sol vent Weld, PVC: As recommended by pipe manufacturer.
L. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducers, increasers or
reducing fittings. Bushings will not be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installing pipe in any part of the system, the pipe shall be
cleaned inside and made free of oil, dirt, and foreign matter.
B. Properly align and install in neat arrangements true to the lines of
the building. pitch line at a constant slope for proper drainage.
C. Except as noted otherwise on drawings, piping shall be held as high
as possible, tight under beams, with due regard to conflicts with
other systems and their requirements for space.
D. Piping, inCluding no-hub piping, shall be installed straight and true
to vertical and horizontal lines. Deflection shall not exceed one
degree. When necessary to achieve this alignment provide additional
hangers or bracing.
E. Apply lubricant to screw joint male threads.
F. Metal to be soldered shall be cleaned and fluxed as suitable for the
solder used.
PLUMBING PIPING
15404-2
5910861-000
G. Notching of copper tubing or plastic piping for connections will not
be permitted.
END OF SECTION 15404
PLUMBING PIPING
15404-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDIBG
.,RROE COONTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15406 - PImmIRG
SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOT USED
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Provide in accordance with PDI selection standards, sizes as noted on
drawings.
2 .2 CLEANOUTS
A. Cleanouts on no-hub pipe shall be standard no-hub fittings.
Cleanouts on cast iron hub and spigot piping, shall be cadmium plated
and of the following types:
1. Cleanout Plugs: Wade W-8550-R or approved equal.
2. Cleanouts in Concrete Floor Finishes: Wade W-7000 B or approved
equal.
Cleanouts in Vinyl Tile Floor Finishes.
approved equal.
4. Cleanouts in Floor Finishes Other Than Listed Above: Wade 7000
K or approved equal.
3.
Wade W-7000 T/K or
5. Cleanouts in Stack Bases in Concealed Locations. Wade 8480 -R-SS
or approved equal.
6.
Cleanouts in Terrazzo Floor Finishes:
approved equal.
Wade W-7000-K, or
2.3 REMOTE CHILLER
A. Remote chiller shall be Haws Model HCR8, 1/5 hp, 120 V, 1 phase, 60
Hz secure unit to shelf model No. H7149~.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Water Hammer Arresters: Install where shown on drawings.
B. Cleanouts: Install where shown on drawings and at base of all
risers. Provide additional cleanouts where required by local codes
and for convenience of testing and erection at Contractor's option.
Frames and covers shall be flush with adjoining architectural
finishing material.
END OF SECTION 15406
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
15406-1
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDIBG
.,RROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15411 - PImmIBG
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide hangers for all piping not indicated below ground.
B. Use hangers capable of adjustment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers for black or galvanized steel pipe shall be MiChigan Hanger
Co., Model No. 100 or approved equal.
B. Hangers for cast iron pipe shall be Michigan Hanger Co., Model No.
400 or approved equal.
C. Hangers for copper tubing shall be Michigan Hanger Co., Model No.
102-A or approved equal.
D. Trapeze hangers of a type approved by the Architect-Engineer may be
used where multiple pipes are designed to run parallel and at the
same elevation.
E. Hangers for PVC piping shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
Piping 3/4 inch and smaller shall be supported continuously.
F. Provide insulation hanger with protective shield, Michigan Hanger
Co., Model No. 103 or approved equal for all insulated piping. At
hanger points provide 6-inch long section of 1/2-inch thick calcium
silicate sectional pipe insulation with factory longitudinal lap.
Seal butt joints with insulating cement.
G. Strap Hangers: Not permitted.
H. Riser Clamps: Provide riser clamps for vertical p1p1ng at each
level, MiChigan Hanger Co., Model No. 510 for steel piping and for
copper tubing, or approved equal. Use "short-end" riser clamp where
space is limited.
PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15411-1
5910861-000
I. Inserts: In concrete, Michigan Hanger Co., Model No. 355 or approved
equal, having adjustment from 3/4 inch through 1-1/4 inch. In metal
decks, Redhead SDI or approved equal. Powder propelled permitted in
new construction where type and location are approved prior to
installation. In existing construction, Start Slugin No. 6800 series
or approved equal.
J. Side Beam Clamps: Provide when supporting from structural steel
members, Michigan Hanger Co., Model 300 or approved equal.
K. Other Supports: Obtain Architect - Engineer's approval for other
methods of support.
L. Conduit clamps will not be permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SPACING OF HANGERS
A. Provide hanger at each change of direction.
B. Space hangers and supports to prevent sagging and reduce strain on
valves and specialties with spacing no greater and rod no smaller
than shown the following table. Hangers shall allow for expansion
and contraction.
2.
Ferrous piping and copper tubing:
Diameter of pioe Maximum Soacinq Rod Size
1/2 inch thru 1-1/2 6 ft. 3/8 inch
2 inch thru 3 inch 10 ft. 1/2 inch
4 inch thru 5 inch 12 ft. 5/8 inch
6 inch and larger 16 ft. 3/4 inch
Cast iron piping:
Diameter of pioe Maximum Soacinq Rod Size
2 inch and 3 inch Each joint 3/8 inch
4 inch and 5 inch Each joint 1/2 inch
6 inch and 8 inch Each joint 3/4 inch
10 inch thru 15 inch Each joint 3/4 inch
(two hangers)
1.
3. PVC piping maximum spacing and rod size shall be as recommended
by the manufacturer.
3.2 RISER CLAMPS
A. Install at each level below the floor. Suspend from 2 hanger rods
and inserts where the installation of escutcheon plates is required.
END OF SECTION 15411
PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15411-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRIIIRAL BUILDIBG
.,RROE COORTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15414 - TBSTIBG OF
PLUMBIBG PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Conduct all tests after piping is installed and before p1p1ng is
concealed, covered, or connected to equipment, fixtures or valves.
B. Provide all necessary temporary piping closures.
C. Provide all testing equipment, materials and supplies.
D. Systems shall remain under test for sufficient length of time to
prove tightness thereof and for adequate observation by the
Architect-Engineer, or his representative.
E. Materials other than those specified for jointing will not be
permitted in the piping systems for the purpose of stopping leaks.
F. All leaks disclosed by the testing procedures shall be s~opped and
testing repeated until the system is proven tight.
G. Testing requirements are minimum and are not intended to be limiting
where additional testing methods are required by the authority having
jurisdiction.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Sterilization: Provide a dated letter from local health department
or state certified testing facility to the Architect-Engineer's
representative stating that piping system has been sterilized and
flushed as specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING TEST
A. Domestic cold water p1p1ng shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure
of 150 psig. Maintain test pressure for a minimum of 1 hour.
B. Sanitary and storm piping, previous to connection of fixtures, shall
be filled with water to the top of the system and proven tight. When
testing the system by sections the minimum height of the water column
shall be 10 feet. Examine all joints for leaks.
TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING
15414-1
3.2 STERILIZATION
5910861-000
A. After tests are completed all potable water supply systems shall be
filled with a solution containing 100 p~m of available chlorine and
allowed to stand for a period of two hours before being flushed with
clean water.
END OF SECTION 15414
TESTING OF PLUMBING PIPING
15414-2
;.-.,;..",......,"',....~,~--"..'.,',"""'.,.........."-"".",;""',",.,~.,. ~.',
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRIIINAL BUILDIBG
a:>NROE COONTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15417 - PImmING
FIXTtJRBS, TR.DI ARD DRAINS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Fixtures shall be of the same manufacturer except where specified
otherwise.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
A. piping to serve fixtures and equipment and exposed to view in
finished areas shall be brass, chromium plated.
2.2 SUPPORTS
A. Provide all brackets, plates, anchors and fastening devices required
for anchoring the fixtures rigidly in place. Risers to shower heads
shall be anchored to the wall construction to prevent movement.
2.3 FIXTURE
A. Provide the following fixtures:
1. P-1 Water Closet: Shall be Eljer No. 111-1405 wall-hung or
approved equal, with sloan royal flush valve No. 110 white open
front solid plastic seat, and commercial chair carrier as
required.
2. P-1A Water Closet (Handicapped): Same as P-1 except mounted at
handicapped height.
3. P-2 Urinal: Shall be Eljer No. 161-1090 wall-hung or approved
equal siphon jet, vitreous china with sloan royal No. 186 flush
valve with commercial chair carrier.
4. P-3 Lavatory: Shall be Eljer No. 051-3504 or approved equal,
counter top, round with Bradley Model 90-75 faucet, open grid
strainer, C.P. cast brass "P" trap, flexible supplies with angle
stops.
5. P-4 Lavatory (Handicapped): Shall be Eljer No. 051-1840 or
approved equal. Vitreous china, wall-hung 20 X 18 inches with
Bradley Model 90-75 faucet, open grid strainer, C.P. "P" trap
flexible supplies with angle stops, concealed arm carrier.
6. P-5 Janitor's Receptor: Shall be Fiat No. MSB2424 with mop
hanger plate, hose and hose bracket with Speakman 5C-5811-USA
or approved equal.
7. P-6 Drinking Fountains: Shall be Haws Model 1005RF wall-
mounted, 27-inch clear floor to front apron, unit shall be
stainless steel with in-wall support bracket mounted to chair
carrier (P-6 units are connected to remote chiller unit, see
Section 15406) .
PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND DRAINS
15417-1
5910861-000
8. P-7 Drinking Fountains: Shall be Haws Model 3353 floor-mounted
with base plate bolted to floor slab below tile setting bed (P-7
units are not connected to remote chiller).
9. P-8 Sink: Shall be Elkay No. DLH-2222-10C complete with LK-2432
faucet, C.P. cast brass tip" trap, flexible supplies with angle
stops.
2.4 PLUMBING DRAINS
A. Furnish with seepage flange where installed with pans or flashing,
furnish clamping ring.
B. All drains shall be of the same manufacturer.
C. Furnish floor drains with primer connections where indicated on the
drawings. In lieu of cast-in primer connection on the drain body, a
tee between the drain bOdy and the trap, to recei ve the primer
discharge, will be acceptable.
D. Provide floor drains with 4-inch deep seal traps.
E. Trap Primer shall be precision plumbing products or approved equal.
F. Floor Drain:
l. F.D. "A"
approved
2. F.D. "B"
equal.
G. Roof Drain:
shall be inside caulk Wade No. W-1103-STD6-1-6 or
equal.
shall be inside caulk Wade No. W-1214-27 or approved
1. Roof drain shall be Wade No. W-3000-1C-40-53 or approved equal.
2. Overflow drain shall be same as above except with - D.
3. Deck drain shall be Wade No. W-3203-P-1-5 or approved equal.
H. Provide and install a Bradley 4RT remote transformer and Bradley
4FTMAR thermostatic mixing valve assembly where shown and noted on
drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Drains shall be installed where shown on the drawings, accessible and
located to suit equipment approved for installation.
B. Where flush valves are specified with fixtures, the supply to the
val ve in each room shall be at the same height for that type of
fixture and the valve shall be set in place so that the center line
of the valve discharge is directly above the centerline of fixture
spud. Bending of nipple between the valve and the spud to achieve
connection shall not be allowed.
PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND DRAINS
15417-2
5910861-000
C. Chrome plated piping requiring the use of a wrench shall be protected
from damage.
END OF SECTION 15417
PLUMBING FIXTURES, TRIM AND DRAINS
15417-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDIBG
K>NROE COORTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15420 - SANITARY
AND STORM DRAINAGE
PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
4. Section 15100 - VALVES.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes piping systems for sanitary and storm drainage.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 2, Section 02220 - BUILDING EARTHWORK for trenching and
backfilling materials and methods for underground piping
installations.
2. Division 7, Section 07270 - FlRESTOPPING for materials and
methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls,
and fire and smoke barriers.
3. Division 15, Section 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION for
labeling and identification of hydronic piping system.
4. Division 15, Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION for pipe
insulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
A. Below Ground Floor Slab - Schedule 40 PVC. Above ground floor slab
within building - cast iron soil pattern, service weight, hub and
spigot or no-hub, or Schedule 40 PVC where allowed.
B. Waste arms from urinals shall be galvanized steel with long turn
galvanized drainage fittings.
C. Waste arms from lavatories, sinks and similar fixtures not rece1v1ng
human body wastes shall be copper DWV with soldered copper drainage
fittings.
SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15420-1
5910861-000
D. Female sweat-male thread adapters to tapped inlet fittings for
connection of lavatory waste to system.
2.2 JOINTS
A. Caulked hub and spigot, "no-hub" or Sch. 40 PVC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Drainage p1p1ng 4 inches and larger shall be sloped at a minimum
grade of 1/8 inch per foot, drainage piping 3 inches and smaller
shall be sloped a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot unless noted otherwise
on the drawings or specified herein.
B. Vent piping shall be so graded and connected as to drip back to the
drainage system.
C. Provide traps for each fixture, floor drain, or equipment indicated,
unless detailed or specified otherwise.
D. Make connections to equipment and fixtures indicated on the drawings
or specified herein.
E. Protect each fixture against siphonage.
F. Connect waste arms from urinals to the sanitary system with tapped
inlet fittings.
G. Connect waste arms from lavatories to the sanitary system with female
sweat-male thread adapters to tapped inlet fittings.
H. Install combination wye or combination wye and eight bend where more
than one urinal connects to waste stack at same level.
END OF SECTION 15420
SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
15420-2
,..,;.....,;,"~"'~.....~~',.L",.,..il"'
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERMINAL BUILDIBG
K>NROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15423 - DOMBSTIC
COLD 1IATBR PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
4. Section 15100 - VALVES.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes piping systems for domestic cold water.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 2, Section 02220 - BUILDING EARTHWORK for trenching and
backfilling materials and methods for underground piping
installations.
2. Division 7, Section 07270 - FlRESTOPPING for materials and
methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls,
and fire and smoke barriers.
3. Division 15, Section 15135 ~ METERS AND GAUGES for thermometers,
flow meters and pressure gauges.
4. Division 15, Section 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION for
labeling and identification of piping systems.
5. Division 15, Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION for pipe
insulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING
A. Cold water piping shall be copper water tube hard temper, type ilL"
with wrought solder fittings.
B. Piping below slab or grade shall be Schedule 40 PVC.
2 .2 GATE VALVES
A. Specified in Division 15, Section 15100 - VALVES.
DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING
15423~1
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Notching of pipe for connection not permitted.
B. Where possibility of backflow from the drain to the supply fitting
exists, install vacuum breakers.
C. Not more than one lavatory, sink, shower or similar fixture shall be
supplied by a 1/2-inch branch. Linear dimension not to exceed 10
feet.
D. Make connection to equipment and fixtures indicated on the drawings
or specified herein.
END OF SECTION 15423
DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING
15423-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDIBG
.,RROE COON'l'f', FLORIDA
SECTION 15510 - HYDRONIC
PIPIBG
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
Section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15100 - VALVES.
4. Section 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHQRS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes piping systems for hot water heating, chilled
water cooling, make-up water for these systems and condensate drain
piping. Piping materials and equipment specified in this section
include:
1. Pipes, fittings and specialties.
2. Special duty valves.
3. Hydronic specialties.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 2, Section 02220 - BUILDING EARTHWORK for trenching and
backfilling materials and methods for underground piping
installations.
2. Division 7, Section 07270 - FlRESTOPPING for materials and
methods for sealing pipe penetrations through basement walls,
and fire and smoke barriers.
3. Division 15, Section 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES for thermometers,
flow meters, and pressure gauges. .
4 . Division 15, Section 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION for
labeling and identification of hydronic piping system.
5. Division 15, Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION for pipe
insulation.
6. Division 15, Section 15540 - HVAC PUMPS for pumps, motors, and
accessories for hydronic systems.
7. Division 15, Section 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
for procedures for hydronic systems adjusting and balancing.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-1
5910861-000
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: The hydronic p1p1ng systems are the "water-side" of an
air-and-water or all-water heating and air conditioning system.
Hydronic piping systems specified in this section include 2-pipe,
chilled water piping system and condenser water system. These
systems are classified by ASHRAE as Low Water Temperature, Forced,
Recirculating systems.
B. Two-Pipe System: The 2-pipe system includes independent chilled
water supply and return piping mains in a closed loop, connecting the
chillers to the terminal heat transfe;r units by means of piping
loops.
C. Condenser Water System: This system is an open loop connecting the
chiller to wells. Hot condenser water from the chiller is piped to
heating coils prior to injection.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data, including rated capacities of selected models, weights
(shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties and
accessories, and installation instructions for each hydronic
specialty and special duty valve specified.
1. Furnish flow and pressure drop curves for diverting fittings and
calibrated plug valves, based on manufacturer's testing.
B.
Maintenance Data for hydronic specialties and
for inclusion in operating and maintenance
Division 1 and Division 15, Section 15010
REQUIREMENTS.
special duty valves,
manual specified in
BASIC MECHANICAL
C. Certification of compliance with ASTM and ANSI manufacturing
requirements for pipe, fittings, and specialties.
D. Reports specified in PART 3 of this section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
following:
Comply with the provisions of the
1. ASME B 31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products,
and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear
the appropriate ASME label.
2 . Fabricate and stamp air separators and compression tanks to
comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII,
Division 1.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast
anchor bolt inserts into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork
requirements are specified in Division 3.
B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-2
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering hydronic piping system products which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Grooved Mechanical Joint Pipe, Fittings, and Couplings:
a. Victaulic Company of America.
2. Calibrated Plug Valves:
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
c. Taco, Inc.
3. Pump Discharge Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
d. Taco, Inc.
4. Safety Relief Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
c. Spirax Sarco.
d. Watts Regulator Co.
5. Pressure Reducing Valves:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
d. Taco, Inc.
6. Air Vents:
a. Armstrong Machine Works.
b. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
c. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
d. Spirax Sarco.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-3
5910861-000
7. Air Separators:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
d. Taco, Inc.
8 . Compression Tanks:
a. Amtr61, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
d. Taco, Inc.
9. Pump Suction Diffusers:
a. Amtrol, Inc.
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.
d. Taco, Inc.
e. Victaulic Company of America.
10. Chemical Feeder:
a. Culligan USA.
b. Vulcan Laboratories, Subsidiary of Clow Corp.
c. York-Shipley, Inc.
2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS
A. General: Refer to PART 3 Article PIPE APPLICATIONS for
identification of where the below materials are used.
B. Drawn Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM AS3, Grade B, standard weight, seamless, black
steel pipe, plain ends.
D. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2846, Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) pipe.
2.3 FITTINGS
A. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1. 20.1.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard
pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-4
5910861-000
D. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM AS36, Grade 65-45-12 Ductile Iron;
ASTM A47 Grade 32510 Malleable Iron; ASTM AS3, Type F, or Types E or
S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A106, Grade B steel fittings
with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.
E. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Consist of ductile or malleable iron
housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavi ty
pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking
toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
1. Rigid couplings shall be used except where expansion,
contraction or deflection is needed.
For expansion,
couplings.
F. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.
2.
contraction or deflection, use flexible
G. CPVC Plastic Fittings: ASTMD2846, Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) socket-type fittings and solvent for solvent cemented joints.
H. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges: ANSI B16.1, Class 125; raised ground
face, bolt holes spot faced.
I. Cast Bronze Flanges: ANSI B16.24, Class 150; raised ground face,
bolt holes spot faced.
J. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connection and
facing:
1. Material Group: 1.1.
2. End Connections: Butt welding.
3. Facings: Raised face.
K. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven flexible
bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket; minimum 150 psig working
pressure, maximum 250 degrees F operating temperature. Connectors
shall have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment
connected; and shall be capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
2.4 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, 50-50, Tin-Lead, for chilled water,
and drain piping.
B. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32, 95-5 Tin-Antimony, for heating hot
water and make-up water.
C. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall
thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.
2 .5 GENERAL DUTY VALVES
A. General duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly
valves) are specified in Division 15, Section 15100 VALVES.
Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name; refer
to PART 3 Article VALVE APPLICATION for specific uses and
applications for each valve specified.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-5
5910861-000
2.6 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES
A. Calibrated Plug Valves: 125 psig water working pressure, 250 degrees
F maximum operating temperature, bronze body, plug valve with
calibrated orifice. Provide with connections for portable
differential pressure meter with integral check valves and seals.
Valve shall have integral pointer and calibrated scale to register
degree of valve opening . Valves 2 inches and smaller shall have
threaded connections and 2-1/2-inch valves shall have flanged
connections.
B. Triple Duty Valves: 175 psig working pressure, 300 degrees F maximum
operating temperature, cast-iron body, bronze disc and seat,
stainless steel stem and spring, and "Teflon" packing. Valves shall
have flanged connections and straight or angle pattern as indicated.
Features shall include non-slam check valve with spring-loaded
weighted disc, and calibrated adjustment feature to permit regulation
of pump discharge flow and shutoff. Provide with connections for
portable differential pressure meter with integral check valves and
seals.
C. Pressure Reducing Valves: Diaphragm operated, cast - iron or brass
body valve, wi th low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer
removable without system Shut-down, and noncorrosive valve seat and
stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit
system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have
the capability for field adjustment.
D. Safety Relief Valves: 125 psig working pressure and 250 degrees F
maximum operating temperature; designed, manufactured, tested, and
labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with
all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber. Select
valve to suit actual system pressure and Btu capacity.
2.7 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES
Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts;
working pressure, 225 degrees F operating temperature;
operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; and having
discharge connection and 1/2-inch inlet connection.
B. Compression Tanks: Size and number as indicated; construct of welded
carbon steel for 125 psig working pressure, 375 degrees F maximum
operating temperature. Provide taps in bottom of tank for tank
fitting; taps in end of tank for gauge glass. Tank with taps
constructed shall be tested and labeled in accordance with ASME
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Diyision 1. Furnish with the
following fittings and accessories:
A.
150 psig
manually
1/8-inch
1. Air Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube,
brass vent tube plug, and stainless steel ball check (100-gallon
unit only); sized for compression tank diameter. Design tank
fittings for 125 psig working pressure and 250 degrees F maximum
operating temperature.
2. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125
psig working pressure and 240 degrees F maximum operating
temperature. Fitting shall be designed to admit air to the
compression tank and drain water, plus close off the system.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-6
5910861-000
3. Gauge Glass: Full height and have dual manual shutoff valves,
3/4-inch diameter gauge glass, and slotted metal glass guard.
C. Air Separator: Welded black steel; ASME constructed and labeled for
m1n1mum 125 psig water working pressure and 375 F operating
temperature; perforated stainless steel air collector tube designed
to direct released air into compression tank; tangential inlet and
outlet connections; screwed connections up to and including 2-inch
NPS; flanged connections for 2-1/2-inch NPS and above; threaded
blowdown connection; sized as indicated for full system flow
capacity.
D. Pump Suction Diffusers: Cast-iron body, with threaded connections
for 2 inches and smaller, flanged connections for 2-1/2 inches and
larger; 175 psig working pressure, 300 degrees F maximum operating
temperature; and complete with the following features:
1. Inlet vanes with length 2-1/2 times pump suction diameter or
greater.
2. Cylinder strainer with 3/16-inch diameter openings with total
free area equal to or greater than five times cross-sectional
area of pump suction, designed to withstand pressure
differential equal to pump shutoff head.
3. Disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer.
4. Adjustable foot support, designed to carry weight of suction
piping.
5. Blowdown tapping in bottom; gauge tapping in side.
E. Chemical Feeder: Bypass type chemical feeders of 5-gallon capacity,
welded steel construction; 125 psig working pressure; complete with
fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
1. Chemicals shall be specially formulated to prevent accumulation
of scale and corrosion in piping system and connected equipment,
developed based on a water analys~s of make-up water.
F. Differential Pre.ssure Meters: Provide portable differential pressure
meters for use with calibrated plug valves and triple-duty valves.
Range shall be 0 to 35 feet with an accuracy of +/- 1 percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPE APPLICATIONS
A. Install steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inches and
smaller, and with welded joints for 2-1/2 inches and larger for
chilled water piping systems.
B. Contractor's option to install steel pipe with grooved mechanical
couplings and fittings for chilled water piping systems.
C. Install CPVC plastic pipe with solvent cemented joints for condenser
water piping systems.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-7
5910861-000
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A. Install p1p1ng in accordance with the requirements of Division 15,
Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
B. Install piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch in 40 feet upward in the
direction of flqw.
C. Make reductions in horizontal pipes using eccentric reducer fittings
installed with the level side up.
D. Install branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with
take-off out the top of the main.
E. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and
contraction.
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in
Division 15, Section 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS. Conform to the
table below for maximum spacing of supports:
B. Install the following pipe attachments:
1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs
less than 20 feet in length.
2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual
horizontal runs 20 feet or longer.
3. Pipe roller complete - MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs,
20 feet or longer, supported on a 'trapeze.
4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
C. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum
spacing:
Nom.
Pipe Max. Min. Rod
Size Soan-Ft. Size-Inches
1 7 3/8
1-1/2 9 3/8
2 10 3/8
3 12 1/2
3-1/2 13 1/2
4 14 5/8
5 16 5/8
6 17 3/4
8 19 7/8
10 22 7/8
12 23 7/8
D. Support vertical runs at each floor.
E. CPVC pipe support spacing shall be as recommended by pipe
manufacturer.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-8
5910861-000
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS
"Soldering Manual."
B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for
field cut threads. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends,
and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far
pipe should be threaded into joint.
2. Align threads at point of assembly.
3 . Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe
threads (except where dry seal threading is specified).
4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the
valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.
a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are
corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or
threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be
used.
C. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirement in ASME Code B31. 9 -
"Building Services Piping."
D. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by
sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and
gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on
bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly using torque
wrench.
E. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints in accordance with fitting
manufacturers written instructions.
F. CPVC Joints: Prepare surfaces to be solvent cemented by wiping with
a clean cloth moistened with acetone or methyl ethyl key tone.
Solvent cement joints in accordance with ASTM D2846.
3.5 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. General Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types
to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated the
following requirements apply:
1. Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball, or butterfly valves.
2. Install shut-off duty valves at each branch connection to supply
mains, at supply connection to each piece of equipment, and
elsewhere as indicated. .
B. Install calibrated plug valves on the outlet of each heating or
cooling element and elsewhere as required to facilitate system
balancing.
C. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines,
and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
D. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required
to control flow direction.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-9
5910861-000
3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install manual air vents at high points in the system, at heat
transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.
B. Install inline air separators in pump suction lines. Run piping to
compression tank with 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) upward slope
towards tank. Install drain valve on units 2 inches and larger.
C. Install pump suction diffusers on pump suction inlet, adjust foot
support to carry weight of suction piping. Install nipple and ball
valve in blowdown connection.
D. Install triple-duty valves in horizontal or vertical position with
stem in upward position. Allow clearance above stem for check
mechanism removal.
E. Install shot-type chemical feeders in each hydronic system where
indicated; in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48
inches above floor. Install feeder in bypass line, off main using
globe valves on each side of feeder and in the main between bypass
connections. Pipe drain, with ball valve, to nearest equipment
drain.
F. Install compression tanks above air separator. Install gauge glass
and cocks on end of tank. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and
charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper
water level in tank.
1. Support tank from the floor or structure above sufficient for
the weight of the tank, piping connections, and fittings, plus
weight of water assuming a full tank of water. Do not overload
building components and structural members.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preparation for testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with
ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for
examination during the test.
2. Provide temporary restraints for e~ansion joints which cannot
sustain the reactions due to test pressure. If temporary
restraints. are not practical, isolate expansion joints from
testing.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test
pressure from the piping. If a valve is used to isolate the
equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the
test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at
which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be
tested.
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher
than the test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion
of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-10
. '.."....,..............i~. f .. --..i!l1I"f<j.',~,""",.".,,,,,.,,,,,,,.,
5910861-000
B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:
1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except
where there is a risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid
may be used if it is safe for workmen and compatible with the
piping system components.
2. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release
trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at
low points for complete removal of the that liquid.
3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot
withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test
equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low pressure
filling lines are disconnected.
4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at
every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design
pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum
pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the
system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due
to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed
either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7
times the "SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9,. Code For
Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.
5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at
least ten minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for
leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until
there are no leaks.
3.8 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean and flush hydronic p1p1ng systems, Remove, clean, and replace
strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping
system, but before balancing, remove disposable fine mesh strainers
in pump suction diffusers.
B. Mark calibrated name plates of pump discharge valves after hydronic
system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final
balanced position.
C. Chemical Treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by the
chemical treatment supplier to determine the type and level of
chemicals required for prevention of scale and corrosion. Perform
initial treatment after completion of system testing.
3.9 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.
B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air or water
bound and that the system is completely full of water.
C. Before operating the system perform these steps:
1. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves.
2. Clean strainers.
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-11
5910861-000
3. Check pump for proper rotation and if it is not right, correct
improper wiring of motor.
4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.
5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all
are installed and operating freely (automatic type) or to bleed
air completely (manual type) .
6. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
7 . Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
8. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers and chillers to
design requirements.
9. Lubricate motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 15510
HYDRONIC PIPING
15510-12
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRIIIRAL BUILDIBG
.,RROE COONTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15540 - HVAC PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of HVAC pumps:
1. In-line pumps.
2. Base-mounted, close-coupled, end-suction pumps.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1 . Division 15, Section 15135 - METERS AND GAUGES for temperature
and pressure gauges and connectors.
2. Division 15, Section 15241 - VIBRATION CONTROL for inertia
pads, isolation pads, spring supports, and spring hangers.
3 . Division 15, Section 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING for suction
diffusers and triple-duty valves.
4. Division 16, Section 16482 - MOTORS for motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1, Section
01300 - SUBMITTALS.
B. Product data including certified performance curves of selected
models indicating selected pump's operating point, weights
(shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, and
accessories. Where pumps are to operate in parallel, performance
curves shall show single and parallel operating points.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and connections for HVAC pumps.
Include setting drawings with templates, and directions for
installation of foundation bolts and other anchorages.
D. Maintenance data for HVAC pumps for inclusion in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
HVAC PUMPS
15540-1
5910861-000
E. Service Contract: Provide a 5-year service contract including all
travel and labor by a factory-authorized service organization
located within 100 miles of the project site.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Hydraulic Institute Compliance: Design, manufacture, and install
HVAC pumps in accordance with "Hydraulic Institute Standards."
B. NEC Compliance: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 NEC.
C. NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components that are
listed and labeled by NEMA.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store pumps in a dry location.
B. Provide flange protective covers and protective coatings during
shipping and storage.
C. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and
other foreign matter.
D. For storage times greater than five days, dry internal parts with
hot air or a vacuum-producing device to avoid rusting internal
parts. Upon drying, coat internal parts with a protective liquid,
such as light oil, kerosene, or antifreeze. Dismantle bearings and
couplings, dry and coat them with an acid-free heavy oil, and then
tag and store in dry location.
E. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging instructions for handling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Line Shaft Turbine Pump:
a. "Series 7000," Fairbanks Morse.
b. peabody.
c. Layne & Bowler.
2. Base-Mounted, Close-Coupled, End-Suction Pumps:
a. "Series 4280," Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
b. "360 Series," Aurora Pumps.
c. "Series 1531," Bell & Gossett ITT.
2.2 PUMPS, GENERAL
A. Pumps: Factory-assembled and factory-tested. Fabricate casings to
allow removal and replacement of impellers without necessity of
HVAC PUMPS
15540-2
5910861-000
disconnecting piping.
indicated.
Type, sizes, and capacities shall be as
B. Preparation for Shipping: After assembly and testing, clean flanges
and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with an anticorrosion
compound. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles.
C. Apply factory finish paint to assembled, tested units prior to
shipping.
D. Pumps shall be selected at or near maximum efficiency and shall not
utilize the smallest or largest impeller available.
2.3 LINE SHAFT TURBINE PUMP
A. General Description: Pump shall be 2-stage, open lineshaft
vertical-turbine type with materials suitable for seawater.
B. Thrust bearing shall be designed to carry the weight of all rotating
parts plus pump thrust with a safety factor based on a 5-year life
expectancy at 24 hours per day continuous operation.
C. Motor shall be vertical hollowshaft, high-efficiency squirrel-cage
induction type with nonreversing ratchet and shall be totally
enclosed, fan cooled, with Class B insulation rated for 40 degrees
C rise with 1.15 service factor.
D. Discharge head shall be ASTM A48 CL30(2} cast iron with ANSI B16.1,
Class 125 flanged, above base piping connection. Water passage
shall be epoxy coated.
E. Impeller Construction: Statically and DYnamically balanced,
enclosed type, zincless bronze conforming to ASTM C927, locked to
shaft with a tapered lock bushing.
F. Pump Shaft and Sleeve: 316 stainless steel shaft with stainless
steel top shaft sleeve and lineshaft sleeve.
G. Bowl Assembly: Pump bowls and strainer shall be zincless bronze
conforming to ASTM C927. Trim shall be zincless bronze and 316
stainless steel.
H. Discharge Column Assembly: Total length of column shall be 15 feet.
Column pipe shall be 6-inch diameter. Column shall be 316 stainless
steel with flanged connections. Bearings shall be water lubricated
neoprene with 316 stainless steel retainers.
I.
Upper Shaft Seal: Packed type
without removal of the motor.
cast iron with zincless bronze
to ASTM C937.
accessible from above discharge head
Packing box shall be ASTM A48 CL30
bushing and packing gland conforming
2.4 BASE-MOUNTED, CLOSE-COUPLED, END-SUCTION PUMPS
A. General Description: Pumps shall be base-mounted, centrifugal,
close-coupled, end-suction, single-stage, bronze-fitted, radially
split case design, with mechanical seals and rated for 175 psig
working pressure and 225 degrees F continuous water temperature.
B. Casings Construction: Cast iron, with ANSI B16.1, Class 125, flanged
piping connections, and threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet
connections.
HVAC PUMPS
15540-3
5910861-000
C. Impeller Construction: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed,
overhung, single-suction, cast bronze conforming toASTM B584, keyed
to shaft and secured by a locking capscrew.
D. Pump Shaft and Sleeve Bearings: Steel shaft, with bronze sleeve.
Provide slinger on motor shaft between motor and seals to prevent
liquid that leaks past pump seals from entering the motor bearings.
E. Seals: Mechanical seals internally or externally flushed consisting
of carbon rotating ring, stainless steel spring, ceramic or Ni-
resist seat, flexible bellows and nonasbestos gasket.
F. Motor: Direct-mounted to the pump casing with supporting legs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas, equipment foundations, and conditions, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of HVAC pumps.
B. Examine rough-in for piping systems to verify actual locati~ns of
piping connections prior to installation.
C. Examine equipment foundations and inertia bases for suitable
conditions where pumps are to be installed.
D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the manufacturer's written installation and
alignment instructions.
B.
Install pumps in locations and arranged to provide
periodic maintenance, including removal of motors,
couplings, and accessories.
access for
impellers,
C. Support pumps and piping separately so that the weight of the piping
system does not rest on the pump.
D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation.
1. Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims,
or on metal wedges having a small taper, at points near the
foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches
between the pump base and the foundation for grouting.
2.
Adjust the metal supports or
pump and driver are level.
suction and discharge flanges
are level and plumb.
wedges until the shafts of the
Check the coupling faces and
of the pump to verify that they
3 .3 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on
foundations, after grout has been set and foundations bolts have
been tightened, and after piping connections have been made.
HVAC PUMPS
15540-4
5910861-000
1.
Adjust alignment of pump and motor shafts for angular
parallel alignment by one of the two methods specified in
Hydraulic Institute "Centrifugal Pumps--Instructions
Installation, Operation and Maintenance."
and
the
for
B. After alignment is correct, tighten the foundation bolts evenly, but
not too firmly. Fill the base plate completely with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or wedges in place.
After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
1. Alignment tolerances shall meet manufacturers recommendations.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Install valves that are same size as the piping connecting
the pump.
B. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than
the diameter of the pump nozzles.
C. Install a triple-duty valve on the discharge side of all pumps.
D. Install a pump suction diffuser and butterfly valve on the suction
side of base-mounted, end-suction pumps.
E. Install flexible connectors on the suction and discharge side of
each base-mounted pump. Install flexible connectors between the
pump casing and the discharge valves, and upstream from the pump
suction diffuser.
F. Install pressure gauges on the suction and discharge of each pump at
the integral pressure gauge tappings provided.
G. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 16.
H. Control wiring and connections are specified in other Division 15
sections.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Check suction line connections for tightness to avoid drawing air
into the pump.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following preventative
maintenance operations and checks before start-up:
1. Lubricate oil-lubricated bearings.
2 . Check motor for proper rotation. Rotation shall match
direction of rotation marked on pump casing.
3. Check that pump is free to rotate by hand. For pumps handling
hot liquids, pump shall be free to rotate with the pump hot
and cold. If the pump is bound or even drags slightly, do not
operate the pump until the cause of the trouble is determined
and corrected.
B. Starting procedure for pumps with shutoff power not exceeding the
safe motor power:
HVAC PUMPS
15540-5
5910861-000
1. Prime the pump, opening the suction valve, closing the drains,
and prepare the pump for operation.
2. Start the motor.
3. Open the discharge valve slowly.
4. Check the general mechanical operation of the pump and motor.
C. Refer to Division 15, Section 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND
BALANCING for detailed requirements for testing, adjusting, and
balancing hydronic systems.
END OF SECTION 15540
HVAC PUMPS
15540-6
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDIBG
.,RROE CUUJll".L.t', FLORIDA
SECTION 15683 - RECIPROCATING
CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
Section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
3. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of reciprocating chiller work required by this section is
indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this
section.
B. Types of reciprocating chillers specified in this section include the
following:
1. Water cooled.
C. Refer to other Division 15 sections for field-installed automatic
temperature controls required in conjunction with reciprocating
chillers.
D. Refer to Division 16 sections for other electrical wiring work
including wires/cables, raceways, and required electrical devices.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in
reciprocating chillers, of types and capacities
products have been in satisfactory use in similar
less than five years.
manufacture of
required, whose
service for not
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain reciprocating chillers from a
single manufacturer.
C. ARI Compliance: Test and rate reciprocating chillers in accordance
with ARI Standard 590, "Standard for Reciprocating Water-Chilling
Packages."
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install reciprocating chillers in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical
Refrigeration."
E. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable NEC requirements pertaining
to electrical power and control wiring for construction and
installation of reciprocating chillers.
RECIPROCATING CHILLERS
15683-1
5910861-000
F. ASME Compliance: Construct and test reciprocating air-cooled liquid
chiller in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,
Section 8.
1. Certify successful testing in accordance with ASME Code.
Pressure test cooler for refrigerant working side pressure of
not less than 235 psig, and water side pressure of not less than
150 psig. Leak test cooled condenser coils at 150 psig and
pressure test coils at 450 psig.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,
including rated capacities for chillers indicated, weights (shipping,
installed, and operating), furnished specialties and accessories; and
rigging, installation, and start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings
indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, methods
of assembly of components, and location and size of each
field-connection.
C. Provide templates for anchor bolt placement in concrete pad.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for
power supply wiring to units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type
wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly
differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed
and portions to be field-installed. Provide in table form a list of
field-installed devices showing the device, wire size, amps and
breaker size.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each
reciprocating chiller, control, and accessory; including "trouble-
shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and product data in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
F. Warranty: Provide 4-year, extended warranty for compressors.
G. Service Contract: Provide a 5-year service contract including all
travel and labor by a factory-authorized service organization located
within 100 miles of the project site.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle reciprocating chillers and components properly to prevent
damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged
reciprocating chillers or components; replace with new. Comply with
manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading
reciprocating chillers, and transporting them to final location.
B. Store reciprocating chiller and components in clean dry space.
Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and
physical damage. Storage temperatures for unit controls are not to
exceed 100 degrees F.
C. Provide flange covers and protective coatings during shipping and
storage.
RECIPROCATING CHILLERS
15683-2
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER-COOLED RECIPROCATING CHILLERS
A. General: Provide factory-assembled and tested reciprocating liquid
chillers as indicated, consisting of compressors, evaporator,
condensers, expansion valves, and control panels. Provide capacity
and electrical characteristics as scheduled.
B. Refrigerant: Provide full operating charge of refrigerant and oil.
C. Evaporator: Provide shell-and-tube design with seamless copper tubes
roller expanded into tube sheets. Provide one water pass with series
of internal baffles. Insulate with 1/2 - inch minimum flexible
unicellular insulation with maximum K-value of 0.28. Provide water
drain connection and bulb wells for temperature controller and
low-temperature cutout.
1.
Multiple-Compressor Units:
refrigerant circuits.
Provide independent multiple
D. Condenser: Provide shell and tube design with seamless integral-fin
90/10 copper/nickel tubes expanded into data-clad tube sheets with
tubes mechanically cleanable and replaceable through removaple tarset
coated headers. Provide safety relief valve with pressure rating not
to exceed condenser shell side working pressure. Provide integral
subcooler circuit.
1.
Multiple-Compressor Units:
refrigerant circuits.
Provide independent multiple
2. Anodes: Provide replaceable zinc anodes inside each condenser
head.
E.
Compressors: Provide direct drive 1750
multicylinder reciprocating compressors
semi-hermetic, but with minimum steps
scheduled, provided by cylinder unloading
combination of both. Mount compressors
isolators within chiller housing.
1. Lubrication: Provide oil pump, oil filter, oil level sight
glass, and oil charging valve.
rpm, field serviceable,
with crankcase heater;
of capacity control as
or compressor staging, or
on spring- type vibration
2. Provide compressors with extended 4-year warranty.
F.
Refrigerant Circuit:
following:
Provide for each refrigerant circuit the
1. Liquid line solenoid valve.
2. Filter dryer with isolation valves.
3. Liquid line sight glass.
4. Expansion valve (thermal or electronic).
5. Insulated suction line.
6. Suction and discharge service valves.
7. 1/4-inch flare charging port.
RECIPROCATING CHILLERS
15683-3
5910861-000
G. Microcomputer Control Center:
1. All logic and controls shall be contained within a NEMA 1
cabinet with hinged outer door with positive acting latches.
2. The unit controls shall include the following components:
a. Microprocessor.
b. Unit on/off switch.
c. Display.
3. The microcomputer controls shall be capable of performing the
following safety and control functions.
a. Low liquid temperature cut out.
b. Low suction pressure cut out.
c. High discharge pressure cut out.
d. Low oil pressure cut out.
e. Antirecycle timer.
f. Unloading steps.
g. Limit the chilled water pull down rate at start-up to 1
degree F per minute.
h. Reset leaving chilled water temperature.
i. Demand limit control.
j. Leaving chilled water temperature control.
4. The display function shall include:
a. Return and leaving chilled water temperature.
b. Status of hot gas bypass valves.
c. Compressor run status.
d. Liquid solenoid valve status.
e. Each system suction pressure, discharge pressure, oil
pressure and percent full load current.
f. All set points.
g. Time of day.
5. Remote control interface with the building control system for
start/stop.
H. Accessories: Provide the following accessories:
1. Load limit thermostat, if required.
RECIPROCATING CHILLERS
15683-4
5910861-000
2. Vapor-proof condenser and chilled water differential pressure
switch.
3. Single point power connection.
4. Separate power connection for controls.
5. Hot gas bypass valve and piping.
I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering reciprocating chillers which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. McQuay Air Conditioning Div.; Snyder General Corporation.
2. Carrier Corp.
3. York International Corp.
4. Trane Company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Manufacturer's representative must examine areas and conditions under
which reciprocating chillers are to be installed and notify
Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion
of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
manufacturer's representative.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF RECIPROCATING CHILLERS
A. General: Install reciprocating chillers in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install units plumb and level,
firmly anchored in locations indicated; maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
B. Support: Install on reinforced concrete pad. Furnish anchor bolts
which are to be inserted in concrete pad.
C. Water Piping: Refer to Division 15, Section 15510 - HYDRONIC PIPING.
D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by
manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with
manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of
Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up
until wiring installation is acceptable to manufacturer.
E. Relief Piping: Provide ASTMAS3 steel relief piping from refrigerant
pressure relief rupture disc on chiller to atmosphere. Size piping
as recommended by chiller manufacturer and terminate with 90-degree
elbow facing down.
F. Control: Furnish field- installed automatic temperature control
devices to Control Installer.
RECIPROCATING CHILLERS
15683-5
5910861-000
G. Provide services of manufacturer's factory-trained service
representati ve to start -up reciprocating chillers. Include in
start-up procedures, testing and calibration of controls,
demonstration of compliance with requirements, and replacement of
damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.3 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for one,
8-hour day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance
of reciprocating chillers.
1. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to
Contractor and Engineer of training date.
END OF SECTION 15683
RECIPROCATING CHILLERS
15683-6
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRKIRAL BUILDING
K>NROE COCNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15830 - TERMINAL
UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1S10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B. Requirements of. the following Division 15 sections apply to this
Section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of terminal unit work is indicated by drawings and schedules,
and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:
1. Reheat Coils.
C. Refer to other Division 15 sections for piping; ductwork; and
testing, adjusting and balancing of terminal units.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in
manufacture of terminal units, of types and sizes required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 3 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. ARI Compliance: Provide coil ratings in accordance with ARI
Standard 410 "Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating
Coils" .
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 33 "Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling
and Heating Coils".
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
units showing
characteristics,
instructions.
Submit manufacturer's specifications for terminal
dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance
gauges and finishes of materials, and installation
B. Shop Drawings: Submi t assembly- type shop drawings showing uni t
dimensions, construction details, and field connection details.
C.
Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions.
data, product data, shop drawings in maintenance
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
Incl ude thi s
manuals; in
TERMINAL UNITS
15830-1
5910861-000
1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage,
breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged terminal units
or components; replace with new.
B.
Store terminal units and components in clean dry place.
weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris,
damage.
Protect from
and physical
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for
unloading terminal units, and moving them to final location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COILS
A. General: Provide coils of size and in location indicated, and of
capacities and having performance data as schedule. Certify coil
capacities, pressure drops, and selection procedures in accordance
with ARI 410.
B. Heating Coils:
1. Fins: Construct of continuous aluminum or copper configuration
plate-fin type with full fin collars for accurate spacing and
maximum fin-tube contact.
2. Tubes: Construct of 90/10 copper/nickel tubing, expanded into
fin collars for permanent fin-tube bond and expanded into header
for permanent leaktight joint.
3. Headers: Construct of tarset - coated gray cast iron.
Hydrostatically test to 400 psi before assembly.
4. Casings: Construct of 16-gauge continuous coated galvanized
steel with fins recessed into channels to minimize air bypass.
5. Testing: Proof test coils at 300 psi, leak test at 200 psi
underwater.
6. Coil Type: Provide the following coil type as indicated, and
as scheduled.
a. Condenser Water at 225 psi, 325 degrees F: Provide coil
sizes and capacities as scheduled with 5/8-inch tubes,
single-tube continuous circuit, same-end connection coil.
Roll connection tube.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering coils which may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carrier Corp.
2 . McQuay, Inc.
3. York International Corp.
4 . The Trane Company.
TERMINAL UNITS
15830-2
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF COILS
A. General: Install coils as indicated, and in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Mount coils on steel supports to form banks or stacks as indicated,
brace, secure to air intake chamber. Provide steel baffles where
required to prevent bypassing of air.
C. pitch coil casings for drainage, not less than 1/8 inch toward return
connections, except where drainage feature is included in coil
design.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean
unit exposed surfaces, vacuum clean terminal coils.
END OF SECTION 15830
TERMINAL UNITS
15830-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDIBG
.,RROE COONTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15850 - BXHAIJST FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Division 15, Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND
METHODS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes the following types of exhaust fans:
1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.
2. propeller fans.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate ~o this section:
1. Division 15, Section 15241 - VIBRATION CONTROL for vibration
hangers and supports.
2. Division 15, Section 15854 - CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS
for package units that include fans.
3.
Division 15, Section 15971
electric control devices.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS for
4.
Division 15, Section 15973
pneumatic control devices.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM for
5. Division 15, Section 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
for air-handling systems testing, adjusting, and balancing
requirements and procedures.
6. Division 16, Section 16441 - SAFETY SWITCHES for disconnect
switches.
7.
Division 16, Section 16480
CONTROLLERS for motor starters.
INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED MOTOR
8. Division 16, Section 16482 - MOTORS for motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections:
EXHAUST FANS
15850-1
5910861-000
1. Product data for selected models, including specialties,
accessories, and the following:
a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating
conditions indicated.
b. Certified fan sound power ratings.
c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor
and fan accessories.
d. Materials gauges and finishes, including color charts.
e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
2. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies
and indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances,
components, and location and size of field connections.
3. Maintenance data for air-handling units, for inclusion in
Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and
Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL Compliance: Fans shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in
accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators."
B. UL Compliance: Fans and components shall be UL listed and labeled.
C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with
NEMA standards.
D. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall
comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or
supporting points.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the
final location following manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable
by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish 1 additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.
EXHAUST FANS
15850-2
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work
include but are not limited to, the following:
1. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp.
2. Cook (Loren) Co.
3. Greenheck Fan Corp.
4. Penn Ventilator Co.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301
"Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test
Data." Test fans in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code
for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bea:r: the AMCA
Certified Sound Ratings Seal.
2 . Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power,
air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests
and ratings in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAB Standard
51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
2.3 FANS, GENERAL
A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled,
factory tested, and factory finished, with indicated capacities and
characteristics.
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed
for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower.
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and' polished steel designed to
operate at no more than 70 percent of the first critical speed
at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.
C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt
adjustment made after installation.
1. Service Factor: 1.4.
D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic.
E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors
through 15 hp; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 hp.
Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of the
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on
the outside of the fan cabinet.
F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating
Life" (AFBMA (L50}) of 200,000, calculated in accordance with AFBMA
EXHAUST FANS
15850-3
5910861-000
Standard 9 for ball bearings and AFBMA Standard 11 for roller
bearings.
G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly.
2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
2.4 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A. General Description: Centrifugal fan designed for installation in
ceiling and inline applications as indicated.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft fan
shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Grille: Aluminum eggcrate grille with flange on intake and
thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.
E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on
housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.
F. Fan Speed Control: Solid state, capable of controlling fan speed
from full speed to approximately half speed shall be mounted on fan
housing.
G. Accessories: Installation kit for inl ine application. Provide
factory-mounted, single-pole, single-throw, toggle-type disconnect
switch.
2.5 PROPELLER FANS
A. General Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans as
indicated consisting of fan blades, hub, housing, orifice ring,
motor, drive, and accessories.
B. Housings: Galvanized, sheet steel with flanged edges, and integral
orifice ring.
C. Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to a heavy-gauge steel spider
bolted to cast-iron hub.
D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to
cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
E. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened
to cast-aluminum hub. Factory set pitch angle of blades.
F. Drive Assembly: Direct-drive or belt-driven as indicated.
G. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with
the following features:
1. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed,
self-aligning ball bearings.
EXHAUST FANS
15850-4
5910861-000
3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed
to wheel hub.
4. Motor and Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing.
H. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:
1. Belt Guards: Expanded metal with reinforced edges OSHA-approved
inlet guard.
2. Gravity Shutters: Gravity-type shutters with aluminum blades
in steel frames, mounted on discharge side of fan.
2.6 MOTORS
A. Provide fans with motors in accordance with Division 16 requirements.
B.
Starters, Electrical Devices, and Wiring:
connections are specified in Division 16.
Electrical devices and
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of fans.
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions. Support units as described below, using the
vibration control devices indicated. vibration control devices are
specified in Division 15, Section 15241 - VIBRATION CONTROL.
1. Suspended Units: Suspend ceiling and inline units from
structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and
vibration isolation springs.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around
air-handling units for service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15
sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.
B. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:
1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16.
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified
in Division 15, Section 15971 - ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS.
3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with
the NEC.
EXHAUST FANS
15850-5
5910861-000
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a
factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:
1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of
fans including ductwork and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective
actions.
3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and
construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and
checks before start-up:
1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing.
2.
Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices
that connections for piping, ductwork, and electrical
complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection
installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
and
are
is
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation
direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth
bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts,
and install belt guards.
5. Verify automatic dampers in connected ductwork systems are in
the full-open position.
6. Disable automatic temperature control operators.
B. Starting procedures for fans:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system,
and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and
amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15, Section 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING for procedures for air-handling-system testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized
service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel on the
following:
EXHAUST FANS
15850-6
5910861-000
1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown,
troubleshooting, servicing, preventative maintenance, and how
to obtain replacement parts.
2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance
Manuals specified in Division 1, Section 01700 PROJECT
CLOSEOUT and Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS.
B. Schedule training with at least 7 days advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15850
EXHAUST FANS
15850-7
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGBR TERMINAL BUILDIBG
.,NROE COORTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15854 - CENTRAL-STATION
AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes constant-volume, central-station air handling
units with coils for indoor installations.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 1, Section 01030 - ALTERNATES for alternate filters and
housings to be included as an integral part of the central-
station, air handling units specified in this section.
2 . Division 15, Section 15241 - VIBRATION CONTROLS for inertia
bases, isolation pads, and vibration isolation hangers and
supports.
3. Division 15, Section 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION for
field-applied equipment insulation.
4. Division 15, Section 15885 - AIR CLEANING for filters and
housings not an integral part of the central-station air
handling units specified in this section.
5. Division 16, Section 16482 - MOTORS for motors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 specification sections.
1. Product data for each central-station air handling unit
indicated, including the following:
a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating
conditions indicated.
b. Certified fan sound power ratings.
c.
Certified
pressure
indicated.
coil performance ratings and flow versus
curves with system operating conditions
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
15854-1
5910861-000
d. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor
and fan accessories.
e. Materials gauges and finishes.
f. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
2. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing dimensions, required
clearances, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
3. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and controls and
differentiating between manufacturer- installed wiring and field-
installed wiring.
4. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of central-station
air handling units certifying that their products comply with
specified requirements.
5. Field quality control test reports specified in PART 3 of this
section.
6. Maintenance data for central-station air handling units for
inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1 and Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air handling units and components
shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA
Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems."
B. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL):
Electric coils, along with the complete central-station air handling
unit shall be listed and labeled by a NRTL. The term "NRTL" shall be
as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
C. ARI Certification: Central-station air handling units and their
components shall be factory tested in accordance with the applicable
portions of ARI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air Handling Units
and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air Conditioning and
Refrigeration Institute.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or
supporting points.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the
final location following manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Deliver central-station air handling units as a factory-assembled
unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective
crating and covering.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each central-
station air handling unit.
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
15854-2
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Carrier Corp.
2. McQuay Air Conditioning.
3 . Trane Company.
4. York International Corp.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
General Description:
and drive assembly,
dampers.
Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor
coils, damper, plenums, drip pans, and mixing
B. Types: Central-station air handling units included in this project
are of the following type:
1. Draw-through.
C. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Division 16.
2.3 CABINET
A. Materials: Formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels, fabricated
to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with
joints between sections sealed.
1. Medium- and high-pressure units shall be constructed with
additional bracing and supports. Units rated at 5.5 inches w.g.
and higher shall connected to accessories sections with double-
thickness neoprene-coated flexible connection.
B.
Insulation: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"
insulation.
the
for
1. Type: Coated, glass-fiber insulation, 1-inch thick and having
a minimum density of 1-1/2 pcf.
2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and
mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of section panels
downstream from and including the cooling coil section.
C. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and
complete with hinges, latches, handles, and gaskets.
1. Each air-handling unit section shall have hinged access doors
sized and located to allow periodic maintenance and inspections.
D. Double-Wall Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized sheet steel.
Fabricate pans in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling
coils (including coil piping connections and return bends). Fill
space between double-wal+ construction with foam insulation and seal
moisture-tight.
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
15854-3
5910861-000
1. Drain Connections: Both ends of the pan.
2. Pan Top Surface Coating: Elastomeric compound.
3. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan
or a drain trough to collect condensate from top coil.
2.4 FANS SECTION
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
1. General: Sound power level ratings shall comply with AMCA
Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From
Laboratory Test Data" and shall be the result of tests made in
accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating. 11
Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings
Seal.
2. Unit's fans performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power,
air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency shall be factory
tested and ratings established in accordance with AMCA Standard
210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for
Rating.
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed
for continuous operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor
horsepower. Fan wheel shall be double-width, double-inlet type with
airfoil section blades as indicated. Airfoil wheels shall be steel
painted with zinc chromate primer and an enamel finish coat. Fan
shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, and polished. Fan wheels
shall be keyed to the shaft.
C. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings selected for 200,000
hours' average life, with grease fittings extended to an accessible
location outside the fan section.
D. Fan Drives: Designed for a 1.4 service factor and factory mounted
with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.
1. Belt Drive: Motors and fan wheel pulleys shall be adjustable
pitch for use with motors up to and including 15 hp and fixed
pitch for use with motors larger than 15 hp.
2. Motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet shall have
steel belt guards.
E. Inlet Vanes: Factory installed on both intakes of fan wheel with
pneumatic actuator control.
2.5 COILS
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:
1. Coil Performance Tests: Cooling coils, except sprayed surface
coils, shall be factory tested for rating in accordance with ARI
410 Standard for Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling and
Air-Heating Coils.
B. Coil Sections: Common or individual insulated, galvanized steel
casings for heating and cooling coils. Coil section shall be
designed and constructed to facilitate removal of coil for
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
15854-4
5910861-000
maintenance and replacement and to assure full air flow through
coils.
1. Medium- and high-pressure units shall have double gaskets
between sections and coil connection penetrations through casing
sealed to minimize leakage.
C. Coils, General: Drainable, rigidly supported across the full face of
the coil, and pitched to allow drainage.
1. Fins: Aluminum or copper, constructed from flat plate with
belled collars for tubes. Fins shall be bonded to tubes by
mechanically expanding copper tubes.
2. Tubes: Seamless copper.
3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel.
4. Headers for Water Coils: Steel or cast iron, with connections
for drain valve and air vent and threaded piping connections.
D. Electric Resistance Coils: Open-wire, 80 percent nickel, 20 percent
chromium. Elements shall be uniformly distributed over cross-
sectional area of unit with vertical support brackets to prevent coil
element sag. Coil elements shall be insulated with ceramic bushings
and supported in an aluminized or galvanized steel frame.
1. Control Panel: NEMA 1 enclosure t complete with thermal cutouts,
primary and secondary controls, backup contactors, subcircuit
fusing, airflow switch and a fused control transformer.
2. Controls shall include integral primary automatic and secondary
manual reset thermal protection devices and static-pressure-type
airflow switches to prevent energizing coil when airflow is
inadequate.
2.6 FILTERS SECTION
A. Air Filters: Refer to Division 15, Section 15885 - AIR CLEANING for
air filters required for air handling units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with installer present, for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and
other conditions affecting performance of central-station air
handling units.
B.
Examine rough-in for
electrical to verify
installation.
hydronic, condensate
actual locations of
drainage piping and
connections prior to
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install central-station air handling units level and plumb, in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
15854-5
5910861-000
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air
handling units for service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are
sections. The drawings indicate the
valves, fittings, and specialties.
connection requirements:
specified in other Division 15
general arrangement of piping,
The following are specific
1. Arrange piping installations adjacent to units to allow unit
servicing and maintenance.
2. Connection piping to air handling units with flexible
connectors.
3. Connect condensate drain pans using 1-1/4-inch, Type M copper
tubing. Extend to the nearest equipment or floor drain.
Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install
cleanouts at changes in direction.
B. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15
sections. Make final duct connections with flexible connections.
C. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:
1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16.
2. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with
the NEC.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay for a factory-
authorized service representative to perform the following:
1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of
central-station air handling units including piping, ductwork,
and electrical connections.
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective
actions.
3.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING
A. Adjust water coil flow, with control valves to full coil flow, to
indicated gpm.
B. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and
construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel, fan cabinet, and
coils entering air face.
3.6 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and
checks before start-up:
1. Remove shipping, blocking, and bracing.
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
15854-6
5910861-000
2.
Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices
that connections for piping, ductwork, and electrical
complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection
installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
and
are
is
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify proper motor rotation
direction and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings
operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and
install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with
factory-recommended lubricants.
6. Set zone dampers to full open for each zone.
7. Set face-and-bypass dampers to full face flow.
8. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside
air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Install clean filters.
11. Verify manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in the full-open
position.
12. Disable automatic temperature control operators.
B. Starting procedures for central-station air handling units:
1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system,
and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated RPM.
a. Replace fan, belts and motor pulleys as required to
achieve design conditions.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and
amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.
D. Refer to Division 15, Section 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING for procedures for air handling system testing, adjusting,
and balancing.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized
service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel on the
following:
1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shut down,
troubleshooting, servicing, preventative maintenance, and how
to obtain replacement parts.
2.
Familiarization with contents
Manuals specified in Division
of Operating and Maintenance
1, Section 01700 PROJECT
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
15854-7
5910861-000
CLOSEOUT and Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS.
B. Schedule training with at least seven days advance notice.
END OF SECTION 15854
CENTRAL-STATION AIR HANDLING UNITS
15854-8
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
.,NROE COORTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15885 - AIR CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B. Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
applies to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of air cleaning work required by 'this section is indicated on
drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Indicate credit on bid form to delete the electronic filtration
system (power generator, electrode, assembly, safety door switches,
wiring and conduit) described by this section. The prefilters, rigid
box filters, extra stock, filter plenums and air monitors as
specified shall be provided with this Contract.
C. Types of air cleaning equipment specified in this section include the
following:
1. Air Filters:
a. Replaceable (throwaway).
b. Extended surface, self-supporting.
c. Electronic.
2. Filter Holding Systems:
a. Side servicing housings.
3. Filter gauges.
D. Filter sections of packaged air-handl~ng units are work of this
section.
E. Refer to Division 16 sections for the following work; not work of
this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on air
filter units. Include starters, disconnects, and required
electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or
factory-installed, by manufacturer.
F. Provide the following electrical work complying with requirements of
Division 16 sections:
1. Control wiring between field- installed controls, indicating
devices, and air filter unit control panels.
AIR CLEANING
15885-1
5910861-000
a. Control w1r1ng specified as work of Division 15 for
automatic temperature controls is work of that section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's. Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in
manufacture of air cleaning equipment of types and sizes required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NFPA 90A
and 90B, and NEC pertaining to installation of air filters and
associated electric wiring and equipment.
2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety
performance of air filter units.
3. ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850
pertaining to test and performance of air filter units.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data
including, dimensions, weights, required clearances and access, flow
capacity including initial and final pressure drop at rated air flow,
efficiency and test method, fire classification, and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings for
filter rack assemblies indicating dimensions, materials, and methods
of assembly of components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for
power supply wiring to air filter units. Submit manufacturer's
ladder-type wiring diagram for control wiring. Clearly differentiate
between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to
be field-installed.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for
each type of filter and rack required. Include this data, product
data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in
accordance with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, the
following manufacturer offers air cleaning equipment which may be
incorporated in the work:
1. CRS Industries, Inc.
2 .2 GENERAL
A. System shall have demonstrated, in tests conducted by an independent
test laboratory, a statistically significant capability to
substantially control certain gases and respirable particles in the
conditioned space. It shall also have been demonstrated that such
AIR CLEANING
15885-2
5910861-000
system does not produce ozone under normal operating conditions as
measured by the Mast Oxidant Monitor. Such certain gases for which
statistically significant control shall be demonstrated, in tests by
an independent test laboratory, are formaldehyde (CH20), ammonia
(NH3), sulphur dioxide (S02) and carbon dioxide (C02), All of the
test data shall have been submitted to a scientific journal and
published.
B. All air-handling units shall be equipped with an Air Cleaning System
so that all the air supplied to the occupied space first passes
through the pre- and final filters and then through the electrodes.
Mechanical and electrical installation procedures and materials used
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
submittal drawings and wiring diagrams.
C. Each system shall include the required number of solid state power
generators, custom electrode assemblies, electrode supports,
electrical safety door switches and accessory items. Accessory items
include plenum assemblies for the electrodes and filters, along with
system monitoring capability. Mechanical and electrical installation
procedures and materials used shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, submittal drawings and wiring diagrams.
2 .3 POWER GENERATOR
A. Each power generator shall produce high voltage (HV) direct current
and high frequency (HF) alternating current. The HV/HF output of the
generator is sufficient to handle a plenum cross sectional area of 60
square feet maximum. More than one power generator is required on
plenums that exceed 60 square feet. When more than one generator is
used on a plenum, wiring must be done in accordance with
manufacturer's wiring diagrams and instructions to assure that the
generators do not back feed each other through the electrodes.
B. The HV output is 25 KVDC, at less than 10 microamps and is connected
to the smaller HV electrode with a factory-supplied red wire. The HF
output is 500 to 600 VAC, at less than 350 microamps and is connected
to the larger HF electrode with a factory-supplied black wire. A
prefabricated cable kit and wiring diagram shall be provided by the
manufacturer, for connecting the power generator to the electrodes,
maximum wire length 10 feet. The cable kit shall be installed in one
continuous length without splices. If the power generator is mounted
outside of the plenum, the two wires and ground wire shall be run in
a single conduit. A ground wire shall be run from the generator to
the electrode support frame in the same conduit.
C. Electrical requirements are 110/120 VAC, 1-phase, 50/60 Hz, 2-amp
circuit wired through plenum access door safety switches, to
interrupt power to the power generators when an access door is
opened, per the manufacturer's wiring diagram and instructions.
Maximum current usage is 50 watts per power generator. All wiring
shall be done in accordance with local and national electrical codes.
2.4 ELECTRODE ASSEMBLIES AND SUPPORT FRAMES (TRACKS)
A. Each electrode assembly shall consist of a smaller HV electrode
element and a larger HF electrode element separated by 3 - inch
insulators. When two or more electrode assemblies are powered by the
same generator, they are interconnected with special jumper straps to
maintain proper spacing and electrical continuity, per the
manufacturer's submittal drawings and instructions. The electrode
assemblies are mounted in special support tracks in factory-supplied
AIR CLEANING
15885-3
5910861-000
plenum sections, perpendicular to the air flow before the cooling
coil.
B. The electrodes shall not be installed in an area of the plenum that
has insulation exposed. If necessary, a grounded solid sleeve or
perforated liner, 9 inches in direction of air flow shall be
installed around the electrode assemblies. The minimum clearance for
the HF electrode shall not be less than 3/4 inches from any grounded
object or material. The minimum clearance for the HV electrode shall
not be less than 3 inches from the grounded object or material, this
includes filter media and media support ties. The static pressure
loss through the electrodes is less than 0.05 inches at 850 FPM air
velocity. (The electrode assemblies shall be constructed so they
have no corona or corona produced ozone.)
2.5 PLENUM ACCESS SAFETY DOOR SWITCH
A. One switch shall be installed at each access door to the electrodes
and shall be wired into the 110/120 VAC line voltage circuit to
interrupt power to the power generators when any access door is
opened. The switch shall be enclosed, carry-over, snap-action type,
SPST, N.O., with minimum 5.0 amps per power unit, 125/250 VAC rating,
UL listed. Switch shall be arranged so it is impossible to be locked
"ON" when the access door is open. All switch hardware accessories
shall be either zinc or cadmium plated.
B. Mechanical and electrical installation procedures and materials used
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
submi t tal drawings and wiring diagrams. All wiring shall be in
accordance with local and national electrical codes.
2.6 POWER GENERATOR SUPPORT BRACKET
A. Each power generator may be mounted on top of the electrode plenum
section using this 14-gauge metal support bracket, which includes all
mounting hardware. This bracket will not extend more than 24 inches
above the plenum section and provides adequate space for mounting the
5100 Series Sender Unit, for monitoring unit performance.
2.7 AIR FILTER MONITOR
A. Each system shall be equipped with a Dwyer Magnahelic Gauge, Model
2001-AF air filter differential pressure monitoring gauge with Model
No. A-60S installation accessory kit. Installation and materials
used shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
diagrams.
2.8 ELECTRODE AND CELL FILTER PLENUM (SIDE ACCESS)
A. Each combination electrode and filter plenum shall be 16-gauge
galvanized (minimum) with bolted assembly including an electrode and
filter access panel with compressible type neoprene trim seal
gaskets. (Units should have an additional access panel on the far
side for service.) The access panels will be secured with CARR Lane
toggle clamps, Model No. CL-252-VPC or equivalent, minimum four per
access panel. Each access panel shall be equipped with a safety
switch to interrupt line voltage to the power generator when the
access panel is removed. (The switch shall be an enclosed, carry-
over, snap-action type, SPST, N.O., with minimum 5.0 amps per power
unit, 125/250 VAC rating.)
AIR CLEANING
15885-4
5910861-000
B. Each plenum shall include companion flanges to match the air-handling
unit casing. Coordinate with the central station air-handling units.
C. Plenums will have knockouts provided for the conduit containing the
HV/HF power cable and ground wire. The prefilter and final filter
"U" channels will be equipped with a gasket on the leaving edge, and
the access panels will have a vertical gasket to prevent air from
bypassing the filters. Mechanical and electrical installation
procedures and materials used shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, submittal drawings and wiring diagrams.
2.9 ELECTRONIC ELECTRODE SENSOR/RECEIVER UNIT
A. The electronic electrode sensor/receiver unit monitors the power
generator output at the last electrode assembly in series, providing
data on the HV KVDC, the HF VRMS and HF kHz. It shall be connected
to the building monitoring system with standard 0-2 volt or 0-5 volt
analog signals. The face plate of the unit shall have an AC input
power lamp and a warning lamp which indicates loss of the electrical
ground in the system.
B. One electronic electrode sensor/receiver unit shall be mounted on the
plenum section housing the electrode assemblies for each power
generator in the system.
C. Attach the unit to the last electrode in series with a prefabricated
cable kit, supplied by the manufacturer, which shall be installed in
one continuous length, without splices, maximum wire length 10 feet.
The red HV wire is attached to the smaller HV electrode and the black
HF wire is attached to the larger HF electrode.
D. Electrical requirements are 110/120 VAC, 1-phase, 60 Hz, 1-amp
circuit. Maximum current usage is 30 watts for each electronic
electrode sensor /recei ver unit. Mechanical and electrical
installation procedures and materials used shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions and wiring diagrams. All line
voltage wiring and conduit shall be supplied by the installing
Contractor. All wiring shall be done in accordance with local and
national electrical codes.
2.10 PREFILTERS
A. The prefilters shall be manufactured using 3 -ply, multigraduated
laminant, of variable denier Dacron media. They shall be permanently
bonded for tensile strength, durability and high-seal efficiency.
They shall have internal metal support ring construction with the
capability of linking various size filters together to make a
continuous seal between each filter. The rated efficiency shall not
be less than 30 to 35 percent per ASHRAE Standard 52 -76. The
Contractor will provide two additional sets of prefilters for use
during construction, when the air-handling systems are in operation.
2.11 RIGID BOX FILTERS
A. The cell-type rigid box filters shall be manufactured using 1/2-inch
particle board or plywood frames which are rabbet ted, glued and
stapled to provide ridge enclosure for media packs. They can be
either box or header type and fabricated with either fire-retardant
plywood or fire-retardant particle board. Each filter shall be
constructed from one continuous sheet of high-strength waterproof
glass microfiber paper s~aled to the fr~e on all four edges. Media
separators shall be corrugated aluminum. A separator shall be placed
AIR CLEANING
15885-5
5910861-000
between each pleat of media to prevent the pleats from touching. The
sealants utilized shall be a fire-retardant rubber base adhesive and
urethane sealant that solidifies to provide a positive seal between
the media pack and the frame. The rated efficiency shall not be less
than 85 to 90 percent per ASHRAE Standard 52-76.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air filters and filter
housings will be installed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to
installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with installation requirements
elsewhere in these specifications pertaining to
housing/casings, and associated supporting devices.
as specified
air filters
B. Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated, and where
shown; in accordance with air filter manufacturer's written
instructions and with recognized industry practices; to ensure that
filters comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
C. Locate each filter unit accurately in position indicated, in relation
to other work. position unit with sufficient clearance for normal
service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames securely to
substrate.
D. Coordinate with other work including ductwork and air-handling unit
work, as necessary to interface installation of filters properly with
other work.
E. Install filters in proper position to prevent passage of unfiltered
air.
F. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not
specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's
wiring diagram submittal to electrical installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with
manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of
Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.
G. Install air filter gauge pressure tips upstream and downstream of
each filter bank to indicate air pressure drop through air filter.
Mount filter gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in
accessible position. Adjust and level ~auges for proper readings.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate installed air filters to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Test for air leakage of unfiltered air while system is
operating. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units,
and proceed with retesting.
AIR CLEANING
15885-6
5910861-000
3.4 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air-handling
system. If system is designed to include prefilters and after-
filters, provide only prefilters. Install new filters at completion
of air-handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and
balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been
installed.
END OF SECTION 15885
AIR CLEANING
15885-7
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
.,RROE COORTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15890 - FLEXIBLB
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
B . Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of flexible ductwork and accessories work is indicated on
drawings and by requirements of this section.
B. Type of flexible ductwork and accessories required for project
include the following:
1. Flexible ductwork.
2. Factory fabricated fittings.
3. Draw bands.
4. Sealant.
5. Duct tape.
C. Refer to Division 15, Section 15990
BALANCING.
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in
manufacture of flexible ductwork and accessories of type and sizes
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 3 years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with Section 3 of SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."
2 . Industry Standards: Comply wi th recommendations pertaining to
construction and installation of flexible ductwork and
accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
3. UL Compliance: Construct, test and label flexible ductwork in
accordance with UL standard 181 "Factory-Made Air Ducts and
Connectors" for Class I flexible air ducts.
4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA
90A "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems"
and NFPA90B Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems for
Class I flexible air ducts.
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
15890-1
5910861-000
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data including details of construction relative to materials
and complete engineering test data for the following items:
l. Flexible ductwork.
2. Factory-fabricated fittings.
3. Clamps.
4. Sealant.
5. Duct tape.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. Provide factory manufactured insulated round flexible ductwork of
sizes indicated; construct materials and components as specified
herein.
B. Flexible ductwork shall consist of a 2 mil thick outer jacket with
a vapor barrier of a laminated glass fiber reinforced foil-scrim-
kraft (FSK) enclosing 1-1/4-inch thick fiber glass insulation
wrapped around a continuous inner air barrier of glass fiber
reinforced neoprene/vinyl sleeve with an encapsulated steel, wire
helix.
C. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity (K) no greater than
0.25 at 75 degrees F.
D. Flexible ducts for connection to all low pressure (~ 2 inches WG)
air distribution devices (i. e ., diffusers, registers, grilles,
plenums, etc.) except fan powered and variable air volume terminal
boxes shall be rated for an operating static pressure of 4 inches
water gauge (WG).
E. Flexible ducts for fan powered and vfiriable air volume terminal
boxes shall be rated for an operating static pressure of 10 inches
WG.
2.2 FACTORY FABRICATED FITTINGS
A.
Provide a factory fabricated galvanized sheet metal oval to round
fittings for connection of flexible duct to attach to air device,
plenum and terminal box with oval type connectors. The subject
fitting shall be constructed for same operating static pressure
(inches WG) as the sheet metal duct that is connected to the
flexible duct.
B.
Where flexible ducts connect to low pressure (< 2 inches WG)
galvanized sheet metal ducts to form runouts to air distribution
devices (i. e ., diffusers, registers, grilles, plenums, etc.) provide
factory fabricated sheet metal fittings (spin-in) complete with
deflection scoops and manual balancing dampers with locking
quadrants. Omit air scoops on return and exhaust air duct systems.
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
15890-2
5910861-000
Where sheet metal ducts are internally insulated, the connector
shall be furnished with extension to project through and protect
exposed edges of insulation with a sheet metal ring/flange. Collar
of connector to which flexible duct is attached shall be a minimum
of 2 inches in length.
C. Where flexible ducts connect to equipment, provide auxiliary
galvanized sheet metal sleeves constructed for 150 percent of the
equipment's operating static pressure (inches WG). Construct sleeve
to allow at l~ast 2 inches of surface for attaching of flexible
duct. Sleeve shall be screwed or bolted to equipment lip frame.
2.3 DRAW BANDS
A. Provide a self-locking draw band of nylon construction, wrap around
type, for each flexible duct connection. Each draw band shall meet
UL standard 94V2 "Flammability Rating" and have a minimum tensile
strength of 120 pounds.
2.4 SEALANTS
A. All mastics and adhesive materials shall have a flame spread rating
not over 25 and a smoke development rating not over 50 when testing
in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.5 DUCT TAPE
A. All duct tape shall be a pressure sensitive aluminum foil type that
meets UL 181A standards. The subject tape shall have a marking of
"UL-181A-P" on the tape as proof of compliance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which flexible air ducts and
accessories are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Utilize high pressure flexible duct, rated for a static pressure of
10 inches WG, for connection to fan powered and variable air volume
terminal boxes. Provide a 4 - foot length of flexible duct to connect
sheet metal duct to each subject terminal box.
B. Flexible duct lengths to air distribution devices (i.e., diffusers,
registers, grilles, plenums, etc.) shall not exceed 14 feet. At
locations where distance to air device exceeds 14 feet, provide a
sufficient length of an equivalent round insulated sheet metal duct
so subject flexible duct length requirements is not exceeded.
C. Remove compressed flexible duct from shipping carton and stretch the
duct with a 25-pound axial load.
D. Bends in flexible ducts shall be made with not less than 1 duct
diameter centerline radius. Duct should extend a few inches beyond
the need of a sheet metal connection before bending. Ducts should
not be compressed. Horizontal duct runs with sharp bends shall have
additional supports before and after the bend approximately 1 duct
diameter distance from center line of the bend.
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
15890-3
5910861-000
E. The extended length of duct material used for a given run shall not
exceed by more than 5 percent of the minimum extended length needed
for that run. Ducts shall be installed fully extended.
F. Use the minimum length of flexible duct required to make the
specific connection unless specifically noted otherwise.
G. The distance between flexible duct support points shall not be
greater than 10 feet. Maximum permissible sag of horizontally
supported duct is 1/2 inch per foot of spacing between supports.
H. Flexible duct hangers and support saddles shall be of sufficient
width to prevent any restriction of the internal diameter of duct
when the weight of the supported section rest on hanger or saddle.
The minimum width of duct hanger and saddle shall be 1 inch. All
saddles shall be formed to cover 1/2 the circumference of the
outside diameter of the flexible duct and must be rolled to fit
neatly around the lower half of the ducts' outer circumference.
I. Flexible duct connections to sheet metal collars shall be as
follows:
1. The reinforced inner liner shall be sealed to the duct fitting
using one of the four sealing materials: (1) gasketing; (2)
mastic; (3) mastic plus embedded glass fabric; or (4) a
pressure-sensitive tape meeting UL 181A. When an approved
tape is used, it shall be appliep such that the tape extends
a minimum of 1 inch onto the duct liner and 1 inch onto the
fitting. Wrap duct liner with a minimum of 2 revolutions of
tape starting about 2 inches back from end of liner and
provide 1 inch overlap onto fitting with last wrap. In no
instance shall the tape be installed to form a right angle in
either its long or short dimension.
2. The reinforced inner lining shall be mechanically attached to
the duct fitting by a draw band installed directly over the
wire reinforced lining and the duct fitting. The duct fitting
shall extend a minimum of 2 inches into each section of duct
lining. When flexible duct is larger than 12 inches in
diameter, the draw band shall be secured by a raised bead or
indented grove on the fitting.
3. The outer jacket shall be fastened to the duct fitting using
a separate draw band installed over the composi tel of the outer
jacket and the insulation layer. Draw band shall be installed
so it does not interfere with the operation of a spin-in
locking quadrant.
J. Factory-fabricated duct fittings (i.e., spin-ins and collars) with
integral flange shall be attached to sheet metal ducts, plenums and
distribution boxes with mechanical fasteners and sealant as follows:
1. The duct fittings integral flange shall be sealed to sheet
metal using one of the following closure systems/materials:
(1) gasketing; (2) mastic; (3) mastic plus embedded glass
fabric; or (4) tape meeting UL 181A. Tape must cover the
flange and extend a minimum of 1 inch onto the sheet metal.
2. The duct fitting shall be attached to the rigid sheet metal by
appropriate mechanical fasteners (i.e., screws, rivets, twist-
in, compression tab, etc.) which are separate from the closure
system.
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
15890-4
5910861-000
K. All sealing and closure products shall be applied to the air barrier
component of the mated air duct materials to form a continuous
barrier to stop air leakage. All closure materials shall not have
a flame spread rating over 25 or a smoke development rating over 50.
The following are acceptable closure materials.
1. Gasketing placed between the mated surfaces.
2. Mastic placed over the joint and between mated surfaces.
3. Mastic plus glass embedded fabric applied over the joint and
between mated surfaces.
4. Tape meeting UL 181A applied over the joint of and extending
(the amount specified for joint type) onto the mated surfaces.
Tapes m~y be used only on joints between parallel rigid
surfaces and right angle joints of rectangular ducts. The
tape manufacturer's instructions for surface preparation and
application shall be followed.
L. Repair all damage to vapor barrier of flexible duct with an
application of approved mastic reinforced with 4-inch wide glass
fabric and a second application of mastic.
END OF SECTION 15890
FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
15890-5
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
.,NROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15891 - METAL
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to this Section.
B. Requirements of the following Division 15 sections apply to this
section:
1. Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.
1 .2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes rectangular, round, and flat-oval metal ducts
and plenums for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in
pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches water gauge.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Division 7, Section 07270 - FlRESTOPPING for fire-resistant
sealants for use around duct penetrations and fire damper
installations in fire rated floors, partitions, and walls.
2. Division 8, Section 08305 ACCESS DOORS for wall- and
ceiling-mounted access panels and doors for access to concealed
ducts.
3. Division 10, Section 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS for intake and
relief louvers and vents connected to duct systems and installed
in exterior walls.
4. Division 15, Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION for exterior
duct and plenum insulation.
5. Division 15, Section 15910 - DUCT ACCESSORIES for flexible duct
materials, dampers, duct-mounted access panels and doors, and
turning vanes.
6. Division 15, Section 15912 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS.
7. Division 15, Section 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.
Sealing Requirements Definitions:
sealing requirements specified
definitions apply:
1. Seams: A seam is defined as joining of two longitudinally (in
the direction of airflow) orie~ted edges of duct surface
material occurring,between two joints. All other duct surface
connections made on the perimeter are deemed to be joints.
For the purposes of duct systems
in this section, the following
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-1
5910861-000
2. Joints: Joints include girth joints; branch and subbranch
intersections; so-called duct collar tap-ins; fitting
subsections; louver and air terminal connections to ducts;
access door and access panel frames and jambs; duct, plenum, and
casing abutments to building structures.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and
size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of
the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or
configuration of the duct system must be specifically approved in
wri ting. Accompany requests for layout modifications with
calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the
original design results without increasing the system total pressure.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of
Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data including details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for the
following items:
1. Duct liner.
2. Sealing materials.
3. Firestopping materials.
4. Factory manufactured fittings and ductwork.
C. Shop drawings from duct fabrication shop, drawn to a scale not
smaller than 1/4 inch equals 1 foot, on drawing sheets same size as
the Contract Drawings, detailing:
1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation details, including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and
attachments to other work.
2. Duct layout, indicating pressure classifications and sizes in
plan view.
3 . Fi ttings.
4. Reinforcing details and spacing.
5. Seam and joint construction details.
6. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
7. Terminal unit, coil, grilles, registers, diffusers and access
panel installations.
8. Hangers and supports, including methods for building attachment,
vibration isolation, and duct attachment.
D. Welding certificates including welding procedures specifications,
welding procedures qualifications test records, and welders'
qualifications test records complying with requirements specified in
"Quality Assurance" below.
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-2
5910861-000
E. Record drawings including duct systems routing, fittings details,
reinforcing, support, and installed accessories and devices, in
accordance with Division 15, Section 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS and Division 1.
F. Maintenance data for volume control devices, fire dampers, and smoke
dampers, in accordance with Division 15, Section 15010 BASIC
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS and Division 1.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with
AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" for hangers and supports
and AWS D9.1 "Sheet Metal Welding Code."
B. Qualify each welder in accordance with AWS qualification tests for
welding processes involved. Certify that their qualification is
current.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems," except as indicated otherwise.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deli ver sealant and firestopping materials to
unopened containers or bundles with labels
manufacturer, product name and designation, color,
for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing
multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle sealant firestopping materials in compliance with
manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or
other causes.
si te in original
informing about
expiration period
instructions for
C. Deliver and store stainless steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive
protective paper, maintained through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Sheet Metal, General: Provide sheet metal in thicknesses indicated,
packaged and marked as specified in ASTM A700.
B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Carbon steel, lock-forming quality, hot-dip
galvanized with zinc coating conforming with ASTM AS27, G90. Provide
mill phosphatized finish on all duct surfaces to be painted.
C. Carbon Steel Sheets: ASTM A366, cold-rolled sheets, commercial
quality, with oiled, exposed matte finish.
D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated, provide
gal vanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet
metal ducts.
E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch
length or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36
inches.
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-3
5910861-000
F. Duct Support Straps: Shall be constructed of the same type material
and have the same finish as the ductwork supported. Metal gauge of
the strap shall conform to SMACNA, Tables 4-1 and 4-2. Perforated
straps are not acceptable. Straps shal~ not be spliced.
2 . 2 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and TIMA Standard AHC-101.
1. Line all return air ducts.
B. Materials: ASTM C1071, Type II, with coated surface exposed to
airstream to prevent erosion of glass fibers.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Density: 3 pounds.
3. Thermal Performance: "K-Factor" equal to 0.28 or better, at a
mean temperature of 75 degrees F.
4. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread rating of not more
than 25 without evidence of continued progressive combustion and
a smoke developed rating of no higher than 50, when tested in
accordance with ASTM C411.
5. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A and ASTM C916.
6. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive
attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to
duct. Provide fasteners that do not damage the liner when
applied as recommended by the manufacturer, that do not cause
leakage in the duct, and will indefinitely sustain a 50-pound
tensile dead load test perpendicular to the duct wall.
a. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of
insulation, and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into
the airstream.
b. Adhesive For Attachment of Mechanical Fasteners: Comply
with the "Fire Hazard Classification" of duct liner
system.
2.3 SEALING MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term sealant used here is not
limited to materials of adhesive or mastic nature, but also includes
tapes and combinations of open weave fabric strips and mastics.
B. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, non sag , solvent-release-curing,
polymerized butyl sealant complying with FS TT-S-001657, Type I;
formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
C. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone elastomeric
joint sealants, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,
Use O.
2.4 FlRESTOPPING
A. Refer to Division 7, Section 07270 - FlRESTOPPING for firestopping.
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-4
5910861-000
2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Support from Metal Deck Systems:
1. Except where otherwise indicated, ductwork and equipment shall
not be hung from roof deck.
2. Where support from metal floor deck is utilized, support
requirements shall be coordinated with installation of metal
deck and method of attachment must be approved by Architect-
Engineer.
B. Selection of hanging system, in general, shall be at the Contractor's
option, and shall take into account the location and precedence of
work under other sections, interferences of various piping and
electrical conduit, equipment, building configuration, structural
requirements, vibration, and imposed loads under normal and abnormal
service conditions. The following support sizes, configurations and
spacings are given to show the minimal type of supporting components
required. Where installed loads are excessive for the specified
hanger spacing, provide either heavier duty type hangers or reduce
hanger spacing.
C. Building Attachments: Hanger rods, angles and straps shall be
attached to beam clamps. Concrete inserts, masonry anchors and
fasteners shall be approved for the application. Do not use powder
actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight aggregate concretes or
for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
D. Hangers: Galvanized sheet steel, or round, uncoated steel, threaded
rod.
1. Hangers Installed In Corrosive Atmospheres or Exposed to
Weather: Electro-galvanized, all-thread rod or
hot-dipped-galvanized rods with threads coated after
installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Conform with Tables 4-1 and 4-2 in SMACNA
HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985 Edition, for sheet steel
width and gauge and steel rod diameters.
E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping
metal screws; compatible with duct materials.
F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes conforming to ASTM A36.
Supports shall conform with Chapter 4 of SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards.
Where galvanized steel ducts. are installed,
hot-dipped~galvanized steel shapes and plates.
2. Rectangular ducts, 36 inches and larger, shall be supported by
trapeze hangers. Ducts with insulation shall have hangers
spaced far enough from side of duct to allow insulation to pass
inside the hangers. Duct hangers shall not penetrate insulation
or vapor barrier.
1.
provide
2 . 6 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts
with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards," Tables 1-3 through 1-18, including their
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-5
5910861-000
associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced
standard for metal thickness, reinforcing types and intervals, tie
rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1.
Fabricate rectangular ducts
reinforcement and rigidity
classification.
in
class
lengths appropriate to
required for pressure
2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such
as pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, and
discolorations.
B. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated,
construct duct systems to the following. pressure classifications:
1. Supply Ducts: 3-inch water gauge, positive pressure.
2. Return Ducts: 2-inch water gauge, negative pressure.
3. Exhaust Ducts: 2-inch water gauge, negative pressure.
4. Transfer Ducts: 1-inch, negative pressure.
5. Fresh Air Ducts: 2-inch, negative pressure.
C. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that
are 19 inches and larger and are 20 gauge or less, with more than 10
square feet of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standard," Figure 1-4, unless they are lined or are
externally insulated.
2.7 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS
A. Fabricate elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other
duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standard," 1985 Edition, Figures 2-1 through 2-10.
2.8 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90
percent coverage of adhesive at liner co~tact surface area. Multiple
layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness is prohibited.
B. Apply a coat of adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not
receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and
fit to assure butted edge overlapping.
E. Longitudinal joints in rectangular ducts shall not occur except at
corners of ducts, unless the size of the duct and standard liner
product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
1. Apply an adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts
exceeding 2,500 FPM air velocity.
F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at
intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely around perimeter; at
3 inches from transverse jo~nts and at intervals not exceeding 18
inches longitudinally.
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-6
5910861-000
G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with
metal nosings that are either channel or "Z" profile or are
integrally formed from the duct wall at the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding 'unlined duct.
H. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach
dampers, turning vane assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated
buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional;
when used, secure buildouts to the duct wall with bolts, screws,
rivets, or welds. Terminate liner at break-away connections to fire
dampers and combination fire and smoke dampers. Externally insulate
duct from break-away connections to rated wall, floors and ceiling.
Provide a 3-inch overlap of external insulation to duct liner.
2.9 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: "Basic Round Diameter" as used in this article is the
diameter of the size of round duct that has a circumference equal to
the perimeter of a given sized of flat oval duct. Except where
interrupted by fittings, provide round and flat oval ducts in lengths
not less than 12 feet.
B. Round Ducts: Fabricate round supply ducts with spiral lockseam
construction, except where diameters exceed 72 inches. Fabricate
ducts having diameters greater than 72 inches with longitudinal
butt-welded seams. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards," Table 3-2 for galvanized steel gauges.
C. Flat Oval Ducts: Fabricate flat oval supply ducts with standard
spiral lockseams (without intermediate. ribs) or with butt-welded
longitudinal seams in gauges listed in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards," Table 3-4.
2 .10 ROUND AND FLAT OVAL SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTINGS FABRICATION
A. Crosses, Wye Fittings, Laterals and Conical Tees: Shop fabricate
fittings to conform to SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,"
1985 Edition, Figure 3-5 and with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal seam straight duct. Tap collars welded or brazed to
duct sections are not acceptable. All fittings shall be conical
type.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch
taps with no excess material projecting from the body onto branch tap
entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered
construction. Fabricate the bend radius of die-formed, gored, and
pleated elbows 1.5 times the elbow diameter. Unless elbow
construction type is indicated, provide elbows meeting the following
requirements:
1. Mitered Elbows: Fabricate mitered elbows with welded
construction in gauges specified below.
a. Mi tered Elbows Radius and Number of Pieces: Unless
otherwise indicated, construct elbow to comply with SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards," Table 3-1.
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-7
5910861-000
b. Round Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with metal
thickness listed below for pressure classes from negative
2 inches to positive 10 inches:
1} 3 to 14 inches: 24 gauge.
2) 15 to 26 inches: 22 gauge.
3} 27 to 50 inches: 20 gauge.
4} 52 to 60 inches: 18 gauge.
5} 62 to 84 inches: 16 gauge.
c. Flat Oval Mitered Elbows: Solid welded and with the same
metal thickness as longitudinal seam flat oval duct.
d. 90-Degree, 2-piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply
systems, or exhaust systems for material handling classes
A and B; and only where space restrictions do not permit
the use of 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with a
single-thickness turning vanes.
2. Round Elbows - 8 Inches and Smaller: Die-formed elbows for 45
and 90 degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90
degrees only. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle configurations
or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 3-1/2 and 4-1/2 inch) elbows with
gored construction.
3 . Round Elbows - 9 Through 14 Inches: Gored or pleated elbows for
30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees, except where space restrictions
require a mitered elbow. Fabricate nonstandard bend angle
configurations or 1/2-inch-diameter (e.g. 9-1/2 and 10-1/2 inch)
elbows with gored construction.
4. Round Elbows - Larger Than 14 Inches and All Flat Oval Elbows:
Gored elbows, except where space restrictions require a mitered
elbow.
5. Die-Formed Elbows for Sizes Through 8 Inches and All Pressures:
20 gauge with 2-piece welded construction.
6.
Round Gored Elbows Gauges:
specified above.
7. Flat Oval Elbows Gauges: Same as longitudinal seam flat oval
duct.
Same as for non-elbow fittings
8. Pleated Elbows Sizes Through 14 Inches and Pressures Through 10
Inches: 26 gauge.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system
for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
B. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints.
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-8
5910861-000
C. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions, changes in
size and shape, and connections.
D. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with projections into
duct at connections kept to a minimum.
E. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and
horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid
diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not
obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its
equipment.
F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and
other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.
G. Provide clearance of 1 inch where furring is shown for enclosure or
concealment of ducts, plus allowance for insulation thickness, if
any.
H. Install insulated ducts with 1-inch clearance outside of insulation.
I. Conceal ducts from view in finished and occupied spaces by locating
in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction, or above suspended
ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except
as specifically shown.
J. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling sprinkler and lighting
layouts and similar finished work.
K. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through
transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
L. Non-Fire-Rated partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass interior
partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space
between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet
metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on four sides
by at least 1-1/2 inches.
3 . 2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints as follows:
B.
Pressure Classifications Greater Than 3 Inches Water Gauge:
transverse joints, longitudinal seams, ~d duct penetrations.
Pressure Classification less than 3 Inches Water Gauge:
transverse joints and longitudinal seams.
All
C.
All
D. Seal externally insulated ducts prior to insulation installation.
3.3 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with
support systems indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards," Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.
B. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4
feet of each branch intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each
floor.
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-9
5910861-000
D. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not
exceeding 1/4 of the failure (proof test) load but are not limited to
the specific methods indicated.
E. Install concrete insert prior to placing concrete.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Equipment Connections: Connect equipment with flexible connectors in
accordance with Division 15, Section 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES.
B. Branch Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards," Figures 2-7 and 2-8.
C. Outlet and Inlet Connections: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards," Figures 2-16 through 2-18.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of the systems as required
to accommodate leakage testing, and as required for compliance with
test requirements.
B. Conduct tests, in the presence of the Architect-Engineer, at static
pressures equal to 125 percent of the maximum design pressure of the
system or the section being tested. If pressure classifications are
not indicated, test entire system at the maximum system design
pressure. Do not pressurize systems above the maximum design
operating pressure. Give 7 days' advanced notice for testing.
C. Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in ASHRAE 1989 Handbook,
"Fundamentals" Volume, Chapter 32, Table 6 and Figure 10. Comply
with requirements for leakage classification 3 for round and flat
oval ducts, leakage classification 12 for rectangular ducts in
pressure classifications less than and equal to 2 inches water gauge
(both positive and negative pressures), and leakage classification 6
for pressure classifications greater than 2 inches water gauge and
less than and equal to 10 inches water gauge.
D. Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve
specified maximum allowable leakage.
E. System Balancing: Perform volumetric measurements and adjust air
systems as described in ASHRAE 1987 "HVAC Systems and Applications"
Volume, Chapter 57 and ASHRAE 1989 "Fundamentals" Volume, Chapter 13,
and Division 15, Section 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust volume control devices as required by the testing and
balancing procedures to achieve required air flow. Refer to Division
15, Section 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING for
requirements and procedures for adjusting and balancing air systems.
B. Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and
debris.
END OF SECTION 15891
METAL DUCTWORK
15891-10
~ "'_';""'-"'~'''''''''_''''',i'Ii;;l'.'',~;~'''~''''''~;''~
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
.,NROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B. Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the
following:
1 . Dampers.
a. Low pressure manual dampers.
b. Control dampers.
c. Counterbalanced relief dampers.
2. Fire dampers.
3 . Turning vanes.
4. Duct hardware.
5. Duct access doors.
6. Flexible connections.
C.
Refer to Division 15, Section 15990
BALANCING.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in
manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than three years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."
2. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations
pertaining to construction of ductwork accessories, except as
otherwise indicated.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15910-1
5910861-000
3.
UL Compliance: Construct, test,
accordance with UL Standard 555
Dampers. "
and label fire dampers in
"Fire Dampers and Ceiling
4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A
"Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," pertaining to
installation of ductwork accessories.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each
type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and
materials of construction; and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submi t manufacturer's assembly- type shop drawings for
each type of ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with
ductwork, method of fastening or support, and methods of assembly of
components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including
parts lists for each type of duct accessory. Include this data,
product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordance
with requirements of Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DAMPERS
A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or
multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards."
B. Control Dampers: Refer to Division 15, Section 15973 - PNEUMATIC
CONTROL SYSTEMS for control dampers; not work of this section.
C. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel
blades, counterbalanced and factory- set to relieve at indicated
static pressure. Construct blades of 16-gauge aluminum, provide 1/2-
inch diameter ball bearings, 1/2-inch diameter steel axles spaced on
9-inch centers. Construct frame of 2 x 1/2 x 1/8-inch steel channel
for face areas 25 square feet and under; 4 x 1-1/4-inch x 16-gauge
channel for face areas over 25 square feet. Provide galvanized steel
finish on frame with aluminum touch-up.
D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering dampers which may be incorporated in the work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
.2 . Airguide Corp.
3. American warming & Ventilating, Inc.
4. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc.
Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
5. Penn Ventilator Co.
6. Ruskin Mfg. Co.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15910-2
'^ '~--.il<......~,.i;;","'",,''''''''''''''"''''~ ..,....._"'j,,',yl"""';_,,~....,~~,..,.;;lI__~~,jllli.l<iH.,'....,;-....,',",,,,,,,,,,,,""";~I,'
5910861-000
2.2 FIRE DAMPERS
A. Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated.
Construct casings of 11-gauge galvanized steel. Provide fusible link
rated at 160 to 165 degrees F (71 to 74 degrees C) unless otherwise
indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position, and
with the following additional features:
1. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type.
2. Blade Material: Steel, match casing.
3. Fire rating of dampers shall be the same as or greater than the
walls or floors in which they are installed. All dampers shall
have UL labels.
4. Provide spring actuation for horizontal and vertical setting.
5. For low velocity ductwork, cluster blades shall give not less
than 80 percent free duct area where velocity is less than 2,000
FPM. Enlarge damper and provide necessary duct transitions, if
required, to meet this requirement. For medium- and high-
velocity ductwork cluster blades shall be outside of air stream.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering fire dampers whi~h may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Air Balance, Inc.
2. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.
3. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries Inc.
4. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
5. Penn Ventilator Co.
6. Phillips-Aire.
7 . Ruskin Mfg. Co.
2 .3 TURNING VANES
A.
Fabricated Turning Vanes:
runners, constructed in
Construction Standards."
Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane
accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of
1-1/2-inch wide curved blades set at 3/4-inch O.C., supported with
bars perpendicular to blades set at 2-inch O.C., and set into side
strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.
C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructeQ
of airfoil shaped aluminum extrusion with perforated faces and
fiberglass fill.
D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers Offering turning vanes which may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1 . Aero DYne Co.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15910-3
5910861-000
2. Airsan Corp.
3. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America.
4. Barber-Colman Co.
5 . Duro Dyne Corp.
6. Environmental Elements Corp.; Subs, Koppers Co., Inc.
7. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co.
8. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.
9. Souther, Inc.
2.4 DUCT HARDWARE
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for
all items on project, for the following:
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and
elsewhere as indicated, duct test holes, consisting of slot and
cover, for instrument tests.
2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device
on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for
damper lengths over 12 inches. Provide extended quadrant locks
and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated
ductwork.
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering duct hardware which may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Ventfabrics, Inc.
2. Young Regulator Co.
2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. General: Provide where indicated, duct access doors of size
indicated.
B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served,
provide insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames
for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated
duct. Provide one size hinged, other side with one handle-type latch
for doors 12 inches high and smaller, two handle-type latches for
larger doors.
C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers Offering duct access doors which may be incorporated in
the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Air Balance Inc.
2 . Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.
4. Ruskin Mfg. Co.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15910-4
5910861-000
5. Ventfabrics, Inc.
6. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Air Systems Div.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork
connects to vibration isolated equipment. Flexible connector
materials shall be in accordance with UL 181, Class I material and
comply with NFPA 90A. Construct flexible connections of
neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for
attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide
adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse,
and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibration of
connected equipment.
B. Avai lable Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering flexible connections which may be incorporated
in the work include; but are not limited to, the following:
1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div.
2 . Duro Dyne Corp.
3. Flexaust (The) Co.
4. Ventfabrics, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of
construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended
function.
B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 degree elbows in
supply and exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with
latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is
to small for person to enter.
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to
interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other
work.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating.
Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper
operation and leakproof performance.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15910-5
5910861-000
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install
fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action.
1. Label access doors in accordance wi th Division 15, Section
15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION.
2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 15,
Section 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING.
B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or
scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every ten
installed of each temperature range; obtain receipt.
END OF SECTION 15910
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
15910-6
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
.,RROE CUUNJ: 'f, FLORIDA
SECTION 15912 - AIR OO'TLETS
AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1s10ns of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the
following:
1. Ceiling air diffusers.
2. Wall registers and grilles.
C. Refer to other Division 15 sections for ductwork and duct accessories
required in conjunction with air outlets and inlets.
D. Refer to other Division 15 sections for balancing of air outlets and
inlets.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's
manufacture of
required, whose
service for not
Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in
air outlets and inlets of types and capacities
products have been in satisfactory use in similar
less than five years.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in
accordance with ARI 650 "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets."
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in
accordance with ASHRAE 70 "Method of Testing for Rating the Air
Flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets."
3 . ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in
certified laboratories under requirements of ADC 1062
"Certification, Rating and Test Manual."
4. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified
Rating Seal.
5. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate louvers in accordance with AMCA
500 "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters."
6. AMCA Seal: Provide louvers bearing AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
7. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance
with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning
and Ventilating Systems."
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15912-1
5910861-000
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air
outlets and inlets including the following:
1.
Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating
designation, room location, number furnished, model
size, and accessories furnished.
drawing
number,
2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory
furnished; indicating construction, finish, and mounting
details.
3.
Performance data for each type
furnished, including aspiration
velocity traverses; throw and drop;
Indicate selections on data.
of air outlet and inlet
ability, temperature and
and noise criteria ratings.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for
each type of air outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods
of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submi t maintenance data, including cleaning
instructions for finishes, and spare parts lists. Include this data,
product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance
with requirements of Division 1.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated
fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type
of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or
bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in
devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from
weather and construction work traffic. Where possible, store
indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above grade and
enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's
standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity
and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as
indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum,
temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise
criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's
current data.
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are
compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically
manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and
adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and
specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each
type of ceiling air diffuser.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15912-2
5910861-000
D. Provide louvered faced ceiling diffusers (SO) of type, capacity, and
with accessories and finishes as indicated.
1. Diffuser Faces:
a. Louvered: Square housing to fit in ceiling system module,
square concentric louvers, round duct connection.
2. Diffuser Mountings:
a. Flush: Diffuser housing above ceiling surface with flush
perimeter flange and gasket to seal against ceiling.
b. Lay-In: Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling
exposed suspension tee bars and rest on top surface of tee
bar.
3. Diffuser Patterns:
a.
Fixed: Fixed position core with concentric louvers
radial air flow around entire perimeter of diffuser.
diffusers shall be this type unless indicated on
drawings.
for
All
the
4. Diffuser Dampers:
a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly,
key operated from face of diffuser. Damper assembly shall
be Tuttle & Bailey Model No. 4 or an approved equal.
Provide a 6-inch long, 22-gauge galvanized sheet metal
collar of equivalent diameter for each damper assembly.
Secure damper to collar and collar to diffuser with either
sheet metal screws or rivets. Damper shall be installed
in collar with as much distance as possible between it and
diffuser such that when damper is fully open, its blades
do not project beyond the top of sheet metal collar.
s. Diffuser Accessories:
a. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through diffuser
face and operate volume control damper and/or pattern
adjustment.
6. Diffuser Finishes:
a. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel finish.
7. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering diffusers which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Titus Products Div.i Philips Industries, Inc.
b. Tuttle & BaileYi Div. of Interpace Corp.
c. Metal.aire.
E. Provide linear diffusers of type, capacity and with accessories and
finishes as indicated.
1. Linear Faces and Dampers:
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15912-3
5910861-000
a. Sidewall Linears (SL): Tuttle & Bailey 4000 series with
bar style No. 00 on 1/2-inch centers, grille Type BO and
Type A7 opposed blade volume damper or approved equal.
b. Ceiling Linears (CL): Tuttle & Bailey 6000 series with
margin style BO, 1- inch slots wi th integral damper and
pattern controller or approved equal.
2. Linear Mountings:
a. Sidewall Linears (SL): Tuttle & Bailey 4000 series, Type
B3 mounting frame or approved equal.
b. Ceiling Linears (CL): Tuttle & Bailey 6000 series with
Type B-1 hanger bracket. Provide factory-air plenums with
side inlet, Type DPN for all active sections of linear.
Provide all necessary hardware to support nonactive
sections of linear from underside of roof structure.
c. All nonactive sections of both Type SL and CL linears
shall be blanked off.
d. Installation of linears shall be in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
e. Adjustment of both SL and CL linears shall be through
externally through face of diffuser. Provide all tools
necessary for adjustment of linear dampers.
3. Linear Finishes:
a. Satin anodized aluminum.
4. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering diffusers which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a. Titus Products Division; Philips Industries, Inc.
b. Tuttle & Bailey; Division of Interpace Corporation.
c. Metalaire.
F. Provide self-regulating variable air volume diffusers (TF) of type,
capacity and with accessories and finishes indicated.
1. Diffuser Faces:
a. Appearance panel to match ceiling tiles with 4 perimeter
blades for air distribution or have a perforated plate
face. Housing shall be square to fit in ceiling module
with round duct connection collar.
2. Diffuser Mountings:
a. Flush: Diffuser housing above ceiling surface with flush
perimeter flange and gasket to seal against ceiling.
b. Lay-In: Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling
exposed suspension tee bar and rest on top surface of tee
bar.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15912-4
5910861-000
3. Diffuser Pattern:
a. Fixed radial air flow around entire perimeter of diffuser.
4. Diffuser Controls:
a. Controls shall maintain room temperature within 1-1/2
degrees F of the adjustable setpoint (70 to 80 degrees F) .
b. Diffuser shall have thermally actuated self-contained
controls that do not require external pneumatic or
electronic devices to function. The controls shall sense
duct supply air temperature, determine whether air-
handling unit is in heating or cooling mode, then vary the
volume being supplied by the diffuser as required to
satisfy space temperature setpoint.
5. Optional Diffuser Controls:
a. The following control system shall be considered as an
approved equal in lieu of the previously described self-
contained control system.
1) Provide standard louvered face diffusers with 24 X
24-inch face and round neck for duct connections as
described with this specification section.
2) Provide 24 VAC electronic damper and remote
thermostat control system that will perform the same
functions as described for the self-contained
control system.
3) Provide circuit breakers, 120 VAC wiring, 120 to 24
VAC transformers and all other necessary parts and
devices for complete installation. All wiring shall
be in conduit.
6. Diffuser Finishes:
a. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel finish.
7. Available Manufacturers: Subj ect to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering diffusers and controls
which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
a. Thermally actuated self-contained control diffuser
manufacturers:
1) Acutherm, Therma-Fuser Model TF-HC.
2) Terminal Logic Control, Smart Diffuser Model PCAH.
b. Optional electronic control system manufacturers:
1) Carrier/Parker VAVVT System.
2) Trane-VariTrac System.
G. Provide diffuser (AD) designed to be utilized with metal panel
ceiling system of type, c~pacity and with accessories and finishes as
indicated.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15912-5
5910861-000
1. Diffuser Face:
a. Air diffuser shall be designed to utilize the regressive
slots between metal ceiling panels for air delivery.
2. Diffuser Pattern:
a. Two Way: Fixed pattern control face for 2-direction air
flow, directions indicated on drawings.
3. Diffuser Damper:
a. Remote volume control damper shall be installed in
flexible duct take off at the rigid duct and shall be
remotely operated through one of the air distribution
slots of each unit, by means of a control cable. The
control cable shall be factory affixed to the damper
assembly and require only to field secure a plate to the
side wall of air diffuser.
4. Diffuser Finishes:
a. The diffuser shall be constructed of galvanized steel with
mechanically sealed seams. The complete periphery of the
diffuser shall be provided with gasketing to prevent air
leakage at ceiling surfaces.
5. Available Manufacturers:
a. The air diffuser shall be purchased from factory of
manufacturer who is providing the ceiling system for this
project. For available ceiling manufacturers, see
Division 9 of specifications.
2.2 WALL REGISTERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's
standard wall registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape,
capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components
as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as
mJ.nJ.mum, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and
noise criteria ratings for each size device and listed in
manufacturer's current data.
C. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers with border styles that are
compatible with adjacent wall systems, and that are specifically
manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and
adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and
specifications for types of wall construption which will contain each
. type of wall register and grille.
D. Types: Provide wall registers of type, capacity, and with
accessories and finishes as listed.
1. Register Materials:
a. Aluminum Construction: Manufacturer's standard aluminum
frame and adjustable blades.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15912-6
5910861-000
2. Register Faces:
a. Horizontal Blades: 42-degree deflection, fixed at
manufacturer's standard spacing.
3. Register Dampers:
a. Opposed Blade: Adj us table opposed blade damper assembly,
key operated from face of register.
4. Register Finishes:
a. Satin anodized aluminum.
E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering registers which may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.
2. Tuttle and Bailey; Div. of Interpace Corp.
3 . Metalaire.
2.3 CEILING REGISTERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's
standard ceiling registers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and
type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated,
and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide ceiling registers that have, as minimum,
temperature and velocity traverses, and noise criteria ratings for
each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide registers with border styles that are
compatible with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically
manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and
adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and
specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each
type of ceiling registers.
D. Types: Provide ceiling registers of type, capacity, and with
accessories and finishes as listed.
1. Register Faces:
a. Horizontal Blades: 42-degree deflection, fixed at
manufacturer's standard spacing.
2. Register Mountings:
a. Flush: Housing above ceiling surface with flush perimeter
flange and gasket to seal against ceiling.
b. Lay-In: Housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed
suspension tee bars and rest on top surface of tee bar.
3. Register Dampers:
a. Opposed Blade: Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly,
key operated from face of register.
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15912-7
5910861-000
4. Register Accessories:
a. Operating Keys: Tools designed to fit through diffuser
face and operate volume control device and/or pattern
adjustment.
5. Register Finishes:
a. Satin anodized aluminum.
E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering registers which may be incorporated in the
work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.
2. Tuttle & Bailey; Div. of Interpace Corp.
3. Metalaire.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are
to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.
Provide all additional sheet metal brackets, straps and hardware for
complete installation.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories,
as necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with
other work.
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and linears, as indicated on
general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans." Unless otherwise
indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling module.
3 . 3 SPARE PARTS
A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air
outlet and inlet that require them.
END OF SECTION 15912
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
15912-8
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TBRIIIRAL BmLDING
MONROE CCXJRTY. FLORIDA
SECTION 15971 - ELBCTRIC
CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provJ.sJ.ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
B. Division 15, Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of electric control systems work required by this section is
indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this
section.
1. Control sequences are indicated on Contract drawings.
B. Refer to other Division 15 sections for installation of instrument
wells, valve bodies, and dampers in mechanical systems; not work of
this section.
C. Refer to Division 16 sections for the following work; not work of
this section.
1. Power supply wiring for power source to power connection on
controls and/or unit control panels. Include starters,
disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where
specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.
D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section,
complying with requirements of Division 16 sections:
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating
devices, and unit control panels.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer's
manufacture of
required, whose
service for not
Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in
electric control equipment, of types and sizes
products have been in satisfactory use in similar
less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in
electric control system installations for not less than 5 years.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have
been tested, listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMA
standards.
2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to
components and devices for electric control systems.
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15971-1
5910861-000
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems"
where applicable to controls and control sequences.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each
control device furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities,
performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of
materials, and including installation instructions and start-up
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division 15 section "Sequence of Operation"
for shop drawings; not work of this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
electric control systems of one of the following:
1. Johnson Controls.
2. Honeywell, Inc.
3. Barber-Coleman Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (not applicable)
END OF SECTION 15971
ELECTRIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15971-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY. FLORIDA
SECTION 15973 - PNEUMATIC
CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provJ.sJ.ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
B. Division 15, Section 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
applies to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of pneumatic control systems work required by this section is
indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this
section. Refer to Section 15917 for miscellaneous electric
controls.
1. Control sequences are indicated on Contract drawings.
B. Refer to other Division 15 sections for installation of instrument
wells, valve bodies, and dampers in mechanical systems; not work of
this section.
C. Automatic temperature control system shall be complete in all
details and shall include all necessary accessories to maintain
conditions indicated or specified.
D. Control equipment and devices shall be the product of a single
control system manufacturer.
E. Automatically controlled valves to control environment shall be
furnished by the automatic control systems manufacturer, unless
otherwise noted.
F. Automatically controlled dampers, independent of dampers integral
with manufactured air-handling units, shall be furnished by the
automatic control systems manufacturer.
G. Provide pneumatic actuators for all automatically controlled dampers
that are part of the manufactured air-handling units.
H. Refer to Division 16 sections for the following work; not work of
this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on
controls and/or unit control panels. Include starters,
disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where
specified as furnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.
I. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section,
complying with requirements of Division 16 sections:
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating
devices, and unit control panels.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973-1
5910861-000
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in
manufacture of pneumatic control equipment, of types and sizes
required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in
pneumatic control system installations for not less than 5 years.
C. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical components of
pneumatic control systems which have been UL listed and
labeled, and comply with NEMA standards.
2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to
components and devices for pneumatic control systems.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and ventilating Systems"
where applicable to controls and control sequences.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each
control device and compressed air station furnished, indicating
dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics,
and material finishes, also include installation and start-up
instructions.
B.
Shop Drawings:
system.
Submit shop drawings for each pneumatic control
C. Samples: Submit sample of each type of furnished thermostat cover,
in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts
lists for each type of control device, and compressed air stations.
Include that type data, product data and shop drawings in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and
control device. Maintain cartons while shipping, storage and
handling as required to prevent equipment damage, and to eliminate
dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials
inside and protect from weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
pneumatic control systems of one of the following:
1. Johnson Controls.
2. Honeywell, Inc.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973 -2
5910861-000
3. Barber-Coleman Co.
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Air Piping (for Mechanical Rooms and Exposed Areas): Seamless
copper tubing, Type K or L, ASTM B88; with cast-bronze solder joint
fittings, ANSI B1.18; or wrought-copper solder-joint fittings, ANSI
B16. 22; except brass compression-type. fittings at connections to
equipment.
B. Air Piping: virgin polyethylene non-metallic tubing, ASTM 02737,
and with flame-retardant harness for multiple tubing. Use
compression or push-on polyethylene fittings.
C. Control Valves: Provide factory fabricated pneumatic control valves
of type, body material and pressure class indicated. Where type or
body material is not indicated, provide selection as determined by
manufacturer for installation requirements and pressure class, based
on maximum pressure and temperature in piping system. Provide valve
sized for a 5-psig maximum pressure drop across control valve.
Equip control valves with heavy-duty pneumatic actuators, with
proper shutoff rating for each individual application.
1. Water Service Valves: Equal percentage characteristics with
rangeability of SO to 1, and maximum full flow pressure drop
of 5 PSIG.
2. Single Seated Valves: Cage type trim, providing seating and
guiding surfaces for plug on "top ~d bottom" guided plugs.
3. Valve Trim and Stems: Polished stainless steel.
4. Packing: Spring-loaded Teflon, self-adjusting.
D. Dampers: Provide automatic control dampers as indicated, with
damper frames not less than formed 13-gauge galvanized steel.
Provide mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting. Provide damper
blades not less than formed 16-gauge galvanized steel, with maximum
blade width of 8 inches.
1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch diameter zinc-plated axles using
zinc-plated hardware. Seal off against spring stainless steel
blade bearings. Provide blade bearings of nylon and provide
thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Construct blade
linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass. submit
leakage and flow characteristics plus size schedule for
controlled dampers.
2. Operating Temperature Range: From -20 to 200 degrees F (-29
to 93 degrees C) .
3. Provide parallel or opposed blade design (as selected by
manufacturer's sizing technique) with inflatable steel blade
edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage less
than 10 CFM/sq. ft. of damper area, at differential pressure
of 4 inches w.g. when damper is being held by torque of SO
inch-pounds.
E. Pneumatic Operators: size pneumatic actuators to operate their
appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to
provide smooth modulating action or 2-position action as specified.
When so specified in sequence of operation, where otherwise
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973-3
5910861-000
indicated or where more than 2 actuators are to be operated in
sequence to each other, provide position feedback positive
positioners with adjustable startpoint and operating range.
F. Duplex Air Compressor: Provide duplex type air compressor with
horsepower, capacity and components as indicated on drawings and
specified herein.
1. Each compressor shall be tank-mounted and deliver 7.0 standard
cubic feet per minute at 80 psig operating pressure at 530 rpm
(maximum). Provide a 60-gallon storage tank.
2. Equip air compressor unit with the following:
a. Low resistance intake air filter and silencer; central
station air filter rated for 97-percent efficiency at
rated air flow; and pressure reducing station to reduce
high-pressure air to pressure required by pneumatic
control instruments. Provide combination
filter-pressure reducing station, or separate filter and
separate pressure reducing station.
b. High-pressure relief valve.
c. Stable springs with not less than 2-inch deflection and
not less than 1-inch freeboard underload to support the
compressor/receiver assembly.
d. High-pressure ASME storage tank, with drain test cock
and automatic moisture removal trap, capacity as
indicated.
e. Automatic alternator to equalize run time of each motor
when lead pressure electric {PEl switch is closed. Both
motors shall be activated when lag PE switch is closed.
Cabinet shall be factory wired complete with
transformer, control relays motor starters, terminal
strip, fuses and 2 pressure electric switches.
f. Belt guards.
g. Each air dryer shall be a noncycling, continuously
operated, hermetically sealed, refrigerant unit,
complete with heat exchangers, insulation, liquid
separator, steel cabinet with enamel finish, dual-type
thermometer, valved bypass and condensate trap suitable
for operation with oil-entrained air. Unit shall be
rated at 20 scfm at 100 psig at 100 degrees F inlet,
producing atmosphere dew point at -10 degrees F,
dehydrating at 100 psig. Unit shall have an operating
pressure not less than 175 psig. Refrigeration unit
shall be of not less than 1/5 hp for 115 volts, 60 Hz.
G. Temperature Sensors: Provide temperature sensors, sensor
transmitters and controller output . signals shall be directly
proportional to the variations in the measured variable. The
linearity shall be within z 1/2 percent for a 200 degree F span, and
z 1 percent for a 50 degree F span, throughout the scale range.
Capillary shall be compensated and shall be available in short
style, or 8- and 16-foot averaging lengths. Unit shall operate on
20 pounds psi input pressure and shall have a 3- to lS-psi output
over the specified range.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973-4
5910861-000
H . Receiver Controllers: Provide controllers with a calibrated
setpoint adjustment, minimum calibrated scale with no greater than
2 degrees F divisions for duct and immersion application and 1/10
inch of water for duct static pressure application. Setpoint
indication and an adjustable integral and proportional band covering
the complete range necessary for the specific application shall be
provided. Controller range shall match that of the temperature
sensor. Each device shall incorporate authority and remote setpoint
calibrated adjustments, as required. Provide integral relay,
capacity tank and associated tubing for complete installation of
proportional plus integral control.
I. Receiver Indicators: Provide receiver indicators with visual
readout for temperature and humidity, using the transmitted signal
from the sensor device to the receiver-controller device. The
readout and accuracy of the receiver indicator shall provide the
indicated value within ~ 1/2 percent .of the span of the measured
variable, as transmitted by the sensor. Factory calibration shall
be marked on back of instrument. Range shall match that of the
temperature or humidity sensor.
1. The combined accuracy of the sensor and the receiver indicator
shall be within 2 degrees F and 5 percent relative humidity of
the span.
2. Ambient conditions to 150 degrees F shall not cause a shift in
control point in pneumatic sensor, receiver controller or
indicator systems.
J. Room Temperature Transmitter: Provide transmitter designed to
transmit a 3- to 15-psig proportional pneumatic signal over a SO-to-
90 degrees F range to a calibrated receiver controller. Transmitter
shall have the following accessories:
1. Satin chrome painted cover.
2. Gauge tap adaptor.
3. Mounting bracket.
4. Restrictor tee.
5. Insulated backplate.
6. Wire guard.
K. Line Voltage Thermostats: Provide thermostats that have integral
MANUAL ON/OFF/AUTO selector switch, a maximum differential of 2
degrees F, concealed temperature adjustment and a locking cover.
Line-voltage thermostats shall be rated for the load, single- or
two-pole as required.
Insulating bases for thermostats located on exterior walls shall be
provided.
Line voltage thermostats shall be furnished and mounted under this
section, and wired in accordance with applicable sections of
Division 16 - ELECTRICAL, unless otherwise specified.
L. Duct Static Pressure Transmitter: Provide 2-pipe, forced feedback
with linear output, adjustable throttling range and operating range
compatible with the operating static of the fan it serves.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973-5
5910861-000
M. Solenoid Air Valves: Provide electrically operated valves as
required to supply air to pneumatic devices when coil is energized
or de-energized depending on supply and exhaust air connections.
The holding coil shall have applicable electrical characteristics.
N. Pressure Switches: Provide pressure actuated switches of single - or
multiple-step type as required to accomplish interlock. Switches
shall have adjustable setpoints and differentials and shall be
complete with NEMA 1 electrical enclosures unless specifically noted
otherwise.
O. Pneumatic Relays: Provide relays designed for panel mounting
whether of brass, aluminum or plastic construction. Relays shall be
capable of producing a linear output signal in relation to the input
signal or signals. Relays shall be capable of operating on a
maximum of 0.25 psi input signal change.
P. Pressure Gauges: Provide gauges to indicate supply and outlet air
pressure of control instruments and devices shall be the
manufacturer's standard, minimum 1-1/2-inch diameter face.
Q. Pneumatic System Accessories: Provide the following accessories
where required for complete system installation.
1. Diaphragm valves in sizes 1/4 and 3/8 inch shall have a forged
brass body with reinforced tetrafluorethylene diaphragm, AISI
300 series corrosion-resistant steel spring and round phenolic
handle.
2. Gauge cocks shall be T-head or lever-handle, ground-key type,
with washer and screw, constructed of polished ASTM B62 bronze
and rated for 125-psi saturated-steam service. End
connections shall suit the service.
3. pressure-reducing stations hall be installed complete with
pressure-reducing valve, particle filter, valved bypass,
pressure indicator upstream of . station, pressure indicator
downstream of station and regulated air-pressure relief valve.
4. Pressure regulator body shall be constructed of zinc or
aluminum die castings rated for the service. Diaphragm shall
be a reinforced air-, oil- and water- resistant elastomer. All
components exposed to the fluid*p1474X~controlled shall
be nonferrous metallic or nonmetallic materials. Valve shall
be a balanced-construction relieving type to automatically
prevent excessive pressure buildup. Valve shall produce an
essentially flat, reduced-pressure curve for the capacity
demand of the system.
5. Particle filters shall be constructed of zinc or aluminum die
castings, rated for the service, and furnished with ips
connections. Bowl material shall be equipped with manual
draincock. Liquid particles shall be separated by centrifugal
and quiet zone action. Solid particles, to 15 microns, shall
be removed by filter elements of sintered bronze or corrosion-
resistant steel mesh.
6. Combination manual drain filter/regulator units conforming to
the above requirements will be acceptable in lieu of separate
units.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973-6
5910861-000
7. Filter shall provide filtration efficiencies of 99.9 percent
for particles of 0.5 micron or larger in addition to removing
99.4 percent of 2.0-micron and larger particles of airborne
lubricating oil. Filter pressure/temperature ratings shall be
150 psi and 150 degrees F, respectively.
8. Pressure relief valves shall be rated for the pressure of the
high-pressure side and sized for the full installed capacity
of the pressure regulating station at the pressure of the low-
pressure side. Valve shall be set at not more than 20 percent
above the correct low- side pressure. Valve shall be ASME code
rated and labeled. Seat material shall be suitable for the
service.
9. Pressure gauges shall conform to requirements specified
herein. Pressure gauges shall be Type I (gauge for air,
steam, oil and water), Class I (Pressure gauge), with range
indicated. Pressure-gauge size shall be 1-1/2-inch nominal
diameter. Case shall be AISI 300 series corrosion-resistant
steel with NO.4 standard commercial polish or better.
R. Control Panels: Construct control cabinets as specified herein.
1. Cabinets shall be made of steel or aluminum,- suitably
reinforced and braced to provide a flat-faced, rigid-front
panel.
2. Surfaces shall be free of scale, welding slag and dirt, and
shall be flat without waves. Handling during installation
shall not distort or buckle the cabinet.
3. Cutouts shall be square with panels to ensure that instruments
will be installed level and square.
4. Finished cutouts and holes shall be free of burrs and sharp
edges. Cutouts shall be made up of modular sections, or
fabricated sections, in sizes suitable for handling. Cabinet
section joints shall be neat and straight. Cabinets shall be
securely fastened together and aligned, and each cabinet shall
be securely wall or floor anchored, as required.
5. Exterior hardware (screws, hinges, etc.) shall be high-grade
steel with polished nickel or chrome-plated finish.
6. Interior hardware (screws, nuts, etc.) shall be cadmium-plated
steel.
7 . Access doors shall be provided wi th hinges, latches and locks.
Cabinet frames shall be sufficiently sturdy to prevent doors
from sagging when open. Latches shall be provided to hold
doors open at 90 degrees and roller latches shall be provided
to hold doors closed. Keys shall be furnished and shall be
common to all access door locks.
8. Cabinet shall be primed and finished with manufacturer's
standard color of enamel paint.
9. Cabinet shall be provided with individual modules portraying
systems configurations. Portrayals shall be by approved
color-coded graphic tapes in laminated plastic securely
fastened to the front panel. Edges shall be beveled and
finished smooth and shall be free of waves, scratches or
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973 -7
5910861-000
gouges. Instruments and auxiliary equipment shall be
identified by engraved plastic or formica labels; tape is not
acceptable.
10. Cabinet shall contain all controllers, and other instruments;
a 1-1/2-inch gauge showing pressure of primary air to
pneumatic controllers; and 1-1/2-inch gauges showing pressure
of controlled air from each controller.
S. Time
with
l.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Clock: Provide a 7-day time clock for each air-handling unit
the following features and accessories.
Clock shall be designed for 120 VAC electrical power.
Ambient temperature limits of -4 degrees to 130 degrees F.
Automatically recharged battery back-up that will operate
clock up to 8 hours during a power failure.
Automatic switching of electrical equipment on a daily or
weekly basis.
Time clock and controls shall be UL listed.
Four-pole contacts (2 NO 2 NC) rated for 40 amps,
noninductive per pole at 120 volts.
Time clock shall be mounted within its respective air-handling
unit control panel. Provide mounting bracket and all
necessary hardware for complete installation.
A. Examine areas and conditions under which pneumatic control systems
are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. General: Install systems and materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, roughing-in drawings and details shown
on drawings.
B. Control Air piping: Accessible tubing is defined as that tubing run
in mechanical equipment rooms; inside mechanical equipment
enclosures, such as heating and cooling units, instrument panels
etc.; in pipe chases, or suspended ceilings with easy access.
Inaccessible tubing is defined as that tubing run in concrete slabs;
furred walls; or ceilings with no access.
1 . Provide copper tubing with maximum unsupported length of 3
feet, 0 inches, for accessible tubing run exposed to view.
Polyethylene tubing may be used in lieu of above, when run
within adequately supported, rigid enclosure, such as metallic
raceways, EMT, or PVC pipe. Terminal single-line connections
less than 18 inches in length may be copper tubing, or
polyethylene tubing run inside flexible steel protection.
Accessible tubing run in concealed locations, such as pipe
chases, suspended ceilings with easy access, etc., may be
copper or polyethylene bundled and sheathed tubing.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973 -8
5910861-000
2 . Provide copper or polyethylene tubing for inaccessible tubing,
other than in concrete pour. If.polyethylene tubing is used,
install in EMT or vinyl-jacketed polyethylene tubing.
3. Provide copper or polyethylene tubing when installed in
concrete pour. If copper is used, protect at floor line with
EMT extending 6 inches above floor and 6 inches into pour.
Pressure test before and after pour for leak and pinch. If
polyethylene is used, provide EMT conduit in pour and extend
6 inches above floor line; pull tubing through conduit after
pour. Polyethylene bundle and jacketed tubing may be run in
pour without EMT protection, except at floor line.
4. Pressure Test control air piping at 30 psi for 24 hours. Test
fails if more than 5 PSI loss occurs.
5. Fasten flexible connections bridging cabinets and doors,
neatly along hinge side, and protect against abrasion. Tie and
support tubing neatly.
6. Number-code or color-code tubing, except local individual room
control tubing, for future identification and servicing of
control system.
C. Control Wiring: Install control wiring, without splices between
terminal points, color-coded. Install in neat workmanlike manner,
securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical
Code.
1. Install circuits over 25-volt with color-coded No. 12 wire in
electric metallic tubing.
2. Install circuits under 25-volt with color-coded No. 18 wire
with 0.031-inch high temperature {105 degrees F (41 degrees
C)} plastic insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath
over all.
3. Install electronic circuits with color-coded No. 22 wire with
0.023 - inch polyethylene insulation on each conductor with
plastic-jacketed copper shield over all.
4. Install low voltage circuits, located in concrete slabs and
masonry walls, or exposed in occupied areas, in electrical
conduit.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Start-Up: Start-up, test, and adjust pneumatic control systems in
presence of manufacturer's authorized representative. Demonstrate
compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or
scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
C. Final Adjustment: After completion of installation, adjust
thermostats, control valves, motors and similar equipment provided
as work of this section.
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973-9
5910861-000
1. Final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained
personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of primary
temperature control system.
END OF SECTION 15973
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEMS
15973-10
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, PLORIDA
SECTION 15985 - SEQUENCE OP
OPERATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provJ.sJ.ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B . Division 15, Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS applies to
work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Sequence of operation is hereby defined as the manner and method by
which controls function. Requirements for each type of control
system operation are specified in this section.
B. Operating equipment, devices, and system components required for
control systems are specified in other Division-1s Controls' sections
of these specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TIME CLOCK AHU-1 (TYPICAL FOR AHU-2)
A. The time clock shall be energized by a toggle switch.
B. The time clock shall have 2 independently controlled output contacts.
1. Output contact No.1 shall close to energize solenoid air valve
S-l and relays R-1 and R-3 at selected start times.
2. Output contact NO.2 shall close to energize solenoid air valve
S-2 and relay R-2 at selected occupied times.
3. Output contact NO.1 shall open to deenergize solenoid air valve
S-l and relays R-1 and R-3 at selected stop times.
4. Output contact NO.2 shall open to deenergize solenoid air valve
S-2 and relay R-2 at selected unoccupied times.
C. Start, stop, occupied and unoccupied schedules shall be coordinated
with the Owner's representative and the time clock shall be set prior
to submission of controls certification.
3.2 AIR-HANDLING UNIT AHU-1 FAN START/STOP (TYPICAL FOR AHU-2)
A. With the start switch in the "off" position, the fan motor shall be
deenergized.
B. With the starter switch in the "hand" position and the fire alarm
contact closed, the fan motor shall be energized.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15985-1
5910861-000
C. With the starter switch in the "auto" position and the fire alarm
contact closed, the fan shall:
1. Start when relay R-1 is energized by the time clock.
2. Stop when relay R-1 is deenergized by the time clock.
3.3 AIR-HANDLING UNIT AHU-1 INLET VANES (TYPICAL FOR AHU-2)
A. The inlet vane damper shall be normally closed.
B. Main air shall be available to the inlet vane controls when solenoid
air valve S-l is energized by the time clock.
C. Static pressure transmitter SPS -1 shall modulate the inlet vane
dampers through a reverse-acting receiver controller to maintain the
supply duct static pressure at adjustable setpoint (0.5 inches WG) .
3.4 AIR-HANDLING UNIT AHU-1 COOLING COIL (TYPI~ FOR AHU-2)
A. Control valve V-9 shall be normally open to bypass.
B. Main air shall be available to the cooling coil controls when
solenoid air valve S-l is energized by the time clock.
C. Supply air temperature transmitter SAT-l shall modulate the 3-way
chilled water valve V-9 through a receiver-controller to maintain the
leaving air temperature at adjustable setpoint (57 degrees F) .
3.5 AIR-HANDLING UNIT AHU-1 OUTSIDE AIR DAMPER (TYPICAL FOR AHU-2)
A. Outside air damper DM-9 shall be normally closed.
B. Main air shall open outside air damper DM-9 when solenoid air valve
S-2 is energized by the time clock.
C. Adjust open position of damper DM-9 to allow scheduled outside air
flow to air-handling unit.
3.6 AIR-HANDLING UNIT AHU-1 HEATING COIL (TYPICAL FOR AHU-2)
A. Pressure switches shall be normally open.
B. Main air shall be available to the heating coil controls when
solenoid air valve S-l is energized by the time clock.
C. Return air temperature transmitter RAT-1 shall close pressure
switches through a reverse-acting receiver-controller to energize the
stages of electric heat.
3.7 ZONE HEATING COIL RHC-1 (TYPICAL FOR RHC-2 THROUGH RHC-8)
A. Control valve V-1 shall be normally open to bypass.
B. Main air shall be available to the zone heating coil controls when
solenoid air valve 8-1 is energized by the time clock.
C. The room temperature transmitter shall modulate 3 -way condenser water
valve V-1 through a reverse-acting receiver-controller to maintain
the room temperature at adjustable setpoint (78 degrees F) .
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15985-2
5910861-000
3.8 ZONE VOLUME DAMPER DM-1 (TYPICAL FOR DM-2 THROUGH DM-8)
A. Volume damper DM-1 shall be normally open.
B. Main air shall be available to the zone volume damper controls when
solenoid air valve S-l is energized by the time clock.
C. With condenser water valve V-1 fully open to coil RHC-1, the room
temperature transmitter shall modulate zone volume damper DM-l
through a reverse-acting receiver-controller to maintain the room
temperature at adjustable setpoint (78 degrees F) .
D. Adjust closed position of damper DM-1 to allow minimum air flow as
scheduled in "Hot Water Heating Coil Schedule" on drawing sheet M-1.
3.9 EXHAUST FAN EF-1 (TYPICAL FOR EF-2, EF-3 AND EF-S)
A. With the starter switch in the "off" position, the fan motor shall be
deenergized.
B. With the starter switch in the "hand" position, the fan motor shall
be energized.
C. With the starter switch in the "auto" position, the fan motor shall:
1. Start when relay R-2 is energized by the time clock.
2. Stop when relay R-2 is deenergized by the time clock.
3.10 EXHAUST FAN EF-4 (TYPICAL FOR EF-6)
A. With the starter switch in the "off" position, the fan motor shall be
deenergized.
B. With the starter switch in the "hand" position, the fan motor shall
be energized.
C. With the starter switch in the "auto" position, the fan motor shall:
1. Start when line voltage thermostat senses room temperature above
adjustable setpoint (85 degrees F) .
2. Stop when line voltage thermostat senses room temperature below
adjustable setpoint (85 degrees F) .
3. Fan EF-6 shall stop if generator is running.
3.11 PUMP P-1 (TYPICAL FOR P-2)
A. With the starter switch in the "off" position, the pump motor shall
be deenergized.
B. With the starter switch in the "hand" position, the pump motor shall
be energized.
c. With the starter switch in the "auto" position, the pump motor shall:
1. Start when relay R-s is energized by the chiller control panel.
2. Stop when relay R-S is deenergized by the chiller control panel.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15985-3
5910861-000
3.12 CHILLER CH-1
A. Chiller CH-1 shall begin start sequence when the following conditions
occur:
1. Time clock AHU-1 AHU-2 energizes relay R-3 or R-6 and
2. Return air temperature transmitter RAT-lor RAT-2 closes
pneumatic-electric relay PE-1 or PE-2 when return air
temperature at AHU-1 or AHU-2 is at or above adjustable setpoint
(79 degrees F) .
B. Chiller control panel shall energize relay R-s to start pumps P-1 and
P-2.
C. Chiller shall start when differential pressure switches DPS-1 and
DPS-2 close to prove water flow.
D. Chiller CH-1 shall begin stop sequence when the following conditions
occur:
1. Time clock AHU-1 and AHU-2 deenergize relays R-3 or R-6 or
2.
RAT-1 and RAT-2 oP7n
PE-2 when return aJ.r
at or above adjustable
Return air temperature transmitter
pneumatic-electric relays PE-1 and
temperature at AHU-1 and AHU-2 is
setpoint (73 degrees F) .
E. Chiller control panel shall deenergize relay R-5 to stop pumps P-1
and P-2.
F. Chiller shall stop any time differential pressure switch DPS-1 or
DPS-2 opens to indicate loss of water flow.
END OF SECTION 15985
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
15985-4
",~",",',,""'_";'H~t;i_.I"'''*""iIIlu~,_~..'..t1.ol;...:"j'''~,i''''i'''"..".,.,,,;;.;;."......d.'..,
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TERMINAL BmLDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 15990 - TESTING.
ADoJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general prov1sJ.ons of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply
to work of this section.
B. Related Sections:
1. General requirements for testing agencies are specified in the
Division 1, Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES.
2. Other Division 15 sections specify balancing devices and their
installation, and materials and installations of mechanical
systems.
3 . Individual Division 15 system sections specify leak testing
requirements and procedures.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section specifies the requirements and procedures total
mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements
include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the
mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and
recording and reporting the results.
B. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:
1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges; including variable
volume systems.
2. Return air systems.
3. Exhaust air systems.
4. Hydronic systems.
S. Verify temperature control system operation.
C. Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.
D. This Section does not include:
1. Testing pressure vessels for compliance with safety codes;
2. Specifications for materials for patching mechanical systems;
3. Specifications for materials and installation of adjusting and
balancing devices. If devices must be added to achieve proper
adjusting and balancing, refer to the respective system sections
for materials and installation requirements.
4. Requirements and procedures for piping and ductwork systems
leakage tests.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990-1
5910861-000
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking
and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the
design objectives. It includes:
1. The balance of air and water distribution;
2. Adjustment of total system to pro~ide design quantities;
3. Electrical measurement;
4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic
controls;
S. Sound and vibration measurement.
B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.
C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns
at the terminal equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling).
D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system
(submains, branches, and terminals) according to specified design
quantities.
E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work
operations to yield reproducible results.
F. Report Forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in
logical order for submission and review. These data should also form
the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the
distribution system. These are supply inlets on water terminals,
supply outlets on air terminals, return outlets on water terminals,
and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as registers,
grilles, diffusers, louvers, and hoods.
H. Main: Duct or pipe containing the system's major or entire fluid
flow.
I. Submain: Duct or pipe containing part of the systems' capaci ty and
serving two or more branch mains.
J. Branch Main: Duct or pipe serving two or more terminals.
K. Branch: Duct or pipe serving a single terminal.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Agency Data:
1. Submit proof that the proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing
agency meets the qualifications specified herein.
B. Engineer and Technician's Data:
1. Submit,proof that the Test and Balance Engineer assigned to
superv~se the procedures, and the technicians proposed to
perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990-2
5910861-000
C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting,
and balancing procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this
project.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include
how to test, adjust, and balance the building systems. Include this
information in maintenance data specified in Division 1 and Section
15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
E. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard
forms prepared by the AABC are proposed.
F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports
bearing the seal and signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The
reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested,
adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards;
are an accurate representation of how the systems have been
installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating
at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing
procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities
measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems.
Follow the procedures and format specified below:
1. Draft Reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures, prepare draft reports on the approved
forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete,
factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft
reports in the same manner specified for the final reports.
Submit two complete sets of draft reports. Only one complete
set of draft reports will be returned.
2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports,
prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted
as specified below. Submit two complete sets of final reports.
3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms
prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and
system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms
complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in
reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge
labels with the project identification and a title descriptive
of the contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the
below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs:
a. General Information and Summary.
b. Air Systems.
c. Hydronic Systems.
d. Temperature Control Systems.
e. Special Systems.
f. Sound and Vibration Systems.
4.
Report Contents:
forms and data:
Provide the following minimum information,
a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to
identify testing, adjusting, and balancing agency,
Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990-3
5910861-000
Include addresses, and contact names and telephone
numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing
the seal and name address, telephone number, and signature
of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in
this division a listing of the instrumentations used for
the procedures along with the proof of calibration.
b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate
forms containing as a minimum, the information indicated
on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC for each
respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram
for each item of equipment and system to accompany each
respective report form.
G. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation
has been calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced
standards, within a period of 6 months prior to starting the project.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency Qualifications:
1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and
balancing agency meeting the qualifications specified below, to
be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and
balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to
produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking
installations for conformity to design, measurement and
establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems
as required to meet design specifications, and recording and
reporting the results.
2. An independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency
certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those
testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and
having at least one Professional Engineer registered in the
State in which the services are to be performed, certified by
AABC as a Test and Balance Engineer.
B. Codes and Standards:
1. AABC: "National Standards For Total System Balance."
2. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37,
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
C. Prebalancing Conference: Prior to 'beginning of the testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures, schedule and conduct a
conference with the Architect-Engineer and representatives of
installers of the mechanical systems. The objective of the
conference is final coordination and verification of system operation
and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to
beginning procedures.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems before hydronic systems.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990-4
5910861-000
B. Test, adj ust and balance air conditioning systems during summer
season and heating systems during winter season, including at least
a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 degrees F wet
bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10
degrees F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition.
Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Before operating the system, perform these steps:
1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly
acquainted with the design intent.
2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling
equipment, outlets (supply, return, and exhaust) and temperature
control diagrams.
3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations.
4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to
terminal units to determine variations of installation from
design.
S. Check filters for cleanliness.
6.
Check dampers (both volume and fire)
position, and temperature control
installation before starting fans.
for correct and locked
for completeness of
7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain
manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended procedures for
testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to
permit a crosscheck with required "fan volumes.
8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most
accurate duct traverses.
9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position.
10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and
piping layouts to facilitate reporting.
11. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
12. Check fan belt tension.
13. Check fan rotation.
3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING
A. Before operating the system perform these steps:
1. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves.
2. Remove and clean all strainers.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990-5
5910861-000
3 . Examine hydronic systems and determine if water has been treated
and cleaned.
4. Check pump rotation.
S. Clean and set automatic fill valves for required system
pressure.
6. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound
and that the system is completely full of water.
7. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all
are installed and operating freely (automatic type) or to bleed
air completely (manual type).
8. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
9. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
10. Check and set operating temperatures of chillers to design
requirements.
11. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
3 .3 MEASUREMENTS
A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements,
calibrated to the tolerances specified in the referenced standards.
Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against
damage.
B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced
standards.
C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring
accuracy and are best suited to the function being measured.
D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with
scale ranges proper for the value being measured.
F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which
will result in a repeatability error of less than 5 percent. When
measuring a single point, repeat readings until two consecutive
identical values are obtained.
G. Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to
prevent parallax.
H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved
in estimating average of rapidly fluctuation readings.
I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.
3.4 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified,
in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced
standards.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990-6
">",~~~,,,,___""""""'_"'~"'<"""-~"'<_""""'~'~"''''~~'''''''''_''''_.lilI~.~...."","........i.',~:,,,."''''',..,'',..,,::.,'i,..;'':.'^'.,',:,
5910861-000
B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes
to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of
procedures.
C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical
to those removed.
D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.
E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve
indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and
devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable,
permanent identification materials.
G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system
modifications, and resubmit test results.
3.5 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION
A.
Test and adjust
accordance with
standards.
mechanical systems for sound and vibration in
the detailed instructions of the referenced
3 . 6 RECORD AND REPORT DATA
A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in
accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced
standards, and as approved on the sample report forms.
B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory
mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training:
1. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting
procedures and testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
Review with the Owner's personnel, .the information contained in
the Operating and Maintenance Data specified in Division 1 and
Section 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.
2 . Schedule training wi th Owner through the Archi tect - Engineer wi th
at least 7 days prior notice.
END OF SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
15990-7
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERKIRAL BUILDING
MONROE CCXJRTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL
WORK, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Division 16 of the specifications covers all electrical work for the
project. Work shall include labor, (including time necessary to
investigate existing conditions), material, tools, temporary wiring,
accessories, etc. required to accomplish the work as specified and
shown on the drawings.
1.2 CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Installation shall comply with all laws applying to electrical
installation in effect; with the regulations of the National
Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, other applicable
publications of the National Fire Protection Association, all local
governing codes and ordinances and with the regulations of the
serving utility company. Provide required permits.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:
1. Shop Drawings: Shall be submitted on equipment as indicated
under each section of this division. Shop drawings shall
include sufficient information to indicate complete compliance
with specifications.
2.
Product Data:
installation
necessary.
trademark.
Shall include illustrations, catalog sheets,
instructions, drawings, and certifications as
Each sheet shall show manufacturer's name or
3. Where items are those specified, only a list of such items shall
be provided, except where shop drawings and product data are
specifically required.
4. At the time of each submission, any deviations from the Contract
Documents shall be called to the attention of the Architect-
Engineer in writing, and be plainly marked on the shop drawings
and product data.
B. Record Drawings:
1. Provide one complete set of contract drawings in clean,
undamaged condition, indicating all significant changes from the
work as shown. Use multiple pencil colors to aid in the
distinction between work of separate electrical systems. In
general, record every substantive installation of electrical
work which previously is either not shown or field modified.
a.
Show exact locations of underground conduits,
interior and exterior, drawn to scale and
dimensioned from building column lines.
both
fully
ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
16010-1
5910861-000
b. Indicate mains and branches of wiring systems, with
panelboards and control devices located and numbered.
Locate devices requiring maintenance.
c. Indicate changes in equipment ratings and locations.
d. Indicate scope of each change order, noting change order
number.
2 . Refer to General Conditions and Division 1 for additional
requirements pertaining to record documents.
C. Submit the following upon completion of the work:
1. Certificate of final inspection from local authority.
2. Tabulation of all motors listing respective manufacturer,
horsepower, nameplate voltage and current, actual running
current after installation and overload heater rating.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Materials shall comply with standards of Underwriter's Laboratories,
Inc., where standards have been established for the particular
product and the various NEMA, ANSI, ASTM, IEEE, AEIC, IPCEA or other
publications referenced.
1.5 ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. The Contractor shall coordinate the electrical service installation
with the Florida Keys Electric Cooperative Association (FKEC) to
ensure their approval and compliance with FKEC's rules and
regulations for electric service.
B. Contractor shall coordinate the underground electrical service
installation with the sitework Contractor who is installing the
primary underground service and the concrete pad for FKEC's
transformers.
C. Electric energy for the project will be provided by FKEC using 3,
single-phase, pad-mounted transformers to provide 208Y/120 volts
secondary service.
D. The Contractor shall provide all elements of the system on the load
side of the FKEC transformers as necessary to ensure a properly
working system.
E. The building service grounding electrode system shall comply with
FKEC's regulations, the Monroe County Electrical Code Supplement to
the National Electrical Code, and the National Electrical Code
requirements.
1 . 6 MANUFACTURERS' NAMES AND CATALOG NUMBERS
A. In some instances, specific references have been made to one or more
manufacturer's names and model or catalog numbers. Use of names and
catalog numbers does not indicate that the equipment specified is
necessarily an "off the shelf" item. Variances may be due to
requirement of a desired finish, material, or other modification.
B. In the case of panelboards, safety switches and other equipment
requiring wire and cable terminations, ascertain that lug sizes and
ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
16010-2
5910861-000
wiring gutters or space allowed for proper accommodation and
termination of the wire and cables are adequate.
1 . 7 PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Electrical equipment shall be protected from the weather, in
particular, dripping or splashing water, at all times during
shipment, storage and construction. Manufacturer's recommendations
with regard to storage and protection shall be followed. Should any
apparatus be subjected to possible injury by water, it shall be
thoroughly dried and put through a dielectric test, at the expense of
the Contractor, to ascertain the suitability of the apparatus or it
shall be replaced without additional cost to the Owner.
B. Damaged or Defective Equipment: Inspect all electrical equipment and
materials prior to installation. Damaged equipment and materials
shall not be installed or placed in service until the Owner has been
notified. Replace or repair to new condition and test repaired
damaged equipment in compliance with industry standards at no
additional cost to the Owner. Equipment required for the test shall
be provided by the Contractor.
1.8 WORKING CLEARANCES
A. Working clearances around equipment requiring electrical service
shall comply with Code requirements. Should there be apparent
violations of clearances, notify the Architect-Engineer before
proceeding with connection or placement of equipment.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Installation studies shall be made to coordinate the electrical work
and to coordinate with the work of other trades.
B. For locations where several elements of electrical or combined
mechanical and electrical work must be sequenced and positioned with
precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare
coordination drawings at accurate scale showing the actual physical
dimensions required for the installation to assure proper integration
of equipment with building systems.
C. Provide approved shop drawings to all required disciplines and verify
final electrical characteristics before roughing power feeds to any
equipment. When electrical data on approved shop drawings differs
from contemplated design, make the necessary adjustments to the
wiring, disconnect, and branch-circuit protection for the equipment
actually installed.
D. Damage from interference caused by inadequate coordination by the
Contractor shall be rectified at no additional cost to the Owner.
1. 10 ELEVATOR
A. In the elevator machine room and the elevator pit, Contractor shall
coordinate location of light fixtures, light switch, wall receptacle
and all disconnect switches with the elevator equipment supplier and
wi th the state or local elevator inspector prior to roughing- in
conduits or installing electrical equipment.
B. Contractor shall provide all necessary control signaling relays,
wiring and conduit between:
ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
16010-3
5910861-000
1. The fire alarm control panel and the elevator machine room.
2. The smoke detector in each elevator lobby and the elevator
machine room.
3. The "prior to retransfer" signal contacts in the generator
automatic transfer switch and the elevator machine room.
4. The telephone system and the elevator machine room.
C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the elevator
equipment supplier's shop drawings to ensure compliance with all
recommendations and requirements.
1 . 11 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to this
Division.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. All equipment of a particular kind such as wiring devices and
panelboards, and all lighting fixtures of the same type, shall be the
product of the same manufacturer.
2.2 ACCESS PANELS
A. Panels required for access to equipment shall be provided as
specified in Division 8.
2.3 LABELS
A. Labels shall be provided for each motor controller, safety switch,
relay, panelboard, contactor, timer, control device, meter and
circuit breaker. Labels shall be laminated, phenolic strips 1/16-
inch thick and engraved to show black letters on white background not
less than 1/4 inch in height. Strips shall be of size to properly
fit manufacturer's brackets and legible. Where brackets are not
provided, labels shall be mounted with screws, or approved adhesive.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 METHOD OF PROCEDURE
A. Erect equipment parts at such time and in such manner as to minimize
interferences and delays in the execution of the work.
B. Care shall be used in the erection and installation of all equipment
and materials to avoid marring surfaces of the work. Damages shall
be repaired at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE
A. Equipmen~ requi7ing electrical service shall not be energized or
placed J.n servJ.ce until all interested parties have been duly
notified and are present or have waived. their right to be present.
Where equipment to be placed in service involves service or
connection from another contractor or the Owner, the Contractor shall
ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
16010-4
5910861-000
notify the Owner in writing when the equipment will be ready. The
Owner shall be notified as far in advance as possible, of the date
the various items of equipment will be complete.
3.3 OPENING AND SLEEVES FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Provide openings through walls, partitions, floors and roofs as
required for electrical work.
B. Provide sleeves for electrical work passing through walls,
partitions, floors and roofs, as indicated on the drawings.
1. Sleeves shall extend through floors, walls and partitions and
shall be cut flush with each surface unless otherwise specified.
Fire wall or floor integrity shall be restored after
penetration. Ground floor level shall not require conduit
sleeves.
2. Sleeves in concrete and masonry walls, concrete floors and roofs
shall be of standard weight steel pipe, finished with smooth
edges. Sleeves for walls and partitions other than masonry,
concrete and suspended ceilings shall be No. 22 U.S.G.
galvanized iron.
3. All specified floor holes and space between floor sleeves and
passing conduit shall be caulked with a fire barrier system
classified by UL as a through-penetration firestop device.
Acceptable: 3M brand Fire Barrier caulk and putty; T&B Flame-
Safe firestop compound; IPC Flamesafe and KBS.
4. Where conduits pass through waterproofed floor or walls, design
of sleeves shall be such that waterproofing can be flashed into
and around the sleeves.
3 .4 SUPPORTS FOR CONDUIT AND EQUIPMENT
A. Shall be supported from structural members and not from metal deck
and slab assemblies.
B. All lighting fixtures shall be properly supported to structural
members.
3.5 FINAL INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The work shall be thoroughly tested in the presence of the Owner's
representative to demonstrate that the entire system is in proper
working order and in accordance with the drawings and specifications.
Each motor with its control shall be run as nearly as possible under
operating conditions for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate
satisfactory operation. All main switches and circuit breakers shall
be operated, but not necessarily at full load. During final
inspection, furnish the test instruments and qualified personnel to
perform complete testing.
B. Costs of tests, inCluding expenses incident to retest occasioned by
defects and failures of the equipment to meet the specifications
shall be paid by the Contractor.
C. Secondary service cable and branch feeder cables shall be tested
prior to final connection. Furnish the test instruments and
qualified personnel to perform testing. Test results shall be logged
ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
16010-5
5910861-000
and given to Architect-Engineer for approval. Feeder conductors
shall be subject to an insulation resistance test using a "megger."
END OF SECTION 16010
ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL
16010-6
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBNGBR TERIIDIAL BmLDING
MONROE CCXJRTY. FLORIDA
SECTION 16110 - RACKNAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. All wiring, unless otherwise indicated, shall be installed in
metallic raceway. Minimum size shall be 1/2 inch unless otherwise
noted. Raceway system shall be sized to suit number and size
conductors to be installed or of size shown, if larger. Size may be
increased to facilitate pulling of conductors. Provide pull boxes
where required by code.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include catalog cuts of raceway, fitting and
expansion/deflection fittings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. For each electrical raceway system required, provide a complete
assembly of conduit, with fittings including, but not necessarily
limited to, connectors, nipples, couplings, elbows, outlet box
covers, expansion fittings and other components and accessories as
needed to form a complete system of type indicated.
B. The following types of conduit shall be installed as listed below
unless otherwise permitted by these specifications or the drawings:
1. Rigid steel conduit per Section 16112 - CONDUIT, RIGID STEEL.
2. Electric metallic tubing per Section 16113 - CONDUIT, ELECTRIC
METALLIC TOBING.
3. PVC conduit per Section 16114 - CONDUIT, PVC.
4. Flexible metallic conduit and liquid flexible steel conduit per
Section 16115 - CONDUIT, FLEXIBLE METALLIC.
C. Bushings and connectors for terminating conduits into panels, outlet
boxes, etc. shall be nylon insulated metallic bushings or connectors.
2.2 CONDUIT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Surface mounting conduits in interior locations shall be approved
equal in weight and quality to T&B #1210 Series for GRC and IMC and
T&B #4160 Series for EMT. Surface mounting conduits in exterior
locations and in service areas shall be one-hole, HOG finish
malleable cast iron straps approved equal in weight and quality to
T&B #1275-1288 with matching spacer, T&B #1350 Series.
B. Suspended Conduits: Steel City #6HO Series or approved equal
adjustable hanger for single installations. Multiple conduits shall
be trapeze-type hangers where practicable. Support members shall be
similar and equal to Unistrut #P-2000/4000, or approved equal,
selected for span and loading in accordance with the manufacturer's
RACEWAYS
16110-1
5910861-000
recommendations, using two or more rods of 3/16-inch diameter or
greater as required. RSC clamps shall be Unistrut #P-1109 Series, or
approved equal. EMT Clamps shall be Unistrut #P-142s Series, or
approved equal.
2.3 INSERTS AND ANCHORS
A. New Concrete Work: Adjustable concrete inserts, Grinnell or approved
equal.
B. Installation in Shear or Compression in Existing Concrete: Phillips
Redhead, Pierce, A-J or Diamond.
C. Concrete Block Walls: Toggle bolt or "molly" anchors. Where loads
require, provide thru-bolts and 3/16-inch thickness backup plates,
properly concealed.
D. Steel Beam Clamps: Steel City #500 Series or approved equal.
E. Where loads require, provide galvanized structural steel framework,
secured to structure above in an approved manner.
2 .4 METAL SURFACE RACEWAY
A. Where indicated on drawings, provide metal surface raceway system
complete with all factory fabricated fittings.
2.5 PULL LINE
A. Shall be polyolefin pull line, Jet Line No. 232, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Concealed conduits shall be run in walls and overhead in ceiling
space unless specifically indicated to be run in floor slab.
B. Exposed conduits and conduits in ceiling space shall be run parallel
to building lines.
C. Maximum size raceway concealed in concrete slabs shall not exceed 33
percent of the slab thickness. Conduits shall be installed at center
of slab. Conduits shall be installed so that only two cross at a
given point and sufficiently within slab to prevent slab cracking.
Route conduit on hangers below ceiling in locations specifically
approved by the Architect-Engineer.
D. Field bends shall be made with tools designed for conduit bending.
Heating of metal conduit to facilitate bending is not permitted.
Changes in direction of runs shall be made with sYmmetrical bends or
cast-metal fittings. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be
installed.
E. Conduit shall be secured in place and protected where necessary to
prevent damage to the work during construction. Ends of conduit runs
shall be blocked with tape or other approved material to avoid
entrance of plaster, concrete or other debris.
F. Where condui t installed in concrete or masonry extends across
building expansion joints, expansion fittings as manufactured by OZ,
RACEWAYS
16110-2
5910861-000
Crouse-Hinds, or Appleton, with approved ground straps and clamps,
shall be provided.
G. Location and sizing of conduit sleeves, if required, passing through
floors and walls that are not shown on the drawings shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. All sleeves, unless otherwise
noted, shall be rigid galvanized steel. Unused floor holes and space
between sleeves and passing conduit shall be caulked with a fire
barrier system classified by UL as a through-penetration fires top
device.
H. Field cuts on conduit shall be made with a hand or power saw or
approved conduit machine, and shall be made square. All male threads
shall be painted with Z.R.C. cold galvanizing compound or approved
equal.
I. Conduit parallel to, or crossing, uninsulated hot water pipes shall
be separated 12 inches if parallel or 7 inches if crossing. Where
hot water pipe lines are insulated, parallel or crossing conduit
shall clear the insulated surface by 2 inches. Conduit shall not be
run directly under cold water lines and shall be separated in other
directions by at least 3 inches.
J. Conduit shall not be secured directly to other piping. Support
conduit with separate supports directly from building structure.
K. Conduit bushings shall be of the nylon insulating type. Empty
conduits shall terminate with smooth nylon insulating bushings or be
capped as indicated.
L. Conduit seals and firestops shall be provided where required by codes
and where passing from an air conditioned space to non-conditioned
space. Where conduits terminate in a pull-box or outlet box at a
point separating the air conditioned space from the non-conditioned
space, conduit end may be stuffed with fiberglass. If the conduit
run is to be continuous, install conduit outlet or junction box and
seal as above.
M. Raceway shall be supported at intervals of not more than 8 feet, with
pipe straps, wall brackets, strap hangers, ceiling trapeze, toggle
bolts through concrete or tile blocks, expansion bolts in concrete or
brick and machine screws or welded studs on steel work. Wooden plugs
in concrete and masonry are not acceptable. Raceways and pipe straps
shall not be welded to steel structure members.
N. Conduit installation shall follow layout shown on drawings. Layout
is, however, diagrammatic only and where changes are necessary due to
structural conditions, interference with other apparatus or other
causes, such changes shall be made without additional cost to the
Owner. Offsets in conduits are not indicated but shall be installed
as required by the conditions.
O. Pull lines shall be installed in empty raceways.
P. Verify exact stub up location and termination requirement for all
necessary power and control for all items and equipment being served.
Q. Separate raceway systems shall be provided for conductors or systems
in accordance with the following, except as otherwise indicated on
the drawings:
1. Each panelboard distribution system.
RACEWAYS
16110-3
5910861-000
2. Each item of building equipment.
3. Each special system, including battery lighting, emergency and
exit wiring, control, signal and communication.
4. Air conditioning controls.
R. Conduits shall be concealed in all locations except where
specifically noted as having conduits located on wall surfaces or
exposed to view overhead.
S. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in long runs as necessary for
contraction and expansion movement, and at each building expansion
joint, whether conduits are within or below slabs.
T. All exposed conduits shall be painted to match the color of the
attached surface.
U. There shall be no more than four, 90-degree bends between wiring
pulling points.
V. Conduits shall not be installed to result in less than 8-
feet headroom without specific approval of the Architect-Engineer.
W. All exposed conduit runs and conduit runs above ceiling shall be run
as high as possible with offsets and bends to clear obstructions.
X. Where conduits and outlet boxes are indicated in reinforced columns
or beams, coordinate conduit runs and box locations with placement of
reinforcing steel.
END OF SECTION 16110
RACEWAYS
16110-4
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMIRAL BUILDING
BlNROE CCXJRTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16112 - CONDUIT,
RIGID STEBL
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL CONDUIT
A. Shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.1, Specifications
for Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B. The conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside and out with
galvanized threads.
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Shall be threaded, galvanized or Sherardized for steel conduit and
shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI C80.4, Specifications
for Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing.
2.3 PVC-COATED CONDUIT
A. Minimum thickness of the exterior coating is to be 40 mils except
where part configuration or application of the piece dictate
otherwise.
B. A 2 -part red urethane chemically cured coating shall be applied to
the interior of all conduit and fittings. This internal coating
shall be applied at a nominal 2-mil thickness.
C. The urethane interior coating applied to the conduit shall afford
sufficient flexibility so as to permit field bending without cracking
or flaking of the interior coating.
D. All conduit fittings which serve as part of the raceway shall be
coated with the same exterior PVC coating and red interior urethane
coating as described above.
E. All male threads on conduit, elbows and nipples shall be protected by
application of a 2-part clear urethane coating, chemically cured at
a nominal 2-mil thickness.
F. All female threads on fittings or conduit couplings shall be
protected by application of a 2 -part chemically cured urethane
coating.
G. The plastic coating on the exterior and the red urethane coating on
the interior shall be factory applied by the same manufacturer who
produces the hot-dipped galvanized conduit. Coated conduit shall
conform to NEMA Standard No. RNl-1986.
H. A plastic sleeve extending one pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever
is less, shall be formed at every female conduit opening on fittings.
The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside
diameter of the conduit to be used.
CONDUIT, RIGID STEEL
16112-1
5910861-000
I. The PVC coating on the outside of conduit couplings shall have a
series of longitudinal ribs 40 mils in thickness to protect the
coating from tool damage during installation.
J. All Form 8 Condulets will be supplied with stainless steel screws
which have been encapsulated with a polyester material on the head in
order to assure maximum corrosion protection.
K. Right angle beam clamps and 0 bolts shall be specially formed and
sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the conduit. All "0"
bolts will be supplied with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover all
exposed portions of the threads.
L. Approved Material: PLASTI-BOND RED Coated Conduit as manufactured by
Robroy Industries or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install as specified and in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. At couplings, conduit ends shall be threaded to meet in coupling.
Split couplings and right and left couplings shall not be used.
C. Rigid steel conduit, couplings, elbows and fittings shall not be
installed below grade unless PVC coated. Wrench marks, scuffs or
cuts on PVC coated conduit shall be covered with Robroy Plasti-bond,
or approved equal, coating material.
D. Rigid elbows installed below grade for direct buried PVC work, shall
be PVC coated conduit.
E. Except where conduits are contained within a specific structural
column for service to outlets contained therein, conduits shall not
pass through or below column footings.
F. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be used in concrete slabs on
grade.
G. PVC-coated conduit shall be used in the exposed ceiling area of the
exterior entrance and departure canopies.
H. All exterior, exposed rigid steel conduit shall be PVC-coated
conduit.
I. All exposed conduits shall be painted to match the color of the
attached surface.
J. Cast device boxes suitable for use with PVC-coated rigid steel
conduit shall be used for exterior outlet boxes.
3.2 SUPPORTS
A. Support conduit in compliance with Table 346-12 of the National
Electrical Code. Where conduit racks are used, do not bundle or lay
condui t on top of each other. A minimum of 1/8 - inch spacing shall be
maintained between parallel runs.
END OF SECTION 16112
CONDUIT, RIGID STEEL
16112-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
MONROE CCXJRTY. FLORIDA
SECTION 16113 - CONDUIT.
ELBCTRIC METALLIC TUBING
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSI Standard C80.3,
Specifications for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Shall be in accordance with ANSI Standard C80.4, Specifications and
fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing.
Fittings 1/2 inch through 2 inches shall be compression type. EMT
fittings shall be malleable iron or steel, rain and concrete-tight as
appropriate. Pot metal or die cast type and "sock-on" type fittings
shall not be used. Set screw-type connectors are not acceptable for
2 inch and smaller conduits.
b. Connectors shall have nylon insulated throats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. EMT shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
B. EMT sizes 4 inches and smaller may be used for metallic raceways
unless otherwise specified or prohibited.
C. EMT shall not be installed in concrete slabs on grade, below grade,
or in locations where rigid steel conduit is specified or required.
D. EMT connectors shall have nylon insulated throats.
E. All exposed conduits shall be painted to match the color of the
attached surface.
3.2 SUPPORTS
A. Support conduit in compliance with Paragraph 348-12 of the National
Electrical Code. Where conduit racks are used, do not bundle or lay
conduit on top of each other. A minimum of 1/8-inch spacing shall be
maintained between parallel runs.
END OF SECTION 16113
CONDUIT, ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING
16113 -1
5910861-000
MARATBOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
!!I)NROB C;UlJK'J: J: , FLORIDA
SECTION 16114 - cmmu~'l', PVC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes furnishing and installing PVC conduit, supports,
fittings and accessories as shown on the drawings and specified.
B. Place and join pipe, fittings and appurtenances as shown on the
drawings and specified herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
A. Shall be made of polyvinyl chloride, Schedule 40 pipe, conforming to
ASTM 01784.
2.2 FITTINGS
A. Shall be Schedule 40, socket type, solvent weld, complying with ASTM
02466. Joints shall be watertight.
B. Threaded type fittings may be used provided joints are made
watertight. Fittings shall be Schedule 80, complying with ASTM
02464.
C. Transition from PVC to galvanized rigid conduit shall be by threaded
fitting.
2 .3 SOLVENT
A. PVC solvent cement shall be in compliance with ASTM 02564.
2.4 BENDS
A. Bends on conduit runs exceeding 50 feet shall be noncorrosive
metallic. Bends on short runs shall be factory or field fabricated
using manufacturer approved, heat applied methods.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install where shown on drawings and in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions. Bends shall be smooth and uniform.
B. PVC conduit may be used in lieu of rigid galvanized conduit only in
below grade applications if not specifically noted otherwise on the
plans. If used, all bends, elbows and risers shall be rigid
galvanized and shall be asphaltum coated below grade.
CONDUIT, PVC
16114-1
5910861-000
3.2 JOINTING
A. Pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded or threaded and made
watertight.
3.3 SUPPORTS
A. Support conduit in compliance with Table 347-8 of the National
Electrical Code. Where conduit racks are used, do not bundle or lay
conduit on top of each other. A minimum of 1/8-inch spacing shall be
maintained between parallel runs.
END OF SECTION 16114
CONDUIT, PVC
16114-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TBRIIIRAL BmLDING
KlRROB CCXJRTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 16115 - CORDtJIT.
FLEXIBLB METALLIC
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Applicable)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT
A. Shall be in compliance with UL-1 Standard for Flexible Steel Conduit.
B. Connectors for flexible metallic conduit shall be steel or malleable
iron.
2.2 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT
A. Jacketed, liquid-tight metallic conduit shall have galvanized steel
core and continuous, liquid-tight PVC cover. Conduit shall be UA or
EF series as manufactured by Anaconda Co., or approved equal.
B. Fittings shall be T&B liquid-tight with nylon insulated throat, steel
or malleable iron, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Flexible metallic conduit shall be used for connection from junction
box, conduit or motor controllers to equipment and motors subject to
continuous vibration or where the location of the connection is such
that it is impractical to make a rigid conduit connection and from
junction boxes to recessed lighting fixtures.
B. Liquid tight flexible metallic conduit shall be used for exterior
locations, food preparation and kitchen areas, motors internal in air
handling equipment and other locations subject to dampness.
C. Length of flexible metallic conduit between equipment and conduit
termination shall not exceed 24 inches or be less than 12 inches for
sizes 1/2 inch to 2 inches. For 2-1/2 inches and larger, maximum
length shall be 4 feet and minimum length shall be 18 inches.
Specific instances and construction constraints which will require
variance from the above, shall be approved by Architect-Engineer
prior to placement of conduits.
D. Use liquid tight flexible metallic conduit for all motor connections
and for all diesel-generator equipment connections.
E. Use flexible metallic conduit for connection to recessed lighting
fixtures and to chain-hung lighting fixtures.
END OF SECTION 16115
CONDUIT, FLEXIBLE METALLIC
16115-1
5910861-000
MARATHOR AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TBRIaRAL BUILDING
MOllIROB COuI.'f".u'. FLORIDA
SECTION 16121 - 600 V CABLB
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. The work includes furnishing and installing all wire, cable, and
connectors required for the power distribution systems,
lighting, motors, mechanical equipment, receptacles and
miscellaneous items requiring electrical power.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers of Wire and Cable:
1. Cablec Corporation.
2. Okonite Company.
3. Pirelli.
4. Triangle Wire and Cable.
S. Rome Cable Division of Alcoa.
6. Southwire Corp.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers of Connectors:
1 . AMP Inc.
2 . Burndy Corp.
3 . 0 . Z . /Gedney Company.
4. Thomas & Betts Company.
S. Ideal Industries.
6. Ilsco.
7. Minnesota Mining & Mfg. Company.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cable:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide 600 -vol t rating insulated
copper cable, copper wire and connectors of manufacturer's
standard materials, as indicated by published product
information, designed and constructed as recommended by the
manufacturer, meeting ICEA-NEMA Standards.
600 V CABLE
16121-1
5910861-000
2. Unless otherwise noted wire No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be
solid, factory-color coded, with type THHN or THWN insulation.
Minimum wire size shall be No. 12 AWG except control wiring may
be No. 14.
3. Unless otherwise noted, wire sizes NO.8 and larger shall be
stranded with insulation type THHN, THWN or XHHW insulation.
Wire shall be factory-color coded or coded with tape.
4. Provide high-temperature fixture wiring for incandescent, metal
halide and sodium-lamp type socket connections.
5. Use following colors for coding:
208 Volt System
Equipment
Phase Sequence
Neutral - White
Phase A - Black
Phase B - Red
Phase C - Blue
ABC, top to
bottom, left to
right, front to
back.
Grounding Conductor - Green
6. All underground service and feeder conductors shall have type
THWN or XHHW insulation.
B. Connectors:
1. Connectors for splicing of No. 10 AWG and smaller conductors
shall be 3 -M Scotchlok, spring type pressure connectors, or
approved equal.
2. Splices for No. 8 AWG and larger shall be T&B compression type,
two-way connectors or approved equal.
3. Terminations for motors with No. 10 AWG or smaller conductors
shall be a spring type pressure connector. Terminations for
motors requiring No. 8 AWG and larger terminations shall provide
taped connections of compression connectors of motor leads to
compression connectors of input conductors, using machine bolt
and nut arrangement.
4. Lug terminations for NO.8 AWG and larger cable shall be with
T&B "color-keyed" compression connectors, or approved equal.
S. Electrical insulating tape shall be Scotch No. 88 or 99, or
approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification:
1. Before installing raceways and pulling wire to any mechanical
equipment, verify electrical characteristics with final
submittal on equipment to assure proper number and AWG of
conductors.
600 V CABLE
16121-2
5910861-000
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Condui t System:
1. No wire shall be pulled until the conduit system is complete,
from pull-point to pull-point, and major equipment terminating
conduits have been fixed in position.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Cable:
1. Cable insulation shall not be disturbed or torn while installing
wire in conduits. A neutral lubricant may be used in pulling
nonarmored conductors and shall be used if wire is pulled by
mechanical means.
2. Bending radius of insulated wire or cable shall be not less than
the minimum recommended by manufacturer.
3. Maximum pulling tension of any wire or cable shall not exceed
manufacturer's recommended values.
4. Color coding is required at termination points and within
junction boxes. Where tape is used it shall cover not less than
6 inches of the conductor at panelboards and in each outlet box,
junction box or termination. In switchboards, or other
enclosures where more than 4 feet of conductor is exposed,
conductor shall be taped at entrance to enclosure and at
termination.
S. Allow adequate conductor lengths in all junction boxes, pull
boxes and terminal cabinets. All termination of conductors in
which conductor is in tension will be rejected and shall be
replaced with conductors of adequate length. This requirement
shall not include vertical cable supports in vertical raceway
installations provided in pullboxes at proper vertical spacings.
6. Compression-type connectors shall be required on NO.8 AWG wire
and above for termination to bussing in panelboards.
B. Splices:
1. Splices shall not be made except in junction boxes, outlet
boxes, or other permanently accessible locations.
2. Installed splices shall have equal-to or better mechanical
strength and insulation as the factory applied insulation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:
1. Prior to energization, check cable and wire for circuit
continuity, short circuits, and proper phasing of conductors.
END OF SECTION 16121
600 V CABLE
16121-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGER TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
MONROE CCXJRTY. FLORIDA
SECTION 16131 - BOXES
AI!U) FITrINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish and install outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes and
junction boxes, including fittings and accessories, required for
the electrical system.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Materials shall be manufactured by firms regularly engaged in
the manufacture of electrical units for not less than five
years, of types and sizes required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
l. Steel City.
2. Raco.
3. Russell and Stoll .
4. Square D.
S. Raceway Components, Inc.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Concealed Outlet Boxes:
1. Except where cast-type boxes are specified or required provide
standard galvanized steel outlet boxes at each concealed outlet
for lights, switches, wall receptacles, and similar devices.
Boxes and covers shall be not less than code gauge thickness
steel. Box shape and dimensions shall be selected for the
specific use and location.
2. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be not less than 4 inches octagonal
by 2.12s-inches deep.
3. Switch and receptacle outlet boxes shall be not less than 4
inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep with standard device covers.
Boxes in exposed masonry shall be square corner type. Thru-wall
boxes shall not be installed in any location except as
specifically permitted.
BOXES AND FITTINGS
16131-1
5910861-000
B. Device Covers:
1. Provide suitable device covers as required for concealed wiring
boxes.
2. Provide I-inch deep device cover for flush outlet boxes to be
installed in areas where concrete will be exposed after
construction is complete.
3. Provide device covers of sufficient depth for boxes without
square corners to be installed wholly within cavity of masonry.
C. Exposed Outlet Boxes:
1. Exposed outlet boxes in damp locations (under canopies) and
boxes located outdoors shall be cast iron alloy and shall have
threaded hubs. Exposed outlet boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds
Company Type FS/FD series constructed of "Feraloy" iron alloy
with hot-dip galvanize finish or approved equal. Covers shall
be constructed of "Feraloy" iron alloy with hot-dip galvanize
finish.
D. Special Systems, Clock or Device Boxes:
1. Special system, clock or device boxes shall be suitable for the
application, and have required accessories to accommodate the
device to be installed.
E. Floor Boxes:
1. Provide steel, concrete tight adjustable leveling-type floor
boxes for floor outlets, with vertical adjusting rings, leveling
screws, and gaskets.
2. Boxes shall be provided with carpet flanges where needed and all
accessories required for the specific application.
3. Floor boxes shall be Steel City #68 or approved equal.
F. Weatherproof and Watertight Outlet Boxes:
1. For exterior locations and areas subject to moisture or water
provide corrosion-resistant cast metal waterproof boxes as
applicable. Boxes shall be of types, shapes and sizes required,
shall be gasketed and have threaded hubs for conduit. Box
accessory materials shall match the box for the specific
application.
G. Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Provide galvanized sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with
screw secured covers unless otherwise noted of the type shape
and size, to suit each respective location and installation.,
with welded seams and equipped with nuts, bolts, screws and
washers approved for the specific application. Hinged cover
boxes similar to Hoffman Bulletin A-90 shall be provided where
indicated on the drawings.
2. Material thickness of boxes shall be:
a. Up to 12-inch by 12-inch size: No. 14 gauge.
BOXES AND FITTINGS
16131-2
5910861-000
b. Over 12-inch by 12-inch size: No. 12 gauge.
3. Covers shall be the same thickness as the box material and shall
be reinforced where required by size.
H. Box Accessories:
1. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each
installation, including mounting brackets, hangers, extension
rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Boxes:
1. Install boxes for concealed wiring with suitable device cover
as required.
2. Where boxes are installed in concrete which will be exposed
after construction is complete, set box and device cover in
position before concrete is poured so that concrete will
surround and a cover plate can be installed flush upon the
unfinished surface.
3. Where boxes are installed in block or tile, provide square
cornered boxes or boxes fitted with device covers wholly within
the cavity of the block or tile. Neatly saw out an opening for
the device cover so that no mortar is required to fill between
ring and construction. Verify with counter top heights and
equipment dimensions.
4. In no instance, except as specifically approved by the
Architect-Engineer in cases of special application, shall outlet
boxes be installed back to back, nor shall outlets on each side
of a wall be provided by use of two device covers and a
"thru-wall" box. Each outlet shall have its separate, closed
back box. OUtlet box depth shall be to permit installation of
block or tile face on rear, including plaster finish conditions.
Boxes shall be staggered horizontally, with offset conduit stubs
between as required.
S. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where
blanks have been removed.
6. Locate boxes so as to ensure accessibility of electrical wiring.
7. Secure boxes rigidly to the substrate upon which they are being
mounted, or solidly embed boxes in concrete or masonry.
8. Light fixtures, receptacles, equipment connections and other
conduit termination shall be provided with outlet boxes.
9. Recessed mounted boxes shall not extend beyond the finished face
of the wall nor be recessed into the wall more than 1/4 inch.
B. Special Techniques:
1. In suspended ceilings where outlet boxes support fixtures in
instances in which the ceiling-suspension system does not have
BOXES AND FITTINGS
16131-3
5910861-000
sufficient strength to prevent visible deflection of the ceiling
surfaces, the boxes shall be supported directly by structural
members, secured to building structure.
2. Boxes and supports shall be fastened to wood with wood screws
or screw type nails of equal holding strength; to concrete or
brick with bolts and expansion shields; to hollow masonry units
with toggle bolts; and to steel work with machine screws or
welded studs. Powder charge type fasteners may be used in lieu
of the above, except where otherwise specifically prohibited.
3. In open overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to raceways
need not be separately supported except where used for fixture
support. Support cast metal boxes having threadless connectors
and sheet metal boxes directly from the building structure or
with bar hangers.
4. Where conduit supported outlet boxes are installed and conduits
suspended from the structure with hangers, the hangers shall be
attached to raceways on opposite sides of the box and shall be
supported with an approved type fastener not more than 24 inches
measured each side from the box, except the dimension shall be
reduced to 18 inches for boxes containing devices.
S. Fastenings shall not penetrate more than 1-1/2 inches into
reinforced concrete beams or more than 3/4 inch into reinforced
concrete joists and shall not contact main reinforcing steel.
C. Location:
1 . The approximate outlet locations are shown on the drawings. The
exact locations shall be determined at the building site. The
right is reserved by the Owner to change, without additional
cost to the Owner, the exact location of any switch, ceiling or
other outlet in any space before it is permanently installed.
2. Outlet locations noted on the drawings as "counter height" shall
be coordinated by the Contractor. Device boxes shall be set 8
inches (to center) above a counter without a backsplash or 4
inches above a back splash. Devices shall be vertical unless
noted.
END OF SECTION 16131
BOXES AND FITTINGS
16131-4
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TBRllIlDL BUILDING
MONROE CCXJRTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16141 - WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Receptacles.
2. Switches.
3. Wall plates.
4. Plugs.
S. Connectors.
6. Special devices, as noted.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Catalog sheets of required devices.
B. Samples: Upon request.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification:
1. Wiring devices meeting the below listed standards, as
manufactured by firms named hereinafter for specific devices and
within the classes required, may be provided.
B. Certifications:
1. Wiring devices shall meet NEMA Standard WD-1, Wiring Devices,
General Purpose for heavy duty devices. Special purpose
receptacles shall conform to the requirements of NEMA Standard
WD-5, Wiring Devices, Specific purpose. Wiring devices shall
bear U.L. labels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
specific device as listed:
The following are approved for the
1. Arrow-Hart.
2. General Electric.
3. Hubbell .
4. Leviton.
S. Pass & Seymour.
WIRING DEVICES
16141-1
5910861-000
6. Slater.
B. Other Manufacturers:
1. Other manufacturer's devices may be submitted for approved by
submitting full technical information and samples. Merely
submitting catalog cut sheets will not be acceptable.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
1. Provide factory packaged wiring devices, in type, color and
electrical rating for the service required and as indicated
hereinafter. Where type and grade are not indicated, provide
proper selection as required by the equipment to be served to
fulfill the wiring requirements, and to comply with NEC and NEMA
standards for wiring devices.
B. Colors:
1. Colors of devices for general use shall be as indicated for
respective devices or as designated by the Architect-Engineer
for specific areas.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Switches, General Purpose:
1. Switches shall be heavy duty AC rated 20 amperes, 120/277 volts
and shall be single-pole, double-pole, three and four-way as
required for the specific switching arrangements in each space.
2.
Switches shall
manufacturers:
be
as
specified below
by
designated
a. Switches, standard:
Manufacturer
Catalog No.
Hubbell
Arrow-Hart
Pass & Seymour
Slater
General Electric
Leviton
1221-2,3,4
1991-2,3,4
20ACl-2,3,4
720, 722, 723, 724 - AG
5951-2,3,4
1221-2,3,4
1) Switches shall be ivory in color, except as
indicated otherwise.
B. Receptacles, Standard Duplex:
1. Receptacles shall be three-wire auto grounding type, 120 volt,
side and back wired.
2. Receptacles for general service shall be as specified below by
designated manufacturers:
a. 20A duplex receptacles:
WIRING DEVICES
16141-2
5910861-000
Manufacturer
Catalog No.
Hubbell
Slater
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
General Electric
5362
5362
5362
5362
5362
1) Receptacles shall be ivory in color unless otherwise
noted.
C. Miscellaneous Devices:
1. Special purpose receptacles for specific equipment shall conform
to the requirements of NEMA Standard WD-s, Wiring Devices,
Specific Purpose, and shall be of the NEMA style number shown
or manufacturer's number indicated. Provide a matching cap for
each special purpose outlet supplied, each cap being equipped
with a cord grip. Special purpose outlets shall be
manufacturer's standard color.
2. Special Use Devices:
a. Interior Receptacle with Ground Fault Protective Device:
20A circuit, approved equal to P & S No. 2091-SW.
b. Exterior Receptacles: All exterior mounted receptacles
shall be ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles
equal to Pass & Seymour #2091-S-W with Pass & Seymour
#3703-T-CW self-closing thermoplastic weatherproof cover.
Cover shall be UL listed for use in wet locations and
shall comply with NEC Article 410-57(b) for wet usage with
plug installed.
D. Shunt Trip Station:
1. Provide complete station with hammer, backbox and stainless
steel face plate. Station shall be push to trip type.
2. Unit shall be mounted as indicated on the drawings with the
appropriate type of backbox, flush mount station in NEMA 1 box
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Engrave faceplate as indicated on the drawings.
4. Unit shall be Pilla Electrical Products or equal.
E. Device Plates:
1.
Plates shall be provided for
or systems outlet boxes.
configuration for the number
is intended.
all wJ.rJ.ng devices and telephone
Plates shall be of suitable
and type of devices for which it
2. Materials and colors of device plates, unless otherwise noted,
shall be as follows:
WIRING DEVICES
16141-3
5910861-000
Location
Type
Interior Devices-general
All nylon composition
smooth finish, meeting UL
514 and Federal
Specification WP-4ssa.
ivory color with color-
matched screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Wiring devices shall not be installed in exposed masonry until
cleaning of masonry with acids has been completed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Devices and Covers:
1. All standard receptacles shall be grounded by means of a
ground wire. Strap alone will not constitute an acceptable
ground.
2. Devices and cover plates shall be securely installed, with
cover plates in true vertical or horizontal alignment, as
applicable. Plates shall properly contact surfaces to which
attached.
3 .3 CLEANING
A. Devices and Covers:
1. All devices and cover plates shall be free from paint, sheet
rock mud, mortar, etc. upon completion of project.
2. Devices and covers that have any construction materials on
them or devices or covers which have been damaged in the
cleaning process shall be replaced.
3. Devices found with glue residue from tapping shall be
replaced.
END OF SECTION 16141
WIRING DEVICES
16141-4
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
MONROE c."\A./J.'."I'I'. FLORIDA
SECTION 16427 - FRONT
ACCBSSIBLB SWITCHBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Low-voltage power switchboard arranged as shown on the drawings.
The assembly shall consist of factory-assembled, self-supporting
structures, with main buses and other equipment necessary .
Switchboard shall be complete, designed, tested and assembled
in accordance with applicable NEMA PB-2 and ANSI Standards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit for approval before fabrication of switchboard. A
complete wiring diagram of all control wiring and indicating
lights shall be provided as part of the shop drawings.
a. Control diagram shall identify all terminals, nomenclature
and symbols used in these control diagrams and shall be
completely described in shop drawings submittal.
b. Terminology and designations for breakers shall be as
shown on drawings.
c. Provide layout and dimensions of switchboard including
access space required for installation.
d. Show shipping splits.
B. Project Record Drawings:
1. Provide the following information. Complete rating,
short-circuit rating of bus and interrupting rating of lowest
rated device, overall outline dimensions including space
available for conduits, circuit schedule showing circuit number,
device description, device trip or fuse clip ampere rating,
feeder circuit identification, conductor ratings and one-line
diagram. Indicate all spares and spaces on record documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certifications:
1. Switchboards shall be manufactured to conform to the latest
requirements of the NEC and UL No. UL-891.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HOUSING
A. Switchboard shall be furnished with all incoming line main devices in
"individually mounted" construction and feeder devices in "group
mounted" construction. Incoming line main devices shall be front
FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARDS
16427-1
5910861-000
accessible, through bolted covers.
accessible.
Feeder devices shall be front
B. Swi tchboard shall be completely self - supporting structure of the
required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one
metal-enclosed switchboard 90 inches high. Sides, top and rear
covers shall be code gage steel, bolted to the switchboard structure.
Frame structure members shall be die-formed 12-gauge steel bolted
together and reinforced at external corners with rugged gussets
internal and external to the structure members. Switchboard frame
shall be suitable for use as floor sills in indoor installations.
C. Provide ventilating louvers where required to limit the temperature
rise of current carrying parts. All openings shall be protected
against entrance of falling dirt, water, or foreign matter.
D. Painting: Thoroughly clean, phosphate treat, and prime all steel
wi th rust - inhibi ting paint. Final finish coat shall be
manufacturers' standard gray color enamel.
E. All vertical sections comprising the switchboard shall be rear
aligned.
F. All hardware used on conductors shall have high tensile strength and
suitable protective finish.
G. Switchboard shall be provided with adequate lifting means, capable of
being rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly
to the floor without the use of floor sills.
H. Service cable connectors shall be OL listed for copper cables.
Connectors shall be compression type lugs.
I. Device ratings shall be based upon operation in an ambient
temperature not exceeding 40 degrees C.
J. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the
switchboard shall be furnished when required. All groups of control
wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks
and suitable numbering strips.
2.2 BUSES
A. General: Buses shall be arranged for 3-phase, 4-wire distribution.
Main phase buses (through bus), neutral bus, and ground bus shall be
full capacity the entire length of the switchboard. Brace bus to
withstand available short circuit current at the particular location
and as shown on the drawings. No magnetic material shall be between
buses to form a magnetic loop.
B. Material and Size: Buses and connections shall be hard drawn copper
of 98 percent conductivity. Bus temperature rise shall not exceed 65
degrees C. Current density shall not exceed 1,200 amperes per square
inch for copper.
C. Bus Connections: All contact surfaces shall be plated. Provide a
minimum of 2 plated bolts per splice. Where physical bus size
permits only one bolt, provide a means other than friction to prevent
turning, twisting or bending. Torque bolts to manufacturers'
recommended values.
FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARDS
16427-2
5910861-000
D. Neutral Bus: Provide bare bus and mount on insulated bus supports.
Provide neutral disconnect link to permit isolation of neutral bus
from the common ground bus and service entrance conductors. Neutral
bus shall be 100 percent capacity of main bus.
E. Ground Bus: Provide an uninsulated 1/4 X 2-inch copper equipment
ground bus bar of switchboard length and secure at each section.
Ground bus shall be 50 percent capacity of main bus.
F. Main Bonding Jumper: Connect an uninsulated 1/4 X 2 - inch copper bus
between neutral and ground buses to establish the system common
ground point.
G. A-B-C type bus arrangement (left to right, top to bottom, front to
rear) shall be used throughout to assure convenient, safe testing and
maintenance.
2.3 BRACING
A. Switchboard shall be braced for 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical fault
current minimum at 208 volts.
2.4 NAMEPLATES AND MIMIC BUS
A. Provide laminated black phenolic resin with white core and 3/16-inch
engraved lettered nameplates for each circuit breaker (switch) to
indicate the feeder, panelboards and equipment served. Mount with
plated screws adjacent to, or on front of the breaker.
B. Provide an approved mimic bus on the switchboard front. Color shall
be black, either factory painted, plastic, or metal strips. Strips
shall be held flat, free of waves, with plated screws. Use sYmbols
similar to a one line diagram.
2.5 SWITCHBOARD ARRANGEMENT
A. Switchboard shall consist of 2 sections mounted side-by-side with
interconnecting bus. Maximum switchboard width shall be 80 inches
and maximum depth shall be 25 inches.
B. Incoming service section shall contain a 1,200 amp frame "main
service" breaker with 1,200 amp trip rating, a 1,200 amp frame
"emergency generator" breaker with 800 amp trip rating and automatic
throwover controls to select between utility power and generator
power.
2 .6 MAIN AND GENERATOR BREAKERS
A. Breakers shall be 600 volt, 3-pole, molded case breakers mounted on
a stationary assembly. Breakers shall be approved equal to General
Electric Company type THKM12.
B. Supply mechanical interlock of walking-beam type to prevent
simultaneous closing of both breakers.
C. Each breaker shall be equipped with a motor-operator to permit
automatic opening/closing of the breaker by the automatic throwover
controls. Motor-operated mechanisms shall be UL listed.
D. Each breaker shall have line side (incoming service side) bussing
suitable for connection. of four, #500 kcmil conductors per phase
FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARDS
16427-3
5910861-000
using compression-type lugs.
switchboard supplier.
Lugs shall be furnished by the
2 . 7 AUTOMATIC THROWOVER CONTROLS
A. The automatic throwover controls shall be so arranged that in the
event of interruption of the normal or utility power source, the
emergency generator power source shall be automatically connected to
the load within 10 seconds.
B. The automatic throwover controls shall be supplied with interlocking
provisions that will prevent interconnection of normal and generator
sources during any operation of the automatic switching equipment.
C. The breakers shall be so connected that the load is served by the
utility source of power, except when the utility source is
interrupted. Controls and switching equipment shall be so arranged
that interruption of the utility source automatically initiates the
starting of the diesel generator system, automatically disconnects
the utility source of power and connects the generator power all in
proper sequence.
D. When the utility source of power is restored, the automatic throwover
equipment shall disconnect the generator source and restore service
connection to the utility power. An adjustable time device shall be
provided delaying the return to the normal source of power to allow
stabilization of the normal source and to minimize cycling between
the 2 sources of power.
E. A "Manual-Auto" selector switch shall provide choice of manual or
automatic mode of operation. A "Test" switch shall be provided to
initiate throwover by simulating loss of the normal power source.
F. Individual control switches shall provide manual closing and tripping
of each circuit breaker when the system is in manual mode.
G. Overcurrent trip lockout provisions shall prevent reclosing and
transfer when a breaker has tripped because of an overcurrent
condition.
H. Provide an exercise time switch for once-a-week operation of the
complete transfer system, or the diesel generator system only.
I. Provide selector switch to allow selection of either automatic or
manual retransfer to utility source.
J. Provide one set of NO/NC contacts for signal to elevator controller
prior to retransfer back to normal power.
K. Provide four sets of normally close (NC) contacts for shutdown of
AHU-1, AHU-2, EDH-1 and EDH-2 upon transfer to emergency generator
. power.
L. Provide push-to-test, heavy-duty, oil-tight, transformer-type pilot
light as follows:
1. "Red" and "Green" pilot lights for each breaker to indicate
"closed" or "open."
2. "Amber" and "White" pilot lights to indicate mode switch
position "Manual" or "Automatic."
FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARDS
16427-4
5910861-000
M. Provide control power as necessary for motor-operator mechanisms,
relays and indicator lights. Maximum control voltage shall be 120
volts. Provide fusing in all voltage leads.
N. Clearly label each control, indicator and protective device to
indicate function. Provide 1/8-inch thick, 3-ply laminated phenolic,
black face, white core, engraved with 1/4-inch high block-style
letters.
2.8 DISTRIBUTION SECTION
A. General Electric Company AV-Line switchboard or approved equal
containing group-mounted molded case circuit breakers. Bussing shall
be rated 1,200 amps minimum.
B. Molded case feeder breakers shall be 600 volt class, 3-pole,
stationary mounted. Breaker shall be provided as shown on the
drawings. Breakers shall have UL listed interrupting rating of
65,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 208 volts.
C. Bus shall be braced for short circuit rating of 65,000 rms
symmetrical amperes at 208 volts, 3-phase.
D. Bus shall have provisions to allow connection of temporary cables for
load bank testing of the diesel generator system and verification of
the automatic throwover equipment operation.
2.9 METERING
A. Provide Westinghouse IQ Data Plus II electrical metering or approved
equal for 120/208-volt, 4-wire system.
B. Meter shall be mounted at the top of the distribution section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Switchboard shall be installed on a 4 -inch thick concrete pad
extending a minimum of 6 inches past each end of switchboard and
front of switchboard. Incoming conductors shall be from below.
B. Edges of concrete base shall be beveled 1 inch at 4s-degree angle.
Concrete surfaces shall be smooth and free of depressions.
C. Verify installation and NEC clearances for all assemblies prior to
shop drawing submittals.
D. Provide an insulating rubber mat on the floor in front of
switchboard. Mat shall extend entire length of switchboard and shall
be 24 inches wide and 3/16 inches thick.
3.2 TESTING
A. The automatic throwover equipment shall be tested for proper
operation in coordination with load bank testing of the diesel
generator system. Diesel generator system shall be load bank tested
per Section 16620 requirements by connection of the load bank to the
distribution switchboard bus.
FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARDS
16427-5
5910861-000
B. Switchboard breakers, 225 amp frame and larger, shall be fully tested
per the requirements of Section 16950 - CIRCUIT BREAKER TESTING.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred for
testing of the automatic throwover equipment and for testing of the
switchboard circuit breakers.
END OF SECTION 16427
FRONT ACCESSIBLE SWITCHBOARDS
16427-6
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGER TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
MONROE CCXJRTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16441 - SAFETY SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: The work includes providing safety switches as
indicated or required.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings:
ratings.
Showing fuses, number of poles, enclosures and
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility: Ensure that ratings of installed switch and motor is
compatible when switch is serving as motor-disconnect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Switches: Shall be manufactured by General Electric, Siemens (ITE),
Square 0, or Westinghouse.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Safety switches shall be NEMA heavy duty, fused or non-fused, of
rating and number of poles as indicated or required.
B. Safety switches shall be provided with rejection fuse clips where
current limiting fuses are specified.
C. Interior enclosures shall be NEMA 1, except as otherwise indicated.
D. Doors to safety switches shall interlock so that cover cannot be
opened when switch is closed but shall be provided with a defeat
mechanism to allow authorized personnel to open enclosure without
opening switch.
E. Switches shall be quick-make, quick-break type, constructed so switch
blades are visible in "OFF" position with door open, equipped with
operating handle which is an integral part of the enclosure base and
whose position is easily recognizable and is padlockable in the "OFF"
position. Current carrying parts shall be constructed of
high-conductivity copper, and silver-tungsten type switch contacts
with positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips in fusible
switches.
F. Exterior units shall have NEMA 4X enclosures unless noted otherwise.
G. Provide fuses for fusible switches, of class, type and rating as
follows:
1. General: Fuses shall be rated for the voltage indicated on the
drawings and shall be rated for the continuous current
indicated.
SAFETY SWITCHES
16441-1
5910861-000
2. Motor Application: Dual element type, selected in accordance
with the applicable requirements of Articles 430 and 440 of the
NEC. Fuses shall include rejection slots, OL class "RKS."
Characteristics shall be essentially equivalent to Shawmut "Amp-
trap" Dual Element with Time Delay, Class RKs.
3. Other Applications: Unless otherwise indicated, fuses selected
for all applications other than for use with motors shall be
current limiting types, dual element with time delay, OL class
"RK1" rated 250 volts. Current limitation shall be essentially
equivalent to Shawmut "Amp-trap" Class RK1.
4. Interrupting Ratings: All fuses shall be rated to interrupt
200,000 RMS sYmmetrical amperes.
S. Acceptable: Bussman; General Electric; Gould Shawmut.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Switches shall be plumb and securely mounted.
B. Install safety switches in accordance with the manufacturer's written
instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC and the National
Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation," and
in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products serve the intended function.
C. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and
motors within sight of the motor position unless otherwise indicated.
D. Exterior switches shall be mounted on supports to prevent trapping of
moisture.
END OF SECTION 16441
SAFETY SWITCHES
16441-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
.,NROE CCXJRTY. FLORIDA
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work includes all grounding for the electrical systems, extending
to all electrical items connected with a source of power, including
all grounding required by NEC (National Electrical Code). Grounding
specified or shown, which exceeds NEC minimums, shall be installed.
B. Except as otherwise indicated, the secondary distribution system
shall include a grounding conductor in all raceways in addition to
the return path of metallic conduit.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. All grounding conductors shall be copper conductor material only.
Materials shall be in conformity with those specified elsewhere
herein for electrical systems. Conductors within the raceway systems
shall have same type of insulation as phase conductors and shall be
identified as specified herein.
2.2 GROUNDING CONNECTORS AND DEVICES
A. Connectors and devices used in the grounding systems shall be of
copper or bronze materials, and applicable for the use whether
specified by manufacturers number herein or otherwise required.
Specified items of designated manufacturers indicate required level
of quality, equals may be provided if submitted and approved. All
connectors and devices shall be compatible with the surfaces being
bonded or shall be suitably surfaced or coated and comply with NEC.
Items not listed herein shall be of equal quality to the following
specified items.
1. Lugs: heavy cast copper or cast bronze, with ground surface
equal to Burndy QA-B or T&B equal.
2. Grounding and Bonding Bushings: Malleable iron, Thomas & Betts
(T&B) .
3. Piping Clamps: T&B.
4. Grounding Screw and Pigtail: Raco No. 983.
2.3 GROUNDING RODS
A. Ground rods shall be of the sectional driven type, round, cone-
pointed, copper clad steel of not less than 3/4-inch diameter.
Minimum length shall be 10 feet. All lead connections below grade
and in inaccessible locations shall be exothermic welded. Each rod
shall be die stamped with identification of manufacturer and rod
length. Rods shall be Copperweld or approved equal.
GROUNDING
16450-1
5910861-000
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION
A. Grounding conductors within the raceway systems shall be identified
with a green color as follows:
1. Size NO.8 and Smaller: Continuous green colored insulation.
2. Size NO.6 and Larger: Green tape for a minimum of 6 inches at
terminators in switchboards, cabinets, junction and pull boxes,
where passing through pull boxes and at every point where the
conductor is accessible.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND METHODS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, each feeder and branch circuit raceway
on the load side of the service entrance shall contain a grounding
conductor sized as indicated and where not shown shall be sized in
accordance with Table 250-95 of the NEC. Conductor shall be
connected to the equipment grounding bus in panelboards and to
lighting fixtures, motors and other types of equipment and outlets.
The ground shall be in addition to the metallic raceway and shall be
properly connected thereto, using a lug device located within item
enclosure at point of electric power connections, to permit
convenient inspection.
B. All panelboards shall be provided with a grounding bus.
C. Provide green insulated ground conductor for all grounding type
receptacles and equipment of all voltages.
D. Grounding for Lighting Fixtures shall be as follows:
1. All fixtures shall have a green insulated ground conductor from
outlet box to fixture.
E. Motors and Equipment: All motors, heating coil assemblies and
equipment requiring flexible connections shall have a green grounding
conductor properly connected to the frames and extending continuously
to the supply source grounding bus with approved connectors thereto
regardless of conduit size or type.
3.3 MISCELLANEOUS GROUNDING CONNECTIONS
A. Required connections to building steel shall be with approved
terminals and bolted in accessible locations, or as detailed on the
drawings.
B. All surfaces to which grounding connections are made shall be
thoroughly cleaned to maximum conductive condition immediately before
connections are made thereto. Exposed bare metal after termination
point shall be painted.
C. Welded or Brazed Connections: Joints in grounding conductors shall
be welded or brazed. The welding or brazing processes shall be an
exothermic type.
3.4 MAIN ELECTRICAL SERVICE GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Ground in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC. Ground rods and
grounding conductors shall be provided as indicated on the drawings.
GROUNDING
16450-2
5910861-000
Grounding system shall also be extended to the cold water entrance
pipe and be grounded to the line side of any metering. Extend
grounding system to the lightning protection system down conductors.
3.5 TESTING AND REPORTS
A. Ground resistance measurements shall be made of each grounding system
utilized in the project. The ground resistance measurements shall
include building structure steel, driven grounding system, and other
approved systems as may be applicable. Ground resistance
measurements shall be made in normally dry weather, not less than 24
hours after rainfall, and with the ground under test isolated from
other grounds.
END OF SECTION 16450
GROUNDING
16450-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGER TBRMIJ!IAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work includes furnishing and installing circuit breaker type
panelboards as shown on drawings and specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NEMA Standard PBI-Panelboards and National Electrical Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURER
A. panelboards shall be manufactured by General Electric Company,
Siemens (ITE), Westinghouse, or Square D.
2 . 2 PANE LBOARD S
A. Panelboards shall be provided as scheduled. Voltage, bus capacity,
phase and frequency shall be as shown. Panelboards shall conform to
the requirements of NEMA Standard PBI-Panelboards and bear UL label.
B. Panelboard Box: Panelboard box shall be fabricated from galvanized
sheet steel in accordance with Underwriter's standard for panelboard
boxes. A turned edge shall be provided around the front of the box
for rigidity and attachment of the front. Box size shall be provided
to allow wiring gutters of 4 inches minimum on sides and 6 inches on
ends. Minimum box width shall be 20 inches, unless otherwise
indicated. Exterior panels shall be NEMA 3R.
C. Panelboard Front: The panelboard front shall be factory finished and
consist of a flat piece of sheet steel, with opening to which the
panelboard door is attached by means of semi-concealed hinges. Trim
shall overlap tub by 3/4 inches for flush-mounted panelboards and be
even with tub for surface mounted panelboards. Double section trims
shall be independently removable with trim edge aligned and even.
The door shall have cylinder tumbler-type lock. On doors more than
48 inches high, a combination three-point catch and lock shall be
provided. A circuit directory, neatly typed, shall be provided on
the inside of the door. Circuit directory shall be not less than 6
inches wide by 10 inches high mounted behind clear plastic.
D. Interior: Interior shall be of the unit type, mounted on a back
plate, properly reinforced by flanging, providing a rigid assembly to
protect against damage during handling or installation. Structure
shall be so designed that units may be easily removed without
disturbing adjacent units, bus structure, or insulation. A removable
dead-front shield shall be provided for easy access to the wiring.
Panel bussing shall be. arranged to maintain sequence phasing,
throughout, that is, adjacent poles shall be of unlike polarity and
PANE LBOARD S
16470-1
5910861-000
rotated in sequence.
breakers.
All spaces shall be completely bused for
E. Main and Branch Circuit Protective Devices: Main and branch circuit
protective devices shall be molded-case circuit breakers consisting
of the number of poles, and ampere rating, as shown on the schedules.
Main breakers shall have shunt trip feature where indicated on the
drawings.
F. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall have quick-make and
quick-break toggle mechanisms, inverse-time trip characteristics, and
shall be trip-free on overload or short circuit. Automatic release
shall be secured by a bimetallic thermal element releasing the
mechanism latch. In addition, an instantaneous magnetic trip shall
be provided for short circuit currents above the overload range.
Rated interrupting current for circuit breakers shall be as shown.
Automatic tripping shall be indicated by handle position between the
manual OFF and ON positions. Circuit breakers shall be single, two,
or three pole as noted. Two and three pole breakers shall have one
common handle,. handle ties will not be acceptable. All breakers
shall be the bolt-on type; plug-in breakers not acceptable except
Square 0 "I" Line construction. Provide locking devices on breaker
handles where indicated on schedules. Provide ground fault breakers
or other special breakers as indicated on the schedules.
G. Neutral Bus: panelboards designated as three phase, four wire and
single phase three wire shall be provided with an insulated neutral
bus with numbered points for circuit connections.
H. Ground Bus: Ground bus shall be provided in each panelboard box.
Bus shall be used for all protective ground conductor connectors.
I. Lug sizes shall be compatible with conductor sizes.
J. panelboard buses 600A and larger shall be copper. 400A and smaller
buses may be tin plated aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MOUNTING
A. panelboards shall be mounted with tops of boxes 6 feet, 6 inches
above the finished floor.
B. Panel directory, as a minimum, shall indicate breaker position
number, equipment served, room name and number.
C. All breaker positions shall be numbered.
D. All breaker trip ratings shall be readable without removing panel
. front cover.
E. Exterior panels shall be mounted on supports to prevent trapping of
moisture between panel and wall.
F. Contractor is responsible to coordinate panel installations with ALL
trades to ensure NEC "working clearances" are not violated.
END OF SECTION 16470
PANE LBOARD S
16470-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE comrrY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16480 - INDIVIDUALLY
1<<>tJN'.l"IW W)TOR CONTROLLBRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Unless otherwise indicated, every motor or piece of equipment not
specified to be provided with a controller at the factory shall be
provided with a controller as specified herein.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The following shop drawings shall be submitted to show:
1. General layout.
2 . Elementary wiring diagrams of standard motor controllers by
size.
3. OUtline and wiring diagrams of all special devices.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NEMA Standard IC-1 Industrial Control, other applicable standards of
NEMA, and applicable standards of IEEE, ANSI, NEC and National
Electrical Safety Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. Motor controllers shall conform to the applicable requirements of
NEMA S Standard IC-1 Industrial Control. Controller sizes shall be
verified to be compatible with horsepower of the motor.
2 .2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
A. Switches shall be tumbler-switch style. The manual motor starters
shall provide overload protection which closely follows the motor
load. Manual motor starters shall be in the following enclosures
unless otherwise noted.
1.
For outdoor installation
NEMA Type 4X.
2.
For indoor installation
NEMA Type 1, General Purpose.
2.3 MAGNETIC ONLY MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Magnetic motor controllers shall be provided as indicated.
B. Non-Reversing Magnetic Controllers: Nonreversing magnetic
controllers shall start full voltage, nonreversing, AC single speed
motors. The controllers shall be sized for the load unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Where multispeed motors are scheduled on the drawings, the motor
controls shall be compatible with the type motor shown.
INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
16480-1
5910861-000
D. Reduced Voltage, Auto-Transformer Type: Reduced voltage controllers
shall be provided where indicated. The controllers shall be of the
closed transition type, with definite time transfer from start to
run. Taps shall be provided at 50 percent, 65 percent, and 80
percent of line voltage. Contactors shall be mechanically and
electrically interlocked.
E. Overload Relays: Bi-metallic relays are preferred. Overload relays
shall be supplied in each leg. Overload relays shall be matched to
load and shall be adjustable from 90 percent to 110 percent. A
single reset button shall be mounted on the starter door to permit
external reset. The relay shall be convertible from manual to
automatic reset by a simple adjustment.
F. Control transformers shall be provided. Both legs of the primary and
one leg of the secondary of the control transformer shall be
protected by NEMA Class J fuses. The other leg of the secondary
shall be grounded. The capacity of the control transformers shall be
adequate to operate all the control devices in the circuit.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, all motor starters shall be provided with
hand-off-automatic (HOA) switch in the door.
H. Auxiliary Contacts: Motor controllers shall be provided with all
control devices including auxiliary contacts for equipment to operate
as specified. Provide minimum of two auxiliary contacts per
controller.
2.4 COMBINATION MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Combination motor controllers shall be provided with motor circuit
protective device. Unit control circuit fusing shall be provided.
The motor circuit protective device shall be mounted in the same
enclosure as the magnetic controller and shall be operable by hand
from outside the enclosure. The handle shall be so interlocked with
the door that it must be returned to the "OFF" position before the
door can be opened, but a defeat mechanism shall be provided to allow
authorized personnel to open the enclosure door without opening the
disconnecting device. provision for padlocking the disconnect handle
in the "OFF" position shall be provided.
B. Motor circuit protectors shall be the continuously adjustable,
instantaneous magnetic trip type circuit breaker and shall be so
constructed that all poles open, close and trip simultaneously. The
continuous current rating of the motor circuit protector shall be
minimum 125 percent of the motor full load current rating. The
minimum fault-current, interrupting capability of the combination
motor controller and motor circuit protector, shall be 25,000 amperes
RMS SYmmetrical at 208 volts.
2.5 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
A. Heater elements shall be provided for overload protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SETTINGS, OVERLOAD AND SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION
A. Establish heater element size and establish and set the instantaneous
trip point of the motor circuit protector, if used, based upon the
INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
16480-2
5910861-000
nameplate data of equipment actually supplied and in accordance with
the NEC.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate vertical and horizontal clearances with adjacent
equipment.
B. Furnish, install and wire all motor controllers shown on the Contract
drawings.
END OF SECTION 16480
INDIVIDUALLY MOUNTED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
16480-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGBR TBRHIRAL BUILDING
MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16482 - MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work includes furnishing and installing general service electric
motors as indicated and specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings and product data shall be submitted. Submittals for
all motors shall include the complete nameplate data on each motor.
Nameplate data shall include the name of the motor manufacturer and
all information called for in NEMA Standard MGI - Paragraph 10.38
titled "Nameplate Marking." This data shall be submitted for motors
provided as part of mechanical equipment as well as those supplied
individually.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NEMA Standard MG-1, Motors and Generators.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL
A. Motors shall conform to the applicable portions of NEMA Standards
MG-1, Motors & Generators. Motors shall be of sufficient size for
the duty to be performed and shall not exceed the motors' full-rated
load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity
under the most severe conditions likely to be encountered.
2.2 DESIGN CHARACTERISTICS
A. Motor Horsepower, Enclosure and RPM shall be as shown on the
drawings. Other characteristics shall be as follows unless otherwise
on the drawings.
B. Integral horsepower motors shall be three phase, 60 hertz, 200 volt
as indicated, NEMA Design B, normal starting torque, Class B
insulation, 40 degree C ambient. Motors 25 through 50 horsepower
shall be Code "F." Motors larger than 25 horsepower at 208/230 volts
shall be designed for and started by reduced-voltage starting
methods.
C. Fractional Horsepower motors above 1/2 horsepower shall be three
phase, 60 hertz 200 volt as indicated, NEMA Design B, normal starting
torque, Class A insulation 40 degree C ambient. Fractional
Horsepower Motors less than 1/2 horsepower shall be single phase 60
hertz, 120 volt, with internal thermal protection. Motors of 1/2
horsepower may be designated either single or three phase.
D. All electric motors shall be of the high efficiency type.
MOTORS
16482-1
5910861-000
2.3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
A. Overload protection shall be provided for each motor. The overload
protection device shall be provided either integral with the motor or
controller and shall be in each ungrounded conductor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SIZE AND LOCATION
A. Size and location of motors indicated is based on a specific design
and may change slightly from one manufacturer to another. Connection
shall be made to equipment as actually installed. Before connecting
to any piece of equipment, the nameplate data shall be checked
against the information shown on the drawings. When electrically
driven equipment furnished under these specifications materially
differs from the contemplated design, make the necessary adjustments
to the wiring, disconnect, services and branch-circuit protection to
the equipment actually installed.
END OF SECTION 16482
MOTORS
16482-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE CCXJRTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16501 - LAMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide lamps for all lighting fixtures furnished as work of this
contract.
1.2 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Lamps shall be delivered in manufacturer's packing in undamaged
condition.
B. Lamp containers shall be stored where protected from the elements in
dry and heated area.
C. Installation shall not be made until approved by Architect-Engineer.
Lamps used during construction shall be replaced with new lamps prior
to final inspection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Interior applications shall be G.E. F40 CW/RS or equal unless
otherwise indicated. Lamps shall have initial lumen output of not
less than 3,150 lumens. Lamp life guarantees shall be not less than
20,000 hours at 12 hours per start. Lamp colors shall be standard
cool white.
2.2 INCANDESCENT LAMPS
A. Incandescent lamps shall be furnished in the style, size and
performance characteristics as required or as indicated on drawings
for the proper operation of the fixture specified. All lamps shall
be energy saving, extended life type, rated for 130 volts.
B. In certain areas, "under-lamping" may be indicated on the drawings
and socket extender shall be provided for proper position of lamp in
relation to lamp reflector.
C. Lamps shall be General Electric Watt Miser Plus or equal.
D. Where specified fixture design uses reflector type lamps, such type
lamp shall be furnished in "spot" or "flood" type as correct for this
installation, and shall have same socket arrangement.
2 .3 METAL HALIDE LAMPS
A. Metal halide lamps shall be 70W to 400W as scheduled, of identical
color rendition, and selected for burning position and enclosure
restrictions in accordance with the manufacturer's lamp application
data. Ballast design shall be properly selected for each specific
lamp application.
LAMPS
16501-1
5910861-000
2.4 COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A. Provide type as required by specified fixture design and as shown in
Fixture Schedule. Lamps shall be T4 quad tube type with 10,000 hours
average rated life and color temperature range of 2700K to 3100K.
2 .5 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable lamp manufacturers are: General Electric, GTE Sylvania,
Phillips and Osram.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 16510 - LIGHTING FIXTURES.
END OF SECTION 16501
LAMPS
16501-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
MONROE COURTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16503 - LIGHTING
CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work includes furnishing and installing a complete low-voltage
lighting control system including lighting automation relay panels,
associated low-voltage controlled relays and programmable panel
intelligence cards for control of lighting circuits as indicated on
the drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and catalog sheets of all
components proposed for use.
B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components.
C. Operation and Instruction Manuals: Provide operation and instruction
manuals per Division 16, Section 16971 - INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUALS requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting
control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
B. Component Pretesting: All components and assemblies are to be
factory pretested and burned-in prior to installation.
C. System Checkout: Factory-trained technicians shall be available to
functionally test each component in a programmable system after
installation to verify proper operation and confirm that the panel
wiring and addressing conform to the wiring documentation.
D.
NEC Compliance:
work.
Comply to NEC as applicable to electrical wiring
E. NEMA Compliances: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards
pertaining to types of electrical equipment and enclosures.
F. UL Approvals: Remote panels are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy
Management Equipment.
G. FCC Emissions: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC
emissions standards specified in Part 15, Subpart J for Class A
application.
1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials in manufacturer's packing in undamaged
condition.
B. Store all materials in dry place and protect them from damage and the
elements until installed.,
LIGHTING CONTROL
16503-1
5910861-000
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The equipment numbers referenced herein are those for General
Electric Company's "Total Lighting Control" system as an indication
of quality and performance.
B. Products of other manufacturers are acceptable, provided the
manufacturer can provide the entire system under a single label.
2.2 GENERAL
A. The lighting control system shall consist of preassembled relay
panels, low-voltage controlled relays, masters switches, programmable
controller cards, relay-driven cards and associated low-voltage panel
wiring.
B. Manufacturer support services to be provided shall include Contractor
documentation, programming, startup, training and 2-year extended
warranty.
2 .3 HARDWARE
A. Each relay panel shall include the following:
1. Surface-mounted enclosure sized to accept an interior with 1 to
48 GE #RR9P relays.
2. LED status indication for each relay.
3. Two transformers with internal overload protection. One
transformer shall provide power to relays, LEOs and low-voltage
controls. The second transformer shall provide power to the
controller cards and relay driver cards.
4. Metal oxide varistor protection against powerline spikes.
S. Hinged, lockable cover with wiring directory.
6. Panel intelligence cards.
B. Panel intelligence cards shall include:
1. GE #RRDC12 relay driver card for each bank of 12 relays. The
relay driver card shall actuate the relays on/Off and monitor
their status.
2. GE #RCC48 panel controller card for control of up to 4 relay-
driver cards. The panel controller card shall provide all logic
functions and communications. Each controller card shall
include an RS232 communication port so that operating data
stored in a PC can be downloaded to it through the port.
Controller card shall include internal power backup to maintain
the operating data during power failure.
3. Specific capabilities shall meet or exceed the following:
a. Power loss memory and clock holdup time: 4 days.
b. RS232 port for modem or PC direct communications.
LIGHTING CONTROL
16503-2
5910861-000
c. Automatic diagnostics on all memory, input/output card
modules and relays.
d. Each relay may be directly overridden by a swi tch or
sensor with state changes monitored by the controller.
e. Digital with time, day of week and date. Automatic leap
year compensation. Programmable Daylight Savings Time and
Standard Time adjustment.
f. Each controller shall provide up to 24 different operating
schedules A-X which may be assigned to individual relays.
(Programming a schedule for each relay shall be
acceptable.) Each schedule (A-X) shall allow up to 8
events per day for a repeating 7-day week. Each schedule
shall also provide 3 "special day" or holiday operating
schedule. Up to 32 holidays may be defined for each panel
that give the specific date and indicates which of the 3
special schedules are to be followed on that date.
Schedule letters M-X may be updated for all panels by
making a single entry using a panel programmer (laptop PC
wi th software) .
g. Time delay selectable for each relay (2 to 1,440 minutes)
with automatic deactivation during scheduled occupancy.
h. Flick warning selectable for each relay with automatic 5-
minute delay to off.
i. Each relay shall respond to up to 8 different telephone
override codes.
C. The controller cards in each relay panel shall be linked over a
single dataline. The dataline shall provide a communications bus for
transferring control and status data to and from the lighting control
panels. The dataline shall have its own power supply which shall
also monitor the dataline for faults. It shall provide a clearing
current to blow the fuse on any panel which fails in such a manner as
to hold the dataline and stop communications.
1. Dataline shall be 18/2 twisted pair (red = +, black = -) with
shield meeting Class 2P. One turn per 3 inches, min. 50 pf/ft.
max. (#RDWlRE - 2S).
2. Dataline power supply #RDTPWR.
D. One programmable system switch module (#RPSS16) shall be added to the
dataline to provide systemmwide switching. Unit shall have an
address setting from 01-99 and 16 physical switch inputs. These
inputs may be either 3-wire maintained or momentary. The system
switch module shall transmit the switch ID (address/input) and the
action (on/Off) whenever a switch changes state. The relay panels
shall monitor these messages and operate their associated relays to
the appropriate state. This state to be determined by the scenario
assigned to the system switch:
1. Master on/off.
2. Flick warn.
3. Photocell on/off control.
LIGHTING CONTROL
16503-3
5910861-000
4. Load shed control.
E. One telephone override module (#RPHONE) shall be connected to the
dataline. Module shall have its own extension number and associated
RJ11 jack. The phone override module shall allow touchtone phones to
override any relay or group of relays in the system. The operation
will be the same as that of a direct override switch to the relay.
Unit shall provide special function inputs which allow the unit to be
disabled or limited to ON overrides only. Provide 12 -volt power
supply for module operation.
2 .4 SOFTWARE
A. All initial programming and editing to be accomplished using laptop
computer furnished by system installer.
B. Basic operating software (#RSOFT-1) to include:
1. Site wiring documentation with English descriptors of all relay
loads, panel master switches, programmable system switches and
telephone override codes.
2. Program PC database with display.
3. Access codes.
C. At the completion of installation and initial programming, the system
operating software shall be transferred to the Owner's existing
desktop computer. Transfer of software and checkout shall be by
system installer. Provide dataline link (#RLINK), A/B switch, 2400
Baud telecommunications modem and bus-type mouse for use with Owner's
existing desktop computer.
2.5 SUPPORT SERVICES
A. System Startup: Manufacturer shall provide a trained technician to
confirm proper installation and operation of all system components.
B. Training: Manufacturer shall provide factory-trained application
engineer to train Owner personnel in the operation and programming of
the lighting control system.
c.
Documentation:
including:
1. System l-line showing all panels, number and type of switches
and sensors, dataline, programmable system switches, telephone
override modules and central PC.
Manufacturer shall provide system documentation
2. Drawings for each panel showing hardware configuration and
numbering.
3. Panel wiring schedules.
4. Typical wiring diagrams for each component.
D.
programming:
including:
Manufacturer shall provide system programming
1. Wiring documentation.
2. Programmable panel and system switah operation.
LIGHTING CONTROL
16503-4
_'~"...,~__.,"",,'M"""''''~'"'''~''''''";~"'''''''''''''''''''''.'''''~'''''~_"......i;""".=""....."".,~,."..~.""""m~,"''''''..,_'".._;...llOilllilOi~~~,'''I;;;.''',i.~..;._'"._,
5910861-000
3. Telephone overrides.
4. Operating schedules.
These shall be provided on floppy disk compatible with Owner's PC.
E. Extended Warranty: Manufacturer shall provide a 2 -year extended
warranty of all system components.
1. For the first year after installation all parts, labor and
programming services shall be provided at no charge by the
electrical Contractor.
2. Extended 2-year warranty period shall begin at the end of the
first year of operation.
3 . During the extended 2 -year warranty period, all parts, labor and
programming services shall be provided at no charge to the Owner
by the factory-trained service Contractor who initially
installed the system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 HARDWARE
A. Mount lighting automation relay panels adjacent to circuit breaker
panelboards as shown on the drawings. Circuits indicated to be
on/off controlled by the lighting control system shall be routed
through the relay panel.
B. Install the dataline power supply, programmable system switch module
and the telephone override module in the electric room with the relay
panels. Provide wire and conduit between power supply, system switch
module, telephone module and relay panels per manufacturer's
requirements.
3.2 WIRING
A. Provide 2/C #18 twisted/shielded wJ.rJ.ng in conduit for dataline
interconnection between dataline power supply, programmable system
switch, telephone override module and relay panels.
B. Provide wiring, conduit and wireway for connection of indicated
circuits to the relay panels and to the load served.
C. Provide 120 VAC receptacle for power supply and telephone override
module operating power.
D. Provide telephone outlet box with jack and 1/2-inch conduit back to
the telephone terminal board for the telephone override module tie to
the telephone system.
3 .3 STARTUP
A. Provide checkout of all system hardware by a factory-trained
technician.
1. Check that all lighting relay panels are properly installed and
loads recorded on schedule cards.
2. Confirm operation of all relays.
LIGHTING CONTROL
16503-5
5910861-000
3. Check panel address settings and confirm communications at each
panel.
4. Check for proper wiring and data transmission by programmable
system switch and phone override module.
s. Repair or replace any defective components.
B. Provide training for Owner's personnel by a factory applications
engineer.
END OF SECTION 16503
LIGHTING CONTROL
16503-6
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TERMINAL BUILDING
MONROE CCXJRTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16510 - LIGHTING
FIXTURBS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install lighting fixtures as indicated and specified,
complete with lamps and required ballasts and accessories. Proper
supports for lighting fixtures shall be provided.
1.2 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Verify the compatibility of recessed lighting fixtures with the
ceiling in which each fixture is to be located.
1.3 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver fixtures sufficiently in advance of installation to prevent
delay of work.
B. Store all materials in a closed building, in original packaging, and
protect from damage and the elements.
C. Decorative elements of fixtures shall be packed by the manufacturer
separately from the housing of the fixture, stored at the job site
and installed only after completion of plastering, ceiling tile work,
painting and general cleanup in area.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show fixture locations and support details.
Materials shall not be purchased until approved. Include copy of
ballast warranty for each type of ballast required.
B. Product Data: Provide lighting fixture brochures in a single, bound
and indexed assembly for all lighting fixtures. Incomplete
submittals will be returned without processing.
1. Fixture brochures shall contain manufacturer's name and catalog
illustration and number, dimensions and details, ballast and
diffuser information, metal gages, pretreatment and paint data,
UL-ETL approval, and connection details. Provide photometric
data for fixture with lamp and ballast specified. Provide sound
rating of ballast. Provide information on adjustable fixtures
if such type fixture is required. Provide fuse type and size
when specified.
2. Fixture submittal data shall include lamp data with ANSI
ordering code. Where no code has been established, the
manufacturer's complete descriptive literature shall be provided
with fixture data.
3. When catalog cuts are submitted, each fixture type shall have
the manufacturer's name and catalog number in an obvious
location. Cut sheet shall also indicate the type of ballast and
lamps to be used.
C. Submit the following fluorescent lamp ballast data when requested:
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16510-1
5910861-000
1. Manufacturer's certified test data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 GENERAL FIXTURE REQUIREMENTS
A. Labels: Fixtures shall bear UL and manufacturer's label. Exit
fixtures shall comply with NFPA 101-1985 visibility standards.
B. Housings: Constructed of steel, bonderized treated to prevent
corrosion and finished with baked white enamel, except where
otherwise indicated.
C. Frame: Furnish necessary "plaster" frames for lighting fixtures
recessed in plaster or stucco ceilings and for other non-lay-in
installations.
D. Finish:
1. All metal parts, except cadmium plated hardware, shall have a
five-stage, prepainting hot process similar and equal to
bonderizing, applied in accordance with hot bonding process.
2. Final Painted Enamel Finish: Approved equal to DuPont white
having a minimum reflection factor of 85 percent. Final finish
shall cover all metal portions and be uniform in color, coverage
and gloss. Flat test samples shall withstand 300 hours of salt
spray in accordance with ASTM Bl17.
3. Porcelain Enamel Finish: Smoothly applied, 90 percent
reflectance material and of proper thickness to resist chipping,
O.Ols-inch maximum.
4. Aluminizing or Anodizing. Finish process shall be approved
equal to Alcoa 202 finish, which shall be 20 minutes minimum in
bath, 15 minutes minimum in sealer witH final thickness of at
least 0.00025 inch.
S. Duranodictype finishes shall be in accordance with sample
approved by Architect-Engineer.
E. Ballasts and Fusing:
1. Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Resetting thermal cutout for ballast
and nonresetting protective cutout for capacitor only, CMB/ETL,
"A" sound rated "Class P," automatic resetting design.
Ballasts shall be mounted in fixtures to result in installed
operating temperature of less than 90 degrees C case temperature
in accordance with NEMA No. LB-1-1.0s Test Procedure. Ballasts
shall be low energy ~ype capable of operating standard rapid-
start or F40 CW/RS/WM type lamps. Ballasts shall be General
Electric "Watt Miser," Advance "Mark III", or approved equal.
2. Two lamp-type ballasts shall be provided where practicable.
3. Provide low-temperature starting ballasts of required type for
outdoor fixtures and in unheated areas. Starting temperature
shall be 0 degrees F.
4. Ballasts for metal halide lamps shall be properly selected for
lamp characteristics, operating temperatures and lamp position,
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16510-2
5910861-000
where critical. Where available, ballasts shall be HPF. Where
proper operation can be secured, ballasts shall be provided
which accommodate plus or minus 10 percent input voltage range.
Insulation type for ballasts shall be selected by fixture
manufacturer for high ambient temperatures in ballast mounting
space of fixture. Provide two-winding type ballasts. Where
indicated on drawings, provide ballast with auxiliary winding
to operate instant-on quartz lamp. Lamp shall come on instantly
on momentary loss of power and remain on until metal halide lamp
reaches 40 percent of its full lumen output. Relay for
operation of the quartz lamp shall not cause a loss in secondary
starting current for H.1.D. lamp. Relay shall be solid state
encapsulated designed for operation in 150 degrees F ambient and
have a 3-year warranty.
S. Fixture fusing shall be provided as indicated.
6. Noisy ballasts shall be replaced, at no additional cost to
Owner. Ballasts for indoor application shall be encased in a
housing which provides necessary wiring compartments and
provisions for required electrical connectors or devices.
Ballast components shall be surrounded with a thermosetting fill
to ensure adequate heat dissipation and quiet operation, below
local ambient noise level. Ballasts shall be provided with
necessary mounting hardware and vibration dampers. Ballasts for
outdoor use shall be encased in weather-tight enclosures with
proper outdoor type wiring devices.
a. Class A sound rating for ballast operating standard
fluorescent lamps.
b. Remote-mounted ballast for operation of metal halid lamps
shall be encapsulated for quiet operation.
F. Sockets:
1. Fluorescent Lamp Sockets: "Tombstone" or "butt-on" type for use
with bipin lamps shall be provided with plated contacts which
depend upon base support only, or contacts of "edge-wipe" style.
Lamp insertion channelway of the socket shall be of "0" design.
Pigtails attached to "butt-on" type sockets shall be soldered
or welded to contacts. Crimp connections are not acceptable.
Leads to "tombstone" type sockets shall be tinned before
connection.
2. Sockets shall hold lamps securely against normal vibrations and
maintenance handling. Provide solid nickel or nickel and silver
plated contacts in sockets for the following types of lamps:
a. Mogul base - large sizes, incandescent, metal halide,
mercury vapor.
b. Lamps in all outdoor fixtures.
c. Tungsten halogen lamps.
G. Adjustable Fixtures: In adjustable fixtures, provide aiming lock
devices. Fixtures with adjustable lamps and using lamps with
aSYmmetrical light patterns shall have an aiming stop which can be
permanently set so that the lamp shall remain correctly positioned
after service or relamping.
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16510-3
5910861-000
H. Diffusers of Light Fixtures: Each fixture requiring a lens shall be
complete with appropriate framed lens 0.12s-inch minimum thickness
. '
or as shown on fJ.xture schedule. Florescent fixtures shall have 100
percent virgin acrylic, KSH-12 pattern, or as indicated.
I. Parabolic Lens: Parabolic lens shall be shipped to the project site
with a factory installed protective self-adhering mylar overlay for
protection against construction dust. All parabolic lens shall be
free from dust and finger prints prior to Owner acceptance. If
necessary, Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning fixture and
parabolic lens.
2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Lighting fixtures shall be provided in accordance with the schedules.
Fixtures shall be furnished complete with all accessories necessary
for complete and proper installation. Catalog numbers indicated in
schedules do not necessarily include plaster frame, special mounting
rails and other fittings which may be required for proper
installation, but these devices shall be provided where applicable.
B. Schedule of Fixtures: See drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RECESSED FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. Fixtures shall be installed in suspended ceiling openings as
provided. Load bearing supports shall be provided along sides and
end of fixture.
3.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES RECESSED IN FIRE RATED CEILINGS, AND PLENUM SPACES
A. Fixture shall be constructed to provide continuous operation when
installed in air plenums, or when surrounded with restrictive
enclosures.
B. Where space above ceiling is used as an air plenum changer for either
supply or return air the fixture shall be factory wired in accordance
with Article 300-22(C) of the NEC.
3.3 WIRING
A. For 120 volt fixture wJ.rJ.ng, use minimum 300 volt, ls0C, type SF-1,
SF-2, SFF-1, SFF-2, PF or PFF wire beginning at separately mounted
outlet box unless higher temperature wire is required by fixture
design.
B. For higher-voltage fixture wiring use 600 volt, Type SF-2 or SFF-2
wire beginning at separately mounted outlet box, unless higher
temperature wire is required by fixture design.
C. All wire nuts used in fixtures shall have helical cone shaped live
spring to ensure tight pressure connection. wire nuts without metal
spring are not acceptable.
3.4 BLEMISHED, DAMAGED, OR UNSATISFACTORY FIXTURES
A. Fixtures shall be replaced with new fixtures.
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16510-4
5910861-000
B. Fixtures with highly polished reflective surfaces shall NOT be
handled with bare hands but with new, clean, grease-free cotton
gloves. Surfaces found with finger prints shall be cleaned or
replaced with new fixtures.
3.5 TARGETING
A. Target and adjust fixtures immediately before final inspection.
3.6 CLEANING OF FIXTURES
A. Before final acceptance of electrical work, clean fixture bottom,
trim and reflecting surfaces of dust, dirt, plaster, paint and
foreign matter. Mask trim and bottom of all lighting fixtures if
necessary to protect the fixtures. Diffuser cleaning materials and
methods shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
As a minimum, fixtures shall be cleaned with a nonstatic producing
solution and air dried.
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
A. Lighting in equipment rooms and electric closets is diagrammatic,
indicating type, quantity and general circuiting of fixtures. Modify
locations and mounting to suit conditions, allowing clearances for
equipment, piping and ductwork.
B. Verify recessing depths for all lighting fixtures, and where
required, provide matching "modified" units of decreased depth for
fixture installation. Verify horizontal clearances and provide units
of proper length.
C. Plaster Frames shall be provided for all recessed fixtures including
those located in lath and plaster, gypsum board and similar material.
D. Light fixtures installed in stair construction shall have clearances
verified and coordinated for conduit feeds, concealed conduit
systems, recess depths, and other obstructions.
E.
Provide
channels
fi t tings
fixture.
fixture support bars spanning structural T-bar ceiling
for surface mounting type fixtures. Support bars and
shall allow vertical and horizontal positioning of the
F. Provide a proper ceiling grid hanger for fixtures that are mounted or
suspended from exposed "T-Grid" ceilings. Grid hanger shall be
secured to main support channels of the ceiling and shall have
provisions for locking in place. Grid hangers shall accept stem
canopy or surface fixtures.
G. Fixtures that are located in acoustical tile ceilings shall be
located as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. Fixtures shall be
fastened to the ceiling framing member per the requirements on NEC
Article 410-16(c).
H. Fluorescent fixtures in mechanical spaces shall be hung on heavy
chain. In areas where exposed ductwork, pipes, and similar
obstructions cross locations for light fixture supports, provide
Unistrut or approved equal framing supports to span obstruction.
I. Incandescent fixture locations in mechanical equipment spaces shall
be coordinated with work of other trades. Fixtures that are mounted
below ductwork shall be provided with supports for conduit and box,
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16510-5
5910861-000
approved equal to Unistrut. Mount at 8 feet, 6 inches where possible
but not less than 7 feet, 6 inches unless approved by the
Architect-Engineer.
J. Verify roughing heights of "under-cabinet" type fixture installations
to conceal rough-in and provide control by standard wall switch
located below fixture and ganged with receptacle where applicable,
unless otherwise shown.
K. EM'! shall not be used to support suspended fixtures of any type.
Suspension shall be by standard hangers, where available and
applicable; by rigid threaded conduit and fittings, or by approved
rods.
L. Where fixtures are to be mounted on, or suspended from, concrete
ceilings, cast-in inserts shall be provided. Tamped or drilled
inserts will not be acceptable.
M. Fixtures shall not be supported by outlet box cover screws alone, a
fixture stud or "hickey" shall be provided for added support.
N. Fixtures located in Fire Underwriters rated ceiling shall have an
equal fire enclosure around fixture. Enclosure shall contain 10
percent maximum free area in ventilation openings.
3.8 TESTS
A. Each support for fixtures shall be tested with a weight of not less
than 50 pounds or three times the weight of the installed fixture,
whichever is greater.
END OF SECTION 16510
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16510-6
""~'~'"",l.i;f""''''''''l.l/;I.h~~~'''''""",,'~'''~''J''~,I;'J,;....,,, t.."".,."..",,,,,,,,.,,,,,,,,,,,,,.,;~~,,,
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSENGER TBRIIIRAL BUILDING
H:>NROE CCXJRTY. FLORIDA
SECTION 16610 - SURGE
SUPPRESSORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. These specifications described the electrical and mechanical
requirements for a UL 1449 listed transient voltage surge suppression
(TVSS) system. The specified system shall provide effective high
energy surge current diversion and be suitable for application in
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments. The system shall contain
no series connected components.
1 .2 STANDARDS
A. The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested and
installed in compliance with:
1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.4s.
2. NEMA.
3. NFPA 70, 75 and 78.
4. UL 1449 and UL 1283.
B. The system shall be UL listed as a complete system under UL 1449
standard for transient voltage surge suppressors. Systems not UL
1449 listed are not acceptable.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Location: The TVSS shall be installed at the main service
switchboard QA and at the Chiller/generator building panel QB.
B. Modes of Protection: The modes of protection shall be line to
ground, line to neutral and neutral to ground.
C. Minimum Surge Current Capacity per Phase: The minimum surge current
capacity for each required mode of protection based upon a standard
8 X 20 microsecond current waveform shall be 75,000 amps per phase.
D. Sequential Surge Current Survivability: The TVSS shall be capable of
surviving 1,000 sequential Category C surges without failure.
Verification shall be by the test procedures established in C62.4s.
E. The maximum UL 1449 rating shall be as follows for each mode of
protection required in "B."
1. 400 volts for 120, 120/208 or 120/240 volt systems.
F. Clamping Voltage for Category C (ANSI/EIII C62.41 and C62.4S): The
maximum clamping voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE
C62.41 and C62.4S Category C criteria shall be as follows:
1. 120/208, 3-phase, 4-wire systems, 522 volts.
G. Method of Connection: The TVSS shall be parallel connected.
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
16610-1
5910861-000
H. Acceptable Manufacturer: Liebert Corporation Model LCG12 OYC2; United
Power "PO" Series; or Advanced Protection Technologies.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall include:
1. Documentation of UL 1449 listing and UL 1449 clamping voltage
rating for each mode of protection.
2. Documentation of ANSI/IEEE C62 .41 and C62 .45 Category C clamping
voltage.
3. Documentation of life cycle testing in accordance with ANSI/IEEE
C62.4S suggested wait times verifying the TVSS will survive
1,000 sequential Category C surges of 10,000 amps without
failure.
4. Dimensions and weights.
5. Warranty statement.
6. Recommended connection wiring diagram.
7. Layout of component diagram.
8. Installation, operation and maintenance manual.
B. The submittal shall include a copy of these specifications with each
paragraph section marked with either "C" for comply or "0" for
deviation. A written explanation shall be provided for each
deviation for the system to be considered for acceptance. Any
deviation may result in the system being determined "not acceptable."
1 . 5 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall provide a fullS-year warranty against any
part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written
instructions, UL listing requirements, and any applicable national or
local electrical codes.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The specified system shall be thoroughly factory-tested before
shipment. Testing of each system shall include but shall not be
limited to quality control check, "hi-pot" tests at 2 times rated
voltage plus 1,000 volts per UL requirements, UL ground leakage tests
and operational and calibration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. The system shall be constructed using multiple surge current
diversion modules, each rated for at least 25 kAmps of surge current
capacity based on the standard 8 X 20 microsecond waveform. Each
module shall be capable of withstanding over 1,000 pulses of the 10
kAmp IEEE 62.41 Category C surge current without degradation of
clamping voltage. The module shall consist of multiple gapless metal
oxide varistors, with each MOV individually fused. The modules shall
be designed and constructed in a manner which ensures reasonable MOV
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
16610-2
5910861-000
surge current sharing. No gas tubes or silicon avalanche diodes
shall be used. The status of each varistor shall be monitored and a
green LED shall be illuminated if the module is in full working
order. When module performance is degraded, such as if one or more
fuses or varistors have failed, the LED shall indicate a failed
module. The maximum continuous operating voltage of the MOV shall be
a minimum of 10 percent over the nominal RMS voltage to allow a
momentary high line (swell) of up to ten percent to pass without
causing MOV degradation or failure.
B. Terminals shall be provided for all of the necessary power and ground
connections. The terminals shall accommodate wire sizes of #14 to #4
AWG.
C. All surge current diversion module intra-unit connections shall be by
way of low impedance plated busbars. No small gauge round wire or
plug- in connections shall be used as the surge current carrying
conductor. Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted
connections to the plated busbars for reliable low impedance
connections. All module mounting hardware and power wiring shall be
captive or remain in place when a module is removed or replaced.
D. The specified system shall be provided in a heavy-duty NEMA 12
dustight, driptight enclosure with no ventilation openings. The
cover of the enclosure shall be hinged and require a tool for access
to internal components. Indication of surge current module status
shall be visible without opening the door.
E. The TVSS shall have a response no greater than 5 nanoseconds for any
of the individual modes of protection.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. The TVSS shall be supplied with spare modules as follows:
1. Service Entrance/Main Distribution Panel Units (total per
project) :
a. 3 Spare line to ground modules.
b. 3 spare line to neutral modules (or line to line modules
on a delta service) .
c. 1 spare neutral to ground module (wye services only) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 LOCATION
A. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, apply TVSS on the load side
of the first main disconnect at the electrical service entrance
switchboard for service entrance/main distribution units.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install the TVSS with #4 AWG minimum conductors. The conductors are
to be as short and straight as practically possible and shall not
exceed 10 feet in length. The input conductors are to be twisted
together to reduce the TVSS system inductance. The TVSS shall be
connected to the switchboard or panelboard bus through a 3 -pole
circuit breaker furnished in the switchboard or panelboard. The TVSS
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
16610-3
5910861-000
shall be installed following the TVSS manufacturer's recommended
practices and in compliance with all applicable codes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. visual Inspection During Installation:
1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.
2. Verify installation per drawings.
3. Inspect cabinets for foreign objects.
4. Verify phase, neutral and ground conductors are properly sized
and configured.
B. Mechanical Inspection During Installation:
1. Check all control wiring connections for tightness.
2. Check all power wiring connections for tightness.
3. Check all terminal screws, nuts and/or connectors for tightness.
C. Electrical Inspection During Installation:
1. Confirm input voltage.
2. Confirm phase, neutral and ground connections are proper.
END OF SECTION 16610
SURGE SUPPRESSORS
16610-4
~'-,....___".~_...",_,->,_.,._.,.<'_' ,.....,_._"'....,....,"".,"""""'_oIIo4lliil~f$oIIii 1"1 f' ~....,- '- 1!'''IDlofl._."",o..,
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSlmGBR TBRMIRAL BUILDING
M:>NROE CCXJRTY. FLORIDA
SECTION 16620 - EMERGENCY
GBRBRATOR SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Emergency electric system shall consist of a complete and operating
electric generating unit, which, upon interruption of normal power,
will start automatically and, by an automatic transfer switch, will
disconnect load from normal supply and connect load to emergency
generator. Diesel engine driven electric generator set shall be of
the latest commercial type and design with all necessary switchgear,
controls and accessories.
B. The emergency generator system shall pick up its connected loads
within 10 seconds after failure of the utility power supply.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. List of one or more operating installations using major components
of the same or similar type equipment furnished for this project.
B. Name of nearest location of permanent parts supply from which parts
may be obtained in sufficient quantity on a 24-hour basis.
C. Shop drawings of the generator set, its foundation requirements,
auxiliary equipment required including switches, controls, remote
panel, wiring and accessories.
D. Manufacturer's product data describing unit, auxiliary equipment
required, including switches, engine, pump and motor. Include the
following.
1. Specifications for fuel.
2. Make of engine.
3. Number of cylinders.
4. Compression ratio.
S. Bore, inches.
6. Stroke, inches.
7. piston displacement cubic inches.
8. piston speed at rated RPM, feet per minute.
9. Make and type of generator.
10. Generator electrical rating, kv.A.
11. Number and type of generator bearings.
12. Exciter type and drive.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-1
5910861-000
E. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be supplied for the electric
set and for auxiliary equipment as specified in Section 16971 -
INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
F. Manufacturer's warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit shall be the product of a firm regularly engaged in the
manufacture of engines, and a standard model in regular production
at the manufacturer's place of business.
B. Parts Service: Only current units which can be properly maintained
and serviced without the necessity of the Owner carrying extensive
parts stocks, or being subj ect to long periods of interrupted
service due to unavailable parts will be considered.
Engine-generator supplier shall maintain a local parts and service
facility. Service facility shall have no less than 60 percent of
all engine replacement parts in his stock at all times.
1 . 4 RATING
A. Electric set shall be capable of producing rated output at standby
duty at rated generator RPM when equipped with necessary operating
accessories such as air cleaners, lubricating oil pump, fuel
transfer pump, radiator fan, jacket water pump, governor,
alternating current generator and exciter. Unit shall be 1800 RPM,
3-phase, 60-cycle, 208Y/120 volt.
1 . 5 WARRANTY
A. All units of the emergency electric system shall be covered by the
manufacturer's standard warranty or guarantee for the new emergency
generator set.
B. On completion of the installation, the initial start-up shall be
performed by a factory trained representative of the manufacturer.
At the time of start -up, operating instructions and maintenance
procedures shall be thoroughly explained to Owner's operating
personnel.
1.6 FACTORY TESTS
A. Provide written records of the testing procedure and the data
obtained.
B. Unit shall be tested for compliance with Paragraph 2.2.C regarding
generator set performance.
1.7 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. The equipment and installation of the system shall comply with the
following references and standards.
1. National Electrical Code, Article 700.
2. National Fire Protection Association Standard: NFPA 110.
3. State and local building codes.
4. Local authorities having jurisdiction.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-2
5910861-000
s. Applicable UL approvals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIESEL ENGINE
A. Engine shall be similar to those manufactured by Caterpillar Tractor
Company or Onan/Cummins.
B. Diesel engine shall be vertical or "V" multicylinder, full diesel,
mechanical injection, heavy-duty type, arranged for direct
connection to an alternating current generator, and shall be the
product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the building of full
diesel engines. Engine shall be a current model which has been in
regular production for at least 3 years. Engine shall develop
sufficient brake horsepower, net at rated RPM, corrected to sea
level barometric pressure (29.92 in. HG.) and 110 degrees F, to
operate generator continuously at its rated output with all losses
included without undue heating, vibration or wear. Diesel engine
shall be water cooled four cycle compression ignition diesel
turbocharged for maximum efficiency.
C. BHP rating, overall generator efficiency, required auxiliaries,
guarantee of fuel consumption, governor performance and torsional
vibration shall be in accordance with manufacturer's standard
published curves and data. Special ratings for a particular
application are not acceptable.
D. Engine shall be equipped with an electronic speed sensing governor
capable of isochronous speed regulation from no load to full-rated
load. Provide Woodward Model 1724 or approved equal.
E. Engine shall be equipped with a pressure lubrication system
supplying oil to all surfaces requiring lubrication. Circulation
shall be by a positive displacement pump. Lubrication system shall
include a full-flow strainer, oil filter, and an oil cooler of
sufficient capacity to properly cool all lubricating oil circulated.
F. Engine shall have an individual mechanical fuel injection pump and
injection valve for each cylinder, anyone of which may be removed
and replaced from parts stock. Injection pumps and injection valves
shall not require adjustment in service. Fuel injection pumps shall
be positive action, constant-stroke pumps, actuated by a cam driven
by gears from the engine crankshaft.
1. Fuel lines between injection pump and valves shall be heavy
seamless tubing; and, to eliminate irregularity of fuel
injections, shall be of the same length for all cylinders.
2. Fuel system shall be equipped with replaceable fuel filter
elements which may be easily removed without breaking any fuel
line connections or disturbing the fuel pumps or any other
part of the engine.
3. All fuel filters shall be conveniently located in one
accessible housing, ahead of injection pumps so that fuel will
have been thoroughly filtered before it reaches the pumps. No
screens or filters requiring cleaning or replacement shall be
used in injection pump or injection valve assemblies.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-3
5910861-000
4. Engine shall be equipped with a built-in, gear-type,
engine-driven fuel transfer pump, capable of lifting fuel
against a head of 12 feet, for supplying fuel through filters
to injection pump at constant pressure.
G. Engine shall be provided with suitable safety controls to
automatically stop the unit when low oil pressure, water temperature
or engine speed exceeds safe limits. pilot lights shall be provided
to visually indicate the cause of engine shut down. Pilot lights
shall operate off battery circuit and shall be on engine generator
control panel.
H. Engine shall be equipped with radiator and blower fan of sufficient
capacity for cooling engine when diesel electric set is delivering
full rated load in an ambient temperature of 125 degrees F. Air
flow restriction from radiator shall not exceed 0.5 inch H20.
Engine shall have a thermostat integral with jacket water circuit to
maintain water at proper operating temperature. Engine shall have
an engine driven centrifugal type water circulating pump for
circulating water through cooling system.
I. Engine shall be equipped with a precombustion chamber fuel system or
have sui table emission control equipment to ensure that gaseous
exhaust emissions do not exceed current limits in effect as of the
date of manufacturer of the engine.
1. These maximum levels shall be at manufacturers rated speed and
load as measured by SAE-J177 and SAE-J21s recommended
practices. Verification of ability to meet emission
specifications shall be available from engine manufacturer.
J. Engine shall be provided with an antifreeze solution of 50 percent
ethylene glycol, and sui table unit mounted, thermal circulation type
water heater incorporating a thermostatic switch to maintain engine
jacket water at 90 degrees F in an ambient temperature of 30 degrees
F. Heater shall be minimum 1,500 watts, single-phase, 60 Hertz, 120
volts, Chromalox or approved equal.
K. Engine shall be equipped with suitable base for mounting on concrete
foundation. Engine-generator unit shall be designed for mounting on
suitable vibration dampers recommended by engine manufacturer.
Vibration dampers shall be furnished with engine-generator unit and
shall be manufactured by Korfund, Inc., or approved equal.
L. Furnish a set of spare parts and tools regularly supplied with
engine. Include all tools of special nature required to properly
service engine.
M. Provide one or more engine-mounted, dry-type air cleaners of
sufficient capacity to protect working parts of the engine from dust
and grit.
2 .2 GENERATOR
A. Generator shall be engine driven, single bearing, self-aligning,
continuous duty, salient pole, synchronous type with amortisseur
windings. It shall be of the drip -proof type, entirely self-
contained with only line leads brought out for load connections.
Generator insulation used shall be NEMAClass F, such that generator
life will match that of the prime mover. Generator shall be
designed so all components are accessible with a minimum amount of
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-4
5910861-000
labor. Both engine and generator shall be warranted and serviced by
same manufacturer.
B. Generator shall be brushless type, rated at .8PF three phase, 60
hertz 208Y/120 volt 4-wire 1,800 RPM.
C. Voltage regulator shall be modular construction, replaceable as an
assembly and shall provide regulation for single-unit operation
within plus or minus 2 percent from rated voltage at any load
between "no load" and "full load."
D. Generator shall have permanent magnet excitation system which shall
incorporate silicon control rectifiers to provide alternator field
excitation at rated load and rated voltage. Excitation system shall
incorporated circuitry to permit voltage built-up from residual
magnetism. Field flashing from a separate source is not acceptable.
E. Voltage level, voltage drop and voltage gain controls are to be
provided, easily accessible for normal operating adjustments.
Voltage level control shall have a minimum range of plus or minus 5
percent from rated voltage. Provide voltage adjustment instructions
and generator schematic wiring diagram permanently attached on
inside of exciter assembly.
F. Generator drive shall be free from critical torsional vibration
within the operating speed range.
G. Provide generator space heater rated 400 watts, 120 volts.
2 . 3 GENERATOR STARTING AND CONTROL PANEL
A. Furnish and install automatic generator starting and control panel
in a metal enclosure. Starting section shall automatically start
engine upon failure of normal source through starting contacts in
the main service switchboard controls.
B. Transfer unit shall serve to operate as follows: Failure of normal
supply shall cause its voltage sensitive relay to close a normally
open contact initiating starting cycle of diesel engine. Closing of
this contact shall cause power to be fed to a throttle solenoid,
which picks up, opening fuel rack and energizing starting motor
through one of its contacts. As generator voltage approaches
normal, relay coil in cranking panel picks up, opening starting
circuit through one of its contacts, thereby disconnecting starting
motor from the rest of the circuit. Lack of oil pressure or over-
temperature of cooling system will cause second relay in cranking
panel to be energized, as normal alternator voltage is approached,
causing starting cycle to be terminated immediately. Should engine
fail to start for any reason, a time delay relay in cranking panel
limits its cranking period to 30 seconds. A pushbutton switch
mounted on cranking panel shall allow engine to be further cranked
at the operator's discretion. Resumption of normal power shall open
engine contacts in transfer control and shall cause engine to begin
shut down cycle.
C. Generator control section shall include the following:
1. Ammeter and voltmeter.
2. Frequency meter.
3. Ammeter and voltmeter phase selector switches.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-5
5910861-000
4. One set dry contacts for remote alarm wired to terminal
strips.
S. One voltage adjusting rheostat
6. Three instrument transformers.
7. One elapsed time meter (hours of operation) necessary
auxiliary relay, necessary terminals and nameplates.
8. One 3 or 4-position control switch, G.E. SB-l or equal which
shall accomplish the following.
a.
Selector Switch at "AUTOMATIC" position:
starting will commence automatically upon
failure and closure of start contact in ATS.
Engine
utility
b. Selector Switch "MANUAL" position. Engine will start
manually.
c. Selector Switch in "STOP/RESET" Position: Engine will
be stopped and all controls reset to starting position.
d.
Selector Switch in "OFF" position.
circuit disabled.
Engine starting
2.4 EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Exhaust Silencer: A Nelson critical "300" Type 4 level exhaust
silencer, companion flanges and a flexible stainless steel exhaust
fitting properly sized shall be furnished for installation by the
Division 15 Subcontractor.
B. Insulation: All interior exhaust piping and silencer shall be
insulated by the Division 15 Subcontractor.
2.5 FUEL TANK
A. Provide a sOO-gallon steel double wall base tank. The fuel tank
shall be a standard product of the engine-generator set
manufacturer. The fuel tank shall be constructed of steel, welded
construction and pressure tested to 10 psi. It shall be supplied
with a lockable exterior fuel cap. All necessary fuel vent lines
for proper engine performance shall be provided as well as a means
to readily detect the fuel tank level in the tank without the use of
a measuring stick. The tank shall be designed to structurally
support the entire dynamic weight of the engine generator set.
1. The bottom tank sheet shall be a minimum of 1 inch above the
concrete pad.
2. The base shall be primed and painted with a high-grade,
commercial enamel paint. All interior areas of the tank shall
be epoxy coated.
3. The base shall have a minimum of three lifting points per side
and maintain structural integrity during normal site
installation.
B. Supply a low fuel and high fuel level sensing device to signal the
electric set alarm annunciator panel specified herein, installed on
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-6
5910861-000
the base fuel tank. The sensing device shall be adjusted to signal
low fuel level when the tank contains less than a 200-gallon supply.
C. Supply a leak detector mounted in the double wall cavity of the base
fuel tank that will sense the presence of diesel fuel and alarm the
condition. The audible and visual alarm shall annunciate at the
generator control panel at the remote alarm panel.
D. Provide 500 gallons of fuel for initial operation of the engine-
generator plus replace all fuel used during testing and of the
system.
E. Provide fuel cooler, if required, for the fuel returning to the fuel
tank.
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible connections of all types for fuel system shall be stainless
steel metal-armored construction, of adequate lengths to isolate
fixed piping and conduit systems from engine-generator units.
2.7 AUTOMATIC STARTING SYSTEM
A. 24 VDC electric starting system with positive engagement shall be
furnished.
B. Battery: A lead acid storage battery set of the heavy duty diesel
starting type shall be provided. Battery voltage shall be
compatible with the starting system. The battery set shall be rated
not less than 170 ampere hours. Necessary cables and clamps shall
be provided.
C. Battery Trays: A battery tray shall be provided for the battery and
shall conform to NEC 480-7(b). It shall be constructed of wood or
PVC protected metal, so treated as to be resistant to deterioration
by battery electrolyte. Further, construction shall be such that
any spillage or boilover of battery electrolyte shall be contained
within the tray to prevent a direct path to the surrounding soil or
drains.
D. The battery shall have sufficient capacity for emergency controls,
to operate engine governor system, and for cranking the engine for
at least 40 seconds at firing speed in the 110 degrees F maximum and
40 degrees F minimum temperature range.
E. Battery Charger: A current limiting battery charger, La Marche or
equal, shall be furnished to automatically recharge the batteries.
The charger shall float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33
volts per cell. It shall include overload protection, silicon diode
full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressor, high and low DC
voltage alarm relays, DC ammeter, DC voltmeter and fused AC input.
AC input voltage shall be 120 volts, single phase. The charger
shall be suitable for operation in an ambient atmosphere of 30
degrees F to 110 degrees F. Output shall be rated for 10 amps at 24
VDC.
2 . 8 REMOTE ALARM PANEL
A. Provide a remote alarm panel with the following points:
1. Generator circuit breakers open (two breakers in Panel EM).
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-7
5910861-000
2. Generator running.
3. Battery charger malfunction (high and low battery voltage).
4. Low oil pressure.
5. High water temperature.
6. Low water temperature.
7 . Overcrank.
8 . Overspeed.
9. Fuel tank alarm on low fuel or overflow.
10. Not in automatic mode.
B. Panel shall contain a properly labeled "push to test" light and an
audible device to annunciate each point. A silence switch shall
also be provided.
C. Panel shall be powered from the generator set cranking batteries.
D. Panel shall be suitable for flush mounting in a nominal 4-inch wall
with stainless steel front panel. Maximum size 8 inches wide by 8
inches high by 3 inches deep.
E. Panel shall be solid state with LED lamps for high reliability.
2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS (NON-ELECTRICAL)
A. Flexible connections of all types shall be metal-armored stainless
steel construction, of adequate lengths to isolate fixed piping from
engine-generator units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, EMERGENCY GENERATOR
A. Size of items and arrangement of all equipment shall be verified to
be correct for space provided, allowing for moving into place, for
normal maintenance and servicing and removal. Verify clearances of
equipment to permit convenient installation and removal of complete
assemblies, prior to commencing any work in this area.
B. Install subbase fuel tank and all associated fuel oil piping from
base-mounted fuel oil tank.
C. Contractor shall connect all cabling for load bank testing of
diesel-generator and automatic transfer switchboard.
D. All power, control and alarm connections shall be made to engine
generator through flexible, neoprene-jacketed raceways, of length to
permit handflexing.
E. Provide spring-isolators for engine mounting to base.
F. Installation shall meet all applicable codes, including NEC, NFBU
No. 20, NFPA No. 37 and No. 30.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-8
5910861-000
G. All engine-generator controls shall be provided with permanent
lithographed, engraved or stamped tags, manufactured of metal or
lamacoid material.
H. Provide all required conductors of proper AWG in conduits to
generator and controls. Contractor shall verify these details prior
to bid with proposed engine supplier.
I. All power connections to the generator set shall be made using
compression type lugs furnished by the Contractor.
J. Install remote monitoring panel in second floor office, Room #201.
Provide conduit and wiring for proper operation of panel.
3.2 TESTS
A. Prior to acceptance of the installation, equipment shall be tested
to show it is free of defects and will start automatically and be
subjected to full load test by using portable load banks and cables
provided by the Contractor. Load bank shall be capable of definite
and precise incremental loading and shall not be dependent on
generator control instrumentation to read amperage and voltage of
each phase. Test instrumentation shall serve as a check of
generator set meters. Testing shall be done in the presence of the
Owner's representative after unit is permanently installed in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. Testing shall be
for a minimum of 4 hours total. Fuel for testing shall be supplied
by the Contractor.
B. The on-site installation test shall be conducted in the following
manner:
1. With diesel-generator in a "cold start" condition and
emergency load at normal level, initiate a normal power
failure by opening the breaker supplying the normal power to
the building. Test load shall be that load that is served by
the generator.
2. Observe and record the time delay on start.
3. Observe and record the cranking time until the engine starts
and runs.
4. Observe and record the time required to come up to operating
speed.
5. Record voltage and frequency overshoot.
6. Observe and record time required to achieve steady- state
condition with breakers transferred to the emergency position.
7. Record voltage, frequency and amperes.
8. Record engine oil pressure, water temperature and battery
charge rate at 5-minute intervals for the first 15 minutes,
and at IS-minute intervals thereafter.
9. Continue load test with building load for 2 hours minimum,
observing and recording load changes and the resultant effect
on voltage and frequency.
10. Return normal power to the main service switchboard and record
the time delay on retransfer to normal (minimum setting: 5
minutes), and the time delay on cool down period and shutdown.
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-9
5910861-000
11. After completion of the test above, the diesel generator shall
be allowed to cool and a resistive load bank shall be
connected to the output of the main service switchboard for a
2-hour full load test.
12. A full-load test shall be initiated as soon as possible after
the 5-minute cool down period. Start the diesel generator
system by opening the normal breaker to the main service
switchboard and have the diesel generator pickup 100 percent
of nameplate kW rating in one step.
13. Record the data listed in (3) through (8) at first load
acceptance and every 15 minutes thereafter until the
completion of the 2-hour test period.
14. Utilize any method recommended by the manufacturer to prevent
the prime mover from running. Put the control switch into
"run" to cause the engine to crank. Observe the complete
crank/rest cycle.
15. Test all safeties specified and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
C. Prior to acceptance, any defects which became evident during this
test shall be corrected at no additional expense to the Owner.
D. On completion of the installation, the initial start-up and testing
shall be performed by a factory trained representative of the engine
supplier. Minimum time at the site for the factory trained
representative shall be one day. At the time of start-up, operating
instructions and maintenance procedures shall be thoroughly
explained to the operating personnel. Two copies of operating and
maintenance instruction books shall be supplied for the electric set
and such auxiliary equipment as may require same.
E. After completion of testing, replace engine oil and filters in unit.
Refill fuel oil tank to replace fuel used.
3.3 CLEANING
A. The Contractor shall provide suitable protection from moisture, dust
and construction debris until acceptance of equipment by Owner. All
items shall be cleaned, touched up as necessary and left in first-
class condition to the satisfaction of the Architect.
END OF SECTION 16620
EMERGENCY GENERATOR SYSTEM
16620-10
"''''''';'';''"""",_~~if40~itl....,..-..~,,,.......''~~d'''h'.,.''''
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
I<<>NROB COtIRTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 16670 - LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work includes providing a functional and unobtrusive lightning
protection UL master label system as specified herein.
B. Any departure from the specifications or manufacturer's submittal
drawings covered below are deemed necessary by the Contractor,
details of such departures and reasons therefor shall be submitted as
soon as practicable to the ArChitect-Engineer for approval. No such
departures shall be made without prior written approval of the
Architect-Engineer.
C. Provide lightning protection system for the new Passenger Terminal
Building and for the new Chiller/Generator Building.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit the type, size, and locations of all
equipment, grounds, and cable routing on a set of drawings prepared
by the Contractor to the same scale as the Contract drawings. After
approval, submit 1 set to FDOT Office of Quality Assurance.
B. Manufacturer's product data.
C. Samples: Submit a complete selection where requested.
D. UL master label application form and LPI forms 175A and B.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The lightning protection system shall conform to the following
requirements:
1. Lightning Protection Institute Installation (LPI) Code LPI-175.
2. Underwriter's Laboratories Master Label Code 96A (UL).
3. National Fire Protection Association Code NO. 78 (NFPA).
B. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements of
the Lightning Protection Institute and Underwriter's Laboratories,
Inc. Standards for Lightning Protection Systems. Underwriter's
Laboratories master label shall be furnished affixed as directed.
C. The system shall be the standard product of a manufacturer regularly
engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall
be the manufacturer's latest approved design.
D. System manufacturer shall be UL listed and approved manufacturer.
E. Materials shall be manufactured by Thompson Lightning Protection,
Inc., 901 Sibley Highway, St. Paul, Minnesota, 55118, or approved
equal.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
16670-1
5910861-000
F. The lightning protection system shall be installed by a firm
regularly engaged and experienced in installing approved lightning
protection systems and listed with the Underwriters' Laboratories,
Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All material and equipment shall be UL approved and labelled.
B. All equipment shall be the product of a single manufacturer and of a
design and construction to suit the application for which it is to be
used, in accordance with accepted industry standards, LPI, NFPA and
UL code requirements.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. All equipment used in this installation shall be UL inspected,
approved and properly labeled. All equipment shall be new, the
product of a single manufacturer and of a design and construction to
suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted
industry standards and LPI and NFPA Code requirements.
B. All materials shall be copper or bronze and of the size, weight, and
construction to suit the application where used in accordance with
LPI and NFPA Code requirements for Class I structures and as per
manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Conductors shall be soft drawn annealed bare copper cable, weighing
not less than 215 pounds per 1,000 feet and 65,500 circular mils
area.
D. Air terminals shall be solid copper with tapered nickel tipped points
and 1/2 x 12 inch size minimum.
E. All fasteners shall be substantial in construction, not subject to
breakage and shall be of the same material as the conductor or of
such nature that there will be no serious tendency toward
electrolytic corrosion in the presence of moisture.
F. Ground rods shall be made of copper-clad steel. The proportion of
copper on copper-clad rods shall be approximately 30 percent of the
weight of the rod. Ground rods shall be driven vertically. Minimum
5/8 inch in diameter and 10 feet, 0 inches long.
G. All miscellaneous bolts, nuts and screws shall be brass, bronze or
stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer.
B. All equipment shall be installed in the most inconspicuous manner
possible. System shall be installed complete with cable network on
the roof, air terminals, splices, and bonds with cable downleads
routed concealed directly in the building construction or in conduit
to ground.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
16670-2
5910861-000
C. Downlead cables shall not be brought directly through the roof.
Connectors with solid rods or conduit through pitch pockets shall be
used for through roof connector. Downlead conductors shall be
installed in PVC conduit concealed in building construction.
D. Equipment shall not be connected to aluminum surfaces except by a UL
approved fitting.
E. Air terminals and cable fasteners shall be located and spaced in
compliance with LPI and UL requirements.
F. Ground rods shall be located and spaced in compliance with LPI and UL
requirements. Coordinate down conductors with building construction.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate lightning protection work to ensure a correct, neat, and
unobtrusive installation.
B. Provide a mechanical bond to the main electrical service at each
building to assure inter-connecting with other building ground
systems, including both telephone and electrical.
3.3 LABEL
A. Secure and deliver a UL master label for each building to the
Architect-Engineer.
END OF SECTION 16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
16670-3
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBl!lGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
I<<>NROB COtIRTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 16721 - FIRE
ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The work includes furnishing and installing a fire alarm system,
complete, including control panel, detection and alarm initiating
devices, fan shutdown relays, conduit and wiring.
1.2 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. System shall be arranged to operate as follows:
1. Actuation of any alarm device shall cause its respective red
zone alarm lamp to glow and cause audio/visual alarm horns to
sound throughout the protected premises. Audible and visual
alarm indications shall be capable of being locked in by only
a momentary closure of an alarm device and, system shall be
returned to normal standby when contact alarm condi tion has been
cleared and reset switch operated.
2. "Ground fault" and "open circuit" or other abnormal conditions
shall cause a trouble signal to sound and a LED yellow trouble
light to glow on zone that has trouble. If trouble is in main
system board, an individual system trouble indicator will light.
Trouble lamps shall glow until trouble condition is corrected
and restored to normal.
3. System shall operate normally from 120 volt, 60 Hz power.
4. Operation of any sprinkler system tamper switch shall cause the
trouble signal to sound and a yellow LED trouble lamp to glow
for the respective zone.
B. In addition, system shall operate as follows:
1. Operation of any alarm detection device shall indicate at the
control panel by lighting the appropriate zone module alarm LED.
Building alarm devices shall automatically sound.
2. Subsequent alarms from additional zones shall cause alarm
devices to sound as in Item No. 1 above and shall override
acknowledge mode.
3. Provide auxiliary contacts in the return air duct mounted smoke
detectors to shut down respective air handling units.
4. Provide contacts from smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to
signal elevator controls. Each lobby level shall be annunciated
as a separate zone to the fire alarm panel and to the elevator
control panel.
C. The systems shall be electrically supervised against both short and
open wiring faults in the detection circuit, the alarm circuit and
the alarm and trouble relay coils. A short or open wiring fault
occurring in these circuits shall cause an audible and visual trouble
indication at the control panel.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16721-1
5910861-000
D. Operation of any sprinkler system flow switch shall cause an alarm
signal to sound. Operation of any tamper switch shall cause a
troubULcsignal to sound for the respective flow switch alarm zone.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete, including:
1. System components detailed drawings and engineering data.
2. Installation instructions for each piece of equipment.
3. Component wiring diagrams.
4. Provide riser diagram and floor plans showing conduit runs and
wires.
5. All products shall be identified by the same symbol as shown on
the drawings.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, description and drawings
of components.
C. Operation and Instruction Manuals:
1. Provide 3 copies of operating and instruction manuals with the
request for final inspection. Manuals shall contain all of the
information submitted in the approved shop drawings plus all
manufacturer's drawings incorporating modifications to system
whether made as a field change or by change order. Include a
certified copy of test report. All submittal data shall be
legible. Identify the specific material provided for this
project.
D. Test Report: A letter and a copy of the test report shall be
submitted indicating proper functioning of system, conformance to the
specifications and left in operating condition.
E. Instructions to Owner: A letter to the Owner, for the Owner's
signature, acknowledging that instruction in system operation has
been received. One copy to be retained by Owner and one copy sent to
Contractor. In addition, provide Owner with 1 set of keys to system
panels.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The system shall be listed and approved by UL, Inc., or Factory
Mutual. It shall be designed and installed in accordance with NFPA
No. 72A, 72D and 72E.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver all materials in manufacturer's packing in undamaged
condition.
B. Store all materials in dry place and protect them from damage and the
elements until installed.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturers who cannot supply and service completely, all portions
of the system shall not be submitted for approval.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16721-2
5910861-000
B. All components shall be provided under the same system manufacturer's
label, including bells, horns, speakers, annunciators, control
panels, pull stations, all types of heat-smoke-combustion detectors,
including duct mounted units.
C. Manufacturers shall provide factory trained service technicians
residing within 100 miles of the installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers are acceptable, provided the
manufacturer can provide the entire system under a single label: ADT
Company, Honeywell Company, Pyrotronics Company, Simplex Company, and
Fire Control Instruments.
B. The equipment numbers referenced herein are those of the Simplex Time
Recorder Company as an indication of quality and performance.
2 .2 GENERAL
A. System shall be:
1 . Noncoded.
2. Continuous ringing.
3. Electrically supervised.
4. Closed circuit.
5. Annunciated.
6. City system actuating to provide dry contact for transmission
over telephone wires.
7. All components shall bear same manufacturer's label as specified
in paragraph, Manufacturer Qualifications.
8. Equipment shall be capable of withstanding 1250V RMS tests for
2 minutes in compliance with NFPA No. 72D.
2.3 CONTROL PANEL
A. Panel shall operate from 120 VAC supply as indicated on the drawings.
The power input shall be fused within the panel. It shall include
lamps for system power, system trouble, as well as LED indications
for separate alarm and trouble for each zone. Momentary contact
switches shall be provided for "reset/lamp test" and "trouble
silence", which shall silence the internal trouble signal sounding
device. Alarm input shall override trouble and also have resound
capability should another zone be initiated.
B. Panel shall be low voltage, solid state, modular in design employing
pluggable modules for ease of additions, operational changes and
servicing. Components shall be mounted within a common enclosure,
prewired to terminal strips and shall be securely mounted in a sheet
metal housing finished in red enamel or acceptable color. All
switches, meters and indicator lights shall be visible through a
tempered glass door insert. Opening at the door shall make
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16721-3
5910861-000
accessible only the controls and shall not allow access to the panel
circuitry without removal of the front trim panel. Door shall be
fitted nth hinges and lock. Illuminated signal indications shall be
provided for power, alarm, and trouble in addition to one indication
for each zone. The control unit shall contain a supervisory
millimeter to indicate the supervisory current for the entire system,
internal trouble signal with silencing switches and system reset
switch. Trouble signal shall sound and a trouble lamp light on loss
of AC operating power. When trouble signals are silenced after being
sounded by faults on either the alarm initiating circuit or the alarm
signaling circuit, the trouble signal circuit shall reactivate after
the trouble condition has been corrected.
C. Control panel shall contain a transient voltage surge suppressor
rated minimum 10 amps, 120 VAC. Unit shall be listed with UL in
compliance with UL Standard 1449, July 1987 Revision. Acceptable:
Leviton Model 51020-WM.
2 .4 BATTERY MODULE
A. A lead-calcium battery system of the sealed electrolyte type rated an
adequate number of ampere hours shall be provided. Sealed
nickel-cadmium batteries may be provided. A battery monitor module
shall be provided to indicate low battery, battery disconnected or
charger failure. Battery capacity shall be sufficient to operate the
system for a period of 4 hours minimum (#2001-3070).
B. Battery charging capability shall be provided. Capability shall be
provided to automatically recharge batteries to their full capacity
(#2001-3002) .
C. Loss of main operating power to the system shall automatically cause
the system to transfer to battery power. While on emergency battery
power a yellow LED indicator lamp shall sequentially pulse on and off
to indicate visually the emergency condition. After normal power
has been restored and the emergency batteries have been fully
recharged, the system shall continue to float charge the batteries.
The module shall be fitted with a fuse to protect against battery
overcurrent and accidental reversal of polarity.
D. Module shall be complete with support bracketing and screw type
terminals and shall be installed in the same standard system
enclosure that houses the control panel and operating modules.
E. Battery module shall be UL, Inc. listed.
2.5 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual alarm stations shall be noncode, lock down, key reset type.
Outer cover shall be constructed of high impact red Lexan or die-cast
metal. Back plate shall be constructed of corrosion
resistance-steel. Wiring shall be terminated on binding type screw
terminals. pigtail/wire nut type stations are not acceptable.
Stations shall be designed for semi-flush mounting (#2099-9201).
B. Product of combustion detector shall be dual chamber ionization type
capable of detecting combustion gases, fire and smoke. The detector
shall operate directly from the 2-wire initiating circuit and shall
be provided with visual indication of detector status and mount in a
plug in base which shall contain terminals for making field
connections. Detector shall be designed for ceiling mount (#2098-
9507 detector with #2098-9502 base) .
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16721-4
5910861-000
C. Duct detector shall be dual photoelectric type capable of detecting
smoke in ventilating duct systems. The detector shall operate
directly from the 2-wire initiating circuit and small be provided
with auxiliary contacts for associated fan shut-down and alarm lamp
indication. Detector shall be supplied with suitable housing and
sampling tubes designed for duct mounting. The sampling tubes shall
be installed across the width of the duct in the air system. Duct
detectors shall be supplied with LED type alarm indicators (#2098-
9648) .
D. Heat detectors shall operate on the rate of rise plus fixed
temperature principle to detect a rise in temperature at a rate of 15
degrees F per minute or fixed temperature of 135 degrees to 136
degrees F. Detectors shall provide a visual indication on operation
of the fixed temperature element. In areas where normal temperature
exceeds 135 degrees F, provide a 190 degrees to 197 degrees F fixed
temperature detector as shown on the drawings. Detectors shall be of
the low profile type (#2098-9464 and #2098-9465) .
E. Smoke detector shall be photoelectric type and shall operate on a
light scatter principle. Detectors shall be factory set to detect
smoke at a nominal 1.5 percent light obscuration per foot. Smoke
detector shall have an integral fixed temperature heat detector rated
at 135 degrees F. Light source for detector chamber shall be
solid- state light emitting diode. Alarm indicator shall provide
visual indication of alarm condition (#2098-9646 detector with #2098-
9502 base) .
F. Flame detectors shall employ a solar blind ultraviolet sensor and
have a field adjustable time delay. The detector shall plug into its
base and have a visual indicator, to indicate initiations of an
alarm. Detector shall be Factory Mutual approved. (Armtec Omniguard
Model 652.)
2.6 ALARM SIGNALING DEVICES
A. Alarm horns shall be UL listed, suitable for flush mounting in wall
or ceiling box. Provide cover grille with red finish. Unit shall
have a minimum rating of 85 dbA at 4 feet (#2901-9833).
B. Visual alarm signals shall be UL listed, suitable for flush mounting
in either wall or ceiling as indicated. Unit shall be provided with
a lamp flasher and shall be white thermoplastic material with red
letters, "FIRE" (#2903 -9001) .
C. Combination devices shall be a visual and speaker device as described
above mounted on a faceplate.
2.7 FLOW SWITCHES
A. Flow switches on the sprinkler system are specified in Division 15.
Contractor shall verify exact quantity and location.
2.8 TAMPER SWITCHES
A. Tamper switches on the sprinkler system are specified in Division 15.
Contractor shall verify exact quantity and location.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16721-5
5910861-000
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRING
A. Wiring within the system shall be approved by manufacturer of the
fire alarm equipment.
B. Wiring shall be 300 volt insulated, solid or stranded conductors as
indicated and shall be UL listed power limited 105C-300V fire
protective signaling circuit cables. All wiring shall be installed
in metallic raceway sized for the number of conductors. Conduit fill
shall not exceed 40 percent of cross sectional area of conduit.
Refer to Table 4 of NFPA-70-1991.
C. All wiring shall be color coded, terminated in spade type lugs and
labeled.
1. Wiring for alarm signal circuits shall be #14 AWG gauge stranded
copper conductors.
2. Wiring for alarm indication circuits shall be #16 AWG gauge
solid copper conductors.
D. Wiring shall be checked and tested in accordance with the
instructions provided by the manufacturer to insure that the system
is free of grounds, opens, shorts, and that insulation resistance
between current carrying conductors is 10 megohms or greater before
connection to any equipment.
E. Provide a 1/2-inch conduit from control panel to nearest telephone
terminal cabinet wi th remote alarm conductors and trouble conductors.
F. Provide wiring and conduit for connection to all sprinkler system
flow switches and tamper switches.
G. Provide wiring and conduit for connection to elevator control system.
3.2 TESTING
A. Upon completion of the installation, a factory-trained technician
shall perform all necessary tests and adjustments.
B. Contractor shall conduct test to demonstrate proper operation of
control panel, remote annunciation, sprinkler alarm signals, air
handling shutdown and general alarm annunciation.
C. All detectors and pull stations shall be individually tested in the
presence of the Architect or his representative to demonstrate proper
operation of the system.
3.3 INSTRUCTIONS
A. Factory technician shall instruct Owner's personnel in the operation
of the system. Instruction shall include, but not be limited to,
resetting manual stations, replacing fuses, and the operation of all
switches.
B. The Contractor shall post the name, address and telephone number of
the Contractor, all Subcontractors and the fire alarm installer and
service organization on the inside cover of the main control panel.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16721-6
5910861-000
3.4 DETECTOR BASES
A. Detector bases shall be oriented so that LED pilot light will be
visible from the door into the room or space.
3.5 DUCT-MOUNTED DETECTORS
A. Sampling tubes shall be factory drilled with the number and size of
holes required for duct size.
B. Sampling tubes shorter than 48 inches shall be supported at the
remote end by a support mounted on inside of the duct. Tubes longer
than 48 inches shall be supported with a "V" bracket or strap hanger.
Supports shall not cover any holes in sampling tubes. Remote end of
tubes shall not penetrate opposite duct walls. Relief tube shall
extend a minimum of 2 inches beyond any internal insulation or duct
wall.
C. Duct access panels, as specified in Division 15, shall be provided at
all locations where sampling tubes are installed.
D. Air Duct Velocity: Shall be checked on each duct detector and the
reading included in the test report by the technician.
E. Provide a smoke detector in the return air duct for each individual
air handling unit. Provide shutdown relays for operation with air
handling control circuit. Detector location shall be approved by
local authority having jurisdiction and shall meet manufacturer's
recommendations for correct operation. Detectors shall annunciate as
an individual zone for each air handling unit.
F. Coordinate installation with Division 15 Contractor.
3.6 DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
A. Detector sensitivity shall be individually adjusted and set by a
factory-trained technician at installation and shall thereafter be
fixed. It shall be possible to accurately measure the detector's
sensitivity with an appropriate instrument. All detectors shall be
mounted in full accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.7 DETECTOR INSTALLATION
A. Detectors shall not be installed until project is complete, painted
and final cleaning has taken place. Detector used for testing or
installed prior to final project cleanup will not be accepted for
final installation.
3.8 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
A. Provide wiring and conduit for alarm annunciation of all tamper
switches and flow switches on the sprinkler system.
END OF SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16721-7
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBl!lGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
I<<>NROB COtIRTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 16740 - SPBCIALTY
CORDUIT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install a system of properly sized and properly located
outlets with associated connecting conduit runs, extending to pull
boxes, backboards in closets, etc. Furnish and install raceways, or
other provisions throughout the project, and incoming service
raceways where required. Specialty conduit systems shall be used for
telephone, radio, or security systems as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all outlets and junction boxes shall be
4-11/16 inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep with device cover.
B. Floor boxes shall be adjustable type as noted in other sections of
these specifications.
2.2 OUTLET COVER PLATES
A. Outlet cover plates shall match those specified for adjacent w1r1ng
devices, including those with special finishes. Provide proper size
bushing for cable size installed.
2 . 3 RACEWAYS
A. Materials for raceway system work shall be in accordance with
corresponding raceways specified herein and in other sections.
2.4 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards shall be 3/4-inch fire retardant plywood.
B. Provide No. 6 AWG solid copper ground wire to closest electrical
ground. If necessary, run wire in PVC conduit.
2 .5 PULL CORD
A. Unless otherwise indicated, all conduits shall be provided with a Jet
Line No. 232 polyolefin pull line from farthest outlet to terminal
backboard. Provide pull line in all trunk conduits, provide tags at
each end on all pull lines identifying the runs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 GENERAL
A. Verify location of wall outlets before roughing to ensure
coordination with Owner's final intended furniture and equipment
layout. Plan indications shall not be scaled unless directed.
OUtlets shall be relocated within rooms before rough-in where
directed by ArChitect-Engineer without additional cost to Owner.
SPECIALTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16740-1
5910861-000
B. All outlets and branch conduit runs shall be concealed in structure
and finishes. Conduit system shall be provided and installed as
specified for light and power systems, and equivalent thereto. Where
conduits originate on a floor the conduit run shall terminate on a
backboard on that same floor.
C. Where not otherwise shown on drawings, route branch conduits to
nearest terminal board. Conduits shall terminate within 1 inch of
backboard.
D. Provide pull boxes in conduit runs where required. Pull boxes shall
be accessible.
E. Conduit Sizing (where not otherwise shown on drawings) :
1. Three-quarter inch minimum size conduit unless noted otherwise.
3.2 TERMINAL BOARDS
A. Mount backboard in location as indicated on drawings. width shall be
as shown and height shall be 8 feet unless noted otherwise. Mount
board 6 inches above floor.
B. Paint all exposed surfaces prior to installation of any equipment.
C. Surface mount receptacles on backboard or as indicated on drawings.
D. Staple ground conductor across the full width of the board
approximately 6 inches from the bottom.
END OF SECTION 16740
SPECIALTY CONDUIT SYSTEMS
16740-2
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
I<<>NROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 16770 - PAGING
SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. This specification pertains to the technical requirements for a
paging system to serve the proposed new Marathon Airport Terminal
Building.
B. The scope of the work includes the design, furnishing, installation
and checkout of the paging system. The system shall function in
accordance with this specification and the layout shown on the
drawings.
C. The work shall include everything necessary or incidental to complete
the installation.
D. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the paging system
so that all work will proceed in a manner which is in the best
interests of the Owner.
E. The supplier of the audio sys~em shall maintain a complete
engineering, installation and serv1ce facility within 100 miles of
the project location and shall be able to shown similar operating
installations.
1.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. This facility is a new structure. It shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor to verify all conditions and dimensions which pertain
to this work.
1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
A.
The supplier of
Contractor" who
installation of
systems.
the audio system shall be a "Sound Systems
regularly engages in the design, furnishing and
commercial and industrial sound reinforcement
B. The supplier of the audio system shall maintain a suitably staffed
and equipped service organization and must regularly offer
maintenance services for systems of this type and size.
C. At the request of the Architect-Engineer, the Contractor shall
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Architect-Engineer that the
supplier of the audio system has:
1. Adequate plant and equipment to pursue the work properly and
expeditiously.
2. Adequate staff and technical experience.
3. Suitable financial status to meet the obligations of the work.
4. A maintenance office with engineering and installation staff
within 100 miles of project.
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-1
5910861-000
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The system required shall be an electronic paging system consisting
of the following major elements:
1. The required number of push-to-talk microphones to be installed
at the: airline ticket counters--12j the departure area--4j
incoming baggage claim area--lj the rental car counters--4j and
the terminal manager's office area--l.
2. Preamplifiers, mixers, signal processors, equalizers, and power
amplifiers, etc. as specified and/or as required to be rack
mounted in the telephone room #116 on the first floor as shown
on the drawings.
3. The required number of loudspeakers provided with appropriate
70-volt transformers and back boxes (loudspeaker enclosures).
Exact quantity and location of speakers to be determined by the
"Sound System Contractor" so as to comply with the performance
requirements set forth in this specification.
4. All wiring, conduit, outlet boxes, power supplies, etc. and all
other components required to provide a paging system capable of
providing intelligible paging announcements of adequate
acoustical level in the first floor and second floor public
areas of the new terminal building. Public areas shall be
defined as first floor spaces #105, 110, 120, 121, 122, 123,
125, 127, 128, 130 and 131, and second floor spaces #204, 205,
206, 209 and 210. Refer to drawings for location of all spaces.
5. Each paging station (microphone location) shall have the
capability to page either its individual area or all areas
simultaneously, with the exception of the paging system in the
manager's office area which shall only page all areas
simultaneously.
6. Paging area or zones shall be as follows:
a. Zone 1: Baggage Claim Spaces #105 and 110.
b. Zone 2: Ticket Lobby Space #128.
c. Zone 3: Departure Lounge Space #131.
d. All Call: Spaces #105, 110, 120, 121, 122, 123, 125, 127,
128, 130, 131, 204, 205, 206, 209 and 210.
B. The paging system shall be required to provide a sound pressure level
at listener ear level (approximately five feet above the floor level)
of at least 80 dB with respect to a reference sound pressure of
0.0002 dynes (sq. em.), the approximately threshold of hearing. The
sound pressure variations under the ceiling-mounted loudspeaker
layout shall not exceed 6 dB.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings within 60 calendar days
after award of contract. The equipment and location of speakers
shall be subject to approval of the Architect and no equipment shall
be ordered without this approval. Provide shop drawings as follows:
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-2
5910861-000
1. A complete list of all equipment and materials which are to be
furnished including quantity.
2. Scale drawings of the proposed speaker layout for each floor
level including microphone outlet locations and conduit routing.
3. Manufacturer's technical specifications detailing the
performance and operational characteristics of the equipment to
be furnished and installed.
4. A detailed paging system wiring diagram.
5 . A drawing of the equipment rack showing the location of the
electronic equipment (mixers, processors, power amplifiers,
etc.) to be installed in the rack cabinet.
6. System loss calculations demonstrating that the required sound
pressure levels will be achieved at ear level above the finished
floor level with the equipment proposed.
B. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be supplied for the paging
system equipment as specified in Section 16971 - INSTRUCTION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS.
C. Manufacturer's warranty.
D. A statement of qualifications demonstrating an ability to furnish and
install a paging system meeting the requirements of the
specifications.
E. Six sets of as-built drawings shall be submitted along with the O&M
manuals.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for delivery, on-site storage and
handling of all equipment to be installed to form the subject paging
system. Additionally, the Contractor shall retain ownership of all
equipment furnished and installed until formally accepted in writing
by the Owner or the Owner's representative.
1.7 SYSTEM WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
A. The Contractor shall warrant the paging system against defects in
materials and workmanship, including any required parts and labor,
during a one year warranty period from date of final acceptance or
first beneficial use, whichever occurs first, of the completed paging
system at no cost to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall make at least two visits to the job site to
determine that all equipment is functioning satisfactorily, and to
perform any maintenance services that may be required. The first of
these visits shall occur approximately six months after the
commencement of the warranty period, and the second visit shall occur
approximately 6 months thereafter, but prior to the end of the
warranty period.
C. Maintenance services requiring additional visits shall also be
performed at no charge. Maintenance services shall consist of, but
not be limited to, operational tests and checks of all equipment.
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-3
5910861-000
D. Any defective equipment discovered during any maintenance visit shall
be repaired or replaced under the terms of the warranty. The
installer shall not be liable for equipment damaged by improper use,
negligence, or accidental acts of nature.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. It is the intention of these specifications to provide a complete and
properly operating paging system. Any item of equipment or hardware
that may not be specifically shown on the drawings or specified
herein but required for proper sound system operation or installation
shall be furnished.
B. All equipment and material shall be new and shall be suitable for
continuous operation.
C. In any case where a specific specification has not been included
herein or shown on the drawings for any item that is required, the
Contractor shall furnish only the best quality equipment or material
consistent with the quality of other specified equipment and
material.
D. The equipment numbers referenced herein are those of ALTEC as an
indication of quality and performance. Other manufacturers of equal
quality and performance will be acceptable.
E. Where a specific piece of equipment has been discontinued and/or
replaced by a new model, submission of the new model or a suitable
item as applicable shall be required.
F. Any use of substitute equipment shall be at no extra cost to the
Owner.
2.2 PAGING STATIONS
A. The microphones shall be of the close-talking, hand-held, push-to-
talk (PTT) omnidirectional dynamic type. The microphone shall be
provided with a spring steel clip-type mounting bracket compatible
with the microphone to provide a convenient "home position" for the
user when not in use.
B. The microphone shall meet the following specifications:
1. Frequency Response: 200 Hz to 10,000 Hz ~ 10 dB ref. 1,000 Hz.
2. Output Level: -60 dBm.
3. Output Impedance: 150/250 Ohms.
4. Case: Impact-resistant plastic.
5. Cable: Coiled cord, 10 to 12 inches restricted to 60 inches
fully extended. One shielded pair and 1 unshielded pair.
6. Connector: Cannon XLR-5-12C or equivalent compatible with
mating connector plate.
C. ALTEC D91P or approved equivalent microphone.
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-4
5910861-000
D. Each microphone paging station shall include:
1. Engraved face plate.
2. Suitable back box.
3. RED "Busy" indicator (with Push-To-Test button) .
4. GREEN "Ready" indicator (with Push-To-Test button) .
5. A 5-pin Cannon XLR female microphone connector.
6. A microphone preamplifier (on PC Card) that meets the following
specifications:
a.
Input:
Balanced equivalent noise--122
dBm. RFl suppression--55 dB in
metal box. Ref: 100% AM-I00-
130 MHz 15,000 micro-V. field
strength.
+18 dBm at less than 0.5 THO
50-15,000 Hz with 2-300 Ohm
bridge out resistors.
b.
Output:
c.
Gain:
30 dB to bridging resistors.
NOTE: This gain is set for
ALTEC 42350 microphones. It
can be changed for other
microphones.
d.
Frequency Response:
Rolled off at 125 Hz flat to 15
KHz.
Eliminates nonlinear loading
when preamplifier is not on.
7. A zener diode clamp and filter capacitor for proper operation
on long lines.
e.
Special OUtput Circuit:
8. One white "All Call" lighted button.
E. Microphone paging station shall be Baker Associates "SEFAC" Model
MPS-14 or approved equivalent.
2.3 EQUALIZERS
A.
The equalizers shall be of the 1/3 octave type.
built-in adjustable high/low pass filters.
They shall have
1. Input Impedance: 15,000 Ohms balanced.
2. Output Impedance: 600 Ohms balanced.
3. Gain: 20 dB adjustable to match output level of equalized
program to input level of unequalized program.
4. Bypass OUt/In Switch: To permit A/B comparison of equalized and
unequalized output.
B. Provide one equalizer per paging area or zone.
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-5
5910861-000
C. ALTEC Model 1750A or approved equivalent.
2.4 POWER AMPLIFIERS:
A. The amplifiers must be capable of driving a reactive load without
exhibiting gain or power instability effects.
1. Power OUtput: 300 watts average power per channel into 4 Ohms.
2. Total Harmonic Distortion: 0.10 percent at full-rated power.
3. Power Bandwidth: 10 Hz to SO kHz + 0 dB, - 3 dB ref. 1 kHz.
4. Input Impedance: 30 K Ohms balanced.
5. OUtput Impedance: Suitable for input to 70-volt transformer or
selected output combiner.
6. Damping Factor: Greater than 100, 20 Hz to 1,000 Hz.
7. Amplifier Protection: (1) Excessive output voltage; (2) shorted
loads; (3) RF interference; (4) Over temperature.
8. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 100 dB below rated output.
B. Provide on power amplifier per paging zone or area plus one
additional space amplifier.
C. ALTEC Model 9444B or approved equivalent.
2.5 POWER OUTPUT TRANSFORMERS
A. A 70-volt transformer shall be furnished and installed with each
power amplifier. The transformer shall have fully isolated primary
and secondary windings, i.e., autotransformers will not be
acceptable.
1 . Input Impedance: 4 and 8 Ohms.
2. Power Handling: 300 watts average power.
3. Secondary Voltage: 70 volts.
4. Frequency Response: 35 Hz to 15 kHz.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 1 percent, 35 Hz to 15
kHz.
6. Insertion Loss: Less than 1 dB, 35 Hz to 15 kHz.
B. ALTEC Model 15524A or approved equivalent.
2.6 LOUDSPEAKERS
A. All loudspeakers must be of the co-axial type complete with
adjustable 70-volt matching transformers.
1. Diameter: 4 inches.
2. Power Rating: 15 watts continuous power with band-limited pink
noise above SO Hz.
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-6
5910861-000
3. Frequency Response: 60 Hz to 15 kHz.
4. Pressure Sensitivity: 90 dB SPL at 1 meter on axis with 1 watt
input of 500 Hz to 3 kHz band-limited pink noise.
5. voice Coil Impedance: 8 Ohms.
6. Free-Air Cone Resonance: 120 Hz or less.
7. Power Taps: 4, 2, 1, 0.5 watts.
8. Distribution Pattern: 90 degrees.
9. Maximum Weight: 3.0 pounds.
B. ALTEC Model 405HT with 70-volt transformer or approved equivalent.
C. The loudspeakers shall be enclosed in factory-recommended enclosures
and provided with a sound-transparent grill and all required hardware
for installation, flush-mounted in gypsum wallboard type ceilings, 4-
inch metal slad-type ceilings or 2 X 4-foot lay-in-tile ceilings.
D. ATLAS/SOUNDOLIER Model T740-4 baffle with Model EZE410 back box
enclosure.
2.7 MICROPHONE PREAMPLIFIERS
A. Microphone preamplifiers shall be supplied as necessary to provide
the necessary input levels with a signal-to-hum ratio in excess of 70
dB at the microphone mixer inputs.
2.8 MICROPHONE SWITCHER
A. The microphone switcher shall control user traffic of multiple audio
inputs. The rack-mounted switcher or central processing unit shall:
1. Interconnect the microphone paging stations and power
amplifiers.
2. Provide idle switching to background music.
3. Allow maximum of 30 paging stations to operate with up to 8
output zones.
4. Provide lock-out to prevent multiple access.
5. Supply "Busy" and "Ready" lamps on each paging station to
indicate system status.
6. Allow selection of priority levels.
7. Use plug-in printed circuit cards with LEDs.
8. Contain dual power supplies to provide automatic backup should
one fail.
B. Baker Associates "SEFAC" Model LCA4318 System or approved equivalent.
2.9 COMPRESSOR-LIMITER AMPLIFIER
A. The paging system shall incorporate a compressor-limiter amplifier to
maintain the audio level reasonably constant at the power amplifier
PAGING SYSTEM
16770 -7
5910861-000
inputs to compensate for varying speech levels at the microphones.
The use of the compressor-limiter should not produce noticeable
audible pumping.
B. ALTEC Model 1712A Compressor-Limiter or approved equivalent.
2.10 MONITOR PANEL
A. Monitor panel shall permit monitoring of 7 channels at either line
level or loudspeaker level. It shall contain a 7-position input-
selector switch, a volume control with on-off switch, a 3-pin, panel-
mounted XLR connector for accessory microphone connection, an
amplifier section and a 4-inch monitor speaker.
B. ALTEC Model 1698 or approved equivalent.
2 . 11 CABINET
A. Modular cabinet constructed of 14-gauge steel. Cabinet with 25.5-
inch-deep frame and 19-inch panel opening width. Frame shall include
2 pair adjustable mounting rails with hardware kit and shall be
mounted castors to allow rolling the frame away from the back wall.
Frame to have textured black enamel finish.
B. ATLAS/SOUNDOLIER Model 5061-19-25 or approved equivalent.
2.12 CABLING
A. Cables shall be UL-listed, NEC-type CM, ASTM tinned copper with PVC
insulation and overall 75-degree PVC jacket.
B. Microphone station cable to have 12 conductors total with 2 shielded
and 10 unshielded. Conductors #22 AWG, solid. Acceptable
Manufacturer: West Penn Wire Corp. #371 or approved equal.
C. Speaker cable to be 2 -conductor, #16 AWG, stranded. Acceptable
Manufacturer: West Penn Wire Corp. #225 or approved equal.
2.13 SURGE SUPPRESSION
A. Provide plug-in outlet center unit having 4 stages of protection,
protection status indicator, and EMI/RFI filtration. Unit shall be
UL listed and meet standards UL 1449 and UL 1283.
B. Provide minimum of 2 plug-in outlet center units.
C. WIREMOLD Sent rex Series Model #M6G; LEVITON series 53 OOPS or approved
equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 GENERAL
A. Installation and connection of sound system equipment, materials,
cable and cable fittings shall be performed only by experienced sound
system installers. Each installer shall have access to a complete
copy of the specifications and the drawings at the job site.
B. All materials and equipment are to be installed in accordance with
all applicable standards of the NEC, the Electrical Code of the
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-8
5910861-000
governing local municipality, all other applicable local codes, and
all safety codes and ordinances.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Cable within equipment racks shall be separated and routed according
to function. Cable must be neatly arranged.
B. Care shall be exercised in wiring so as not to damage cables and
equipment. Circuits shall not be spliced except as approved on shop
drawings.
C. At all connection points for all types of cable, pressure sensitive
label strips of the appropriate letters and numbers shall be wrapped
around each cable near its termination. These cable numbers and/or
letters, and all transformer and preadjustment potentiometer
identifiers, shall be given to the Architect-Engineer for inclusion
on the record audio diagrams.
D. All crimp-type connectors, including insulated butt connectors for
inline loudspeaker circuit connections, shall be crimped with a
Thomas & Betts model WTIIIM tool. Spade tongue terminals shall be
crimped with the notch on the barrel opposite the seam.
E. Loudspeakers shall be installed so there are no obstructions to the
loudspeaker coverage pattern. Loudspeakers shall be connected "in
phase" and proper impedance matching shall be maintained between
amplifiers and loudspeakers.
F. Loudspeakers shall be flush mounted and furnished with back boxes and
proper mounting hardware applicable to the ceiling type.
G. The paging system head-end equipment is to be installed in a standard
rack cabinet of suitable dimensions to be located in the telephone
equipment room #116.
H. All incoming microphone and outgoing speaker lines shall terminate on
a plywood panel located on the north wall of the telephone equipment
room. The microphone circuits shall terminate on telephone type punch
blocks. The loudspeaker lines shall terminate on barrier strips.
All lines shall be clearly and permanently labeled.
I. All wiring shall be installed in metallic raceway sized for the
number of conductors. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of
cross sectional area of conduit. Refer to Table 4 of NFPA-70-1991.
J. Prior to installing any conduit for the microphone paging stations,
the Contractor shall verify millwork construction details so as to
coordinate conduit stub-up locations for proper installation of the
cables and stations.
K. Exact location of microphone paging stations and associated back
boxes shall be coordinated with the millwork supplier and with the
airline ticket operations and the rental car agencies prior to
installation of any equipment.
L. Coordinate installation of speakers and back boxes with the ceiling
system supplier and installer.
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-9
5910861-000
3 .3 NAMEPLATES
A. All control panels, and all controls, jacks, microphone receptacles,
switches, etc. (except for controls, etc., on audio equipment which
are properly identified by the manufacturer) shall be suitably
identified by engraved panels, engraved plates, Metal-photo panels,
or Metal-photo plates. Engraved panels or plates shall be filled
with a suitable contrasting color as approved on shop drawings.
B. All equalizers, audio delay devices, crossovers, power amplifiers,
self-powered line and monitor amplifiers, and other electronic
equipment shall be identified on front and rear panels by nameplates.
3 .4 ADJUSTING
A. Upon completion of the installation, the following adjustments to the
paging system shall be made:
1. The Contractor shall ensure that the 70-volt loudspeaker
transformer taps are chosen so that each loudspeaker absorbs the
same power from the 70-volt distribution line and that the power
absorbed provides the required acoustic sound-pressure level.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that all ceiling-mounted
loudspeakers are driven in phase. Using recorded speech or
music program material, a discerning test listener shall move
slowly from one loudspeaker to another. The listener should
sense a single apparent sound source moving continuously from
one loudspeaker to the next. If such is not the case, a
defective or out-of-phase loudspeaker exists which should be
corrected by reversing the feed polarity to the speaker or
replacing if defective. Alternatively, the above observation
may be conducted with a sound pressure level meter. variations
in observed sound pressure level should not exceed 6 dB.
3. The gain setting for each microphone channel will be set to the
maximum value at which acoustic feedback occurs between the
nearest loudspeaker output and microphone input when the PTT key
is depressed to make an announcement. If acoustic feedback is
noted, the equalizer shall be adjusted to permit the use of
maximum gain without feedback. The 1/3 octave band or bands
which must be attenuated to eliminate the feedback shall be
recorded.
4. The above procedure shall be followed for all microphone inputs.
5. Upon completion of the above procedure, and if the equalizer
settings are found to be similar for all microphone inputs, the
equalizer shall be adjusted for the best compromise setting to
reduce or eliminate the feedback with all microphones in service
one at a time. In the event it is not possible to adjust the
equalizer to the compromise settings, it will be necessary to
install appropriate band-reject filters in the microphone
circuits prior to the mixing process to control the feedback.
The necessary feedback control band-reject filters shall be
provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a competent technician,
one having knowledge of the system, to adjust the sound system
equipment and connections as requested by the Architect-Engineer
during system adjustment.
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-10
5910861-000
C. If, in the op1n1on of the Architect-Engineer, the system does not
appear to be functioning properly, the Contractor may be required to
perform tests on any individual item of equipment to determine its
operational status. Any measurements deemed necessary shall be made
for frequency response, distortion, etc.
D. The adjusting service shall be provided by the Contractor as a
portion of the total cost of the paging system work.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. At a mutually convenient time agreed upon by the Architect-Engineer
and the Contractor, the Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of
the system from each microphone position.
B. Tests shall be conducted to demonstrate speech intelligibility by
observers listening at various locations under various operating
conditions.
C. Equipment tests may be required if deemed necessary by the Architect-
Engineer to establish the equipment frequency response, harmonic
distortion and noise levels. These tests may be performed on a
specific equipment item or group of equipments to ensure compliance
with the specifications in the event the demonstrations called for in
A and B above fail.
D. In the event the demonstration tests reveal that the Contractor must
perform additional adjustments or make changes in the system to
achieve the desired performance, the demonstration tests shall be
terminated. The Contractor must then continue the work until proper
operation is achieved so that demonstration/acceptance tests can be
rescheduled.
3.6 SYSTEM OPERATING ASSISTANCE
A.
After the sound system
equalization, and is fully
designated representatives
system operation.
has received its final testing and
operational the Contractor shall instruct
of the Owner in the proper methods of
END OF SECTION 16770
PAGING SYSTEM
16770-11
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBl!lGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
I<<>NROB COORTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 16950 - CIRCUIT
BRBAKBR TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Requirements for testing circuit breakers after
delivery to site and prior to initial energizition.
B. Circuit Breakers: All main service entrance equipment circuit
breakers, all the group-mounted switchboard circuit breakers, and all
other panelboard circuit breakers having a frame size equal to or
greater than 225 amperes shall be tested.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Testing Agency: Submit for approval, prior to testing, the
qualification of the testing agency and all key personnel.
B. Test Report: Submit 4 copies of all test reports for review.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Include copies of all final test
reports on the operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TESTING AGENCY
A. Testing agency shall be an independent testing organization which can
function as an unbiased testing authority.
B. Agency shall be regularly engaged in the testing of breakers.
C. Agency and all key technical personnel shall be currently certified
by the International Electrical Testing Association in electrical
power distribution system testing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 . 1 GENERAL
A. All devices required to be tested shall be given standard tests to
verify overcurrent tripping characteristics and time delay
characteristics. Any device found defective shall be replaced with
a properly functioning device which shall be retested.
3 .2 TESTING
A. Tests shall include currents at 300 percent of rated trip current.
Test shall be single-phase injection type. Record trip time.
END OF SECTION 16950
CIRCUIT BREAKER TESTING
16950-1
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBl!lGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
B>NROB COtIRTY, FLORIDA
SBCTION 16971 - INSTRUCTION
JUIU) MAIRTBNANCB MARUALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide Instruction and Maintenance Manuals for each item of
electrical equipment and product specified in Division 16 and shown
on drawings, complete as specified herein.
B. Submit 3 copies of Instruction and Maintenance Manuals unless
otherwise indicated or specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Hardback 3-ring loose-leaf binder with reinforced holes in sheets and
drawings neatly folded and not extending beyond the edge of the
binder.
B. Title sheet with job name, and the names, addresses and phone numbers
of the Contractor, all Subcontractors and suppliers.
C. Index of contents.
D. A signed copy of acknowledgement of instruction to the Owner or the
Owner's authorized representative for all electrical and control
systems provided.
E. Typewritten operating instructions for the Owner's personnel
describing how to operate and maintain each piece of equipment.
F. Approved shop drawings, submittal data and parts and maintenance
booklet for each item of material and equipment furnished under
Division 16. Final drawings shall include all dimensions.
G. Record drawings of electrical and control diagrams.
H. Copies of final inspection certificates.
I. Guarantees and warranties including extended guarantees and
warranties.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 16971
INSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
16971-1
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBl!lGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
I<<>NROB COtIRTY, FLORIDA
5910861-000
APPENDIX A
5910861-000
MARATHON AIRPORT
NEW PASSBRGBR TERMINAL BUILDING
I<<>NROE COORTY, FLORIDA
APPBNDU: A: AIRPORT SAFETY JUIU) SEcmuTY REQUIR.BMBlIITS
1.0 GENERAL
The provisions of this safety and security plan and associated procedures are
applicable within the boundaries of the Marathon Airport. A complete
understanding of all procedures and requirements contained herein is required to
ensure safety during construction. This is of paramount importance since the
Marathon Airport serves a mix of general aviation and air carrier aircraft. This
safety plan is a part of this Contract and deviations from the requirements
established herein will be sufficient cause for Contract termination.
Required reference material associated with this safety plan includes:
FAA AC 150/5200-18B, Airport Safety Self Inspection
FAA AC 150/5340-1F, Marking of Paved Areas on Airports
FAA AC 150/5370-2C, Operational Safety on Airports During Construction
Copies of these documents may be obtained from the Engineer.
2.0 AIRPORT SAFETY JUIU) SEcmuTY COORDINATOR
Marathon County, Florida will appoint the Airport Manager or other qualified
individual(s) as its duly authorized representative to serve as Airport Safety
and Security Coordinator (ASSC) for the duration of the Contract. The ASSC will
be responsible for the overall coordination of safety and security matters during
construction and ensuring that all procedures and requirements are followed. The
ASSC will be physically present on the airport at all times during the period of
construction when activity related fulfilling the Contractors responsibilities
is taking place.
The ASSC is responsible for inspecting, closing, and returning operational areas
to service; insuring that the marking and lighting placed by the Contractor is
adequate to indicate closed taxiways, haul routes, stockpile/storage areas,
vehicle staging areas and any other area on the airfield associated with the
construction; coordinating safety procedures with air carriers and fixed base
operators (FBOs), other Contractors and others as appropriate; controlling access
to air operations and airport security area(s) and assuring that NOTAMs (Notices
to Airmen) are issued in a timely manner. The Airport Safety and Security
Coordinator will, in addition, represent Marathon County, Florida on the
Construction Safety and Security Committee.
2 .1 CORTRACTOR SAFETY JUIU) SEcmuTY OFFICER
The Contractor shall appoint its on-site Construction Superintendent or other
qualified individual (s) as its duly authorized representative to serve as
Contractor Safety and Security Officer (CSSO) for the duration of the Contract.
The CSSO shall thoroughly understand the safety and security requirements of the
Contract, there necessity therefore and shall have sufficient authority to
implement its provisions without significant deviation. The Contractor shall
notify the ASSC and Engineer in writing of the name of the individual (s) selected
for the assignment. The CSSO shall represent the Contractor on the "Construction
Safety and Security Committee" and shall be accountable for safety and security
requirement compliance. The CSSO shall be especially knowledgeable regarding the
requirements of FAA AC's 150/5200-18B and 150/5370-2C, Airport Safety Self
Inspection and Operational Safety on Airports During Construction, respectively.
AIRPORT SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A-I
5910861-000
2 .2 RESPONSIBILITIBS OF THB CORTRACTOR SAFETY JUIU) SBcmuTY OFFICER
Prior to the desired date for commencement of any Work on the project, the CSSO
shall accomplish the following:
a. Develop and submit in writing a detailed Work sequence schedule with
dates and times specified for all milestone events. This sequence schedule shall
conform, as a minimum, to the events specified in Section 3.0, Construction
Sequence, and shall be subject to the approval of the ASSC. To assure adequate
time for coordination, this document shall be submitted at least one week prior
to the desired date for commencement of any Work on the project.
b. Develop and submit in writing a detailed outline of the procedures
to be followed to maintain safety and security of both Contractor operations and
the integrity of airport landside and airside operations during the prosecution
of Contract Work. This plan shall detail, in addition, the procedures to be
followed in the event of an accident or fire involving Contractor personnel and
the Contractors efforts to maintain fire protection and security. These
procedures shall be subject to the approval of the ASSC and reflect any change
as may be deemed necessary, from time to time, by the Construction Safety and
Security Committee.
c. Conduct at least one meeting of all Contractor supervisory personnel
prior to the start of Contract Work. The purpose of this meeting is to review
the approved Work sequence schedule and safety and security procedures.
Attendance at this meeting by the CSSO, all Contractor supervisory personnel and
the ASSC is mandatory. This meeting shall also be open other employees of the
Contractor and others as the ASSC may deem appropriate. Minutes of this meeting
shall be taken, copies provided to each supervisor and kept on file in the
Contractors construction office for periodic review and updating.
d. Develop a safety and security orientation program and provide a
briefing for all employees for all employees of the Contractor that will be used
on the proj ect. A similar briefing will be given new employees prior to there use
on Contract Work. In addition, the CSSO shall be responsible for briefing, from
time to time, all Contractor personnel on safety and security measures adopted
by the Construction Safety and Security Committee.
2 .3 CONSTRUCTION SAFETY JUIU) SBCURITY COMMITTEB
A "Construction Safety and Security Committee" shall be established concurrent
with this construction Contract. This committee shall monitor I coordinate,
establish and implement new safety and/or security provisions, as may be required
on all matters relating the safety and security of airport landside and airside
operations during the prosecution of Contract Work. Committee members shall
provide pertinent advice to the ASSC concerning safety and security matters
related to the Contract.
Meetings will be periodically scheduled and conducted by the Airport Safety and
Security Coordinator at a location on the Marathon Airport. Committee membership
will include the Airport Safety and Security Coordinator, the Contractor Safety
and Security Officer, the Engineer (or Resident project Representative) and
authorized representatives of air carriers and fixed base operators located on
the airport. Marathon County, Florida shall provide police and fire department
specialists if required to fulfill Committee responsibilities. These specialists
shall be advisory members of the Committee.
3 .0 CONSTRUCTION SBQUENCE
The Contractor shall prepare a Construction Schedule and submit to the Engineer
a minimum of five (5) days prior to the Pre-Construction Conference.
AIRPORT SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A-2
5910861-000
3 .1 CLOSING RDN1IAYS, TAXIWAYS, APRONS JUIU) ROADWAYS
The Contractor shall acquaint his supervisors and employees with the sequence of
construction and its relationship to airport activity and aircraft operations
that are inherent to this airport. No runway, taxiway, apron or airport roadway
shall be closed without the written approval of the Airport Safety and Security
Coordinator, transmitted by the Engineer to the Contractor, to enable necessary
NOTAMs and/or advisories to airport FBOs, tenants and users.
The Contractor shall contact the Engineer a minimum of seven days prior to the
requested closing, and the Engineer will coordinate the request with the Airport
Safety and Security Coordinator.
Any construction activity within 200 feet of the centerline of an active runway
or within 65 feet of the centerline of a taxiway or apron requires the closure
of the affected area. These safety areas are shown on the safety plan.
The Engineer will arrange with the Airport Safety and Security Coordinator for
an inspection prior to return to service of any runway, that has been closed for
Work, on or adjacent thereto, or that has been used for a crossing point or haul
route by the Contractor.
4 . 0 MARKING JUIU) LIGHTING
Proper marking and lighting of areas on the airfield associated with the
construction shall be a responsibility of the Contractor. This will include
properly marking and lighting closed runways, taxiways, taxilanes, and aprons,
the limits of construction, material storage areas, equipment storage areas, haul
routes, parking areas and other areas defined as required for the Contractor's
exclusive use. The Contractor shall erect and maintain around the perimeter of
these areas suitable marking and warning devices visible for day and night use.
Temporary barricades, flagging, and flashing warning lights shall be required at
critical access points. The type and location of marking and warning devices
will be approved by the Airport Safety and Security Coordinator.
Special emphasis shall be given to open trenches, excavations, heavy equipment
marshalling areas, and stockpiled material located in the airport operations
area, which shall be predominantly marked by the Contractor with flags and
lighted by approved light units during hours of restricted visibility and
darkness. All marking and lighting shall be in accordance with FAA Advisory
Circular (AC) 150-5340-1F.
5.0 TRAFFIC CONTROL
5.1 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
The Contractor, through the Contractor Safety and Security Officer (CSSO) shall
establish and maintain a list of the minimum number of vehicles believed
necessary for completing the Work required in each area of reconstruction. This
list shall be submitted to the Airport Safety and Security Coordinator for
permission to operate each vehicle on the list. To be authorized to operate on
the Marathon Airport each vehicle:
a. shall be marked/flagged for high daytime visibility and lighted for
nighttime operations. Vehicles that are not marked and/or lighted shall be
escorted by a vehicle appropriately marked and/or lighted. Vehicles requiring
escort shall be identified on the list.
b. shall be identified with the name and/or logo of the Contractor and
be of sufficient size to be identified at a distance. Vehicles needing
intermittent identification could be marked with tape or with commercially
available magnetically attached markers. Vehicles that are not appropriately
AIRPORT SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A-3
5910861-000
identified shall be escorted by a vehicle that conforms to this requirement.
Vehicles requiring escort shall be identified on the list.
c. shall be operated in a manner that does not compromise the safety of
either landside or airside airport operations. If, in the opinion of the Airport
Safety and Security Coordinator, any vehicle is operated in a manner not fully
consistent with this requirement the ASSC has the right to restrict operation of
the vehicle or prohibit its use on the airport.
5.2 PBRSONNEL IDENTIFICATION
a. Supervisory Employees. All Contractor and subcontractor supervisory
employees must wear security badges issued by the Airport Manager. Before these
security badges are issued, the Contractor shall certify to the Airport Manager
that he has conducted a five-year employment background check on those employees
requiring such security badges. Upon receipt of the certification the Airport
Manager will issue the security badges and authorization to enter the AOA.
Supervisory employees who receive airport issued security badges must remain with
the field crews they are monitoring whenever they are working in the AOA.
b. All Employees. All employees of Contractor and subcontractor
requiring access to the construction site are required to be supplied with
identification badges to be worn at all times while within the area. Badges
shall be plastic wallet size or metal pin size with a minimum of 2 -1/2" diameter
and worn on outer garments so as to be clearly visible. Badging shall be uniform
in appearance and sufficiently distinctive in design or color to clearly
distinguish on-sight employees assigned to this contract. The badge number shall
be prominent for easy identification. Badges shall be identified numerically and
issued individually to employees with a permanent record maintained on the
individual to whom it was issued. Blocks of numbers may be assigned to
subcontractors. Responsibili ty for supply, issuance and control of
identification badges shall be that of the Contractor, through the Contractor
Safety and Security Officer.
5 .3 ACCESS TO THB SITE OF CONSTRUCTION
a. General Construction Site Access. The Contractor's access to the
airport, employee parking and marshalling area(s) and route across the airport
shall be as shown on the Airport Safety Plan. No other airport access point or
cross-airport route shall be permitted unless approved in advance by the Airport
Safety and Security Coordinator. In addition the following requirements are
applicable:
(1) All Contractor traffic authorized to travel on the airport
shall have been briefed as part of the Contractor's construction safety and
security orientation program, be thoroughly familiar with the access procedures
and route for travel or be escorted by personnel authorized the Contractor Safety
and Security Officer.
(2) The Contractor shall install Worksite identification signs at
the authorized access point(s). If in the opinion of the Airport Safety and
Security Coordinator directional signs are needed for clarity they shall be
installed along the route authorized for access to each construction site.
(3) Under no circumstance will Contractor personnel be permitted
to drive .their individually owned vehicles to any construction site on the
airport. All vehicles must be parked in the area designated for employee parking;
transportation to the worksite shall be provided by the Contractor that are not
otherwise occupying authorized vehicles.
(4) In addition to the inspection and cleanup required at the end
of each shift, the Contractor is responsible for the immediate cleanup of any
AIRPORT SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A-4
5910861-000
debris generated along the construction site access route(s) as a result of
construction related traffic or operations whether or not created by Contractor
personnel.
(5) There shall be no travel by foot within an active aircraft
operational area. The Contractor shall arrange transportation for all employees
between the designated marshaling area and each construction site, as necessary.
5 .4 MATERIAL SUPPLIBRS, SUBCONTRACTORS JUIU) VISITORS
All material suppliers, Subcontractors and visitors to the Work site are
obligated to follow the same safety and security operating procedures as the
prime Contractor. All material suppliers shall make their deliveries using the
same access points and routes as the Contractor and shall be advised of the
appropriate delivery procedures at the time the materials order is placed. If
it is not practical to conform to the vehicle identification requirements of
Section 5.1 and the safety and security orientation program requirements of
Section 2.2 (d) the Contractor shall be prepared to escort all suppliers,
Subcontractors and visitors while they are on the airport.
6 . 0 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIR.BMBlIITS
All Contractor vehicles that are authorized to operate on the airport outside of
the designated construction area limits or haul routes as defined herein shall
display in full view above the vehicle a three-foot by three-foot, or larger,
orange and white checkerboard flag, each checkerboard color being one - foot
square. Vehicles operating in the active Aircraft Operational Area (AOA) outside
of the designated construction areas must announce their location and intended
destination on the airport on UNICOM frequency 122.8 Mhz.
All Contractor vehicles that are required to operate outside of the construction
area limits as defined herein and cross active runways, taxiways, aprons, or
runway approach clear zones shall do so under the direct control of a flagman who
is monitoring UNICOM frequency 122.8 Mhz. Flagmen and two-way radios shall be
furnished by the Contractor. Flagmen shall be instructed in the use of two-way
radios and air traffic control procedures prior to use. All aircraft traffic on
runways, taxiways and aprons shall have priority over Contractor's traffic.
Construction vehicles not in use for extended periods during the Work day, or
during nights and weekends (nonwork periods) shall be parked away from active
runways, taxiways, and aprons in designated vehicle marshalling areas.
6.1 COORDINATION WITH AIRPORT OPBRATIONS
At the completion of each regularly scheduled work period or when vacating the
safety areas on instructions from the Airport Manager, the construction area
shall be left in a safe condition (See FAA Advisory Circular 150/5370-2C) .
7.0 CONSTRUCTION CONTROL
A primary and alternate responsible Contractor's representative shall be
designated by the Contractor. The Contractor's representative shall be available
locally on a 24-hour basis. Names of the primary and alternate, including phone
number, shall be made available to the Engineer by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall insure that the names and phone numbers are kept current, and
the Engineer shall insure this information is made available to the Airport
Safety and Security Coordinator and the Monroe County Police/Fire Emergency
Communications Center.
AIRPORT SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A-5
5910861-000
8.0 CONSTRUCTION TECHNIQUES
Construction shall be planned and conducted throughout this project in such a
manner as to allow the maintenance of completely safe airport operations. Every
effort shall be made to reduce the impact of construction activity on overall
airport operations. To this end the Contractor's activities shall conducted in
such a manner so as to preclude, except where absolutely required, open
excavations, trenches, ditches and above ground obstacles such as booms on cranes
or obstacle markers such as wooden saw horses. The primary responsibility for
assuring that the safest possible construction techniques are followed rests with
the Contractor Safety and Security Officer.
9.0 METHOD OF HBASUR:BMBNT
Separate measurement for necessary airport safety and security measures or
personnel or materials required shall not be made.
10.0 BASIS OF PAnmNT
No separate payment shall be made for airport safety and security measures or
personnel or materials related to this specification item and incidentally
required to satisfy the specified objective(s). Adequate compensation shall be
included by the Contractor in the Contract unit price bid for Item M-001-5.1,
Mobilization, Safety and Security, or other items which involve airport safety
and security measures. This compensation shall be full compensation for
furnishing all materials and for all labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals
necessary to complete the item.
*** END OF APPENDIX A: AIRPORT SAFETY JUIU) SBcmuTY REQUIRBMBNTS ***
AIRPORT SAFETY AND SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
A-6
LAW ENGINEERING
REPORT OF A GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
MARATHON AIRPORT
VACA KEY, FLORIDA
LAW ENGINEERING JOB NO. 532-05627-01
MIAMI, FLORIDA
APRIL 15. 1992
J..
LAW ENGINEERING
April 15, 1992
GE'cTECHNiCAl EW,qC~\1EN'Ac
& CGNSTRUCT!Of\; MA-:-Eq!A...S
CONSU;~T~NTS
Reynolds, Smith & Hill, Inc.
4651 Salisbury Road
Jacksonville, Florida 32256
ATTENTION: Mr. George L. Gray
Project Manager
SUBJECT: Report ot a Geotechnical Exploration
Marathon Airport Terminal
Vaca Key, Florida
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Dear Mr. Gr::\y:
Law Engineer:ng is pleased to submillhis report of our geotechnical exploration for the proposed project.
These ..ervices were provided in general accordance with t"e Suocontract Agreement between Reynold,
Smitl1 & Hill, Inc. and Law Engineering, Inc. dated October 8, 1991 and March 9. 1992. Authorization for
our serlii;;es was pr~viced by Mr. George L. Gray of Reynolds, Smith an.j Hlt!S, Inc. ir. a Jetter dated
October 8, 1991 and March 9, 1992.
This report presents a review of the information provided to us, a discussion of the site and subsurface
conditions, and our recommendations for site preparation and foundation design. ihe Appendixes
contains a Site Location Plan. a Field Explol ation Plan and the results of our field and laboratory tests.
In summary. based upon our geotechnical exploration, we consider the subsurface conditions in the
explore area. trom a geotechnical standpoint, satisfactory tor support of the planned structure on a
shallow foundation system. We understand that the facility is being design to withstand up to a Category
v hurricane (155 mph winds with 13 foot storm surge). The risk of foundation undermining and the
magnitude of uplift and overturning forces associated with a storm of that magnitude may precluded the
use of shallow foundations; therefore, as an alternative the structure can be supported on.a deep
foundation system. The deep foundation system that we recommend in this report include the following:
585 NW 161 ST STREET
MIAMI. FL 33169
DADE 305-944-9266
BROWARD 305-764-2599
Mr. George L. Gray
Page Two
J..
Fourteen, sixteen and eighteen inch diameter augercast piles installed to an approximate
depth of 14 feet below the existing ground surface with allowable compression capacities
of 110, 130, and 150 kips, tension capacities of 55,65 and 75 kips and lateral capacities of
8; 10, and 14 kips.
The ground floor slab may be constructed directly on compacted existing soils or
compacted structural fill.
In order for the above Slab-on-grade system to perform satisfactorily, the removal of the
topsoil (approximately 6 inches) and other unsuitable soils, and replacement with
compacted structural fill is required.
We recommend that this office be provided with the opportunity to make a general review
of the foundation site preparation and earthwork plans and specifications to confirm that
our recommendations are properly interpreted.
Detailed recommendations for foundation design and construction and site preparation are presented in
the Recommendations section of this report.
We will be pleased to discuss our recommendations with you and would welcome the opportunity to
provide the additional services necessary to complete this project. We look forward to serving as your
geotechnical engineer on the remainder of this and on future projects.
Sincerely,
LAW ENGINEERING INC.
-'1 / ~!- ",
1/ (~~" ~/' '
,:q.. / /1' o. " ,/ IC', ,L-
" '. -'-"1/(... ,/ . ,,/ . . "-L-'-
t, ,-_, /
Hugo E':Soto, P.E. ......
Senior Geotechnical Engineer
Florida Registration #36440
1J~"f-fJIIL~._j/
G. Thomas McDaniel, P .E. . \
Principal Geotechnical Engineer
Florida Registration #26158
HES/GTM:sr
53205627.R01
Distribution:
Addressee (3)
File (1)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
J..
PAGE NO.
1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION AND SmUCTURAL CONDITIONS ............................ 1
2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION ............................................ ............... ....... ..... ......... ......... 2
3.0 LABORA TORV TESTING ............ .... ..... ....... .......... ...... ......... .............. ......... ......... 3
3.1 Classification Testing ....................................................................................... 3
3.2 Corrosivity Classification Testing .................................................................... 3
4.0 SITE AND SURFACE CONDITIONS..................................................................... 3
4.1 Site Conditions ................................................................................................. 3
4.2 Subsurface Conditions... ........ ............. ........ ............... ............. ....... ........ .......... 4
4.2.1 General.... ................. .... .................... ........... .... .............. ...... ........... ..... 4
4.2.2 Soil/Rocks ................ ........................... .............. ............ ........... .......... 4
4.2.3 Groundwater ................. .................................. ......... ...... ............ ......... 4
5.0 EVALUATION OF SUBSURFACE CONDITION .................................................... 5
5.1 Basis for Recommendations............................................................................ 5
6.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN AND SITE
PREPARATION ....................... ............. ............. ...... ......... ....... ........ ............... ...... 6
6.1 Foundation Design........................................................................................... 6
6.1.1 Shallow Foundation............................................................................ 6
6.1.2 Deep Foundation-Augercast (Pressure-Grouted) Piles
Design and Installation Design ........................................................ 7
6.2 Settlement Potential......................................................................................... 12
6.3 Ground Floor Slab Support ............................................................................. 13
6.4 Site Preparation ................... .............. ............ ......... ........................ .................. 13
6.4.1 Surface Stripping ................................................................................ 13
6.4.2 Surficial Compaction .......................................................................... 13
6.5 Surface Water on Shallow Groundwater Contro!............................................ 14
6.6 Structural Filling and Backfill........................................................................... 14
6.7 Foundation Bearing Surface Preparation........................................................ 15
6.8 Pavement Subgrade Preparation .................................................................... 15
6.8.1 Apron Pavement Subgrade ................................................................ 15
6.8.2 Roadway Pavement Subgrades......................................................... 15
6.8.3 Locally Available Pavement Structural Material................................ 16
6.9 Surface Drainage Considerations.................................................................... 16
6.10 General Construction Monitoring and Testing
Guidelines......................................................................................................... 16
6.11 Construction Plans and Specification Review................................................ 17
6.12 Sample Storage ................ ......................... .... .............................. ..................... 17
APPENDIX A:
APPENDIX B:
J.
Site Location Map
Field Exploration Plan
Generalized Subsurface Profile
Key Sheet for Generalized Surface Profile
Test Boring Records
Auger Boring Records
Lateral Capacity Pile
Double Ring Infiltration Tests
Key Classification & Symbols
Field Procedures
Laboratory Test Results
Laboratory Procedures
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 1
Ja.
1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION AND STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS
The purpose of this exploration was to develop information about the site and subsurface conditions that
could be used for evaluating foundation alternatives for support of the planned structures and the
proposed paved areas at the Marathon Airport Terminal in Vaca Key, Florida. This report briefly describes
the exploration activities and presents the findings. The enclosed guideline recommendations for
foundation design and site preparation represent approaches we feel would be appropriate for the
planned structures and pavement.
The following paragraphs describe the project information we have received from Mr. George L. Gray and
from Mr. Daniel J. Clayton, P.E. of Reynolds, Smith and Hills, Inc. during the period of April 26, 1991 to
March 30, 1992 or which has been taken from the provided plans.
We understand that the project is a new Airport Terminal Facility which will consist of a terminal building,
parking lots, roadway, sewage treatment plant. and aircraft apron. The building's airs ide portion and ends
of the lands ide will be a one-story building with column supported roof loads and slab on-grade. The
central portion of the building's landside will be two stories with column supported roof and second floor
loads and a slab on-grade first floor. The maximum column load is on the order of 160 kips and the
minimum interior column dead load is on the order of 10 kips. Uplift loads are estimated to be 160 kips.
Individual column shear and moment loadings are estimated to be 20 kips and 170 foot kips. respectively.
Additional loading will be from overburden pressures due to soil fill which will result from raising the
building area to a finished first floor elevation of + 7 feet above MSL. Existing building area grades range
from elevation +2 to +3 feet above MSL; therefore. approximately 4 to 5 feet of fill will be required to bring
the site to the desired grade.
Pavement on the project includes automobile parking and access roads constructed of bituminous
concrete and an aircraft parking apron constructed of portland cement concrete. Automobile pavement
will be designed for passenger and single unit vehicle wheel loads. The design method will be based on
equivalent 18 kip axle loading. Aircraft pavement will be designed for 75.000 pound dual wheel.
The following are a list of the provided plans:
Site Plans for
Marathon Airport Terminal
Vaca Key, Florida
Prepared By: RS&H
Dated: March 11, 1991
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 2
J.
Two Conceptual Drawings of Concept Two-2001 for
Marathon Airport Terminal
Prepared By: RS&H
Dated: March 11, 1991
Marathon Airport Existing Conditions for
Marathon Airport indicating boring locations
Prepared By: RS&H
Dated: July 3, 1991
Revise: August 15, 1991 and August 28, 1991
Site Plans for
Marathon Airport Terminal
Vaca Key, Florida
Prepared By: RS&H
Dated: December 6, 1991
2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION
The subsurface conditions, as requested by Mr. George L. Gray of Reynolds Smith and Hills, Inc., were
explored for the initial terminal building location with seven soil test borings drilled to depth ranging from
25 to 50 feet below the existing ground surface, and 24 auger borings drilled to a depth of 5 feet below
existing grade. In addition, three double-ring infiltration test were performed at the existing ground
surface and 5 bulk samples were obtained. Six borings were drilled to a depth of 50 feet below existing
grade in the area of the proposed building, one boring was drilled to 25 feet below existing grade in the
area of the proposed sewage treatment plant and the 24 auger borings were drilled in the area of the
proposed apron, parking lots and roadway. The test boring, infiltration test and the bulk sample locations
are shown on the Field Exploration Plan in Appendix "A". Due to the relocation of the building and
apron area, additional boring were performed. After the completion of the field exploration for the initial
terminal building, the terminal was relocated toward the west approximately 250 feet. Additional 6 soil test
borings were performed under the new proposed building area to a depth, each, of 40 feet below existing
grade. Additional two auger borings were performed at the new proposed apron area to a depth of 5 feet
in Appendix "A". The boring, infiltration test, the bulk sample locations and depths were selected by Law
below existing grade. The borings were drilled in general accordance to the Field Procedures presented
Engineering and Reynolds, Smith and Hills, Inc. The boring, and infiltration test locations were determined
by a geotechnical engineer from our office by taping measurements from existing site features such the
existing structures, fences and the existing apron and runway. The ground surface elevations at the
boring locations were not measure.
Marathon Airport Tenninal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 3
J..
The Test Boring Records, in Appendix "A", graphically show the penetration resistances and present the
soil descriptions for each test boring. The Auger Boring Records, also in Appendix "A" present the soil
descriptions for each soil type encountered in the auger borings. The stratification lines and depth
designations on the boring records represents the approximate boundaries between soil types. In some
instances, the transition between soil types may be gradual. A brief description of the exploratory drilling
and sampling techniques used is presented in the Field Procedures section of Appendix "A". Water levels
shown on the Test Boring Records represent the conditions at the time of our exploration.
3.0 LABORATORY TESTING
3.1 Classification Testing - After visual classification of each recovered sample, representative soil
samples were selected for laboratory testing. The laboratory testing included seven percent fine contents
and two organic contents tests. As requested from the bulk samples obtained at auger boring locations
AS-1 and AB-3, located in the apron area, two CSR tests were performed. From the bulk samples
obtained at auger boring locations AS-5, AS-10 and AS-14 for the roadway and parking areas, three LBR
test were performed. The result of these tests are presented in the Summary of Laboratory Test presented
in the Appendix "S". A brief description of the laboratory procedures used is presented in the Laboratory
Procedures section of Appendix "S".
3.2 Corroslvlty Classification Testing - As requested, corrosivity classification testing was
performed on a representative groundwater sampled obtained at Boring B-7. This testing included pH,
chlorides content, Sulfates content and resistivity. The tests were performed by iea Laboratories of
Miramar, Florida and in accordance with E.P.A., A.S.T.M. standard methods or other approved methods.
The results of the tests are presented in the Appendix "S".
4.0 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
4.1 Site Conditions
The existing site conditions were observed by Mr. Hugo E. Soto, P.E. on October 17,1991 and March 11,
1992. At the time of the visit, the ground surface was cover mainly by grass, Iimerock base and asphalt
The topography of the site is generally level. No standing water was observed at the time of our site visit
on October 17, 1991, except in the area of Boring AB-12. During our site visit on March 11, 1992 no
standing water was observed. It was also observed that a one-story structure towards the south portion
of the site is being use as the airport terminal.
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 4
J..
4.2 Subsurface Conditions
4.2.1 General
The following discussion and the Generalized Subsurface Profile, included in Appendix "A" were
developed through interpretation of the boring data. This profile should be considered a
representation of the subsurface conditions at the boring locations only. This profile and the soil
conditions outlined below highlight the major subsurface stratification. The Test Boring Records
in Appendix "A" should be consulted for a detailed description of the soil conditions encountered
at each boring location. When reviewing the boring records and the soil profile, it should be
understood that soil conditions may vary between boring locations.
4.2.2 Soils/Rock
At the boring test locations, 3 to 12 inches of topsoil consisting of silty fine sand with grass roots
was encountered, with exception of boring B-2 and B-4. Boring B-2 and B-4 disclosed 0.5 to one-
inch of asphalt and 3 to 4 inches of limerock base. The underling soils, with exception of Boring
B-2 and B-9, consisted of soft to very hard limestone that extended to the boring termination
depths of 25 and 50 feet below existing grade with N-Values ranging from 7 blows per foot to 50
blows per Q-inches of penetration. Boring B-2 disclosed a 3 foot layer consisting of a very loose
black organic silty fine sand below the Iimerock base and above the limestone strata with a N-
value of 3 blows per foot. Boring B-9 disclosed organic silty fine sand that extended to 2 feet
below existing grade with N-value of 2 blows per foot. The soils below the organic sand to a
depth of 9 feet and above the limestone formation consisted of very loose to dense fine sand with
limestone fragment with N-values ranging from 3 blows per foot to 50 blows for 3 inches of
penetration.
4.2.3 Groundwater
Groundwater levels measured in the borings at the exploration was encountered at a depth
ranging from 4 inches to 3 feet 5 inches below the existing ground surface. Fluctuations in the
groundwater level will occur due to variations in rainfall, evaporation, construction activity, surface
water runoff. and other site specific factors.
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 5
J..
5.0 EVALUATION OF SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
5.1 Basis For Recommendations
The following evaluation of subsurface conditions is based on the project information discussed
previously and on the subsurface conditions encountered during our exploration. In evaluating the test
boring data, we have used correlations previously developed between standard penetration resistance
values and the engineering performance characteristics of soils similar to those at this site. If the structural
information is incorrect or the location of the structures changed, please contact us so that our
recommendations can be reviewed. The discovery of any site and/or subsurface conditions during
construction which deviates from the data obtained in this exploration should also be reported to us for
our evaluation.
Due to its relatively close distance to the shore line, the subject site appears to be located in a coastal
high hazard areas. The Monroe County Code requires for building or structures, in coastal high hazard
areas, the following:
Section 1302.8
All building foundations shall rest directly on natural rock, on piling driven to rock or on friction
piling and shall be anchored to such rock support by holes, sixteen (16) inches in minimum
diameter, augured into said rock a minimum depth of three (3) feet and reinforced by a
minimum of four (4) number 5 vertical rods extending up into the piers above a minimum of 25
inches and tied to the vertical steel of the pier.
Based on the soil test results, the information provide to us and the type of structures, it is our opinion that
from a geotechnical standpoint, shallow spread footings will adequately support the structural
compression loads. The shallow footings should bear on the surface of or in the natural limestone. We
understand that the facility is being design to withstand up to Category V hurricane (155 mph winds with
13 foot storm surge). The risk of foundation undermining and the magnitude of uplift and overturning
forces associated with a storm of that magnitude may precluded the use of shallow foundations; therefore,
as an alternative we recommend the structure be supported on a deep foundation system.
For deep foundations, we have considered founding the structures on augercast piles or driven piles. Pile
driving in these soils can be very difficult considering the very high standard penetration resistances
values obtained, and predrilling or spudding a pilot hole for each pile may be necessary to reach the
minimum required rock embedment. On the other hand, augercast piles can be easily Installed, length
can be adjusted. Installation of augercast piles results in relatively low noise and vibration levels as
compared to driven piles. We have evaluated 14, 16 and 1a-inch diameter augercast piles for support of
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 6
J..
the proposed building. The augercast piles will generate significant capacity through side shear transfer
in the limestone.
The assessment of site environmental conditions or the presence of pollutants in the soil, rock or
groundwater of the site is beyond the proposed scope of this exploration. If you desire, and
environmental assessment of the project site can be performed by LAW.
6.0 RECOMMENDATION FOR FOUNDATION DESIGN AND SITE PREPARATION
6.1 Foundation Deslan
If the risk of foundation undermining can be diminish by containing the soils around the structure it is our
opinion that the subsurface conditions at this site are favorable for supporting the structure on either a
shallow foundation system or an augercast pile foundation system.
6.1.1 Shallow Foundation
Desian - We consider the site favorable for support of the structure on shallow foundations, once
the site is prepared as described in the following Site Preparation Section. Individual column and
continuous footings may bear on acceptable undisturbed existing soils/rock encountered by the
borings or on compacted structural till. The footings can be designed using a maximum
allowable soli bearing pressure of 5000 pst. Minimum footing widths of 18 for continuous
footings and 24 inches for individual footings are recommended, even though the allowable
bearing pressure may not be fully developed in all cases. We recommend that footings bear at a
depth required by the Flood Hazard Reduction Code, if applicable, and be provided with the
anchorage required by the code, where applicable. We recommend that the footings be founded
at least 18 inches below final grade. This embedment is necessary to provide adequate
confinement of the bearing materials and to achieve the recommended bearing pressure.
Considering the anticipated thickness of the footings for the structure, we recommend that the
footings bear no deeper than one-foot below the existing grade to minimize possible interaction
with the groundwater level. Additional comments related to groundwater control are provide later
in this report.
Were footings bear directly on the limestone, probing of the limestone formation by a
geotechnical engineer from this office in lieu of field density testing should be performed to
ascertain the desired bearing strata has been reached. Should the footings bear on compacted
structural fill, a density equivalent to 95 percent of Modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM
0- 1557) should be achieved in the upper 12 inches below the footing bearing level.
Marathon Airport Tennlnal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 7
J..
The allowable bearing capacity for the shallow footings could be increase by about one-third for
transient edge stress loading considerations. Long term edge stresses should not exceed the
allowable bearing capacity. The allowable bearing pressures presented in this report are based
on the anticipated compression loadings. We understand that foundation uplift and overturning
resistance considerations will be evaluated by RS&H.
6.1.2 Deep Foundation-Auaercast (Pressure-Grouted) Piles Design and Installation
Design - Augercast (pressure-grouted) piles are a technically feasible alternative for the proposed
structure. The capacity of these piles is essentially developed in side friction between the grouted
pile and the layers of rock. As these piles are installed into the limestone formation, they will "lock
into" the rock formation with only a relatively small load bearing transmitted to the pile tips. The
analysis for this foundation alternative consisted of determining a pile capacity for a specific pile
size and length.
A factor of safety of 2 against exceeding the skin friction values in the rock was used in our
calculations. Uplift capacities in the order of 1/2 of the compression capacities should be
available in properly reinforced and constructed piles. The following table summarizes our
recommendations for compression, uplift, and lateral load capacities for this type of pile. The
following pile capacities are based on the piles being installed through 3.0 feet of structural fill
overlying the limestone formation.
AUGER CAST PILES
Summary of Allowable Compression, Uplift and Lateral Capacities
Diameter
(inches)
Allowable
Compression (U)
Capacity
(Kips)
Allowable
Uplift
Capacity
(Kips)
Allowable
Lateral (*)
Load Capacity
(Kips)
-------------------------------------....---------...---------------------------------
14
16
18
110
130
150
45
55
55
8
10
14
-----------------------------------------...-----------------------------------
(*) Estimated allowable lateral load for an approximate deflection of 1/2
of an inch and considers that the upper 3 feet below the pile cap of
structural fill has been eroded due to a storm event.
(* *) These piles should be installed to a tip minimum depth of 14 feet
below existing grade.
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 8
J..
Due to the very loose soils encountered in Boring B-9. we recommend the lateral capacity of the
piles in the vicinity of B-9 (delineated by the low area) not be considered during design.
If a higher lateral load is needed. battered or larger diameter piles may be considered. Typical
batter angles used for the installation of augercast piles range up to 3H:12V (4 inches per foot).
The lateral capacity of the pile groups can be improved by backfilling around pile caps with a
compacted structural fill as described in the section outlining Structural Fill requirements or by
casting the pile caps directly against the sides of the pile cap excavation made into the rock
formation.
Lateral Pile Capacity Analvsis
A lateral pile capacity analysis was performed on the 18-inch augercast pile installed 20 feet below
existing grade into the limestone formation, at the boring locations. The piles will extend
approximately 3.0 feet through a structural fill layer above the limestone surface. Our analysis
considers that the 3.0 feet of structural fill has been removed due to storm scour.
Our analysis was performed using a computer program "LPILE". This program evaluates the pile
deflection, shear, bending moment and total stress along the length of the pile for the inputted
lateral load. The pile top was considered to be free to rotate.
The graphic results of the lateral analysis for the 14 kip lateral pile top loading case are present in
the Appendix. Our analysis indicated the following:
Lateral Loading (kips):
Axial Loading (kips):
Pile Top Deflection (inches):
Maximum Moment (in-Ibs)*:
Maximum Shear (Ibs):
14
150
0.55
2,600,000
46.940
Maximum moment occurs approximately 3 feet below the top of the pile. The
allowable capacity could be increased by about one-third for transient stress
loading conditions. Long term stresses should not exceed the allowable
capacity.
Auaercast Pile Installation - The center-to-center spacing of the piles should be at least 2-1/2
pile diameters, in order to minimize settlement and pile capacity reductions caused by group
effects. The 28-day compressive strength of the grout should be at least 5000 psi. In order to
provide tension reinforcement and to provide some assurance that piles of a continuous cross-
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 9
J..
section have been constructed, a full-length steel reinforcing bar or cage should be installed into
the center of each pile immediately following grouting. Centralizers (spacing devices) should
be attached to individual bars at one-third points. The type and diameter of the spacing devices
should be submitted to the geotechnical engineer for review. This bar, along with the attached
centralizers, will serve as a "probe" to help determine whether any discontinuities or
reductions in cross-section in the pile shaft have occurred.
Augercast piles are constructed by rotating a hollow-stem continuous flight auger into the
ground until the planned tip depth or termination criteria is achieved. At the termination level, a
grout with a relatively thick soupy consistency is pumped under pressure into the hole through
the hollow stem auger. As long as pressure is observed in the line, the auger is slowly withdrawn
up the hole and the augercast shaft is constructed. Grout volumes, possibly up to 1 1/2 to 2
times the theoretical pile volume, may be required for proper pile installation. Drilling fluid losses
noted during the subsurface exploration indicating a relative high degree of porosity in the
penetrated limestone formations.
The normal driving criteria and inspection procedures employed in the installation of other types
of piles such as driven piles are not applicable to augercast piles. Successful installation depends
on the experience and skill of the piling contractor. We recommend, therefore, that the installation
of all augercast piles be observed by an engineer or a geologist from this office familiar with the
subsurface conditions at this site. The installation procedures that can be monitored include the
rate of auger withdrawal, the maintenance of a positive grout pressure, the volume of grout
pumped into the pile, and the depth of the pile tip. The full-time monitoring of pile installation will
provide a degree of assurance that continuous piles of the proper cross-section are being
obtained.
We suggest the following guidelines be used for augercast pile installation:
1. A pressure gauge should be installed close to the pile rig in order to monitor
pressure during the grouting operations. The gauge should be positioned so
that it can be easily observed by the field engineer or geologist.
2. A mechanical counter should be provided on the grout pump to record the
number of pump strokes during the installation of each pile.
3. The grout pump should be calibrated prior to initiation of production pile
installation by pumping grout into a container of known volume. The pump
should then be calibrated as often as deemed necessary by the field engineer
or geologist.
4. At least one set of six, 3" x 6" grout cylinders should be made for each day of
pile installation.
Marathon Airport Tennlnal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 10
J..
5. After achieving the desired maximum depth and criteria, a positive grout
pressure should be observed prior to initiating withdrawal of the auger. A
continuous fluid return (first slurry, then grout) out of the top of the hole is the
best indication that the maximum possible pressure head is being achieved.
6. The auger should be withdrawn slowly and smoothly so that a positive
grout pressure is maintained in the hole at all times during auger withdrawal.
If the withdrawal of the auger becomes erratic, grout pressure suddenly drops,
or if the grout supply is interrupted. the auger tip should be reinserted at least
5 feet below the level where the grouting operation was disrupted prior to
resuming withdrawal of the auger. The time rate of withdrawal of the auger
should be monitored by the field engineer or geologist.
7. A grout factor equal to or greater than that of the successful test piles should
be achieved. The grout factor is defined as the actual volume of grout
pumped into the pile divided by the theoretical volume of the drilled hole.
Although piles should not be rejected solely on the basis of grout factors less
than that of the test piles, the contractor should coordinate the rate of
withdrawal of the auger so that the desired target grout factor is achieved. As
noted previously, significantly higher grout factors may result due to the
presence of relatively small voids and cavities in the limestone formations.
8. Clockwise rotation of the auger should be performed during the grouting
process at least until grout is observed flowing out of the top of the drilled hole.
Auger rotation helps stabilize the sides of the hole, facilitates the removal of
spoil material out of the hole, and prevents bearing formation cuttings from
settling-out to the bottom of the hole during grouting.
9. The installation of adjacent piles (located within 4 feet of each other side to
side) on the same working day is not recommended at this site due to the
potential existence of inter-connected pores or cavities in the limestone layers.
We also recommend that adjacent piles (located within 4 feet) not be installed
until the initial grouted pile has set overnight:
10. Some subsidence of fresh grout may occur in the top of the piles. This
subsidence is in-part a result of the weight of the grout column "pushing"
laterally into pores in the limestone layer. It is anticipated that this subsidence
will occur within a period of about two hours following the grouting operation.
If subsidence occurs while the pile grout is in a fluid state (generally within two
hours of forming the pile), we recommend that the pile be "topped" with
fresh grout to the proper cutoff elevation immediately. A short length of
casing or sleeve inserted into the top of the pile would serve as a good
reference to judge whether grout subsidence has occurred. We recommend
that a pile grout subsidence of up to 8 inches be considered acceptable for
this project. As stated previously, the pile should be refilled as the subsidence
occurs. Conscientious monitoring of the pile grout levels will be required
by the contractor and installation monitoring personnel. Piles which
subside more than 8 inches overnight or after a two-hour period should be
evaluated on an individual basis.
Marathon Airport TenninaJ"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page , 1
J..
11. Grout should not be pumped into the piles when it is older than 90 minutes form
the time it was batched.
Law Engineering would be pleased to prepare a set of specifications written to help achieve a
high-quality augercast pile foundation system.
Auaercast Pile Installation Monitorina - Because the augercast pile is a cast-in-place pile. the
success or failure of this pile type is dependent upon the quality of the piles installed. We
recommend that a pile installation monitoring program be implemented so that a quality
installation is achieved and that Law Engineering be retained to provide this service.
Prior to actual installation of the piles, the contractor should demonstrate that the materials and
equipment proposed for use are capable of installing the production piles. The contractor
should provide an accurate method of determining the depth and alignment of the auger. Grout
pressure gauges should be accessible to the field engineer/geologist at all times. Gauges which
become blocked with grout should be cleaned or replaced.
The duties of the augercast pile observer should include the following:
1. Calibrating the grout pump (in units of cubic feet per stroke).
2. Monitoring the addition of any water and/or admixtures to the grout at the
site. Performing flow cone tests. as required.
3. Making grout cylinders.
4. Observing the drilling process and noting any relevant irregularities.
5. Approving the pile augering termination criteria and recording the pile tip
elevation prior to pumping.
6. Observing and documenting the grouting procedure, noting the depth to the
auger tip during any delays in grouting, and the time of any delay during
pumping.
7. Recording the total number of pump strokes for determination of the actual
grout volume pumped into each pile. Calculating theoretical pile volume and
grout factors.
8. Recording the grout pressure during pumping and the rate of withdrawal of
the auger.
9. Monitoring the setting process of the fresh grout based on actual samples
taken at the time of arrival on-site. Grout which has reached its initial set or
exceeds 1.5 hours since the time of batching, should not be used.
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 12
J..
10. Observing freshly-grouted piles to determine whether any settling or grout
subsidence has occurred.
11. Monitoring the installation of reinforcing steel in the piles.
Auaercast Pile Test Proaram - We recommend that a static compression and tension load test
program be perform where this system is used. The compression and tension test piles should be
loaded to at least twice the design load. The reaction system should consist of two augercast
piles of the same diameter and installation depth as the one being tested in compression.
Tension testing to twice times the design tension loading can be achieved on the reaction piles
during load testing of the compression pile. If the required design tension load is equal or larger
than the design compression load, a tension load test to twice times the design tension load
should be sufficient at this site.
The load tests are necessary to provide evidence that the contractor can produce an augercast
pile which can safely support the design loads at the project site, and to satisfy the Standard
Building Code, which is the code adapted by Monroe County. The compression load test should
be performed in general accordance with ASTM Standard 0-1143 and under the direct
supervision of a geotechnical engineer. In our o'pinion, the Quick Maintained Load Test Method
(Quick ML) (paragraph 5.6. ASTM 0-1143) would be acceptable for performing the compression
or tension test.
The installation of the piles, test, reaction, and production augercast piles should be observed by
a representative from our firm. If unusual drilling characteristics. large grout quantities, or other
observed installation irregularities occur during production pile installation that are markedly
different from those recorded when installing the piles, test and reaction piles, additional load
tests or replacement piles may be required.
6.2 Settlement Potential
Shallow Foundation - We have compared the field test data obtained in this exploration with our
experience with similar structures and published empirical relationships for settlement. Using a
bearing pressure on the order of 5000 psf, we have estimated that the total settlement of the
structure will be less than 0.5 inches. Differential settlements (between adjacent columns or along
the length of a continuous wall footing) should be approximately one-half of the total settlements.
This settlement would primarily be the result of elastic compression of the granular soils and
limestone formation and should occur almost immediately with the application of the dead load
during construction. Settlement due to fill placement should be on the order of 1/5 of an inch and
should occur mostly during construction.
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 13
J.
Auaercast Foundation - We have compared the field test data obtained in this exploration with our
experience with similar structures and published empirical relationships for settlement. Using the
compression and lateral capacities outline above we have estimated total settlement in the order
of 1/2 of an inch in a vertical and 1/4 of an inch in a lateral deflection. in the area of the proposed
structure. The settlement for the structure would primarily the result of the elastic compression of
the granular soils and limestone formation and should occur almost immediately with the
application of the dead load during construction. Differential settlements (between adjacent
columns or along the length of a continuous wall footing) should be approximately one-half of the
total settlement.
6.3 Ground Floor Slab Support
The ground floor slab for the proposed building may be constructed directly on the existing rock or on
compacted structural fill. The structural fill should be compacted to a density of at least 95 percent of the
Modified Proctor maximum dry density to a depth of at least 12 inches. A vapor barrier should be installed
on top of the subgrade to help reduce dampness on the surface of the floor slab. Consideration should
be given to using two sheets of the vapor barrier material in order to reduce friction between the bottom of
the slab and the top of the underlying subgrade ~o that associated shrinkage cracking in the concrete can
be reduced. We recommend that slabs be jointed around columns and walls to permit slabs and
foundations to settle deferentially.
6.4 Site Preparation
The site preparation outlined below should be followed in order for the above foundation system to
perform as discussed in the previous sections.
6.4.1 Surface Strioping
All vegetation, topsoils, roots, organic zones, silts, asphalt (generally 2 to 7 inches thick at the test
boring locations) should be stripped and removed from the construction area for a distance of
at least 5 feet beyond the exterior building limits and from all areas to be paved. The depth to
which stripping will be required will vary to some degree. Some localized areas, as in the area
of Boring B-2, may require 2 to 3 feet of stripping to remove significant organic and silt pockets,
whereas other areas may require less.
6.4.2 Surficial Soil Comoaction
After the site grades have been reasonably leveled, the exposed soils at the stripped surface in
the building and paved areas should be compacted with overlapping passes of a moderately
Marathon Airport Tenninal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 14
J..
heavy vibratory from roller having a total operations tactic weight (including fuel and water) of
about 5 tons and a drum diameter of 4 to 6 feet. Densities equivalent to at least 95 percent of the
Modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM 0-1557) should be uniformly obtained to a depth of
at least 12 inches below the compacted surface. Regardless of the degree of compaction
achieved, a minimum of eight complete coverages should be made in the building areas with the
roller in order to help increase the density and improve the uniformity of the underlying soils. The
roller coverages should be divided evenly into two perpendicular directions.
If the exposed soils at the stripped surface in the building and paved areas is limestone, probing
of the limestone formation by a geotechnical engineer from this office in lieu of field density
testing should be performed to ascertain the desired bearing strata has been reached.
6.5 Surface Water and Shallow Groundwater Control
During construction of shallow footings or the pile caps groundwater control may be necessary. If
required groundwater can probably be temporarily lowered 1 or 2 feet by pumping from barrel sumps
located in perimeter ditches or pits. All sump pump inlets should be located outside the bearing areas in
order to avoid loosening or disturbance of the bearing materials. The groundwater level should be
maintained as low as possible at the footing location. In areas where deeper groundwater drawdown or
control is required or where more positive groundwater control is desired for prolonged periods, a single-
stage, fully-sanded vacuum wellpoint system may be required.
The need for surface water runoff control should be anticipated during the site preparation and foundation
construction process. Lack of proper controls could result in ponding of surface water in foundation
bearing areas and on compaction surfaces. The ponded water, combined with machine or foot traffic
during construction operations or other activities. could disturb otherwise acceptable soils or previously
compacted soils. causing instability. pumping, and generally unacceptable conditions. The ponded water
will also impede or prevent necessary soils compaction operations and make construction trafficability
difficult.
6.6 Structural Filling and Backfill
Representative samples of proposed fill material should be collected and tested to determine their
maximum dry density. optimum moisture content and gradation. These tests are needed for quality
control during compaction. Structural fill should consist of an inorganic, non-plastic, granular soil
containing less than 10 percent material passing the No. 200 mesh sieve (relatively clean sand or a
crushed Iimerock with a 3-inch maximum particle size with a Unified Soil Classification of GP. GW. SP.
SW. SP-GW. SW-GM. SW-SM or SP-SM. The fill should be constructed by spreading it in loose layers not
more than 12 inches thick. Any structural fill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of its Modified
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 15
J..
Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM 0-1557). We recommend that the backfill/fill placement and
compaction be observed by an engineering technician working under the direction of a geotechnical
engineer. Field density testing should be performed in each lift of backfill in each foundation excavation to
verify that the above level of compaction has been achieved. Significant deviations, either from
specifications or good practice, should be brought to the attention of the owner's representative along
with appropriate recommendations.
6.7 Foundation BearinG Surface PreDaratlon
Where footings are to bear on compacted structural fill, the upper 12 inches beneath the footing
excavations should be compacted to densities equivalent to 95 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum
dry density. Compaction or recompaction of the footing excavation bearing level soils (if loosened by the
excavation process) can probably be best achieved by making several passes with a relatively lightweight,
walk-behind vibratory sled or roller.
As previously mentioned, where footings bear directly on the limestone, probing of the limestone
formation by a geotechnical engineer form this office in lieu of field density testing should be preformed to
ascertain the desired bearing strata has been reached.
6.8 Pavement SubGrade PreDaratlon
After stripping and removing topsoil and other unsuitable soils, the exposed pavement subgrades should
be compacted to a density of at least 98 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density to a depth
at least 12 inches below the pavement base course. The vibratory compaction equipment discussed
previously should be used to density the structural fill subgrade. If after stripping the limestone is
exposed, probing of the limestone formation by a geotechnical engineer from this office in lieu of field
density testing should be performed to ascertain the desired bearing strata has been reached.
6.8.1 Aoron Pavement Subarade - The subgrade soils for apron pavement subgrades were
evaluated by performing California Bearing Ratio (CBR) test on bulk surface soil samples obtained
at the locations of Auger Boring Nos., AB-1 and AB-3. These test indicate that these subgrade
soils have CBR values of 51 and 56 for soil compacted to 100 percent of the AASHTO T-180
(ASTM 0-1557) maximum dry density. This corresponds to a modulus of subgrade reaction, k of
250 peL
6.8.2 Roadwav Pavement Subarades - The subgrade soils for the planned roadway and parking
area pavements were evaluated by performing Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) test on bulk soil
samples taken from the locations of Auger Boring Nos. AB-S, AB-10 and AB-14. These test
indicate the following LBR values for soil compacted to 98 percent and 100 percent as AASHTO
maximum dry densities:
Marathon Airport Terminal"
law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 16
J..
Location
LBR at 98 percent
of AASHTO T -180
Maximum Dry Densitv
LBR at 100 percent
of AASHTO T-180
Maximum Dry Density
AB-6
AB-1Q
AB-14
45
70
50
115
115
70
6.8.3 Locallv Available Pavement Structural Material
Locally available materials for both bituminous asphalt and cement concrete percent generally
consist of manufactured sands and crushed limestone aggregates. Local limestone quarry are
set-up to provide the standard Florida Department of Transportation gradations for asphalt
concrete and for conventional cement concrete mixes.
6.9 Surface Dralnaae Considerations
As presented in the Field Exploration section of this report, three Double-Ring Infiltration Tests were
performed at auger boring locations A8-5, A8-11 and AB-18 at this site. The double-ring infiltration tests
were performed in general accordance with ASTM 0-3385, "Infiltration Rate of Soils in Field Using Double-
Ring Infiltrometer". Two 12-inch high open cylinders (12-inch and 24-inch J.D.) were driven into the
ground, one inside the other. The large cylinder was driven to a depth of 5 inches and the smaller cylinder
to 3-inches. 80th cylinders were then partially tilled with water. A 7-inch head of water (above the existing
ground surface) was maintained in both rings during the test, and the volume of water required to
maintain the level in the inner ring was recorded every 30 minutes for a total time period of 6 hours.
The calculated infiltration rate ranged from 3.75 to 10.69 inch per hour. For detailed information about the
soil conditions encountered at each boring location, the Double-Ring Infiltrometer Test Results sheet and
Auger Boring Records in Appendix "A" should be consulted. The horizontal stratification lines and depth
designations on these records Indicate the approximate boundary between soil types and in some cases
the transition may be gradual. It should be understood when reviewing these records that the soil
conditions could vary between the boring locations.
6.10 General Construction Monltorlna and Testing Guidelines
Prior to initiating compaction operations, we recommend that representative samples of the structural fill
material to be used and acceptable exposed in-place soils be collected and tested to determine their
compaction classification characteristics. The maximum dry density, optimum moisture content,
gradation and plasticity characteristics should be determined. These tests are needed from compaction
quality control of the structural fill and existing soils and to determine if the fill material is acceptable.
Marathon Airport Terminal"
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Page 17
J..
A representative number of in-place field density test should be performed in the compacted existing soils
and in each lift of structural fill or backfill to confirm that the required degree of compaction has been
obtained. In-place density tests should also be performed at representative locations in the bearing level
soils in the footing excavation bottoms. We recommend that at least on density test be performed for
every 2500 square feet of compacted existing soils. subgrade. and each lift of compacted fill. A minimum
of two density tests should be performed per lift of compact fill. In addition. we recommend that at least
one density test be performed for every 200 square feet of spread footing bearing area. and for every 100
lineal feet of continuous footing.
6.11 Construction Plans and SDeclflcatlons Review
Our report has been written in a guideline recommendation format and is not appropriate for use as a
specification without in-part being reworded into a specification-type format. It is recommended that this
report not be made a part of the contract documents. however, it should be made available to prospective
contractors for information purposes.
We recommend that our firm be retained to review the foundation plans and portions of the project
specifications prepared from the recommendations outlined in this report. We will then be able to suggest
any changes that may be required so that our recommendations are properly interpreted and
implemented.
6.12 Sam Die Storaae
We wish to remind you that our exploration services include storing the samples collected and making
them available for inspection for 60 days. The samples are then discarded unless you request otherwise.
**************
A P PEN 0 I X liAR
Law Engineering
.-. -...
\
o
SCALE
feet
I
2000
1
.__.~ ;&~'iWY '\+j\1
PROJECf NUMBER: 531-OS6Z7-01 '1
PROJECf NAME: MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL \
PROJ LOCATION VACA KEY, FLORIDA J
DRAWN BY: J.NA CHECKED BY: H.E-S. APPROVED BY: GTM
REFERENCE
Mapped bv U.S. Coast Survey
Edited and published by the Geo Survey
Map edited 1988
NORTH
,......:\:::.I:\:\:II:_III.~I_B.: :
.......]
$
N
ill '
<I:
r--------
I
I I
1
I
I
I I
L____
I
I
..
i
4
'"
I
III
~
::
" ,
:; ,
. I
. I
'" ,
!;!
~
~
'"
u
. - UI.
N,
, cC \
I <1:'
~ 1h., I
m ---qr
rh<l: - --
'P'" ' ,
,.
..
:>
S
....
I
I
,
,
I
I
e \ ~ "
i ~~--'
8-
e I
.. I
I
cD
~
~~
~a
.:l~
I
I
I
_J
...
~eJ
-~-------~
"-~r<-- ~ i
i
..
"
:;
.
3
I
I
-'
II
~I_-
.~ .~~
:f~
.-~
"'''''^
l-:
~~
z
...
~
~
j
tl ~~i
5:_ ~ ll~
OIl .. 5 i'
~ l J 1
l:l . ~ ;
~ ~ Q
...
I
~
~ ~ I I B I
>- '-I ! ~ ! ]
~ \:l j r i!
~ ~
;;; i .ll J .
'^ i t:i I
:>
..
#e~
...
I
III
c(
DEPTH B- 4 8-13
feet
8 ~ p
90/11' 50/::!'
SZ
= 70 49
IS
32
51
19
50/2' 60
15
37
28
25
38
35
48
45
58
B.T, at
50.0
B.T.at
50.0
B.T.at
50.0
55
LEGEND
~
t
Water level measured at time of drilling
Water level measured a day after drilling
4-inch diameter rock core
I
~
I Split Spoon Sample
~ Drilling fluid Loss
B.T. Doring Terminated
NOTES:
:\"X diameter rock core
B.T.at
50.0
10
I .'..,..--....', ,."......... ',' .....-... -.. . ""-.. ".-., "', '--." J
..'-.....,.. ,',-' ," ... '. .., ... ..... ......,.-...
'-',. ",'-.'," ...., -,_..._-,..... ,.-...
.' ....-...-,.... ........,. .,. .... ""', .." ",,-,,",.
g~~I.t'\LIZEI)StJBSURFAc:E,t'()F1LE
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01
PROJECT NAME MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL I
I
PROJ. LOCATION VACA KEY, FLORIDA !
DRA W'I BY : J.NA. CHECKED BY: H.E.S. APPROVED BY: Gnt j
! jiL,.\\V ENGINEERlNG.I\1htlDi.Ftori~. I
I
!
..
17
18
19
22
19
B.T. at
50.0
90
18
14
BT. at
50.0
23
BT. at
25.0
DEPTH
feet 8-7 8-8 8-18 8-11 8-1a
8
17 38 2 9 50/4"
g 90/8'
80 50/5" 50/3" 14 30 71
5 "" 6 .21. . 69 81
..
""
~.
50/5" 24 . . 3 42 50/6" 50W
-
.
-
50/5" 30 . SO/2" 42 36 42
18
15
a8
a5
38
35
48
B.T. at
40.0
45
LEGEND
g
!
29
15
B:t at
40.0
Water level measured at time of drilling
Water level measured a day after drilling
I 4-inch diameter rock core
~ :-.IX diameter rock core
I Split Spoon Sample
~ Drilling Fluid Loss
B.T. Boring Terminated
NOTES:
65
45
16
22
14
B.T.at
40.0
BTat
45.0
33
15
22
24
17
20
14
15
35
37
34
72
BT. at
40.0
B.T. at
40.0
I
'. .y.....
..Glt~~~~QSYBSyg..~~j.QFlt~
'.
PROJECT NUMBER 532"()5627-0l
PROJECT NAME MARATHON AIRPORT TERMI~..\L
PROJ. LOCATION MARATHON KEY, FLORIDA
DRA~ BY: J.NA. CHECKED BY: H.E.S.
APPROVED BY GT\t
...... '-,._. "....,' - ..' ....."....-..
....... ~LAW ENGINEERING. In~... Miami. Florida
KEY SHEET FOR GENERALIZED SUBSURFACE PROFilES
MATERIAL SYMBOLS
. ASPHALT I[] Sandy to very sandy SILT ~ LIMESTONE
~ CONCRETE II Shelly to very shelly SILT ~ LIMESTOl\'E with some sand
II ~'l-MADE DEBRIS m SILT and SHELL FRAGME:>.TS ~ LIMESTOf'o'E and SA'D
1m FILL 1m Oayey to very clayey SILT ~ Coralline LIMESTONE
~ TOPSOIL . Organic SILT ~ Coralline LL\IESTONE with some sand
--
--
[J Standing WATER ~ CLAY IJ Coralline LIMESTOl'<'E and SA.'1)
... ..
[J SA." 1) ~ Sandy to very sandy CLAY ~ Freshwater LI~IESTOl'o'E
'". :.
. .
0 SA.,\;1) with some rock fragments ~ Shelly to very shelly CLAY G Freshwater LIMESTOl'<'E with some sand
~','-
~ ~ m
.'~ SA."D and ROCK FRAGMENTS CLAYandSHELLFRAG~'~ . . Freshwater LIMESTOJloo'E and SA. '1)
-
Cl Shelly to very shelly SA. '1) ~ Silty to very silty CLAY ~ COQUINA
rn SAJ'\;1) and SHELL FRAGME.'\;TS ~ Organic CLAY ~ COQUINA with some sand
El Silty to very silty SA.'1) ~ PEAT m COQUINA and SA.''D
. .
[] Gayey to very clayey SM"D II Oolitic LIMESTO:'lr'E II SA.'lDSTONE
~ Organic SA.'lD II] Oolitic LIMESTOJloo'E with some sand Ii] SA....'DSTOl'oo'E with some sand
. IJ IJ
SILT Oolitic LIMESTO,,'E and SA."'D . . SA.'lDSTOl'o'E and SA.'1)
DRilLING SYMBOLS
=a
63 rJ
23lJ
123
Rock coring using 4-inch size core ba~1
with 80 pet. recovery and 20 pet. R.Q.D.
~
Drilling Auid Lou
Rock coring using :'>IX size core ba~1
with 63 pet. recovery and 23 pet. R.Q.D.
~
Water Levell hour or less after jrilling
Standard Penetration Test sample with a
Penetration Resistance of 23 blows/foot
I
Water Levell day or more after drilling
... ............<<~IA.W ENGINEERlNG.InC.. Mlami,F1orida
DEPTH
(Fr.)
0.0
0.5
DESCRIPTION
N with grass roots
13.0
MODERATELY HARD to SOFT light gray
LlMESrONE with fine SA."ID
27.0
VERY HARD light gray LIMESTONE
BORING TERMINATED AT SO.O PEEr
REMARKS:
\
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLANATION OF
SYMBOLS A.....n ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(FT.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-1S86 AUTOMATIC HA..\fMER) BLOWSjFr
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
I
I
o
.
23
73 ~
79
1 50/4"
. 74
59
.
43
10
50/6"
I. ................. ......,.,.-..._.....' 'C._,' __",' ., "__'" .. _'", ,_ - .. ....0. I
.-....,.....,..... ..,,-,..... ,'.,',',", -"- .........'....,... ,...............,.,. -...-,-......,.,..........;..
..> .rrE$'tg()RlNGJtE<;tjRrji .
BORING NUMBER B- 1
DATE DRILLED October 18, 1991 ,
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01 ,
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
PAGE 1 OF 2 DRAWN BY J.NA. !
I ... ,-.--_., -- ... ....
.~... ",.,' --" ...,....-.-.- ,--' -', -....-.'.. j
. . tAWENGINEERING.Mjallli~Florida i
o
. STAJ"lDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASDf D-1586 AL'TOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWS/FT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEPTH
(Fr.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(fT.)
50.0
VER-Y HAR!) light gray LlM ;=
-
:::::::
==-
SOIT light gray very porous LlMESfONE with =
fine sand Ii
2 . I 9
~ I
b::: l-
I-- ! I
- I.
:::. ,
- I
-'-
==
:::: I
=
- . 16
== -
I-- I
I-- I
t=
I--
==
-
-'
-' .
== II
==
-
2
~ . .,
-'--
-
BORING TER.\tlNATED AT 50 IT.
I \ !
I
c- I
i
I i
BORING TERMINATED AT 50.0 PEEl'
REMARKS:
I "I1:$TBQlUN9g(;(j~' I
............-...- -....,-.-.. I
BORING NUMBER B- 1 ",
DATE DRILLEO October 18, 1991 I
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TER~lINAL
PAG~ 2 OF 2 DRAWN BY : J .NA.
I p.,--'-""" ..,...'...-....... .,", ,',',', J
. .... -, . .,.., ,.
~\ ......JiAWttf(ilNEERING.. .MbltJli. Florida
..
... ." . .
325
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlANATION OF
SYMBOLS AI'I/O ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
DEPTH
(Fr.)
0.0
0.2
0.5
DESCRIPTION
3.5
SOFT to MODERATELY HARD light gray
LIMESTONE with traces of fine sand
27.0
VERY HARD light gray LIMESTONE
BORING TERMINATFD AT SO.O FEET
REMARltS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLAi'lATION OF
SYMBOLS A.."IlD ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(Fr.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D.1S86 AUTOMATIC HA.\tMER) BLOWS/Fr
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
o
.
27
.
3
~
20
.
45
41
.
54
.
35
.
15
. Ill"
I ...... , ~jjQR.iNG.jiqQP..D..:2? I
BO RING NUM BER B. 2
DATE 0 RILLED October 17, 199 1
PROJECT NUM BER 532-05627.01
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TERMI:-.lAL
PAGE 1 OF 2 D RAWN BY : J .NA.
I.......,',.. ",',"-",-,',",",'.' ._..-.,'..._.,-.'..,.,.,-..... .,..... -," I
.~....... ""... ...-..'-- "-' -. .... . - -.
J....\W El'fGINEErUNG .Mlallli. F10rida
..
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASf\1 0-1586 AL'TOMATIC HA.\1!'v1ER) BLOWS/IT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEPTH
(IT.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(IT.)
SO.O
VERY HARD light grayLrMESTONE ~ 1 I
~
~
h-- I
i---
SOfT light very porous LIMESTONE with fine ::::
sand
~ .
l= 9
h--'- l-
f--
I--- . I,
I---
~.
~
=
=
=: . 18
_. i
-
=
~
=
~ . 13
~ l-
I--
~
~
E
-,-- .
..L..,...
..,.--
i---
~ . is
=
BORING TERMINATED AT SO IT.
l-
i
.
BORING TERMlNATFD AT SO.O FEEf
REMARKS:
Ii .... , , ..-. ....... ",", ....." -',",',' i
..-.--..- _.'" -...-.,'.
'I'ES'tS(jRlN<;.gE(;()R.D
BORING NUMBER B- 2
DATE DRILLED October 17, 1991
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01 :
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
PAGE 2 OF 2 DRAWN BY J.NA. /
r .. .'... ".... ... ,
..<~< .....LAW.tNGlNEERING... Miallli~Florida
33.0
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLAl'IATION OF
SYMBOLS ^'''TI ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
DEPTH
(Fr.)
0.0
0.7
DESCRIPTION
N with grass rootS
18.0
SOfT light gray very porous LIMESrONE with
fine sand
25.0
VERY HARD light gray LIMESrONE
BORING 1'ERMINATFD AT so.O FEET
REMARICS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlANATION OF
SYMBOLS A.."IlD ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(FT.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM 0-1586 ALTOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWS/IT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
o
20
> > 50/2'
~
.
55
.
36
60
57
.
27
.
~7
1<<... .. "__':', ......".....".,... ,.."_., __d d."'_"" .._.,_,'...._....'_._. I
._, .....,...........-.-,.. .--. . ".'-:.;.':..:":<.;': RECORDH.
..--:....'......._-..........,....,.............,.-,-.-...
>>~.ORlNG
. .......... - . - .. . , . - . , , , . . , - . . . . .
BORING NUMBER B- 3 '\
1
DATE DRILLED October 19, 1991 I
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01 ,
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TERMI;-.lAL i
PAGE 1 OF 2 DRAWN BY J.NA.
Iii. ....,...... ..-,_'''' I
........ ", - ..,....., ... .-..
. , , : : : : ' :.: : ' : : : : ~ : : -. -: : : " -' : ' - - ~ :.:
~< t1\WEiNGINEERING- Milun{.f1oridil
50.0
'VERY HARD Iiglll pay LIMESTONE ~ I
==
== I
!
I
-'-- I I
L I
MEDIUM to SOFr light gray porous p I
LIMESTONE with fine sand
P: . 37
p: f--
=
==
=
=
r=
r= . 15
r=
~ f--
f=:
-
=
=
~
r= .
f- 11
~
f= ,....
t:::
~
~
~
-
f--. . 15 I
r--
f--
BORING TERMINATED AT 50 Fr. I
I
f-- \
I
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(AsrM D-1586 Al.iTOMATIC I-IA.'vfMER) BLOWS/IT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEPTH
(FT.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(FT.)
33.0
BORING TERMINATFJ) AT 50.0 FEEI'
REMARKS:
I> . " ' ..- -"""..- J
",-"" ... - .. -. ,........:-",' '':';':':-.- >....>.._'.-.:-'... :-........ .
......'l'ESTBORlN'GRECQRJj..
BORING NUMBER B- 3 I
DATE DRILLED October 19, 1991 I
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01
PROJECT MARA.THON AIRPORT TERMI~AL
PAGE 2 OF 2 ORA. WN BY J.NA. ,
I
I 'C,', "',"_'. ,',,' ...,'..,-..... ,',,' J
J& LAW EN(;Il~iERING>-Pt>1ialDi. F10rida
-
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlA'lATION OF
SYMBOLS AJ'I,"D ABBREVlA TIONS USED ABOVE
DEPTH
(FT.)
0.0
0.2
0.4
DESCRIPTION
28.0
SOfT light gray very porous LlMESTOl'o'E with
fine sand
DORING 1llllMINATIID AT SO.O FFEr
REMARKS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLANATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS L:SED ABOVE
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-1586 AUTOMATIC HA..'dMER) BLOWS/IT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
ELEVATION
(FT.)
I ....
." ....-..........
"_.. -'-""--'
.. .-..._-.........
.---............"
. '. ....
.-..:<,:::-:-.....,...
. 27
/11'
~
70
51
18
:> :> 50/2.
. 36
41
.
25
"<"J'EST"""""""""""B""'O'>"RJ'N""""C"""'U""'''''CO'''''';'''RJ)''''()':'':C
'-- '. -..,. ..........
.... ,... . ...-,..
"", . '," ... ..........
.......~, ., .. .........
,:;::;.::::::-..<....-........:-.,.>:.....-:...-:-... '-/'-:"--': ....--.....:..,.>..:-.......-::::::::::>.:..:;::-:
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 1 OF 2
I
B-4
October 18, 1991
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWN BY: J.NA.
I
I
J
. .,....... .,.....-'-'..,',-.-,.,'..-'.... ..-,'" . -.......'-.,..'.."...-...,-.,..
. ,". "..... ,_... . .....
,~..... ...i.A.lVENG1NEj;RING...j.tlallii.FJorida
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM 0-1586 AUTOMATIC HA.\iMER) BLOWS/FT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEPTH
(FT.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(FT.)
50.0
SOIT light gray very porous LlM with ~
fine sand
.,.....l.
~
:;::
~. 10
~ ~
P:: . 17
~ I-
~
~
.,........L
~ . 18
~
~
~
~ . 22
h--i-
BO RI:-lG TERMINATED AT 50 IT.
BORING TERMINATED AT SO.O PEEr
REMARKS:
l.!:..,....::'::.~:.~::,::l:\\:i::::,:.....:.\..:.::~::;.\I':i.::.::,::~,':.:,:.:I."iBB'I":'!:i'"::,, .... : : : : : I
..... : :
.".. .. ..
BO RING NUM BER B- 4
DATE D RI LLED Oct ober 18, 199 1
PROJ ECf NUM BE R 532-05627 -0 1
P ROJE Cf MARA THO N AI R PO RT TER MINAL
PAGE 2 OF 2 D RAWN BY J N A.
li':,:,',!.:,:'::::::"I\ .",,,:::;:: i\liNq~~.:tl~II~!~~I,:'L I
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlANATION OF
SY~1BOLS A.'o"D ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
DEPTH
(FT.)
0.0
0.5
DESCRIPTION
with grass roots
BORING TERMlNATED AT SO.O FEIIT
REMARlCS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlA.'JATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABovE
ELEVATION
(FT.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-1586 At. 'TOMA TIC HA.\tMER) BLOWS/IT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
o
f
I
I
/10'
*
28
> > 50/5'
37
~o
50/6"
59
.
33
.
25
,..>.....................>......... ..............\iftSTitOluNGRECORD}//.. I
.. .- . ...---. . ,_.. ....... . ....... - -...... -,.,'--"
BORING NUMBER B- 5 "
DATE DRILLED October 19, 1991 I
I
PROJECT NUM BER 532-05627-01 I
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL I
PAGE 1 OF 2 DRAWN BY : J .NA. )
I .Ji....... . E.t\W.ENGINEERING..Mia,*i,FJorida I
SOFT 10 VERY HARD light gray LlMbS10Nc f-'---r-
wilh lraces of fine sand P=::;:
I'
I
I: . 45
I,
f.- l-
I
~
I
I~
I . 12
h---'-
SOFT lighl gray very porous LlMESfONE wilh ~
fine sand f=
t::::
-
p::
~ 4 19 I
t::::
::::::
f=
~
>---
E
t=:
p:::: 4 19
-
BORING TER1'dINATED AT 50 Fr.
I
I
I
i
i
I
DEPTH
(FT.)
DESCRIPTION
40.0
50.0
BORING reRMINATED AT SO.O FEEf
REMARKS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLANATION OF
SY~BOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(FT.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(Asn.t D-1586 AL"TOMATIC HA.'dMER) BLOWS/IT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
o
1< ." ... -..' ,. ',. I
.'. .. , . -, .
...'J'E:ST. BORlNGRECQRD
BORING NUMBER B. 5 l
DATE DRILLED October 19, 1991
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01 1
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TERMI~AL
[
PAGE 2 OF 2 DRAWN BY J.NA. i
,
1<. ~ .. LAWENGINEERING- Miami~ Florida I
DEPTH
(FT.)
0.0
0.5
DESCRIPTION
with pus roots
18.0
SOFf light gray very porous LIMESTONE with
fine sand
BORING TERMINAlED AT SO.O FFET
REM.ARXS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlANATION Of'
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(FT.)
o
Id
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-1586 AlrrOMATIC HA1"fMER) BLOWS/fT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 1 OF 2
..~
~,.
50/3"
*
so /6"
50/5'
50/0'
31
51
.
22
.
12
.
13
......---,....... '. --', .... .......... ...-....
...-.-'....'.-.-"......... " '.. -....... -'......
'fES'l' BORlNGRE(;ORI)...
B-6
October 19, 1991
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWN BY: J.NA.
'\
)
.'. ......... ........
..... ..- '. ..... .....
. -'.-,.-- ,...... .......... ....
LAWENGINEEtuNG+Mi~mi~FJorida
SOrT light gray very poroU$ UM~TONI::. with :cf
fine sand
VERY HARD to HARD light gray UMESfONE ==
== I
== I
,
== I
I
- >i>4 50/0.
== i
- I
== I
==
==
~
== 0 90
- I
SOFT light gray very porous LlMESfONE with ==
fine sand
:=
-
=
=
- .
= 18
-
=
=
=
-
=
-
=
- .
= 14
BO RJNG TERMINATED AT 50 FT.
DEPTH
(IT.)
DESCRIPTION
31.0
40.0
50.0
BORING TERMINATED AT so.o FEET
REMARKS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXP~"AnON OF
SYMBOLS AJ."ID ABBREVIA nONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(IT.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM 0-1586 AUTOMATIC HA.\fMER) BLOWS/IT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
o
I ... , ...,.,.,.""".."',....'..........................~..ll8WNGPCUiU)%> I
. .....".-.. --"--'--"" .. ....._",..... -." ,- .
BORING NUMBER B- 6 I
I
!
DATE DRILLED October 19, 1991
i
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01 i
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
PAGE 2 OF 2 DRAWN BY J.NA. )
I ~> tAW EN.:;INEEgING..MiamkFlorida i
!
DEPTH
(FT.)
0.0
DESCRIPTION
ark brown sandy I with grass roots
1.0 (TOPSOIL)
SOIT to VERY HARD light gray LIMESTONE
with traces of fine sand
BORING TERMINATED AT 40.0 PEEr
REMARKs:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLANATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-lS86 AUTOMATIC HA.'\1MER) BLOWS/IT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
ELEVATION
(FT.)
I. ppp
. 17
~
80
88
50/5'
.
.
+l
39
13
-*8
.........................
........................
........................
.... ....................
........... ......-......
.-....... .....-......,...
..................,..-. ....
...........;.;.:...:.:.,.:-:.;.:...:-..;.;.:-:.;.
.........P..........-_.. ....
..:~8Q!U~~.:.~~~m':~~~i::,::i
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 1 OF 2
'\
I
B-7
March 12, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWNBY ME
I....p.....p.. .................:.....?...iJt."'~GINE~IUN9~~fMiaml~'IOcid#?< I
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-1586 AlJTOMATIC HA\.fMER) BLOWS/Ff
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEPTH
(IT.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(IT.)
40.0
MEDIUM to VERytIARD light gray I----
LlMESI'ONE with traces or fine sand I,
~
I
I
I~
2 > >- 50/5'
~
1""--:-
I
i---
i---
I .
~ 35
BORING TERMINATED AT 40 FEET
f-
-
-
BORING TERMJNATED AT 40.0 FEEf
REMARKS:
I<HH ~1lJ:ffl~.~~iB.H , I
,
H' . .
.........
fBO RING NUM BE R B 7 "'\
-
I
DATE D RI LLE D M ar ch 12, 1992 1
!
P ROJ E CT NU M BE R 532-05627 -0 1 1
I
PROJ ECT MARA T H 0 N AI R PO RT TE R M I NAL :
PAG E 2 OF 2 D RAWN B Y M E i
)
I m. ....--....--......'.. ' .............. ..-.'.... ....,.- ,",'." J
.......,........'...,.....'..,..................-,.. ........-.......-.....-...;->....:...:<...;..,;.-. .~iamt.ftlJl-ida
~W~g~~kiNP-.I#(.
....-..,.....,-........
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLA...'\lATION OF
SYMBOLS A."TI ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
DEPTH
(IT.)
0.0
0.2
DESCRIPTION
ark brown fine SAN with grass roots
(TOPSOIL)
MEDIUM to VERY HARD light gray
LIMESTONE with traces or fine sand
20.0
.SOFf light gray LIMESTONE with fine sand
BORING 'IE.RMlNAlFD AT 40.0 FEET
REMARKS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlA"iATION OF
SYMBOLS A:-'U ABBREVlATIO:-;S USED ABOVE
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-lS86 AUTOMATIC HA\fMER) BLOWS/Ff
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
ELEVATION
(IT.)
38
~
> > 50/5'
62
.
24
30
29
39
20
27
.
\<>......>>.. '..TESTBOIUNG.UCORfJi'
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 1 OF 2
.H\>l
B-8
March 13, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMlNAL
DRAWN BY: ME
1.<Ii~"'~9INEERlNG, Inc~S~bllDi;Fili-icfa> I
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASfM D-1586 AlJfOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWS/fT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEPTH
(IT.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(IT.)
40.0
SOfT light gray LIMESTONe with fine sand ==--
=
:r:::
VERY HARD light gray LIMESTONE ==
.,..-
~
I, . > >l 50/3"
~ ~
i::.::
L--
SOfT light gray LIMESTONE with fine sand ~.
~
-
==
=
::: . 15
---'-
BORING TERM.lNATED AT 40 FEET
-
~
-
BORING 'mRMINA'fFD AT 40.0 PFEr
REMARKS:
1<:~.oiUNG:UOOlU)
. .
. . . .
32.0
36.0
r BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 2 OF 2
B-8
March 13, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWNBY ME
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLANATION OF
SYMBOLS A..'-U ABBREV1ATIO;\lS USED ABOVE
I :::: ..dl..?~W~q'NEE!!~~~f1jWt.ijl~~~~i~
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(AS"Thf D-1586 AlITOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWS/FT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEPTH
(FT.)
0.0
0.6
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(FT.)
9.0
Dark gray silty fine sand with grass roolS .,;.:""';';. I ~
j\(TOPSOIL) r ~ . 2
VERY LOOSE black organic silty fine SAND ~
VERY DENSE fine SAJl,l) and LIMESTONE -
fragments - > >4
- 50/3"
-
-
LOOSE to VERY LOOSE brown fine SAND with - II
-
limestone fragments .- ~ -
- ~ , 6
-
-
-
-
- .
- . 3
- I
-
-
- I..
-
VERY HARD to HARD light gray LIMESTONE ~ > >4 50/2"
with traces of fine sand ~
I ~
I
-
==
-
-
==
- . 65
-
- ~
==
===
SOFT light gray L1MESTOI'l"E with fine sand ~
I--
-
t= . 16
= ~
-
~ ~
~.
==
~
h= . 1~
f-'- ~
t5
~
~
I--
==
~
=: . ~ I
,
BORING TERMINATED AT 40.0 FEEf
REMARKS:
I
. ...........<.f.,:.~.BOlUNGUCOluji.../..........
2.0
4.0
17.0
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 1 OF 2
B-9
March 13, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWN BY M.E.
"
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlA.'1ATION OF
SY~BOLS AJ'I,l) ABBREVlA TIONS USED ABOVE
I.~l ~~~g(~~~ij9~t11d'fMiaoJ~ FlOrida
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASI'M 0-1586 AUTOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWS/Fr
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEPTH
(Fr.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(Fr.)
<W.O
SOFT light gray LlMESfONE with fine sand ...:.....,...
.,.-.L.
::::r
...:........-
T
MEDIUM to MODERATELY HARD light gray ==
LlMESfONE with traces of fine sand ~
~ . 42
-
1==
~
1-
-
-
===
-'---.-
....--L
:;:= . 46
BORING TERMINATED AT <W FEET
-
I-
BORING mRMlNATFD AT 40.0 FEEI'
REMARKS:
1::...:....;...:.::..~;::::...I_I::I.li:::,.::~:.:...i.!.!::~.::i.:.\.!:~..i.....HI
32.0
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PA~E 2 OF 2
B-9
March 13, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWN BY : M.E.
. SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLA..'lATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
I .... . ... .................-.
:.....:..........:.:.....:.
:......~. n:: :...........?...~... ...}:........:.....~..:.. :~.~I':.JNj~jff.;~~;.B:M..~~~{
. ~ ,..:.:...;...:.:.:.::.:.:.:.;.:.:.:.:.;.:.:.;...;.....:-:........;...:-:.;.;.......;.....:....'...........'..-....
DEPTH
(FT.)
0.0
0.2
DESCRIPTION
with grass roots
6.0
SOFT to MODERATELY HARD light gray
LIMESTONE with traces of fine sand
BORING 1"ERMINATED AT 45.0 FEHf
REMARKS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPIAl'.ATION OF
SYMBOLS A;'ID ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(FT.)
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM 0-1586 AUTOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWS/FT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
9
~
.
14
21
42
42
.
45
22
28
56
[ ,..:...'.....,.,: ".,.'i::!.:HiI()IUNG:uqq~:":":::'::'::::::f::'::...." .... u,\\!
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 1 OF ~
B-10
March 12,1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWN BY: ME
1......:....}..#iw~ql~El9.l{Gfbac.4~~r.uiij~cb-<. I
DEPTH
(FT.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(FT.)
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-1586 AlJfOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWS/Fr
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
31.0
SOFr to HA!W lipt gray I ~
LIMESTONE with traces of fine sand -.:...-
SOFr light gray LIMESTONE and fine SAND b: .....
~
h-'-
t;::: ....
f'-
~
t: 4
t:: c. 19
t= >-
fl-
ho-
~
i-
~
h0-
t:
fj: ....
::: .
::: .... - WOH
'-
-
'-
~
:::
j:1..
l-
-'-
j:
=... . 18
"-
BORING TERMINATED AT 45 FEET
>-
BORING 'mRMINAllID AT 45.0 PEEr
REMARKS:
,..< ............ ......................:i:~.'Q~q.QqQ~.....:..:..........
45.0
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 2 OF 2
B-lO
March 12, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWN BY: ME.
\
j
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLANATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIOr-;S USED ABOVE
1<...< .(Wi "yy.lfl~~~I.tri:<;~~fM;~~lI6ri..<. I
DEPTH
(IT.)
0.0
0.2
DESCRIPTION
with grass roots
16.5
SOfT light gray LlMESTOr-."E with fine sand
BORING TERMINATED AT 40.0 FF1IT
RENAIUtS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPlANATION OF
SY\fBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-1S86 AUTOMATIC HA1\fMER) BLOWS/FT
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
ELEVATION
(IT.)
> > so/.I,'
~
30
69
SO/6"
.
36
.
33
.
24
.
17
.
1.1,
.... ..... "....
....H................
...-..................
........-.............
....................-.
.......................
......~ ..............
...... .................
.. ...........
.....:.,.::.:.\:~iUSG:u&p::::::L..:.:.)::.:::\:::.:::::.:.:'
.. I
I.H" .....
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 1 OF 2
B-11
March 12, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORTTERMDlAL
DRAWN BY: ME
I..,............:......,...:............,...:......:....:.:..................................'...........,....................................................... ..............:...........'....:..........'. ...:......:...':..i.'.:.........:........':..":...:...::..:,..:.".:...""'.::...::...:....::....:'. .... .......... ....... ............... ............ ..... . ...
. a; ~i.flljNi~ijI,~<.i~:~t~i~m~f!t~cIa{.
o
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASfM D-1586 AlITOMATIC HA'dMER) BLOWS/Fr
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
DEYfH
(FT.)
DESCRIYfION
ELEVATION
(FT.)
40.0
SOFT light gray NE with fine sand -
............:
~..
MEDIUM light gray LIMESTONE with traces of ~
fine sand I
1-
:= . 37
:=
~
==
-.....
..,..--'-
-'-----
I==-
I . 34
h---"-
BORING TERMINATED AT 40 FEET
-
-
-
I
BORING TERMINATm AT 40.0 PEIIT
REMARKS:
I..
. . ... . . ................................................~....~.
. . . ............m~~MiCtiJtD
...-.....-._.........
.....-..........-.,.
.;.:.:.; -: .:.'.: -..~ ':-:':-:'.':' -':
32.0
;:;::;:;:;:;;::::::::::;::::::::;:;:::;::::...::....:.
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 2 OF 2
B-ll
March 12, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWNBY:ME.
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLANATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
1///.....<........ .....>.~\1t"i@'~~!J~lfJl..+~'~~f~~.
DEPTH
(Fr.)
DESCRIPTION
ELEVATION
(Fr.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-lS86 AUTOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWS/Fr
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
o
SOFT to M HARD light gray 5
LIMESTONE with traces 0( fine sand
~
2 I
-
~ . 15
== -
-
~
::=
...........,...
---:...
~
2 . 72
BORING TERMINATED AT 40 FEET
,...
r-
r-
40.0
BORING T'ERMlNATED AT 40.0 PEEr
REMAlUtS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLANATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVlATIONS USED ABOVE
\H .
....',........- -.. I
...........,........,..
:::::::~:::: ;:: :::: ::: ::::::::::;:;.:<:':" .
...................................
,;:?::\}>~{<:::}:::::"" .
..n:::~:::::;:::;.:;:::i!:!~iORlN(;UCom::;:::;;::::.
... : ::..;.....;::;: ..... ...'...'.... ...
BORING NUMBER
DATE DRILLED
PROJECT NUMBER
PROJECT
PAGE 2 OF 2
B-12
March 13, 1992
532-05627-01
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
DRAWN BY: ME
li?:..>..::..II.~(;I~~jl1Bef~~?M~~~~ltfitii I
DEPTH
(IT.)
0.0
0.2
DESCRIPTION
12.0
SOFf light gray LIMESTONE with fine sand
25.0
MEDIUM light gray LIMESTONE with traces of
fine sand
BORING T'ERMlNATED AT 40.0 FEET
REMARJCS:
SEE KEY SHEEr FOR EXPlANATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(IT.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASfM 0-1586 AUTOMATIC HAMMER) BLOWSjFf
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
o
> > 90/8"
71
~
81
sow
42
22
.
15
20
.
35
IH :rt:m::~ifBST~~.IUNG;DOOlm},:rr , , I
, , .. 'H .. .. .:.:.;.:.;.:.:.:.:::.
, , , , H , :.;.:.;.;.;.;.;.;.:' , , , , , , , H'
..... .... ...... ...... ..... .
BORING NUMBE R B- 12
DATE D RILLE D Mar ch 13, 1992
P ROJ E CT NU M B E R 532-05627-0 1
PROJE CT MARATH 0 N AI R PO RT TE R ML1\lAL
PAG E 1 OF 2 0 RAWN B y M E
I):.. i.... ~i.~9.lii~lqtf~B~~ia~ff"~ J
\~ark gray silty Hne MNU wilh grass roots r f:::
(TOPSOIL) h- > >4 50/3"
VERY HARD II) SOFT UMESTONE wilh fine ~
sand
~ > >~ 50/2"
~ *
...........
5 4 ~9
.......,.. I-
.......;..
==
== . 32
=
==
= .
5: 51
=
=
""'---
~ I
=::
=:: It 60
=::
-
-
=::
=
==
==
-
= . 37
-
-
-
-
=::
=::
-
==
l.-
=::
- .
== 23
-
BORING TERl'''INATED AT 25 FT.
I
I
I
.
DEPTH
(IT.)
0.0
0.2
DESCRIPTION
25.0
BORING TERMINATED AT 25.0 FEHT
REMAlUtS:
SEE KEY SHEET FOR EXPLA..'lATION OF
SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED ABOVE
ELEVATION
(FT.)
. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST
(ASTM D-1586 AUTOMATIC HA.\fMER) BLOWS/Ff
10 20 30 40 60 80 100
o
I............... . . . . :: ...---.-...;..'.-...-,.....---.-'..-' ','-'.,",--', ._'_.,..........-,..'.-_....-....,........-..........-:.: I
"""-,,,.- ..,._,--- ."',. ...-....._-.... "," "''',',-'
.......'l'ESTiijptuNGig~lt1>....
BORING NUMBER B- 1 3 I
DATE DRILLED October 20, 1991 i
PROJECT NUMBER 532-05627-01 J
PROJECT MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
PAGE 1 OF 1 DRAWN BY : J .NA.
,. 1i../ L.4:WENGINtiRING -,MiarnitF1()l'icJa .. I
AUGER BORINGS RECORD
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
VACA KEY, FLORIDA
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Date Perfonned: October 20 to 21, 1991
AUGER BORING
NUMBER
DEPTH
(Feet)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
A8-1 0.0 - 1.0 Asphalt 2-inches L1MEROCK BASE 1Q-inches
1.0 - 2.0 Brown slightly silty fine SAND with Iimerock fragments
2.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE
1 GWL 2: 3'-8" @ Too3
A.B.T.
A8-2 0.0 - 1.0 Asphalt 2-inches L1MEROCK BASE 1Q-inches
1.0 - 2.0 Brown silty fine SAND
2.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE
A.B.T. GWL: 4'-1" @ TOO
A8-3 0.0 - 1.5 Black organic slightly silty fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL)
1.5 - 5.0 Tan LIMESTONE
A.B.T. GWL: 3'-6" @ TOO
AB-4 0.0- 2.0 Dark brown fine SAND with grass roots (TOPSOIL) 2-inches.
Asphalt one-inch and L1MEROCK BASE
2.0 - 3.0 Tan silty fine SAND with traces of limestone
3.0- 5.0 Tan LIMESTONE
A.B.T. GWL: 3'- 5" @ TOO
AB-5 0.0 - 0.5 Dark gray organic stained find SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
0.5 - 2.0 Dark brown silty fine SAND with limestone fragments.
2.0 - 5.0 Tan LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 5" @ TOO
AUGER BORINGS RECORD
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
VACA KEY, FLORIDA
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627~1
Date Perfonned: October 20 to 21, 1991
AUGER BORING
NUMBER
DEPTH
(Feet)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
~ 0.0 - 1.0 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.0 - 1.5 Black organic stained silty fine SAND with limestone fragments.
1.5 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 4" @ TOO
A8-7 0.0 - 1.5 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.5 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 3" @ TOO
A8-8 0.0 - 1.5 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.5 - 2.0 Tan slightly silty fine SAND with Iimerock.
2.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 6" @ TOO
A8-9 0.0 - 1.0 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.0 - 1.5 Black organic stained slightly silty fine SAND with Iimerock.
1.5 - 3.0 Brown silty fine SAND.
3.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 4' - 2" @ TOO
A8-10 0.0 - 1.5 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.5 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 6" @ TOO
AUGER BORINGS RECORD
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
VACA KEY, FLORIDA
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627~1
Date Perfonned: October 20 to 21, 1991
AUGER BORING
NUMBER
DEPTH
(Feet)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
AB-11 0.0 - 0.5 Black organic silty fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
0.5 - 1.0 Tan silty fine SAND.
1.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' @ TOO
AB-12 0.0 - 1.0 Black organic stained silty fine SAND (TOPSOIL).
1.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 2' - 5" @ TOO
AB-13 0.0 - 0.5 Black organic fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
0.5 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 2' - 9" @ TOO
AB-14 0.0 - 1.0 Black organic silty fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
1.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 2' - a" @ TOO
AB-15 0.0 - 1.3 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.3 - 2.0 Dark gray silty fine SAND with Iimerock.
2.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 9" @ TOO
AUGER BORINGS RECORD
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
VACA KEY, FLORIDA
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Date Performed: October 20 to 21, 1991
AUGER BORING
NUMBER
DEPTH
(Feet)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
A8-16 0.0 - 1.5 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.5 - 2.0 Black organic stained slightly silty fine SAND with Iimerock.
2.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 5" @ TOO
AB-17 0.0 - 2.0 Black organic stained slightly silty fine SAND with IImerock.
2.0 - 4.0 Brown slightly silty fine SAND with limestone fragments.
4.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 2' - 11"@ TOO
AB-18 0.0 - 0.4 Black organic silty fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
0.4 - 0.6 Dark gray organic stained silty fine SAND with roots.
0.6 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 3" @ TOO
A8-19 0.0 - 0.6 Black organic silty fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
0.6 - 1.5 Tan organic silty fine SAND with Iimerock.
1.5 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 2' - 9" @ TOD
A8-20 0.0 - 1.0 Brown silty fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
1.0 - 3.0 Brown silty fine SAND with limestone fragments.
3.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 8" @ TOO
AUGER BORINGS RECORD.
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
VACA KEY, FLORIDA
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Date Performed: October 20 to 21, 1991
AUGER BORING
NUMBER
DEPTH
(Feet)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
AB-21 0.0 - 1.0 Black organic SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
1.0 - 3.0 Brown slightly silty fine SAND.
3.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' -1" @TOD
AB-22 0.0 - 1.5 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.5 - 2.0 Brown silty fine SAND.
2.0- 5.0 Brown LIMESTONE and SAND.
A.B.T. GWL: 3' - 8" @ TOO
AB-23 0.0 - 1.5 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.5 - 2.5 Tan silty fine SAND and LIMESTONE.
2.5 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 4' -1"@TOD
AB-24 0.0 - 1.6 L1MEROCK FILL.
1.6 - 2.0 Brown silty fine SAND with Iimerock.
2.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 4' @ TOO
(1) A.B.T. - Auger Boring Terminated
(2) GWL - Groundwater Level
(3) TOO - Time of Drilling
AUGER BORINGS RECORD
MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
VACA KEY, FLORIDA
Law Engineering Job No. 532~7-o1
Date Performed: March 12,1992
AUGER BORING
NUMBER
DEPTH
(Feet)
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
A8-25 0.0 - 0.5 Dark brown fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
0.5 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: 2' - 9" @ TOO
A8-26 0.0 - 1.0 Black organic stained fine SAND with roots
(TOPSOIL).
1.0 - 5.0 Light gray LIMESTONE.
A.B.T. GWL: l' - 3"@TOD
... -8.20
. o.
8 0.5
... 1.0
"" 1.5
... 2.0
.
! 2.5
~ 3.0
... 3.5
""
&. 4.0
.. 4.5
i
Q 5.0
... -1.0
. 0.0
8 0.5
... 1.0
"" 1.5
... 2.0
.
! 2.5
~ 3.0
... 3.5
""
&. 4.0
.. 4.5
1 5.0
o.fhlc:t ion (Inches)
0.00 0.20 0.40
0.60
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,', . . . . . . . . ". . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . .. ......... ........
. . .
.' .
............................#................... ........ ........
. . . .
. .
.................-............................ ........ ........
. . .
. .
. .,
.................-............ .............. ......... ........
. ..
. .,
. .
.................-........................... ........ ........
. ..
. .
.................-........................... ........ ........
. ..
. .,
SIZE: 18 INCHES AUGERCAST PILE
AXIAL LOAD: 150 KIPS.
LATERAL LOAD: 14 KIPS.
t1o...ant (I nch-Pounds) (1000000'.)
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0
....... ............................
........,......... ........#...................
. .,
. .'
........#........ ........#...................
. .,
. . . . . . . . ". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . . .
. .'
. .
. .,
................. ...........................
. .'
. ..
. .
. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. ........ ~. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .
. .
.................. ............................
. .'
. .,
Soi 1
"" -2.0
. 0.0
8 0.5
... 1.0
... 1.5
"" 2.0
.
1 a.5
g 3.0
.. 3.5
...
&. 4.0
.. 4.5
~
. 5.0
Q
""
.
8
...
...
""
.
1
~
..
...
&.
..
~
.
Q
-6.0
0.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
a.o
a.5
3.0
3.5
4.0 ...... ....
4.5
5.0
Sh..r<Pounds>
-4.0 -2.0
2.0
SIZE: 18 AUGERCAST PILE
AXIAL LOAD: 150 KIPS.
LATERAL LOAD: 14 KIPS.
Reaction <Pounds/Inch> <1000's>
-1.0 0.0 1.0 2.0
" . .
. .. ............. ,', . . . . . . . . _. . . . . . . . . ~ . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . .
. . . , . .
. "
~. ....... ~ . . . . . . . . ,.. . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . . .
. . .
.......................................
. .
........ ........- ............... ..............................
. .
. .
lATERAL PILE CAPACITY;
.,~:~. ;-~~.~:.r:"':":.~,,;.:t~:/,:./:<<o;:,;
PROJECT NUMBER: S3:~-41
PROJECT NAME: MARATHON AIRPORT TERMINAL
PROJ. LOCAnON : VACA KEY, n.oRlDA
DRAWN BY: MD OfI!CXllD BY: tU!.S.
DOUBLE RING INFILmATION TEST (0-1)
AT AUGER BORING AB-5
Vaca Key, Florida
Law Engineering Job No. 532-05627-01
Location:
Date Performed:
Test Depth:
Test Procedures:
Require Test Duration:
See Field Exploration Plan
10/18/91
Ground Surface
In general accordance with ASTM 0-3385
6 hours
Elapsed Time
(minutes:seconds)
Infiltration per
time oeriod (inches)
Infiltration Rate
(inches/hours)
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
1.94
2.03
1.75
1.94
1.81
1.81
1.88
1.81
1.81
1.88
1.88
1.88
3.97
3.69
3.63
3.69
3.69
3.75
Infiltration rate: 3.75 inches per hour
AUGER BORING DATA (A8-5)
Depth (inches) (*)
From - To
0.0 - 0.5
0.5 - 2.0
2.0 - 5.0
Dark gray organic stained fine SAND with roots (TOPSOIL).
Dark brown silty fine SAND with limestone fragments.
Tan LIMESTONE.
A.B.T.
G.W.L: Encountered 3' - 5" @ TOO
(*) Depth measured from the surface on which the test has been performed.
Note:
A.B.T. Auger Boring Terminated
G.W.L. Ground Water Level
T.O.D Time of Drilling
KEY CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS
CORRELATION OF PENETRATION RESISTANCE
WITH
I ROCK HARDNESS DESCRIPTION RELATIVE DENSITY AND CONSISTENCY
CONE STANDARD
I PENETRATION PENETRATION
TEST TEST RELATIVE
kg/cm2 blows/It. DENSITY
I SOFT Rock core cr umbles when handled 0.16 0.4 Very Loose
17.40 5.10 Loose
MEDIUM Can break core with your hands SANDS 41.80 11 - 20 Firm
81 - 120 21.30 Very F,rm
MODERATELY Thin edges of ,ock core can be Over 120 31.50 Dense
HARD broken with fingers
CONSISTENCY
0-3 0.2 Very Solt
HARD Th in edges of rock core cannot be
I broken with fingers 4.9 3 - 4 Soft
SILTS 10.17 5.8 Firm
AND
VERY HARD Rock core rings when struck with CLAYS 18.31 9.15 Stiff
I a hammer (cherts)
32 - 60 16.30 Very Stiff
Over 60 31.50 Hard
SYMBOLS
UD
100/2"
NX.4".6"
65%
RQD
-===-
.
I ...
UC
I ST
55
ER
I
Undisturbed sample fUD) recovered
Number of blows fl001 to d,ive the spoon or cone a number of inches 12")
Core barrel sizes which obtain cores 2 l/S", 3 7/S" and 5 7/S" d'ameter respectively
Percentage 1651 of rock core and soil sample recovered
Rock Quality Designation. percent of rock core 4 or more inches long
Water table at lust 24 hours after drilling
Water table one hour or less after drilling
Loss of drilling fluid
Unconfined Campression Test performed, includes strength and Young's modulus
Split Tansion Test performed, Includes tenstle strength
Split Spoon Sample
E rrat ic Cane Penevat ion
MODIFIERS
APPROXIMATE
FINES CONTENT
MODIFIERS
5% to 12%
12% to 30%
30% to 50%
Slighlly silty 0' slightly clayey
Si I ty 0 r clayey
Very sil,'Y Or very clayey
I
The modifiers provide our estimate of the amount of fines ISllt 0' clay size particles) ,n the soil sample.
FIELD PROCEDURES
Soil Test Bortngs - The soil test borings were made in general accordance with ASTM 0-1586.
"Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils." The borings were initially advanced byaugering. A
rotary drilling process was subsequently used and bentonite drilling fluid was circulated in the boreholes
to stabilize the sides and flush the cuttings. At regular intervals. the drilling tools were removed and soil
and rock samples were obtained with a standard 1.4 inch I.D., 2.0 inch O.D., split-tube sampler. The
sampler was first seated six inches and then driven and additional foot with blows of a 140 pound hammer
falling 30 inches. The number of hammer blows required to drive the sampler the final foot is designated
the "Penetration Resistance.. The penetration resistance. when properly interpreted. is an index to the soil
or rock strength and density. Following drilling, the bore holes were filled. Representative portions of
the soil or rock samples. obtained from the sampler. were placed in glass jars and transported to our
laboratory. The samples were then examined by an engineer in order to verify the field classifICation.
Auger Bortnas - Auger borings were advanced mechanically by a continuous flight auger
attached to the drill rig. The soils encountered were identified. in the field from cuttings brought to the
surface by the augering process. Representative soil samples were placed in glass jars and transported
to our laboratory where they were examined by an engineer in order to verify the field classifICations. Soil
relative densities were estimated from the relative difficulty of the augering process.
A P PEN 0 I X -B-
Law Engineering
I
I ~
I 0
z
I w
~
a:I
<:
I I l-
I I
c:
W
a:::I ~
:E 0
I
::;) "
Z N
'"
a:I tn
0
0 I
-, N
l"'l
tn
UJ .k S3NI::l " ~ " " N ~ ,.,
N ~ ~ N ~ ~
N
en
Z .k ON't'S
<
c:
" ~. '3^'t'~D -l
<
z
I -
~<
.:l:)d '.1.HDI3M .1.INn Al:IO _0
~-
~ ~
0
;--l
X~
sD lll^'fl:lD :)1.:l1:l3dS 0
:.. ~
::::>
-:.J
<'-'
.1. . 0 'NOI.1.INDI NO N ~ Z
SSO, :)IN't'Dl:IO ..:t N ;2 ,
;:; III
.1.' Ml:I I <: ()
. :::: CO
OI.1.'fl:! A.l.I:)I.1.S'f'd t:l3.l.'tM ~>
.k'ld I
X30NI lll:)I.LSYld
-
~.' 'd U
.1.IWI' :l1.1.SY1d Z
-
~.' " rS <
.1.IWn omon Z 0
- a:
e;'. . M . .1.N3.LNO:) I = 0
III -J
l:I3.1.'fM ''t'l:In.L'tN III u..
Z ~
(;
Ol.HSVV Z ~
III
U"\ N I U"\ U"\ ~
N ....: I '" N ....: c
".1..:/' H.1.d30 I U"\ .... , I "'"
~ I 0 I U"\ 0 I
0 ...; ...; 0
'ON 3'dW'tS N ...; N N ,.., ~ ...; I
" ='
N ,.., U"\ ..0 ~ ...; ...;
'ON !)Nll:IOa I I I I I I .).,
::Q :Q ::Q ::Q ::Q :Q
< < < < < < ;;:
<
~
<
C
~
tI
U
~
:>
c
C
r
<
c
C
c
<
L.
C
:>
c
c
.,
It
.,
It
c..
LAW ENGINEERING
Qeorecnt"'IC3.1 ~r""rrO"'''''~rTal ~ ';'::"'<;~'_H':':_(~(' .....aler al~ .:.-:r3,-, .3r'3
585 N N '61 s: 3-:-'1;:'0"-
MIAMI ~!..CRIDA 33169
(305) 944.9266
REPORT OF
CBR & <X1\IPACTIOO TES1'
Date: 11-05-91
Client: REYNJLDS. SVI!1H ..-\l.\[) r'iILLS, INC.
Lab. .'in, 532-05627-01
Project: :\IARATI-rn ..\IRR:Rr TER\'mill
z
o
-
to-
e:(
Q:
to-
I.&J
Z
I.&J
Q.
o
to-
e:(
Q: 20
ai
l..J
I.L.
u 116
Q.
....-
Z
C)
-
I.&J
~ 114
....
Z
:;:)
>-
a: 112
C
200
Max. c:.S.R. = "ill
100
80
60
40
I I '
, I
1'1 "
I' ,
I I ,
: I I I
, I I
; ;
10
I ;.
i '
; i I I i
,I I
. , '!.. '1'1 I I. I I I
AASHTO T-I80
, Density 115.9 p ct
, Max.
I Opt. Moisture 10.1 0/.
I
,
, I
, ,
,
. ,
,
I ,
,
I ' .1
, , .
, ,
, .
, , ' .
,
. , ,
, ' '
I , ,
, . , ' ,
,
4 8 10 I .; :~ l'
0 .L., r
LAj ~II ENGINE; RING I~ /
MOISTURE CONTE NT - % ~ ~'~JV
I
....\'~r"... 'r'\
LAW ENGINEERING
;1C!tOfeC:"'lnICal ~"'''lrO'''~l!''lal,~ :orS:rUC:IOf1 ....d{~rlals:Jr<;....~-3Ir.'i
585 ,~w '61 S! 3TRE'O"-
MIAMI. F'LORIDA 33169
(305) 944-9256
REPORT OF
CBR & CDVIPACTICN TEST
Client: RFIIDIL'S, S'vIIlli .-\l.'ID HILLS, IOC.
Project: "~nm AIRKRI' 'I'ERVIINAL
Date:
11-05-91
L.lb. :\'0. 532-05627-01
200
Max. C.S.R.~ 31
t 'I I
, I
z
o
-
to-
e:(
Q:
to-
I.&J
2
I.&J
Q.
60
100
80
40
o
.....
e:(
cr: 20
ai
tJ
, ,
10
, ' .
I
, I ,
I '
. ,
1 I;'
, Ii:
I I I
i I I J
11 :. J !
~ !
I.L.
u 116
Q.
t-='
z
<.=)
-
I.&J 114
~
to-
Z
:;:)
>- 112
Q:
0
, _, I , I I I I I II I
: AASHTO T-I~O 114 8
Max. DenSIty . pet
Opt. Moi sture 10 2 0/.
,
,
,
, ,
,
,
,
,
, I ,
, I
I
I
,
, ,
,
,
,
,
, i I ;2 I 14 ~
/ I
4 6 8 10 ; i
,
LAlW ENGI,EEaING
J~ ~~ v[t
J, ~
)7
MOISTURE CONTENT- %
....... \" ",",TT"'" ,~
LAW ENGINEERING
~eora~~""lcal -:l"'vlronl'T'l~'""al .:!. .:..:,....i:'I..c:tor ~a:'~.,"",; ;:Jf"S....,.ir.S
E
585 N 'N '61 sr S-:-FlEE-
MIAMI =LCRIDA 33'69
(305) 944-92'56
REPORT OF LBR & cnvlPACTlrn TEST
:Iient: Rt:.l'N)LDS, 5.\1I'IH..w:> HILLS, IN<:.
Date: 11-02-91
Lab. :\0. 532-05627-01
D- t :V~ AIRR:RI' 1'ERVIINAL
':Tojec :
z
o
....
~
a:
....
I.&J
Z
I.&J
Q.
o
to-
~
a: 20
ai
-J
1.a..
U
Q.
...:
Z
C)
-
~
~
....
-
z
::>
>-
a:
:)
200
Max.L.8.R.= 115
100
SO
60
40
10
124
, I
I:
, I
,. i I
I' '
: I
122
. , T-/SO"I" III
T , AASHTO
, I Max. Density 122.9 pcf
Opt. Moisture Q n 0/.
,
,
, ,
, , , I I I
,
,
, ,
, I , I
,
,
i
I , T
, T
,-.,.-
, T ...
, .'
f
120
118
4
10 I I 12 ! / 14 /(
I I. / .
LAW tN,' GINEERI,~G ( ,'/
0~ ;1~\i;f
6
3
MOISTURE CONTENT- %
'-'
C::.l'. 'Df t:" 'n \0-"
T11
LAW ENGINEERING
..~--::s:.
'A, ,
~' -
~eoreC~f"'\'C3t ~"""'IUJf"f'T'~,.tat ~ ;crSJruc::ol'"l "alerl.3IS:r.;rSl.. :.3.'-:;
565 .~N '61 sr 5 -:-RE'O-
MIAMI ::!..ORIDA 33169
(305) 944-9266
REPORT OF
I.BR & Ol.~ACTICN TEST
Client:
REYNJLDS, S\IIlli AND HI LLS , INC.
Date:
11-02-91
Project:
:\':A..lAIKN AIRFCRI '!EmilNAL
LJb. ....0.
532-05627-01
200
Max. L.8.R.=, 115
60
"
z
o
to-
e:(
Q:
to-
I.&J
Z
I.&J
Q.
100
SO
40
o
....
e:(
Q: 20
ai
....J
I I
10
1 I I
I I
I I I
,I I
I I I
, I
12
6 ' I .1 I I I II I
, AASHTO T-/aO
, I Max. Density 125.1 pet
,'"' Opt. Moisture 9.1 0/.
,
,
, , "
, ,
; ,
I
, -,-
, ,
, , ,
, I
, , I
" , ,
0 , ,
,
I
I , ,
;
, ,
, I
I.L.
u 12
Q.
..:
Z
C)
-
I.&J
~ 12
to-
Z
:;:)
>-
a: 12
0
4
6
8
10 I I! 12 I / 14 {{
L1J/ ENGINEER\.r~G . (.
+rr,-- r,. V~ "I
I~'
MOISTURE CONTENT- %
<;;,~i\lPT:= 'r .\B-111
LAW ENGINEERING
~eorec"'''''cal ~""vl~o"''''''e/''!ral ~ ::.r'3:....c: ~r ~d.I~',d.3 ::::r'..;__ ...1. ~
5dS N N '61 Sl S-:-~E:'"
'v1IAMI ~LORIDA 331E'l9
(305) 944-9266
REPORT OF LBR &. cnvlPA.rT'TrN ~ST
Client:
RE'YNJLDS, S'vII'IH AND HI LLS. INC .
Project:
:'vlARAlH:N Al RR:Rr TER\'IlNAL
Date: 11-02-91
Lan. 'in. 532-05627-01
200
Max.L.8.R.= 70
I .
I I;
z
o
....
<t
a:
....
I.&J
Z
I.&J
Q.
60
100
SO
40
o
....
<t
a: 20
ai
..J
, , '
I ! ~
, ,
I
I ,
, I
i ' .
, I I
10
Ii
I.L.
u 118
Q.
....-
~
C)
-
I.&J 116
~
....
-
Z
:;:)
>- 114
a:
a
AASHTO T'-ISO II , I I I I I
, Max. Density 116.9 pet
, 10.2
I Opt. Moisture 0/.
I
,
;
,
,
I
,
,
I i , ,
I , ,
I
, , ,
I .
I ;
I , , -.
, , , ,
,
;
'.
I :
4
6
8
10/ i; 12 i / 14 "//
~Q:~;Z;E;~ ~
./
MOISTURE CONTENT- %
SA'\1PL2 ~. :\B-14
6546 Pembroke Road
Miramar. Florida 33023
Broward: (305) 989-0928 Dade: (305) 620-4440
FAX (305) 985-9748
~~:'E~,:-r-
~r.~;: ENe;: t'iEER I ~'.J(.]
585 ~.N. lS~ 3TREET
:-1 I ..~..l~~: ~ FLc\r;~ I I>..~ :321-68
=lA--=-E: ~~I~';I:E:~~~~,~:::. .:
L:Ar:E 3~~.>~EjL2=;:
,:;'.t-'l:;:' :".2:
,....---~......."._".,.......-
.K'::\...t.l. v ~L':
.. -', f""'-' ,-, '!
..l.\.',' ..;,;,.,:,/ .:-I.J..
~.A~rPL2=.
3'1:
CL:ZNT
.:~.11F~.2: I'E~-:',I;3rlAT::.~~~: l"lARP..::1I=.t~ ..~=:~:;'c:~~
TER~::r-;A:'"
LAE(iRA~ ~'FY ~l:'
-:11 _l'.':'-
REPORT
OF
ANALYSIS
PARAMETERS
B-7
UNITS
METHOD
LIMIT OF
DETECTION
DATE OF
ANALYSIS
",... .,
"_ ~-: ..L i=';' r ~ Ct e
.J..'1127
mg/.L
1J.ni 1:5
mg/ =-
\)hrn5/-crr~
EPA
EPi'-_
EPA
;32~\ :~,
:'5i)
1 ,-,
'"
J) .
'j;,f-!
.31J.1 f=j. t e.3
7 :::U
1':
r,-.. ~
~, / I
-";"','
:~,:5 4
1 -,
:.~es lE;~ i'1 i ~y
2St)
EPA
'1 -/-\
~.....'~ ...
':' ..i
:r..~
5. ~~... ": '1 ~
~na~Y2~5 was f)~~~i)rmed
aCCQrca~(:e w~:h E.P.A.'1
A.:3. -=-. t':. ,
,~:anda.rd ~'1et::o(is CT ;Jt~her' aI>prov~d me:'~'l,:;d~'.
=-.-3..-.r..'C)r-,::t-::(~t~y : 6:~" -:,IHR~~ #r3i:.ll: ~ 2-8;:,':",~e,..
~eSI~e:'~~~::y 51~~~it~ed,
u ~~~. Q.~-
~;::, ;~::l,.: ~ :
:' ~ ::."' ~:~ (:..: -.... ;:~ f'
- - ,
<.I:' \,/f.'-e:-'..::::."":.:" :":lc:,
:: =-O~. ide.
.\..;. ,
":":Tl
riD 1'='\ .~ r::J \1\\ :-r::J. D\
r I,.... ,;, . I" . II :' 1 1.
:\ i: : 1'_ i I ~ ~...':_"._'_~ j \
II L...J.._ _.__0- -. ,
i ti I: :
: ,- ~ t :\ :.~ ~~. ~:--'~., ;:!:
i ,,' U4,,\;i v - .'J"'_ ,'I
I I" 1 ,
i . , . ~'- .
\',' '-,-"-"-~J
UU-Cj -':./~S;..J ~ w~
,----------------------------
\4onroe. SC1"la...mOur9. N. Blllerlca. Whippany, Ciiry, :sse. ";l"ir'l~ ~-
Cor "eC:~lcuT "01$ Yassachusens New ,jersey 'onh CarOi,na Jer!"'"O"f
203.26' ..1458 7Ca. -:5.0-:'.10 6' ~2-2S212 20 1 -428.8: a 1 .'9.677,C<:90 5o:2.a7a.5' :;c
LABORATORY PROCEDURES
Percent FInes Content - In this test. the sample is dried and then washed over a No. 200 mesh
sieve. The percentage of soil by weight passing the sieve is the percentage of fines or portion of the
sample in the silt and clay size range. This test was conducted in general accordance with ASTM 0...1140.
Percent Organics (Oraanlc Loss on lanltlon) - The amount of organic material in a sample is
determined in this test. The sample is first dried and weighed, then ignited and reweighed. The amount of
organic material is expressed as a percentage.
Bearlna Ratio - In conducting the Laboratory Bearing Ratio (CBR) test, a Modified Proctor
compaction test was first performed on the test sample in order to obtain the maximum dry density and
optimum moisture content of the soil material. Four soil-filled molds made during the compaction test
were then submerged, and completely inundated for a period of 96 hours. Following the saturation
period, the soil-filled molds were penetrated with a 1.95-inch diameter piston at a rate of approximately
0.05 inches per minute. The load applied to the piston at a penetration of 0.1 inches divided by 1000 or at
0.2 inches penetration divided 1500 is the Laboratory bearing Ratio or CBR value. This test was
performed in general accordance to the test methods described in ASTM Designation 0...1883, "Bearing
Ratio of Laboratory Compacted Soils."
Llmerock Bearlna Ratio (LBR) - This test is a measure of the bearing properties of a soil sample
compacted and tested in the laboratory at various densities and water contents. The compacted soil
samples are saturated for a period of 48 hours and than a 1.95 inch diameter piston is pushed into each
soil sample. During the penetration test, the load on the piston and the corresponding deflection of the
soil are recorded. The test results are then plotted graphically and corrected for curve non-linearity. The
corrected unit load at 0.1 inch penetration is divided by 100 to give the LBR percentage. The test results
are presented in the Load-Deflection Curves and summarized on the LBR -vs- Water Content and Dry Unit
Weight -vs- Water Content Sheet in the Appendix.
\'~Iil"'.